SANSKRIT
CO
. R» KALE
[OT!LAL BANAR8IDAS:;3
DELHI u PATNA H VARANASI
HIGHER SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES,
BY
LATE MORESHWAR RAMGHANDRA KALE, B.A.,
Author of the 'Sahityasarasangraha? &c. &c.
MOTILAL BANARSIDASS
DELHI :: PATNA I: VARANASI
Publisher :
Snii clap Lai Jain
Motilal Banarsidass, -,
Bungalow Road,
Jawahar Nagar, Delhi-6.
Printer :
Shantl Lai Jain
Shri Jainendra Press,
Bungalow Road,
Jawahar Nagar, Delhi-6.
1961
By a.rangement with
M/S Gopal Narain & Co.
f+ » \
Books available at :
Motilal Banarsidass, Bungalow Road, Jawahar Nagar,
Post Box 1586, Delhi-6.
Motilal Banarsidass, Nepali Khapra, Post Box 75, Varanasi.
Motilal Banarsidass, Bankipur, Patna-4 .
PREFACE
The present Grammar has been prepared with a
view to meet the growing wants of the Indian University
students. The University examiners have been, of late,
evincing a desire to exact a more thorough knowledge of
the obscurer and therefore more difficult parts of Sanskrit
Grammar, than was required formerly. In fact, a student
of the present day, with Sanskrit for his second language,
must, if he wishes to pass his University Eaxminations
with credit, acquire more than a general knowledge of
the various departments of Sanskrit Grammar, while none
of the grammars now accessible to the Indian student,
with the exception of one or two, supply him with the
necessary information on the various topics discussed in
the original Sanskrit works. Dr. Bhandarkar's books,
though ingeniously sketched and^Jadmirably executed, are
admittedly meant to introduce a student to the vast field
of Sanskrit Grammar. Dr. Kielhorn's Grammar aims more
at brevity and perspicuitv than at fullness of treatment
with conciseness. Prof. Whitney's grammar is too elabo-
rate, and therefore too high for the ordinary student. Prof.
Monier Williams' grammar and others, though excellent
in themselves, are expressly written for European students
and are more suited to them than to the Indian students.
I have, therefore, done my best to bring the present
Grammar upto the requirements of the high standard.
Now, a few words on the scope and arrangement of the
work and I will conclude. As remarked by Dr. (Now Sir)
Bhandarkar* "Grammar was not an empiric study with
Panini and the other ancient grammarians of India." In
fact in the hands of the ancient Grammarians of India,
Sanskrit Grammar rose to the dignity of a science and must
"Introduction to the 3rd Ed. of the 2nd Book of Sanskrit.
> ii
be studied as such. To quote the words of the learned
Doctor again "its study possesses an educational value of
the same kind as that of Euclid and not much inferior to
it in degree. For to make up a particular from the mind
of the student has to go through a certain process of
synthesis." To split up, therefore, a general rule of the
ancient Indian grammarians into a number of the
praticular cases it comprehends, as is done by some
modern writers on Sanskrit grammar, is not to build up
but to destroy, not to simplify the difficulties of the
student but to embarrass him. For a Grammar, then, to
be practical and correct, in my humble opinion, it must
be based on indigenous words understood and studied in
their genuine scientific spiiit. In writing the various
chapters of this book (except the one on the 'Conjugation
of Verbs') I have closely followed Panini as explained
by Bhattoji Dikshit (the Ka^hika of Vamana being also
occasionally referred to). Many of the rules given are
translations of the Sutras of Panini, much matter being
thus compressed into a small compass. The original Sutras
where necessary, are given in foot-notes as help to
memory. Sandhis and declensions are very fully treated.
Compounds which play such an important part in Sanckrit
literature, and which, yet, are very summarily disposed
of in many grammars, have received special attention,
almost everything in the Siddhanta Kaumudi being
included. The formation of feminine bases which is not
considered separately in other grammars has been treated
of here in a separate chapter (VI). The seventh chapter
deals with the Taddhita affixes (i. e. affixes forming
secondary nominal ba&es) which, for the convenience of the
student and the occassional referer, have been arranged
here in an alphabetical order, each followed by a number
of the derivatives formed by it. The question of gender
which so much perplexes the foreigner has been dealt
with in the eighth chapter, while the ninth treats of
"Indeclinables." The first nine chapters thus form what
may be called the first part of the book, in as much as
they deal with all that relates to the noun (declinable
and indeclinable) But a special feature of the pres nt
Grammar is the chapter on the 'Conjugation of Verbs/
No part of Sanskrit Grammar is more difficult and
iii
perplexing and therefore more calculated, to tire out the
patience of the young student, than the conjugation of
Verbs. ' It is, therefore, written with a special attention
to th3 student's difficulties. The general rules given are
amply illustrated by example. Almost all the roots
which are likely to puzzle the student in conjugating
them in a particular tense or mood have been fully
conjugated. In the eleventh chapter, all the verbs which
change their pada when preceded by particular preposi-
tions are given in an alphabetical order with illustrations
where necessary. Two more chapters, one on syntax and
the other on prosody, have also been added. The chapter
on syntax contains almost everything given in the first
2G chapters of Prof. Apte's 'Guide to Sanskrit Composi-
tion,' the same original having been followed by the both.
The chapter on prosody is based on the Chhanclomanjari
and the Vrittaratnakara. The book closes with a list of
verbs (added at the suggestion of my publishers) contain-
ing almost all the roots in Sanskrit and giving the 3rd
pers. sing, in the important tenses and moods.
Thus it will be seen that I have spared no pains to
make the book as useful and as complete as possible.
Also such of the technical terms used in original Sanskrit
Grammars as the student always meets with in Sanskarit
commentaries, are given in their proper places with their
explanations.
In writing this Grammar, I have occasionally used
Monier Williams's, Dr. Kielhorn's and Whitney's gram-
mars to ail of whom I make ample acknowledgements.
My special thanks are due to Dr. Bhandarkar whose two
books of Sanskrit were my chief guide in writing out the
chapter on the 'Conjugation of Verbs,' and to the late
Prof Apte to whose excellent 'Guide to Sanskrit Com-
position,' I am indebted for some of the illustrations
given in tha Thirteenth chapter. I have also to thank
my friend Mr. IJUdhavacharya Ainapure for his occasional
help and for the pains he took in preparing for this
Grammar the list of Verbs added at the end and carrying
it through the press.
This being th? first attempt of the Author to bring
into one volume che various departments of Sanskrit
iv
Grammar as full and as concisely as possible, the Author
hopes that the public will take an indulgent view of the
work, and pardon him for any of the inaccuracies,.
mistakes of typography, &c., that might have crept in
notwithstanding his best care. It is a sufficient excuse
for these to say that the whole volume was written and
carried through the press in less than a year. Before
concluding I have also to thank Mr. Vinayaka Narayana,
Proprietor of the firm of Messrs. Gopal Narayen & Co.,
my publishers of this Grammar, for the care with which
he passed the sheets through the press.
Lastly I beg to say that I shall be very grateful for
any corrections and suggestions that may be sent to me by
my indulgent readers and critics and will try to profit by
them if the book reaches a second edition.
1894.
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER. PAGE.
I. The Alphabet ... ... ... 1
II. Rules of Sandhi :- ... ... 12
1 Svarasandhi ... ... ... 12
2 Halsandhi ... 22
3 Visargasandhi ... ... ... 28
III. Subanta or Declension of nouns, substantive
and adjective ... ... ... 32
1 Bases ending in vowels (Section I) ... 34
2 Bases ending in consonants (Section II)... 54
3 Irregular bases ... ... ... 65
4 Words of irregular declension ... 82
IV. Pronouns and their Declension ... ... 87
V. Numerals and their Declension ... ... 102
VI. Degrees of Comparison ... ... HO
VII. Compounds ... ... ... 113
1 Dwandwa or copulative compounds ... 115
2 Tatpurusha or the Determinative com-
pounds ... ... ... 121
3 Karmadharaya or the Appositional com-
pounds ... ... ... 133
4 Upapada compounds ... ••• 144
5 Bahuvh! or Attributive compounds ... 147-
6 Avyayibhava or the Adverbial compound 1 6fr
7 General rules applicable to all compounds 16&
8 Other changes in connection with com-
pounds .., ... ... 171
VIII. Formation of Feminine Bases ... ... 180
IX. Secondary Nominal Bases derived by the addi-
tion of the Taddhita or Secondary affixes. 194
2
CHAPTER PAGE
X. Gender ... ... ... ... 219
XI. Avyayas or Indeclinables .-, ... 223
1 Prepositions ... ... ... 224
2 Adverbs ... ... ... 228
3 Particles ... 230
4 Conjunctions ... ... ... 231
5 Interjections ... ... ... 231
XII. Conjugation of Verbs ... ... ... 233
1 Active Voice (Section I) ... ... 235
(a) Roots with unchangeable Bases (1st,
4th, 6th and 10th classes) ... ... 24]
(b) Roots of the 1st, 4th, 6th and 10th
classes which from their bases irregu-
larly ... 248
(c) Roots with changeable bases (2nd, 3rd,
5th, 7th, 8th and 9th classes) ... 254
2 General or,
Non-conjugational tenses and moods ... 295
The two futures and conditional
(a) First Future ... ... ... 298
(b) Second future and conditional ... 300
(c) Perfect ... ... ... 306
(1) Irregular bases ... ... 321
(2) Periphrastic Perfect ... 329
(d) Aorist ... ... ... 332
1st Variety ... ... ... 332
2nd „ ... ... ... 333
3rd „ ... ... ... 340
6th „ ... ... ... 344
7th „ ... ... ... 354
4th „ ... ... ... 347
5th . 352
CHAPTER PAGE
(e) Bencdictivc ... ... ... 356
Section II ... ... ... 359
(a) Passive ... ... ... 359
(b) Non-conjugational tenses and moods ... 364
1 Perfect ... ... ... 364
2 Aorist ... ... ... 365
2 Derivative Verbs (Section III) ... 367
(a) Gausals ... ... ... 368
(b) Desideratives ... ... ... 376
(c) Frequentatives ... ... 3S4
(d) Nominal Verbs ... ... 392
XIII. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada ... 399
XIV. Verbal Derivatives or Primary Nominal
Bases ... ... ... ... 416
XV. Syntax : — ... ... ... 468
1 Concord ... ... ... 470
2 Government ... ... ... 475
3 Pronouns ... ... ... 508
4 Participles ... ... ... 510
5 Tenses and moods ... ... 518
6 Indeclinables ... ... 532
APPENDIX I :-Prosody ... ... 1
1 Samavrittas ... ... ... 3
2 Vishama Vrittas ... ... 24
APPENDIX II :— ... ... ... 24
Dhatukosha ..15-61
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE WORK.
OF THE NAMES OF THE WORKS AND GRAMMATICAL, &C.
Amara. — Amarakosh.
Bhatt. or Bhatti.— Bhatti-
kavya.
Bh.— Bhartrihari. Ni. Sa.—
Nitisataka. Vai. Sa.
Variagyasataka.
Dev.-Devibhagavata Purana
Hit. — Hitopadesa.
Kad.— Kadambari.
Katya — Katyayana.
D. Kav— Dandin's Kavya-
darsa
Kir. — Kiratarjuniya.
Mai. — Malavikagnimitra.
Mb. or Mah. Bhas. — Maha-
bhashya of Patanjali.
Mah. Bhar. — Mahabharata.
Meg. — Meghaduta.
Pan. — Panini's Sutras.
Rag. — Raghuvamsa of Kali-
dasa.
Ram.ch. — Ramacharita.
Sak. — Abhijnanasakuntala
of Kalidasa.
Sid. Kau. — Sidhantakau-
mudi, Bhattoji Dik-
shita's commentary on
Panini's siitras.
&c. &c. &c.
Sis.— Sisupalavadha.
Uttar. — Utcararamacharita.
Vop. or Bop. — Vopadeva.
A- or Atm — Atmanepada.
AbL— Ablative.
Ace. — Accusative.
Adj. — Adjective.
Adv. — Adverb.
Avy. — Avyayibhava.
Bah. — Bahuvrihi.
Cau. — Causal.
Cf. — Compare.
Comp.— Compound.
Dat.— Dative.
Den. — Denominative.
Des. — Desiderative.
Freq . — Frequantative.
Indecl. — Indeclinable.
Inst. — Instrumental.
Loc. — Locative.
Nom. — Nominative.
P. or Par. — Parasmaipada.
Pass.— Passive.
Pot. P. -Potential participle.
P.P.-Past Passive participle.
Pres.p. — Present participle.
Pron. — Pronouns.
£c. &c' &c.
A
HIGHER
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
Chapter I.
THE ALPHABET.
§ 1. Sanskrit, or the refined language, is the language of
Devas or gods * and the alphabet in which it is written is
called Devanagari, or that- em ployed in the cities of gods.
(a) The correct name for the Sanskrt alphabet is Daiva-
nagari sometimes abbreviated into Ndgari, Perhaps in the
word Devanagari we have a history of the times when the
Aryans entered and settled in Northern India. The Aryans
who were much fairer in colour than the aborigines of India
are the Devas referred to in the name Devanagari ( from r%g^to
shine, those of a brilliant complexion ); and Nagari means the
Aryan settlements within the precincts oi which the sacred
language was spoken.
(6) The Sanskrit language is generally written in different
parts of the country, in that alphabet which is used for the
Vernacular ( e. g. Bengali, Marathi &c. ). That character, how-
ever, in which the earliest monuments are written ( such as the
inscriptions containing the edicts of Asoka ) and which is
employed throughout Upper India is generally considered to
be the real Devanagari.
* Wf »f 'TIT ?Cr ^TCFifUcqrai qf fffi: I Dandin,
2 SANSKRIT GBAMMATI. [ § 2
^ 2. The Devanagari alphabet consists ot forty -two letters
or varnas, nine vowels or svaras, and thirty-three consonants
or vyanjanag.*
(a) These express nearly every gradation of sound, and
every letter stands for & particular and invariable sound.
Note : — This explains why there are no names, as in Greek -
for the different letters oi the alphabet.
* Thus given by Pamni : —
Vowels:— gr^or | =s<£^ i <raft^ 1 ^fr^ |
Consonants :— U^f? I «5or \ 5W4944 I
The alphabet, it will be seen, is divided into 14 sections by
Panini, which ara called SivasutraQi, or the sutras revealed by
Siva. Each section ends with an indicatory letter called ' ^ '
which is not to be counted among the letter^ of the alphabet.
These " Its » serve an important; purpose in Sanskrit grammar
as they enable the grammarians to express several letters, or
groups of letters, in a very convenient and condensed form.
For any letter, with the following fc^ added to it, is not only
expressive of itself but of all letters that intervene between it
and this ^ 5 e. g. aqqr means sr, ? , 7, f^ means f , 3-, s^, ^ &c.
Similarly 373^ means technically the whole alphabet, sr^ any
vowel, and fw any consonant; qtn; » semivowel, fsr a soft con-
sonant, *£T a hard consonant, 3^ a soft unaspirate, 55^ a soft
aspirate &o. Each of these significant tetins is technically
caUed a < n?qr^R'.
Since ehort vowels include the long and the protracted vowels
( See § 3. a. ) another ^ (<r' is generally employed to mark a
s.°'
THE ALPHABET.
§ 3. The nine primary vowels consist of five simple vowels
•viz. 3r, f, 7t ^ and (g, and four diphthongs viz. <*> tir,
aft and aft.
(a) A vowel may be zg*? or short. ?rro or long, 6 u TO- or
protracted ( also called prolated by some ) according , <> the
time required to prononnoe it. * The vowels are thus div "'
into—
(1) Short vowels— 3T a, f \, ^ u, ^ r, 55, 1 ;
(2) Long vowels— 3cr &, H 3T *> ^ ? e, ^ ai, aft o, aft
an; and.
(3) Protracted vowels aft ^ § 3, | ^ f 3, 37 3, * =*• ^ r 3
c5 ^ 1 3, if ^ e 3, ^ ^ ai 3, ^r ^ o 3, and aft ^ an 3.
JV. 5. — As the Plata or protracted vowels are not commonly
to be met with in classical Sanskrit, the vowels are usually
given as thirteen, represented by the thirteen signs given above
under (1) and (2).
(b) Eaoh of these vowels may be again of two kinds, arg .
^lf%<fc or nasalised, and 3H«HI1%^ or without a nasal sound.!
(e) Vowels are also further discriminated into 3<flrt or
acute, <H^M or grave, and fCTTO or circumflex, g^nr is
particular vowel : e. g. 3f means 3T, HT &°d 3TT v, but 37^ means
3f ( of six kinds ) only; so f^ means f and nothing ebe.
* 3FR&\Z$ ^$§yr: I Pan. I. 2. 27. The crowing of the cock
in the morning represents in its three stages these three kinds
of vowels. The time- required to pronounce a short vowel is
called a matra. A long vowel hat two inatr^s and a Plut*
wowel three.
t «OTr^*^*TT%qr. Pan. I. 1. 8.
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
[
that which proceeds from the upper part of the vocal organs,
3ta<"M that which proceeds from their lower part, while **ftft
arises out of a mixture of these two.* But these are ignored
'in classical Sanskrit. They are marked only in Vedic works:
the Udattn is left unmarked; the Anudatta is marked with a
horizontal line underneath; and Svarita has a perpendicular
stroke above it. e. g. <& \ *ffa'3T:, &c. Bg. V. 61. 2
&c. Bg. X. 78. 4.
|r: &a* Bg. X. 145. 4.
Thus there are eighteen different modifications of each of
the vowels gr, f , 3-, SR- , and twelve of ^, <r, q;, aft and sft. for
there is no long 1 and the last four have not their correspond-
ing short vowels.
§ 4. The consonants are divided into spars' a or mutes
C those involving a complete closure or contact and not an ap-
proximate one of the organs of pronunciation ), Antastha ( or
intermediate ». «. the Semivowels, ) and ushman or sibilants.
These are represented by thirty-three syllabic signs arranged
as below : —
f (1) ?F^f of ^e group $— ^ k,^;kh, IT g, g
mutes «
9, ^ ^h
or the group
srn.
(3) ^* °r th° gr°Up *-* *' ^ ^b' ^ ^ ^ ^h^
- V'
(4) ?W^ or the group g — ^ t, u th, ^ d, vr
(5) wJ or the group 3— q^ p, qjr pb, ^ b, JT
bh, ^ m.
: I
: I
: I Pan. 1. 2. 29, 31.
:THE ALPHABET.
These are also called the five classes designated as
kavarga, Tavarga, Tavarga ^ and Pavarga respectively.
(b) Semivowels - £ y, ^ r, 5^ 1, » v.
(e) Sibilants— ——IT s if sh, ^ a.
(d) Sonant Aspirate — j[ h.
Besides these we have two more characters occurring in the
v eda, viz. 55- and 553- (often substituted for i" and *; as fgfr for
|%> Jfef> for jftf* &c.). In Marathi 5? is generally substi-
tuted for the final & of Sanskrit words.
§ 5. The first two letters of the five classes and the sibi-
lants are called surds or hard Consonants. The rest are called
sonants or soft consonants.
§ 6. In addition to the characters given above there are
in Sanskrit two nasal sounds : — the one called Anvsvara, is
denoted by ' i. «. a dot placed above the letter after which it
is to be pronounced, e. g. q»; the other, called Anunasika is
•denoted by * t. e. a dot within a semi-circle placed above the
letter after which it is to be pronounced e. g. *J.
(a) And a sort of hard breathing is known as Visarga (gene-
rally called Visarjaniya by Sanskrit grammarians). It if
denoted by the sign : «'. e. two vertical dots placed after tne
letter after which it is to be pronounced. In pronunciation it
is a harder aspirate than £. The Visarga is not an original
-character but only a substitute for a final ^ s or ^ r.
(b) Jihvdmuliya ( fSrgrqigfrr ) and Upadhm&niya (
are terms given to a sort of Semi-Visarga, when pronounced
before ^» o^, and 7 <*r respectively. It is written symbolically
SANSKEII GRAVMAB.
[§7-8
as ^. These may be regarded as the spirants of Kavarga and
Pavarta respectively.
§ 7. Some consonants are pronounced with a slight as-
piration and are designated as Alpa-praila, while others which,
are pronounced with a stronger aspiration are call- d Maha*
prana. The first and third letters of each class, the nasals
and the semi-vowels belong to the first class; the rest belong
to the second class. For the sake of convenience the first and
tflird letters of each class are sometimes called "nnaspirates."
§ 8. In the following table is given a complete classifica-
tion of these letters according to the organs with which they
are pronounced.
(a) The organs of pronunciation are the five pares situated
in the mouth, viz., the throat, the palate, the roof or upper
part of the palate, the teeth and the lips..
Note. — In the following table the nether stroke (see § a 10
below) is omitted. It should be supposed to be present.
The Five Classes.
Unas-
pirate.
Aspi-
rate.
Unas-
pirate.
Aspi-
rate.
Na-
sals.
S
Simple
vowels
St. Lg.
Dip.
thongs.
Gutturals.
Palatals.
Linguals.
Dentals.
Labials.
* f though not a semivowel is put here as it is a guttural.
§ 9-iO ] THE ALPHABET. 7
This can be more easily remembered from its Sanskrit form
which is as follows : —
The linguals are called cerebrals in som^ European Gram-
mars. q- and <£ are both guttural and palatal; aft and aft are
guttural and labial; % is dental and labial. The nose is the
organ of pronunciation of the Anuavara, while the root of
the tongue is that of the Jihv&maliya.
§ 0. Those letters are called ^oj or homogeneous whose
place of pronunciation in the mouth and the effort required to
pronounce them is the same or equal.* Letters which are not
^TToi or similar are called *^OT or heterogeneous.
§ 10. A svara or rowel is that which can be pronounced
without the help of any other letter; a vyanjana or consonant
is that which is pronounced with the help of a vowel. The
consonants, therefore, are written with a slanting nether stroke
to denote their imperfect character.
(a) Hence the consonants are given, in the system of F&nini,
frith an sr added to them for the sake of pronunciation.
(b) As already remarked, there are no separate names for
* 4*4 1*4 WH s*rorn i Fan. L 1. 9.
8 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 11-12
the letters of the Sanskrt alphabet, except the two mentioned
before, viz. Anusvara and Visarga, and Kefa which is the
Dame sometimes given to ^. The word gnT is therefore used
ae an affix to denote a particular letter; e. g. ar^Tt the letter
3T ', 3RKTC the letter < ^ >, &c.
§ 11. A vowel by itself or a consonant, simple or conjunct,
with a vowel added to it, is called an Akthara or a syllable.
§ 12. The form* which the vowel signs assume when added
to consonants and the changes which some letters undergo
when compounded are given below, under (a) and (b).
(a) 3? added to a consonant is denoted by the rein ova I of
the nether stroke; as 3? +37=91 ka. The remaining vowela
when compounded with a consonant become r, p , *r> ^ > ^> c> ft» t£>
%%>,1, respectively; as ^+an=^fea,^+ft=foki; similar-
ku., < k«, fr kr, kr', kl. % ke, |f kai, ^ ko,
Exception : — ^ when following upon ^ remains unchanged,
*>^t.
(b) In compounding consonants they should be taken in the
order in which they are pronounced; the last consonant takes
a vowel, the preceding ones generally losing their nether
and perpendicular strokes when combined e. g. t*na ought to
be written as rfqr» *?na as <mr, &c. Some letters, however,
change their form slightly and others entirely, wnen com-
pounded with other consonants; e. g. ^r Ipa; 9 tra$ ^ Sga; IT
gra, &c.; fr immediately preceding another conscnant ( or the
vowel ^r ) is denoted by the sign - written above the xollow-
ing consonant as ^ rka. It is then neceesarily called a
5 12 ] THE ALPHABET. 9
( c ) In the conjuncts ^ ( ^ -f ^ ) ksh, and JET ( ^+ >l, ) jn*>
the component elements are scarcely discernible.
( d ) A few consonants are written in two ways; e. <j. T3(, ^f
tra; =*r, ?fi, kra; ?q, qgr, stha; ^, <&t, kta; ?sr, ^», stra.
( « ) The following are the principal conjunct consonants :-
$• k-ka, ^or k-kiia, ^fzr k-kya, ^?r k-kha, ^> k-ta, ^T k-tha.
<f?^ k-tya, ^?r or ^ k-tra, ^€^ k-t-va, sp^r k-th-na, & k-na,
^T k-n-ya, *T k-ma, ^ir k-ya, ?F or gj k-ra, ^ k-la, ^ k-va,
$y k-sha, ^«r k-sh-na, ^IT k-sh-ma, $q k-sh-ya, ^ k-sh-va.
<PT kh-na, ?s^ kh-ya, ?jf kh-ra.
n| g-dha, ?r g-na, rq g-ya, q g-'a, ^^ g-'-ya, »W g-la, T^ gya,
fT gh-na, *n?JT gn-n-ya, E»T gh-ma, ^ gh-ya, 57 gh-ra, z* gh-va.
5: il-ka, -^ Il-k-ta, ? n-k-sha, ? n-k-sh-va, -g Q-kha, ?
^T ^r i&\
D-kh-ya, jp D-ga, ^ n-gha, ^ D- gh-ya, g n-gh-ra, ^ D-ha, 5:
D-ma, ^PQ D-ya.
5-9h-ra, « ^-^h-va, «sr §-na, «»r ?-ma,
^T H»7 5fT j-jha, 33- j-na, ^ j-n-ya, ^*T j-ma,
^ j-va.
^ n-$a, 3^ n-^ha, ^ n-ja.
^ t-ka, ?• t-ta, sr t-va, <RT th-ya, 7 th-ra, ^p d-ga, | d-gha, |
d-ma, VET d-ya, ^r dn-ya; ^ dh-ra.
a% n-ta, oy n-tha, <rg- n-da, ay n-dha, oof n-na, WIT n-ma, c^
p-ya, o^ n-va.
?^T t-ka, ^SF t-k-ra, ^ *-*», «W t-t-ya, ^r t-t-ra, TT t-t-v»,
nr t-tha, ^r t-na, ^7^ t-n-ya, ^ t-pa, ^ t-ma, r*^ t-in-ya, ?q
10 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 12
t-ya, ^ or -ET t-ia, wr or •&? t-r-yu, ^ t-v»,
cS^f t-8-n-ya, *w t-9-ya.
vr th-na, v* th-ya, v% th-va.
IT d-ga, 3- d-gha, 5- d-da, si d-ya, ^ d-dha, ;gif d-dh-yar
:g- d-dh-va, 3^ d-na, % d-ba, •% d-bra, y d-bha, ^ij d-bh-ya,
^ d-ma, 5 d-ra, gj d-i-ya, y d-va, ^?r d-v-ya, % d-v-ra.
«T dh-na, VRT ^b-n-ya, v*r dh-ma, UQT dh-ya, ^ dh-ra, v^
dh-rya, v^ dh-va.
79 n-ta, 5«r n-t-ya, ^ n-t-ra, ?f n-da, ^ n-d-ra, ^ u-dba,
n-dh-ya, +% n-dh-ra, n n-na, ?g n-p-ia, wi n-ma, wr n-ya-
n-ra, ^ »-sa.
ff p-ta, ?c^ t-p-ya, sr p-na, cq p-pa, qfy p-ma, c^ p-ya, 5? p-ra?
p-la, c^ p-va, c^ p-sa, c^ p-s-va.
**T b-ja7 ^ b da, *q b-dha, ^ b-na, «? b-ba, «H b-bha, +q b-ya
«T bh-na, ^ bh-y a, ^ bh- ra, ^ bh-va.
^T m-na, *q- m-pa, zsr m-p-ra; 9^ m-ba, x>y m-bba, 77 m-ya, 5j-
•n-ra, 3. m-la, *^ m-va
«f y-ya, ix y-'a, c^ y-va.
gf r-ka, ^ r-kha, ^ r-ga, &o.; $ r-k-sha, »?S r-g-ya, ^,.
r-gh-ya, f4 r-t-ya, &c.; ^r r-k-sh-ya, ^ r-tt-ya, ^ r-t-s-ya^
^ r-d-dh-a.
93F 1-ka, ?<r 1-pa, Fif 1-ma, c*r 1-ya, ^ 1-la, 5^r 1-™.
»T v-na, RT v-ya, JT -v-ra, s^ v-va.
V s$a, «^ s-^ya. ?r s-na, -^ s-ya, M s-ra, *ir s-r-ya, JT iia;
^ s-va, ^| sv-ya, ^j s-sa.
^ ah-la, g^r sh-tya, ^ sh-t-ra, gq sh-t.r-ya, j eh-t-va.
g" sh-th-ra, g^ sh th-ya, cof sh-na, co^ ah-n-ya, «q* sh-p»,
«^ sh-p-ra, Of sh-ma, ^ eh-ya, «^ sb-va.
§ 13-15 ]
THE ALPHABET.
II
s-ka
s-kh-e, w s-ta, &r s-t-ya,
or
s-t-ra,
s-t-va, w s-tha, f* s-na, **r s-n-ya, *r s-pa, ^ s-pha, w s-ma,.
*r s-ya, IT «-*a, w «-*a, w •-»».
}gr h-ns, £ h-na, gr ^-ma, ^y r-ha, f h-ra, |{ h-la, g h-va.
Sometimes five consonants are found in conjunction : e. g.
^5$ r-t-s-n-ya, ae in frWrj.
§ IS. AB sandhi is of primary importance in Sanskrtr
rirama or pauae c*n be indicated only at the end of a sentence.
The signs of punctuation, therefore, are only two, \ and il
The former is need to mark the close of a sentence or the firut
half of a s'loka or poetical stanza; the latter is employed to
denote the close of a s'loka.
(a) The sign called Avagraha ( and which represents half
3T Ardh&kara ) is generally employed to mark the elision of
short gf after tr or *ffr $ e. g. %^ (%-f grft )> ^Toyt^f^l (
The double mark^s is sometimes nsed to indicate the
elision of 3ff after initial long grr ; fT^T-*-3!T^=?nn66^.
(ft) The mark » is sometimes nsed to show that something.
is omitted, and which is to be understood from the context ;
e. g. afo may stand for aqjsr, osrntf *or ^^^rrsn^'r, &c.
§ 14. Short vowels when followed by a coninnnt c.onsnn***
are said to be prosodially long
§ 15. The vowels 3?, q:, 3TT and the syllables 3R[ aad 3^
are called Gana; the vowels 3fT, ^-, afr and the syllables 3fnr and
^IT^are called Vrddhi*. The Gana and Vrddhi vowels and
syllables thai are substituted for the simple vowels will appear
from the following table : —
Simple V.
Gnna.
Vrddbi.
H
H
MT
f&f
, 1, 2} I, 51,
12 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 16-19
§ 16. The three semivowels zr, JT and ^ are sometimes
nasalised and then they are written with the anunatika sign
over them, as |r, PT, $.
§ 17. The numerical figures in Sanskrt are : —
^ ^, \> V, ^ \, », *, S, o.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0.
These are combined to express larger figures precisely in the
same way as in English; ^x 125, HV° 540, &c.
Chapter II.
RULES OF 8ANDHI.
§ 18. By Sandhi ( from 3^ together, and \n to join ) is
meant the coalescence of two letters coming in immediate
contact with each other.*
(a) Samhitaf or sandhi is necessary in the case of the in-
ternal structure of a padat prepositions and roots joined to-
gether and a compound word ( *rar*T ), while in that of a
sentence •'. 0. in the case of the finals and initials of the different
words in a sentence, it depends on the will of the writer.
I SvABASANDHI, OB THIS COMBINATION OP FINAL AND
INITIAL VOWELS.
§ 19. If a simple vowel, abort or long, be followed by a
I P&n. 1. 4. 109. Samhita is the extreme
contiguity of letters.
t *jffi*q3 ifonsRPrr ^najroiffi: i RRI *rew ^ 5 *n i%w-
U^KT. n Sid. Kau. This couplet gives the rule for the observa-
tion of Sandhi.
§ 20 I RULES OF SANDHI. 13
similar vowel, short or long, the substitute for them both is
the similar long vowel e.g. *^r+3riT:=%rqrfT-i 3T5T + STRfitT;
= arerefr<r> STT+ 3T*T**=tn[T**ff: T%rr + 3TTg^: = foir3T: eager
to gain knowledge; *!?T + ?3r = faT*» 3UT 4- ?^ = 3?<T?£r?n
:=^3?: the strength of the atmy; 3?$
:^pr;r:; ^ 4- cjaRr^ = 5Tf|^T?>: the Ikara pronounced
by the sacrificer (since there is no long <% long 3£ is substituted
for both).
(a) If ^f or ^ be followed by a short *% or c£, short =5- or <%
is optionally substituted for both; f £)<3 + 3£CTr-=it3^lT:> a-n(^
also fir^^^r^: ( videj 23. sec. bm ); so three forms altogether
*raW.-, ftgr^K: and
also
§ 20- When 3^ or 3TT is followed by f , 7? 3t «5> short or
long, the JJOT letter corresponding to the latter takes the place
of both} e. g. %q + 555: = 3^$: Vishnu; qTR-f-i!>^C:=^R5^^ the
great lord; fm + ?*grr = *Hx^jT the wish of Rama;
=T^f^r^ according to wish or desire; fj^-j- ^q^jr: =
friendly instruction; ^or + 3j^: = f>cof[^: Krshoa'a thigh;
3^=11^5**, «?fT-«-3»^: = Wfi^:, ff «OT + *lf%: = ^saTT%: Kr-
shua's prosperity; wp -f ^ft: = ITfT'f : a great sage; ?T^-4-^^TT:
=<T«T?^rf • The /Aora pronounced by you.
(a) If a consonant be followed by homogeneous consonants ,
except the nasals, the semivowels, and f the first of them is
: I Pan. VI. 1. 101.
t *i3 S*rof w. m I ^ ^of ?s ?rr I Vdrttikas on the above.
J 3TT|T»i: I Pan. VI. 1. 86.
14 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [§20
optionally dropped;* 3>wr-t-3Ef|[: =ff«oif%: by the general
rule; then frwr^+s^ + ar + frrr^jwirftj: by tbia rule, the ^ being
-dropped; and also a third form 5«ur^r%: ( vide §22, sec. d.
below ).
(b) A consonant of the first five classes except ^coming
after a semivowel is optionally doubled; so aJffrETf: also be-
comes ««y$K:, (TC&CT?: and ff^&Kv 4 forms altogether.
•v
Exceptions : — Vrddhi substitute takes place in the follow-
ing cases f
(a) When a word ending in 37 is followed by ;$•?, and sr by
3T*» 3»S and grf£; «• 9. ra + 3rS: = S*te:> chief guess (or this
may be the ace. pi. of srgTTTiT a young bull trained to the yoKe);
sr+3T?«~J?fl?: principal reasoning. Similarly sfor: full grown;
snr%:; but nfe^n^ ( &3 3^?r^ is not mentioned in the Sutra ).
(&) 3?^-fgrf^fr=3^f)rf5afr a complete army .J (The change
of ^[ to or^ will be explained further on ).
(c) When ^ is followed by f ^ and %r& both derived from
ik to 8°J e- 9 •**+%*'•=&* '•> one acting wilfully, self willed.
5 Pan. VIII. 4. 65.
I Pan. VI. 1. 89. The first part of the sfitra (mz.
) forms a counter-exception to § 21. a ( which see );
r,> Virtikas on the above Sutra.
t Properly an army consisting of El 870 chariots, as many
elephants, 65610 horse and 109350 foot.
3
3 1 JT^mTR Tsfrsrs^rft ^fn^ ^i^^n: u <T2^n%: ^?^T!%
?5tfTKI!Sf ^ !«i^Il^l?f ^T'n II Maha-Bhar.
Ad. P. II. 2S-26.
§ 20-21 ] RULES OF SANDHI. 15
(d) When 3? is followed by 3^3: and there is an mat. Tat.;
*» gW+*K<1=SWX'' blessed with Lipping ( 5*T ^tcf : >» bnt
rtmrS: very adorable ( ^srssrefi 3t*%ZT ).
(«) When the word ^oi comes after sr, qroa?, q&Hfcj, T*R"
and =ffUT; sr+qt<n=7ro^ , principal debts, so 3fH<UiUI debt for a
calf; %mium ( a debt contracted to liquidate a previous debt )•
^nof: (Name of a country; lit. the country with ten fortresses)^
also ^5iWf ST^T (^- ^^ river into which ten other rivers flow).
(/) When* a preposition ending in 31 is followed by a
•root having an initial •$•; as S<THlt^3ri$=T<n^?n VTgfrtr, but
if the root be a denominative, the Vriddhi is optional;
acts like a bull:
» as the 5^ is long, also sr-<
very much wishes for <£ Ikara; for ^r is grammatically
considered to be similar to 3F
§ 21. When 3^ or 3TT is followed by ^ or ^ and aft or 3*r
'^ and aft are respectively substituted for bothf;
««^r^; ^+qfW=%%1^5^ the majesty of god;
she alone; KT^-}-3TtW= *l*ltaviH medicine against Birth *nd
re-birth; f^rr+a^cgept=f^ftfiicHJif longing for knowledge.
Exceptions : —
(a) { If a preposition ending in 3^ be followed by a root
beginuiDg with qr or aft, q" or aft is substituted; ST-Hf3^=?t3W
quakes very much; ^+3^1$=^^ bums something near;
but if the root be a denominative, vrddhi is optional*
«IIjfl I Pan. VI. 1. 91. ?rr SF^J?^: I Pan. VI. 1. 92.
t t©f% Pao. VI. 1. 88. t ^ «R??R « Pan- VI. 1- 94.
16 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 21
Counter-exception:— If a form of the root f to go, or q^ to
grow, with an initial rj, comes after aj, and <rq- or q^g derived
from fq^ cf the 4th, 6th or 9th conj., after sr, vridhi takes
place; *q + <rTFT = *$rS; 3^ + <WT=3^I?iri ( bat ^-f f*:
3r%ff know; from 3T^ + qY5 which is equal to 3^ -I- 3TT + ?ff ,
not ar^f?; ^r *srn* sr-t-ff%vy^=^f^r^)i xr-fr^:r=^; sending or
directing: sr + trwT.-crqrsq-: a servant. Bat sr?:, sfaf: (from
(b) *When 3j is followed By erg in an indt finite sense, IT is
substitnted for both: ^-fxr9r= 1^5" ^r^f^T where will yon dine
to-day ? ( The place beiug not definitely known); but cftcT
( why; I snail dine at your house ).
(c) f ST followed by aTp^ and 3^ ( P^P- ) is dropped e. g.
(d) tTne vrddhi is optional when the ending 3T of a word
is followed by sfrg a cat, or 3frer the lower lip, in a compound
or
(0) §The final vowel or the final consonant with the pre-
ceding vowel ie dropped in the case of the following words
when followed by certain words in a compound f ; — 37^ the
country of the Sakas + ?^vj a well = 5r^r^:, ^4 name of a
country + 3^:=^^^: ; *j>,& + 3?HT=^2T one who move* from one
mansion to another, a woman of bad character;
Vartik. f 3Tta#T* *>*"• VI. 1. 95.
^RT% m \* § 513^^1135 <N^J ^^T^. Vart.
f And also in the case of an onomatopaeic wording in 3;^
followed by %ft e. g. qj^+fi^srTi?^; but not in the case of
a monosyllabic word «n[ + gi<T = mfKT; an^ when the word is
repeated, only the <^ is optionally dropped, as
or
§ 21-22 ] RULE* OP SANDHI. 17
<*rf bad character; jfm?-l-3Ts*':=*fln»-d: ( the white line left by
the parting of the hair on each aide of the head ); but HT*n*tT.
when the meaning of the word is 'The last line or limit of a
boundary.' *T^+t^=ERriTT wish; so rirtfSMIl the pole of
a plough; 5#T*T; W^ + 3nRll&:=cRT53rT%*- name of the cele-
brated author of the Mahabhasya ( a vast commentary on the
§utras of Panini ); lit. fit to be adored wfth joined hands; or
according to tradition 'who fell down from the bands of a
certain sage as he was offering water to the enn at the time of
Sandhya adoration.' CTT+STl': =*rRlp: an antelope « with a
spotted skin or a kind of bird; but ^RT^f.' one with a beautiful
skin. This is an Akrtiga^a i. «. worcU of similar formation
and requiring grammatical explanation but not actually found
in the gaUa may be classed under it? «. g. jrr£ -f- sjag-: —
( derived from flWT0? ) lit- b°rn °* a dead egg, the sun.
§ 22. When f , y, 35 sinfr-^r, short or long, are followed by
a dissimilar vowel, ^r, ^, 3% aad;?^ are respectively substituted
for them*; e. g. f^ + 3TT f = ??^7f ; g^T-fyn^T:=
adored by the wise. R^-f 3?fr:=RW?- ^e enemy of
Vishnu, qT3+3for-=?TO3T: » portion of the creator;
figure liko thatt)f ^ &c.
06,— Several of the above words may have more £han one
form when combined; e. g, iJ^-f-TrTW;=5^!£+TnTBT.' by the
general rule: —
N. B. The following rule* and the two (a), (6) given
under § 20, though they properly from the subject of the next
section, are given here to avoid confusion. Ordinary students
may pan over these except eec. (i) of the present art
VI. 1. TI.
H. 8. O. 2
18 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 22-23
(a) A consonant except 5, preceded by a vowel, is optionally
doubled, if no vowel follows*; ^5+^qTW-=S¥*prrer: and
(b) When a consonant, exeept a nasal or a semivowel, is
followed by a soft unaspirate or aspirate ( 3rd or 4th letter of
a class ) it i« changed to. the soft unaspirate ( 3rd letter ) of its
elassf ;
(<•) Semivowels, when preceded by a lettei of the first five
classes except --jrara optionally doubled§-, thms
: and ^raM- s-qm^^* -*• s^m*:
^TTW- I Thus there are four forms ultimately,
Similarly ^4- 3rR: =IT^R:. W^rR:, Wf^ft:, and
vrT^+^-^^En^TJandvrr^f^: In f5+3TT^: of course there
is no possibility of any other form.
(d) A consonant except ^, coming after ^ or s preceded by a
vowel is optionally doubledj;*. g. ?f? + 3Tg^>:=^5; + gff3H^;==
: by the general rule-, and optionally 53334313*17: =
: ( Hari's experience ) by this rule; so
and ?r
§ 23. fa) f , s, ^t or cj, short or long, at the end of a word
followed by a dissimilar vowel except in a compound, are optio-
nally not combined, and when so they are shortened if
long x e. 0/xT5£N-3*3r = 5grijnr;r, Vishnu here, and ^rfip 3^; but
r: a horse iu a well, tft^r + tft (a
VIII. 4. 47.
t war TO IT® | Pan. 4. 53. § qojttft % ^r^ Vlft.
t 3T% ^^% I P4n. VIII. 4. 46
X
§ 25-24 | RULES OF SANDHI. 19
(&) 3T» ?> 3" and eg, short or long, at the end of a word
followed by a short ^ , are also optionally not combined, and
when not combined are shortened if long*; e. g. aTRrr 4- 3tfo'' =
TSTPT A Brahmana saint, and flTgr^tRr, ^ffnfflTr«C o£ the seven
sages, and TOftt'fluilH ( a eomp. expression ).
§ 24. 7, 3rr, <t an^ <?r, when followed by a vowel, are changed
to SIT, 3TST, 3Trsr, and 3Tr?^espectivelyt; e. g, ^ + if=^ for
for Vi8hoa}^-»-3^: = 5frir^: A leader;
: =qr^: the purifier t. «. fire.
(a) 7 or ^ at the end of a word and preceded by 37 or grr is
optionally dropped when followed by a vowel or a soft conso
rfT q%; fw*nt + S£=ft*orfir* or
OT: or f«nrr «^a: intent on
getting money ; r-f^?^:=^nj|r^: or ayn Tt^: longing to
tee the preceptor.
Note — Two vowels brought together by the disappearance of
an intervening consonant or visarga do not coalesce.
(b) aft and aft, when followed by a termination beginning
with tr, become 3?? and 3^ respectively {; e. g. if)>+ V=1«7^
produced from a cow as milk, ghes &c. ;ft -I- ^"rr^rsq^ accessible
by a boat, navigable.
N. E. This rale holds good, in the case of roots, only whan
the afr or 3?r is brought in by virtue of a termination; x 0.
fit to be lopped off. 3Wa5 + 4
which ought necessarily to be cat off,
(c)The 3ft ot the word if)1 is also changed to 37^ when followed
VII. 1. 1J7,
t <RIOTTTO: Pan. VI 1. 78. § £ft: *xvs$w \ Pan. VIII 3.19
J m^r ft Jif'fr i x «nj?tw8W^r^ i P*9. VI. 1. 79. 80.
20 SANSKBIT GRAMMAR. [ § 24-26
by the word $fft ( in the Veda and ) in ordinary language when
it means a particular measure of length*;*- 9- Tagli: four miles.
(d) The q- of the roota f$r and i$r ia changed to ^ when fol-
lowed by the q* of the potential participle indicating cap ability f
c. 9- f$r+*T=$T+*r=8TW what can be reduced; so^w what can
be conquered; but ^5 ^g tftnf $nf ( what is fit to be removed
but may not be so ) trpT, 5T*T ( what ought to be curbed but
which it may not be always possible to curb as )
§ 25. When q- or aft at the end of a word is followed by 37
the latter merges into the former § and the sign 5 is sometimes
written in its place; «. g. f^+3pr=ffc&Y protect, Oh Hari;
(a) JIf the word iff, ending in 9ft? be followed by 37, the 3?
is Optionally retained, and if by a vowel, sw is optionally
substituted for 3?T; »It+3nr^=»ThW[> *fhwn8C and *nmn* a
multitude of cows or chief among cows; but if it be followed by
and ar$r it recessarily changes its aft to sra; ift+f^^
an excellent bell; TOTtgr: & lattice-window, similarly.
§ 26. No sandhi is possible in the case of x —
1 What are called the Pragrnya exceptions; vis.— •
(a) When a dual from (whether of a noun, pronoun or verb)
in f , 37, or o;^-; e. g. ffV q«ftj f%^ frfh nf ^^5 <T^ I«iV-
I V^rtikai.
t ^^rjftqt smft | PdQ, VI. 1. 81.
N § *& qfRfWt i Pa?. VI. 1. 109. { tfi ftmwr fr. i
PaD. VI. 1. 122-24.
PaD. VI. 1. 125.
26 ] RULES OP SANDHI. 21
(fc) When f or 37 follows the ^ of the pronoun sf^* «. 9?
anft f 5TT: these lords- 3^ 3tran% the two sit down.
Ob. The <£ of the Vedic forms gufir and 5** also doefl not
blend with a following vowel ( ^t I Pan- 1. *• 13. ); «. 0. 3T^
r &e. Rg. IV. 49. 4. Similarly a Vaidic word hav-
ing the sense of the loc. ( but not ending in the termination of
the loc. ) remains unaffected by a following vowel; ^ffrift *Tftt
ari^fSre: &c. Bg. X. 12. 3. where ifKV stands for ifNfa the
loo. term, being dropped by g^fg^F Pan; VII. 1. 30.
0 («) § Particles consisting of a single vowel, except sn mean-
ing * a little, or a limit ' exclusive or inclusive or used as
a preposition, when followed by a vowel, e. g. f f?jf Oh India,
T TO5T, 3ff <rf S *F*% ah, you think BO; but
( a little warm ) &c.
(d) When an indeclinable ends in 3?t} 0. g.
'final aft of a noun the vocative case optionally combines
wlien followed by f|«n «• $• fWfr ff5r=f^orftm, an
N. B. All these vowete which do not blend with others,
and sometimes the words in which they occur are technically
called sp£5f
II. and pluta vowels; «. g. irjf ^cor ^ 3I5T >Tt«IfT« Coma
Krshna ; here is the cow gM«ing.
A vow«l becomes pluta under the following uitpumstances:-|
( 1 ) The last vowei of a sentence uttered in reply to a
salutation from a male person othor than a 8xudra when the
. 1. 11. 12.
I tf5£gt 5Tl^^R^?Tra^i^ I Pan. I. 14-H
T: I HHrfw^8& » P^&D. VIII. 2. 82-88.
^r^i Vartikas on the 4atter
tra. { ^ l%fR^tt^l» I P^« VIII. 2 84-86.
SANSKEIT GRAMMAR [ § 26-28
name or tfee" family is actually mentioned* e. g.
\ live long, O Devadatta, which is said in reply to
** 3Tft*T3[*r fS^fJ " I, Devadatta, bow to you; but the last
* in « *rt 3ff5«RCr *& *nft" or in 3TT5««r^T% is not pluta, for
in the 1st we have the name of a female and in the 2nd no
name at all.
But if the sentence end in the word tff : or in the name of
a Kshatriya or Vaishya the -last vowel becomes optionally
pluta e. y. au^m3* ifo W or * ^ WSWWfrWlhc or 9* ^ ^
srrs^f^r^ft^sr^n^cr or ^ ^ i
(2) The final vowel of a sentence addressed from a distance
to a person; and that of the particles % and % used in such a
sentence; e. g. fn* (3*^*9* , % *TR; WT; t \
§ 27 The particle g-, preceded by a letter of the fiwt five
classes except 3^ and followed by any vowel, is optionally
changed to a;*; f%g &$ i%^rf^[ and f^ ^ (by § 26 c. ).
II. HALSANDHI, OB THE COALESCENCE OP FINAL CONSONANTS
WITH VOWELS AND CONSONANTS.
§ 28 Wfien ^ or a consonant of the dental class comes in
contact with: —
(a) t$r or a consonant of the palatal class, the correspond-
ing letter of the ktter class is substituted for the former, and
5T for CT
Rama colkcts: ^tH-f%9[=^n%^ Reality and knowledge;
3ro"=:= WlffoSra Be yon victorious, Oh Krshna.
Exception :-(!) '"Dentals coming aftercare not changed into
the corresponding palatals; e. g. f%%r: that which spreads
lustre;
Pan. vill. 3-38.
I Pan. VIII. 4, 49 1 44, 41:
§ 28-31 ] BTTLES OF SANDHI. 23
(b) w or a consonant of the lingual class, 3 is substituted for
^ and the corresponding letter of the latter class for the
former; nw+TO^Tm^TO: R&nia who is sixth.
Rama goesj
A commentary jon that;
OhKrshna, thou
one who pounds.
Exception — *(1) If a letter of the lingual class coming at tie
end of a word be followed by ^ or a letter of the dental class,
the ^ as well as the dentals except the ST of srp^, JTf frT and 5f*rfr
remain unaffected; ^7 + ^^:=^!^: six good men} ( ees
eleo § 30. ); ^-f ff:=^?ff these lixj but £| ( since the 5^ of f^is
not at the end of a word ) he praises. So qporeffl Ninety-six,
WGririf: six towns; but ^f^+ffST^flffei*^ abundance of
ghee; as the exception excludes ?r.
§ 29. If a letter of the group 3^ be followed by qr^it does not
substitute its corresponding ^gual[; ^+^s-: = *i?qe>: sixth
good man.
§ 30. If a consonant; except ^ or *r, coming at the end of a
word; be followed by a nasal, the ncsal of its class is optionally
substituted for it}; <r^+s^:=<r^gro7: acd
(sec§ 22 sec. ft.) this Murari;
: six months.
N. B. If the nasal belong to a termination the change is
necessary; ?f?m^ that alone; f%rRraf mere knowledge. *nF +
Unrrr^iiFHq- I The word gj$ ^rq- ( gee Rag. IV. 22 ) is
irregularly formed.
§ 31. A letter of the dental class, followed by ^ is changed
* * T^pffifR^!^ I P&n. VIII. 4. 42.
Vdrt.
t«t:(^. Paja. VIII. -4. 43.
I Pan. VIII. 4. 45.
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§31-36
to w, the nasalised f£ taking the place of ^
the destruction of thatj re^ + t%^=f^fWr%«Tef » learned
man writes.
§ 32. The ^ of *srr and *<TP^is changed intoqr when after the
preposition 35t»3^^^ = ^+*3n^=SCWn* and 33[«*JT^
( see. £ 20. a ), and then g^jfTO, ^f^^Tf^ rising up; similarly
and gr?$t|5Wf3 upholding.
§ 33. ^coming after any of the first four letters of a olass is
optionally changed to the soft aspirate ( 4th letter ) of that
olata}; *rsr + 5K:==*nrfft: (see 6. underg 22;, and by this <*rrerR:
T 5TT- ) the possessor of speech, Brhaspati.
§ 34. Any consonant, except a nasal or a semi-vowel, is
changed to the first of its class, when followed by a hard
consonant, and to the first or third when followed by nothing;
£ 35. sj preceded by a word ending in any of the first four
letters of a class and followed by a vowel, a semi-vowel, a nasal
or ^,18 optionally changed to ^-r «. ^.<n[-*-%!f:=<T^+fiRr:»aud
?f? + fOT.S and then ?[?!+%*:, and ?T« + flrf: by the above, and
finally rrfi33: and ftfeg1?: that Siva ( see. a. § 28. ). Similarly
«^t%5Sf, ?T^5Jt%5T; bnt qT^pszhrifk speech faltecs ( as ^r is not
followed by any of the letters mentioned in the rule ).
§ 36. x *3[ at the end of a word is changed into an Annswara
* jftiST I Pan. VIII. 4. 60.
t W ^iSTOf: <&W I PaD. VIII. 4. 61.
t &W |i^?T^^l^ I Pan. VIII. 4. 62.
r 3i*&\& I *si^ I Pan. VI. I. 4. 63. 56.
X -tfj^Htf i ^aiq^i^!^ Ffe i Pan^VII. 3, 23, 24 and Pan
,'I. 3. 10. ( see sec. b ). -
5 36-38 ] BULKS OP SANDHI, 2o
when followed by a consonant; e. g.
salute Hari. But *T^+ir+%=iTwret as ^ is not at the end of a
wozd. The word ^5TR is an exception (see Pin. VIII. 3. 25 V
(a) ^ and q[, not at the end of a pada, are turned into an
Anuswara when followed by a consonant except a nasal or a
semivowel or f; srr^^-f *3fr=3U*h^ he will overcome; TOP*
fa =*r$TTf*T ( nom. pi. of q^rg; fame ); but R?9> he thinks, as sj
is followed hereby q- which is a semi-vowel; irrRT^+*l^i?fil=
as sj ia at the end of a pada ( grammatical form).
(b) This change is optional in the case of ^ when « followed
by ^ comes after it; e. g. f%n + §r$5<T^=f$Sr«far^ and
what does he shake >; bnt if this * be followed by ^, and if by
the nasalised ^ , ar, s^ , are optionally substituted for
or % what does he conceal?
and ^^ what ! yesterday ! so
and f%9T^i|Q} but
§ 37. An Anuswara followed by any consonant except ^ q ,
^ or ^ is changed to the nasal of the class to which the follow-
ing letter belongs, necessarily when in the middle, and
optionally when at the end of a word*; e. g. 3ra;3r + frr:=ai + cF
+ ?H: (^7 tne preceding rule and then) arr^rT: marked (by tlih);
so 3T^r-ffrT:=3Tf^rrT: honoured; $i%?n obstructed; ^\\^(:
calmed; grPffrT: woven; f^-f ^f^=?^ ^Ifq or f?£*if% thou
doest; similarly 4^-ffT or ^H^TT a reutrainer; ^TCTrKT: or
: « year ; it ai*>H or T^ff^T to which people.
§ 38. If 5: and or bo followed by a sibilant, ^ and % respec-
tively are suffixed to them optionally; and hard unaspirates are
optionally changed into hard aspirates when followed by a.
Pan. VIII. 4. 48-52.
26 SANSKUIT GRAMMAR, [ § 38-41
sibilant Uq+q\'=ST3FS-: XTTTO mttg1.- the Bixta
man gone before; g*TOT+ TO: =Wf *«!*:, *MIUs3l8:j ^u^g:, the
sixth good counter.
§ 39. If ^or «j at the end of a word* be followed by 3, %r
( changed to ^ ) is optionally inserted between them; * e. g*
*i:+*F*n=W5*ntf: or ^+ g+*reT;=^rqfft six good men;
so OT +w:=w?e: or^r^r: that good man.
(a) gr, or and q[ at the end of a word and preceded by a short
vowel double themselves when followed by a vowel |; e. g.
the individual soul; so ^qcroir^: the
best reckoner; B^r^gft: good Achyuta.
§ 40. Ob. If the ending ^ of a word be followed by sr , 3; is
optionally inserted between them ' J e. g. ^+3nj:=*|^fg: and
Sambhu existing for all times 5 and ^^35: = ^5=^3:
' (by § 35); then by § 28 (a) «j being changed to ^
^5^t^ ^rs^fg: and ^5:^5: and finally by
dropping ^ optionally (by § 20 a. ) tfs^rg:, ?T5^^5; and
§ 41. ^ coming after ^, ^r, or ^p short or teng; in the same
word is changed to «r^ even though A vowel, a semi-vowel
except c^ , a nasal, or a letter of the guttural or labial class or
if comes between ^, q^or ^ and qfi-r*. g. ^TH»T = ^r«or; ^TN-f 5TT
«OTrby the sun, f^nm^&c.; but ^Tir+3?n?=TW SH«T (as these
are two separate words). This change does not take place
when «f IB at the end of a word x frJTTC-
I p^« VIII. 3. 28.
* ^: fir ^ I fc I Pan. VIII. 3. 22. 32.
t ft fW?1% ^T%?^ I Pao. VIII. 3. 32.
t $T 5^ I Pan. VIII. 3. 31.
T? ^Tf5^ t ai£$<4l<£'o4Hftft PaD. VIII. 4. 1. 2.
\ Pan. VIII. 4. 37.
§ 42-43 ] BULBS OF SANDHI. 27
§ 42. ^ belonging to a aubstitue ( 3Tr%5T ) or a termination
( &jr<j4j ) and not at the end of a grammatical form is changed
to q^ when preceded by any vowel except 3T or 3fT> * semivowel,
a letter of the guttural class or 3*; e. g. rrfr + g=<IHSi; Dut
TOOT as ^is preceded by M, 3Tft:$ffaft &c., as 5 belongs to the
word gfq^. This change takea place even if an anuswbra
substituted for sj, a visarga or ^ q; or ^ intervene!; e. g.
nom. pi. of ^g^ neu. a bow.
§ 43. The *j of ^r^is changed to an Anuswara and Yisarga
when followed by a form of the root g», the Anuswara again
is optionally changed to an Anunasika- 0. g. *raC + 3FftT=^f^rf
and ^^cfT ; ^ is affixed to the ending of the words frq(, 513; and
N. B. The word ^^a? *9 capable of having 108 different
forms as several e&tras are brought to bear upon it; but they
are not given here as being tedious and of no material value.
Sections a, b, c, and d may be omitted by begincers.
(a) x The ^ of 5^ is optionally nasalised and has ^ added
to it as above, when it is followed by a hard consonant except
a sibilant, preceding a vowel , a semivowel, a nasal or $. 5^+
^jrft^:=5i|;-f^-{-«5|rft^y: = 5^ti%^;, f^ri%^: a male kokila
bkd. so s*S5r; and vfv&j the son, a grown up manj but 3$TT*3T
milk for a man; ^TT^: a man-servant. Exception J^H^ the
account of a man
(b) s^at the end of a word ( except srorq ) followed by
% !£> ^ 9 %\OT <£» t^ which is itself followed by a vowel, a semi-
i 3T/fcrs!r*R*ft: I Pan. VIII. 3. 55
57, 59.
rfl' I Pan. VIII. 3. 58.
. 1 Vart.
Pan. VIII. 3. 6.
28 SANSKRIT GBAJOIAR. [ § 43-45
vowel, a nasal or g, undergoes the same changes*; «. g.
sec. a ) ^rrf^f*Rgr^j[ and ^rff|ff^f^[ Oh Krieapa, vat off;
eimilarly ^%^+^rc?=xTrlF3IT*rc3> and ^fifmmq; save, Oh
Krshna; but 5 prT as the ^ is not at the end of a word, ^^n?,
a fine handle of a sword. sr$TRrT«nT^ a good man spreads.
(e) The ^ of ^ when followed by q; undergoes this change
optionally; sf q[-f trn? = H *-y \{%f ^<nff > and •r:Trff.
(d) The «{ of ^f;j followed by ^\^j also undergoes this
change optionally, ^T^ 4- ^f^[=^t^f? , ^t^T^ to whom? ^
or ^ is substituted for the visarga when the following sets
are combined: ^: + ^:=^^:; similarly 3nd*$d** wherefrom,
the present time- CTqc^fa^r a ghee-pot ;
I^^TaTH; a sacrificial vessel;
magnet; rm^|U<3; great darkness- snr^nr^:; ^T^
the sun.
§ 44. ^ is necessarily inserted between & and the preceding
vowel, short or long; and optionally when a long vowel at
the end of a word, except that of the particle JIT and the pre-
position srr, precedes it f; e. g, %? + amr-lljiq^iqT Siva's
shadow-, so fgr^JTTT*, %fW^rl what is cut again and again;
may he not cut; 3Hl-\-tt3[m'§=3tt^&f%iTfft he covers.
VlSABGASANDEI.
§45. CT at the end of a word followed by any letter or not, the
i Pan. VIII. 3. 7.
f d ^ I Pan. VI. 1. 73. Properly <j is inserted, but it is
changed to =f by § 28. 3T[^ny«?J I ?>l^ I q^T^l I Pan. VI.
I-
§ 45-46J] KULBB OF BANBHI. 29
Q^ of THT^ and ^r followed by a hard consonant or by nothing,
are changed to a Vitargaj aa ft!T: 77% Ha ma reads.
Oh father, ^fr: !fc«-qfr| a brother's daughter.
§ 40. Vinarga, followed by =gr, ^, ?, ^ and ^, ^ them-
selves not followed by a sibilant, is changed to w* 0.
WrTT Vishnu, the protector : fff«ra%, Hari walks:
Rama goes; ( Vide § 28 ); but ^: f^nj: ( as the ^ is followed
by *r ); and optionally when followed by -sr, <r or ^ f ;
or ffHHVJMT Bama who would standj fft: ^r?t or ffr^^frT &c.
(a) Viaarga, not belonging to- an indeclinable is changed
to »r when preceded by 3T, and to f , when preceded by f or &f
short or long, and followed by the terminations qr^r, ^T, ^
and ^r«r J; «. g. ^rn^rr^C Bftd milk: T5R?9?^ little short of
fame; Z(3R^ with fame; q^ltfeiujft he desires fame; but sn?f!-
^rA|H almost dawn ( where m?f: is an indec. ); ^rf^7T9T^[ bad
ghee, q?WyMH> ^rf^^T, 'HflvfclWj^. If the visargay how-
ever, is a substitute for a final ^, it is not changed to 5- be-
fore $!**§; «ft: q?T«nff apeecn desires.
(b) x The Visarga of ST>TJ and 5^: when prefixed as indec-
linablea to verbs beginning with ^ or IT and t|- or ^ is
optionally changed to H in the case of the former and neces-
sarily in that of the latter «. g. sm^urorw q*YnT, S^JStflK
puts in the front; but TT; ar%S5qr: towns fit to be entered ( aa
^r is a noun ).
. VIII. 3. 34-35.
| Pan. V. 3. 36.
I Pan. VIII. 3. 38.
Vartikaa. for: f: Pan. VIII. 3. 39.
ir*Wt I Vart.
: I Pan. VIII. 3. 40.
30 SANSKRIT GRAMME. [ § 46
(<?) * Visarga, preceded by f or gr and not belonging to *
termination, ia changed to CT except in the case of m:» often,
if followed by a hard consonant of the guttural of the labial
class : T%»'-t-sr?q^=:T%«r??J5^ without obstacle. Sfmhfoff^ dis-
olosed; §sf><TJj a bad action; but g£: ^rac; ^%: ^tft aa the
Visarga is substituted for * a term. BO JRTJJ: ^r and not
is an exception.
optionally retains it* w when followed by ^,
*£ $» or *£$ fift: ^tRT or f^TO»CTT?r hides or scorns.
T%:> fair: and ^§:; all of them adverbs showing frequency,
change their Visaing* to ^ optionally nuder the same circum-
stBncesJ; l^^ftfff or 7%:q?ftfir does twice; but ^gc^TTH^ hav-
ing four parts ( where t^Tg: is not an adverb ).
(e) § The ending 5-: or sr: of a word changes its visarga to
^ optionally under the same circumstances when the presence
of the following word ia necessary for the completion of the
sense. «fWfUft or ^r^^ifk turns into ghee; ^g«^% or
VT5:^rm makes a bow; but mBTg ^w: f^T **53>?% as there is
no connection here between the words ^rfqr and fifr.
And necessarily when at the end of the first member of a
compound; as ^rrq^^ju^-^T a pot for clarified butter; but qrriT-
^r1?> ^f"4^i»'l a big ghee-pot ( as the word ^rf^: is an uttara
pada ).
(/) Visarga coming after the 3? of a word other than an
indeclinable and forming the first member of a compound is
changed tog- when followed by a derivative of the roots f»,
q?H, and by c£$r, ^*, <rr$r, <prr and ^Jiolr X e. g. 3^n?^Tt: an
iron-smith; arq^W one who desires iron; grq^rff^ an iron
pot; irqwsn*;. 3fnr^?TT a bridle; ar^^^off a kind of iron pofc
Pan. VIII, 3. 41.
Pan. VIII. 3. 42.
Pan. VIII. 3. 43.
Pan. VIII. 3. 44-45.
| P&n. VIIL 3. 4«.
46-49 ] BULKS or SANDHI 31
but iftiOTC' Brhaspati; **:gjm: one desiring heaven ( where
is an indec. ): IT^T: T&nft (as there is no comp.); and
: producing great fame (as the word q-^ is not the
first member of the com.).
(0) *The words aro: and %*: change their visarga to ^
when followed by <H[ under the same circumstances as those
mentioned above; am^H, TOT^^ bufc 3TO:<r£ when there is
no comp.; tlT*r%*: <r<rc (as %f is the latter member sWHp.
§ 47. Visarga ( substituted for ^ and not ^ ) preceded by
short 3T and followed by short & or a soft consonant is
changed to ^ f|R: + 3^ = r^
finfttj; Siva is adorable; ( see § 25 );
should be saluted; but frog qq* si ^ TJT^T (where the ar after
<rq-: is pluta)- m&: + *i:5f=*rRK3 ( for here the visarga is sub-
stituted for ^ ); so MMM^ &c.
$ 48. Visarga preceded by HT ™ dropped necessarily when
followed by a soft consonant, and optionally when followed
by a vowel; it is also optionally dropped when preceded by 3?
and followed by a vowel except ar; when it is not dropped it
is changed to ^ in both these cases, ^r: +;r«rr:-%*T
§ 49. (a) Viearga, preceded by any vowel except aj or 3fc
and followed by a vowel or soft consonant, is changed to ^ ;
Sft: +5Tq-rer=gRsfaiar Hari conquers; so yr^^ft the sun rises;
a cow or bull comes.
Exception : — The Visarga of the particles ^p> ^ift: and
obeys § 48; e.g. ?ft + 3r^=*jr sr^T or ^fnrs^ Oh Achyu.
ta5 «nft 5TR^r Bhago ! a bow to thee; 3TOV *lff Oh you go.
(b) The ^ of 3ff^, not followed by a declensional tormina
tion, ia always changed to ^ but if followed by <rft J and other
words snch as f}^, ^ &c. the change is optional and if by ^;q-
I Pan. VIII. 3. 47.
\ Virt.
32 SANSKIUT GRAMMAR. [49-52
and nft> viearga is substituted for it5 3f$:, 3TfTf •' day by day.
3*5:iffT* or 3^%: the lord of the day, the sun; *f)Ml5: or
*fr«rfff: Brhaspati; or<ff?f: or a^rrff: a leader; but 3Tff¥qr^ Inst-
dual; 3*5t^?*T the form of the day 4|<w£) Tffif^T} <R^y»af: day
and Bight; 3ftf R«FRT^ * protection of Saman to be chanted
by day.
(c) *^ or ^ followed by ^ or ^ respectively is dropppedt and
the preceding 3T, f or % i* short is made long; 3*f; + OK*=S5Tr
wft sports again; fR;:+^q-=ff^;4-CPT:=^t W: Hari is
graceful; but f5+S:=fS: ( form fg+ft ) p. p. of ^ to grow.
§ 50. f(«) The ^ of the nom. sing, of ^ and q^ OTa». is
dropped before a consonant when they do not end in ^ or are
not used in a negative Tatpurusha; 0. gt ^ ^:; qq- f%^:} but
tr^c^T «T: this Kudra; a?^n%T^: that is not Siva ( a neg
Tat. ); irf&
(b) f Sometimes in poetry the ^ of ^: and q^f: is considered
as not existing wben followed by a vowel other than 3f, so that
the two vowels may combine in order to meet the exigencies of
the metre; f. g. %^wftf STfPi viAft &<>• Rg. II. 24. I.
THfT ^jrtle<J t
Chapter III.
SUBANTA OB DECLENSION
§ 51. In the present chapter Deehnrion or the inflection of
nouns, subatantive and adjective, is considered.
§ 52. The crude form of a noun ( any declinable word ) not
yet inflected is technically called a Pratipadika ( grffrrifris ).
Pai"vra. 3. 14. VI. 3. 111.
t <HRft: ggfilCT*HHEKH1% *fo I t *
Pan. VI. 1. 132, 134.
§55-66]
DECLENSION.
83
§ 58. A noun .baa three genders: masculine gender (mas.),
a feminine garde? (fern.), and the neuter (Ben.). The ques-
tion about the determination of the gender of nouns will be
considered in a separate chapter.
§ 54. There are three numbers :— -Singular (fling.), dual
(da.) aud plural (pi). The singular number denotes one, the
dual two and the plural three or more . *
§55. There are eight cases in each number: — Nominative
(Nom. or N.), Vocative (Voc. or V.), Accusative (Ace. or A.)
Instrumental (Ins. or I), Dative (Bat. or D.), Ablative (Abl. or
Ab.), Genitive (Gen. or G.), and Locative (Loc or L.). These
express nearly all relations between words in a sentence.
N. B. These genders, numbers and oases will, for the s*ke
of convenience, be denoted by their abbreviations enclosed into
brackets after each.
§ 56. Sup (QTf) is the technical term for a cue termination
in Sanskrit. Declension consists in adding the case termination
to the crude form or base.
. 22. 21.
f The general terminations as given by Panini <vre
d£ftCI*4 ll$K£*q l*«Kff flN l*wi UKhCT^QlWCt I IV. 1. 2. i. e. Nom.
5 ah srat; Ace. a^atr^ $nr» Ins. JT «nw IHH; Dat. %. *n*rx WTJT ;
Ab SFI% wnq.»nT; Gen. g^;s^3TW| Loc. dp art"; ^T. Some of
these terminations, as in common with Panini 's system of nomen-
clature, have certain Its ( servile letters ) added or prefixed to
them; e.g. ? in g/gr in STH &c. It will be easily seen that the term
55 is obtained by taking the first letter and the list It in the
sfltra.
H. 8. O. 3
j
34 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ g 57-60
§ 57. Tho following are the normal case-terminations : —
Mas. and Fern. Aeu.
Sing. Dual Plural. Sing. Dual Plural.
N. V, «( aft artf N. A. * i *
A. 3H^ ,» >> V. ,, „
I. 3TT ¥*n*C ft^ The rest like the mas.
D.
Ab.
O.
L. f ,, B:
§ 58. The Vocative is considered to be a different aspect of
the nom. and is identical with it in the dual and plural, It is.
therefore, supposed to have no separate terminations of its
own. In the sing, it sometimes coincides with the original stem,
sometimes with the nom., at others, it differs from both.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS ANI> ADJECTIVES.
§ 59. Declension is for the sake of convenience divided into
two classes: —
I I. BASES ENDING IN VOWELS.
II. BASES ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
§ 60. The declension of adjectives does not, in general, diner
f zom that of substantives. It will not, therefore, be given here
separately; the points of difference only will be noted.
SECTION I.
1. BASES ENDING* IN VOWELS.
Not*: — The variations and modifications, which the general
termination* given above undergo when applied to several of
the vowel bases are so numerous, that it has been thought
§ 60-63 ] DECLENSION. 35
advisable not to notice them here, as being tedious, but simply
to give the forms and leave the students to find them out for
themselves. Every word declined here should be considered a
model and words alike in form should be declined similarly to it.
Nouns ending in 37 Mas. and Neu.
§ 61. TTJT m. Rama. 5TPT ». knowledge.
Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. Plural.
N. fnr: TTm ti*n. N. 31 inn, ^FT^
V"\T° i ji
• ^I*^ )9 99 * • 3111 f9 j;
A* ti*in ,, rmin. A. 3n»TnV „ „
The rest like nrr.
G.
1- TTR
^ 62. Decline all nouns ending in 37 mas. and nen.
similarly.
(a) The Loc. sing, of words ending in 3*3 ( substituted for
3T$^ a day, at the end of a Tat. oomp. ) is optionally formed
like that of nouns ending in 3- «. g. 90$ has serf*, ssifg or
o4jgfH- So 3q^f oi|f^ or otjgQ &c. See p. 73.
Nouns ending in an Mat and
§ 63. iftqr mas. a cow-herd.
(a) Mas. nouns ending in 3PTT take the general terminations.
The final 3ft is dropped before a vowel termination beginning
with the Ace. plu.
* The ^ of & is changed to or by § 41. Ins. sing, of ^ is
36 SANSKRIT GBAMMAK. [ § 63-61
N. V.
Ab.
§ 64. Decline similarly f^qr the protector of the world r
^FOTCTT a couch-shell-blower, ^tR^T one who quaffs the some-juice,
-vgOTT one who inhales smoke, sr^r strength-giver or Indra; and
other comp. no and derived from roots ending in an*-
(a) If the latter member be not a root the final an* is not
dropped; e. g. fffT name of a Gandharva, Ace. plu. ^TfT^; D-
Ab. G. and L. sing. 5$, fr^:, 5^: and ff^ respectively. The
rest like
§'65. WT fen. the goddess of wealth.
N. fin fit
V. W >r
A.
D.
Ab.
JCi.
g 66. Decline all other fsn. nouns ending in 3ft similarly*
§67. Irregular bases:— The Voc. ding, of
> all meaning 'a mother' ' is «r»f , 315 and ^^ respectively
§ 68-69 ] DECLENSION. 37
§ 68. Several adjectives ending in 3T follow the declension
of pronouns, for which see the chap, on pronouns.
Noons ending in f and 7 mas. fern, and neo.
§ 69. jft &c.—
3R mas. Hari.
Sing. Dnal. . Plural
N.
V.
A.
I.
Ab.
G,
Ufa fern, inteller'
Sing.
N.
V.
A.
I. HWT
D. fffliroi
Ab. ift: or
* or
N.
Dual,
inft
tfftj,
Plural.
preceptor.
38 SANSKRIT OBAMMAB.
V.
A.
I.
D.
<*. snft „
$3 fern, a cow,
N.
V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
i. water.
N. ',
V.
A.
Ab.
G.
I P4n. VII. 1. 73. Nieu. nouns ending in
or ij take the augment -^ before vowel case terminations.
09-70 ]
DECLENSION.
neu. honey.
or
V.
A.
D.
Ab.
§ 70. Adjectives ending in $• and ^ when used with neuter
are optionully declined like mas. nouns in f and 3 in the
Da. Ab. Gen. and Loc singolars and Gen. Loc. duals^ 0. ff.
. white, pure; &$ nen. heavy : —
neu
N.
V.
Ac.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
N.
V.
: or
or
: or 5T%*ft-'
or
40 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 70*72
Ac. fj^r gftftfr
D. g^- or „
Ab. : or
„
§ 71. Decline all other nouns and adjectives ending in
or 3- mas. fern, and neu. similarly.
§ 72. Irregular bases :—
mas. friend.
D.
Ab.
n
Ob». (a) The words 33% a good friend ( $Tfr*rar: ^rwf ),
3fl$fTf% a close friend ( arfifcaftfa: €TWT ), TOfrftr a great
friend, or one having a great friend ( q^R: fr^r q^> TW ^nar
«rr ), are declined like ^rr% in the N. Y. and A. and like gft in
other cases; but arftflrf^T (qr^fr*TfrioRI*ff: one who has abandoned
a female companion ) is declined like yfc Ar. 5. ^T^fjr fom. is
declined like sr^r-
" 7i»o8. a master.
q*-
v. q^r
A.
73-75 ]
DECLENSION
41
i.
D.
§ 73 Compound nouns ending with qft such as »rqft &c.
are declined like $ft regularly, nfafar ( firn: 3W* 1W ?TfTT *T )
is declined like ?ft mas. & ir^ fern., the Gen. plu. ia optionally
like that of f&; mnjimm, or osnrrorr^.
§ 74 06«. ( a ) aftgoftlQ a descendant of Uduloman (
) is declined like $ft in the sing, and du*l and like
the plural, the original word vj<jfR being substituted;*
( 6 ) Words of similar derivation (see Fan.. II. 4. 62. 63. 65.
66 and IV. 1. 105 ) also substitute their originals in the plural,
ftf irr*J: N.
75.
N.
V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
Words ending in f and 3? mas. and fern.
«nrt/ A river; ^\£/. & woman, a bride.
9%
name of a sage, -f f^ ( f ) added 3ra?zwf by
Pan. IV. 1. 96, the final ^ being dropped
( Pan. VI. 4. 144 ).
* From
« «r=~rW^.-r >
42 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 75-76
„
Decline all other fern, nouns in f similarly.
( a ) The words STOT a woman in her monthly coarse,
wealth, fffr a boat, *?rfr smoke, and <Tr?ft a late, do not drop the
^ of the nom.* e. g. snft:; afSRT: &c.
A.
D-
Ab.
L-
Decline xg-^ a mother-in-law, ^ an army, ^^ the jujube
tree> «fc*^ a pblegmatic woman, JJ^TIJ rice-gruel, «q^; a clats
of compositions, and other f sminine nouns in gj- similary. 3^1^-
^FT mas. and fern, is declined like ^i£ except in the Ace. plu.
mas. which is aif^jpj.
$ 76. Mas. nouns ending in £ : —
2TRT srfmffiT 3TWr ifmsnfr: ' »n antelope as fleet as the windj
| Un&di IV. 1.—
v.
D.
A. b.
76-77 ] DECLENSION. 43
L.
Decline ( qrrar 3^ ffa ) WH a way or horse, (TTT&
qrfr the sun, &c. similarly.
Ob*. Decline (^gq: *WW *7W) «T§^W^fr mas. one having
many good wives, and ( cJ$lfr?3ii?rau»<T: ) 3lfifiwfr mas. like 33?
except in the Aco. plu. which is ^"Sfrmfrr and
respectively. 3Tfft&$Rr fern, should bo declined like
The word ^rrasTRT, derived with the affix t%qr , is declined like
sr\J7 which see.
§ 77. Root nouns in f or ^ M. F. N.
Rule of Sandhi — (a) The fending f or g-, short or long, of
nouns derived from roots with the affix r%<r (o) and of *r, is
changed to f^r or 3-^ before the vowel terminations*; the fern.
nouns of this description are optionally declined like ^r in
the Da. Ab. Gen. and Loc. singulars and the Gen. plu.
(b) But if the ending ^ or gr of a many-voweled nonn having
a root at the end be not preceded by a radical conjunct conso-
nant or the root noun has a preposition termed irfff (e. g. as
added to the root ) or a word governed by the root preceding
it. it is changed to cr^or ?r, except in the case of g\fr and nouns
ending in Tgj-.
>ifT fem.
N. tfr:
V. , V.
A. f^nr V.
Pan. VI. 4. 77.
I £t: 5'T P^n. VI. 4. 82. 83.
Var. ^ ^giw^'r: I Pan. VI. 4. 85.
44 SANSKRIT GBAMHAB. [ § 77
I. fan tftar* tfrft: I. g*r
D. £*-$ „
Ab. far:-irr:, „ „ Ab.
Decline similarly £r, ^r. E*> Decline similarly $, ^,
ir,
. (
N.V.
A.
I.
D. snftr
Ab.
L.
Decline similarly %ifr
&c. mas. and fern.; the Loc. sing, of nouns ending in ;ft is
made np by adding arraf «• I*
N.V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
See * on page 45.
§77]
DECLENSION.
Decline similarly g^ (
Indra or the god of death),
and fern.
new. like
N. A.
V.
I. Jreqi-ftsn &o. option-
ally like the mas. before the
vowel terminations.
), p^( the thunderbolt of
*<9TC> &c- mas. and mas.
like
A.
V.
7TT &o. option-
ally like the mas. before the
vowel terminations.
m. mas.
•' fern. ST5OT <TTOT: ^TW ^TT *em.
Yoo. sing., Da. Ab. Gen. and Loo. sings. Gen. pin. like
the rest like spfr mas.; 0. g.
V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
smr
99
»Hill*|5
Decline similarly $m€r ( ^mfl^
err ) except in the Norn. sing, which is
rorfhfr
: I Pan. VII. 8. 116. STI^ is snbsitnted for the
loc. sing, in the case of words ending in tff, an and the word :ft.
,t »W s»^% «rt?iqi^Fr I Pin. I. 2. 47. A prtoipadika ending
in a long vowel hat a short vowel substituted for it when
becoming nen.
46 SANSKRIT QBAMHAB. [ § 77
5^ ( 51 ^TOft ) w. and f. also according to
Kaiyata.
N. V. U^f: tji^4Mf
A.
I.
Ab.
o.
Decline similarly gasfr, ^c^vfr, <JTinfT, »fT &c. mas. and fern.
The L. sing, of ^ is
) self-existent.
^x »
N. V.
A.
I.
Ab.
Q. „
L.
Decline similarly
&c. mas. and mas. and fern.
gr^T ne u. like
N. A. 3jr^- ^r^
V. ^i-^ „ o
&c. optionally like the mas
before the vowel terminations. G. Dual
N. A. ^^ nr^fr
v. f^-^r „ „
^- S^T-TT &c. optionally like the mas. before
the vowel termination.
77-78-]
DECLENSION.
fern.
47
V.
A.
I-
D.
Ab.
Decline similarly sjjj, gfaw , 5*pf a widow remarried; &c
§ 78. obs, ( ^r^nrf^s^cftm ) *rcfr, (^f ^sr ^^ ff^
) ^^fr; ( *jHfaxyffrm ) ^tu; ( ^^m^^rfrf^ )
) *&\, ( sTTTf^aFcfrr^ ) ^TRt; (
N.
V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
N. V.
The rest like the other ^nff Decline flimilary TT^r-
Words like si^afr, ^gfr should be declined like
rs § r**. f% ^^. ^
xi ^ST \ vit5i^4i*i^^9niin /
48 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 79-80
§ 79. 5ft/«fl». a woman.*
N. ^ft fa<4\ f%nr D. f%rq-
v. fir n i ft Ab. finnj •>
A. R*<4«v3frc >, >, ^t: G. f^rOT ftnfr
i. finn ^fiv^rf^
«.»./.
mas.
N. grf^f%r".
V 3tfH% „ „
H.
D. «u7te*T 99 3ifii%w
Ab. 4<fft<£j: _, „
Ace. plu. Hm^RT: grfiftfr:; the I. D. Ab. G. and L. singu-
lars, arf^feim, irfiiffer^ — ^nfr> 3rf8f%niT"—
— ^ respectively; the rest like the mas.
neu
except in the Gen. and Loc. duals forms which
are grftf^qt:— *:.
§ 80. Mas. words ending in 37 not derived from roots; 0. g.
; name of a Gandharva.
N.V.
A.
I fWfret: i Pin. VI. 4. 79. 80.
§ 80.81 ] DECLENSION. 49
Decline similarly ?vig; ( |¥*rift ffir one who strings together ).
Nouns ending in ^ mat. fern, and »«ti.
§ SI. Nouns derived from roots with the affix 3 (raand
^fr PAn. III. i. 133. and 2. 135 ), snch as ^ a maker, &o. ant
the worda *?n?/, ^ ^ ^^, ^3, qnj, and sn$n^ as also ^rjg
change their ^ tc arr in the Nom. sing, and to 3*n; in the first
five inllectious. The ;&• is lengthened in the Aoc. and Gen. r1
and changed to &% before the Ab. and Gen. sing; the Voc. air
eiida in 3?^.
mas. the creator.
v.
A.
Decline similarly ^3, 33, ^, 511*** 3$Tf &c
c
TaflrJ neu
A.
V.
A.
I.
D.
P4n. VI. 4. 11.
Sid. Kau.
H 8 o 4
50 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR [ 81-83
Ab. vrrg:-3<n:
G.
Decline similarly
and other fern, nouns should be declined like \jrar except
in the Ace. plu. which is *gr*r:. See below.
§ 82. Nouns expressive of relationship like fq^ m. a father,
a mother, ^cr m. a husband's brother, &c. with the excep-
tion of ?rcrT a grandson, qp[ a husband and ^^j & sister, as also
the words 31^5 one who praises (Un. II. 92), ^ a man (Un. II. 98)
and ^req^r a charioteer, do not change their ^ to 3N^ in the, N.
dual and plural and Ace. sing, and dual} e. y.
N.
-V. r%:(i;) ,, „ V. nni:(t) »>
A. fqRV-^ » R?|^ A. RfffT^ «
The rest like ^r? . The rest like ^Q*
Decline similarly ?TT<£. Decline similarly q-jij a hua-
r, ^N^i 'HSTO and.., band's brother's wife, gffc a
The Gen. plu. of ^ ia daughter, and HHT^ or
or iTr^* a husband's sister.
§\83. The woid ^r? a jackal, is declined like a word ending
in 3£ necessary in the first five inflections and optionally before
the vowel terminations beginning with the Inst. sing, except
that of the Gen. plu.J «. g.
\ Tan. VI. 4. 9. ^ f?^T^ ^im ^C $*-. W1<{ \ Sid. Kau.
^ 5f^: I Un. II 97 5f ^F?I% ^nr^ri f^- ti^fa^ f?^ '
3 w«r Tr^^^r 5rf^=ft ^w7 ff^ 5151^: i Sid. Kau
: finm rfi^Rr i P&n. VII. I. 95. 97.
§ 83-84 ] DECLENSION
N.
v.
A.
I.
D. - „
Ab. gftjr :-^reY«* „
G.
(o) SBlj becomes 5Rf£ in the^iw. also ( by T%T3T
VIII. 1. 96.) which with the^fli. torm. f becomes 3?t^T and is
declined like
Ois. — The word frogKTJ neu. is declined like H$ and option-
ally like tKJrc mas. before the vowel terminations from the I.
sing.; «. g. D. uing. r5WaCT^-S% §%•
Words ending in 5j£ and ^5.
§ 84. There are no words ending in ^ or <£; therefore, the
imitative sounds of the roots <F and rT and <|^ and ^rqp^ are
take a to show what the forms of such words will be, if there
be need to use such words.
N. V. <&:, ar :
A.
Ab.
Decline sr similarly.
BANSKBIT GRAMMAR. { § 84-86
N.
V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
I*- «IHI« 99
Decline $\+£ similarly.
Words ending in tr and <h
§ 85. Here simply the terminations should be added and
Sandhi rules observed.
Iff ^5f isi ) m. f. wealth.
N. %: OTT flT N. V.
V. %* „ A.
A. ffirac „ 9» !• fWT
I. fWT %*TI^[ §f5f: 'tl^' >,
D. ^Ir „ %ViT- Ab. ^m: ,,
Ab.%: „ „ G.
G. |9 ^^t* ^n^ Ij-
L.
*The Kau. does not specially mention this form. Just as it
stopa miter giving the Nom. forms in the case of words like
% *tt, *g3t &c., BO does it do in the case of % also, implying
thereby that the Yoc. forms of % are also like the Nom. ones.
But the Sutra ^^WlrH^J: P*D. VI. 1. 69 (<?g^tTi^ f^F?n^
aifn^S^Vf^M) (Kau.) seems to apply in the present
and by dropping the final ^ we get the form %.
§ 85-86 ]
DECLENSION.
53
Decline similarly ^ (
f: OT ) one who has thought
of fforoa.
The neu. sre
) changed to srft
I-
I. 2. 47. ) should be declined
like 3TTT except before the con-
sonantal terminations, when it
should be declined like T *»-/
N. A. jrff scRafc
Words ending in aft an(3 aft-
$ 86. Vriddhi ( 3ff ) ia substituted for tha ^r of words ending
in aft in the first five inflections except the Ace. sing.; srr ia
substituted for gfr in the Ace. eing. and plural.* Noons ending
in 3?r are regularly declined.
*ff mas. fern.
a ball or a cow.
the moon.
N. &V
V.
I.
D.
IT:
'Tt:
Ab,
G.
L.
Decline similarly
( *5cT: tf: ^c: ^r ) and
/ the iky. The nea.
N. &V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
Decline similarly
a ship. The nea.
^Rm[)j changed to
bd declined like ir
Should
changed to sr
declined like
should be
: I Pan. VII. 1. 90. VI. 1. 93.
34 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 87-89
SECTION II.
BASKS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
§ 87. Bases ending in any of the first four letters of a class,
and in or , ^, %> , ^ , s^, ^ and ?. The declension of these bases
consists, for the most part, in adding the general case termi-
nations and observing the rules of sandhi.
§ 88. Bases ending 3;, p^, and «r.
§ S9-. (a) After final w the 3 of the loc. is changed to 3.
(6) £ ( optionally changeable to ? ) may be optionally
inserted between <^and fj.
mat. fern. neu. naming the goddess of wealth or a lotas
otT-OT-^fT )—
Mas. and Fern.
N.&V.
A
I.
D.
Ab.
G. „ ^R^r:
I*. 3Tirf% »
Decline similarly 3^qor^, grirror , m.f. one who counts well,
f. a door and other words ending in ^ or <•£• The loc. plu.
of STT is ff*T°rs-T?:S,-^?rff. The Norn. sing, of grrr is grr:.
N. N. &A.
The rest like the mas.
* See 91. a.
§ 89-92 ] DECLENSION. 55
Decline similarly $ir*T, wnc and other words ending in or ,
or fj- 9. g.
N. A. *r:
§90. Bases ending in f£, or, IT, ^, £, ?, f , 5, 3, «r, v, g,
and*, <*>*[,*.
§ 91. (a) As a general rule the f^ of the nom. singular ia
dropped. If there be a conjunct consonant at the end of a
word the first consonant only is retained.
(6 ) The final letter is changed to the first or third of its
class when followed by nothing, to the third when followed
by a soft consonant and first when followed by a hard
consonant and remains unchanged before a vowel termination.
( e ) ^ IB prefixed to the f of the N. & Ace. plural in the
case of neuter nouns ending in a consonant except a naaal or
a semi-vowel* but not in the case of a noun derived from the
frequentative base.
§ 92. Paradigms :—
^rii^I/. a holy stick.
N. & V. ^rffrj; *fff>ft *rfwvr: Ab.
A.
In.
N. V. A.
The rest like
Decline similarly
.} «. g.
56 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 92-94
Norn. sing. Nom. dual. I. dual. LOG. plu.
Neu.
N." V. A. N. V. A.
The rest like the mas. So %?%3T? N. V. A. pi &o.
^ 93. Bases ending in ^ , ^, ^ , or |^and ^, ^, 5.
§ 94. (a) ^ or ^ is changed to ^ when followed by a hard
Consonant or by nothing, and to IT when followed by a soft
consonant.*
(b) The ending ^ or ^ of root-nouns and the final of
^> ^% "^» ^r3T, a»d w^ are changed to * when
followed by any consonant except a nasal or a semi- vowel or
by nothingf; tne ^ ™ changed bo ; or ^ when at the end of
a word, and to 3- when followed by a soft consonant. The ^
o* T^TT^ is similarly changed to ^or ? .
(0) But the si of the root-nonns f^BT^,^! , *$5T, and ^sr^is
changed to 3? as also the qr of 3^ ' a bold or impudent man '
and the ^of snch words as f%tr^ &c The ^ of ^5^ is
optionally changed to g^or gp, as also the ^ of ^ar and
The XT of %-fe^ri is changed to ^.
* %: ^: i Pan. VIII. 2. 30. f
Pin. VIII. 2. 36.
§ 94-97 ] DECLENSION. 57
(d) 3 may optionally be inserted between ^ and the loc. pi.
(e) Before vowel terminations final ^ may optionally be
changed to ^.
§ 1)5. (a) * is changed to ^when at the end of a pada or when
followed by a consonant except a nasal or a semi-vowel, (b) In
the case of roots beginning with ^ it is changed to Bunder the
same circumstances; (c) when forming par* of the roots g^, g£,
*«j£ and fi^, it is optionally changed to q;*. «. to ^or CTJ (d)
and in the case of the root «r? it is changed to vj under the
above-mentioned circumstances.*
(«) The ij^of sfstJT^ /. a kind of metre is changed to ^» when
followed by a hard consonant or by nothing, and to TT before a
soft consonant ( Pan. III. 2. 59).
§ 96. When a mono-sy llabio root (or root-noun) begin s with ? ,
ff or ^ and ends with tr, ^, \j , w or g, the ?f ir^or ^ is respecti-
vely changed to *r, ^ or^tr before ^ or ^o"r when followed by
nothing: or when the final soft aspirate is changed to an unaspi-
rate letterf.
§ 97. Paradigms — «TT^(/. speech, fj^ shining, g^ becoming
faint &c.
KTT ^*i XT TT
- v . m%> ^r^rr ^r^r^ N. v.
A. 9TO*^ ,) » A.
I. ^1^11 ^T^WT^ MiP^: !•
T> ^ mn&t* Tl
Ab. ^T^: A!
* ft 5: I ?i^W: I fl 'gg^^^l^l^'H' ^ff^ I P^. VIII,
. 31-34.
t 'J^T *tfl ^!W*?fW f*: I Pan. VIII. 2. 37.
58 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR [ § 97
G. sre: srrer: ?rarq( G.
L. *TT% „ *T§J L.
Decline similarly ^nfrg^[, mx&t^ Decline similarly
;, |^and words ending in 3?
t^[» ;37*°If> f^n^j ft^T^, the sun, f^CT f
f^T^> f%fi^.» and words ending fj[^, jj^j SJT^^> f%^.*> XC^eaTj *n^
in ^ and *r. root nouns in ^, ^r , ^ and ir.
Kg.
N. Sing. N. dual I. dual. Loc. plu.
is
fgrf^'vrrT
&C. <KC. &C.
derived from sni^ mentioned along with ^ &c. 7^
^r ^^R^ I Sid. Kau. The other msn^ is
derived from 5>*Ki| ffffi mentioned in the qjoni^ g'oup.
f Hereafter only the first letter will be given, the third
letter should always he supposed to be understood.
§ 79 ] DECLENSION. 59
N. Sing. N. dual. I. dual. Loc. pin.
W^
ft*
fo<T
STx^ XT?
f§T*
Irregular base : — 5^ N. V. 5^3^ 5?f: A.
the rest like $55^.
S^ mas.
Ab. :
or
Deoline similarly fw^} *g£, *?# ?&r, jfa& and |£ &c.
N. sing. N. dual. Instr. dual. Loc. pla.
or ?
or
or
or
60 SANSKRIT GBAMMAR I § 97-100
Neu.
The neo. formi of these have no peculiarities other than
those mentioned above. 9. g.
N. V. A.
or or
The remaining forme like those of the mas. or /em.
IRREGULAR BASES.
§ 98. (1) The ^ of &l\W£ < Indra ' is changed to ^ before
the consonantal terminations;* e. y,
N. V. 5^n"T^ ^Tr^T^ ^Tf^rrf : I.
A.
§ 99. ftsq- becomes ft-»^T when followed by n^t ( tnafc
particular form of the root-noun ?r^ )—
N. V.
A.
§ 100. The erf of root-nouns ending in *r^ is changed to
before the vowel terminations beginning with the Ace. plu
*• ff. f^^ « the sustainer of the universe^ a lord : —
* Pan. VIII. 3. 56.
t (WT *§TCl: I Pan. VI. 3. 128.
•I ^If S3J ff^l^rra I Pan. VI. 4. 132. VI. 1. 108. an and
coibine into ^T by Pan. VI. 1. 89. See § 20.
100-103] DECLENSION. 61
K. v.
A.
I-
Ab.
Decline similarly 55^^, ^m^f^ 5*1* > ^tf*!^ &c. The
Ace. plu., Inst. sing. &c. of ^[^, are ij$:, ij^ &*-*•
§101. The ^ of g^TRg/ .-'a shoe' is ohaoged to q^ before
fT and to ^ before the vr of the termination; e. g, Norn. ^^rf^f.
xJMMg:7 Ins. sing, and dual TTT^F, ^TTvqr^i Loc.
§ 102
ox.
V.
A.
Ab.
N. V. A.
The rest like
§ 103. The words 3re<n^ c * kind of priest ' and
' sacrificial food' change their final to ^ before consonantal
terminations the preceding grr becoming 3^- —
62
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
[ § 103-104
N. V.
A.
I.
L.
N. V.
A.
I.
L.
Bases derived from the root
§ 104. Nouns derived form the root
of such affixes as fk^, fl^r &c. such as
( srffT-StS^ ) western, ^vsrs^ (
(mT^-3^) going away,
with or well, i^v^^a ( f^wfo.^
)adoring a deity,
where, aqoTj northen,, a|r^3.^[ following,
o- going to that ( all these derived from
go' to worship,
' to go ' by means
( m-3T5^) eastern,
13^ ) a companion,
( ^H:3?5^ ) going
) following, ^^jy^
) going every-
(a) In the Nom sing, sr^^ becomes 3^. The nasal of
is dropped before all terminations beginning with the
Ace. plu. and the preceding semi-vowel is changed to its
corresponding long vowel before the vowel terminations after
which 3i is dropped. When 3755? is not preceded by a semi-
vowel, its 3T is changed to f if not preceded by a long vowel;
otherwise it remains unchanged. f«*r>^ becomes Q<^ under
similar circumstances. In other respects these words are
declined like words ending in .
§104]
DECLENSION
63
srnat
N.V.
A.
I.
Ab.
L.
N.V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
N.V.
A.
t
L.
The forms of the rest should be similarly made up; e. g.
N. sing. N. pin. A. plu. lust. duel. Loo. plu,
64 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR [ § 104
Neu.
The neu. forms should be similarly made up.
N. V. A.
The rest like the mas.
(b) When 3*5^ means < to worship ' or ' honour' the nasal of
JHo-T^ is not dropped and these words are regularly declined. *
They drop their final ^ only before the consonantal termina-
tions* «. g.
I Pan. VI. 4. 30.
§ 104-105] DECLENSION. 65
N. V.
A.
L
D.
&c. &c.
L, snftr Jnsafc srcs or
N.V.
A.
I.
&o. &c.
The reat should be similarly declined.
Neu.
N. V. A. ftfe fti,%^t
Irregular Bases.
§ 105. ^3^ a heron &c. ( derived from K
a ^ame man^ an^ E^T, beautifully bounding become
and ^s^ before consonantal terminations; 0. y.
N. sing. N. dual I. dual. Loc. plu.
The remaining froms should be similarly made up.
Neu.
N. V. A.
The rest like the mas.
H. s. G. 5
66 SANSKRIT GEAMMAE. [ § 106-108
§ 106. 35-1^ n,t n. strength, is regularly declined; 0. g. a.
N.eu.
N.V. A. "3^ stfi 3rfSl; *the rest like the mat.
§ 107. Nouns ending in q[. There are a few nouns derived
from the roots ending in '3. They have no other peculiarity
than this, that thej change their ^ to ^ before consonantal
terminations, 0. g. sr^rr^ m.f. one who is tranquil.
A.
or
N. V. A.
The rest like the not.
Bases ending in ^ : —
§ 108. The penultimate 3? of nouns ending in ^ is leng
thened in the Norn. sing, if it does not belong to root nouns, j
. the moon.
N.
V.
A.
Sid. Kau. t^^f ^fff^r? I 3W*iir<cB ^l
3* I Vart.
J 3T?^eFrR^ ^WiHt: I Pan. VI. 4. 14. The penultimate vowel
of noons ending in q<^ or ^ and in 313; not belonging to a root
ii lengthened when followed by 5 ( fj; ) not belonging to the
Vocative
§ 108 ]
DECLENSION
67
D.
Decline similarly
ill-minded
99
god Brahmi, wq^^ good-minded,
anxious-hearted &o.
the mind.
N. V. A. I^T.
The rest like ^fj^g;.
Decline similarly q^T^, milk, «nn^ age, ani^ protection, fame
, &o.
&c. ^r^ good,
(a) Nonns in ^, g^ or ^^ such as xi^M^ flaring upwards
af^a^ Wind' ClVfg^ long-living, ^r^ an arm &c. are similarly
declined; e. g.
N. sing. N. dual. I. sing. I. dual. Loc. plu.
<hrfg:
Neu.
N.V.A.
Decane similarly vr^rfff^ lustre, ff*^ an oblation,
e, ^3^ a bow, &c.
S*^ ( 55 TOT ) one who wears a garment well.
the
68 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 108-112
Mas. Neu*
N. 5^: tj^tti gTO: N. V. A. |j*:
The rest like ^??H3[. The rest like
Decline similarly fqug'mfe NU44^^ &c.
§ 109. The Nona, sing, of 3?%f^ time, 5^ET^ name of
India, and S^R^ name of Sukracharya is 3T%fT, 35$CT and
a$MI respectively; the Voc. sing, of g^R^ is TWT, 3^R-
and 73R:; the other forms are regular.
§ 110. To feminine nouns ending in ^ simply add the
terminations.
*n^/. splendour.
N.
I.
-L.
§ 111. Obs. The ^rr of 3ct-^i^n^ uttering hymns, becomes
37 before the consonantal terminations, except that of the Nom.
•ing.-, «. g. Nom. s^JW- sing. ^5F5^rT^ dnal.; Instr. sing.
dual sftwn Loc-
Irregular bases.
§ 112. ^ that falls, ^^ a destroyer, ^nj^ one who kills
well, ;f^^f^ desirous of killing. The first two change their ^
to ^ before consonantal terminations while the last two change
their ^ to ^ under the same circumstances, the preceding nasal
being dropped.
Mas.
N. V. sing. N. V. dual. I. sing. I. dual, Loc. plu.
The remaining forms should be similarly made up by adding
the terminations.
DECLENSION.
Neu.
§ 112-114 ]
N. V.
The remaining forms like those of the mas.
§113.
m. a man.
69
I. 5*rr
D. 3%
Ab. r:
N. V.A.
The rest like the mas.
§ 114. The penultimate f or 3- of the words flfaft^ wishing
to read, ?r^^ m.f. a companion, f%^ wishing to do, ^fr^[
one stepping well, 3!ffl%'$r/ a blessing, ggf^, catting well, and
also of nn[, speech, gf; a yoke, 3^ a town all/era, is lengthened
before consonantal terminations; their final is changed to visarga
in the Nom. Sing. e. g.
N. V.
A.
I Pan. VIII. 3. 58. The ff belonging to
a term, coming after ? or 3, short or long, and after a guttural
letter, is changed to ? even when either a nasal, or a visarga or
7 ^ or S> intervenes.
70 SANSKRIT GEAMMAB. \ § 114-115
The remaining forms should be similarly made up by adding
the terminations, ^^r and the following words should be simi-
larly declined.
N. sing. N. dual. I. sing. L dual. Loc. Plu.
Mk
3»:
iff: PKf f^RT »ffiwn\ 'fit
It •« '•" ifr- ; 10
fipft*
N. V. A.
The remaining forms like those of the mas. or fern.
Nouns ending in 3^,, H^, and *q;: —
§ 115. 37 is lenthened in the Norn, sing.*, and 5j is inserted
between 3T and the final ^ in the first five inflections. The final
g; is dropped in the Nom. sing.* the 3? of JTf^ i* lengthened be-
fore this ^ except in the Yoc. sing.
. talented.
V.
A.
See ft. note p. 66
5 115-116 ] DECLENSION. 71
I. vftacu
D. tfraft
Ab. ifrjrff: f,
G. *HtT.
„
Ncu.
N. V.A. vfnrg;
The rest like the mas.
Decline similarly jfttflt having cows,
mas. great.
The rest
N.V.A. TOCT iifift irfrf^ The reit like the mas.
§ 116. Participial hues ending in 3*3; :—
(a) The declension oi these does not differ from that of
noons in irg; except in the Norn. sing. mas. in which the 9f of
3KT is not lengthened. In the case of the dual of the Nom.
rroc. and the Ace. neu. ^ is inserted before the final g- neoes-
larily in the case of the present participles of the roots of the
lit. 4th, and 10th classes, and of causal, desideraiive and
nominal verbs, optionally in the case of those of the 6th class,
of roots ending in aft of the 2nd class, and of those of the Fat.
in rot or «q^, and not at all in the case of the remaining
participles of the present tense.
73 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 116
being. 3?^cJ eating.
mat.
N. V. inn* W<ft W^: N. V.
A. snrrflir „ *raw: A.
The rest like sftro Tne rest
Decline all other participles o* the Present and Fa. Par. in
the mas. similarly.
N. V. A. Mu;
rflit
I
J
Decline q"^^, ^N^, •JliH
like in^.5 ^ft«q^ &c. like g^ ;
JV. ^. The fern, of these ends in $ being the same as Norn.
dnal of the Nen. and has no declensional peculiarities.
Decline &$ ^ m. n. great, 3^3 f*. a deer; ». a drop of water
and snra; the world> like 3^^ wa*. & nw.
(5) 3 is not inserted at all in the case of the participle of the
Pre. of roots of the third class and of the Parasm. fre-
quentative and the participles ^rm^, 3T$r^, ^5TCn£ , 2[fbe^ *
3Tnnj, sf'5^ an^ ^oq^ ; in the case of the Norn. Voo. and Ace.
pin. neu., however, it is optionally inserted :—
mat,
^ giving. siro^ awaking.
N. v.
A.
&o. &c.
§ 116-117 ] DECLENSION. 73
iieu.
N. v. A. 55^ $5?ft ^fi£tT-ft STWJ. srnrar
The rest like
Nouns ending in sjg; and ^.
§ 117. sj is dropped in the Norn. sing, and before all con-
sonantal terminations. In the case of mas. nouns the preceding
3T is lengthened in the first five inflections and f in the Nom.
sing. only. The 3T and f are lengthened in the pin. of the Nom.
Voc. and Ace. of neuter nouns. The 3f is dropped before the
vowel terminations beginning with that of the Aoc. plu. except
when it is preceded by a conjunct consonant having ^ or ^ for
its latter member; it is optionally dropped in the Loo. eing. of
mas. and neuter nouns and optionally in the Nom. Voc. and
Ace. dual of the latter.
In the Voc. sing, the ^ of neu. nouns is optionally retained.
Nouns ending in 373.
tfOT; TTios. the creator,
N.
V.
A.
D. argrdt
Decline similarly 3Wim the self, q-T^q; a sacrificer,
&c.
<T^R^ mas. a king.
V.
A.
74 SANSKBIT GRAMMAE. [ § 117
99
Ab, jr^r: „
Decline similarly ^Tm^fsm. a boundary, ffQT^ ft carpenter,
«. marrow, 4|R*4< greatness, irf|R^, ^fwfc 3lforiW[ &c.»
^IH< auspioiouB-named, ^ffTTO, sr&f^[ a day or the sun
of the word ii lengthened when the ar is dropped ), &c.
& 9-
Horn. sing. Ace. pin. Loc. sing.
N. V.
V.
The rest like the mas.
Decline similarly ^ifa( a hide, 3773 an armour, «nfa( * boose,
old fcc., ^[ happiness, ?|^ sport, jest,
£ 117-1 18 ] DECLENSION. 75
5TO3* neu.
N.
V.
A.
D.
Ab.
L. nfft-Rft „
Decline similarly o4lU< the sky, fftH^C ^ bladder, !m^ lover
bymn, ^TR^ lustre, a house, &c.
Irregular Bases.
§ 118. o^ apf«R[ and nouns ending in (^ lengthen their
in the Norn. sing, only; the ^ of 5^ is changed to or after
mas., the sun.
N.
V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
mas., 'name of Indra7.
„
f^rar
76 SANSKKIT GRAMMAR. [§118-119
D. ^t S*Wn* TOW
Ab. fro: » »
G.
™>. name of a deity.
V.
A.
&c. &c. &c.
Neu.
N. v. A. >
§ 119. The ^ of 5»§f^ mas. <& dog,' 5^ was. < a young man/
and TOF; ma«. ' name of Indrs,' is changed to ^ before the
vowel terminations beginning with that of the Ace, plu,*
T
• ^*j[ It
A. "cnH1^ 99
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
^T I Pan. VI. 4. 133,
J 119-120 J DECLENSION. 77
N.
V.
A.
I.
&c.
L.
N.
V.
I.
&c. &c.
L.
N.V.A.
The rest like the maa.
§ 120. ^f ^ n. meaning ' a day ' changes its final to
(and finally to risarge ) when followed by consonantal termina
tions or by nothing; in other cases it is declined like
N. V. A.
I.
Ab.
* Also the optional forms in 3 in the Voc. sing.
78 SANSKRIT GBAKHAB. [ § 120-122
G.
Obs :— jfiTrfe* when mas. is declined like ^fjw^ when it
takee the consonantal terminations and like *J3T* *nen
the vowel terminations; when n5«. it is declined like
N.
V.
A.
I.
D.
The rest like the mas.
§ 121. 3T&[ OT. a horse, except when preceded by the
negative particle 3^1 ( forming a neg. Tat. ) is declined like a
word ending in ^ in all cases except the Nom. and Voc.
singulars; e. a. N. a^f 3ffoft 3^^:j V. 3f^ 3R??fr, 3T^?T:;
A. JHJrdu, 3T^fr, 3?^: &c. But gw^ ( ^ T%rar^rrw ) is
regularly declined like q^t^ ; 3R^Tf 3R^foft &c.
^q; MU. ie declined as ^J^ Frfefir .^iRtT' Nom. Voc.
Ace.; the rest like 3^5; mas.
§ 122. Words ending in 53—
•The ^ may be optionally retained (3tai(i$ &o. ) by
Pan. VIII. 4. 11.
122-123 ] DECLENSION.
mas. an elephant
N.
V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
Decline similarly ^rf^f the moon, 5^73 one having a stick,
a wealthy man, ^f^t an elephant, ^|7^< one haying a
garland, STRlirrfN «»d all other words in f^.
neu.
N. A.
V. ^T- » 99
The rest like the mat. Decline similarly $n?^ ».,
eloquent, imR^ «• &c-
Irregular Bases.
§ 123. The first five forms of qr%I a road, j?f^[ a churning
handle, and 3£$n$ft( name of Indra are irregular.* They drop
their f^[ before vowel terminations beginning with the Ace. plu.
N. V.
A.
I.
D.
* <Tftirc3g?n*n^ I f%SWRW?n> I ^W \ TO %«fa : I Pan.
VII. 1. 85-88.
SO SANSKBIT GRAMMAR. [ § 128-124
Ab.
O.
Decline similarly nfqig and ^t^n^f, the latter word, how-
ever. does not insert the sj in the first five inflections; *. g.
Nom. ¥$r: *r««if Heit? :-nijf-'F» Ace.
Basea ending in
§ 124. These are the perfect participles derived from roots
with the affix q^ to which the intermediate f is prefixed in
some cases. They have a 3 prefixed to their final ^ in the first
five inflections, the penultimate 37 being lengthened before it.
In the Nom. sing, m, the ^ is dropped and the Voc. sing, ends
in qig.3- is substituted for 5>, before which the preceding short
f, if any, is dropped, before the vowel terminations beginning
with those of the Ace. plu. and before the {• of the Nom. Voc.
and Ace. dual of the neuter nouns. The final ^ of a root is
changed to 3 before q^ reappears before this 3*; final ^ is
changed to ^ before the consonantal terminations and in the
Nom. Voc. and Ace. sing of the neuter.
fij^rr m. a learned man.
N. f%5ra[ f^ffofr
V. . Orsn „
A. ft^r^ »
Ab.
„
§ 124-125 ] DECLENSION. 81
N. V. A. ft'** T%fT
The rest like the mas.
Decline similarly ^T?j^r^ or ^<l«-q^ one who has gone,
HlT^qq, OEe wb° k*8 stood, fjfcfr^ one who has carried, JU|^
bountiful, ^J%.^"^ one who has heard, ^f^T^ one who has sat,
^T^ honouring or serving the gcds, &o. m. and. n ; e. g.
Nom. siog. Nom. dual. I. sing. I. dual
Bases in
§ 125. Comparatives in q-^ are declined like bases in 3-^
in the first five inflections and the Voc. sing, and like nouns
in other respects; 0. g.
(comparative of SRM ) more praiseworthy.
N.
A.
I.
The rest like ^r^^- Decline all comparatives in fqr^ auch
»Tfm^;> Stfta^, Jl^^, &o. similarly.
Neu.
N. V. A. <te 4^ft ^^fi%
The rest like ITf^. Decline n. nouns in fij^ similarly.
H. 8. G. 6
82 SAXSKHIT GKAMMAB. [ § 126-128
WORDS OF IRBEGULAB DECLENSION.
§ 126. 3if|sT n. a bone, %j§ ». curds, ^rf^j «. a thigh and
«. an eye, become 3JW*, 3[q^, ^F^ra;, and a^r^C respec-
tively before the vowel terminations beginning with the I.
sing. * and then they follow the declension of nouns in 3;; in
other respects they are declined like
V.
A.
Ab.
L.
ffij- and the rest should be similarly declined.
§ 127. sr^/ water, is declined in the plural; it lengthens
iti 3T in the N. and changes its q1 to 5- before consonanUl
terminations. 3TT^:-3?^:-3^:-3T?r^>3(|?^:-3^rri3r-3Tcg.
§ 128. The words ^TTf/ old age, srvfT «• one not getting
old and f^r a god, optionally assume the forms
before the vowel terminations : —
„
V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
VII. 1. 75.
§ 128-129 ] DECLENSION. 83
Decline f^rar &o. like nw and
&c.
,»
. like
V.
A.
The rest like the ma
S 129. The words <TT3> ^Pcf,
optionally assume the forms q^, ^, ^7
all terminations beginning with the Ace. plu
^ft-^w. an arm.
N. V. <fr
I.
D. qi^- «ui „
A 1- J*V_
Ab. 5T^T^Wf: 99
L.
VI. 1. 63.
t
84 SANSKEIT GBAMMAB. [ § 129
Neu.
N.V.A. <£: 5fft
The rest like mas.
foqif. night.
N.
v.
A.
Ab.
Or.
L.
N.
V.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
. a sum mi t, a table -land.
is also 77i. declined like 35 with the optional forma from
the Ace. pi. which is qrrvj^, ^3;.
The remaining words should be similarly declined according
to the declensions which their various endings follow : —
tfl^ *w. a foot.
N.
V.
A-
. the nose.
§ 129] DECLENSION.
m. a tooth.
N.
A.
I.
L.
N.
A
I.
D.
L. *TR
4TTO wi. month
N.
A.
I.
L.
n. heart.
N.
A.
I.
L. _. _ ^
3T^3^n. blood.
N.
A.
I.
D.
iS^rfri mwmm* *w
86 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ §
^ m. soup,
N.
A.
I.
.A. 5?
w. the liver.
*•
1*. T^fff> if^-T^l^ 1^H
^T^( n. dung.
^- ?T^
A.
. water.
N.
A.
W. HiOutll.
, airc:
i flesh.
flfT
A- „ „
§ 120-132 ] DECLENSION.
*r
. an army.
A.
I.
D.
§ 130. The following suffixes are sometimes added to
nominal bases to express the meanings of cases.
(a) The inffix ^^ added to the base of a noun gives it the
sense of the Ab.'*; as smr3[?T: , from carelessness'. ^^T: from
the real state of the thing, in reality, jjrRfT ' from knowledge/
(If) The suffix 5T is used . ^ denote the meaning of the Loc.*
case, and is generally added to pronominal adjectives; as ft-r
*in that place, there'; ^?nr <in every place, everywhere, &c.
§ 131. A few nouns such as -q^ 'the lowest world/ ^r 'hea-
ven,' tf*^ 'a year of an era', 3T«n* Betting,' 5^ 'ease,' ^^^ 'a
bow', ^|% 'hail, farewell' &o. are indeclinables.
Chapter IV.
PRONOUNS AND THEIR DECLENSION.
§ 132. The following 35 words are termed* 'Pronouns' in
Sanskrit:— ^rJ, ft5*, ^ 3^*, 3flT> ^cm (». e. the word form-
ed by the addition of the terminations 3TFTT *nd 3TfTW to the
1 ^ff"Tf^5 P^n. V. 3. 7. 10. * By
| Pan. V. 3. 14. ?riy , 5j^ &c. may stand for all cases ex-
cept the Nona, (though they may be used for the Nonx also },
88 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. f § 132-133
pronouns ffa%9 q^ 7 and ?r^ which become ^, q- and & respec-
tively before these; e. g. ^?Tf, ^R, q-ffT? TcTR, and
, «T^g[ and {%&•.
1 — Personal Pronouns.
§ 133. The pronouns 3T*R^ 'I,' g«$R[ 'thou', and
honour :'—
JV. B. — The declension of the first two of these pronouns
the same in all the three genders.
3^f^* m.f. n.
HT
Ab. R^
G. RR,
.. n.
A.
L
Ab.
G.
L.
i ^i^^r^f ^ i
i Pan. VIII. 1. 20-53.
§ 133-134 ] PRONOUNS AND THEIR DECLENSION. 89
be declined like H*T^; *3T^ *nr?rfr H^cf: N.
A. &c. 3T^H^, ff^Wat( see Syntax < Pronouns ' )
fire similarly declined.
§ 134. (a) The optional shorter forma of the pronouns
3^R^[ and 5«JT^ &re never used at the beginning of a sentence
or of a foot of a metre; * nor can they be used immediately
before the particles ^r, g-f, 5 or 57, 3*5 and q^-f; aa TO ^If my
house, and not ^r ^5^;%!^: ^ftifrwrac *$&*'. *HrfT*3 (Sid-
Kau. ), < may Krshna, revered throughout or capable of being
known properly from all the Vedas, always protect us; and
not rf: ^sor: &o.j ff^r ^c^TffcTc^ * this is surely your deed/ and
not tf <pr &c. But if these particles do not connect these forms
they may be used with them}; as 5ft ^ftsg- ^ ^mfr ( Sid. Kau. )
Hara and Hari are my lords, &c.
Obs. — (b) The shorter forms may be used in a sentence
having one verb; ^rrsfat ^ 3Tt^t ^r^rf&i but sf|^ ^^ &*
*rf^rfar as there are two verbs J.
(c) These shorter forms are not also used immediately
after the Vocative case except when a qualifying adjective
follows it;+^rreRT^ (and not *: > <m? ^T (Sid. Kau.)
'Oh God! do thon protect us always'; but ^ fqr^t «T ^nt (Sid.
Kau. ) 'Oh merciful Hari, protect us.'
*T?T^I 3T5?ra ^qn?ltl I P4n. VIII. 1. 17. 18. The follow-
ing couplets illustrate the use of these short forms
^3 *W
: II
^: ?r ^: u Sid. Kau. f
Pan. VIII. 1. 24.
J
Sid. Kau.
iJ I Vart,
Pan. VIII. 1. 72. 73.
90 . SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 134-135
(<J) The shorter forma may or may not be used when there,
is no 3^1457 ( the subsequent mention of a thing already
mentioned ); qrKTT ?T ^Tr^f?(T, VTT?TT <T^ *TTfitffa> fTO 3T i; but must
be used when there is anvades' a*; <TC& ?fr *fR: c bow to thee
( already described ) only.'
2 — Demonstrative Pronouns.
§ 136. The pronouns ^ 'that or he, she, it,' qr^ 'this/
firq 'this' and 3TT3C 'that'. The Nom. sing of the first two is
respectively ^: and tr^f: mas. and ^r »Qd rrqr fei** IQ other
cases they become ft and tr-ft and are declined like nouns in &
except in the Nom. pi., D. Ab. sings., G. pi. and L. sing, the
terminations of which are J, ^, ^RT^, ^IH and f^T«3[ wat.
and fq-, ^Tf^ , HO^ , 5ETT^ and ^rri^ /«OT. respectively. All
pronouns ending in 3T are similarly declined.
was.
N. *: ?f>
A. ?T^ m
I.
B.
Ab.
O.
L.
N.
A.
I.
D
Ab.
G.
L,
I V4rt.
§ 135 ] PRONOUNS AND THEIR DECLENSION. °1
Decline HT^ which means the same thing as <r^ , similarly;
'• <?• *$*•• tsflr «*T Nom.; at aff
N. and A. ^
The following cases like the
N.
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
N. <rn
A.
I.
Ab.
G.
T,.
N.
A.
The rest like the mas.
Neu.
T: I Pan. II. 4. 24.^ [9 optionally substituted
for f^ and ^^ in the Ace., Inst. Sing, nnd Gon. and T£OO.
Duals when there is 3i^i>$T ( see g 137 ).
92 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 135
Notes: — The visarga of ^: and trq1: is dropped when followed
by any letter except 8? in which case the usual Sand hi takes
place; ^r iFRS'g, <TT 3TWrfSi but tr^tsT^tFI. &o. Vide § 50.
?«r
A.
D.
Ab.
Fern.
N.
I.
D.
Ab.
N.
A.
The rest like the mas.
N.
A.
Ab.
99
§ 135-138 ] PRONOUNS AND THEIR DECLENSION. 93
Fern.
N. araft 3
A.
D.
Ab.
N. & A.
The rest like the mas.
§ 136. The following couplet ( Karika ) gives a rule for the
correct use of theae pronouns : —
is used with reference to a person or thing near at hand,
and q^ to one nearer still; 3?^ id used of a person or thing
at a distance, while ^ is used of one that is absent.
§ 137. The optional forms of f^ and TT^ in the Ace.,
Inst. Sing, and Gen. & Loo. Duals are to he uaed whc-n there
is anvades' a* i. e. their proper forms have already been used in
a previous clause; a. g.
has studied grammar, teach him prosody,' 3T*nfh
rr^ft: sr^rf ^^ , * The family of them both is pure, and their
wealth ample/
3— The Relative Pronouns.
§ 138. The pronouns q^ 'who, which'; mas. fern, and neu.^
mat. base *TI fern, base qr.
Sid. Kao,
94 SANSKRIT GF.AMMAB. [ § 138-139
^ man
^_ ^
N. *T>
A.
I.
D.
Ab.
G.
L.
N. *T
A.
D. *W js
Ab. *FFir: »
G.
L.
/^W
N. & A. T^ ^
The rest like tbe ««.
4 The Inter rogati ye Pronoun*.
| 139. The pronoun fa^mat.fem. & «•».; ». Base
basest.
Afas.
N. ^. ^ *
A.
1.
D;
Ab.
G.
N.
A.
5 139-143 ] PRONOUNS AND THEIR DECLENSION. 95
B.
Ah. <fct<ri:
Aw.
N. & A. f^ %
The remaining cases liko the flias.
5 — Reflexive Pronouns.
^ 140. The sense of the reflexive pronoun is; in Sanskrt,
expressed by the word 3firR^ '**&' which is invariably used
in the masculine gender and singular number, and by the
reflexive adverb *ro^ e. g. gtf 3[?^f?WR *TCT: ^fff ^nw:
" they all (the wives of Das'aratha ) saw in dreams that they
were guarded by dwarfs;" so fr or ^rr
G — Indefinite Pronouns.
141. Indefinite pronouns are formed by the additiop
n or 3q^ and sometimes of f?^ to the varioafi
cases of the pronoun f%^ in all the genders; e. y. ^f%^fc ^OT
a certain one, £ff<T, ^^Tl^, ^TT^^, SnTTft; ^Tr?^5[, &c.
ji 142. The terminations given above are also added to
interrogative adverbs in the sens? of indefiniteness; aa tfe$n^<i
at some time, ?j^r^T, ^f^f%^ some, Ir7f%r^ somewhere, &c.
7 — Correlative Pronouns.
14H. Correlatives are formed by the affixed ar^ added
to q^, ^ and ^^- ? and q^ added to f^ and f%^ in the sense
of -as much asi7 and ^^ror^^in the sense of 'similar to';
and q^ become ftr, ^«T a^d qr respectively before
and f ^ and r%^ ? an(l T% before q^ and f and ^r
before ^ or f ^; «. g. m*^ ( cTfTKRmR^r ^, ?q^ ( ?
), «Tf ^1 li^e that, f ^ like this, T%trf how rnucD, &c.
96
SANSKRIT GEAMMAE.
[ § 144-146
§ 144. The affix aim is added to ?r^, *T^ and r%^to show
number or measure e. g. ifa 'so many', q-fSr 'as many/ and
3sTft < how many'. These are declined in the plural only, and
take no termination in the Nom. and Ace.; 0. g. Nom. and
Ace. $m Inst. 5Fnrft: the rest like 5 R.
8 — Eeciprocal Pronouns.
§ 145. Reciprocity is expressed by the repetition of the
pionominal adjectives 3f?q-, 5^ and trj; e. g. a^sft^ HdRdT>
and q*<^r^. These are generally used in the sing, and also
adverbially e. g. <r^Kor ^^(q^Fftf &c. . ( Rag. VII. 14)j
qTfTT R^s% &«. They are more commonly used as the first
members of compounds; as 9T?'ff<3r3T\WMrMI^ 3"^ &0- (^u-
I, 44; SrftcWmr: (Sifl- X. 24.) &c.
9- -Possessive Pronouns.
§ 146. Possessive pronouns are formed by means of the
secondary affix £q- added to cf^ , tr^ , 3T?R?1, and 5«H5 ; and
3T and |^ added to s?f^, and g«R^, changed respectively
to Rm^ and cTfsp|j in the sing, and 3TWr> and m«lTT in the
plu. before these; e. g.
Mas.
Sing.
Plural.
'my, mine'
'our, ours*
Sing.
my, mine'
Plural.
3rcR3ffcT 'our, ours*"
§ 146-148 ] PRONOUNS AND THBIB DECLENSION. 97
mas. fern.
Sing. Plural. Sing. Plural.
*thy, gwtfv ' your, r^mf * thy, ^CR^pT
thine. ' yours.' thine.' yours.'
i«Hi«MUi ,>
T». mas. fern.
N. B. These are declined like nouns ending in «r, 3TT or f
regularly. ^ is a possessive pronoun by itself.
10 — Pronominal Adjectives.
§ 147. gfwr 'another/ 3t?*nrc 'either of two/ fflt 'other,'
q<fedH 'one of many/ ^^T 'who or which of two/ ^fir 'who or
which of many/ qrcTT *who.,or which of two/ jr^-jr *who or which
of many/ <f^ <that $oe ( of two )/ ?nnT 'that one ( of many )/
are declined in all the three genders like ^ e. g.
mas.
N. (fcflil
^•c.
. &. A.
JV. J5. 3T«Trf JT is not a pronoun, as it is not mentioned in the
jroup 4J«uf^ ( H^MJHU^I^-HI 1W mdNl^l^l ^IT Sid. Kau. ). It
is, therefore, declined like nouns ending in 37.
§ 148. Decline ^f, f%^, *rw and ffor all having the same
meaning, 317 ( declined in the dual only ) and srvrq* ( which has
no dual according to Kaiyatft and other grammarians) both
meaning 'both/ f <K &Q<1 jrqaft? 'one of two/ like ir^ except in the
Norn, and Ace. sing, of the neu. which is formed by adding *^; 0. ^.
H. S. G. 7
SANSKRIT QBAMMAB. [ § 148-150
3$ mas. 'all.'
N.
A.
L *nror fNYuiNi
D.
Ab
G
L.
Fern.
N.
A.
I.
D.
Ab
G.
L-
>**
N. &. A. OT*
The rest like the mas.
(a) — CTT when it means 'equal7 is not a pronoun and is
leolined like nouns in 3f; e. g. frtf: ^mV tfm: Norn.,
Jingo CTTTHTO G. plu. as in the Sutra of Pail.
I 1. 3. 10.
§ 149. 03s :— ?cr and ?w ( the 10th and llth ^wrRs ) the ore
( ud^tta), the other <^«|^|^ (anudatta), both synonymb of
are declined like ^r$. The former is of the form f^g;
according to some and then it is declined regularly by adding
the terminations ; e.g. tQT?^ Pftft ?3tt: Nom. &c.
§ 150. ^ when it does not mean " a class " or <« wealth " is
a pronoun aod is declined like ^* m.f. n. • but it forms its
§ 150-154 ] PEONOUNS AND THEIR DECLENSION. 99
Nom plu. and Ab. and Loc. sing, optionally like rrtr when
mas.- as ^% or ^«jj: 'one's own' Nom plu.; but $37: 'people of
one's class' only ( declined like ^ftr ).
§ 151. 3jnU is a pronoun ( and therefore declined like ^m
n.f.) when it means " exterior, outer; or what is to be worn
out-aide, as a garment"* except when followed by 5^; it is
optionally declined like nouns ending in 3? in the Nom. pi. and
Ab. and Loo. sing, of the mas. 0. g.
*T STTOPT: ( garments ). But
§ 152. %JT meaning 'half is a pronoun, but it is optionally
declined like TTO in the Nom. pin. mas • in other respects it is
declined likd 37.
§ 153. if$ 'prior, eastern', 3T*T 'posterior, western', ^t%ur
Southern,' g^R 'superior, northern, subsequent', 3HT 'other/
and aro?[ ^inferior, lower,' when they denote relation in space,
time or person with reference to a particular thing or point of
time &c. and are not a name, are pronouns f and are then declin-
ed like 9$; but they are optionally declined like rot in th*
Nom. plu. and' Ab. and Loc. siog. when ma*, e.g. Nom. ^}:
or
&c.. but ^T%UTT: <IPT^T: ( skilful musicians ) only, and not
for ^T%or does not show any rektion herej so ^WfT* ^T9: and
not ^pft, as s^m: is a name here.
§ 154. n;$r when a numeral is declined in the sing, and fg
in .the dual only; fj[, is considered as f, and they are both
declined like 9$ in all the three genders; 9 y.
Mat. fern. mas fern. &c. neu.
N.
: I Pan. I. 1. 36.
g|fboM*C I Vart.
. 1. 11. 34.
100 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [§154-157
A. <r*5n <n?T* tf t
J. <j%sr <TOTT span* The rest like
D. qr**& ^^ » the mas.
Ab.
G.
L.
(fcjr MM. q^j^ N. A. The rest like the
cr^ when it does not mean 'one' is declined in the dual and
plural also.
5 155. The various meanings of V£& are: —
U
or little, q^TR or chief, pre-eminent, xnnr or foremost
or sole, only, ^rvTROi or common ( as 3ttWS^Tg?rRf3r ff
^ %g: ), *WR or the same ( as gtf Kr^Tr^?jt JTR ), and
or number ( one ).
§ 156. HOT, ^TCH, 3(^T, 3Tvi, ^W, and words ending in
the termination OT optionally form their Nom. plu. like that
of pronouns} e, y.
1 1— -Pronominal Adverbs.
§ 157. The pronominal adverbs that are moat commonly
met with are derived from the pronouns a<r, q<!^, *^[, f^r
I%^7 and ^r? and the pronominal adjectives ^cpc £c. by means
of such affixes as ^ , 7, ';:f , ^ &c. added in the sense of the
Ab. or the Loc., ^T, f^Rin, f| &c. showing time, fu^t showing
point of time, place or direction, 3TT, 3Tf^» 3tTTf &c. expressing
direction, TIT, $r+&c. expreseing way or manner &c.; e. g.
• See § 130.
t ti^l'tffi^TT^" ^y& ^T I ^'Tl^?'?^ I 3l^«TT ^T^T ^ ' ^^ ^T
I Pan. V. 3. 15-19. 21.
. V.
S- 27.
arrf? ^ > i Pan. V. 3.
34. 36. 3. M»K^^^Trl msi5; HWW \ P&n. V. 23-25.
§ 157-158 ] PRONOUNS AND THEIR DECLENSION. 101
W^T, thenj d$|rflq, at that time;
then, therefore; TOT, so, ?nr, there;
Oft, thence, thereupon, therefore, &c.
, now,??*n*, thru; 3^, here,
therefore; f?r:, from this, hence;
now; f £, here.
nowj fr«r^ thus; 3^: hence,
therefore; aw here.
*$, when; ^ when; *nrr «s; q^
where; q^f:, whence J? since, because,
^f}, when; qp^r, when; sp*r^, how;
^5T, where5 ^, where; ^r:, where,
whence; ^5, whence, how.
wf^, always; ?ar^f, always; ^ff:,
everywhere, on all sides; *rg=r every-
where, in all places.
q^f: further on, beyond, &c.
3*:, S^ffTec before, in front, &c.
or
own below.
,
or
behind, below, downwards.
T^cTRl, from behind, afterwards,
westward, &c.
or in
the south, on the right side.
SMS 3Tm^, ^^^mft to or in tne
north, &c.
§ 158. When a pronominal word is used as the subordinate
member of a compound, or is at the end of an Inst. Tat. , or of
a sentence having the sense of the Inst. Tat., or at the end 01 a
Dwandwa, it is not declined like a pronoun*; 0. g. 3|
Pan. I. 1. 30. 31. *
I Vart. <{|<JI4<m*l I
102
SANSKRIT GBAMMAR.
[ § 158-159
not
°r wfor T*I* and not
in the case of a Dwandwa comp., however, it is optional!/ de-
clined like a pronoun in the Nom. plo.,* as WrT$9^ or
CHAPTER V.
-^•OfrS'****^-
NUMERALS AND THEIR DECLENSION.
§ 159. Cardinals and Ordinals
/•
mat.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
IS
14
16
* fie
3 ft
v
H
vs
<z
Pan. 1.1 32,
f Th« word qf^ also denotes ten. Cf. Rag. IX. 74.
} ^ becomes ^ff necessarily when followed by ^ ( substi-
tuted for ^ ) and ^T^, optionally when followed by vnr, after
which 3- is changed to ^ and vj to ^ «. y. ^TTT ( vide § 169. b. )
§ 159 ] KUMERALS AND THEIR DECLENSION. 103
17 ^
18 %£
is ?<<. ;nre5T5r or •
or rr^Rn^r, o^tY, oif^fH^rjr, otff or
or v4t«iffci&T« osftt ofaaiiffriH. orfT or
22 ^ 5T'f^^rf& ^rft^r, o^fr, or of^nr,
23 ^ ^^rfif^TRT rrq^ifif^T, o^fr, or oMdU, ojfr
24 9«
"«<" »> >> »>
25 9H
wy»i » >» »»
26 ^ T^J^T^nn ^T^^T, o^fV ,, 99 ),
27 9v»
"*(•» » >/ >»
F, o^ or
, oiff
30 ^o i^SJuiH^f l^ttfty °$TT or fg^f^ffr oj^r
31 ^
32 ^^
33 ^^
34 3V
35 ^H
36 35
37 3\s>
38 3<s
39 3<l
41 V? <pP^?1Tfi[?tT^
104 SANSKBIT GBAMMAB. [ § 159
49 VR 5TO*Tf?STS or
fg^^ipfsiq.
43 V aiHMNififcl^ or
44
45
46
47
48
49 ^ grc^^uffd or
50 Ho q*«m$l</ qs^n^T, o^ or
51 H^ ^^r^rn^m
52 H^ ftlM^I^I^ or
KIH*''!^*^.
53 H^
54 HV
55 HH
5o H^
57 *W
58 H^ 3>'«i< or
59
or
63 53 3nr*i% or
04 sv
«5
§ 159 ] NUMERALS AND THEIR DECLENSION. 105
68 ^c
69 S^ *i*i^fe or
70 \So ti urn /<"•?• ttHmtiH* oift
71 vs^ it<etiHi?T H*ilHd> orff or
72 vs^ S'lfVHPf or
73 VS3
74 V9V ^
75 an IT
76 vs^
77 vsvs
78 vs<s
79 vs^ ?f^fiV.M or
80 Co
82 <^
83 <-^
84 <^V
85 <JH
86 <i^
87 iv?
88 <:<-
89 <i9 TCf5T?fff or
90 «^o
^2 ** ffTii5r^ or
93 9.3 SUJRaf^ or
106 SANSKRIT GEAMMAB. [ § 159-160
94 V<*
95 *H
96 <^
97 ^V5
98 9£ 3KLM<4f<f or
99
200 9 o o i%5T?T neu
or^^
300 Boo firSTrT n«u. Or
1000 \ooo ^rfw «•«• °r
«• °r
10,000 8T5?r ««". 100,000 s$r «eu, or
ma9
neu. Each of these is ten times as great as the preceding.*
§ 160. The cardinal numbers between fiferft and
f^T^and ^Tf«lR^a> i4 ^^ be fleen» are made UP b
tr^, T%, &c. up to SCT; to the lower. The ninth intermediate
number may also be made up by prefixing q-^Ffr, 3T^ or q'*W
to the higher. In these compounds (5, |% and &&^ aie changed
ao ^r, 9<P, and 3^1 necessarily before f^rfff and fg^r^, and
optionally before the rest except SR^nm before which they
remain unchanged, f
wtfr
: t*4l«fl«ft cqq^Ki^ fTtTT: ^: II
, Pan. VI. 3. 47-49
§ 161-163 ] NUMERALS AND THEIR DECLENSION. 107
§ 161. The cardinal numbers between 100 and 200, 200 and
300, &o. are generally expressed by means of atnN» added to
the number showing the excess and then optionally prefixing
the whole to 100, 200, &c, e. g. <rqnf^fc $ra or ^Fn^^nt 101,
or r3*$rtfre3T<T H2, traro^ft** $ra 150- &c.
After 1000 this srfre may be repeated 'with every multiple of
ten er hundred; «. ^
177639,
Similarly OTT may also be used insted of arrq^ *• 9-
754. Or these may also be, at times, expressed
by the copulative particle ^ as ^HT 5f 3nm% ftSTRW 720.
§ 162. The Tad. affix 3f* may be used, instead of
in the ease of the cardinal numbers ending in ^^T^, the numeral
RsTTfT and those ending in 313 t. 0. in the case of the numerals
111-159, 211-259, 811-359, &c. and qualifying the numerals
^nr and qffif before \vlaeh the final 3^, grf^r and 3^g^ are dropped
^m^ HI, ft^T 5T<t 120, q^r^T ^ 150,
217, f%^t 1%^nt 330 and so on.
§ 163. The ordinals from ir^, rj, f^ ^% and ^ f are
irregularly formed. The ordinal from other numerals up to
^•513; inclusive are formed by dropping the final ^ and adding 17
and after ^r^[ up to *i<i^^l< by simply dropping the ;j. The
ordinals from fgr^ri% t above are iormed by adding ^rr or by
dropping the iff of fersrfk and the final coneonant of the rest;
the compound numerals, in this latter case, change the final
vowel to 3T, while the simple ones ending in a vowel i. t.
: i ^riftsrasa' i Pan. V. 2. 45.
46. ^Tff^r^TOf^'^ I Vart.
t ^T^filTiraSft '&$ \ Pan. V. 2. 51- so q^^:y ^5^: &c.;
'Vart. efar, i,
Pan. V. 2. 54, 55.
. V.3.56,58.
108 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. (§163-160
and snrfir form their ordinals in the first way
only; as *?&&: or trgpfffew:, but *f%<m only, ^m has invari-
ably 3ma*T.
DECLENSION OF THE NUMEBALS ( CARDINALS AND OBDINALS )
§ 164. ^ ( <rj£T fem.)y ft ( *T>». ), T% ( fitaV«*« )> «"*
^gT ( ^TO/«m. ), are all adjectives and takes the gender, num-
ber and case of the nouns they qualify.
§ 165. <£3» is declined in the sing. ( though it may have the
dual and plural also ), and ft *n tlie dmtl alone. For further
particulars see § 154. f% and ^5^ are declined in the plu.
Alone. E. g.
mas. fem. mas. fern.
A. ?fa[ „ A.
D. Ab. fiinwp iffQW D. Ab.
G.
neu.
N.v. A. sfrflr N.V.A.
The rest like the mas. The rest like the mas.
§ 166. 7333 — ^T33R(. These are also adjectives agreeing
in case with the nouns to which they are applied. They are
dech'ned in the pi. and are uniform m all the three genders.
N.V.A.
I.
Dat. & Ab.
: ft^Tt m^^ » Pan. VII. 2. 99.
166-169 ] NUMEBALS AND THEIB DECLENSION.
100
G.
L.
^[ and the following cardinals up to
to be declined like
§ 167.
ought
and other cardinal numbers up to
are all feminine substantives, the numerals ^TrT, ^Kf5T,
&c. are all neuter, with the exception of $$r which is 72011. and
fern. OTTZ which is fern, and ^ and 3TWTO both of which are
mas. and have no declensional peculiarities. They are
declined in the sing, and so used with a plural noun; e. g.
25 Brahmanas; qfrl^irnre^nfa or
;*>: or ^frf*: by 111 men or women; q
: with Rs. 999 &c. They may be made to have duals
and plurals by being used as fixed standards of counting* 0. g.
STTSTOTRr f%5T?TT: many twenties of Br$hmanas; \ ^
two hundreds of women &c.
§ 168. The ordinals are declined regularly except:—
( see § 156 ) and fjrfor and ^fft^ which are optionally
declined like pronouns in the Dat. Ab. Gen. and LOG. sing ;
NUMEBAL ADVEBBS.
§ 169. ( a ) ^^ once, f|: twice, T=T: thrice, ^5: four
times; from qn^ onwards adverbs of frequency are formed by
adding ^^: before which final ^ is dropped 0. g. q^i^jF^: five
times, ^nrfir^: seven times, &c.
( * ) ^T^n* or ^^q-ij; in one way or part, f|qr or gpjr or \$
in two ways or parts; fgTjr or g-qri or Ifir^in three ways, &c.;
? in four ways, <ri£T or frS^TT in six ways, *wn, s?^TT, &c.
Pan. V. 3. 42-46.
O SANSKEIT GRAMMAB. [ § 169-171
( c ) <rs»3r: one by one; fer : two and two, by twos; ao
§ 170. Other derivatives from the numerals: —
( a ) by the Taddhita affix ^ which is added to numerals
ending in 5^ and fif e. g. <ngra?: bought for five ( rupees &c. )
^*Tnfo?*: bought for forty; %tff?ne: bought for twenty
( ooinf , &c. )
( b ) *by means of the Tad. affix a^ in the lense of " consisting
of parts" or " collection "; «. y. ^TgW ( ^g^tfV /«»»• ) consist-
ing of four parts or a collection of four; so <na?TO (fern, ift);
OT is optionally changed to 3TO after f$ and f^ «. 9* %& or
f-jr^q- (_qr /0m. ) twofold, consisting of two parts, or a pair;
=nr or fiftf? (.^/«m. ) threefold or consisting of three parts, a
collection of three, a triad.
( e ) by means of ^ and 3R£ •. y. ^ a collection of six,
collection of five, 331^ & collection of ten, a decade, &«.
Chapter VI
DEGREE OP COMPARISON.
§ 171. or and HIT are the most common terminations of the
comparative and the superlative degrees respectively.! They
are added to that crude form of words which they assume, be-
fore the Inat. duftl termination; e. g. WJtta<jUfcUl*J<1 33*-
similarly
* See Chap. IX. Intro,
: Pan. V. 3.65.57.66.1.1.22. When atit'aya or
excess of the one thing over many is to be shown ?nr and f g-
are the affixes used; and when out of two things one is, to be
separated as possessing some quality in excess ft? and
are affixed. <r? and rm may also added to verbs.
§171-176] DEGREE OP OOMPABISON. Ill
§ 172. Before these the final f and ^ of a pratipadifca are
optionally shortened, e g. sftSTTT or m?rn, «Tmm or |%nTT;
^Tf T ( more lame ) or *T5?m, ^«dUT, ^Tgrfm, &o.
§ 173. JTT and ?rw when attached to verbs, and indeclinables
forming adverbs, assume the forms of <TTT^ and rTPrn^*
or
&c.; but rt^T: a^j- (higher).
§ 174. fii^ is another termination of the comparative degree
and $% of the superlative. These are added to adjectives of
quality only f. Before these the last vowel of a word with the
following consonant if any is dropped; e. g. P
<*£, tnfnre; , <ri%er} w^ wfT*m , wf^; &c. but
•only.
§ 175. The possessive affixes at the end of words and the
affix 3 are dropped before £ir^ and fgr{ and then these
terminations are applied subject to the above rule; e. g.
talented
so ^rrfrqia , WI^B' ^rom $rfo^ one having a garland &c.
§ 176. § f is substituted for the ^ (short) oi a base
preceded by a consonant before fq^, ?F and the Tad. aff.
I Pan. V. 4. 11. arr is added
to r?T and air after r%^C7 or a word ending in qr or a tubanta or
tiiianta ( ms^^rf ) except when they form adjectives.
t 3T3ITafT ( f . «. fr* and f y ) ^N^MI^ I Pan. V. 3. 58.
J f^rnt^W I gHTO^rg I Pan. VI. 4, 154.
§ * ^T *3T^Ht: I Pan. VI. 4. 1J1.
112 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 176-177
f^T thin' comp. tf^ftq^ superl. Sfcf$ig
3S 'strong, firm' „
<rft3? 'head, chief „
^ 'broad' „ „
ygSf 'much' „ ^fpr^ „
^'aoft' „ a^m^ „
§ 177. The following is an alphabetical list of the irregular
comparatives and superlatives that are commonly met with: —
Positive Comparative Superlative-
near'*
'little't
wide'f
'mean/ 'smalP
'heavy1
'restless or anxious' ? —A—, ^^^
'satisfied' $ *^
long'
'distant'
'praiseworthy' x w^ or ^q-R^ -W <>r
'dear'
i Pan. v. 3. 36.
t yno"^"!' tfeHH^d^-WIH I P&n. 3. 64.
t
: I Pan. VI. 4. 167. q, w, WT, ^ &c. «*«r
mhstituted for ft^, t^r, forj, &c. respectively.
§ ^8^253^5 **%sj$pnirr i«rf^t i#w ^ SUT: i Pan. vi 4.
156. The words ^9 &c. drop iheir final portion beginning
with m^ ( », f;, i^ or q[ ) and the preceding vowel takes guna.
I vf^T ^ I ^S[W ^ Pin. V. 3. 60-62.
I f»W ft I Pan. VI. 4. 158-159.
§ 177-179 ]
^g- « mvch '•
' 91
* firm, well '
t much '
COMPOUNDS.
m
great lovely '
'steady'
' big, large '
' much '
' short '
§ 178. Sometimes the terminations ^ and tpr are added to
the comp. and super, in JOT and 53- to intensify the meaning ;
Chapter VII.
COMPOUNDS.
§ 17fr. Vritti ( £% ) is the general term, for any complex
formation in Sanskrit requiring explanation or resolution. Tbesa
Vrittis are five in number ; viz. q^f% or tho formation of words
from roots by primary affixes ; cTf%a^r% or the formation of
derivative -bases from nouns by secondary affixes ; ^TgfRf or the
formation of derivative Verbs from 'primitive roots;
or the formation of a compound word by the composition of
several words • and irtp^^fTw or the composition of words in
which one of several nouns generally alike in form is retained,
The first throe will be treated in their proper pjftoes. We will
troat of the last two in this Chapter.
* See note x p. 112.
H. S. G. 8
114 SANSKRIT GRAMMAS [ § 180-184
§ 180. In Sanskrit simple words, whether substantives,
adjectives, verbs or indeclinables, have the power of entering
into combination with one andther and forming what are called
* Samasas'*', compound words or, in short, compounds.
(a) A compound tLug formed may further be compounded
with another simple or compound word, and this again may
become the member of a new compound.
§ 181. In a compound, as a general rule, words are simply
joined together, without any relation between the component
parts being actually expressed ; the whole compound word has
the power to exprees the various relations that exist between the
several parts. The last word only takes the case termination
required by its grammatical position in a sentence, the remaining
words (those ending in a consonant ) generally assuming their
crude forms before the consonantal case terminations; e. g.
ffTC^+ 3R:=fis[3r!T: ( see below ), *TSra( + S^:=*nTS$T:> &c.
§182. Final vowels or consonants (modified as mentioned
abo^e ) of preceding members of compounds combine with the
initial letters of the succeeding members according to the usual
rules of Sandbi.
§ 183. In a few cases, the intermediate members retain their
case endings in which case the compounds are called '^-llv?:'
(3T3^);«. 9. ^Rtf&T: a fool, gfSrfBT' name of the eldest
Pandava &c.
§ 184. The expounding of a Samasa (i. e. giving its Vigra-
hatak-ya ) consists in the expression of the various relations
existing between the objects or ideas denoted by the various
members of a Samasa by means of the proper eases or sub-
ordinate sentences.
(a) When the VigrahavaJtya cannot be given, or cannot be
given by nsing the words actually compounded, the compound
is called nityasamasa ( ^ftjrfr RcHimifr:
Sid. Kan. ).
* From 31^ with ^nr to throw together.
§ 185-186 J COMPOUNDS. . 115
§ 185. Compounds are divided into four principal classes:*-
( 1 ) Dwandwa or Copulative, (2) Tatpurusha or Determinative,
(3) JBahuvrihi or Attributive, and (4) Acyayibh&va or Adverbial.
N. B. These names themselves mean nothing t. e. they do
not denote any of the characteristics of the different compounds.
They are simply proper names distinguishing the various
classes from one. another ( to which they vaguely refer if they
do so at all ).
DWANDWA OR THE COPUDATIVE COMPOUNDS.
§ 166. A Dwandwa compound consists of two or more uouns
which, if not compounded, would be connected by the copulative
particle ^r (a*d). f as TfR^fr *hich is equal to w. ^ t»«nr: ^T>
<TTft<TT5 which is the same as qrofT ^ TT^T ^T. There are three
species of the Dwandwa- viz. ?d^H£*£, HHI£Ki&«-8[ and qg^tq-. J
* This is true only generally speaking. For there is a fifth
class of componnds, Hz, ^rj ^crr-compounds not governed by
any of the rules given under the four chases but explained on
the general principle that any sulanta pada may be compounded
with auy otiter subanta pada. According to some there are six
kinds of compounds, viz. ^qf g^r f^r 5TmT mg^T^T TrTST
$: « <>• g.
: i Sid.Kau.
\ ^T§ 5=^:1 Pan. II. 2. 22.
J The Ekasesha is not strictly speaking a subdivision of
Dwandwa. It is a separate Vritti by itself ( Vide § 179 ),
Sanskrit grammarians do not regard it as a Dwandwa, though
it may be so regarded for the sake of convenience. ' It is not
a Divandwa,' remarks Bhattoji Dikshita, 'as it does not contain
more than one subanta ( 3j5f3r^»tU*ngr^g«y ).' I* should be
further remembered that since it is not a samasa, its filial vowel
does not become udatta, as in the case of a Dwandwa compound.
116 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 187-^189
§ 187. When the several members of a Dwandwa. compound
are viewed separately, it is called Itaretara Dwandwa, e, y^
trTOT^ft fijFF<T, 'cut down the Dbava and the Khadira trees '
In this species each member is of equal importance •'. 0. has its
own independent meaning. It takes the dual or the plural
according as the objects denoted by it are .two or more in num-
ber; the gender of the final noun is the gender of the whole;* as
cock mzfr a pea-hen ^ f^FfdW^f f ft ( fom. dual of
); but
Exceptions — ar^W gr^^T ^ 3fiW<W ( *«*• dual ) a horse and
a mare; gftist w&ff 3^TTT3T: ( **<"- sing- daj aud night ).
§ 188. Sainah&ra Dwandwa is that species of Dwandwa
which implies an aggregate or the things enumerated in which
constitute a complex idea. It is always singular and ntuter.
Thus 3rrfRl%£raqi^ does not merely mean 'food, sleep and tear7
but all that characterises animal life. In. this species the
meaning of the different members is subordinate to the
collective sense of the whole compound.
§ 189. f A Dwandwa compound of words denoting limbs of
the body of an animal, players on musical instruments, parts of
an army, inanimate obiects ( things or grars and not qualities )
names of rivers differing in gender, as also of countries ( and
not villages ), and insects , and animals between which there is
natural autip&thy, is always of this naturej
hands and feet.
."nd horse-men RiiJfitOTS* WTWiTSa' £niftfi<n<mfi9v»r players on
Pan. II. 4. 26.
t ff»r snuhttiSwis^RR i Pan. n. 4. 2j
4. 6.; ftftrvftfr sn^t^irrm: I P^n. U. 4. 7., ^ffSfrtre: Pan. II.
4L 8. %v *.fiKfc: ^rrra^: Pau. II. 4. 9.
189-192 J
COMPOUNDS.
117
mridanya and panavn ( kinds of tabors )•
rioc rsq-sa- a kind of sweetmeat
fried barley or
but tf
form and flavour, as these denote qualities; ifirr
the rivers Ganges »nd Sopa; but *i*rnnpT 8B these
do not differ in gender- ^f«ar ^T^T ^T J^$^|nnr names
of countries; but 3fry?y3rT<%H->J> ( two villages of that name )j
( two names of the same gender )j
louse ^r 1%^TT a nit ^ ?j^rf«RT^; 3fl|v ^^ys? 3TfJH^^H
a snake and an ichneumon, &c.
§ 190. Names of trees, deer, grass, corn, condiments, blasts.
birds, the pairs of words- — ?ro and W€*t «p and 3fq-^t
Trpr and 3^*aT — and words of opposite import not qualifying
things ( jTBtrs ), are optionally compounded into a 8 am aha* «.
Dwandwa;* instances in order— ^^rrW ?iRinTr«a' ^^iHM^
-Vr: ; similarly ^maq-an ( kinds of deer ),
kinds of grass, rfrrfir^.^r: kinds of corn,
§ 191. The names, of fruits, parts of an army, herbs, deer.
birds, insects, corn and grass-; form a Ssmahara-Dwandwft,
only when they are taken in the plnral;f as
but
§ 192. The following compounds are always what they
are laid down to ba ( though they do not conform to the proper
rulea ); viz.
( a ) Samahara D wand was:— «TNT*I
118 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [.§ 192-194
so 9ft$ffrTOC> ?«^r^ camels and asses,
camels apd rabbits, jmr*frW?re(, *&*W holy 8ra89 and
grass and soft grass or shrubs,
(i)Itaretara D wand was:— ^TW^T curds and milk,
holy sticks and grass, .^forgA, W^prfqfr honey and ghee,
and the Saman verseg. ^|^HH% ( *T^+ WT^ ) speech
and xmh)d ( the ^ of CTIT3 dropped and a? added to iw^
irregularly by Pan. V. 4. 77 )
§ 193. When words ending in 35 and implying relationship
by blood or literary .avocation are compounded together, the
last but one word changes its 55 to 3?T. The same happens
when the word g?r follows a word ending in ^ under the
same circumstances; * 5t?TT ^T 'qftJTr5^ £!arircTr?r two priests BO
called, frar ^r <fr?rr ^r %sr ^ ^T?TT ^r ft<j<?t<3:>^!^R:, ( bufc if
two words be taken at a time the «£ may> at every step, be
changed into 3TF; as jtar'^T ^rTT ^ ftcTnmrft eft
- &c. ); f^cTT ^ SST^ ftcn'jsft'? HTHT
also HmTft^T ( Pan. VI. 3. 32. ), and
( vide § 197 a).
§ 194. (a) When the names of deities well known to be
in constant association with each other are compounded, 3TT is
substituted for the final vowel of the preceding word, except
in the case of the word errg x; .«. g.
o. but ^fciT or
(i) The word 3rf?T followed by the word ^ffar or
lengthens its r, as
Pan. VI. 3. 25.
Sid. Kau.
I Pan. VI. 3. 26. ^[|^T srf^T: I Vftft.
: i Pan. VI. 3. 27.
§ 195-197 ] COMPOUNDS. 119
g 195. When a Samahara-Dwandwa ends in a consonant
of the palatal class or ^, ^.or ^, 3? is added to it : 37^ ^f ?^r
speech and skin, r^p^rn^ a bark and .a garland,
9TT3FW*, ^striR^ an umbrella and shoe?, &c,
But srTI?$T^ ( as it is not a Sam. Dwa. ).
§196. The following compounds are instances of irregular
D wand was:—
( a ) sfiseT gfafr ^T SjnSTTSfasft or f^rezfiterft t heaven and
earth; so qranglft, ^n^F^J 3^+^=OTWrnp?f tfae goddess
of dawn and the sun.
(&) 3Tror-r-<mr=5WTcfr,l 3fWTrft and arraTOir husband and
wife.
) U ^r ^ s^tsa' ^ftneV, ^gw 3Wft%«r
3*18?!^ ^TTT^ m^TW ^TTITWT3C
thighs and knees. ), trnfr ^ ^873T-rTT
^ meaning • day and night '.
§ 197. When several words of the same form ( or dis-
similar in form but of the same import x ) are compounded to-
gether, only one of them is retained with the necessary number-
Pan. V. 4. 106.
t f^fr errar i ft*w sfaam* i P^n. VI. 3.. 29, 30.
i ^^Tcfr is considered by some to be a word of regular for-
mation. J»T^ in the Vedio literature means * a, house ' and q^-
1 a master 'm Hence the full word ^rqcfr wonld mean ' the
mistress of the house. '
[ A final ST is added in the ca§e of these compounds accord-
ing to a Sutra of Pan. ( 3^<f* V. 4. 77. ) quoted further on
under § 284.
V&rt.
120 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 197-198
«. 9. *mar TTOW *mr, nw TTOS* *TTOT TTHT: i This is called
t^^Hfl^:. In the case of the mas. and fern, genders the one
ot me mas, gender is retained;* as £^ff ^ &FBT ^ffb similarly
( a ) This principle is farther extended to some wprds dis-
similar in form, as in the following examples: — WcTT ^T t*TOT ^
? ^ ftoT ^ (toft ( see alsc§193. ),
also ^^7^V ); ^r ^ m ^r ^ ^T ^
ift or ?ftx. In the case of words of the
mat. fern, and neu. gender that of the ntu. gender is retained; as
l ^T aim I
§ 198. The following rules should be observed in arranging
the various members of a Dwandwa Compound: —
( a ) A A word ending in f or 7 should be placed first, and
when there are more than one of such words one of these should
be placed first, the rest being arranged according to the will of
the speaker or writer;
{b j ff Words -beginning with a vowel and ending in 3r
ought to precede others; as 3T^£f5T: or iril^^l-'- Tilifl Iule
should have preference even over the above rule in case both
would be simultaneously applicable; fftnfK
(e) || A word that has fewer syllables should be placed
* STOC ftnni Pin. 1. 2. 67.
t m^ft **3£%3Wr I faTT-WTTT I Pin. 2. 68, 70.
t «T^r: W^l ^ c^KiPi ^fHrg^ i Pan. 1. 2. 71. 72.
x V^d^R r^ ?iff ^TT^m; ' S1d- Kau. on Pan. 1. 2. 72.
Aft firi Pin. II. 2. 3*. ^^irprr^f^ftiT^m: ^ri Virt
tt 3f3TT^nT^ I Pin. II. 2. 33.
II 3ty?T5ff*iy I Pan. II. 2. 34.
i ^uif|(i ^ j V&rt.
§ 108-202 ] COMPOUNDS. 121
first and in case there ore more words th.tn one having a* equal
number of syllables, the oae that baa more short syllables
should be placed first; «. g. %*^r«ft, 3frJT7*F?ft, $5TW5T^,
&c. ; the names of seasons and stars, uuder this latter circnm —
stance, should be arranged according to their astrononucal
order; as %*^f$Tf$Rcrtf??rT:, S^FRKiaift, &«• Also a word
of more important significance should precede others;
as
( d ) * Names of the four castes of men should be arranged
according to their order, beginning from the highest and so
should be the names of brothers beginning from the eldest ;
«. 9- m^ow%*fite3grr: •,
§ 199. In the case of words of the TCT^pfTTT^ class that
which ought to be placed first is placed last; while in the case
of words of the V|U|fj group ( a sub-division of TT^T^rfff^ )
the rule is observed optionally f; ^5T^fl[ a Sudra and an Arya,
so 3W5T5T or
IL TATPURUBHA OB THE DETERMINATIVE COMPOUNDS.
§ 200. When a compound consists of two members and the
first determines the sense of the other, that is called Tatpurusha.
§201. According to the grammatical nature of the first or
attributive member the Tatpurusha is divided into six varietios:-
(1) Tatpurusha proper or the Inflectional, (2) Nan or the
Negative Tatpurusha, (3) Karmadfiaraya or the Appositjlonal
including ^Dwigu', ($.5) Pradt and Gati or the Prepositional
compounds, and (6) V^pnda. These are either nouns, adjectives
or abverba.
§ 202. The final vowel of a feminine noun ending in any of
I ^gvHTnrer- I Vartikas on the above Sutra.
I Pan. II. 2. 31. V4HlMMq^: I Vart.
122 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 202-204
the affixes grf, fr or 37 and forming the second member of a
compound used adjectively is shortened; the aft of ift la changed
to 3- under the same circumstances* ; e. g. srnr + 3mir^=sronfT-
f%g»: (Tat.), 3Tnfan^ (Tat-); ^^: something bought for five
cows; srggr *nrwr *n%^ ^TTT%: mary-veined ^5: (Bah.);
f%5TT TT^T qR*T f%r=ra: having variegated cows, &c - but qxOTJT-
q^amqF'- as the f- is not final.
(a) If the final f or 37 be not a fern, termination; it remains
unchanged^ 55 tfr. FT
1 Tatpurusba.
§ 203. The first variety cons is ts of such Tatpnrusha com-
pounds as have the attributive member in any one of the
oblique cases when dissolved. There are six sub-varieties of
this corresponding to the six oblique cases
§ 204. (a) A noun in the Accusative case is compounded
with fsm, sTrfar, qmar, Trr, 3???T*rr, srnr. STTTO, rotr, §$g> and
others f ; as ^»or f^ii; f>corf«rrT: one who has resorted to Krishna
( as his refuge ); ff^rama- f'^llrffon one who has overcome painf
5^ 3OTO: ^^IM'rf: one who has obtained happiness, gTW *T*ft
going to a village, a passenger; 3^ ^g: 3l^r^g: &c.
. B. srnr and anrr^r may also be placed first; as srnfr gfrTt^t
.* or ^frR^nrnr: one who has obtained livelihood.
similarly BTTq^r^fH^P: or sftfr^FRT: ; smr^fRr^T ^f, &c.
(ti) A word expressive of the duration of an action or state is
compounded with another expressive of the action or state, in the
* 'ftftmlvmJHW I Pan. I. 2. 48.
t ^tftai f8rcfl<?lriMidri*ltilr<J4d!4|Cfll<4& I Pan. II. 1. 24.?]Uj|df|-
I Virtika.
§ 204-205 ] COMPOUNDS. 123
Accusative case; «. g. ggS &S( %% £^H* * happiness lasting fo
a moment'; ^q^f m^f: ti^rH^lw ' residence for a year7 &c.
( c ) The word ^|T forms an Accusative Tatpurusha with a
p. p. participle when censure is implied or contempt is to be
shownf. as H£Hj 3*TW ^l^'a silly fool', o/. Bhatti. V. 10
( d ) Sometimes a preposition or a word denoting a period
of time may take the place of the Accusative^; as mfft&cT
'half done;' JTRnTTOT-' ( srfirq^sr: ) ' what marks the commence-
ment of a month as the new moon.7
§ 205. A noun in the Instrumental may be compounded —
( a ) x with another expressive of an effect produced by
what is denoted by the noun in the Instrumental case, and
with aref , as ^iffgWr W&- ^T^OT^r^: severed by means of a
knife; \»^tf g^T- ^T^Tr*i» wealth obtained by means of grain,
( b ) -r- with verbal derivatives when the Instrumental has
thes ense of the agent or the instrument or means of the
action; as sftoiT 5rra: fftsrra: saved by H»n; 5rctf$n5F
torn with the nails &c. x
( c ) with the wordsft ^f, *r?5T, ^T, 3J^f and words having
the sense of g^T, &&% , R5«T, ^«T, sg^»T and g^TT; as irr%5T f^:
.'; JTT3T ^?5T: WTcf^f^T: like his mother; fqr^TO: equal to hia
II. l. 29.
I P^. II. 1.26.
r^r: I Pan. II. 1. 27, 28. .
X ^cfarr cTr^ffWT 9019^7*1 Pan. II. 1. 30.
I Pan. II. 1. 32.
tt ^JsfrreSNJK W^J*<j«6 ftuul UWJ5Wii^: I Pan. II. 1. 31.
124 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§205-207
father; HT%HT 17* wrwt; BO W!<rfTOFJ ( less by one wiMa, a par-
ticnlar weight ); *rer ^5Jf : *T1*5J5: a quarrel ( in wordi >,
3?J*rer:, 3TT^m:«g^iT: 'thin by the discharge of
religious 'duties' jmfcT *W W^TI^: ' younger by a month.'
( d )* With another noun signifying an article of .food or
something eatable, the noun in the Instrumental case denoting
tome kind of condiment used to season it or another article' of
food mixed with it; as *STT 3TfH7t: *WCT : rice mixed with curds;
3%»f qT«TT: SJ^VTRT: fried rice mixed witn treacle.
(•) Sometimes ^-q- may take the place of the Instrumental
done by one's self.
§ 206, Instances of the Aluk of the Instrumental! ( t. e. in
which the noon in the Inst. does not drop its case term. )—
*<lone honestly^ 3fnTHIg>dH ^one with
might'. ^rr^Tf: l one having an elder brother'; ^»|M|rM; * blind
from birth'; jpr^T5HT, W^T^rnflr, when proper names, other-
^i8® WttfJFTT, ^s^^TT<fr, &c. 3?r^R[ followed by an ordinal
number retains iU case ending, at srjrR^T T8HT:
§ 207. A noun in the Dative is compounded x —
( a ) with another expressive of the material of which the
thing expressed by the noun in the Dative case is made-, as a
, ( wood for a sacrificial post. '
< * ) and with the words *£, ^f§T, ffcT, 5W w»d *(%*. The
compound with 3^4 is a nityasimasa and takes the gender and
number of the noun it qualifies;
* 3T5PT «?T^rn ! W^TOT fWmoi^ I Pan. II. 1. 34. 35.
t 3Ttlf:^ft»V^IT^^rT^nn:| Pan. VL 3. 3. 3*^
Vart. x *rgiff JTT^nwfeftrr^fT%S: I Pan. II. 1. 36.
§ 207-211 ] COMPOUNDS.
broth for A Brahmana; i%3TTO f*T
125
: ( water-gruel )
ottering to the
bhutas( certain created beings ); ife fj?t ifffiiT^ good for a cowf
§ 208. Instances of the Aluk of the Dat.
§ 209. A noun in the Ablative oasu is. compounded* —
( a ) with words expressive of fear or rather with tho words
VT, tfrflT, >fillT and 4V.-, as ^n^-W ^TWTW ftiar from a thief j
- afraid of a woil, &c.
( i ) in a law cases with the words
and 3^^t afl €^^?T: ^Wn?f : deprived of happiness;
?«Rrfnr: ' transcending thought ' or « a fool; '
: * fallon from heaven, as a sinner '; ?Tf^T^nE<T: ' afruid
of waves '.
( c ) in the case of the words «Tf9T a little,
after, and words. having tho sense of these> and
thero ia an ,-//«^ of tho Ablative) J as
near
difficulty,
£210. A noun in the Genitive may, as a general rule, be
compounded with any other noun; *r=r: 5^: ^f^S^^ the king's
man ( an oflicer or a servant ).
g 211. ft (a) It *•* n°t compounded with verbal derivatives
. II.
Vartika.
t
t
. n. i. as
I F&B. II. I. 39
126 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. I §
ending in ^ and are and denoting the agent of the action;
not 3*c$rer; ^RTW ^rrr, afr^^r <rnre>: &<M but
as the are? here does not denote the agent.
Exception*:— Bat a compound is allowed in the case of the
words UMfr ona who employs aa sacrificing priests, ^ST^, *ft-
^TT35, <<f*%TO a waiter at meals, Hm<fc & servant who bathes
his master or brings bathing water for him, a^PT^, gfc^T^P
one who destroys, 5)^, *r£, when it does not mean * a holder, '
and others not very important; 9T5ronn*T3»:> ^^H^v fnf^ft-
^1*3?: &c.; srfsr^cTT, ^a?T?rf, &c- but ^T^T ^T ' the thunder.
bolt-bearer'.
( b ) f A. spepific Genitive ( t. e. from which a singling out is
made ) is not compounded with any other words; as sgorf f^3T:
( c ) J A noun in the Genitive is not compounded with ordinal
numbers, words denoting qualities, words implying satisfaction
present participles, 'past participles meaning ' honoured or
approved of ' or showing the place of the act, verbal indeclinable's
and verbal nouns ending in ^q-. e. g. ^raf W:, 5T§m^T 3J3jT:
(fnTTO; ^npW^T^ni^; qfT^RT ^T%?f: 'satisfied with fruits'
( ah Inst. Tat. is, of course, allowed in these cases );
rar «m-- esteemed by the good;
( place of sitting ) if
I Pan. II. 2. 9
t * f%vrhSr i Pan. II. 2. 10.
I Pan. II. 2. 11-13. The prohibition with respect
to a word expressive of u quality ($or) is not obligatory, remarks
Dikshita; aa\Pan. himself uses such compounds as ?9
&c. Hence compounds like anfiftc^^, fN$HI»q»j[, &c. are justi-
fied ( 3TRrlfflf 5^R fif^ST: rT^f§TO
i ).
§ 211-212 ] CoMPOUiroa.
N. B. Compounds like yM^fodt, iMUfl:, &c. ought to be
considered as Instrumental Tatpurushas.
Exceptions.
(I) If the word denoting a quality ends in ^ it does combine
with a noun in the Genitive, and the ft? ia dropped;
whiter than all othera; similarly
(2)*The words f^mq", ^tfta, ^1 and g are compounded
with nouns signifying the whole of which they are parts, and
are optionally placed first; fifcM fSr$TT*TP fi[ffarf*Sn, fwrii[«ft-
qr^ half of the quantity cf alms; but Tf rfH f$r$TFn: ( begging
alms a second time ) fSrg^T.
Note.— Compounds like fiSfnTTOSTT, gjfolg: (see further
on ) &c. are not strictly Gen. Tat. as the case of the first
word determines the name, but mere Tat.; some call these
Norn. Tat. ( STOTJRTcJ^? ).
( a ) I A noun in the Genitive, used as an object in a sentence,
when the agent and object of the action denoted by the nouns
formed by krit affixes' are both ueed, is not compounded* as
aTTSOTT *T^t ^Ttr«S'TI^7T ' the milking of cows by one, not a cow-
herd, is a wonder. ;
§ 212. j <j^, 3?q-5t, snrc ^W^r and ajvj n. are compounded with
nouns in the Genitive expressive of the whole ana are placed
first; e. g. <£? ^nnzr S£*FT: the forepart of the body; stTOaPT:
3T^^q?T^: &c. ^ f^T5^T: ^^fi^TcfT; but fTTRT'<i: as ( 3^ is
mas. here ).
N B. In order that the above rule should hold the noun
expressive of the whole must denote a single object; hence £?f:
Pan.II. 2. 3.
t ^mor ^T I Pan. II. 2. 14.
it
128 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 212-215
the first 3rnrmf< among pupils, 3(5 fM«Tgfran* baM of a number
oi pippalis &c. and not ^TtTTSf: ttc.
§213. 'A worn expressive of a part is compounded with
another signifying a period of time and la placed first;
: mid-day j «r<n£:, RVSTTaf &c.
§ 214.* A word expressive of a period of time that has
passed since a certain occurrence is compounded with another
expressive of the occurrence; as jn*fr STHTW OW *
'one since whose birth a month has elapsed'; eo
§ 215 f Instances of the Aluk of the Gen. The noun in the
Genitive may retain its case ending—
( a ) when reproach ii to be implied, as
. Also whbn %*RfU followed by fifr*nd the whole
means a fool; otherwise
< t ) whtn the words *f^> f&l and q^q^ are followed by gr^r
^fs^ and 5^ respectively} aa ^r^t^f%: « skilful speech; ' i^^ft-
^n^>: i a particular appearance of stars in the shape of a staff in
the skyj ' q^Qcfi^: * one who robs another in his very presence
while he is looking on, ' hence ' a goldsmith, a rogue/
( c ) in the following cases: — Q4^iy: ' a king of Kashi, '
:: ' Indra, ' crr^nRm: lord cf speech, Brihaspati;
: and SHWK^: 'sons of Ajigarta. J
(d) and optionally when followed by g=r and censure is im-
plied; ^TWT: 5^: or ^rtfrgsf : a bastard, a knave; but
* «nn: 1f?mfnRT I Pan. IL 2. 5.
t- WTT 5dnFf& I P&Q VI. S. 21.
'
Vartikas. < '5^1^^^' Pan. VI. ?.
§ 215-216 ] COMPOUNDS. 129
( e )* When a word ending in q? is compounded with another
and there is the relation by blood or some kind of learning,
the aluk is necessary; and optional when it is followed by pr*r
and qfft. The initial ^r of ^pr is optionally changed to ^
when preceded by FHH or ft^y and when there is aluk, and neces-
sarily when there is no aluk in a compound* 9. g,
fr' • pupil of the hotri\ m3:*TOT, or mg:
so ftg.-^r^r, &c. ( but j^: ^rr, ft^. f^r when
uncompounded ); ^^H^fff: or ^^.q^:; but
§ 216. 4 noun in the Locative is compounded—
( a ) fwith sftu^-, tj& f%?nr a rogue, jpfVor, tftftrT adorned,
invested with, 3T?cTr, ant, ^, lf3^«T, f^TST, ^R5T, fts<*, fN[,
, TIT, and *?*r; as 3^^ ^fnr*?: 3?^5T^- skilled in dice-
?f«r f ^TT^fhr: dependent on God ( when compounded
the affix ^ *. e. \^ is coinpolsory; so the compounded form is
always with greffr )i aflffq^^5 dried in the 81in; WT5?TT«:
cooked in a pot; ^fK^q*: a kitd of poetic composition; &c.
(6)| with words meaning a < crow ' when contempt is
implied; <ft§ \-?TT3i§T f 5T cfl^^nS^T: said in contempt of one who
is very greedy; BO «ft«hara:; similarly sfir^rrai:— srrq^n &o. &c.
There are a few Loc. Tat. compounds given in the list
having a similar sense; e. g.
well-abiding frog t. 0. one who knows nothing of the world
VI. 3. 23. 24.
viu. 3. 84, 85.
t «?wr shoi: { r%^5^TO3r^ i P^. II. 1. 40, 41.
J uus-IjniT jft i qr^^wm^iiT i Pin. n. i. 42, 48.
i ^^r ^RT^!^ TORW sr^ft * i Sid.
H. 8. G. 9.
180 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. I § 216
outside the pale of his own village; so |pr-
37£3T3>ftiT:~~!T§T3d*' ^- an insect in the fruit of the Vdttmbara
tree; metaphorically it means the same~as ffimu$<fc;,
&o. In some cases there is an aluk of the Loc.. as
boasting coward', ^sq"!^: * » braggadocio', if^nff ' a house-
hero', 'a carpet knight', <TT^$3ld: ' clever in eating only ' t. e.
' a good-for-nothing fellow'., <n^rfacTP
Note: — Words of this class do not enter into further combi-
nation with other words.
( c ) * with another, when they both imply a name ( ^for )i
there is an aluk of the Loc. term, when the nonn ends in a
consonant or s?; as auutiMdW* ft** ' wild sesamnm yielding
no oil, hence anything not answering to one's expectations;'
similarly cfl^jfofcit. ?wf%fm: ' » bamboo ' (also r^KTT :, vide
Si. IV. 61, ). These compounds are nitya ( obligatory ) as
remarked by Bhattoji ( <i(|^H <Hq|IM«|4|Uli%(^nn>cft^ ).
( d ) with potential p. participles in *r implying an obliga-
tion; *T«8t4 (**nO-, S*Tf*nM*m)5 the alnk by §217
( b ) below.
( e ) | with p. p. participles when it expresses a part of the
day or night; 33- may take the place of the Loc.; as tgqTT^ 9ft
3tM«|tJ£j|^: riaigifcq &c; but 3^% g^; and with the
p. p. participles when reproaeh is implied; with an alul of the
Loc; as 'OTmM$c4$U<f irtcf^' * this thy action is similar to
that of a mungoose on the hot ground.7
aeed to express the inconstancy of a person.
t !»$y5»?n?flHwn: B^KIIK i i
I 1.44. VI. 3 9. VIII. 8. 9. 5.
t ^TtRTarr^fT: I nsri $ft i Pin. IJ.2. 45-47.
§ 217 ] TATPURUSHA. 131
§ 217. Additional instances of the aluk of the Loc.
( a ) Aluk is necessary in the case of the words-(l )iff and *pj
followed by fi^; as jrftfgr:, stationary in the sky,
firm in battle; ( 2 ) f ^ and ^followed by **£$j gi^gaE,
(&& fi& ** qjqaift ); ( 3 ) 3T*<T and roriollowed by
3J^:, 3T?^I?>: and ( 4 ) words expressive of parts of the body
except g\h[ and *ftcT3r and not followed by g&
gjffig'mr ( having the hair on the breaat: Bah. ), but inJr
(b) * When a noun in the Loc. is compounded with a verbal
derivative and the whole is a name, aluk takes place in most
cases; e. g. ?fl*^W ( 5T*% a kind of grass fjflr 3^ft ) an elephant;
tfcUMH- one who whispers into the ear, a spy; ^TT: a heavenly
being; fo^£ a lotus-, ^^T^, 5!%^R: a fish; but
or ^<M &c.
(e) There is optional aluk of the Loc. of a word expressive of
time when compounded with 3^5? and words ending in the
affixed tnr and ?R T-f- rf--9> &c.
(d) f When the compound is not a name, aluk it necessary
when 3f comes, after jrr^, 51^, ?ET<7 and f^fj and optional
when it comes after wj, ^T?, ^T? and *f ; as
or q^r: produced in the rainy season, &c.
Exceptions J:- NTo aluk takes place in the case of verbal deri-
vatives ending in ^ and the words ftr^-, ^, and ^r in the
ordinary language; as Hlfu3<.5$ll<f! t an ascetic, '
I Pan. VI. 3. 14.
^ \ frrrTT «rl^^T^T^i P»» VI. 3. 15.16.
\ & ^ TTTTm^l P»n- VI. 8. 19. 20.
132 SANSKRIT GBAMHAB. [ § 217-219
(•) *When a noun in the JLX)c case ending in gj or a conso-
cant and not denoting time is compounded with $rq-, m^f anc
with *c* aluk ie optional. fc-^pr:, !lTR-*Rrm:,
2. KaD or the Negative Tatpurusha.
§ 218. (a) The negative particle sr changed to ar before a con-
onant and a^ before a vowel, may be compounded with any
noun to form the Negative-Tat purushaf; as *r srr^roT: ^fliflm:,
ine not a Brahmaoa. sr 9P7: 3R^9v «Rrr[, non-existent, or not
good, &C,
§ 219, The if is not changed to 3? or a^ in the following
caaeft-qrerc ' that which does not shine/ <a cloud;' «rqrg[(pre. p.)
'* one who does not protect;' «1%^T: ' one who does not know* /
Hl^fMP [ f ^TTJ dWf*J|J 5T ^yH||: wf|^rq|: x ] the two
Aswins, the physicians of the gods. 5TgT%: [ * g^nfffit' ] name
of a demon slain by Indra; q§&: [ sr ^^n<^, for the mungoose
is supposed to belong to no particular species of animals ]; «ng-
[ *T CTrer that which leaves no cavity, or does not go to heaven
being burnt down with the dead body ]; H^i" [ 5f ^Ff OTH; ]»
sm^ [ sr ^f^Tt^ ] that which does not move from its proper
place, hence a star; ^^: [ «r sfelUdffd that which does not go far
Off from water ]; ^r^: [ sr q£ 31$ 7 *$ ^fWJi ]; 5T*T when it
| Pan. VL 3. 13. 18.
Pan. II.2.6. * £,<ft 5^: , fTOTJffJ^V^I Pan.VL 3,73.74
Pan. VI. 3. 75. ^nmiflum^d^ I ?**. VI. 3. 77.
X OT ^T^rfTf%W%(f ( is not the point) fa *
Tatvabodhini.
§ 219-221 ] KABMADHA'BAYA.
does not qualify an animal retains its q optionally as ;nfr: or
3W '» mountain or a tree$' bnt M«T: ^cJ-' '» Sudra that cannot
move. '
N. B. It should be noted that some of these are Bahuvrfhi
compounds.
3. KABMADHA'BAYA OB THE APPOSITIONAD COMPOUNDS.
§ 220. Panini defines a 'Karmadharaya' as
01 Tatpurusha both the members of which are in the
same case relation i. e. have the same case when dissolved.
N. B. The difference between the Tatpurusha proper and
Karmadharaya is this:— In the case of the former the attributive
member has one of the oblique cases when dissolved, while
in the case of the latter it it in apposition to the other member.
It may thus be a noun or an adjective qualifying the other member.
§ 221. ( a ) f A word expressive )f the standard of compa-
rison ( CTRTiT ) may be compounded in a Karmadharaya with
another denoting the common quality or ground of comparison;
as ^T f«r 33TTT VHA*JHT dark like a cloud. Such compounds
are called
( & ) J Similarly a noun denoting the berg on or thing com-
pared ( sqifr ) may be compounded with word* indicative of
excellence, sucn as 5tirsr§, fiff , ^£, 3CT3T, &o. no mention &[
. 2. 42.
t «iMHi"iiS *tmi*M«MH: I Pan. II. 1. 56.
1 3<rm<T ainrrRrft: *rm*ronfr5t i Pan. n. i. 56.
§ All these words are included under what is called the group
of simr. The more important of these words are sqrJT,
cf.
J " Amara III. 1.
134 SANSKBIT GBAMMAB. [ § 221-222
the common attribute (of similarity ) being made; as
7 «TTiT jrt" S^TSTTin a man like a tiger ( *. e. as bold as a tiger )j
g^- ?frf ^ 5- ma^^g: a moon-like face i. e. as delightful as the
moon ; 3$ *H<tW<* g^H<4H &c. ; these are called
1. — The difference between the two is this : — In the
former the common quality of comparison is actually expressed.
while in the latter it is left to be understood ; in fact if it be
expressed there can be no compound ; as <j^sr: sq-fgr f ^ *g^: I
Nott. 2. — The above Karmedharayaa may be dissolved as
&c. Dissolved
in either way there will be no difference in the formation of the
compounds • but there will be difference both in the meaning
and in the metaphor. In cue case prominence will be givon to
=tF3[ or the moon and the figure will be 'upama. ( a simile ),'
while in the other to fp<? or the face in which case the figure
will be 'Rupaka*.' Compounds like
, &c. are termed
§ 222. An adjective may be compounded with the noun it
qualifies in most cases | as tfitf ^ *%?*& ^ Jft^RT^, a blue
lotus &c. ; ^orWRft ^BTO" fr«oi*nr: where the comp. is necessary;
but snTTfrefr TTR: I Such compounds are called
As a general rule in such compounds the qualifying wora
is placed first; but there are several exceptions which are
given below.
* So when, the common attribute is applicable in its express-
ed ( *TO ) sense to the grr^q- as in g^q^r H$\W dissolve the
comp, as gjf TO?OT and when to the sJMHIH as in
diisolve
t ft^Wuf f%^or 5jfi3[ I Pan. II. 1. 57.
§ 222 ] KABUADHA'BAYA 135
( a ) *The quali6ed word is placed first and is always of the
mas. gender if it denote! a class or species, when compounded
with certain adjectives; «. g. f^^fR: ' a young female ele-
pnant', 3T|%*?fte: ' » small fire', ^forSifaqq^ n "butter-milk
mixed with a little water-, «fftp£: '* cow 'tbat naa brought
forth a calf for the first time', ifT%$: 'a milch-cow (jnrsnjnfaiT )';
ift^n ^ barren cow', *fi%f^ ( mfarffRT ift: ), 'TN'^MJufT
'a cow whose calf is one year old/ $39ftl%qr: t an agnihotrin
Brabmana of the Katha branch of the Yajarveda,'
< a teacher of the Katha branch/ f »
(also mas. according to some) — 3^[: ( <Rl< )-ftg*T ; an excellent
cow'. The last mentioned five words, all of which denote
excellence, retain their own gender invariably; as STT^rarerclf&CT
'an eminent Brahmvna' &c.; but ^WKf iTHT%^r, &a no class is
meant here.
(b) J The words sfcPT; ^3f, ^fte lame, ^TOT, ^u^ blunt, dull,
bald-headed, iffr, ^[, fag9» fif^T, fifTcy, «3, 5TT7 hard,
stiff, ^Yvfr, ^^ and ^r, may optionally precede the words in
apposition to them; as%^mf^?Tr« or g^rr^^mi^.* Jaimini who
is turned tawny on account of his having practised penance in
the sun.7 &c.
(e) §Words expressive of the persons or things condemned
Pan. II. 1. 65. VI. 3. 42.
t ST3f*HRR%ar I Pan. II. 1. 66. ( H?Tr%T^TT M^rf^r 5f
I Sid. Kau ).
I Amara.
t ^rrn.* ^*m^ i Pan. II. 2. 38.
§ ^SRITfS ^?*S: I ^nm% ^r%?(: I Pan. II. 1. 53 54. fife
; Pan. IT 1. 64.
116 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 222
or reproached are placed first; aa ifcn&tuiMtiRj** <ft bad gram-
marian/ 'one who has forgotten his grammar and therefore can
make no use of his knowledge;' ( <[£:
i T*tv. ); so
wtimtmsat* who is a sceptic' or < an unbeliever'; except in the
case of the words qr<T, a*ore and f^ ; as ma-qrrf^rf: 'a bad
barber,' munfe$aid» ' a mean, silly potter,'
(d)* Words in apposition to 3?3R^, iffT and ^g^ are also
placed first; «. ^. ^Mi^K4>: ' an eminent king/ *mifr«Kt,
5^»n«r:, &c.
(4 t $RT and q»fl9| are compounded only when they aak a
question with reference to a class ( snf^ family), and are
placed first; «:p. qpcTT-9»?nT-3>?: 'which Br&hmaoa. of the Katha
branch*? ^fff-«?fm-^yt^: ' which Br&hmaDa of the Kalipa
branch'? But *?w 9: ( which son* J
(/) J The word ^inf ( and also ^ffrft changed to ^TTT ) «
placed first when compounded w^Lth one of the words
as ^OTTSnror * a female mendicant/
' a young female ascetic'; WC:-^T 'a deHcate
(^)S TEe words ^r^, ^r$, grrff. !TnoT» snr and ^r^. and the
. II. 1. 62.
Pan. II. 1. 63.
H i Pan. IL 1 49.
'KI I Pan. IL 1. oo.
§ 222-223 ] KABMADHA'RAYA, 187
words on?, 9^, ^wr, WWT ' hindmost, ' ^HTT*, mU", flV4«4 and
^T are always placed first in a KarmadLaraya compound.
9t<TC when followed by 3n$ is changed to 797: as
master or lord', 9*9 3n> ^IT^nf^M 'an old logician,'
afareTv'o**1 mimavua philosophers/
« the old grammarians, '
4 the hinder part or side of the body,' ^RTftnT: the last
' being in the same category or predicament':
a sole warrior i. g. an eminent warrior', &c. The
lorm q^CK ( found need by great writers ) also may be
defended.*
( A ) f The words *%, mr^> TORf. 3im and g^^ are com-
pounded with another noun when they are used as terms of
praise or excellence; *&q: ' an excellent physician' H^
&c. bat 3W5$i i: where 7*53 means 'uplifted, or * drawn
out of '
£ 223. J Names of quarters and numerals form a Karm. com-
pound with anv tudanta ( a declinable word ) but only vfhenthe
whole compound is an appellation* e. g. ^rjnfq-: < Name of a con
«tellation of stars/ 'Ursa Major-,-
«^r I How do you justify the form
? For the Sutra o^hrr &c. being a subsequent one ought
to have preference over the preceding Sutra ^4*fel&fe &c- and
we, should have sfr^: We reply. — The form may be justified
by supposing that the rule operates in most cases only
a ^ew )•
: i Pan. n. 1. ei
t A^A «^rnn^ i P&n. IL i. 61.
ft These are gods, men, Gandharvas, serpents, and Pitris,
according to some; and Bramaoas, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas,
S'udras and Nishadhas or barbarians, according to others.
( Vide Shankarfich&rya on Brah. 8u. I. 4. ll.-B. )
138 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 223-224
<Name o£ a town in the east;' ^frfr ?$TT: 'Northern, trees;
: &c. The compound is forbidden in other cases.
( a ) *But words denoting a cardinal point or numerals may
be compounded with any other noun when a Taddhita termina-
tion is to be affixed to the compound so formed ( or it conveys
in addition to its sense as a Karm. a derivative meaning such
as is usually denoted by a Tad. aff. ) or when the compound
itself becomes the first member of another compound or when
the compound forms a proper name; $& STT3JT T^TTcJr; vfat
<Th5f5TT3J: ' being in the eastern hall ' from
*• «• Tad. aff. 51 added by
Pan. IV. 2. 107 )• so qn + *rr$=wn$ ' lix mothers' -I- Tad.
the son of six mothers., qsrf ^rraT fiwt *TW It
where «jS^non is a cr*<r£ and not used inde-
pendently-, TTT^a^:, Tf^TOI: &c. which are names.
§ 224. The particle ^ forms a Karm. compound with any
other word. %%$*: ( $f%rT: 5^: ) a bad man; ^3*: &c.
( a ) f ^ is changed to ( 1 ) ?p^ when followed by a noun with
an initial vowel in a Tat. by |% and the nouns w and q% and
by f^or < denoting a species-/ ^fJeratw ^^: ' bad horse;' so
r 'coarse food-/ but ^: < having bad camels7 (a Bah. comp.)
faraf: ^q-: ^r^tr: ' three inferior things/ mpj: ' a bad
chariot,-* $5^: 'speaking ill, a bad speaker/ ^uj^ ' a kind of
fragrant grass/
( 2 ) To ^r when followed by qrRftt and 3r$T and when meaning
<a little/ and optionally when prefixed to 55^; ^FW^, «TT^T: ' *
sidelong looker a frown of displeasure/ see Bh.V. 54
Pan. II. 1. 51.
( ^ ^r' Vart: ) TW^frw | ^5r
Pan. VI. 3. 101-107.
§ 224-225 ] KARMADHA'BAYA. 139
Sid- Kau. ). f t^n^ ^^ <a little
water, '
( 3 ) And to gjT or <$? when foil wed by ^sor; cFtrof, ^nTO and
q^vft by ( 1 ), all meaning < lake- warm '.
§ 225. Two adjectives may also be compounded into what is
callfld the H £l Wl WTnf^faTW as ^^^or:, ^omRT:*
( a ), * Two participles expressive of two consecutive actions
of the same individual may be compounded together, the one
expressive oi the previous action being placed first; su^r ^TPT:
F: ^RT3T%*T: 'first bathed and then anointed'';
similarly q'ratsfr<far ' fi"t drunk and afterwards vomited out '.
: ( Rag. II. 1. IV. 43 ), &c.
( b ). In the case of the two sets of words given above
( § 222..^. ) forming compounds with one another those be-
ginning with 3^ are placed first. In the case of qr^ compounded
with qffc it may precede or follow it. as ^j^%: or q^i^:-, the
former, however, is preferable. In the case of the first set of
words viz. rr^? ...... %^^ the one succeeding precedes the one
preceding when compounded together; as $rnH3TT^, ^^3-
norac, &c.
( c ) f A past participle is compounded with another with
the negative particle prefixed to it; ' $(ff£fnt, ' wittt ia dene
and not done, i. e. < partially done ;.
( d ). { The word 5^ ( m. /. ) -enters into a Kami, com p.
with the words ^Sf^fff, <rf&cT> *i%«T having wrinkles, and
is placed first-, t. e. Qlt + ig&fo: ^gr^^iaf: ' a young
* See Pan. II. 1. 49. (
I Tatv. quoted above )
t rrT* ^f5^T%CTR5T I PAn. II. 1. 60.
r-' I P^n. II. 67.
140 SANSKRIT GBAKMAB. [ § 225-228
bald-headed man 'psrr '* young bald-headed woman ' •,
a young woman looking old'; a«mOfl: ' » young man whose
hair is grey % &c.
§ 226. • The word for ' little' is compounded with any other
word except a verbal derivative, and even with a verbal deri-
vative when it expresses a quality j as §qr$np*y: * a little brown',
* reddish. < ftc.
§ 227. f Words ending in the terminations HOT. srfhft V and
and words having a similar meaning) may be compounded
with any tubanta nc t importing a particular kind; 0. g. ifraqft-
' any hot eatable , ' fprfo: * of a similar white colour, '
:, &o.; but %*?: •rr^T: as the latter word refers to a
kind of food here.
§ 228. J The following are the more important of the
pounds given by- Pan. as irregular under the cl
: ' a cunning peacock ', so
so ^SiTvT^ni ' high and low', < great
and gmall', (S^Rf ^T srfim ^ ft^^H, ^Tt??T
«TTR: Mmird<^ ft^« f%?Rr? ( these are nitya-
l that in which
are constantly uttered the words < eat and drink ' f so
that in which are uttered the words ' I alone; I alone ; ' hence
hard competition. &c. ary a* 3Tf *$fy\* TOT*
so BIlsl^Rqai ' great self-conceit or pride '
( Bhatti. V. 27 ); « vaunting ' , ( Bv.I. 84 ) &c. Also
put to flight, ' qw^T « accident, ' &c.
* i^^TT I Pan. II. 2. 7.
t SHJ^ROII 3T5TT?qT I Pan. II. 1. 68.
iM I Pan. II. 1. 72.
g 229-231 ] Dwior COMPOUNDS. 141
§ 229. In some Karmadharaya compounds the last member
oi the first word which is itself a compound word is dropped*}
«. y. STTOISTO: tmw: Srre^mv*: ' a king who likes vegetables;,
%q^t& 3n$nn: $*3TTfT<iT: &c. These compounds, though they
should be properly called *' Uttamapadalopi " are popularly
designated '< Madhyamapadalopi ". Any compound requiring a
similar explanation is classed under this group (
which is an 3
DWIGU OR NUMERAL ^POSITIONAL COMPOUNDS.
§ 230. f When the first member of a Karmadharaya com
pound is a numeral it is called ' Dwigu '.
§ 231. A Dwigu compound is possible ( a ) under the circum-
stances mentioned in § 223 ( a ) i. e.-
( 1 ) when a Taddhita affix is to be added to the compound so
formed. <rmJTi lUrprm^q- TTHHTQT: ' the son of six mothers, Kir-,
tikeya ; (vide Ku. IX )j q^a^m^: &c; or (2) when the com-
pound itself becomes the first member of another compound, as
( b ) And when the compound denotes an aggregate; in this
case it is singular; J as ^q-yort $f *RT ^mif IT: T%S^H* the three
worlds ( taken collectively ); as q>
Vdrt on
II. 1. 60.
t ^JT^fr f|»j: I Pan. II. 1. 52.
^ 4. I
142 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 232-233
PREPOSITIONAL COMPOUNDS.
4. Pradi.
§ 232. Those Tatpurusha compounds whose first member is
a preposition are termed Pradi by Sanskrit grammarians*; some
of these prepositions combine with a following noun in the
Norn., with a noun in the Ace. &c.- e. g. STiRf: 31TCT& WMl4:
* M/4&iinop<g teacher ', £ire: W&K* *NTC*: 'taken to a path- way'
Xvide Bhatti- II1' 45 )• **&** *m: **™: ' atr°Dg or excessive
wind, ' &c.; afflRETOt JTT53T 3TfiTJTTcJ: 'excelling a garland' (in
fragrance or beauty ), srftsFFcft TO *f$R art STfifW ' a chariot-
warrior who has no rival or equal '• so atftTHT? ' exceeding
measure, ' 3TrTO^ &c. 3?^^^: cfelfi^l 3flnEft%5J: ' attracted by
the cnckoo; ' qff»f?n?r: ar^qmTR q^t-gqir: * tired of studying. y
T^f^TTf^: ' go ae out of KauSambi; ' so
&c. A compound with prepositions which govern cases
) is forbidden; g# sr^r.
5 Gati.
§ 233. Compounds of the following words with verbal inde-
clinable! are called Gati.
( a ) t The particles srfr, ^cfr, ^rT^, ^T?, ^FfT, W^T, STTf :,
and sr«l. and tiie word ^TR^T meaning an action; as
fl^»T * having accepted. mz$<q. ' having uttered
the word Vashat; y J?r|W, ^rfr^tS??^ ' having done the act. '
( b ) J Onomatopoetic words not followed by jrf?T>
but tqiigm ^>f^r ( fiteTi^o. )•
II. 2. 18. STT^r TfTT^TV M^MHMI I
l
1* I Vartikas.
t *^Rft«i4H«^r t Pan. I. 4. 61.
Vartikas.
t 3T39** ^FRf?HT^ I Pan. I. 4. 62.
§ 233-234 ] PREPOSITIONAL COMPOUNDS. 143
( c ) *The words ?rg and «T*TcI showing respect and disrespect
respectively, the prepositions 3?<? in the sense of 'adorning,'
STv 3TT-* 3KT:> *5*l, **:> 3*^» 31^ atld fifr; a3 3l£eF*r Cav-
ing adorned', but 3^ cfTr-rr doing enough ( q^rRm^TVT: Sid.
Kaa. ); 5^5?^ ' placing in the front7; s^sjfq- (
3rert?T ( JT1&- f?*T Sid. Kau. ); gtfl^T, as ^T^fq-
'he drinks milk to his heart's content'^ 3T^5feT ^having gone
up to and spoken' ( sTftfj^ n?gT 3^«1T ^ f zrV'- Sid. Kau. )-,
T?TfhaTT, iRTfC? ( till disgust is produced );
'going towards.'
(d) fTLe words ^, ^roft and srret; as
'having married'; STTV^^r 'having forced to yield.'
(e) |The particles ^irr%, 3T?3T%, ^r^m , m«qr, 3TWT,
grri^r and ^R^;, the words wrr%, g^%, ( except when there is
the sense of juxtaposition or extreme contact ), w&, and the
word tr^- form compounds with verbal indeclinables optionally;
'giving strength
to the weak' [ ^j^Hi 4gSHNiq ffTO: Sid. Kau ];
^^Rr-wrr, ^TT%^fq--?«rT ( having accepted ) H
; but
(/) These compounds are also formed with nouns derived
from roots for their second members; e. g. 3TfHJrir: l setting
of the sun,' 5*^1^: 'reception, showing respect/
§ 234. TEe fk* formations ( see Chap. XI. ) are also classed
as prepositional Tatpurusha compounds; as UigfefTT having
turned white what was not so before.
Pin. I. 4. 63-71.
Paru I. 4. 77-7.a.
Paa. I. 4. 73-76. ( vnprm* ^TTOOT^r I ).
144 SANSKBIT GBAMMAR [ § 235-237
«. UPAPADA COMPOUNDS.
§ 235. When the second member of a Tat. Oomp. is a root-
noun deiived from a root which takes a particular Krit affix
by virtue of the nresence of the first member, it is called an
Upapada Tat. ; as ap*T CTTcfrfff ^WER: t a potter;' so *mr
irnnftfir ^rmT-* 'one who chants averse of the Saman Veda;'
'desirous of meat'; similarly grs^tffcft
) 'bought for a horse', <fe^4V 'a female tortoise/
&c. The noun prefixed to the last member, such as $nr, is
called an upapada*
N. B. The latter member of such compounds must nei<-
ther be the conjugated form of a root nor a separate verbal
derivative ». e. formed independently of the last member; «. g.
qjjlVH is not an Upapada Tat., as the word %T? can be inde-
pendently formed; it is a Gen. Tat.
'a cloud' or 'the female breast*'
§ 236. Sometimes the second member of an Upapada
Tat. my be a Namulanta or the verbal indeclinable in 3^. as
*«M^bK S% <fae eats having sweetened »«« iood;7 3^T^
1 having dined first;' sometimes this compound is optional,
or 73%;? Sq^^f g% ' he eata the condiment with a
raddish,' &c.
§237. Some upapadas such as 3%:, sft^:, ft^, E^ff:, &c..
also optionally form compounds with the verbal indeclinable
in c*T ( changeable to g ); as 3^.'5W ( or ^: %&n ), ferf-
3FJ5?T, g^cfT^T, 5fRT^c?T, T^mj^r? &c. For iurther parti-
culars vide the Chapter on verbal derivatives.
Pan. III. 1. 92.
Sid. Kau.
§ 238-239 ] TATPUBTTSHA COMPOUNDS. 145
GENERAL RULES APPLICABLE TO THE
TATPUBUBHA COMPOUNDS.
§ 238. *The word mf'|§ at the end of a Tatpurusha compound
changes ita final to 3T when preceded by a numeral or an inde-
clinable, as i(- 3?f^r HJHIUIIHH fl*l*g ^T5 * a piece of wood
va %•
meaflnring two fingers/ Q<MHf'foy*ft PUfdH &c.
S3 X3
§ 239. The following words, when at the end of a Tatpu-
rusha, drop the final vowel, together with the following
consonant if there be any, and add ar under the circumstances
mentioned: —
( a ) t *tfaj when preceded by a numeral, an indeclinable, a
word expressive of a part of the whole, such as q^, spnCy &c-,
or by the words q$, «fo*lld' and 50^. as %
Bildq an aggregate of two nignts ( Dwi. )j
H?: tnut has passed a night, the dead of night;
the first part of the night, ^f wfe: wi\
^MrmTTsr:, ynrrrar: an auspicious night.
The same happens when ^n% is preceded by 373^ in a
Dwandwa; as
I fT3T^, 3R5^ and sfifr; as ir^r: ^TTq^mST* a great king.
3T$: tTWH^ an excellent day, ^ ^r
a holy day, S%HIIW, ( vide § 245. 5. ),
|j &c.
(c) Exceptions § — 3*9^ wnen preceded by an indeclinable, or a
: | Pan. V. 4. 86.
t 315: w^srcnsqia^mg- TT^. i ^n. V. 4. 87.
Pan. V. 4. 91.
. 4, 88.
H. 8. 0. 10.
146 SAHSKBIT GKAMMAB. [ § 239-240
word denoting a part of the whole, or by ^ or by a numeral
with a Taddhita affix added to the whole compound, becomes
3Tgf 5 a* *fl'*IW«*s exceeding a day (in duration)
forenoon, qzfa: the whole day,
'• &cv ^^ tfWRT. the change is optional;
Ar. J5. The*«3[ of the substitute is changed to qr when preceded
by ^ belonging to the first member ending in 37; as 444]^:; bnt
TOT* 3**: <m^: < as fin ends in 3ff ).
( d ) f cT$T^ when preceded by JJTH or ^, and sgp^ by s?f^ or
an inanimate object with which it is compounded- 0. g.
: '» village carpenter *. e. one not very skilful-,'
: ( Ha^r- ) ^ ^T^1 cT^T ^ ^te^T: ' an independent
carpenter'; arfite: [ ^n?: ] 'fleeter than a dog'5 a^f^T ( worse
than a dog's life ) *far; 3TTCT: ^F f* 3ff^TW: '• dog like *. e.
bad or unlucky throw of dice-7 but 4|«H*qr ' a monkey like
a dog'.
(•)t*fWwnen preceded by ^^rc, ^if or ^ or by a word
denoting an inanimate object with which it is compounded;
3TWT^«l*l the upper part of the thigh', ^ni^^Vj^ 'the thigh of
adeeV^r^r^,»F5ygfff^?ErfTO M>g54>^^^ 'a thigh like a
board'.
(/) A numeral when compounded in a Tat. ftmnft f|r$r<T:
( *^r ) more than thirty;
: a sword more than thirty fingers in length
§240. The following words have an gj added to them when
at the end of a Tatpurnsha compound:—
(a) *fY except when a Tad. afi. is added and then dropped§; e. g.
I Pan. Vin. 4. 7.
\ irmTWt ^ KW \ 3^: ^r: i dMHMKMir% I Pan. V. 4.
96-97.
t « ^i ^51 1 1451 1 ^^i ti«^*tf • I P*n. V. 4. 98.
§ MUfiKfldfc I Pan. V. 4. 92..
§ 240-241 ] TATPUBUBHA COMPOUNDS. 147
: an excellent bull, TOTT*-( a collection of five cows )
but ffai: exchanged or bartered for two cows.
( * ) * ST^ meaning 'chief or eminent'. ar^RT 3T
'the chief of horses t. e. an excellent horse/
( e ) f The words 3&%( 3TOT^, 3FT^ and frf^ when tney de-
note a class or form names. OTTTO^ ( Tq^m 3R- ) ' a cart-load,'
UgHfr: ' a kitchen '; ar^rTF^R: ' a kind ->f stone like the moon-
stone ' [ in this case the final gr^ is dropped ]; ^T9T7^[ i black
iron', nu^^Hf^H ' a lake inl1 of f r°g8 ';
that name.'
( d ) I $ at the end of a Dwigu. except when the Tad. affix
is dropped ), as ^pRTt sftvirmnra: ft'fWWrar: ( when the aff. i-
not dropped ), ftni^H. t a collection of two boats', BO QniMH.
&c; but Tagrfvr: ^ft: ^hr: 'Hapft:, also when it is preceded by
3T$; ae ^nr-* 3T^T anidHH the muter is irregular ( <j\<$\^ Sid.
Kau. ).
( « ) § ^"TTT ( & measure of corn ) under similar circumstances
takes the a? optionally, the final f being dropped before it:
(/) + 3T^%, preceded by f^ or ft in a D wigu, optionally
takes 3?, except when the Tad. aff. is dropped, before which
the final f is dropped- s^rsr^-f^ ' two handfnls'; but
§241. ff The ^ of a^5j is optionally dropped when preced-
. V 4. 93.
t *Ml*Hm: ^T^Tf sHlQ^jlMl: I Pan. V. 4. 94.
ftifh I 3Tvrm Pan. V. 4. 99. 100
I Pan. V. 4. 101.
: I Pan V. 4, 102.
t »»w«u ^HIS^I^MIMI^ I ^H5ifi^i*i«^in\t^in, I Pin. V. 4
104. 105.
148 SANSDHT GBAMMAB. [ § 241-24*
ed by $ and jrfg- f 5T5TT-$r: a bad Brihmana, wrwsnr-*- The
^ is dropped necessarily when the compound implies the coun-
try in which the Brahmana dwells; e. g. 3<l%dfll a BrahmaDa.
dwelling in Surftshtra.
§ i42. *The word sr^g; is changed to wfj when it forms the
first member of a Karmadharaya or a Bahuvrihi compound, or
when the termination fSffffta' follows^ as flgi^cf: the great god,
: a great arm ( Tat. ) or one having a great arm ( Bah. )..
:; but Jifff: 4fal H^*\ ( Gen. Tat. ).
Exception: — When it is followed by ^TB", 3?* and f^f^re the
change takes place necessarily; Uffft KgrlJl ^7
aimilarly
§ 243. | 3^^ becomes WJT when followed by c^m^ and *fr
And the compound so formed conveys the sense of ' an oblation '
and ' yoked to ' respectively; 3TCT3?7T3r-' ' prepared or offered in
eight pans ' ( S*m*r: >, 3T«mt ( 5T9»?*) *a carriage with eight
bullocks yoked to it'.
| 244. } All the rules given above for the change of the
finals of the Tat. compounds do not hold good in tfce case of
the Neg. Tat:; *. g. * ^sir 3TCTHT one n<>t
( a ) But in the case of the word <rf5fc[ the final 33 is op-
tionally dropped and sr added; 3n?4 or arq^rr: ' absence of a
road '. qf3rq( when so modified in a Tat. is neu.- § (but 3|<ra: 53T).
* sn^TfcT: ^^Mlf^^qisHlrtiq^f: I Pan. VI. 3. 46. and the,
Vartikas on it.
t 3TC?r: ^TT% ^ftr? I irit ^ 5% I Vdrtikas.
t SfoTWS^K* I TOT T^T^T I Pan. V. 4. 71. 72.
3 mnfr sft«** i P^. IT. 4. 3.
§ -245 ]
TATPUBUBHA.
149
GENDERS OF TATPUBUSBA COMPOUNDS.
§ 245. *As a general rale a Tatpurusha compound follows
the gender of the final noun.
Exceptions f: —
(a) Oompoandi with srTH" and 3TTTO f°r tDe*r ^r3t member
•and the Pradi compounds follow the gender of the words they
qualify, KlHoftftfe: ^:, STm^TT^T ^ff, IW^STlfel' 5^: &c-
(b) A Tatpurusha ending in n^> 3Tff aQd stf is masculine 7
except when ror is preceded by a numeral and 3*5 by s<nr
and gf^T; «. ^. ^nsr:, Hunff:, 'ffHTf-, tf^fi^i^, 4IUKHH ,
; »lio that endiog in TO ( substituted for
, vide § 280 ) preceded by a numeral or an indeclinable;
as sjqroif <T?W ft<W*, f^T: VW- firTV5C,abador a wrong
way; bat mjfgrr:, 3^q^«n: as they do not end in q^f; ( see § 285 )
(c) J A collective Dwigu is neu.\ but that ending in air is
generally feminine, and that ending in 3TT is optionally so in
which coae it takes the termination f ; tnffitf a collection of
five cows-
.The ^ of final
feminine
-> M o-^i ml
is dropped and the Dwigu is optionally
, ( fr. q^^-l- tf^T^ a carpener ).
: I Pin. II. 4. 26
I Vart
: 5% I P»n-
I Sid. Kau. y
Vartikas.
. 4. 17.
Vartikas on ibid.
150 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. { § 245
(d) * A Tatpurusha ending in ^qn1 and 3TOW is of the neu-
ter gender, when the idea of sn^rpT 'being the first' of what is
known or commenced ( introduced ) is meant to be expressed;
w the work ( grammar ) first taught
or composed by Panini. «|r<{lM&*4 stop the drona ( a measure of
corn ) first brought into use in the reign of King Nanda.
(e) § A Tatpurusha ending in $\m is neuter when the objects
casting the shade are many
(/) f A Tatpurusha having for its first member a synonym
of fTsra[ ( and not o*F* itself ) or the words
and ^nrc for Its latter member is neuter- as
a king's council; but tTSTSnTT; W*nn* , R^lM^^q; 5 alao that
ending in ^nrr when it means 'a multitude'; as
assembly of women7; but wfow in the sense of w
x A Tatpurusha ending in *RT, ^?r, OTIT, ?jn5JT and
s optionally neuter; gUflm^rU-^**, ^STSTT-^ malt liquor
beer, ^qx^niT-^7 the shadow of a wall; «T^TT5JT-c^C > ^HT-
^TT 3T^ ( the 14th day of the dark half of a month, so called
because certain dogs observe a fast on this night, according to
the Sabarabhashya ).
JV. B. These rules hold good in the case of Tat. alone; so
^r%?ft *HTT ( Bah, )- a^T ( Neg. Tat. ), ^jr^n ( Karm. ).
Pin. II. 4. 21.
- I Amara.
§ OTT *1$£ I Pan. II. 4. 22.
T5TT6*4d*q^l I Pan. II. 4. 23. qqiq^^Mjff Vart.
I P»n. II. 4. 24.
i Sid. Kau.
Pan. II. 4. 25.
§•246-247] BAHUVBIHI. 151
III. BAHUVRIHI OB THE ATTBIBUTIVE COMPOUNDS.
§ 246. * A Babnvrihi compound consists of two or more
nouns in apposition to each' other the attributive member be-
ing placed first and denotes or refers to something else than
what is expressed by its members. It generally attributes that
which is expressed by its second member, determined or modi-
fied by what is denoted by its first member, to something
denoted by neither of the two; e. g, trfTOffp ' one whose arm ig
great; ' qicTTOT: ' one whose garment is yellow. ' When dis-
solved it must have the pronoun qu in any one of the oblique
cases: as jr^ ^Tf : HW *T H*l4lg: I TO-' ]; <mT 3T**t *JW *T
*TMH-«K: [ %R: |. A Bahuvrihi compound partakes of thejiaiure
of an adjective and assumes the gender of the substantive
it Qualifies.
Note — In English such compounds are by no means rare ;
cf. high-souled, good-natured, narrow-minded &c.
N. B. The difference between a Karm. and Bab. comp. is
this: — In the former., one of the member alone is in apposition
to the substantive it qualifies, while in the latter the whole
compound is an adjective. In the former the sense is complete in
the comp. itself; in the latter it is not so; 6. g. vm^rg* •¥&:, here
one of the members viz. W\\\: is in apposition to TO: and
therefore the comp. is a Karm. tpfrCTT?: as a Karm. simply
means ipffc'BRl)' ^r^: t a deep sound/ and the sense is complete;
aaaBah.it is equivalent to jpftr: •TT^ fW •' some one whose
sound is deep '; here the sense is not complete unless it is known
whose sound is meant.
§ 247. Bahuvrihi compounds are divided into two classes,
f
«wfc*i'*i"H^i^i I **Q. II. 2. 24.
I Tb.
f Strictly speaking this is not a division of the 'Bah. but -an
exception to the general rule. We have given it as a separate
division to avoid confusion.
152 SANSKRIT GBUOCAB. [ § 247-2*0
( a ) That is a Samanadhikarana Bah. in which both the mem-
bers are in apposition to each other t. «. have the same case
relation when dissolved. There are six kinds of this according
as the q^ is in any one of the six oblique oases. «. g. srrqf1
§ 248. A Vy adhlkaraoa Bah. is that whose members are not in
apposition to each other t. e. are in different cases when dissolved.
A Vyadhikarana Bah. is not allowed in any case except in the
•Genitive and the Locative:* as ^^ qrufY
^I'-sl^lPd: t J 8O
not allowed.
§ 249 Oit.— The Bah. compounds are also further divided
into two kinds Htn^HM«sfrf: and
That in which the sense of the attributive member is also pre-
sent is called TadguTldsamvijnana. TTcTT^sR fK^»^ is an
instance of the first; here such a'jft is meant as has the yellow
silk garment actually on. f%sr$ vfnf 3n*T? is of the other;
Pan. II. 2. 35. In a Bah. the noun
in the Loc. aud an adjectival word are placed first; 3frT tr^
: I Sid.Kau.
t This is allowed by the Vart. <
In a Bah. comp. the word following a noun in the
Loc. or an upamanapada ( a } noun denoting a standard of com-
parison ) is dropped; so this ought to be properly analysed as
But later grammarians, such as Vamana, Bhattoji &o. , have
rejected this V&rt. altogether as of no practical value.
§ 249-252 ] BAHUVIUHI. 16*
here what is meant is hcrusman only and not his variegau
•cows.
§ 250. *Tne negative particle 3T or 3^ and prepositions,
may, sometimes, form Bah. compounds with substantives ; the
verbal derivatives used to express their sense may be optionally
retained j 31f<f3T.i!rr?f* JJ^r* MfM ^?T ^^J^T
ST^rif : a tree with its leaves dropped ;
ruthless; 3*5rTf ^-*-^<l TFT ^T Tf^^T» • with the neck uplifted ,
dead &c. Also 3fl
( where 3ii7«T is an indeclinable meaning 'having* ).
§ 251. f The particle ^ may be compounded with a nonn
ia the Instrumental case in a Bahuvrihi when there is equal
participation in eome action ; in this case ^nT optionally be-
comes tf i as S3TJT WS ^^f- or ^g-:.
(a) fr^ remains unchanged when the compound involes a
blessing but is necessarily changed to *r when followed by iff
a cow, qrfl- a oalf, or f^y a plough, even when a blessing is pro-
nounced ;
§ 252. J A compound of an indeclinable or a numeral or of
or ^f^^ with a numeral is a Bahuvrihi. In the
i
Vartikas on Pan. II. 2. 24.
t ?R *%fa **$[ I Pan. II. 2. 28. ftTO&ICT I
Pan. VI. 3. 82-83. 3*TfT*c-^&faf% ^^^ \ Vart. The restriction
5^1^% is not universal as there are instances in which there
is no equal participation; e. g. 133;*%, ^jftttt, *T<TSTO &c.; hence
the Vrittikara remarks-' Sfffqvqfc g^q^TTTf ffff
Dikshita also says
| Pan. II. 2. 25.
151 SANSKRIT GBAMMAE, [ § 252-254
formation of such compounds the final vowel except that oi
3^ and iror, or the final consonant with the preceding vowel
of tne latter numeral and the sirar of fifafflr* are dropped and
3T added ; 35TRT *TWT % *n% ^ 3q^TT: 'abont ten7 *'. e. nine or
eleven; gff gr ^ff 5TT fi[3T: 'two or three'; fsrr sflTO 3
1%: W^rTT 55T ft?5TT: 'ten repeated twice ». e. twenty j so
&c. ; fifcra: a*T*5TT: STrS^riifarT: 'nearly twenty', f^Rf
ST^f^^ir-* 'not far from thirty', ^T^r^^^in^TT: 'more than
forty': but ^qir^w:, 3<nTUTT: -t ^gT preceded by ^q- or T% does
not drop any letter but simply has an 37 added to it ;
§ 253. jNames of directions may form a Bahuvrihi com-
pound and signify the point of direction between them ;
words so compounded are not the names of quarters, no com-
pound is possible; as qpansg- ^f^f^Trcnrrft (5^ ^e point bet-
ween the East and the North, and not r^TOT^fr as these are
not the names of the Eastern and Northern quarters.
§254. The following words drop their final vowel or the
final consonant with the preceding vowel and take 3? when at
the end of a Bah. compound: —
(«) § 3rf§T »n<l ^F*T 'both meaning parts of the body';
3T33rea[ ^T%tjfr *TW *T 3^3n$r: <one whose eyes are like lotuses';
gfnr 37WfT q^T ^ ^rfow 'one having long thighs',
'spindlelegged'i
* ipftfV ^^^ ^Rf^fong; i \%fi'?rm%m i Pan. v. 4. 75-
VI. 4. 142. 33<nv?Tt ^gfT6!%^r^ I Varfc. under Pan. V. 4. 77.
(see art. § 284 ).
t 3t? t?> f$3ft: I Sid. Kau. ( for the form is the same in
both casea. )
I Pan. II. 2. 26.
I Pan. V. 4. 113.
§ 254 BAHUVBIHI. 155
but ffifafiq 3T$£^ ' a cart with long poles7; *Tg?TOr ^nyqrJ: < a
bamboo stick with big eyelike holes'; ( where 37 is added by
§ 282 ( c ). and hence the feminine ends in 3^', see N. B. For
fffim see also ( « ) below.
N. B. The fern, of Bah. compounds ending in 3T$T is formed
by adding 3CT when it qualifies an inanimate object.
(b) * 3^'fey, when the compound is an attribute of
but Mo-^l^-i^: ^fcT: the hand having five fingers.
(c) f The words Jj^ preceded by fg or r%, c5tH^ preceded
by 3T?(TT &n^ ^f?v &&<^ %^J used in apposition to the came of a
constellation of atars- ^ ^^i-ftTn' T^^ *T fl^rf: two-headed
bat^r^\fr;3T-fr^hT;; srif^for:, ^r^raT^iTFt err: ^n^^
*nights of which the Mriga constellation is the leader' i.e. 'whose
position in the heavens marks their advance;' BO gcq-^arr: &c.
(d) J Feminine words ending in a termination showing f a
complement of/ and the word MUmPf; e. g. ^^rmr N>^*fr ^T^TT
^T^forf rff: ^qTofNo^iTr TT=nr:; * nights whose complement is an
auspicious fifth night.' ^fr STRTofT q-^q- 3^ft sfhnTf<JT: 'one whose
authority is a woman.'
( e ) § ?fe an^ fTl^F^ optionally become %& and ^f^r when
preceded by ar, ^j or ^; ^^r:-r§: having no plough;
I Pan. V. 4. 114.
3^?T*%ViTT ^ ofm: I Pan. V. 4 115, 117.
: I Vart.
: i Pan. V. 4i 116.
I P^n. V. 4. 121.
I Sid. Kau.
156 SANSKRIT GEAIOCAB. [ § 254-255
: 'one who has no thighs/ $:fr?*T: fw 'one having deformed
thighs'; OT?pr:-f%*r:; &c. 51% is another reading for *rfl*l in
the sutra; BO
(/) *ST3TT and $TOT under similar circumstances drop their m
and take are; as 3tf$TORT *T3TT *W srcft wnrr: having no
progeny, §er SHTT H*f *T 3*^: having bad progeny,
f good intellect; similarly
§ 255. (a) t vnJ when preceded by a single member in a
BahuvriM becomes t-nS^; c^^qiui vror n^jr ^r »^IU| \-Tffr ; similarly
f ( see MaU Mad. Act. I Intro. )• but <T^T: ^: vnf i^q-
may also be correct if mutq be regarded
as one word compounded in a Karmadharaya.
are to be similarly explained.
becomes \F^^ as
one whose bow is strung '; so snip^r (
) ' one whose bow is made of horn7; t. e. the god Vishnu.
This change is optional when the whole compound is a name;
(c) Similarly 5TWC * a tooth ', * food/ &c. becomes ;?r W3( when
preceded by ^, sffcf , ^T or ^jr: as ??ft^r: 5T«r: 3T*q- ^srnrr one
having beautiful teeth; similarly f ftfTSTSXTT «».; $oi >T^T ^W,
^orm^ ^<IT q-^fS Wt 3or»fwrr, ^[imwfT one whose food is the
holy soma juice; but qfdd'H<-*n''-
(d) The word fif n. a wound, preceded by ^wfr becomes
when the wound is inflicted by a hunter ;5J7%ot^Hqr^ ^i%d|jrf ^IT:
a stag wounded on the right side by a hunter. See Bhatti VI. 44.
Pan. V. 4.
Pan. V. 4. 124. ^g^sy \ 3,
.4. 132, 133, 125, 126.
5 256 ]
BAHUVBIHI.
157
§ 256. At the end of a Bah. compound—
( a ) *5TT3 *8 changed to ^ necessarily when preceded by JT
and% optionally when preceded by 3^5 snnt *IT&ft *TOr
r < one having the knees wide apart 'i.e.* bandylegged; '
< one having well-turned or beautiful knees; '
long-shanked. *
( b > t sfnrr becomes
whose wife is young- '
earth, f. «. a king, ' &c.
( c ) t T*VT becomes
g^nflr
/t/. ' one
one
whose wife 18 the
or
when preceded by 3^
Wn08e 8meW ia sp'«ad above,
< having a repulsive smell, ' fprf?^:. This change of
possible only when the smell referred to is inseparably connected
with ( looks like a part and parcel of ) the object denoted by
the other member; as fprf^ 7«T *li%& ^ ( which receives its
odour from the lotuses &c. growing in it; ) QirfTtraf^t; but
$Tt*HI TyviT 3TW QT^VT 3(rrqf5r^: ' a perfumer dealing in sweet
smells. ' TTf^r is also changed to irf^T§ when it means ' a parti-
cle of . 9 < a little of, ' or wnen the compound involves compaiieon;
3nnfft«im I Pan. V. 4. 129. 130.
ir P&n. V. 4. 134. ^T 3qrff% I P»H. VI. 1. 66.
at the end of a Bah. substitutes R for its final 3TT- The
preceding ^or ^ is dropped before a consonant except *£.
^r; i Pan.V. 4.
Vart. There is a difference of opinion among critics as to the
meaning of the Vai.., q»Hf4j &c. Some hold that the smell
must be the natural property of a thing to necessitate the final
f . t'f. Jayamangala on Bhatti. ^imf^<HMKVR: rr?\r: &c. II.
10, and Mallinatha on Bag. IV. 45. But the view of such emi-
nent grammarians as Kaiyata, Bhattoji, Kagesha, &c. is as
given above.
S WMlMlnnHJ ^TTTRl^^ I Pan. V. 4. 136-137.
158 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 256-257
so ^firfSqr » dinner in
which there is a scanty supply of ghee, &c.; q^rfq-
' that which has the smell of a lotus. '
( d ) * 5TTm*?T becomes m when it is preceded by a prepo-
sition or -when the compound is used as a distinguishing name
and it is preceded by any word except f^j; ^ar KfRrOT HW *T
3^r*p ' one having a prominent nose, ' qnr^: i one having a good
nose, ' fff* JTim^T *W f ORf: f ' OQe whose nose is like a tree,-'
* large-nosed; ' but f^gififfry:. ^T becomes ^ optionally when
preceded by ^ or ^T; as ^JT*n. or ^TOTF: ' having a noee like
a horsed hoof t. «. flat; ' mw.-W. 'sharp-nosed.' mfa*n
when preceded by fgr becomes ?r or ^q-j as f5r»TcTT ^IKi*T q^T ?T
or f^q-: k' one having a deformed nose. '
§257. The following words lose their final vowel when at
the end of a Bahuvnhi:—
( *.) J The word <rr? when it is preceded by a numeral or fj
or when the compound involves comparison and it is not preced-
ed by * word of the f wrrf^ group ( sf?flR(, 3HT,
3TT5J,^P, ?m, TT^T and some others ).
a biped; ^rr^ fair-footed; ( &miW f5T qn^ ?TW, ) &c. but
:» &c-
( 6 ) qr? becomes q^ and the ccmp. takes f in the /<!772. in
the case of the words $mii<ft? and others ( t. e.
, &c.; ) § but
V. 4.
118. to. %q| ^T*5«J: 1 ^T%ar Vartikas.
i T^rirri Pan* Vlll. 4. 3. 28.
I *[^\ q- | Pan. V. 4. 138. 140.
Pan. V. 4.189.
§ 267-258 ] BAHUVRIHI. 159
( « ) * 3pcT necessarily when it is preceded by a numeral or &
indicating age, or when the whple compound forms a feminine
name-, and optionally when it is preceded by
word ending in 3*q, 3^5, %$*, ^T, or ^T$; IT
'a child so small as to have two teeth only.'
( •• 9. youthful ) fern • but
'* ( having beautiful toeth ) 5^:, a^cft, 4>rf^«1 ( both
proper names, ) &e. but ^m^fr having even rows of teeth -
^rr^r (black) 3p?[T TTO W 5TT*^;?a:, am^^-^cT: having
black or thick-set teeth- ^Ra^Hj^-yfl-, having teeth like the
points of buds; ^3i^;-nT: &c.
( d ) I $>$<? { when the compound denotes a particular stage
of growth;' sremt «J^T^ ^6T *T: ^sHIrt*^.^ ' a bull that has not
got his hump as yet' i. e. * who is very young*; also when it
is preceded by fir and the compound designates the mountain
oi that name; as f%^^ * name of a mountain with three
peaks'; but fir***^: ' having three humps'.
(«) § OT^" <tfae palate' ( g,rf £ rTTg Kas. ) necessarily when
preceded by 3^ and f% and optionally when preceded by <njf ; as
§ 258. ff ^q- is changed to ^ when preceded by ^ or
meaning « a friend ?, or an *enemy; respectively; ?fr«R f f^T
^T 51^ * a friend', ^^ i an enemy '• but ^f fq"« 4 one who has
got a good heart ' t. e. ' one who is able to appreciate merits',
a man of wicked intentions.'
- V. 4. HI. 143-145.
t See Foot-note p. 102.
. I f^rq^ I Pan. V. 4. 146, 147.
Pan. V. 4. 148, 149.
tt Sft^ ftenftawts Pan. V. 4. 150.
160 SANSKBIT GRAMMAB. f § 259-26A
§ 259. * Two nouns alike in from in the Loc. and meaning
'something that can be seized/ or in the Instrumental, mean-
ing ' weapons or things need as weapons/ may he compounded
in a Bah. when the sense is {the fight thus began' and the idea
of an exchange of action is to be implied. In eucn compounds
the final vowel of the first member is lengthened *nd that of
the second is changed to f. The compounds so formed are of
the natnre of Avyayibbavas and are indeclinable. The final 3*
takes Guna substitute before the final % - f «. g. %^ %$$ W-
<%^ *rt ST*f %5TT%T% ' a battle in which the warriors fight
seizing each other's hair'; ^fem ^?&S* JTfr^ 3:5 srara1 ynsi-
grffc; similarly g£rST%> ^fTTfTOT, '^T3?H?fc ««55rg«f§, &c.;,
bat if the instruments used by both the parties be not the same,
no compound is possible; $$r£<Hf& will, therefore, be wrong.
Obst — ( a ) The following words aleo change their final to f-
fitful1; similarly nj^n%
&c.
§ 260. I The following Bahuvribis are laid down as irre-
gular. 5TT*TtT sn<TTW ^rr?l* »• 'one having an auspicious
morning or a day having an aupicious dawn7; see Bhatti. II.
49. ^Tt«R *^r: ST^T g»ar: ' having an auspicious morrow;'
'• 'one- who has passed a happy day',
'having a round belly;'
'four-cornered, quadrangular-' tr^qj ( of a female black deer >
having
the feet like those of a bull'.
Pan. VI. 3. 137. V. 4,
^ I Sid. Kau.
I PAn. V. 4.
§ 261.264 ] BAHuvBhn. 161
4j 261. *Th» words
tl8ed ** the 8ingrilar, a*™ a
added to them, whe.n\they form the latter member of a Bah.
comp,; iq$ (expanded, Veil-developed)
* one fond of ghe* % &o.
" having one man only ', &c.; when 3^ and the words following
it are need in the dual and the plural they take ^ optionally.
or ^i &c.
(a) an! takes the final q»« necessarily when preceded by
and optionally in any other ease; 3^?rfe: 'useless'; but 3Tqr
^meaningless' ^^:.
§ 262. f A. fern. Bah. ending in intakes this ^ necessarily;
T 'a city having mUny ascetics'; ^«
'an assembly having many eloquent speakers in it'; but
or He[l^»t HI*: ( vide § 263 below ), as it is mat.
§ 263. I And as a general rule, when the final word of a Bah.
comp. does not undergo any additions or alterations mentioned
in the foregoing rules, it optionally takes the affix f?. *nrnT51W--
JT5TWT: <of mighty glory'; bvt 3lT^!5T> SJTW^, 3*lPt|: &o.
§ 264. But if the last word of a Bah. compound be a fem^
noun ending in f or 37 not capable of being changed into f^or
^qjbefore the vowel case termination, ox if it ends in q^, ^ is
necessarily affixed; f*gr. ^?
&c.; but ^ifr: iflr is an
exception; q^fffc:, y^?l«: &c.
. V. 4. 151.
Sid. Kau. x ^^f^5|: I Vartika.
f **: m*W I Pan. V. 4. 152.
t ^qri^TTTT I Pan. V. 4. 164.
H. B. G. 11
102 SANSKRIT GB&KMAB [ § 266-267
§ 265. The final err i* optionally shortened before q?*j as
§ 266. f No * is affixed
(a) when the whole compound is used as a name or when it
ends in |qr^, as f%s%^, q^q frq^r: 'whose deities are the
Viswadevas'. *$*: ^iqfcn q^q «jgamm. A Bah. ending in
. ( *. «• f*nft J ) does not shorten its final vowel; *. £.
' one having many excellent
But 3rfS^qrt%: as a Tatpurusha.
(5) to the word ^far preceded by a term 01 praise; sr^r^ft SfRIT
but ^T ^: one who§e brother is a fool.
(e) to the words ^n% and H^fjr both referring to the body of
in animal; ^pw%: ^rq: <the body having many arteries'}
iftiffcr *tho many. veined neok'; but ^fnft^: ^?fWT: ' »
with many ornamental lines'; qgd«^fi*l ( many-stringed )
(d) to the final of the compound
weaver's shuttle' qr^r ) q?: 'a new, unbleached garment/
(«) to compounds formed according to rales §§ 251, 252, and
i53j as ^j?:, ^TRTpr-i ^CH<H«JI?> *o.
I 267. In the formation of a qnHlffrfciUHgrifti'S, H the first
aember be a /em. noun derived from the mas. the affix air or
<, the 77za». is restored if followed by another /«*». noun §•
*r f%
o but
Pan. VII. 4 15.
Pin. V. 4. 155-57, 159-60.
§ Rnrr- 3^*ifiU^n5it«hi^«8cSr ^iHinTR«fe^ i^?
VI. B. 34.
§ 268-269 ]
AvYAYteHA'vA.
163
Exception: — ( a ) This change in the first member does not
take place, when it is followed by an ordinal ( fern. ) or any of
the words, fihu, H^l^l, *H4 (lift, ^HTT, *rf%, *jfifWT,
' one to whom a virtuous woman is dear. *
bnt g£
(6) If the first member be a proper name, an. ordinal number,
name of a limb of the body of an animal ending Jy name of a
class, or a word having a penultimate g» in a few cases, it does
not undergo tuis change* spFTT ( a proper name ) *rnr? g^q-
&c.; bnt 3i%grr v
end in
as the first word does not
&c«
IV. AVYATIBHA'VA OB THE ADVERBIAL COMPOUNDS.
§ 268. An Avyaytbhava comp. consists of two members the
'first of which is, in most cases, an indeclinable ( a preposition
or an adverb ) and the second a noun, the whole being treated
like the Nom. sing, of new. nouns, the comp. so formed is
indeclinable; e. gt arfvfcft 'in Hori'j ^^fffift 'in a mountain/ &c.
§269. In fo £ ming the AvyajibhS. va compounds the following
rales should be observed: —
( a ) The final long vowel is shortened, and the ending qr or
^ is changed to f and aft to s; tfr<Tnrfo *m <TKftffir *T *ft<rr: |
dfan^ft arfWtaH;, 3Tgwnr, after Vishnu, &&s near a cow, &c.
( b ) fThe final 3 of mat. and fen.- nouns in 3^ is dropped; and
optionally that of neuter nouns ending in SF^;
Sid. Kau.
t 3fiT«r I
I Fan. V. 4 108, 109.
164 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ §269-270
( c ) *3| is optionally substituted for the final of
nd ftft; ^Tf 5t-f$V 5nrilwI*iiti«jrSr»
tojhe full-moon day of Margas'lrsha';
t It i» also optionally added to all nouns ending in any
of the fijfsi four letters of a class;
( * ) 3T is attached to the final of tie following nouns when
compounded in^an Avyaya.J; —
&c;
, * towards the Vip&Sa-,' f^^itH\i% S^l^R between two
of the compass. gr^SR^^ towards old age, 3re*TT«nr
on t^« $0*1, &c/, and to 317% when preceded by srj§; ^ changed
to <rff, ^R and 3*3, the f of 3T% bein8 dropped;
ITSr^r^ before one's eyes; 3T$UT ^ TO^r^ out of sight;
and ^^Tfrf^afterwards, forthwith.
$ 270. The indeclinablea forming Avyaylbhiva compounds
have various senses §; •. g. (1 ) the meaning of case; as
* in the protector of the cowherd-' so
&c.; (2) ^fjfrar or « vicinity; as
Kriehna; so ^q^q &c.j ( 3 ) ^^f< or
'prosperity' as Hfffnrt H^f%: 9K^y '" a country wherein
the Madras are in a prosperous condition,1 ( 4 )
(ft+^tfifc: ) or 'bad condition,' as q^TRT 55%
* when * the Yavanas are in a bad condition;' ( 4 f
or absence; as nf$f«|OTrnnrr* M*Sl^»"H ' where flies are
P4n. V. 4. 110,112.
tfPTMPan.V.4. 111.
\ trafhnfr ^rcaifftMr: i Pan. V. 4. 107.
P4n.n. 1. 6.
§ 270-271 ]
AVYAYIBHAV'A.
165
utterly absent ' t. e. ' perfect loneliness ', or ' quiet'; so
&c. ( 6 ) 3T?iPT or ' the close or the transgression of ' as
3Yf*rq-: atf^fi£*rat , ' after tne wintry season, ' so 3?fifaf|^H«( , 3TTO-
* transgressing the proper limits ', &c; ( 7 )
or < uafitness of time ;' as f^yr ^snfft T flWlTl ffa arift-
past sleeping time 5' as armfrsra; 3rTOl?r 5^; ( 8 )
or * manifestation ' as giros?*? ttW fm^fr » which
the name Hari is manifested ( loudly uttered ); ( 9 ) qpOT^ or
< after 7; as f^'TOTt: q«5T^ 3T3^T; ( 10 ) qtrq-^T* or ' fitness ' as
in a corresponding mannerj so
or
agreeably or comfortably to, favourably; &c. (11 )
•' repetition' as sr^ar^ STKT STrq^'in every case •/
JTf^r^rf , ' every day •/ so srfcnrfff^, &c. ( 12 ) awfaflrT or the
' non-violation of '. as 5Ti%iT«Tfftawr q-^T^Tf% ' not going
beyond ' ». e. f according to ooe's power '• so 5rmf%Rrt &o« ( 13 )
or « similarity '; as ^;: w&$ *S R ' like Hari. ' ( 14 )
$ or 'succession in order, priority ', as 3>3f*I ^l^4^3ct
* according to seniority ', so 3t«priTC ' according to
the proper order, ''&c. ( 15 ) ^taTO or ' eimultaneouaness ', as'
along with the wheel '. ( 16 ) ^r»irr% or
•* power, influence ;' aa ^r^rnrf ^^1%: fT^Tan^ ' with the
Kshatriyas in a satisfactory condition, ' or ' very influential '
or ' powerful. ' ( 17 ) •BT^q* or < entirety, fulness "; aa gronrfq-
SR^fT^^T ^irtgif^ * in a manner not leaving out even grass '
; and ( 18 ) z&a or < end '; as
•' including the work on fire ( which is studied last of all )},
BO ^T«U«J^, &c.
§ 271. ( a ) J 3TC3. showing a definite measure may be com-
* 10-13. are the senses of
rs^nf^ ?nmfr: i Sid. Kau.
t TfirTi^nT^ Pan. II. 1. 7.
is not compounded" when it
indicates similarity,
J ^W^WvnTBr I Pan. II. 1. 8.
166 SANSKRIT GBAIOCAB. f § 271-274
pounded with any word; e. g. iTTTOr: *$W- HURT*
' bowing down to Achyuta as many
times as there are Slokas ;' so
§ 272. * jrfic meaning « very little ' is compounded with a
noon and ia placed last; 5TTO** ?*$T: STTOriir ' very little
vegetable '. But f£ f$r jrft ft$T?l& fif^ where snt meana
« towards 7.
§ 273. f The words 3^, and ^ToH^T And a numeral, are-
compounded with <rft and placed first to express ' loss in a
game '5 ar^mr firqrffff l^r ai$rrfi, ' so as to be a loser by an
unlucky throw of dice '• ^TcJT^PrR: * an unlucky throw or
movement of one of the pieces at a game played with Sal&kas r-r
qf^rft ' loss of one throw of dice', &c.
§ 274. (a ) J The prepositions spr, ^ and ^f|: and words
derived from the root 3^ ( srr^, STfU^; , s^ , ?flwr^ , fflrf^ ,
&e. ). are optionally compounded with a noun in the Ablative;
or aurfooft: < away from Vishnu ' - fTKf^ or TT?R«afr:i
or ^fl^fng;; sn»^»l^ or MH^HId.' to the east of the
forest ' &o.
X * ) S *U showing limit, inclusive and exclusive, is optionally
compounded with a noun in the Ablative; and so are 3*3, 3{r«jf,
and srfff all meaning ' towards ' with a noun in the Accusative;
or €YT3%: < until final liberation > tf*nT'> 3TT^R3: or 3H^l-
: np to the child. ff^n%:; aqwrigr or 3=rf?|TTrH towards the-
or grfg- srfSi 3^g^T^ or
Pan. IL 1. 9.
I Pan. II. I. 10. ^rw*f
: i Sid. Kau.
t ftmT I *TrfT*f*TW M^HJI I P4B, JJ.l. 11-12.
§
: | Pan. II. 1. 13-16.
! 274-279
167
( c ) 3r«f meaning 'towa^*' or 'alongside of/ 'lengthwise/
is also similarly compounded; ^<HH ( «TTOr *T*frr
*tbe thunderbolt passed ) towards the forest'; JTfUTT 3*3
' Varanasi is alongside the Ganges ' ( ^
«i*i; S, XL. )
§ 275. *The words qrr and ncv optionally form Avya. com-
pounds with any nominal base, and are placed first, the final 3?
being changed to q- when thus compounded ; e. g.
from the middle of the Gangetic stream ; optionally of course,
the Gen. Tat.; also *|frim<|^, *T7*IWTg> 1° this case the Ab.
termination is irregularly retained. If the final noun has the
sense of the Loc. the final vowel may be changed to 3ft^; as
Bhatti. V. 4.
§ 276. ( a ) f A numeral may optionally be compounded
with a noun, showing relation by blood or by some kind of.
learning, to form an Avya. comp.; |f qftfqft f%gr3, cgT*<unq
*> 9- T%iT^r «^H*^ui4 « 8ans. Grammar of which the
three sages, Panini, Katy4yana and Patanjali, are the author*
in succession. '
(b) I and with names of rivers, this comp. also shows an
aggregate; TOPfoir, fi^^H^.
§ 277. If Any noun may be compounded with the name of a
river, into an Avya. comp. to form a name; >irHTT4<l^, & place
where the Ganges is very boisterous.' so &ti$&ifiwi, &c.
§ 278. The indeclinables *nr*n, fWTT, 3TRT3, 3rf*RT:,
do not combine with any noun; ^rjrqrT 5TTlt>
279. The following Avya. compounds are anomalous f :—
I Pan. II. 1. 18.
. U. 1. 19
t *
Sid. Kau.
J ^fffHV I Pan. II. 1. 20
tt ac«rr^r$ ^ ^nrr^ i Pan. II. l. 21.
T faqMdiK ^ I Pan. II. 1. 17.
Vart
168 SANSKRIT GBAJOCAB. [ § 279-280
fi*5f «T& ?ET fifa JU«W»W 'the time when cows
stand for being milked*' see Bhatti. IV. 14. So *£g <fcne time
when cows conceive or balls bear the plough; mmfUf' *TT*n
' the evening time, ' « the time when the
cows come home'; ^§PT^, ' the time when the barley is on the
thrashing ground •' similarly ^%53TT-, 3?TTC7X 'when barley is
reaped/ c£3HlH<HU;. *i£<m^, &c. ^m^T 'when the ground is
even • ' ^Rq^TRl 'when the foot-soldiers are in right lines, ;
at the end of the year-
in an evil year; HU4UHI<> SHff^, sr^R; '^nen the
chariots move forth/ 9^*1^ 'when the deer comes/ f^^if^,
sr^WT^., ^fsitw and 3p£snff .
N. B. — According to all followers of Pan. compounds of
this group are precluded from being 'urti or compounded though
poets do not seem to respect the prohibition except in so far as
to place such words at the end of these comps.; cj,
Bag. I. 76 ; also IV. 25, VII. 24, &c.
GENERAL RULES APPLICABLE TO ALL COMPOUNDS.
§ 280. * The words =g^t 5^, g^g, ^f; when is does not
4 the yoke of a carriage', and qt^, fat the end of any compound
take the soffix 9; 3T>H:-4«t 'half a Rik •' i%^5< } 'the town of
Vishnu / f%H5yj^ *r*: 'a lake with pure water ;' ^i^a^il 'the
yoke of a kingdom', t. 0. 'the heavy responsibilities of governing
it' &c. *«r<rofr %^T; 'a country with pleasant roads', &c.
( a ) But in the case of 3^ preceded by 3^ or ^ the 3| is
added only when the compound denotes a student of the Rig
Veda§; si^xr: one who does not study the Big Veda/ ^g^r: 'one
that has studied the Rig Vada ;' but sp^ ^TR, 'the S&ma Veda
that contains no riks.' ^g^ ttH 'a hymn consisting of many riks/
Pan. V. 4. 14.
t Substituted for <n%* I J gfotf $&n^ , Sid. Kau.
S ^^^^s^iif ^?l^^ ^ Sid. Kau.
280-282 ] COMPOUNDS. 169
(b) 3^ when it refers to 3T$T ' a car ' does not take this 3Ti
: the yoke of a carriage;
§281. *The 3f of the word 3T£ is changed to f when
preceded by f$, aflf*^?;, or a preposition; and to 5T when preceded
by 313 and tne compoand is the name of a country ; as
3TT<ft *foT53[ *fa £T<H* ' peninsula., 3T?crf?fT 3?lfr 3fr
'an island.' snftirac 'in oppsition to the force of waters*/
Wflqq ; aiqrr: t ( 3*g«Rtt: stroll ) ' name of a place or country .'
The change of 3T to f is optional if the preposition end in 3T;
t TRJT^C sf^i^iim'H ; HtM«Jk-MtiH^ ' a pond or a tank,
ti passage for water/
§ 282. ff The following words take the suffix 3? before which
the final vowel, with the following consonant, if any, is dropped.
(a) m*&i and ^ftrsy when preceded by irffr, 3*3 or 3^; srifr-
*rtf, *rnr 3=nT3«T: a^^rm: friendly, am frnr arsrar^ a bad
hymn; Jjfff^rsnr 'in inverse order, inversely'; 31^1 HH 'ia
natural order, successively, directly/
preceded by ^sor, ^^[, q|0^ or a numeral,
:; similarly ^fnfr ^f&: *TW ^
: ] 'having
two floors '
(e) The words sr^ and irtqufl preceded by a numeral;
when used in a metaphorical sense, and not meaning
* ra?rereifafrOT fe i awffita ' p»n- VI. 3. 97-98.
t
I Vartika.
tt 3T^ i««i*^«i'44irftii««iy'' I Pan. v . 4. 75.
rt ^r i Vartikas.
Pan. V. 4. 76. sf^rirfr^f: j Pan. V. 4. 85.
170 SANSKRIT GBAUHAB. [ § 282-283
the eye'; as qqmgfi* «WW: #'. resembliog the *ye of a bull
* a round window.'
(•) *ns*3* when Preceded by a preposition; ;pr£taifffi *
carriage that has reached a road, inggt ( distant ) ^^rr journey
I
(/) * also STTpT i° compounds like
§ 288. f 3T is added to the finals of the following—
(«) sHrec preceded by 5T5R or sfcTOj STWVW^ ' the define
Majesty of Bratnhan or the glory of A Biahmana'; 'pre-eminence
or sanctity arising from sacred knowledge'. gR^4*JH 'the
8pl«mdour or magnificence of an elephant '.
preceded by 3T*, ^T^ and sr^r; •.- g.
slight darkness ,' ^m ?W: ^cmfrw * great or continuous*
darkness ; 3^ cTR: 3R^cnmw ' pitchy darkness.'
preceded by 3flg, 3T^ or <
'secret, solitary'; 3T?m<t ff : 3WC5^ 'a litfcle secret,' or 'desolate*-
a hot secluded place.'
in the Loc. and preceded by srr% ^% li
against the breast.'
(e) ift preceded by 313, when length i? implie; 3(3*17
a vehicle measuring as much as a bull in lengt
I Sid. Kau.j this is obtained by
separating the portion 37^ from the Sutra '3^ sr^p^ro/ But
this is no sanction for forming new compounds ending in «fTO»
It is only a device used by grammarians to explain such words
t
i Pan. V. 4. 78. 79; 81-83.
§ 284-286 ] COMPOUNDS. 171
§ 284. * 3T is always added in the case of the following
tweatyfive compounds which are: — <flf«t*JUHTM HfrjiR 3flf*I
3^3?: destitute of four; so ft^yr: »nd #^&i: all three Bah,
compounds . then eleven Dw. compounds for which .see § 192
( b ) the last two; and § 196 (e); ^tsfq- s^TK^^r *K«liJ<4 Avya.
( fprsr: as a Bah. ); f*T%?T sfrff m: WfT^, ' sure, never failing
bliss ;' 35W gprrg: 55*T«T5* ' the Period of numan life ', both
Tat.; *ifRTg*r: *wnrm: ^n^TO ' the period of two lives-' simi-
larly, *UI*i«IH, both Dwigu* ; 5£rq^jTO Dw.; Sffim
a young bull'; nffa: ' a grown up bull.' f^f^: 'an old
bull'; all Karms.; ^y^: *nfi<ra( T^^ST^ ' near the dog % Avya.
'fft' ^T *ftw> ' a d°8 *n a cowpen that barks at others '; hence
figuratively •* a person who idly stays at home and slanders
others '. Tat.
§ 285. f The finals of compounds -having for their first
member 3 or stfft in the sense of ' praise ' and r% in the sense
of ' censure', remain unchanged • &<MI ' a good king '
* a pre-eminent king ': 3iT%ifr ' an excellent bull'
but qTJRHT:; irT^fdcKT^: 3H^R:; fT%?fr TT3TT fitlW ' a bad
king ', f^5fWT * a bad Iriena '; but f%TT3f :, fiNw: in other
cases. This prohibition does not apply to Bah. compounds
OTHEB CHANGES IN CONNECTION WITH COMPOUNDS.
§ 286. J The word q-f^ is changed to <r^ when followed by
m9, T and ^Tf?T; and to. ^5 necessarily when followed
by if R, ^n5^, and fm, and optionally when followed by
: i Pan. v. 4. 77.
t JT ??Rra: i Pan. v. 4. 69. wmwrofcr i v*rt. r%w:
V. 4. 70.
t *Ji3t4 M<5iNr<4iia*iiHQn^ ' Pan. VI 3. 52.
Pan. VI. 3. 54, 56
172 SANSKRIT GBAHMAB. [ § 286-288
. a? <rr5T*qT!T3Tcftfi* T^Rn, «uniwHftft
J|-odcftfd 7^<T: all meaning one walking on foot, a pedes-
trian; a foot-soldier ', &c.; q'frq'fcT- ' beaten down by the feet7;
'.MfeJUl'' coldness of the feet ;» qr^ sftj ^frsmw <T?OTJT 'one
accustomed to tax his legs, a footman ' ; q^r ffaf- M'^frf* a beaten-
track, away, a road ; q^fft: or frr^T:, qfSire: or trnrfro.';
trs^*^: or qT5$r«5: <Tfk«S: or qr?R*3»: ' quarter of a Niehka '
( a gold coin ).
§ 287. * i^r becomes 5^ necessarily when followed
( formed with the affix 3^ ), and g^g- and the Tad. affixes q-
( q^ ) and ^{ ( STO^), and optionally when followed by ^ffc and
^HT and the^ Tad. ? ( *n* )j ^[4- T«Wcftl^ f &?: ' beart-
ache ', ( ^fir g g^S^- Sid. Kau. ), $s5Tfn * disquietude, '
'hiccough'; £3Trflr f^f f^ <agraeable to the heart ';
5r?,£^n^:or£5trafftj: < the pang of the heart; > f3[qfm
§ 288. (a) ^f^f becomes ^f neoessarily (1) when it forms
« proper name, also when it is final ; or (2) when followed by
the words qif , orm, n&f, and ft; aqftq: ' a particular clond filled
with water ; ^^:, ^ftr?: tha sea of milk; <y*<m5: &c-; ^^
f^Tftr, g^WT^r: standing in water ; 3^13^:, ^?n%: ' a vessel for
holding water » ^ry: ^3^ or ftrSid. Kau.;
(6) and optionally when followed by a word beginning with
a simple consonant and denoting ' a vessel to be filled up with
water', and by JT?^, ^r^T, ^^T, fts$ *T3r, ^TC, flT, «ft^T * a
yoke with a pan at each end for carrying loads ' ( ef>r<€ Mar&-
thi ) and ^^; ^^«T: or ^f *^:; but ^^^^Tsft ( as
begins with a conjunct consonant ), a^qsfa.'j vj^H?VT: or
i barley-water ; gr^f^; or XJ^H: rice boiled with water,
^tM '^uiti I ^T «'X43ii«i I Pan. VI. 3. 50. 51.
t
I Pan. VI. 3. 57-60.
$ 288-291 ] COMPOUNDS. 173
water-meal; ^sffa^: or 3?qtftar:, 'a yoke for carrying water;'
•* or 3H4**liy ' plunging or bathing in water ' &o.
§ 289. ( a ) * When the first member of a compound ends in
f or 37 not capable of changing into f ^ or s^and not belonging
to a/ow. termination or an indeclinable, the f or 37 is option-
ally shortened; 2JTUoft3*r: or mufft^: the son of a leader of
a village; &c.; but jft^RUTv sft^Tf :, ^IW«> SJifnTnn &c.
( b ) But the word ^followed by ^r and ^% is an exception*
'. Bid. Kau. ) an actor; $£5jf?»?: the knit eyebrow; accord-
ing to some, ^ optionally becomes 5f when followed by gfc or
: as ^r^f: and W^I9T: ( see ft. note ).
§ 290. Oba. — f Tlie fem> affi* 3TT or f at the end of a word
forming the first member of a compound is shortened in moat
cases when the whole is a name or in the Veda
&c.; but
^rqf^, &c. The 3TT or f is optionally shortened when followed
by fj
§ 291. Obs.— } The words ^2^T, ?^N»T and HT^T shorten their
final when followed by i%r, <JcJ and ^rt?^ respectively- fc^|%-
of bricks; q$£$Rnnn yfr4»j|^K ^n« point of a reed/
**» RTSJWft having or wearing garlanda;
(•/.MAX Mad. IX.2.)&c,
I Pan. VI. 3. 61.
IrF^^ Vartihas.
ffff 5^I?5iTr5cT^ I Sid. Kau.
t ^?TWt: *i3m5?TOV*§cro I ^ ^r I Pan. VI. 3. 63. 64.
I Pan. VI. 3. 65.
174 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 292-294
§. 292. Obs. — •* A nasal is inserted in the case of the follow-
Ing words: -*r?q-, 3m? and 3T*3 followed by gjtT; ^5 by irw,
«fa? by £foT; aRTKTTO fcy ?*n *T£ and grf^T by f^T, raSr by ft«r
or fttefjfa; and ^Of and TS& by ?Rnr, as nzrfKi, ' making true,
earnest money, ' &c; cf. Kir. XI. 50. sf *T^TT: ' a phy«cian, '
:, 'efficacious,' ' admittance J ( anpgqirir: Tat. B. );
( nfirsfift V& Tat. B. ); ^fr^^nr: * pervading or filling
the world, ' aHVgrgrf&fO:: ' not to be approached, to be shunned
from afar, ' ( |w gf^Sar f^rf: Sid. Kau. ); wi^ft^:, c one
who fries or roasts in a frying-pan/ ^ftlTH^*, 'one who kindles
fire, ' fffmf^wt ' e monstrous fish that swallows down Timi
( a large fish said to be 100 Yojanas in length ); ' mr&<%^m5J: t
* a very large fish that swallows even a Timingila; '
heating; naqum conferring prosperity.
§ 293. ^rBr followed by a krit affix inserts a nasal optionally;
: or *n%«cRr:, ' a night-rover, ' * a demon; ' ^|Qnd: or
* &C.
§ 294. J ^rf forming the first member of a compound, is
changed to F —
( a ) when the whole compound is a name; 0. g. ^m^iyn?
but q^mi a comrade in battle ( Upapada eomp. ).
( b ) when it means 'including a certain literary work/ or 'in
.addition to-/ as ^rg^S ( Avya. comp. ) *qrf?rorcfnT * he studies
the ecience of astronomy, including that of finding out the auspi-
cious times; ' TOtton ^nft ' a khari with a drona in addition to it. '
Pan. VI. 3. 70. grefrvnr 3-* 5*1* I
i
Vartika.
t Vide Rag. XIII. 10. and Mallinatha on it. ' aif«ff
t tnt*i fn 33ii<4i<< i ir^Tr*tn7vr^> ^ i fihffif td^m^ i Pan.
VL 3. 78-80.
5 294-295 ]
COMPOUNDS.
176
( e ) and when the object denoted by the latter member is
not visibly seen, but is to be inferred: as wi*H*Tl4>l ( Bah-
comp. ) f3r$rr ' * night in which presence of demoness is
to be inferred'
, jrrfir,
§ 295. «OTR becomes tf—
( a ) when followed by the words
• a kind of mourning which lasts from the rising
of the sun or a particular collection of stars to its setting.
i iR«i sqlinfir srrfii^' ^^ wr
^r 'BvyMJ i<t Kf<§**m I Tat. Bod. )j
: belonging to the same country, ^rrrBr:, ^Rlf*f: 'con-
nected by the same navel, sprung from the same ancestor,' &c.
( b ) when followed by the word ffgreTTTC t <a student of the
Veda who lelongs to the same £'a£Aa or branch as another/
(e)when followed by ffh? with the Tad. affix q- added to
it; as ^THRrFm ST*fr ^fdVd}: ' a disciple of the same preceptor; '
and optionally when followed by 33^ under the same circum-
stances; *mro^> $rftrcT: fft^^: or ^qi^q: « born of the same
womb,' < a brother by whole blood/
( d ) when f ollowed by ^ , g^r «nd ^r; ^r^ ,
(e) I and in the case of compounds like
mWn m*\
Pan. VI. 3. 85-89.
f
t ^WMW ^ *^i W H?4« ^^5^*5 I Pto- VI. 3. 84. The proper
meaning of this sutra is that the word fHRTR is changed to *r
in the Yeda when followed by any other word than
176 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ $ 296.297
§ 296. ^ IB changed to »r when the following words are
compounded*;
( « ) 3nrf§r and
>a
( I ) *far and
( e ) s*ftf?r^ or sirg^ and ^IT; sqtnriflT:, 3TTg€f ff: a sacri-
fice performed for obtaining long life.
( d ) and in the case of the words fFTTRT *nd others;
§ 297. f 3T7^ in any other case than the Inst. and the Gen.
is changed to 3iwr^, when followed by arrf^, 31T5TT,
blessing'; a^rf 3Tr?n ^^T^t^T 'another desire';
* devotion or attachment to another '• 3TrU<^lf?^fcT- ' resorting
to another'. 3q^j^^;; * eager for another^;
and
c. bnt
as compounds like frq-^r &c.y cannot be properly explained by
any of the sutras following this, grammarians like Vamana
think that the portion ^rrr^^r ought to be separated from this •
sutra and considered as a separate sutra by itself; Bhattoji
Dikshita conform to this opinion of Vamana, but following
Haradatta suggests that the ^r in compounds like tm$r may
alao be taken to be a substitute for ^ meaning like or similar
to/ the compounds being considered as Baimvrihis;
3HWT
Sid. Kau.
Pan. VIII. 3. 80-81, 83. 98.
t
i if9 f%«TT«IT 1 Pan. VI. 3. 99. 100.
§ 297-299 ] COMPOUNDS. 177
wnen followed by qsTTO? and the Tad. affix q- in
which cases the restriction is removed; ^*q*q <M<
an<* optionally when followed by
^&; or ^^n^J: a different meaning &c.
§ 208. * A certain number of compounds and other words of
irregular formation are classed under the head of gqft^T- Any
word whose formation cannot bo properly explained is inclnded
into this group. These are to be taken as found in the language.
The principal of these are:— -^q^: ^r^ 7%^T^ 'wind, sir'. 577^
T f*:t (either from ^ or ^ ); f^?fhff f^:
j. 7 to' kill ). 144 *j | & 3TTrWT 11^1^1 the soul that is
concealed from the external senses, qr^OTT 3\W> ^cTT^^r:
•clones ' ingR^T ^fT: ( » bag ) gftwif.* * a cloud'; ^rTJT- ( dead
bodies ) ^?t 3TW ^ff^TR or ^r^Rf 5TU5T ( Kas. );
^VJi<4 W^. 55TffTnT ^c&i<tc4H> <a wooden mortar7;
'the seat of ascetics or holy
sages discussing pbi iosophical subjects7; irq% amr, IT?!! faJft WT>
jr^: ' a peacock. 7
( « ) T <TTT becomes ^TT optionally when compounded with tho
names of directions; as^^xrrf^^or^r^nrrfnT^
-(4) O5*.~ ^^ becomes ^ in the following
^HT: 'diftlcali to bo given or hurt'; ^rffcf ^rwm ^arr^f: ' not
easy to be destroyed:' ^:^T TV?T^ <p?*r: ^difficult to be injnred
or impelled:7 ^:^r tTn^fttf^ f 53T: &t:.
§ 299. The vowel o| the first member is lengthened in the
following casesf: —
Pa«. VI. 3. 109.
II Sid. Kan.
t f^^WTrfrTW 5TTT^T^r ^T I Vartika.
§ ^t ^i9iii^iHW^rr«itsnts^iq« *£*$ ^ i Vartika.
H
I Pan. VI. 8. 116: il8-l*fr. 122. 123.
125,129,130.
H. S- 0. 12.
178 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [ § 299-500
(a) When the nouns derived from the roots sig, ^g^ 3^
sqt£, ^, ^5-, and cR[ with the aff. %<£( o ) follow prepositions
termed Gati or nouns which they govern; sJMMg , ?frl<S an in-
habited country, a realm, snathe rainy season, jpflrff^ piercing
the vitals; so ^«TTRa; a hnnter (cf. Bhatti II. 7). rfi^, spffo^,
«K7fpT^overpowerrng an assailant <ulrtd,- Bat qf<$UH3C as jf]» is
not followed by Kuipm
(b) When followed by the aff. ir^y, and the whole is a name;
^MJqgfl: a husbandman.
( c ) Words containing more than two vowels when -followed
by 1T3 ( W} except in the case of arf^rf , &i%*9 $$&*, tf*
and ^tt.^r^ and the whole is a name; 3ffrcT3Tcfr and
which are names; but 3Tl3fC«rcfr; tfi-ftlflfti ^<ga^aV which is not a
name. Also in the case of $rc,-75T, «*, «lft, ^f^/ 3?^» S^ and
(<2) When a verbal derivative with the aff. 37 ( ^sr^ ) follows
.a preposition, in most cases, when the comp. does not signify a
human being. qT^TCT.-q'fnT^:) but faq|<^: one of a mountain-
tribe. Similarly qfSf-?fr-^i STf^-cfr-^TT: &c.
(0) When CET*T follows a preposition ending in f ; «fhCT9T:>
^T?r:5 but snjTSr:
(/) When 3f^ is the first, and «rc the second member of a
compound, and the whole is a name; sreR^ gold, 3T?T<r^: a
apiderj but grff5=r:, ft^R^t: an epithet of Savitri.
(g) When ure ^s ^3 latter member and the whole is the name
of a rishi; f^lBl^:, but ft^ffnft *m^: I
§ 800. **^is inserted in the case of the following compounds: —
f^T:
VI. 1. 144, 147, 148-152, 154, 156, 157.
t Vart. srw^r f%t%l%T|*fr: I Vart.
3 300-302 ] COMPOUNDS. 179
(a) 3T<IT followed by q^ when continuity of an action is
implied; <fl<Tf*W ^TTOT T^grf^T I STTrmfixd^ *Hanmqsr:} but
and in the
case of 3^+^ when wonder is meant j 3TFOT
But
: when it means ro*£ ( ff?5T
I Bid. Kau. ) otherwise a^grr.; 3IT^R: when it
means ^«n^C ' P»rt of a carriage'; ftfa»r. ( or ftfiFr: ) '& bird7.
r: ( ST5TO: H^lltfl WT Sid. Kau. ), but jrfffiw: ^gi srfir-
r: 'one who boldly faces the whip, a disobedient servant '
&«• ««i^: ( a bamboo ', but R^^: 'a shark ', w^i?^ * an ascetic'
but JTsrf^t * the sea '; S?TT^^T: when it means ' a particular kind
of tree/ otherwise cfcK<M» i
(c) in the case of the words of the qr<WIK §rouP; su«^
a? qi<tc|><:, ft«^:> f%T%?^T, &c. when they are names.
(d) and when the words ^ and sr^ are follow d by g^
and <rfo and the meaning is 'a thief ', and 'a deity7 respective-
ly, and ^ and gr being dropped before g;; <&m:. f^fTT^:. Also
: &c.
§ 301. *When the words s^r, f^»j^, f%a^? m^ and
are followed by ^r in a compound they lengthen their
ending vowel, and the ?r of q^f is changed to ur ( also after
but
§ 802. Ols—} The * of ?R is changed to or necessarily
when preceded by sr, and optionally when comrtounded with
names of herbs or plants containing two or tljree vowels
but -
Pan. vm. 4. 4.
i
I Pan. VIII. 4. 5-6.
180 fifANSKBTT GBAMMAB. [ § 302-306
^T^T*^. ( as the word contains more than three vowels ); ex
ceptions:*-^ R* 1 4H J^>
£ 303. *The «r of ^r^T is changed to or when preceded by
a word denoting an object that can be borne; T^i^TO; bat
*i«rtl: Sid. .Kan. ).
§ 304. t The «r of qr*T is changed to or necessarily when the
compound implies a country and optionally when it signifies
merely the act of drinking ; as gTrnqFT: ( m^TT )}
( a ) ;r is also optionally changed to or in the case of the
following compounds: — ftft-nnft-3^, T*lfT-IJi^-H^r,
, &c
Chapter VIH.
FORMATION OF FEMININE BASES.
§ 305. Feminine bases are derived from the masculine by
the addition of the affixes air ( 37^, ^L, ^m,)> i (
§ 306. Before the affix £—
(a) noons ending in consonants assume that form which they
take before the termination of Inst. sing.;
, &c. There are some exceptions, ^^
I Pan. VIII. 4. 8.
*TM<HUnTr: I Pan. VJII. 4, 9-10 P
§ 306-307 ] FEMININE BASKS. 181
( b ) the preceding 3f or f is dropped; as
tff. &c.
( c ) if a Pratipadika* end in q-, part of a Taddhita^aflix, that
*T is dropped in^ + £=*TT*ff. ' the daughter of Garga.' &c.
(d) the final q- of the words ^$, frf^r the constellation of
stars called 3*1, 3nr^q- and ir^q- f ia dropped; as ^rft» WcHT, &c.
( 9 ) in the case of the participles of the present and the
future ;j is inserted, as in the Norn, dual of the neu.
( vide § 311. a. b. ). for instances, see § 236.
§ 307. A PratipadHa ending in 37 and the words included
in the Ajadi group j form their feminine in 3JT §; as
, f^rfldT? all meaning 'a young girl'; ( of these the first five
form an exception to § 313, and the second to § 308, o'); srr ia
also added to q^ when compounded with CTfj *T*3T, BTT^nT, (TOT
and fqo^*; to 5^7 when compounded with ^ , words ending in
«r^[ , to <&irg, srRrf , 2HH and tr^; to ^g- not preceded by JT?g[ , when
class ia implied, and to ^ preceded by 3?. 4
ijTc5T, &c all 'kinds of creeper'; ^-qT^-S
'kinds of creeper' 23^1 ' a woman of the ^jjf class;'
( a ) ^[ But if the Pratipadika end in gr ( the member of the
I Pan VI, 4. 150. For the meaning of the term
Pratipadika vide § 52.
3^*137: I Pan VI. 4. 149.
J The words included in the Ajadi group are.
< a ram ', 3fs«^, ^r^ « a sparrow', ^^, ^r^, ^cfT, flT, qr^ * a
young child,' jr^-; f%5ym, gy* 'a heron,' ^f2tn^ , ^ft^ '* deity/
and *rr^3.
Pan IV. 1. 4. 4. qrn^i 1 f^HToriqtrtvq;. qf«T^
-" i JT^HT:
V&rtikas.
I Pan. VII. 3. 44.
^UMH t <7r^<ft%7 I Vartikas.
182 SANSKRIT QBAMMAB. [ § 307
termination ) the preceding & is changed to f 5
<fcc. the words m*re>> 5TT3T, and those ending in the Tad affix
& with ^ suffixed to it, changed their 3T to 5 similarly;
^P ^priff calls out to
woman of this place.
Exceptions: — *The gr is not changed to 5- -when the ^ is
added to the pronouns ir^ and ?j^, or when it is a part of the
Tad. affix ?q^T, or when there is a compound, or when there it
a word included in the Kshipaka group j ( %T^*rar ); sa q^r?
5ETOT, aypardlsMy ' a tableland ?, ^<T?^JiT ' the land at the foot of
a mountain*/
( 5 ) 4 a* is optionally changed to ^ in the following cases. —
( 1 ) rHTejrr ' a star7, rTTf?cFT ' able to protect ,; ^ul*T ' a cloak,
a garment,7 g-for^rr ( in other cases ), g^-?Tff«T ^T^TTT XTT^r^
^rfr^t 5 srfifosT; 3?H^T ' ^ind ol Shraddhs/ 31%^T ( in other
cases ),
( 2 ) ^(?n>T-^rT^r, a woman recently delivered; gQcfcl or 5?r^r?
^-SK*1 or ^^n%r, a goddess.
( 3 ) when the 3F follows upon the fern, termination 3TT short-
ened to 3j and is preceded by q- or ^; as
&c.
I Pin. VII. 3. 45. «rew f^JT: I
Vartikas.
t The following words are included in the
* an archer.' ^f^t ^r^j 'a spy,? ^gfT, m& 'a kind of bird, hail,'
' a kind of plant/ ^5^, 3T?^FT, ^^T^n1, and
t crr^^r ^frfm^ i *nf*FT ?TRH% I
%f?r ^RSSIR , VartiKa.
Pan. VTI 3. 46. ?TTf^nra^ fon*\ Vdrtika.
§ 307-308 ] FEMININE BASES. 183
(e) This change of & to f is necessary when the ^ follows
the q- or q; of a root SRT^fTT, ^qri%-^T, &c.
§ 308, (a) A* pratipadika ending in gj^ except
and 5f|-?FT; ST ^T, preceded by $?:, STSTrT: 3T^ and ^f; and
^R- preceded by ^far. ^TTT an(i words expressive of place; the
words jr^1, ^fT, %q-, Trr?", TT, *&?, and rf^, nominal bases ending
in qir, nominal and verbal derivatives formed by the affix 3f
causing Vriddbi or Guoa, snch as ^q-Tf:, 3^?^:, ^pHEfT:, TTT-
5Tf:, ^nS^T'S fTTf ^T'j &c. and words ending in the Tad. affixes
5*1^, <psr, ITT^ and ^qj ( with some exceptions ) and in the krit
affix r^j form their fsminina in |r when they are not used adjec-
tively; e. g. WTaFfr conducing to pleasures; rr^^fT &c.; qf«rft,
firrft, &c.5 3TWCr, &c.; OTT^fr, f ^rfl, a woman of the Kuru
country; «?W^Cr, &c.; jrfr, ^€r, ^T, &c.; ^nrft?ft, tswfr, &c.;
^1-, a^Wlr, &c; ^iT^rft, ^^T^Tfr, &c.;
measuring or reaching as far as the knee; &c.
&c.; ITS^fr, fTIF^fr, ??^fr, evanescent, an unchaste woman &c.;
&c. but
JAbo words ending in the' Tad. affixes
( causing Vriddhi ) and the words <TSOT and cT^?r
/« for a mar- ^UTbl^V, fT^jfT, cT^fr, &c. also words ending
in the krit. affix sra causing a nasal to be inserted before it-
(e) § Words indicative of the stages of life except the last
tako the fern. £ ; $ smV,. t%^Tm, 51^0, ^>J?T, f%^traV ( both
meaning a ' a young woman ' )• but ^57, ^qf7f r &c- as these
imply old age; gj^qr is an exception.
'T: ( Pan. IV. 1. 15.
f Vide the Kashika on Pan, III. 2. 21.
t *t^H3ricfe^^^u^^r;ng^r^^iR3g[ i Vdrt. qsr^- Pan.
IV. 1. 16,
§ ^m snr^r i Pan. IV. i 20. ^TO-CUH $ft *n^*\ Virt.
184 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 308-310
(d) Oh—*The words %^y, mire, wfa* TO, 3TOT,
airfer, SR^TcJ *ad ^nnr form their fern, in £ when they are
u*ed as names ( or in the Veda )• %3cJT, ITTflrCT, HRT*¥r, wfe<fr
&c 5 but%^yr <n&RT, &«• when they are not names.
(«) The words Sfrfe, 5^f^, TW> and TW, those derived
by adding the Krit affixes 3U3F, and -r ( added to certain roote )
and the words included in the tfnrr^GT t form their fern, in 5.
5Tf?€r, TSrcft &c. ^f r^T ono who divides or cats; gdlcfei robbing
or stealing, \rrfr, &c.} ^rfr, fls^r, qm, fftoft, «rar«5T, ftaro^r
&c.; t?^ has t?TT »nd g?f(t.
g 309. * Some pratipadikas ending in the Tad. affix qr insert
ore f; irrTqfanfr ( tlw grand-daughter of *tfr), 55lf^T-
&c.
§ 310. The following eleven pratipadikas ferm their feminine
in f under the circumstances mentioned g — ^HIHM^ when it qua-
lifies ^f% or 'maintenance', ^cr^ when it means <a vessel' or -a
man of ft mixed class', vfror 'a full sack', ro& 'natural site7, MHT
'boiled/ ^rir 'a huge elephant', and q£T5J (& particular colour,
Ri^r when it does not refer to a garment ( or rather refers to an
animal ) or means 'indigo*, |^r when it means 'something
* Vide Pan. V. 1. 30.
t ftjtaf$«!W I ps>Ik IV- l- 41- The following are the more
important of the words included in the ifrflY^ groupj — ifo,
: I Pan. IV. I.' 18.
Pan.
IV. 1. 42.
T I V4rt ^fTOTcaT^T^ I Pan. VI. 1. 43.
§ 310-312 FEMININE BASES. 185
made of iron. q>m» ' desirous of enjoyment/ and 3ft? ' a knot
of hair; as mnqff [^f^L * >HMM$T snm '; ^tr# 3fW* f a
vessel] 3?<riT?7T, ( one that burns ;. arrofr ^n^TO ^
ajrgr »'. «. l an empty sack ;' wsfr ^^T5I ^, WOT 3F*n »•
ground artificially prepared ; *ngfr SHOTT ( rice-gruel ) %q^
'if it be a proper m,me;' ^r^fr ^l>^l^ [
or sfter (when a
name ), ^sft wirfir^rf yap^ but ^TT k a wooden peg '; CTgCT ' •
woman desirous of enjoyment/ ^rg<$r * one anxious to meet her
lover,7 ^n *a braid of hair/ bat ^RJ variegated; ^f|ur
has STTtifT-oir.
^311. * The feminine of nouna denoting 'a male' in formed
by adding £ when the wife of that male is meant ; ifftpr ^fr
ifWt; ^Xiflr ( sometimes sysrnTr also ) ' wife of a Sudra '.
(a) but not of nouns ending in qi^F; as ifnr%^f * the wife
of a cowherd ' ( but ifr<rr& has irtqrar )i ^^qTf§J^r ' the wife of
a horse-groom '.
(5) ^ has $;qf ' the divine wile of Surya ;' uut gjr ». c.
who was a mortal.
§ 312. f The words f ?gr, ^or, ^W, ^Hf, ^?, H^, and 3TT^I^.
and aRi^cnr both implying ( vastneSS ; ?rq meaning * Lad or
spoiled barley ', q^;r when the y«OTtin/w denotes the alphabet of
the Yavanas, tttfgS and 3TP9T7 form their Jem in f but insert
STT^f before this f e. ^. ^^|ufl ' the wife of Indra •/ ^^uUtft ' the
wife of Varuna ', &c.j i$^f4r ' a vast sheet of ice/ at^fRrfrft ' an
immense expanse of forests/ §^V ^jf ^^pfT, ?Tf5TRt fenPT-
hot q^fr * the wife of a Yavana or Yavana woman /
t ( alia pot |HT ) ' til0 w^e °^ an Acbarya or a holy
. 48.
t
TV. 1. 49, nhTHmj$m$r5 I ^^Tfl% I ^Hlfe^l^l VArtikae.
I V&rtika.
186 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR f § 312-31?
teacher', but 3fr^T*JT 'a woman who teaches ; a spititual
preceptress '.
(a) * The words m^and xjqi^pT insert this grr^ option-
ally; maarsfr. srrgofr; swjiuRr, s<m**rn?r5 'the wife of a
preceptor/ but 3"<nt3rnfr or 3"<Tr#7FTT ' a female preceptor % l a
woman who herself performs the work of an gTrrWT '} in the
case of snJ and sTrita", 3TT»T is optionally inserted before the f,
when no wife is meant* aprf — snriofr, l a mistress or a woman
of the Vaisya or trader class ', grfiroT, 8?fil?nafir ' a woman of
the Kshatriya or warrior class ', grqff ' the wife of a Vaishya ';
^ri?nft ' the wife of a Kshatriya,'
313. f Nouns ending in 3^ and not having ^ for their
penultimate except %pf n^q" a wild ox, &&I, l^g^f and JT?^
take § whon ' class ' is implied e. g. ^$®\ * A Sudra female >
( also the wife of a ^rgr, see § 311. above ); similarly srrgrnfr,
jr^g[?T, &c.. fftofr, ^iff, 3frqiRf ' a woman cf the STrTir^ class
of Brahmapas/ ^ff < a woman of the ^3- class of Br&hmapas %
&c., 5?n; jr^fr, E^R'fr, *T3<?T, and w?^fr (vide § 306. d. ); but
^^rlT * a woman of that name '; gr^T as it is one of the words
included in the A jadi group ; ( see § 307. and foot-note ) ;
< a woman of the Sudra class ( see § 307 above ).'
(a) Words ending in <rre?, ^ur, <rcf, ^T; qrgr, ^y and
form their fern, in f when kind is implied ; gfr^Hm^V,
^ff , ^llciMuff, ^K^^'T^ <?l*Tl4»«i), ^A^cfr an(l «u«ikQ^ all names
of particular herbs.
(b) Also words ending in § and denoting mankind • ^r$ft ' a
woman of the cfr% family,' sft^frft (7«|^RVra?4), but f?ri%TT.*.
'JT 5
IV. 1. 63.
Vartika.
*T3'*nTT?T: I Pan. IV. 1. 64. 65.
§314-317] FEMININE BASES. 1ST
§ 314. * Pralipadikas expressive of colour, having <r for their
penultimate and ending in an Anudatta vowel, except 3TT%rf
black ami q-fstfr grey, and the word ftsrjf form their feminine in
i or arr-, qTtt or rr<?r 'variegated' from rjr^; frr?rTT» flffrfn IM^Iifr-
rrST^r; but 3tt%tTT, Trawl, %IT ( as the <T hero is Udatta ).
(a) f But if the Pratipadita has no ff for its penultimate, it
simply takes f; g^rfr variegated, STRlpf; but ^sorr *fi<r5r
( as the last vowels are not Anudatta ).
§ 315. The ^Feminine of ^ asd »fr ia ^rff and that of^words
included in the SharTlgaravadi ( ^TT^T^ TT^noT ) group j is formed
by adding £; a<? ^TTWW, »frcTflT, 3TTf3wfr, 3RT5n%^T, If^T, 3^T, &c-
§ 316. The femininB of words expressive of relationship is
irregular . sg-^T-^^ , fq^-irnj , &c.
§ 317. f The Jemtmne of q^ is q;?^T meaning ' the sharer
with her husband in the fruit of the sacrifices performed by
him; but if it end a compound it may optionally remain
unchanged except w>^n preceded by TOTR. *£$, air, WTiT, ^
, *T5\ and 5=^ &c. before which this cnange is necessary;
or ^Hf^Tl , the mistress of the house ; or ^qfS or f^q-^ff}
ff or fq^qf^T &c. but mTR: MfdJwi: ^TT F^?^T a co-wife,
. B. — ft I* there be no compound this change does not take
I Pan. IV. 1. 39.
li§ra*ff'T I Vartikas.
t 3inmT ^R I Pan. IV. 1. 40.
J This group consists of the following words —
and some otnerg not very important.
Pan. IV. 1. 33.
T?^'a: i Sid. Kau,
1t ft-TT^r T^^T » f^rif ^q??nf I Pin. IV. 1. 34. 35.
188 SANSKEIT GRAMMAR. [ § 317-321
place; as, irnrer <rni: 'the mistress of a village7, and not
similarlv ir^f qf^: &c.
§ 318. * The words 3j?fl^ and qr^ra^ form their feminine
in f but have a ^ prefixed to the f , 3T??Rr^t * a woman big with
a child7. MkHrrfr ' a woman whoso husband is living'. 'But if
the word qffl- means 'a lord or master of f only is added; as
( tbe earth having a king ).
§319. Adjectives ending in £ short or long, nave no other
form for the feminine; as
§ 320. t Adjectives ending in g- not preceded by a conjunct
consonant, except ^, take f optionally, e. y. ^-^:-3TT, TH;>
^t. 9^:-^V; but ^^: 'a girl who chooses her husband' ( trfW^TT
cfcS4|| Sid. Kau. ); qro'f: and not <n<*|T as t*16 3" w preceded1 by
a conjunct consonant ; an^ : as it is a noun.
§ 321. J A prdtipadika ending in 3- not preceded by q* and
denoting mankind forms its feminine in 37: e. g. ^^: ' a woman
of the Kttru country'; but ar^nf: *the wife of an Adhvaryu';
also when it does not denote animal-kind § ; as
except in the cass of ^?^ and 5
(a) Obs. $ A prdtipadika ending in zn^ and used as a
proper name, and the word q^ij;: also form their feminine in 37;
as ?T^3Tg: 'a woman of that name' but^rTO: * a woman
having well-rounded arms' ;
* 3!»dJcMfd^dl^ I Pan. IV. 1. 32
f tnTr ^UN^HI^ P4n. IV. 1. 44. W.*(<n*ftMMl5rf I Vartika.
: A an. IV. 1. Oo.
Sid. Kau.
§ 3lmiui>jnci>wK>j>»sii^i*iisHti^?TT«TH I P4n. V ajtika.
$ ^5^cn?^nrwci I^n. IV. 1. 67. qfrar i P»a- IV. 1. 68.
I P&n. IV. 1.71.
§ 321-325 ] FEMININE BASES. 189
(b) f£?r and <fcHU^: if used as proper Dames take f ; ^^: ' a
woman of that name/ <feHU3<%:: but $UU£f4:; ^y: in other cases.
g 322. *If a compound has for its last member 3^ and for
its first, words signifying a standard of comparison, or one of
the words BT?<T, 5T<ff, 5WT, ^TOT, m?<T and q%, it forms its
feminine in 37; ***TtF: T«fr f* 3rf5 iTWn plantain-thighed;
^^rr^r. having thighs ( beautifully tapering ) like the fore-arm
or the trunk of an elephant; frffc^f^: having well-turned thighs;
i^fE; owr«* HT 5^1^?; [ ft?R fr^ *rfg<iY
'j [ fi^ f& H^V 3Tf«? IWTS ^IT ] ^^1^.* ' a
woman whose thighs are capable of enduring great fatigue or
pain'- or 'one having excellent thighs.1
§ 823. I The/era, of £TT$fr, Vishnu or Shiva, an&, ^ftref
or §rcnc 'a usurer7 is formed in £ before which the final vowel
of these is changed to $; ^m^Mufr, Himfir, ^f%?fpfr or fftr^nfr.
§ 324. I The feminine of JT«J is optionally formed by adding
f before which the final 7 is changed to aft or q1; RJTpfr
H1l<Tl Or IT^; I
§ 325. 1 A pratipodika ending in short ^ or ^ forms its
feminine by the addition of .f- *i$-jntf( ^
r, M R (3 «i ^-
'.AT. ^?. Words like f^, H^!^, m^J, $ff^, W^ &e. being
themselves fa mi nitu do not take this termination.
IV. 1. 69.
t «%fir ttH.o^H I Vartika.
P4n. IV. 1. 37.
^T I Pan. IV. 1. 38
Sid. -Kau.
Pan. IV. 1. 5,
190 SANSKRIT GBAMMAR. [ § 325-328
( « )*5^ forms its feminine by the addition of ft before which
the final 3j is dropped;
§ 326. f If pratipadt ka ead in ^it changes its «j to ^ before
f ; sra^t-STiFfr t&e strong one; <ffa^- <ftaO, ^nN-sHrfr the night,
Exception. — } Bat if a base end in ^ applied to roots end-
ing in a soft consonant-, or if a compound has such a base for
its latter member, the /m. is formed by adding atf only, before
which the preceding 3^ is dropped, e. g. 3<3H^+ 3Tr-3reT3TT a
Brahmana woman ( ^T^njfr ) or a female thief;
§ 327. § A Bahuvrihi ending in 3T«I forms its fern, in 3R\
optionally, as ^+q-|^=^qr^^;^, «Tf + T«r^-^rT, &«- but if the
word ending in aj^ be such as dropa its 3? before the 3ft of the
Inst. sing, it takes J also optionally; e.g.
( a ) x If a Bah. ends in «R[ , the ^ is optionally changed to ^;
as «Tf>Jr^-«r^*OTT or ^g\aft^yT a town in wbinh there are many
fishermen.
§ 328. I) If a Bah. end in 37^ ifc takes the 8trffix ? in the
before which ^ is substituted for the final 3T^ ; qt^f
^r^qr: ^ Wnff having a large udder: %U^ifcTr ( 8€e Rag.
1. 84 .); also when it is preceded bv a immoral or an indefinable-
I t W*IW t P&n. VI. 1. 77, 7.
1%: I 3T* ^^Tofrftfr6-nff^nfl[ P^n. IV 1. 12. 28.
f 5T f 1ST ^^oquc i Vartika.
T I Vart. on Pan. IV. i. 7
l Pan V. 4. 131. *
Pan. IV.
t Vartika.
§328-330] FEMININE BASES. 191
:as ?1jtfh airglfr having an udder exceedingly large-, but
(a) Similarly a Bah. ending in ^m^, and gm»f denoting
age, and bavin'g a numeral for its first member takes f in the
•; f^TSf, ftsrotfr ' a girl two years old; , T%5TTcfr, &c; but
5tt5T & building built two years since.
N. B. — the ?f of gftpr is changed to or after fir and ^rj only
when it takes • *uft ^ but
• ; ? -
§ 329. * When a compound haa for its second member a
word denoting a limb of the body of an animal and having no
conjunct consonant preceding its final vowel, the fern, is formed
by the addition of 3TT or j ; arfS^TT-^fT; ' a women having abun-
dant hair, ' ^STT-^ft, ^Sgw^T; but ^n^^\ having beautiful
ankles; ^fl»fr or ^^RT C 3Tf ^T sn^T ^T} ; ^E^TT ^TT^T ' an edi-
fice with a beautiful front '.
( a ) | If the word, denoting the limb, nowever, be one of
the worda 5^, TO ^ T^T, r%^T, *&, ^RT, ^*, S^T, ** &c-
or have more than two syllables, the y"d/«. is formed in 3ft alone-,
( ^MRTgr- «RT^T Sid. Kau. ), q^T'ERT, having large
( I ) I Also when the first member is one of *f, q^, or
, the fern, is formed in 3tf neceaaarily;
§ 330. ff Of Bah. compounds having for their last member
Pan. IV 1. 54.
t * *n?Hi^g^: I Pan. IV. 1. 66.
t WfgrfaHM\l*fc I Pan. IV. 1. 57.
tt SfTRr^CtS^^F^T^of^r^ I Pan. IV. 1. 55.
^ws^ra, i s^rre i cF^^Rrorm ^vift f**?n \
Y4rtikas.
192 SANSKBIT GBAMMAB. [ § 330-333
one of the words
and 5553- the/aw, is fomed either in aw or
; fT5Tt*TT-fr ' a woman having ft slender waist; '
with a lip as red as the bimba fruit, ' f^ 3r|* iTfqr: *TT ?fhi-
« one having long leg§, ' hence ' a she-camel} '
SHT *m: m ) fair-bodied; g^^jl-^sff; &c.
( a ) bat if 5^ be preceded by ^f, ^far and fl^r, or if
and q^f be used in a Bah. involving comparison, the fern, is
formed in f only; g?*TS^ffT, * one having a variegated plumage 9
i. B. ' pea-hen '; Ztg&f&f ^TfcJT ' a hall having its sides like the
wings of an owl '; yg^^Jr ^rr ' an army with its rear arrayed
in the shape of the tail of an owl',
§ 331. * A Bah. ending in ^ and *pf and used as proper
names forms fern, in grj j ^uu<4l', 5TIT5^T} bnt riUfuItT! a girl
having a ruddy face.
§ 332. f Names of the limbs of the body, preceded by words
denoting a cardinal point in a compound, form their fern, in {•
§ 333 A Bah. J ending in <rr^ ( substituted for <rr^ ) option-
ally forms its fen. in f before which it is changed, to <Ff;
and in 3TF when
frr^ means ' a foot of a Vedic verse '5 igrr^r 1t?>, q^^r &c.
(a) But if qj^ be preceded by one of the words
^nr, t*T, *!«» ^«T» g^T, &c. the fern, is neceidarily formed in f.
<rr^ changhjg into <r^ as before; ^>MMJl ' a woman whose feet
are as big as a pitcher. . »
T > Pan. IV. 1. 58.
. i. 6«-
Pan. IV.l. 8, 9.
§ 338-336 ] FEMININE BASKS. 193
( b ) In other oases the fern, of pr&tipa dika* ending in qr$ it
formed by adding *r, *fi*l<n?T, «nrn^T, &c.
§ 334. * A Dwigu ending in a* forms its fern, in £ ; as
f%9ftin but if the ending word be one of those included in the
Ajadi group ( eee foot-note ou p. 108 ) OB fern m is formed in aw*
f^tffgr, stmiCT ( consisting of three battalions ) %-JJT, &c.
§ 335. (a) A Dwign ending in CTTC t (a particular
measure ) and qualifying a word denoting * a field ' has itafem.
formed by the addition of 3ft, but when a Taddhita affix has
been first added to it and then dropped ; as 5 gjnrir umu'i q^qr:
•TOT fi[^TU^-f-JnarT=fi[^ni^T $rwr%: 'a piece of land 30
hands in extent'; but fitCTU^t f^: 'a rope, 30 hands in
length ' ; also when the ending word is one that does not
denote a measure, except the words f%$r < a tola ', 3rn%cT ' tnd
load of a cart, ' and ^^TF ( a weight equal to 3^. tolas );
(*) t When the word 3^ expressive of measurement ends
a Dwigu and the Taddhita affix is added and dropped as before,
its/rtn. is formed both in an and J; ^ g^f TOTtf MWf: f?5^-
'CT-'fV «n^TT * a ditch two purushas ( 13 feet ) in depth '
§ 336. Participles (those of the Pres. and Fut. ) of Parasm.
roots take f in tbe/e^., ^ being inserted before ^ as in the Konu
or Ace. dual of the New. ( see § 116 ) and so do adjectives ending
in a consonant ;
i gf^Himftwifiifl^m^ytflr ST iiftprsft.i Pan.
1. 21. 22.
t ^CTTOnTTrsft I Pan. IV. 1. 23.
t s^framt^^nf^ira: i Pan. IV. 1. 24.
H. 8. G. 13
104 SANSKBIT GBAMMAB [ § 337-339
Chapter IX.
SECONTABY NOMINAL BASES DERIVED BY THE ADDITION OF
THE TADDHITA OB SECONDARY AFFIXES.
§ S37. The terminations used to form derivative oases, in
Sanskrit are distinguished into two classes; (1) 'Krit ( ^) or
Primary Affixes and (2) Taddhita ( af%ff ) or Secondary affixes.
Krit are those affixes that are added to verbs, and the Nominal
Bases formed by their means are called PKIMABY NOMINAL
BASES ; while TADDHITA affixes are those that are added to
substantives, primary or derived from roots, and the bases
formed with them are called SECONDARY NOMINAL BASES
( vide § 179 ).
§ 338. In this chapter we will treat of the more general
secondary nominal bases formed by means of the Taddhita
affixes, reserving for a future chapter the formation of the
primary nominal bases derived by means of the Krit affixes
from -
§ 339. The Tad!hita affixes are added in various sense*.
They occasion various changes in the words to which they are
added. The following general observations should be paid
attention to.
(a) As a general rule the first vowel of a word takes its
Vriddhi substitute before the terminations 37, *r, f^, f*r} qir,
»r &c. as
(6) Before terminations beginning with a vowel or q* (1) the
final ST, airr, f , and J are rejected • (2) 7 and 37 take their Gupa
Bobstitnta; (3) sft and 3\j obey the ordinary rules of sand hi ;
3n*^nT 'belonging to Aavapati,' &c. m. n. ; »ig4-
descendant of Manu7; ift+?r = iic7 < belonging
to a cow', BO 3137 fr. ;ff &c.
5 339-340 ] T^DDHITA AFFIXES. 195
(e) In the case of derivatives form compound words some-
times the initial vowel of the second word takes its Vriddhi
substitute, and sometimes the Vriddhi is double; 4^qif$<*> 'be-
longing to the last year'; similarly jjMMI<rW &c. ^Tlglj fr.
55^, ^fr*uT*T from $vr*T, &c. When these terminations are
added to a Dwa. comp. both the words of which are the names
of deities, Vriddhi is substituted for the initial vowel of both;
s?ffiJHI*>(t 3PK * a sacrifice offered to Agni and the Marat
deities/ &c.
(d) If the initial vowel of a word be preceded by the ^ and ^
of a preposition the 7 or ^is first changed to f$r or 3^ before
Vriddhi substitute can take place- as 3TTOro + 3T=fqraTOTO+Br
**''*+3T=ST*+3T=aTW; similarly qtoiM$ from
* r-
(0) Before consonantal Tad. affixes, a final ^ is generally re-
jected; the final ^ with the preceding vowel is sometimes dropped
before vowel terminations and before such as begin with tr> gqp^-
ajf, &c. 3TrflT^-3TTf«T-3TTrlfitr. There are various
exceptions to this latter part of the rule; e.g. TM^ fr. fM^ &c.
N. B. — Other changes the student will easily note from the
instances given.
§ 340. The following is a list of such of the Taddbita affix-
s€ as are commonly to be met with.
SECTION I.
MISCELLANEOUS AFFJXE'S.
is added in the bense of: — ( 1 ) ( the son of; as
fcnre: 'the son of CTpagu'. so
3W3f ^& TlWt 'the daughter of the mountain/
196 SANSKRIT ORAMMAB. [ § 840
&c. (2) * the descendant of'5 as
: * a descendant of Utsa',
<a female descendant of Utsa', ( vide § 311, 313 ); ( 3)
< dyed with-/ SHOT ?rfc lift* *** ' a garment dyed
with turmeric'; (4) 4 made of/
'made of the fir tree;' (5) 'belonging to,' &c •
%*: ' belonging to a god-/ ^rfenTT f$. ?TT%t
3>"frlT f^ aftor ^T t& woolen garment/ &«R: ^belonging
to the iultry season'} $&: 'nocturnal;' fri*r3T: *yearly'
&c.; when added to ^trer the final ?f is dropped,
'autumnal,' (vide Sis. VI. 65; Kir. XVII. 12 ).
means ' agreeable in the autumnal season/ (6) lord of;
ffire: ^he lord of the earth'; gsirarrai
r- 'the king of the Panchalas'; qr^^r^J* 'the
king of the Ikshvaku race', (7) (a collection of;
* 'a fiock of cranes' similar^-
f rom W^^ '• peacock,' CTTfcT f rom ^q^r ' a pi-
geon', ftsnini fr?ft ^r^c; *rwfHt ^fr mfw^ &c
( 8 ) < knowing or studying'; sq-f^fin 3Tfr^ *t% Wf
jqicMUi: 'one who studies grammar, grammarian', &c.
(9) and to form abstract nouns; 5%: >rr^: **»sf 'silence',
ihr5f 'youth-/ 5ff-?^hfnf ' ffiendship';
' greatness, width/ &c.
forms derivatives with various significations:— >(!) 3%
«W. 3?V^^: produced from or relating to a camel/
TOT: il*!T3»: 'produced in the hot season/ ( 2 )
^ ^WT^^ ' made ty a potter/ ST^ron fff
by Brahman-/ ( 3 ) SfwnnF: 'a forester/ ' a wild
the declension of such words vide § 74. ct.t b.
§ 340 ] TaDDHiTA AJIIXBS.
man ', (4) ^qTT Jtff TOTO* .' a place fit for kings to
live in '; m^^T^ * a conntry fit for men to live in '
$*$ 3TT?f: ^h^p: ( also spfc*:* ) 'an inhabitant of
Kara'; 3*T?vr^ 3fm: sfhraTW (also ifiiRW*)
« inhabiting Yugandhara >; (6) <rRr sn^r ^?TO < grown
on away'; (7) <r?qr* ai^cfift Krfav < a traveller '$
<8)^f^ W <J5n1s*: 'happening in the forenoon ';
similarly a)<RTf|^: Happening in the afternoon',
(9) is added to denote ' enmity ' ^T^l
' the antipathy between the crow and the owl';
similarly ^rff^TftCT, &c.; (10) when added to words
ending in the Tad. affixes signifying < the child or the
descendant', and to the words g^Rf, <T£> TT«" fa ram',
TTH^, ft^Fq-, THf^gr, ^r^r, JT5«q- and anr, it haa-the
sense of 'a collection of; awgtf
<a number of the descendants of Upagu';
< a herd of cattle '• w& { a collection of kings %
^T*r?q<£ ' an assemblage of kshatriyas '; grr^ET^
'a number of calves'; mg^T^, 3T^«F &c.j (11) it is also
added to IRK, ^, %^T, and m*rm in the sense of
< one who has studied them '; £FR^: ( a student who
goes through a regular course of study, or one who
lias studied the krama arrangement of a sacred text \
<fVRTH9 ' a student of the mtmamsa philosophy % &e.
— is added to the words ft^ and RT^[ in the sense of l the
father of '; 1^5: r^lT ffam*: 'a paternal grandfather1;
: ' a maternal grandfather '. (1) 3*7 is added to
in the sense of < the brother of ";
* fi^T'U $*3«l«rcrwrrH I Pan. IV. 2. 30.
t Vide supra. § 306. a. these are generally ftm. Th^e and
«ome exceptions, as %mmq < the enmit> between the godi and
ihe demons ' &c.
198 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 340
' a maternal uncle '; (2) and sq- is added to ^ and
in the sense of * the brother and the son of ' respec-
tively ; %: *THT fq<J*T ' » paternal uncle '; ^15: ssp
Vf$ar: < a nephew.7
snire — and Sfraft, are added to patronymics formed by means
of Tad. affixes in the sense of * the child of/ ^T^TPTW-for-
' the son of D&kshi '5 irrnnw-fnT: ' ^0 eon °* *U**T> a
descendant of Garga ;. 3rra«f is also added to the word
' name of a town ' in the sense of 'produced in'—
: , and optionally to jfrt[. aVlTO*: or
son of Drona.
— has the meaning of ' a son or a descendant of '; ^Tr^r: ' the
son of Daksha '; ?rqifrr%: ' ^e son of Vyasa,' &c. ( In
the case of the words ar^r, 3^? 'name of a low caste/
ft^, ^U^M and OT, the final ^ is changed to
before this f . )
— b»§ various senses :--(l) ^I
: * * the son of Revati; ( 2 ) ' happening or
given once a month, monthly, lasting for a month 7, &c.
T; similarly
&o. ( 3 ) « gathering together \ iftei:; ( 4 )
' asking ; ' ^^TrT ^aTcftm fft'RmNp: * one who asks an-
other whether he had an auspicious ablution '; so g^-
^i. ' one who asks another
whether he had comfortable sleep ' ( see Rag. VI. 61
X. 14,); ^ta$f*iq>: &c ; ( 5 ) « using an instrument '-,
3TT%: 5TgC«m^ W%^: ' one who strikes with a sword? '
a swordsman ' . vns^-' ' an archer ; ' ( 6) ' mixed with, ?
* In this sense it is added to a few words only.
§ 340 ] TADDHITA AFFIXES. 199
< mixed with curds ', mflfti fr.
i?fh% ' black pepper '; (7) UR ^ftft *rfJra?; « plow,
religious ', similarly annffre?:. (8) SgqR CTiftft *"%-
a boatman '; ;frira: &c. ( 9 )
: 'one who rides an elephant';
one who drives in a carriage '• (10)
: 'one who eats with curda '; (11) < living upon '
^fftm %?ff^5 ' one who lives upon wages 'j
so «|$£te:, B?h^T%g:: &c. (12) 'carrying upon'j
fr^rm aJVf^iw: ( 13 ) arfffr^ y%: 3f
' a believer in God and sacred writings '; ^rRcT^«' &c.
( 14 ) it is added to OT$TT. fr^TT, 5T^ an(i ^W in ^»
sense of < dyed with ', m$W «C* cJr%* * dyed with
lac '. fr^f^^F:* Srreri^s: ' chequered or spotted % OT£-
fJr^:;-( 15 ) %^, RHT, fT%, ^r^nTR1 and words ending
in 3£=r except tfe^^ai &c.; in the sense of * one who
studies them ?; ^^TTO^ $ft^: <a student of the Veda7;
: * one who studies Nyaya or logic'; ^MH>01^
' one who studies a commentary ' &c.; 9(
( an atheist, a student of the materialistic
philosophy7, qius^ftcfc:; but ^T5«r^r:-, ( 16) to 51%^,
VJ"5, %?R and ^g-g- in the sense of « a collection of 7f
f mcT9» ' & herd of elephants ', v^^ ' a herd of cows ',
%^TT?rp < a collection of fields/ q£rof%& ' a collection
of armours 7;-(17) to 3TWT?R^, 3rra%?r, 3TI^8]rT
. &c. in the sense of e relating to &c.;7
' relating to the Supreme
spirit ', ' spiritual '; 3rrf^f%^ 4 relating to or coming
from the governing deity '. aiwrvfim^: ( proceeding
from the elements ', ^fsTrft^ ' temporal ', qTTc?1r%^'
&c.-(18) to 5fj*r, T^q", 5frqri5fnT, and ?& in the sense
of * living upon ( in these cases no Vriddhi substi-
tute takes place ); ?F^r°r sftafhir an^: ' one who
lives upon selling things, a trader7,
200 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 340
' one who lives upon wages'.-( 19 ) to words denoting
musical instruments in the sense of 'playing upon7; &c.
m?f»te: ' one whose profession
is to play on a tabor '; so %for^: fr. Vina; similarly
%oifro:, «rf *: or jugftqj:, mrR*-., &«.-( 20 ) t°
tr$ and the remaining words* of that group in the
sense of ' walking with the assistance of ;' qffe:
**re for «• <r$: Sid. Kan. ]
: &c. <TOT ^?i% gf^^: ' a traveller';
this is also added to words denoting inanimate things.
' wood carried on by the force of water';
{ 21 ) to words* included in the nmf% f group in the
sense of ' hears or carries by means of '
:, and to the word
22) to ^t^ ***
the sense of * lending on interest ' ^ftr^F: *a usurer;,
»: ' one who lends another ten rupees in
order to get back eleven t. 0. ' a usurer '; and ( 23 ) to
STwJ; 3TO?or ^^ 3Tr^Pfe ' magnetic, attractive'.
f^ — ( 1 ) Added to $ or words ending in 3^ and to grnj it has
the sense of <done and eaten by' respectively; ^d^qf ^;
5% 'm^r * one who has eaten at a Jraddha ';
( 2 ) it is added to a few words, such as
&c. in the sense of * a collection of ' with >OT. term.
f added to it; *K*RT TOff : flf^ & mnltitndo of
thrashing floors or wicked men ', f^THRl ( « number
• These are ar*, 3T"¥f^, ^QT, gncy, J«rRr, and trr*.
t
§ 840 ] TADDHITA AFFIXES. 201
of families'. <??%*> ' & host of female goblins or imps/
snfofir, &c.
( f *TT^ ) — forms abstract nouns when added to the words
^ » 5^» l**^» and worda expressive of colour; before
this term, these undergo the same changes as before
the f^n^ of the comparative and are always mas.- as
' greatness', 9T^T ' softness ' ffRRT, ' thinness '
'dexterity/ sharpness,' &c.;
ohildhhood'
^iy ( \f )— this is added to ( 1 ) %& in the sense of born of the
race of; ^rfini:;-( 2 ) Tf^ in the sense of * relating to';
TJfCT:;— ( 3 ) njrg in the sense of * an oblation offered
to '; sfeferjr: *fir:r( 4 ) 3TIT; arfS^: ' foremost. '
f ( t^ )~*is added to 3r% and qfe in the sense of ' striking
with'; 5T?p*iT STfTrfn'R 5ffi£fc:; * a spearman ' ( also
: ); *TC&: i one who strikes with a stick'.
1 ) added to $& and words ending in ^y it
means ' born of ', ^ STTrf : $cJ1R: or ^hf : ' of a good
family,' 3fT3!r$cfR — ^OTT: ' sprung from a noble and
rich family '; it is added to—( 2 ) the words qtf "»d
3CT? separately or taken together in any order in the
sense of 'going'; as <nt tmftft ^iftor: 'going over to the
other bank'; ( when used at the end of a comp. it means,
versed or adept in; vide Bhatti 11.46 ). srarfrlf: 'coming
over to this side (of a river, &c. );' qrTTTTfta: ( one who
202 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 340
goes to both sides or one who crosses the sea '-.
<rrft°T: * crossing a river/ &c.-( 3 ) the word m* in the
sense of -'rustic' as qrsftoT:j-(4)the words 3Tf?IT^, TT'^fT
and words ending in *n*r in the sense of 'beneficial to-/
3Trf*r% I%?r: STTcRjfR; retasRW, tfl<pflifjor: ' fit to be
enjoyed by a mother'; fq-^ iffifroT: &c — ( 5 ) *(«r changed
to ;£. as ^CR:;-(6) *T^R[ in the sense of < joultaeying'
tT^ aiwsftsr: * a traveller V( 7 ) Suffer and
in the senses of 'eating and fas tended on' respec-
tively.. trerefFP ' eating every kind of food'; *3T«jq^
^3T 3*3<T3T*r ( 3^rra<j) 'a shoe or boot of the length of
the foot;-( 8 ) f^y and JTT* In the sense of ' a field of7; as
^ l a sesamum field', witoT? &c.; and to ^H44 and
substituted for 5j:-Mft^; 'Enrft: ^ ^^iwjrf
»f ' formed by walking together seven stepa or
speaking seven words5-, frfift^fetir TW^FT lUTCfH t
' fresh butter or ghee7 (vide Bag. 1. 46.Bhatti. V.I2).
f ^ ( ^"-^°T ) — (1) is added in the sense of ' of or belonging to ';
'belonging to the school of Panini'; it is added to
( 2 ) f^ftj and iQ<^^^ and TJT^ in the senses of 'the son
of and delating to/ respectivelyj^^rTq-: 'a sister's son'
<Nj*TOnT; «r^r ' fraternar;-( 3 ) 3^ in the sense of
( relating to or a number of ' ^T^PT (alsoarrc ) ' re^a~
ting to horses, a number of horses ';-(!) when added to
the words * ,3T^ r T n and % is
* Pin. V. 2. 23. and Sid. Kau.
' Amara.
§ 340 ] TADDHITA AFFIXES. 203
inserted; ^r^pT ' one's own, ' TMdTm * of the people ;
13T3n*T, !<3^ahT> ' of a bamboo, ' l^ffa.
* produced in or relating to the rainy season, ?
f r.
, )— is chiefly added ( I ) to words ending
in fern, affix in the sense of * the child or offspring of 'j
%jra*T: ' the son of Vinatfc i. e. Garuda 7; «nfrr^ir: * the
sou oi a sister ;; when ,-idded to f^^T meaning ' a poor
woman ', ^ is inserted optionally-, ?£Jr?fd<4-' or ^r^-
fS^rir;; when ^rar means ' a harlot ' or ' an adulteress J
qf ; is optionally substituted for qij; 3n3?*T. or ^f5J-
*^: ' the son of an adulteress '• it is optionally changed
to cr^ when added to words denoting ' ;i female having
some kind of defect ', cproi^:-^: ' 9on ot a one-eyed
woman, ' ^I^RI:-T: * son ol a female slave '; — ( 2 ) to
words of two syllables ending in 5 but not formed
by the affix f ( f 5r^ ), to JTT^ and words included in
the ^irrRf group*; 3?r=rqr: * snT1 c^ Atri ', ITro^'*T:
* son of Manduka ', ^TTOT: * son of Subhra ( Name of
a sage ), w^r: &c.;— ( 3 ) and to VTT3*73. and i^fj^^,
the 6nal ^" being dropped before it; JTTcJ'N^-, ft'f-
:, (4) added to ^r?fr and ^Ry it has various senses;
'son of Agni 7, t relating to fire 7, ' having
Agni for the presiding deity ', &c.; it is affixed to-( 5 )
and other words in the sense of ' produced from.
'; 5TOT: f £ TOT V? srr ^1>^ « ri verborn '; * rock-salt :;
fr. R^r * produced from the earth \ mwmvm: &c.-
& ) 3TTf and ^fTl% in *ho sense of ' a field of 7 ir^'T,
^;— ( 7 )^', g-%, ifnT, and words included in
&c.
204 SAHSKBXT GBAMMAB. [ § 340
the gssnf^ group*, with different significations and
with a ^ added to it, g^TO: ' a dog ', pertaining
to a noble family '; gfr^TO: a sword ', ffrrc: * a neck
ornament >, $f?fc7TT: 3HT: WT ?T^ 3fm: *ftro:>
iTTOT^:, ' village-born, rustic '-, -n*TTW:> &c. (8)^r
in the sense of ' made of '; qliqri' a silken garment ';-
( 9 ) 5^ in different senses; tfr^q-: ' man-slaughter ',
* human work % •" derived from or incidental to man,
composed or propounded by man '; and ( 10 ) toqfSr^,
anlrra, TOR* and f^qfar in the sense of ' useful in, good
for '5 q^^ fTT^ <rrafrf ' what is useful on the way ', ». 0.
* provisions for a journey '• aTmRr
*•. attentive to guests, hospitable Tfff
« hospitable ':— iff nft-'-, f^Rt: TO WT^t (
' wealth, property '; vide Kir. XIV. 8.
( ^ ) —is affixed ( 1 ) to words expressive of countries in the
sense of * born or produced in '; H73T: * born or pro-
duced in the Madra country '}— (2) to ^T?r in the sense
of ' dyed with ?; q>?i^: 4 dyed yellow ';— (3) in the sense
of < belonging to '; IT?^:, ?^?^:, &c.— (4 ) « bought for »
^R?: < bought for five rupees ';— ( 5 ) in the sense of
* acting ' ^fhr^: *one who is cold' i. e. 'slow in action/
* a dilatory or lazy man •' 3mr3r. ' an active man ?; —
( 6. 7. 8. ) to express pity or diminution, or depreciation-
Sarqp: < poor son ', ^^T^: « unhappy Devadatta '; f wt
^Rft ^^?^:, * a small or stunted tree '; a^TO: a bad
horse, a hack; ^5^: < a wicked Sudra,' ( 9 ) and some-
times with no signification; 3{fq<g: >. «. 3^'-
' a jewel ', ^T5W?' ' a young boy '; &c
( »d^ ) — is affixed (1) to words denoting names of beasts, in
the sense of < a collection of '; 3nrc£ ' a flock of sheep '
§ 340 ] TADDHTTA AFFIXES. 205
&c. ( 2 ) and in various senses to the prepositions ^f, q>
f%, f3fr and g^; *r$fc < narrow, impassable, crowded ' &c.;:
'manifest ,5 ft^RT 'huge, fierce, large', &c.;
* near, close to ' &c.; ^?q^ ' large, excessive,
powerful ' &c.
a number of chariots 9
are added to express
equality with, little inferiority to';
*5?^<T:-3W— ^ni: 'almost learned'; w
nearly equal to Kumara in vigour ';
nearly dead ', &c.. these are also added to verbs;
' cooks tolerably well '.
f are added in the sense of ( reputed or re
r '. as f%?nrr li%Tr:-f%?n^or: « re
known for one's knowledge '
unowned for his skill in the use
I markable for '. as f%?nrr li%Tr:-f%?n^or: « re-
*"u» ( ^OIPT ) ! markable or known for one's knowledge '.
-' nnd fr is
I
|_ of weapons ' ( vide Bhatti II. 32. )
( 3*2, ^^w )-" addea to adverbs of time in the senses of relat-
ing or belonging to, ' ^r W. tfl4f!1v SWRRv
d*l'> f%TH5T'» V»fld5T:, — to
: old-,— to the word 3? changed to 5j;
( ?^T ^-expresses diminution; iffofrrUT * a small sack, '
« a young calf ', &c.
— is similarly added to |%?, tr^ * last year ', <rnfl ' the year
before the last ', 5T and
and
( ?RJ >-f orms abstract nouns 5fr?rr, 3^r, *mm, ftcc.; added to
irm, *CT, 5i?5, 9fTVi and ir^r it has the sense of ' a
collection of;' aTJHTT, STftoT, ^Sjm, &c.
* manifold '.
206 SANSKRIT GRAMMAE. [ § 310
?tr-( ?qr^» ) i9 added in the sense of « living in, belonging to, ' &c.
to the words ^T%UTT, <T%aT<i;, 5**, 3WT, Sf , 3T, W^, ^,
and indeclinablea ending in <r^; ^n%niFrer: & south-
erner, qr%gTf^:, <ftrfW, an inhabitant of the east;
'? one who accompanies a king, a minister,
J^J:» «KTST: &c.; also to the preposition
eternal '.
( WT^ ) is added to ;?<* and 3Tf§"; >d!MfM<t>i land at the foot
of a mountain, arf^T^r ' a. table-land. '
5T— ie affixed to ift only; ir^f ^rgnft msrT/. ' a herd of kine '.
•^ — forms abstract nouns; ifM**
»Qd JTT5T* ( ??r% I^^[, «r^, ) •" added in the sense
of ' measuring as much as
* water reaching as far as the knee ', &c.
and 5f |( .T^, ^st,)— are added to ^ft and 5^ respectively in
different senses:— ^UT < womanly, feminine, suited to
women, ( n ) womenhopd ' &c.; $j ^ < manly, heroic, fit
for a man, ( «. ) manhood, virility '.
— is added as a depreciatory termination. nr^F^T^Tt *- a bad
doctor, a quack V ^mcMU'Mi^r; &c.; added to %$r it
has the sense of ' a collection, of ', as %5PTT$T: ( 3RT and
5^cT are also added to %^r in the same sense )
( in^)— S is added hi the sense of ( 1 ) « made of \ q$: f%^rf :
- made of earth, ' <Mgmi ' made of wood ' &o.
and ( 2 ) in that of profusion or excess .'
: I Pao. V. 2. 37.
t nft&mHii H^HoiY^y^nac i pan- VI. i. 87.
: Pan. IV. 3. 143.
§ 340 ] TADPHITA AFFIXES. 207
a sacrifice consisting for the most
part of clarified butter/ si^mr: &c. It is not added
to words denoting ' an article of food or a covering';
IT ( *Tf> . *T<£ . q5T , uq- ) — is added to noons with different mean-
ings:— ( 1 ) irtf mjfr *ran/ * a herd of cattle/ *TcTRT
' a dense mass of smoke/ <£nrr, 5TOT, &c. ( 2 )
*ng: aw a ' courtier'; ( 3 ) frcftetf : ' disciples of
the same preceptor/ ^l^fr:, ^TWI«ft^T : * & brother of
whole blood ' • (4) forms abstract nouns TT?*T, %HRRf»
^iRlrft^* ^rre«q-: 3ffff«f5pT, &c.; it is added— •( 5 ) to
the words <M< and ^ in the sense of < born of the
race of.' Tr?RT ' & man of the Kshatriya class/ ERf-
: ( in this case ^ is inserted ) 'a man ;'-( 6 )
in ^e sense of 'the son of/ 'Vfl^:, (7) t
--fof noble descent/ ( 8 ) to ^T£, SR^, fqf , and
in the sense of 'having any of these for one's presiding
or tutelary deity/ &c. 375; *^n 3TW *m*$ a^T ' a
missile having V&yu for its presiding deity/ %d**T
1 worshipping the Seasons ( as divinities )/ fxrsq-. 'sacred
to the manes, offered to the manes'; g^g: ' sacred to
the Dawn/-(9) to ^n^ and words included under the
group in the sense of 'deserving or meriting';
-: Reserving punishment/ ^(f 'fit to be killed,;
^deserving worship/ &c. In the derivatives
given hereafter q should be considered as added
in the sense attached to each word- — ^q 'theft ' from
. 'boxn of the breast ' ( also eiK^: fr.
208 SANSKBIT GRAMMAB. [§340-341
'wholesome to the teeth' (lathi*
tense it is added to words denoting the limbs of the
body ; as ^ogq- < good for the neck, ' &c. ); 3^-gptf 'fit
for a dog' fr. «vpj; ;nvtf fit for being the central part of
a wheel' fr. ;rrf*r ' the nave of a wheel;7 rf*q- «flt for the
nose' from Jm%3fT; f WT ' drawing a chariot, a horse,
gnj ' harnessed to the yoke, a ball ?; sir^r * of equal
age, a friend '; ^q- ' what is weighed in a balance and
found equal ', hence * equal,' f r. g*$r; *m*Q (
^cf )just;q«q- (<n*f *ng) ' wholesome;' %$ (
) 'agreeable to the heart;, ijyq-: (
obtaining wealth, vr«f ( TO'rvtfcT cJ^HT ^T ) '
sistent with dharma \ or * obtained justly '; sptf 'talk
of the people/ ef^r 'capable of beiog controlled, obedi-
ent ', &c. ffsq- ( {frfferr: ) ' wooden or of a tree ,;
Pan. IV. 4. 49. ) ' price '; &c
5?T: ) 'glorious, leading to glory'; ( ^rsqr ?rr*T «fT? )' fit
to be crossed over in a boat'; ^f : ( §t q^frfar ' a horse
or bullock yoked to the pole of a carriage'; fictf ( 1%
Tgcf ) ' proper or fit for a cow, got from a oow'j &c.
f— ( 1) is added to $£f, ?mr and ^r^-, as a diminutive termv
IWT f^-^C w. n. ' a small hut/ ^nfTT: a smal
S'ami tree', guTK* 'the trunk of a young elephant'.
5TO? and ^rTO-are affixed to TV in the sense of 'largeness/ fisfcz
*great, large'; fi^TT^ 'extensive/ 'spacious/ &c.
§ 341. The flr*$ffr affixes or amxes expressive of possession
have the following additional senses: — ^TT^ or ' greatness,eini
nonce,' |%?^T or ' depreciation/ ST^T or ' praise,',
' constant connection, ai^fri?*r or ' excess over, '
in connection with, ' and 3ij%fTCQYT ox 'to express the meaning
34*1 TADDHJTA AFFIXES. 209
of ' Poes$Son >* The instances in order
SECTION II.
AFFIXES SHOWING POSSESSION. ( JTr^ow ).
gf ( 3^ ) — is affixed to words included in the
: ( arsfrftr a^r m% ) ' suffering from piles-/
3*WT*rfffif 3* £: 'having matted hair', s^r: 'having
a prominent breast. '
*"d ^TT<7 — a*e attached to 37^ in the sense of < speaking
mocli or speaking badly '} ^rgiS': or <<MI^; a prattler,
a garrulous or talkative person. '
on« who possesses a ' heart ' *. 9. 'a kind-hearted
an ;' this is added to ^n?T) ^rwr and q- in the sense
of * not capable of enduring ;' ^fnf * ?fT5% ^irffT^: ' un-
able to endure cold '; similarly giairrw:, gwt^: ( ^Wt
5ff^T5T: ?T ^ ^^ I ^ $:ff ?m m^: S. K. ).
f — is atTixed to rTRCT and other words J in tbe sense of ' that
: ii ( Sid. Kau. )
t 3T^TR[, 3fT^[ < g^' ^3^' 'f^' ^^> ^T, 3^ , ,
and words expressive of the deformed limbs of the body
sad of colour.
t fT^reT ^SfTrt mr^Tf^vg ZX^ I Pan. V. 2. 36. The follow-
& are som« of the words of the m^ff^ group:
?r , SI^TT, R^TR. f|pr,
n. s. G. 14.
210 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. I § 34-1
is obtaineu or possessed by 'j
W. ' the sky studded with stars ';
3l*fr <frr%<T: 3$r; similarly
and f^> ( ^f^, g:^ ) — are added to words ending in 3f, and to
the words of the ?rgm% group*;
or ^fu^^ •' one who has a staff. '
&c.; sftffc » mil^, irniN , mm
when added to ^TrT and ^r^fHTT* ^ is prefixed to it,
*f«n%^, 'suffering from gout, rheumatic ; 3^frf ^fn^T ,
*one suffering from diarrhcra ' ; it is added to ^«^rt and
other words when the place is meant ; trc^Rtrfr ' the
place where lotuses grow ' ; hence * a tank or a lake •
similarly ffgf^ft, mWt &c-: ifc *8 alio added to c«i
and words ending in 3TOH arffc* one haying some object
in view; vrr^qrf^^ &c.; and to grri-qftrq; ' an ascetic.'
is affixed to <f&, ?% and JT5T; qrf&sf: * bearing fruit, fraitfuP,
^rfiar: ' a peacock -/ Hf^R1 ' dusky '.
added to 3?^, ^r. fqr^^, ^^? gri? and 3^n optioiaalJy
, it?,,
and
* BTfTfHTRt I Pan. V. 2. 21.i. Tne words belonging to this
group are:— sfh%, JTHTT, ^TTOT» T5T^F, HTOT* ?m*JT, %^f,
w F«FT, ^R^ , ^fnr , ^j5^ ^r, ^r^rr, ^^ri, ^nrfr, ^r, €nnr,
and words ending in
$ 34 1 -342 ] TADDHITA AFFIXES. 211
to f^r, 3T^ , £TO, spff, 3T£ and <TJF necessarily
to f%?F?TT, snfcn and ^ optionally; gf£f?* ' having a
protuberant belly, corpulent '; s-^fr^ rNrnhaTc3» ( have
the same sense); srf^rgr c intelligent *; f^fi^y : slimy,
slippery '; ^f%^ * having a broad chest ';
4 muddy ' fifcRfe ' sandy ', $|£i7rf, %R5J, &c.
having projecting teefb, hence also rugged ' &c.
— is added to «r^ and ^TrT in the sense oi * not. enduring "> as
5r^y: ( not able to. face the army of the enemy ', ' one
who cannot withstand the strength of another '; ?\r$S
' one that cannot bear the windr. When added to
^Tft it has also the sense of * a collection '.
1 a hurricane '.
— This is added to the word 3*ra in a good sense, as
°r 3TIc7 i^ added in a had sense; ^TTTrcr*!
an orator/
"is added to¥9"<> ^ and **^'> ¥95^ 'a place
abounding in lotuses '; R?^ ' abounding in the nadn
grass *f VrT^TcT l abounding in canes '.
) — irf thu general term, expressing possession ;* it is
added in the sense of ' it has that or that is in it \ e.g.
Tr^r^qTRJT?^T ^cfrf?f «TmT^ ' possessing cows', &c.
It is specially added to tlio words
and f=
| 342. (a.) The R of thu termination w^- is changed to
when affixed to words ending 'in TJ or sj. short or long, or har
in^ oither for their penultimate f - f%^^ from
i Paii. v. 2. 94.
: i Pan. vill. 2. y.
212 SAKBKBIT GBAMMAK [ § 342-343
^r: ' a country having ft good or just king'; ( ef. "Ray. VI. 22)=
as n^TWR %*r. c a countiy governed by a
tht sea'; 3^93 as ^g^R[ ( TO* Jar)
a jar ' ) containing water.
Exceptions :— 3R it not changed to sr in the case of the words
", srffr? ^sf*r, ^w, f^tr? ^fir; iriSH* wf^r>
and $r\ as
0) t T^ a^3° becomes ^^ when added to words ending in
any of the first four letters of a class; Q^H, m%?*T V to,
'possessing lightning' t. e. *a cloud % &c. The g;of f^q^&p.is
is not changed to ^ as it is not at the end of a q^[.
(e) and when the whole expresses a tf^r ( a name );
§ 343. When added id words denoting qualities Ifcf i s
dropped ;J e.g. ^)r CTr^mfftfir ^f: ^: a white (je.P»»ess
possessed of the white colour ) garment, so $cor: &c.
^ ( qq- )— is added to ^q- in the sense of 'a stamped > Coin of
or beautiful'; f^wr < possessing snow, snowy',
' possessing merits '.
— is added to 3^? , 5^, 3it; a»d & gj*i%: • woolen ',
< possessing bliss, fortunate', 3^5: * proud7;
' happy '.
added
* <M«4HHfrfTSfr I p&n- TIII« ^- !4. <M^MH|t( I Sid.
Pan. VIIL 2. 10. 11.
Vart.
843 ] TADDHITA AFFIXES 813
( $•*&• fff*I3: ); TFiff < possessing paleness,'
*. e. < pale '; ir^T * sweet,' &c.
( «5^( )— 3T*ra": ' having muscular shoulders' i. «. 'strong',
MrHfl * compassionate.' friHgi * foamy '5 it is also added
to words ending in an and denoting a limb of the body
of an animal ; ^4idt ( having a crest '.
-: < having beautiful and luxuriant hair/ also
, feonv in this sen? e ), ?rf8rT: ' a kind of ierpent',
: ' one of the nine treasures of Kubera';
r 'an elephant', T%^T^f: 'a peacock',
a husbandman,' STf^fhrSf: ' a sacrifi-
cial priest ' < a distiller of spirit"'; qfiqgd: ' a king ';
and fljtqa: ' powerful '.
is added to iTPTf, 3t*T, ^; and words ending in ^;
ftsj 'a magician;' <S?c., ^rrra^ < talented,'
1 possessing a garland/ ff^R^< ' lustrous/ &c.; also to
arnnr the final ar being lengthened ; 3<m«lf<i< 'diseased'.
5T— ^t^r: ' hairy/ ' a monkey '; *tR$r:; ^ftw: ' tawny ».
N. £.—^ These affixes are prohibited after Karmadharaya
compounds.
. V. 2.
14 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 342
SECTION IH.
AFFIXES FORMING ADVEBBS.
( 3?^[ ) — i* inserted before the final vowel of indeclinables-
without any change of meaning ;
— is added to nouns indicating « a direction ' in the sense of
i not far from '; ^for qm ' to the east of the village
not far from it '; 3i<r>ur UTIT> &c-
TO( ( <n% ) — has the sense of the Ablative ; 3nf%rT: ' from the
beginning,7 ROTf:, **W, *ofa: &c-; sometimes this is
added in the sense of the Gen.; as
1 the gods declared themselves on the side of Arjiina }\
( m%w )-iri%: • ' on all eides '; z*iva: •< on both sides '.
/ without ', ^fRT ' in various ways ', &c.
affixed in the sense of 'equally with' or 'like to' whea
the equality or likeness refers to an action ;
and not
:; similarly $rfirq^g(; or (2) < as in the case of that
. ); -(3)
little by Uttle 'j ^^f: &c.
— is added to nouns or indeclinables to express that a person
or thing, not being like what is denoted by the base to
which it is added, becomes or is made like it.
: I war a*^ i a^rf* I Pan. V. 1. 115-117
1%: I Pan. V. 4. 50.
Varf
§ 343 } TADDHHA AFFIXES. 215
Before this the ending 37 or an i? changed to f ,
but not that of indeclinable?-, f or g- is lengthened and
3t changed to fr; final ^ and the ending consonant of
aTOfl; , *R^ , ^g^[ , %<f*r , f f ^ , and ^^ , are dropped
and then the preceding rules are applied to the penul-
timate vowel. After this the termination is dropped
and the verbal or other forms of fr, i£ and 3^ are
added to the base regarded as a preposition;
) ffsoitenra; * srgrr ^srsrr a^grr srgrr
h similarly »TiRQrT^ ; ^f?I^?TRf : ' the d*y is
changed into the night 7; f^^r^rTT TTT%- * the night has
become like the day ';
is affixed like f%^ to ( 1 ) 5:^ when toe meaning is
4 troubling one who ought not to be troubled \
5:*n^nffl ^mR^r^i— ( 2 ) ^ and f^q- in the sense of
pleasing one who ought to be pleased ', &c ; QOT-
Sid.
Kau. );— ( 3 ) 3^. ^j^l^frfff m*H* *. *• ' roasts it '; —
( 4 ) ^rwy: qarrsftrcr ^iui ^fu?^ t. e. • settles its
price '• ( 5 ) and to onomatopoeic words not followed
by fffr and containing more than one vowel, the words
being reduplicated; q^,~- qgqgf^Offf, * utters the
words
— is optionally affixed like f%sr but when the change meant
is complete*; ( ^?^ 5^ 3jf|p qnjim )
I Pan. VII 4. 32. anrfor ^r^ ^ I Sid. Kau;
i Virt. ^ ^ i Pan. VII. 4. 26.
i Pan. V. 4 51.
216 -SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§343-344
completely changed to fire '; ( also ^jTumfa )$
( completely reduces to ashes >; in the case
of this affix the forms of q with ^ are also added;
also conveys the sense of ' making
over or delivering something to another ' &c.; fnr-
and «rr are similarly
added when scmethiog ia to be given to another;
N. B.* — The derivatives formed by means of the affix frr^ do
not share the properties of prepositions; the verbal indecl.,
therefore, from ^fjj^ld^flTff is 3Tl?T^n^»^r and not — n<q.
OF TIME IRREGULARLY FORMED FROM NOUNS: —
3T5W ^?T; ' the same day '; ^iRn^^ft q^^ ' last year ';
<RTft * the year before the last '; 3rfw?OT?fr>
* this year '• wTutftf* qf^rft « the other day \
4 to^ay »• ^ff^raiA 1%: * yesterdaj '• ^^Rn^fffi an^y: 4 the
4 other or following day '; ?<iq>f^; ^^W-^-^: ' both the days'*.
Chapter X.
Gender.
§ 344. No definite rules can be laid down for the determina-
tion of the gender of words in Sanskrit. It can best be studied
Pan. V 4. 52.
§ 344-346 ] GENDER. 217
from the dictionary or from usage. The following hints, however,
may be useful to the student in the majority of oases.
1 MASCULINE WORDS.
§ 345. Verbal derivatives formed by the affixes 9? and ;f,
and f addfld to the roots ^r and vrr; e. g. m^:t «n*n, W, Tf :
any beverage or drinfc, poison, ifr**: range, scope,
: mental pain or anguish. frfir: a treasure, &c.
Exceptions:— *rnar/d». and *rcr, f£|p, and wr all
§ 346. Words ending in 3- and those having «$ ,
> ^>^)^or ^,for their penultimate; as sjij:,
: * a bunch of flowers ' &c. ^ry:, qr^ror:, ^?t*i: ' a swelling,
Exceptions: — Words ending in —
(a) 7-q«|, 1*3$ ( except when it ends a compound, in which
case it is both mas. and /em. ) 5^-g ' the last day of a
lunar month on which the moon is invisible,' ^T$ ' name
of a river/ 33, *&*£ ft°^ t3^ ' ft kind of creeper/ which
are all /«».; ^rg, sng, ^^ 4 wealth/ 3^55, 5^5 ' lac/
5T3 « tin or lead', ar^, ^r^, IT^ ' honey/ ^rr^ ' relish',
and ircg « sour cream ', which are all neuter.
' the chin', ^n^;, sm%^:^, 3i^^ * a garment/
a fire brand/
(c) ? and or— f%Tl£, g^2T. «5cSf.^, WRr '» place where four
roads meet-
( d) «f and ^— ?PT^, f^, ff«F*J property left at death, ' g^r ' a
hymn of the Samaveda/ ' a kind of sacrifice/ ^nr,
« the hairy skin of a black antelope7, gffp* « snow',
218 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 346-348
a flight of
steps',
( « ) <f, *T, IT — TTT ' sin ' ^7, T%c*T> 5^r, ^rwr ' tender grass ',
3*^fr<T 'an island', ^§pR 'saffron', ^pR gold, iron, ffT^R
'a leprous spot7, ^R 'a battle9, f SR, JT^R (generally mas.),
3f£qirR knowledge of the soul.
(/) *r and T — f^q1, f i??*?, ^rrfPT ' an upper garment ', jff,
lf%=r, %^T> 3^T> ^RTT, *«^f ' dry ginger ',
• a cage ', 3T3"f , 3Tf$IT ' courtyard/ %^, ^?^^, $J«^T>
, ^5^ ' a cave', ^JTT * a hut ' (m. also), ^^JTT 'a crab',
' name of a country/ 3f*3T, firf^TT, <T^T a loom,
the ritoal &c.j ^r?ir, §T?, ^T^T, TR'T/ ^^j*!, f^=r, {j5T, %?y
TTT^r a family, ^^f^j^ a fiuger-armour, ^r^r, ^fr^r, q^r,
q?r, qr^ 5r?K'
(^) tf and *f — ^3?n? 'a frying pan/ artsmrc ' a frying pan/
RT^, 3(t^, %f?R^ 'sin, guilt/ q^Rq*: 'sin, stain/ ( some-
times ««*. ), fifa, ^f, « chaff ' ^TTf^r which ( 5.^. ) are
all neuter.
§ 347. The words ^, %rq R^?, TCft> ^T^3
> q^T> 3!TfRT^ »n3T ( also H«M. ),
r, ^TT, and their synonyms, and words expressive
of the measures of corn &c., such as ^g^, &c.
Exceptions— ^f/<jj»., f^ar/ei»., ^m /<»»., RTfTOT/«m. 'a kind
of weight,, firre?<T "0u-} f^-^ MSM; ajg^ «ew; and ST^ neu.
§ 348. The words ^r: < a wife', 3T^TcTT: ' uninjured rice/
F: * fried rice/ 3*5^1 * life ( the vital airs in the body )' and
r: * a house,' which are always used in the plural.
§349-352 ] GENDER. 219
§ 349. The words ^reraur ' sinus, a kind of nicer', 3^1^ the-
corner of the eye, *T?iq^, **<*, ir^[ <a wing/^fav^, Jift, n%,
ST^T, 5>T&, >OT5T, *r%> lftf& tff , 9>R, 5M, W*T, T3T, fJ5T ' a
kind of grass ( of which the girdle of a Brahmana ought to be
made ), s*f , j*cT, ^pff * a spear' ars^, ara 'a collection.'
fcT, f <T, QjT, ^?T *the mango tree7, ggJr, T»^T 'a ounnch/
^TJ^- 'name of a demon/ qi^ui* a heretic, f^T^tr? a lock of hair,
a peacock's tail, q-^r, ^^r, sCTirjn" 'a ^*n(^ °* sacrificial offering/
^T?> ^?) ^7 name °f Vishnu, a kind of flower ( also neu. in
this sense, uometimea ), f%9f > f ^f?» ^T^, a^T, qflrtd ^f^R[ ' a
churning handle/ ^^f^RT name of Indra, ^f^r, Mcf^r, <J»T ' &
multitude, the betel-nut tree/ q^, qjqr, ^qr, ?FST5 'la'ge frying
pan1 &c., TO, ITTOT, «T^, g?^», ir^ar, TO^T, ^1T» ^» 3^ the
bntt-end of an arrow to which the feathers are attached,
and 9f^f%-
II. FEMININE WORDS.
§ 350. Verbal derivatives formed by the terminations
, f^T, fS, f and 37; as 3^1%:, >|y&:, TfJlft:, m9:, 'cJ^T:, ^:, &c.
Exceptions: — ^%, snS" and ^for, all mas.
§ 351. (a) All the numerals from 20-91), monosyllabic words
in i and such as are formed by the aflix m, ft^TfJf} «ft.*; «*gm &c.
(6) The synonyms of i^Rf, ?ErRg[, cRTT and sfofr and these
words themselves.
Exceptions:— 5ftfffl( «. and ?ir^^ n. both meaning a 4 river'.
§ 352. The words ?TT, ^ 'a sacrificial ladle/
'aVodic metre/ ^R^, qrf^, %^ ' a drop/
, 5flf%, ^!% ' a tubular vessel of the body, a hollow
-220 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. f § 352-355
lotus stalk/ ffeffe < a kind of bird, ' %ffc, sf*, frft, *P»rfo ' the
orifice of the ear, a kind of cake/ nf*Ti ^ft ' a cottage/ *RT,
j^fj, sfe 'a moment/ *%, qrf%, Sfft^ff, ST^-fT, *ri*-ift * a
mine ( of jewels &c. )' ^nft-sfr 'a kind of cucumber/
'the edge of a sword/
'knowledge, consciousness', g^, ^rfR>j, 3TTT^T^[, ^
'water gruel/ £f, ^r^ buttocks/
and ^137 'a limit or boundary/
§ 353. 3j«r , S?R^ when it means 'a flower/
d gyc^f^ which are always used in the plural.*
NEUTER WORDS.
§ 354. Words ending in the Krit affixes SR and ft and the
Taddhita affixes «r, ?, ^, af^, and f^; mw, 3^, »ft^ SS?t,
>mr^, «W ( ^TSTW ^TT^: ), ^T^f, *eft* ( vifrsfa: ) € the monkey
species' srrf^Trtf, 4t^ ( 3$** ^T^: ), Itfnrt ' a period of two
years-/ ^m$3& &c.
§355. Words ending in f^ and^f; in 9TI, and 3^;, and
having two vowels in them; in ^ and such as have 9 for their
penultimate; ^f^ * liquid ghee/ stfrffct, vrg^, **#*> ^N ' an
armour/ *T$r^, JT^, ggp, ^gj, &c., 3^, ^y, W5J, &o.
Exceptions:—
(a) qrffafem. 'the roof of a carriage or house' and $&&/*».
'a boundary/
(*) $*> arfft* (> ffer^ ), gnsr 'pupil', gsr, ir?3r; fsr • name
K/. however Sid. Kau.
355-359 ] GENDEB. 221
of a demon ' and &£ all mat.- qrsrr, HOT, WT ' & smith's
bellows ', <f5T, *^T, ' a leather strap ',
(e) and ^ g^y, <rTO, $53 ' a granary or store house for
corn ', ?r^y ' the middle gem of a necklace ', 3>*TO, \*& ' a
Brahmana who attends on an idol ', and 3TO, which are all mas.
§ 356. Words denoting fruits, and all numerals from 313 up-
wards, except $r|p mas., <g$r which is also /dm. and
§ 357. The words g^f, TOST,
bow 7, &c., ^rr, ^T^, f5J, ^T, W5» 3»«5T, W^fT, 5^ ' copper ',
, for, and their synonyms.
Exception: — tfft, ' a plough ', 3W 'wealth', 3U^T 'cooked
'ice ', 3^15^ ' a battle ', OTHT ' a battle ', all mag., and
' war ' and 3T?cnr ' a forest ', both fern.
§ 358. f%q^, 3Hl^, ^^ ' a drop of water ' ( generally used
in the plural ), 31^, zr^g; ' the liver ;, g^^g[ ' batter-milk ',
T??T, 3T^?r, firmTT, ftw, r%^, ftw, ?rar, TSW 'silver', f ^r,
' the grey ness of hair brought on by old age, '
• sin ', ^nr, vn?T, WRT, ^«T silver, a stamped coin, ^cq- ' a
baser metal, ' guq-, f^uq*, * a place, ' £0? ' an offering offered to
the gods ' ( opposed to the following ), ^otr * an oblation offered
to deceased ancestors ' ( opposed to the preceding )( CTetr, ^fq-t
3mrif( w^r, f^r^T mechanical art, rffcq- * a loop cr sling made of
strings ', jrwr < a wall ', *&, f*? , g$,, %T^r, 55, 5:^, ^^r a
fish hook, fq^. ^»^, $TT ' saffron, ' ^nf, * water ', and if^r ' an
organ of sense -\
IV. WORDS MASCULINE AND FEMININE.
§S59. IK, ITfor, m%; 5%, TOfo ' a trumpet sounder, '
the pelvis, ' ^rr?RT^; Hl% * ink, a kind of black powder, '
222 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 350-360
' a measure of one hand in length/
when at tne end of a comP- )• flfo, *nf*r,
, 3m%, Hffbr, ffS 'a leather strap/
and 3TT&.
V. WORDS MASCULINE AND NEUTER.
§300. *fT, >i?T, g^T ' a kind of grass ( also g^r )>,
' play, joke, tremor, ' trj re<r, 5^ ' a wooden or earthen dolP,
< roasted meat, , aftr^fT l blood ', sr^, 3^J,
?^ grsT ' the namo of Gokala, ' ^^r, ^^, ^^ ' a peacock's fea-
ther, the beard, ' &c., ?p^^, ^t anJ ' a kind of eye disease %
af^, T*T> S^?> ^^^T, aftw, aTT^vr, 3T?fT, 3pJ^, WT? 'the scum of
boiled rice, ' ^(T^-, ^TcT, ^?«T<3T, ^TT'Sr, 3n^f5T,
ffe^T,W,^,jrt* a peacock's feather/ ^,
' gold ' 3^*f 3f, %^, ^fr^, 1?^ * name of an aquatic bird ' ^,
OT^> ^frg» HT5, ^fll'5» ^rf> ' the flour of barley first fried und
then ground 7 ( used in the pi. ), ^nw^ ' the root of the water
lily ', ^r?^, 3?tfhF, ^TT^T, Rt^E: c spirituous liquor, ' also 'the act
of drinking liquor ( vide. Sis. XV. 80 ), jfr^:, ^n^T 'a drink-
ing cup', I^f^, 5^?F, cT^T^, R«^, 5T^^ 55r4^ £ lustre, vigour'
T^, ' a bow, the bow of Siva, ' Hl^cE, f$V9^ 'incense ;, &c.,
a lump of boiled rice*, cf?, 3TC, ^ff, ^ «P<T«r,
fe ' a rage, ' *? ' a kind of plant ',
' a particular coin, 7 ^or,
<T; cfl5^ ( w- ) i a holy place ' t a descent into water,
the stairs of a landing place. &c. ( m. ) a respectable
person ' ( generally used as an affix, as iVTTcfRlf^y &c- ), WT t the
nose or nostrils of a horec i&j, q;sr, wr^r, qt^, 3TfH^?T, SfRyfT,
SicR, ^TR, ^TO^, <«r^T, Wr^, %^, 3TTf?T^ ' the tie-post or the
tie- chain of an elephant/ ?TRT^T ^- a friend ; n. a letter having
the same organ of utterance, if^r, ^^^, ^^TT^T, f^fTF^ a
canopy, f%KCT, 5j5r, a winnowing basket, ^fl<r,* the eighth
5 360-362 J INDECLINAHLES. 223
mahurta of the day, ( mostly mas. ), 'a musical instrument7;
$anr, 'a corpse/ %fo, f%?r<T, 3T<T a small boat or the moon; i&q>
a bed, •&**? 'yawning,' fi^, KHm, ^lf%TT »• the pomegranate
tree; «. its fruit, ^3*1, STOW, £Tff, $?m, ?fR, SCfR ( *». )
<Varuna/ TfrRq\ ^^q- astringent flavou* or taste, jr^yq-, ar^q-,
3T?qTr, fouaq, =g^i, TO, ^> *TK> TO «• a vessel for holding
liquor, a mass of water; <rfT, $frr, mRC *an iron club, a javelin/
w^fR «a kind of vessel' ( Afar, grn ), R^TT, ^fk 'a kind of
fragrant grass' ( Mar. qjoB'T ), mflTT *• ». darkness, blindness
iron-ruat-, fBrRlT, ^5^r, ^XT, ^fw, * dr7 cowdung/
^, ^TTET c sacrificial vessel of a particular shape ',
r%qf^T exudation of trees, s«rem, ^nf^T 'anything made of
cotton1, grm, RW, q7RT, 5PH ; a drinking cup/ ijfa-, ^JIJT M. a
wooden vessel or cup, arrg^ srfor, ?FT^', cj^pa"
' the bow of Arjuna, ' ^ft^ m. ' a largo serpent, '
. the sarasa bird, name of Brahma; ?
* a demon n. flesh ', ^orr?y, Wf^, ^fnT?y r a horse's neck, '
forage ', \%%\& a cat, the eye-ball, T%ST a piece of
waste or uncultivated land, ^y, T^ 3?qfJ ». a kind of plant,
5T?T, 3T5<T, srqjir, q? the blade of a sword, a knife, qnr, <ri%^, ^3",
and &% m. a mushroom; m. a parasol, an umbrella.
VI. WOHUS FEMININE AND NEUTER.
t 361 ^ar-OTT ' the post or pillar of a house ', 3?f%^, light,
and ^t-$TT cce hundred thousand ( according to some n. alao ).
Chapter XL
AVYAYAS OK INDECLINABLES.
362. That in an dnyaya whose form remaining the same in
224 SANSKRIT GBAHMAB. [ § 362-365
all the genders, numbers and cases, undergoes no change.*
The Aiyayas may be divided into simple and compound ones,
The latter are treated of in the chapter on compounds ( Avyayi-
bhivas and a few Bahuvrfbis and Tatpurusha ).
S 363. The indeclinables comprise ( I ) Prepositions ( II )
Adyerbs, ( III ) Particles, ( IV ) Conjunctions, and ( V ) Inter.
jections.
§ 364. Besides these there are in Sanskrit a few nouns-
haying one inflection only which are treated as indeclinable
( nipatat )•, e. g. 3TO<£ another ( reason ), ar^i* setting, «rf^
that exists, sfn^ the well-known sacred syllable omt ^^ satis-
faction, food, ^rt^ coaxing, TO^ a bow, ?m?rT non-existence 155
tha earth, *j^ the sky, grf? the dark fortnight, ^r^ happiness,
SjY? or Sn% ^e bright fortnight, *faq^ a year> ^^TfT food offered
to gods, *w food offered to the manes, ^ heaven, ^1%
happiness &c.
I. PREPOSITIONS.
§ 365. A preposition, styled *Upasarga or Gati/ in Sanskrit is
an indeclinable word, having an independent meaning and prefixed
to verbs and also to their derivatives. These prepositions modify,
intensify and sometimes totally alter the senses of rootsf:
u
i Pin. 1. 1. 37.
Cf. also Sid. A'au.
Some think that prepositions have no meaning of their own,
but they simply bring to light when prefixed to rocts their
hidden senses. ( of. Sis. X. 15 ).
§ 365-866 ] INDECLINABLES. 225
9* STf ' to strike/' 3ffif ' to eat, to perform as a sacrifice,' jfc
1 to contract/ f3|T ' to SPOIV Wg" ' to avoid, &c/ Sometimes
they are prefixed witnout any alteration in the sense.
§ 366. The following are the prepositions ( upasarg** } com-
monly prefixed to roots: —
—' beyond, over'; arraSF*: 'overstepping ' or « going beyond.
«rfiMff ' a gift, &c/
T— < over, above, &c ;' au^HT: 'goiug up, acquisitio
' high office or power/ 3tf§^q: « censure/ &c.
313— ' •* ter> behind, along, &c.7 3T^chHUJ * following/
' imitation/ 3?5«i^: ' favour/ &c.
9|ir — ' awav from, away/ ^^^R ' the act of taking away/
4 to plunder, seize ' &c , 3^*1^: < harm, wrong' &c.
3rft ( sometimes ft )— 'near to/ ' over/ ' takiDg to/ &c.;
* to be resolved into or reduced to, * , srfiqT'f or
' a coverine, ' ^cq-jj: < destruction/ &c.
This prep, is more commonly uaed as an independent advexb
having a cumulative force in classical Sanskrit.
— < towards, near to/ &c; 3|f&ir^ ' to go towards/
1 noble descent or family/ siftm*: « self-respect/ 3)
' to defeat/ &o.
3HT — ( sometimes q-: see 3jft and ft. note ) — 'away, down/ &c.
airq-— or OTTf ' to plunge into/ a^RlR: 4 descent/
' reproached/ 3TCYTC to disrespect,' &c.
* Cf. ^RQt*T arfq-ir^j^^ntfr, &c. Sharira Bhishya. According
to the grammarian Bhaguri the prepositions atfr and 9^- may
optionally lose their 3T-*t§ Hiyii<e5lqH^lcqj^^nf^t'l (Sid.Kau.)
H. 8. O. 15.
226 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 366
3^ — < Up to, towards, all round, a little/ &c.; au^ai^ ' to coyer
all round/ srrenr- 'form or shape ( within due bounds ),
' that which ahines all round' t. 0. ' the ether ';
' to shake a little/ &o.
^— ^-<upon/&c.; saft 'to go up/ 3^: 'industry/
4 pouring out, hence a gift, a general rule/ &o.
3Tf —*near to, towards, by the side of/ &c.; CT7T ' to go near
to/ sqffflr/. 'an obligation/ ^ft/. 'death/
'praise, worship,' T<rirrffT/. 'comparison/ &c.
^ — ?;-< bad, hard to be done/ &c.; ^f^Ti'* * bad conduct/
* hard to be done/ 5:9$ 'difficult to be borne/ &c.
, Into, great, opposed >/ &c.; fts < to insult/ f3%ir <a
house/ i%^r ' a heap, a great collection/ fttfff *drunk
*&/ f^$T 4 ft command/ &c.
of, away from, without/ &c.; fo:% 'to issue out/
fiiJH: < a passage out/ f^fo ' out of i. a, free from
blame/ fa: ^ ' without doubt,' &.
, back, opposed to/ &c.j qn^ ' to reject, to denpise,'
mT^rr 'to act bravely/ TOTO 'gone away/ TO5^[ 'turn
back,' mi^q- 'what is opposed to victory; defeat/ &c.
— (all round, about/ &«.; qf^TT *to place all round t. e. to put
on or wear/ gf?PT: :* wall &c. that surrounds/ qRoffir:
'ripening, maturity/ MRnuiHT ' counting all round, t. e.
a complete enumeration/ &c.
— < towards, back, in return, in opposition to,' &c.;
(to go towards/ MiflMmm 'a speech in return, an ans-
wer/ Trfft-tft-CT?: ' an act in opposition to *. «.
a remedy' &c.
366-369 ] IKDECUNABLES. 227
— * apart; separate from, reverse to, ' &o.; ft^R^ ' to move
apart/ f^ggj 'to be separated,' foft opp. of ?RT ' to
sell/ 'to buy' &c.; sometimes this has an intensive force.
— 'together with, excellent, full/ &c. tfip*, ' to be united/
^F^TC: ' perfection / ^^fjr « refinement / ^fR:
1 destruction, contraction, ' &c.
— Cwell5 thoroughly/ &e. ( in this sense it is opposed to ^ );
^3><T 'done well/ 3$TT%<T 'thoroughly trained, well
governed/ &c. It is also used in the sense of ' very,
excessively; ^«^ 'very great/
§ 367. Two or more of these prepositions may also be
combined and prefixed; e. g. arfSrf^fo^ * *° enter into
resolution/ qgmniji 'to come in close contact with/ &c.
§ 368. When used in a compound the vetb may be omitted
after the prepositions srfir, arfsf, 3T3, 3TO, 3W, anfir, g^r, qjft and
c. Vide § 232.
§ 369. There are several other words, also styled Gati by
Sanskrit grammarians, used prepositionally. These are prefixed
to certain roots only. We give the more important of them below.
( a ) g?x^* ' towards ' is prefixed to tr^ and to roots implying
motion; 3tx$4inj-*r?q- * going near/ 3F5^$R$ ^flying towards/
'having spoken to.'
( b ) ( 1 ) 3T^r% ' giving itrength to the weak/ 3?^ in the
sense of « decorating/ 3rft> ^fflr> 37T^ all implying ' assent,
acceptance or promise/ ^3. an^ similar imitative sounds,
and ^ in the sense of 'dishonouring or honouring/
denoting 'fastening/ &c. are prefixed to ^; ^^^
. 4. 69
228 SANSKRIT GEAMMAE. [ § 369-372:
( 2 ) TO:, sn§', ftwr, *$•, *rr$TT^and some other words may
be optionally prefixed to ^ or remain separate?
or 5$ ^ 'to bring under subjection/ *rT$rr^ ^ or
make manifest/ &c.
( * ) 3*»tn; is prefixed to roots meaning 'to go/ qj, T%, and
similar roots. srerftrtr ' having disappeared/ sTOvrfr ' dis-
appearance/ 3^a^?T, &c.
(<f J.SIWB( *8 prefixed to roots implying motion; 3^nq:
letting/ affffim "set/ srttfalr Vto cause to set, to lead
to destruction
( e ) <3TT^.f, and sn§: are prefixed to ^, 3^^ and ^; and
to ^ vjr and similar roots, and optionally to
'manifestation/
manifested/ &c.; mfpg?T Banishing out of sight,'
'disappearance/ &c.
5 is prefixed to 5?, ig; , ^ &c.. suffer 'placed before,
headed by/sffrra 'gone in the front/ &o.
370. Several nouns, substantive and adjective, may be-
prefixed to the roots ^P> , ^ , and 373 to form what are
called in Sanskrt ' chvi-derivatives' ( vide chap. IX.
See. III.
Such nouns are also termed 'G«ii.J
371. Like prepositions may be further used the words to
which the Taddhita affix ^T^ is affixed, aTTJJ^Kfr (to
consign to flames/ ^YT^TTr^cT- 'reduced to ashes/
4Hl^dl 'made over to the king.7 &c. ( vide p4 216. )
II. Adverbs.
§ 872. Adverbs are either primitive or derived from nounir
pronouns or immerals. As adverbs may also be further used the
§ 372-373 ]
INDECLINABLKS.
320
Ace. ting. neu. of nouns and adjectives ; and sometimes the sing.
of other cases also ; *ran* ' truthfully / ^f ' softly, '
'happily,' «yg < quickly, ' f^fo[, 3W^Hi, aTfM^H ,
' strongly, ' ^q-:, < again ' &c.; ^.-jfr, 'painfully, ' a^r,
< virtuously, juitly, ' ^fi^R, Stftor, 3I^»T, T%*OT ' after a long
time, ' qvft &c.; f^HT, f%TTTWTq' « for a long time, '
' for the sake of,' ^JT^ f forcibly, ' ^fq^, ^f^I^,
^FRT^&c.; f%Tia; ^or along time/ 5^, ^TfT^ &«•:
< properly, ' f^, spTW, STf^, 3^, ^^q1^ ' at once, '
< near, ' &c.
Ar. 5 Adverbs formed from pronouns and numerals are
given in their proper places • while those formed from nouns
are given in Chapter IX.
§ 373. In tho following list are alphabetically arranged almost
all the words used adverbially in Sanskrit. —
Suddenly, all at once.
In front of, before,
front of, before;
ahead, at first.
Not long since,
recently, quickly.
Ever, constantly.
Through ignorance.
Rightly, correctly, pro-
perly.
In, into.
: From this> on this account
&c.
Exceedingly j rising
superior to, with the Ace.
3T?f??rT5:'n^*f^Tra>: M. B.
3TaT Here
Then, afterwards.
Yes.
3T^r Truly, certainly, indeed.
3TO To-day, this day.
Now, now-a-days.
Belnw, down.
Again, moreover.
f : On the followingday
Now at this time.
230
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
[§373
arf^T^ Incessantly, ceaselessly.
*) Except, without,
araiTT /
.. *> inside.
3T^>OT V
v J Between, amidst.
} Again, moreover, be-
) sides.
Elsewhere, 4n another
place.
Otherwise, in a diffe-
rent manner.
: Near, close by, in the
proximity of.
Frequently, repeat-
edly.
Quickly, little.
Together with, in com-
pany with.
There, in the next world,
above.
Quickly.
?» Before.
Enough, sufficient for.
It is a prefix also.
without, on the outside.
Repeatedly, often and
often.
^Improperly, unfitly.
)
Instantly, speedily.
) Uninterruptedly, one
) affcer another.
Near, in the vicinity of,.
at a distance.
3TT4gg^ Forcibly [ Pan. I. 1.
47].
3TTf%^ Openly, before the eyes.
Hence.
Hither and thither, to
and fro, here and there, &c.
In this manner, so.
Again.
another day, the
other day.
Thus, indeed, quite in.
conformity to tradition.
Thus, so, in this manner.
st now, at this mo-
ment.
Truly.
^ Here.
f^ Slightly, little.
3^ Loudly.
On the day following.
3MJ5J Secretly, in private.
From both sides.
On both days.
Early in the morning, at
dawn.
i Truly, Truthfully-
5 «73]
INDECLINABLES.
231
without, except,
together, in one place,
once, once upon a time.
one way, singly, at the
same time.
all at once, suddenly.
Now, at present,
crqp Just, quite.
Thus, so.
o be it.
> I trust, hope. &c,
ra?r ;
flFSH* How, in what way.
1 With great difficulty,
J With great effort.
3>m*U*4 How indeed, how possi-
bly.
^•r When, at what time.
One time, once upon a
time.
Never.
used as an enclitic.
When, at what time?
ny time.
What a pity.
f%^ Moreover, further, again.
) To a certain degree,
) little, somewhat.
But, yet, nevertheless,
however.
What indeed, whether.
who, what, which?;
How much more?
What how ?
Whether, how.
Verily, indeed, assuredly.
What then, how much
more, &c.
Whence, from where?
Where, in which place ?
mewhere, anywhere.
n the best manner.
n a good manner.
^H^ Enough, no more of.
, merely, simply.
Whither, where ?
80me pl&ce.
i?I%cr Nowhere.
Certainly, surely, indeed.
ft^ A long time. The singular
of any of the oblique cases
of this word may be used
adverbially in the sense of
'long/ 'for a long time/ aa
, ft**, &c.
T For a period of many
nights, long.
Perhaps, sometimes,
s^ro; Silently.
SANSKBIT GRAMMAR.
F5373
Soon.
)
Quickly, at once.
Therefore.
Therefore, consequently.
TO Then, in that case, &c.
Then, at that time, in that
case.
Then, at that time.
So, in that manner, as
surely us.
As for instance, to be
more plain, &c.
From that, therefore.
Then, at that time,
n the first place, &c.
^Crookedly, across, in-
1 directly, badly.
) Silently, without
) speaking or noise.
By that, on that account.
By day.
f^TT Fortunately, luokily.
To a distance, deeply,
highly.
At night.
) Quickly, forthwith,
Jimmediatoly.
g** Certainly.
£ Not 10.
iHF^ By night.
Not so, not at all.
in various ways, distinct-
ly, separately.
By name; indeed, certain-
ly, probably, perhaps.
Near, close by .
Very much, exceecung-
Jy, to one's satisfaction,
agreeably to desire.
Certainly, assuredly,
most probably.
%Not.
q^ Then, oyer, out of.
Day after to-morrow.
: Around, on all 'sides, all
ronnd.
Tb« other day,
to-morrow.
To one's satisfaction,
sufficiently; willingly.
Well, behold ! see !
Behind, backwards, at
last, atter wards.
: Again.
I 373
INDEOLINABLES.
233
5^: Again and again, re-
peatedly.
)
> Before, in front.
irjr In former times, of yore,
at first.
m or to the east, before,
in front of &c.
On the former day, yester-
day.
Severally, apart trom.
Exceedingly,
at will, with pleasure.
SIJT In the morning.
TOT^ Extensively.
Being exhausted.
Every day.
On the contrary, on the
other hand, rather, &c.
On high, at the
8ame time
Forcibly, violently, ex-
ceedingly, much.
Before, at first, in or to
the east.
In the morning.
Crookedly, in ait oppo-
site manner favourably.
: Mostly.
In the noon.
ar?q- After death.
• Forcibly, powerfully,
i excessively.
Out, beside, except.
Quickly.
Exceedingly, again and
again.
Greatly, exceedingly, re-
peatedly.
Quickly, immediately.
A little, slightly, slowly,
tardily.
mfe '
Without delay, imme-
diately.
To each other, secretly.
Wrongly, incorrectly, to
no purpose, in vain.
gTjT To no purpose, in vain,
unprofitably, wrongly.
Often, again and again.
Falsely, lyingly, in vain,
q-^ Since.
q<T: Since, for which reason,
wherefore.
3rsr Where, in which place.
234
SANSKRIT GBAMMAB.
[§375
As, namely.
Somehow.
In cine order.
In the manner men-
tioned, just as required.
When.
As much as, as loDg as.
Badly.
at once, simultaneously.
Badly.
Like.
Only.
Except.
Exceedingly.
High up in the sky.
In vain.
t Verily, to be sure.
5&: Gently.
SP^ Always.
Quickly.
Hurriedly, quickly.
Along with.
Always,
Always.
At once.
Perpetnally, always..
Stealthily, under cover.
At once, the yery moment.
: Ail round.
Equally.
Near.
I, proprely.
lolly, gladly.
Now.
Face to face, in
Well, in a good manner;
r: On all sides, perfectly.
Every wnere.
Always.
W Together with, along with*
All at once, suddenly.
Together with, along
with.
In the presence of, in
person, in » bodily form,
crookedly, in a sidelong
manner.
* When ^T and qr^ are prefixed to a personal form of the
Present Tense, it has the sense of the Future Tense.
§ 373-375 ] INDECUNABLES. 235
, at present, fitly,
Oneself spontaneously,
ff Because, indeed, surely.
Without, except.
properly.
In the evening.
Very much. gfTfl
' I On account of, because of,
In vain, to no purpose. -|-^ )
Well, in a good manner. jpfr Yesterday.
III. PARTICLES.
§ 374. The particles are either used as expletives or inten-
sives; some of these are f%5T, *^, ^,5, 3, *, If, &c.
§ 375. The following particles are used with certain words: — >
3^— 3T^cT ' a wonder '.
^T— OTSW 'a bad man,' gjfajj Uuke-warm,' gjr^r^ 'a little water7.
l a bad deed >.
*
qr — is generally changed to acr or s*^ when prefixed to words be-
ginning with a consonant or a vowel respectively. This
particle has six different senses* ( 1 ) ^T^q" 'likeness*
or ' resemblance' ; as 3t3T§ran 'one not a Brahmana, but
resembling a Brahmana * ( wearing the sacred thread,
&c. ) i. e. ' a Kshatriya or a Vaisya* (2) ^HT^T ^absence
or negation' ; sr^itf ' the absence of knowledge'-, ( 3 )
317373* ' difference from'- as sro 3TO?: 'this is something
different from a cloth' i. 9. '& jar' or so • (4) ^^mi 'little-
* These are given in the following couplet:—
236 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 375-376
ness' or 'smallness'j as ar^^TT sp^qr ' a gi'l baying a
slender waist' ; ( 5 ) 3isrT3n?*r 'badness, unfitness' ,&c.;
3TOT& i something unfit to be done', 3^f*T ' an
Improper time, not a favourable opportunity,' and
lastly ( 6 ) fifte or * opposition '; 3R*Tfir: ' non-mora-
lity'j immorality 3157: 'opposed to a god't. e. 'a demon'.
OT — is generally used as an expletive. Used with a form of
the present tense of a verb, it gives in the sense of the
past tense ; as H*ift CT *'. «• 3^3"^. When used with
the particle W it has an intensive force • as ITT fIT 3TT%
wr: &m &o.
f^fg;— is added to i% and other indeclinables and aska a question
or implies a doubt ; fifefaat, 3l?tR^> &c.
TfT— is need with 5 and its derivatives like a preposition in the
sense of « acceptance'. **fan*:» 9ft$?ra(, &<>.
IV. CON JUNCTION 8.
§ 376. The following are the principal conjunctions in
Sanskrt:—
( a ) Copulative 3?^r, wt, *ff, ^j f%^, &c.
(5) Disjunctive WT> «TT...^T, &c.
( e) Adversative aro^T, 5, 1^5, fifor, &c.
(d) Conditional^, q-f^, q^rffi, ^g;, ^t%^, %? ( used in
sacrificial ceremonies ), &c.
(•) Causal f|,?Tg:,fR,&c.
•(/) Interrogative '^njt a^rf?^;, ^T, ^mft, f%,
Affirmatives and negatives ajf , 3W fti^ , 3TT^> 3T^[T &c.
t( A ) COD junctions of time qrc^-tTWI? ^T, ?T^T &c.
( t ) 3,«r and 5 RT are used to mark the beginning and the close
of a work respectively.
§ 377 ] IMDEOLINABLES. 237
V. TNTERJTCOTTONS.
§377. " The interjection is not properly a part of speech,
as it does not enter into the construction of sentences. It is
sadden exclamation prompted by some strong feeling or emo-
tion. There are various utterances suited to the different emo-
tions of the mind ":— Prof. Sain.
( a ) These are— 3Tf, f, gr, <r, $, aft, 31* , «ff , 3Tft, ^T,
?> fT, 5Tyr» &c. expressive of wonder, grief or regret, &c.
( * ) f%^, ftr^s &o. expressive of contempt.
( c ) f T, ^T; &o. expressing sorrow, dejection, &c.
( ^ ) ?T> 5f^T> ^^ showing ffrief.
( e ) 3tT, f^» ff** , &c- expressive of anger, contempt, &c.
(/) ?^. &c- expressing joy.
(y) There are some interjections used to call attention.
Of these.
( 1 ) some show respect, such as ar|p, 3^-
^t: r &c.
( 2 ) and others, disrespect or contempt; as aqp, aft,
&c.
( 3 ) The exclamations sfi^, qfi^ and ^^ are need when
offering oblations to gods or manes; and
( 4 ) Hlgl &°d ^qrj when offering oblations to gods and
manes respectively.
238 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 878
Chapter XII.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
§ 378. There are in Sanskrit—
(a) Two kinds of verbs, Primitive and Derivative.
( 5 ) Six Tenses ( ^Ryr: ) and four Moods ( 3j*fr ) which are
as follow: —
TENSES TECHNICAL NAME MOODS TECHNICAL NAME.
or Present &^ 3TT*n or Imperative &Q
or Aorist g^ flrfir or Potential f*Rr^«£
: or Imperfect 5^ grrrfn or Benedictive STT^Trm^
r: or Perfect f§J^ 0%cf or Conditional
£ or 1 st Future g£
or 2 nd Future <g£.
t the Subjunctive is used only in the Veda and is
therefore termed ' The Vedie Subjunctive. '
Note: — The ten tenses and moods are technically called the
ten Lakaras in Sanskrit grammars.
( e ) Three Voices ( snfrTT: ), the Active Voice ( grcffaro ) as
IT, the Passive Voice (^pffofnro ), as 5T?CfT
, and the Impersonal Construction
These technical names are given in the following Karika.
This terminology of Panini, it will be seen, is artificial.
Other grammarians use different names. The ten Lakaras of
Panini are according to their nomenclature, as follow. —
and 3TT^FfJ—
Ouidt '.
§ 87b-382 ] CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 239
( d ) Two eets of personal terminations, the one called ' Paras.
maipada,' the other ' Atmanepada.7 Some roots take exclusively
the Par. terminations and some the Atm. ones; while there are
others which take either. Several roots again, though Paras-
maipadi, become Atmanepadi and rice versa, when preceded by
certain prepositions or in particular senses. These will be con-
sidered in a separate chapter.
§ 379. Primitive verbs or roots are those which originally
exist in the language, while derivative verbs are those which
may be derived from a parent stock — a root or a noun.
§ 380. Every verb, in Sanskrit, whether primitive or deriva-
tive, may be conjugated in the ten tenses and moods given above.
( a ) Transitive verbs are conjugated in the Active and
Passive voices and intransitive verbs in the active and the
Impersonal form.
§ 381. In each tense and mood there are three numbers,
singular, dnal and plural, with three persons in each.
§ 382. In four of the tenses and moods given above, viz. the
Present, the Imperfect, the Imperative and the Potential, the verds
undergo peculiar modifications ( dnE^ur ) and these are therfore
called Oonjngational (firS^f^)* or special tenses and moods; and
* Strictly the term Sarvadbatuka ( belonging to tile form of
the verbal base ) is given by Panini to the terminations of all
the tenses and moods; except those of the Perfect and the
Benedictive, and to the affixes distinguished by an indicatory s
( f$TC ) ». «. the various conjugational signs of the 9 classes ( ex-
cept that of the eighth ), and the terminations of the Present Parti-
ciple Pars, and* Atm. All other verbal affixes t. e. the conju-
gational signs of the 8th and 10th classes, the affixes added
to form the causal base and a few denominatives, the affixes
**Tr *TT> ^and q- added to the bases of the two futures, the
Desiderative and the Aor., and the Passive and the Frequentative
respectively, and those forming the Past Participle ( Act. and
Pass. ), the infinitive and the verbal indeclinables, and some
others are called Ardbadhatuka, the remaining Non-Oonju-
240 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 382-385
gational ( STTOTTg^r ) or generel. In th* former the characteristic
marks and terminations of each are mostly added to a special
base formed from the roots in various ways, while in the latter
they are combined with the roots itself.
( a ) The base ( aijp ) of a root is that form wuich it assumes
before tne personal terminations.
§ 383. When a root is capable of taking eitner pada, the Para-
smaipada (lit. word for another) should be used when the fruit
or result o± the action of the verb accrues to any other person
or thing than tne agent, and the Atmanepada ( lit. word for self )>
when it refers to the agent. Thus ^^w: q*rfff will meau
1 Devadatta sacrifices for another ( his Yajamana );' while
will mean ' Devadatta sacrifices for himself.9
SECTION I.
ACTIVE VOICE.
I. GONJUGATIONAL
or
SPECIAL TENSES AND MOODS.
PRESENT, IMPERFECT, IMPERATIVE and POTENTIAL.
§ 384. With reference to the various moods the verbs are
divided into ten conjugational classes by Sanskrit grammarians,
each class being denominated after the root which begins it viz.
(i) Tcrrf* (2) 3?srf?, <3> Sff^rfc (4) f^nV, (5) *rrfo (6).
3*Tft, (7) Wrfifc (*) cfTrit (9) ZFITfS and (10) gnft-
g 385. The roots contained m the first nine classes and a few
of the tenth are primitive roots, while almost all roots of the
.tenth class, the Causals, Desideratives, Frequentatives, Deno-
|minative9, and the roots s<rx, ^, f%*^, q^, qsg[, ^, and ^,,
are comprised under the head of Derivative roots.
§ 380-387 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 241
§ 386. Thwe ten classes may again be conveniently divided
into two groups, the first comprising the 1st, 4th, 6th and 10th
classes, and the second the remaining. In the first the base
ends t« K and remains unchanged throughout-, while in the
second ic does uot end in 3? and is changeable.
I. GROUP 1.
ROOTS WITH. UNCHANGEABLE BASES
( 1st, 4th, 6th and 10th classes ).
§ 387. Terminations: —
Present
Par Atm
S. D. P. S, D. P.
2. fs *r«j «? % 0 ^
Imperfect.
S. D. P. S. D. P.
& ^ *t a
3 ft 3TII aTJ
• *^ "1*^ ^iT^
Imperative.
S. D. P. S. D. P.
2. -* an «
3. 3*
* rTTr^is optionally added in the 2nd and 3rd person singulars
when the Imperative has a Benedict! ve sense.
H. s. a. 16.
242 SANSKBIT GBAMMAB. [ 387-390
Potential.
Par. Atm.
S. D. P. S. D. P.
1. $w fa f* & faf| $nf|
8. 1^
JVbte- — Terminations beginning with vowels may be called
Vowel terminations; those beginning with consonants, con-
sonantal terminations.
Formation of the base of the roots of the first group: —
§ 388. 3T($FTji& added on to the roots of the First or
«9TT^ class* before the terminations. Before this 97 the penulti-
mate short and the final vowel of a root take their Guna
substitute . e, g.
§ 389. q- ( ^77 } is added on to the final of a root of the
Fourth or f^rf% class before the terminations ; the radical vowel
remains unchanged ; e. g. ^-f T%=^+^+f?T=^T^.
§ 390. 3T is added on to the roots of the sixth or ^rf^- class
before which the penultimate vowel remains unchanged, and the
final f 9 7, short or long, ^ *nd =^ are changed to $q^, ^r ,
: I Pan. Ill, 1. 68, 69, T7.
Of about 2200 roots occurring in the Sanskrt language nearly
half ( about 1076 ) belong to the first class.
t Vide § 24.
§ 890-392 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
and f^ respectively; 0. g.
§ 391. Roots of the tenth or ^fc class* add «nr before
the personal terminations. Before grq- ( 1 ) the penultimate
short vowel ( except at ) takes the Guna substitute; and the
final vowel and the penultimate 37 not pros odi ally long, take
their Vriddhi substitute- 0. y.
; but
rfir, &c.
§ 392. (a)f The preceding 3V is lengthened before a conjuga-
tional termination beginning with a semivowel, a nasal or
S^or w; 9. g. HUlffl &c.
( b ) The final 37 is dropped before terminations beginning
with «i; ;nT+3ifrff=5nrf£(T, &c.
1st class.
sft P. A. * to carry. '
Present.
Pan Atm.
1.
2.
*This class contains a few primitive verbs, almost all the
roots belonging to it being derivative; besides, all CausaJs
and some Nominal verbs may be regarded as belonging to
this class.
t srtr *if *& i P&n. vn. a. 101.
244 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 393
Imperfect.
J 393. The augment 3? is prefixed to roots in this tenee.
This 3T is replaced by 3U in the case of roots beginning with a
; this sir forms Vriddhi with an Initial vowel; o. g.
; similarly
(a) When a preposition ( 3TO*T ) is prefixed to a root, the
augment or or 3TT comes between the prep, and the roo s; e. g.
f with sr, 5TTf m
P. ' to know..' A. ' to see. '
2.
S. 3fJ»«ist
*.
2.
3.
Imperative.
H,P. ' to be. '. 55^ A.' to get. '
1.
Pan. VI. 4. 102.
§ 393 "I CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 245
Potential.
f\
*g P. ' to remember.' g^ A ' to rejoice/
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
S.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2. a«j*
3.
4th Clasa.
'. ' to be pleased. ' g^ A ' to fight'
Present.
* Hereafter the optional form in r^ will not be given ag
the student can easily form them by adding H-^ to the base it
be has to express the sense of the Eenedictive.
246 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§393
Potential.
2.
3.
Imperfect
S.
2. ftq
6th Class.
. A. 'to throw.'
P. Pf*«0n*. A.
Potential.
ftftr I^R ftfcr ftWJ
ftta
* For the change of ^ to o^see § 41.
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
§893] CONJUGATION OP VEBBS. 247
10th Class.
^ P. A. ' to steal. '
P. Present. A.
2.
3.
Imperfect.
Par.
Aug.
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
The forms of other roots should be similarly made "p.
248 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. f g 394-395
£ 394. * The ^ ( long ) of a root, penulima*e or final, when
it does not take Guna or Vrddhi, is ehanged to %% , and to g^r
if a labial or ? precedes • and the ^ or 3* is length* ned when ^r
or g^* is followed by a consonant; e. y. 3? 4. P. <to lecom<* old,'
5fnn?r, snftfci;, &c.; & 6. P. T%tf?T, 3T!%^, &c ; here % does
not become long as f%^ is followed by 3T; fTc^ 10. P. A.
§ 395. The penultimate ^, g-, ^ or t? of a root, followed
by ^r or gr^is lengthened when a consonant follows • f e. g, 7^
1. A. to measure, to play, 3$%; similarly y^, ^, ^
all A. and meaning to play, |^ , to act dishonestly, to be
crooked, gq? to faint. ^^ to spread, to forget; \ $r^ to
thunder, to shine., ^, 5^, ^, §| , ^all meaning to kill, s£
*° tr^> 5'<, &°-> a^ Parasin. and belonging to the 1st class,
lengthen thoir penultimate vowel; ife4. P. 3fro^t?T> similarly
, &0-
ROOTS OF THE 1ST, 4TH, 6TH, AND 10TH CLASSES
WHICH FORM THEIE BASES IBREGULARLY.
1st class ( «gr^: X
protect,'
heat/
o go/
qO£ 'to praise ' <mwr?n but TOfr
wh n it means *to barter or
transact business to bet.'
* 3vT?5r?fr: I ^T?^: I Pan. VII. I. 100, I. 1. 51.
Pan. VII. 2. 77.
t ' f leJ ^ ' I l^f^TRT^ ^T^?qwnn f^r fi^: ^t^ ^i& I Sid. Kan,
t 5i^MHfi^q(opTfi»r 3TPT: I Pan. III. 28. These roots insert
before ST. The vowel of 5^ takes Gupa subsiituio before
this 3TR.
§ 395 ]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
249
U. ' to conceal, to keep
•ecret/
A. * to
f P. ' to spit/
with 3TT ' to sip/
t Bnfi *<*T*T A. < to shine/
II i'. ^to pervade.' ^
P. ' to roam
*>H P. 't
3* P. A« to desire,'
. 'to kill
P. ' to
i to reproach^ ' • to pity> '
H^ ^[ P. < to go/ *T
q^ P. * to restrain
«H $ P. 'to drink, '
jry P. ' to smell, '
VlTf P. ' to blow/
P. ' to stand/
P. ' to think/
P. * to give/
to see/
P. < to go '
ntf : I Pan. VI. 4. 89. The penultimate a; of 3f is
lengthened in the Special Tenses and before a strong teimination
beginning with la vowel
1 feafefi^l ftfi I Pan. VII. 3 75. anfe =^T fi?T ^ESIT^ Vart.
These roota lengthen tueir vowel in the Special Tenses.
I. 1. 70. These roots
take the 7 of the 4in class optionally in the Special Tenses.
§ faf«rfTJc% ^ | atft g|q: , Pan. Ill 1 87. VJ. 4 48. Tne roots
ft^and ^u^ substitute 3T for their ^and then add the augment
3- ( before which the ^ is dropped ). These are then conjugated
like roots 01 the 5th class.
II 3?^ and ?w when it means to make thin, belong to the 5th
•C;",ss optionally.
-t & ^ \ see 44. Pan. VII. 3. 77.
i: [ Pan. VII. 3. 78.
250 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 895-397
P. < to run,'
P- (*A.) ' to perish,'
to perish,&c.?5fnffit
P. A. to dye,
P. to be clean,
5f «r A. to yawn,
cpt A. to be adequate,
P. to adhere, ^RrfrT. oJf^ A. to blush, ^jsn
A. to embrace, ^3T%. ^rf^ P. * to be ready '
396. The following seven roots form their bases like the
Desiderative in the senses indicated. These are: — f^g; to
administer medioine, to treat as a patient f%fi^frfif-?T» 3^to
censure, ^mfr; f^^[ to bear, to forgive, farf*$i%; «*\J to abhor,
to act loathsomely, JTMrCT^; SJT^ to make straight, ^T^tfrfS^j
reason, to think, ritafa^-, *ff^ to sharpen, ^ff^rhnR ft- But
to desire %r|ftli to dwell, %rf*TfflJ 5fT^[ to. cut sp^nf^-^f. &c.
§ 397 There are a few roots which add a penultimate
nasal in tno Special Tenses and Moods necessarily; 0. g.
cut f*F^!%, SUIT t o go at^W, Rg^to roll into a ball fitrgrt,
purify, to go §ja^ &c; and a few more which do so optionally;
*• 9' S^ to be firm «f5f?f-*zfyi?l>$ w^r or i^-d to go
A. to hum iff 5^, £«!&; J£^ P. to roar infra1, 4^fd RBd others
less important.
4th Glass ( f^T^T ).
«K^ P. ' to go ' ff^vqfif. I ^(tP- 'to be pacific'
srat A. « to be born ' znrfx. hrar P. ' to desire '
* 5T^: 1%rT: I Pan. I. 3. 60. ^ is Atm. in the Special Tenses.
t ^SRTsreratf 5TIT I T§T« P. VI. 4. 25-26. These roots drop
their nasal in the Special Tenses.
t 5T»Ti»?^f ^|* wft \ Pan. VII. 3. 94. Of these VR is given
under
§ 3W7-398 ] CONJUGATION OP VERBS.
251
^P. 'to be intoxicated'
P. ' to endeavour '
TfrfrT; but when followed by
a preposition except ^ it
belongs to the 4th class
P. 'to pacify' ^ii-qfff. alone;
P. 'to be wearied' vnmfa. mj^qfa only.
P. 'to endure' $ntqfet. ^ft* P. 'to sharpen'
' to be weary ' ^fFqrft, ^t P. 'to rut' &5nff.
P. (to put an end to'
P. 'to cut' trfir.
'to fall'
P. A. 'to colour'
P. ' to be unctuous '
'to strike, to pierce'
§ 398. The following roots belong to the 1st and the 4th
classes: — WTST , v^jfsr ( ^ra ), -^j 37 all meaning to shine, ^V
to fly, all A. 3^ , ^^ , ^ to fear, g^, ^ to spit, f^ to be
pleased, Wfi^ to embrace, ^^ to be angry or vexed
rfPJ.C 1 ) to turn out auspiciously, ( 4 ) to succeed, all Par., ^qg,
1. A. 4. P. to bear, %r-£-^( ^ ) to full, ^33^ to be dyed,
3T«^ to curse, gtr 1 . P. 4. A. to know, ^^ 1. P. to bewail,
4 P. A. to be afflicted, a^,^! A., 4. P. andf?^4. P. to
perspire, 1 A. to be anointed.
6th Class (
; P. 'to cut'
P. with s<r or
tfH or JrfifR^f.
P. to suffer pain
P. to swaUow
P. to cut
. to ask
P. A. to
P. to bathe
P. to cut
P. to deceive
P. to go
P. to go
U. to release
to anoint
T: ^f%iP&n. 8. 71. Theee four roots drop their
before q\
252 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 398-399
U. to bresk or cnt g*qft-?T I ffl^ U. to sprinkle ftaaf?!-
U. to obtain ftr-^t | flP. to form
§ 399. ( a ) The following roots belong optionally to the 1st
and 6& Glasses:- ^^ 1. P. 6. U. to pi ugb, to draw, 5^!. A.
to return, 6. P. to Str.ke against, 50^!. A. 6. P. to roll, to whirl;
1. A. te take, to r ceive, ^ 1. A. 6. P. to rtel, whirl round,
move to and fro, |g^ 1. P. to divide, 6. P. to «nvelope,^g,
^wP. to kill ^ P. to sit down, fw^P. 1. to sprinkle, 6 •
t0 open the ey<s, fc? p. 1. to stir, to chnrn, 6 to cover, to
adhere, g^ 1. A. to cheat, 6 U. to release, to leave &c.
( I ) The following roots belong to the 4th as well as to
the 6th das*:— ujr? 4 P. 6. U. to throw, 5^ 4. P. to
confound, C. U. to take away, ^yj P. 4. to covet, to be
pcrplexe , 6 A. to p rplex, ^^4 A. to let loose, to send
forth, 4, 6. P to create.
10th Class (!*T<prO
ttf P. to ' shake ' \j^?rf>r sft P-. 'to pi ase >
*Thia root belongs to the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 7 h closes, with
different senses. All these are given in the following couplet.
f The following stanza fiom the •' Kavirahasya ' gives the
various classes to which this root belongs: —
i^ n
The^e opiional forms are according to $H*ȣPH an^ others
§ 400-401 CONJUGATION or VERBS. 253
§ 400. The following roots of the tOth olaas p eserye their
vowel unchapgf d ; «r^ to sin, ^q; to tell, $|T to send, to pass.
ITOI; to count, if$£ U. to filter, A. to throw, ^r to choose or
seek, to get, VT«J to souud, 33 19 honour, ^ to o >mpose, ^
to taste, ?^ to forsake qt^to speak ill of, deceive, ?£ to scream,
<r? to weave, ( but <rr£?ft when it means to tear &c. ), *ft^
to thunder, ij^r to sound, qr^to go, qjw to cou t*t, f^ to sound,
<r^A. to go, afojr to divide, j^toaeparao, &H o shine,
to bore, &Z to conceal, ^F^to cheat, q^g to dwell, »n^ or
to be weak or lax, 5*13 to give, to spend, *fa to desire, ^j
to seek, ^^to bear, ^55 to pity, to be weak, ^*r, gtrr to converse
with, us A. to take ( aho irrgtrift when cau. of»r^) ig^A.
to astonish, to deceive, 5^ to bind or etri g together, *<§^
to become manifest. HJ^" to make happy, and others less common.
§401. Some roots of the 10th class exclusively take the
/\
Atmant'pacU t. e. even when the fruit of the action expressed by
them does not accrue to the agent. These are: — a^tr to request, to
desire, ^f to astonish, to deceive, f^|^ to be conscious of,
to tninfc, 3f5T^to bite; ^ ( or ^ according to some ) to see,
to bite, ^or fi^to accumulate, ^7^ to support a family, ^F5T
to counsel secretly, ^ to search^ to hunt, to seek. $£$r to take,
to string together, jf^ and *r?!^ to reprove, ifftj and
to injure, to hurt, f%c^r to kill ( f^«^ according to some ),
to measure, <fff^ to desire, ^0^ to contract, 5^ to fill, *jw
to fenr? ^r<^to praise, ijvx to worship, ^^ to guess, irjr to strike,
^HT to look at, to inspect, <£r^ to reproach, 3"f ( according
to some g££ ) to cut, ifcT to drop down, ^r^to see, to expound,
ijp^ to abstain from giving, to muddle ^ to cut. tfa-xi to
deceive, fw to have the power of generation, to be eminent,
254 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 401-403
^ to gratify, f^«j to bewail, ^ to know, fq^ to know, to be con-
scious of, fl<£ to stop, 3 to censure, and ^r^ to smile improperly.
§ 402. The following roots belong to the 1st and the
10th classes:—
3P^ , $^[ to unite, to restrain, 3^ to worship, f j; to throw,
5ft to melt 3^ to abandon, to avoid, ^ to coyer, ^r, f^r to grow
old, fixf to separate, to join, f^rq^ to leave a residue, <fr to burn,
^to be pleased or satisfied, fjr^ to kindle, ^q;, qq^ gqr^ to
kindle, ^ to fear, SH£ to release, to kill, jfr to go, jrwr^ to
string together, $n^ , ^7^ to endure, 3j| to kill, ff^ to kill,
3l£ to worship, ^rf with sff to go, to assail, gro to purify, to
cleanse, 37? to cover, ^^ to satisfy, to guess, to kill, sft to
jplease, 9F^, gro. to compose, arrai/ge, 3ir^ to obtain, ^ to
confide, to stretch, ^q; to confide, to hurt, q% to infonn, q^
to speak, in^[ to honour, worship, 79; A. to obtain ( trtffr also
according to some ), tf£ to censure, yrr^ to seek, B^Q^ to grieve,
to remember with regret, ^r to clean, ^ to endure, ^ to
brave, to overcome, «r^ to burt> to ^uier f^g- 10 A. 1. P. to
-torment, to beg, 5^ to aver, and some others.
II. GROUP 11.
ROOTS WITH CHANGEABLE
( 2nd, 3rd, 5th, 7th, 8th, cmd 9th Classes. )
§ 408. Terminations:—
Parasmaipada.
The terminations of the Present, the Imperfect and the
Imperative an the same as these c£ the first group, the termi-
§ 408-404 ] CONJUGATION OP VKBBS. 255
nation of the 2nd per. sing, of the Imperative is ft. The ter-
minations of the Potential are as follow: —
2. ^ ITcWL
3.
Atmanepada.
Present Imperfect
35 flV 5 ^ft
Imperative Potential
1. tfc 3TT^ 3?[fl1> The same as those given
2. ^ B?T*nJ^ ^^ f°r the fir86 group.
O L-11T -
§ 404. The base of the roots of the 2nd group of Oon-
jugationl classes undergoes many modifications with regard
to which the terminations are divided into sets, one set
'« called < strong', the other < weak.' The base taking the
strong terminations may be calld ' The strong base;' and that
taking the weak ones ' The weak base'.
( a ) The strong terminations are: —
The singulars of all persons of the Present and the Imper-
fect, the third person singular and all numbers of the first
person of the Imperative , in the Parasmaipada, and all
numbers of the first person of the Imperative in the
Atmanepada;
( b ) The rest are weak.
256 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 405-409
§ 405. Before strong terminations the penultimate short and
the final vowel of the base take their Guna substitute.
Fifth, Eighth and Ninth classes
§ 406. * 3 and 7 are added on to the roots of the 5th and
8th classes respectively before the terminations.
§ 407 The final 3- of the base is optionally dropped
before gr^and j^if it be not preceded by a conjunct consonant.
It is changed to 3^ before a weak termination beginning with a
vowel, if precede 1 bj a conjunct consonant aud to 3; in other
cases. The ffr of the 1 input a ive 2nd per. sing, is dropped after
31 not preceded by a conjunct consonant.
§ 408. f In the ninth class ;TT is inserted between the root
and the terminations *fr becomes ^ before the weak terminations
beginning with a vovel, and «ft before the weak terminations
beginning with a consonant.
§409. (a) The penultimate nasal of a root is dropped
before*! &c. as frenft; irs^far:. JT«^R: &c. from jr?xy • to
put together.
( b ) I\ the case of roots ending in a consonant, the impera-
tive second person singular termination is 3jr«f instead of
T$j as g^TT1! fr°m 9^ .' to steal '.
Paradigms.
5th Class.
g P. A. ' to press out juice/ &c.
P. Present. • A.
2.
3.
: i ffHiftf»o«r; ar: i Pan. III. 1. 73. 79.
j$m P4n. III. 1. 81.
§ 409 ] CONJUGATION or VERBS. 257
Imperfect.
P. A.
2.
3.
Imperative
2 33
Potential.
2.
3. ._
^TT^P. 'to accomplish.' 3?^ A. ' to pervade/
Present.
1.
2.
3.
Imperfect.
2.
3.
Imperative
1.
2.
H. 8. G. 17
258 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 409
Potential.
1. ST^TH. *n*39ra 31*3*11*
2.
3.
2.
3,
8th Class.
cR(P. A. 'to stretch.'
JP. Present.
3.
Potential.
l.
^35:
§ 410 ] CONJUGATION OF VBBBS.
§ 410. Irregular base: — ff. P. A. 'to do' is changed to ^
before the strong, and ^r before the weak terminations. The
«• of the base is dropped before * and n.
Present.
P. A.
1. 3*ifa 3%' *&'• 3^
S.«8
Imperfect
2.
3.
Imperative
3.
Potential.
i. iNH ffe f ^
2.
3.
9th Class.
^t. P. A. ' to buy. '
P re^n*.
P. A.
3.
260 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [ § 410-142
Inperjeet.
Imperative.
.
2.
3.
2.
3.
Potential
I
.
3.
^IW^P. 'to obstruct/ or 'to stop/
Present. Imperfect.
3. *tf*tl Kt
Imperative. Potential.
1.
2.
3.
IBBEOTJLAB SPECIAL BASES OF THE NINTH CLASS.
§ 411. In the case of the root gp^ the ^ of ^r is not changed
£ 412. The roots 37 ' to know ' and TUT ' to become old '
m
§ 412-416 ] CONJUGATION OP VKBBS. 261
assume the forms 3fT and f3f respectively; as
§ 413. The ^ of 5^ is changed to ^ as
T*r^TW> &c. Imperf 1st. pors.
§ 414. The roots ft, *T, 3?ft, &, *, *» *, % f
» T> ^ and f have tlieir finals 8llorkeIXfld
, tfr, and rffr optionally in the Special Tenses; as
§ 415 The roots ^ * to go by leaps, to raise, ' S|P£ < to
obstruct, ' ^wr ' to stop, ' ^i^ and ?§&£ l to obstruct ' belong
to the 5th and 9th classes; as ^pfrfif , ^ftft, ^ftl^, ^3^, &c'
Second, Third and Seventh Classes.
§ 416. Special rules of Sandhi of the finals of roots and
the initial letters of terminations: —
( 1 ) The ending ^ of a root takes its Vriddhi substitute
when followed by a consonantal strong termination ; as g-f
( 2 ) The final f or 7. short or long, of a root is changed
to f^ or 7^ before a vowel weak termination.
( S ) The ending ^ of roots is changed to ^ when followed
by any consonant, except a nasal or a semivowel, or by nothing;
and that of roots beginning with ^ to q; under the same circum-
stances.
( 4 ) The initial ^ or ^ of a termination is changed to \j
after a soft aspirate ( 4th letter of a class ).
( 6 ) ^ or ^ followed by 5 is changed to ^.
262 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 416-420
( 6 ) ^ and «j when followed By a consonant are ' changed to
the nasal of the class to which the following consonant belongs,
and to an anuirara when followed by sj, q^ , ?r or 5.
( 7 ) The ending f of a root, short or long, not preceded by
a conjunct consonant is changed to q^ before vowel weak termi-
nations, when the base consists ef more than one syllable.
( 8 ) The ending % of a root is optionally changed to ^r or
Visarga in the Imperfect second pers. sing, and the ending
^ to gf or ^ before the termination ^ and optionally before tr.
( 9 ) When a conjunct consonant having ^ or ^ for its
first member is at the end of a word or is followed by a
consonant except a nasal or a semivowel, the ^ or ^ is
dropped.
N. B.— The usual Sandhi rules t. e. those given in the 2nd
and 3rd Chapters should be observed.
§ 417. ( 1 ) * The second person sing, termination of the
Parasm. Imperative is ft when the base ends in any consonant
except a nasal or a semivowel; also in the case cl the root §•
8 P. < to sacrifice. '
§ 418. The ^ and ^ of the Imperfect 2nd and 3rd per.
sing, are dropped after a consonant.
Second ( or s?3Tf$ ) Class.
§ 419. In this class the terminations are directly added to
the root.
§ 420. In the case of roots ending in 3ft, the terminations
of the third person plural of the Imperfect is optionally
. VI. 4. 101.
§ 420-421 ] CONJUGATION OF VEBBS.
203
Paradigms.
P. ' to go. '
Present.
Imperfect.
Imperative.
Potential.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Conjugate aimilwrly ^iTT P. ' to tell, ' ^ P. * to cut, ' <nP. 'to
protect,7 !TT P- 'to fill,' e^r P. ' to eat/ ar P. ' to fly, *i P. • to
shine/ m ' to measure, *r ' to give/ 5JT ' to give or take, ' *)
6 to blow, ' iff « to cook r add ^r < to bathe '.
§ 421. In order to exemplify the rules given under
§ § 416-418 we will give the forms of the regular verbs ^r, 3,
Preunt.
P. ' to go '
Imperfect.
according to some )
264 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 421
Imperative. Potential.
1.
g P ' to praise '
Present. Imperfect.
I.'
2.
3.
Imperative. Potential.
1.
2.
3
Conjugate similarly ^ P. ' to sound, ' ^ P. * to seize, ' $qr
P. * to sharpen/ 5 P. « to attack, 3 P. * to join, ' 5 P. « to
possess supremacy, ' and ^j ' to drop out, to distil. '
P. ' to awake. '
Imperfect.
2.
3.
Imperative. Potential.
i.
2.
a
* See TOU* p. 272,
§ 421 ] CONJUGATION OF VEBBS. 266
&; A. 'to go.'
Present. Imperfect.
- «v <C-v SC*s ^ ,s,
1. V ^t W <£K
o ^5f 5..^ ^r^( 2^Ji
2» 1^ fW ^=q v$\:
3. ^ !<% |^T ^
Imperative, Potential.
1. 5^ tv^t[ l^i^ I'fl'r I'fl^fl |(iflf|
L- 'to speak.
Present. Imperfect.
Potential.
3.
^^ A. 'to go.'
Imperfect.
266 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 421
Imperative. Potential.
3.
Imperative.
1.
2.
2-TCT
. Ti^
J5 P. A. 'to milk.'
Present.
P. A,
1. ^% 55:
2. '<Jrier* ^:
Imperfect.
Potential.
2. pfl: pn^W pTR, |fl^T:
f^g; to be similarly oojngated ; f and ^ being substituted for
^ and aft respectively^
* For the change of ^ to «rx, vide § 95.
§421]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
267
2.
3.
1.
1.
2.
3. S
1.
2.
3.
Imperative.
P. A. ' to lick.
Present.
Imperfect,
Potential.
Potential.
&c. &c. &c. &c. &c. &c.
fto^ A. * 'to Purify '
Present.
* f?M%, i%, i^L, f3T, 153^, 5^ all A. should be similarly
conjugated.
268 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. L § 421-423
IRREGULAR BASES.
Many of the roots of the 2nd class are of irregular
conjugation. We will treat of them in alphabetical order.
§ 422. 3^ P. 'to eat' forms the 2 and 3 sing. Imperf. as
and 3ir^ respectively. In other respects it is regular.
Present. Imperfect.
2. offer 3R*i: 3K3T 2.
3. arfa: am: 3T^cI 3.
Imperative. Potentia*.
2. Sift 3T^ 9ffi 2.
3. sr 9Rini 3^3 3.
§ 423. 3ft P. < to breathe, ' srac « to eat, ' ^ P. « to weep, '
P. ( to sigh ' and ^ P. ' to sleep., ' insert the augment
f between their final and the terminations beginniog with
any consonant except *r; in the case of 2 and 8 sing. Imperf.
they insert f or 3f; e, g.
' P. to breathe. '
Present. Imperfect.
2.
3.
Imperative. Potential.
•2.
3.
§ 428-424 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
269
Conjugate ^, >\^ and ^ similarly ; as **^ 3 sing. Pre.,
:-<i: 2. sing. Imperf. ; a^rft^-q^ 3 sing. Imperf.; SW<rrr%
1. sing. Imp. prftft 2 siag- Imp.} W«rn^ 1. sing. Pot.; &c.
>*f%fa 3. sing. Pre, : arerff:-*: 2 sing. Imperf ..
sing. Imperf.; Ajqift 1. sing. Imp. *a1%ft 2. sing. Imp.
3. sing. Imp.. *wm. 1- sing. Pot., &c., ftftfw
Pre-; 3Tft^*l'- sing. Imperf. 3?^:-^, 5 iing. Imperf.
^fRT-^ 3. sing. Imperf.; ft^Tft 1. sing. Imp. ^fitffc 2. sing.
Imp. ^ 3. sing. Imp.; ^qm 1. «ing- Pot. &o.
§ 424. gf3( P. ( A.* rare ) 'to be' — drops its sr before
weak terminations and ^ before a termination beginning with
^ and &r. Before 2 and 3 Imperf. it takes the augment f ,
It is irregular in many respects.
Present.
P.
1.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
A.
\ «ft
w
Imperfect.
Imperative.
* Sf^ia Atmanepadi in a few cases. Cf. Bhattikavya II.
35 ' 3T^r o^f^rT 3 qRlW «R: ' &c. where it implies *nfcrft£lT or
an exchange of duty.
270 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB [ § 424-426
Potential.
2.
3.
§ 425. "an^ A. 'to sit — also drops its ^ before ^r —
Present. Imperfect.
2.
3. sn^i an^ 3TRra
Imperative. Potential.
1.
2.
3.
Conjugate eT^[ A. * to dress ' similarly.
§ 426. Thef of the root 5 P.* /to go' is changed
before a weak vowel termination; qrfjr ^: ?yf?^ 3 pers. Pre.;
g^Tq^^^riT 1st Pers. Imperf.; ^: 2 eing. Imperf.; aTOTR>
ff|, irg 1. 2. 3. sings. Imp. zr^ 3. pi. Imp.
f with &fa A. f 'to study.7 &c. is regularly conjugated ; a&
* |P. * to go ' is conjugated regularly like
3rd Pers. Pre.; |% 2 sing. Imp. $37$ 3. plural. Imp.
f f With arRr P. 'to remember' should be conjugated like f ,
3?icnri% 3rd pi. Pre. Some think that it is to be conjugated like
f in the Non-conjugation&l tenses only. According to them the
third pers. pin. will be 3T*fap%. The line of Bhaf ti 'frtft?rtt
III. IS. &c. is quoted hi support of this opinion.
TR I Sid. Ran.
§ 426-428 ] CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 271
Pretent. Imperfect.
3.
Imperative. Potential.
3.
§ 427. J^A. * to praise, y and 53^ A. ' to rule ' have an
added to them before terminations beginning with ^ or n
except that of the Imperf. 2. plu.
flv A»
Present Imperfect.
1.3 %ft
Imperative. Potential.
2. ffl^
be similarly conjugated; J
1. sing. Imperf. ^T: 2. sing. Imperf. ^ 3. sing.
Imperf. q1^^ 2 pi. Imperf.; £S I. sing. Inly. Jf^r^^
2. pi. Imp. f^ft<T 3. sing. Pot. &o.
§428 w£ P. A. 'to coverr— substitutes Vriddhi ft)F its g-
optionally before consonantal strong terminations except those
of the 2nd and 3rd sing. Imperf.
272 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§428-429
Prawn*.
P. A.
2.
3.
1. s^iqi^ ajt*jqf
2. 3?|qf:
3. sJt'n
Imperativ
1. 3?fefR «*«|c(iq
2. 3j§f^
3. OTTg-SJ'ffg
Potential
1.
2.
3.
S 42y ^r^, P. ' to shine/— ^^T^ > ^[ > ^TO, ^3T and
^rn^ drop the ^ of the 3rd pers. plu. termination when added
to them. In the Imperf. they take gr^ as 3. pi. termination.
Imp. ^ sing, of ^^ng is
. Paradigms.
Present Imperfect.
2.
3.
§ 429-430 J CONJUQITION OF VERBS.
1. "^flrft
2.
3.
P. — see am and
above: —
Paradigms
Present
Imperfect
2.
3.
1. ^
Imperative.
Potential.
3.
| 430. sffrr P. ' to be podr '—drops ita an fcefore -weak
termiaationa beginning with a Vfrwel and changes it to f before
those with an initial consonant.
Paradigms.
Present.
Imperfect.
1. tffelfo
2. *feTT%
3.
Prtentiul-
M S.O. 18
274 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 430.432
3.
§481. ff^P. A. < to hate *— takes g-^ optionally in the
Imperf. 3. pi. Par.
Present.
2.5% 155: ii® fg%
Imperfect.
i.
2.
3.
- ---^ -%
Imperative.
l.'^nft l^ra S^R
2. f^% Q[«*t. ffe
Potential.
1.
2.
3.
| 432. 5 P. A. « to speak '—takes the augment f before
consonantal strong terminations.
Present.
1.
§ 432-433 ] CONJUGATION or VEBBS. 275
f«r:-3n5$: 1*
3.
•V
Imperfect.
2.
»\ " "\
3. 3T5r*fH afljflw ^g^i
Imperative.
3.
<•% •** — •
Potential
1.
2.
g 435. ^ P. ' to cleanse ' substitutes Vrddhi for its vowel
necessarily before strong terminations and optionally before
vowel weak terminations.
Imperfect.
2.
3.
Imperative. Potentiat.
276 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 433-43*
2.
3.
§ 434. w^P. ' to speak'— is deficient in the 3 plu. Pre,
according to some in the whole plural, and according to others-
in all the third person plurals.*
Present Imperfect.
L ifa TO:
2.
Imperative, Potential.
2.
3.
— § 4S5' ^5^ P- ' *° w*3^ ' — changes its ^ to ^ before weak
terminations.
Present. Imperfect.
>.'«•
3. m
Imperatire Potential.
2.
&*5
(Sid. Kan).
5 4M-487 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 277
§ 486. ft^'to know' takes optionally the termination* of
the Perfect in the Present Tenee. Its Imperative forms are
optionally made np by adding ?inr to it and then appending the
forms of the Imperative of fr.
Praent. Imperfect.
2.
3.^% ftfl:-ft53: fi
Inperatiie.
2. ftft
3 .^j
2.
3.
§ 437. SflTRf P- *to govern, to teach,' &c. — changes its vow«l
to f before consonantal weak terminations. See ^t|5Tf^ also p. 2V 2.
Present. Imperfect
1. sarfin
2. snfer
3. ?m%
Imperative.
with 3n A. should be conjugated 1 iKe
378 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [§437-440
2.
3.
§438. sft A. < to lie down' guoates its vowel before all
terminations and prefixes qr to the termination of the third pers.
pi. except that of the Potential.
Present. Imperfect.
2.«*
£ K&
O» W
Imperative. Potential.
2.
3.
§ 439. *? A. 'to give birth to' — does not change its vowel
to Guna before strong terminations.
Present. . Impttfsct.
Imperative. Potential.
3.
§ 440. *£ P. A. <to praise,' 5 P. 'to grow' and ^ 'to sound'
have f optionally prefixed to the consonantal terminations. '
§ ] 440 CONJUGATION OP VERBS.
*\
V P A
Present.
Par. A tin.
3. *ma
Imperfect
1 I I M _. • •
Imperative
2. ^31^
Potential.
^*^
2. ^Ift
Z80 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 440-441
2,
3.
Conjugate similarly 5 and *>„
§ 441. ^ P. A. < to kiir—drops its sj bcfere a weak termi-
nation, beginning with any consonant except a nasal or a semi
vowel, and it« 3f before a vowel termination, the F then chang-
ing to 9. The Imp. 2 sing, is
i|5*P. 'to kill, to go
P re tent. Imperfect.
s.
Imperative. Potential.
1.
3.
fpf * Atm.
Preteiii. Imperfect.
This root is used in the A. in certain cases
5 441-444 J CONJUGATION OF VEBBB. 281
Imperative. Potential.
O TU
3.
§ 442 |gf A. Ho take away'
N9
Present.
Imperfect.
Imperative.
Potential.
2.
3.
THIRD OB
CLASS.
§ 443. (a ) The base is formed by reduplication of the root.
( b ) The third personal plural termination loses its sj.
(c) The Imperfect third person plural termination is
( P. ). before which the final arr of coots is dropped and the
final f , ^r and 3^, short or long, are guftated.
Hules of Reduplication: —
§ 444. The first vowel of a root together with the initial
consonant, if any, is reduplicated t. e. doubled- as q^
, &c. after reduplication. •
282 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 444-44 &
Note — The first syllable of a reduplicated root is called 'the
reduplicative syllable ; e..g. the first q- in tnrg;, or first g- in ;jgre»
§ 445. If a conjunct consonant begins a root, the first con-
sonant only with the following vowel is reduplicated* e.g.
(a) If the first member of a conjunct consonant, however, be a
sibilant (si,^or^r) and the second a hard consonant, the
hard consonant is reduplicated: f *>j-q?<T.iJ , yq^-;^A:j<lr but
§ 446. A radical aspirate ( 2nd or 4th letter of a class ) is
changed to its corresponding unaspirate in the reduplicative
syllable; as %^-f%f^ , g-<£J, ^IS^, &c.
§ 447. The guttural of the reduplicative syllable is changed
to the corresponding palatal ( subject to the above rule ) and
^to ^. e. g. $^-3?^-^re^, ^53[-^^ra[-^^=;gT^, |-^5 &c.
§ 448. A radical long vowel becomes short and ^ is changed
to H in the reduplicative syllable ; as irr-^TTj ^T-R^V, ^-^^ &c.
§ 449. The penultimate cr or cr and 3fr or aft become f and
3- respectively in the reduplicative syllable ;
Paradigms.
% P. * to know. '
Present. Imperfect.
§ 449-451 J CONJUGATION OF VEBB8. 283
Imperative. Potential.
1.
2.
3.
f P. ' to sacrifice.
Present. Imperfect.
2.
3. __
i. Potential.
^[ P. c to be ashamed. '
Present Imperfect.
3.
Imperative
1.
2. ftsiii ftsfeH
3.
IRREGULAR BASES: —
§ 450 The vowel of the roots m, fT ' to go ' $, f or ^ 'to.fill'
and ^ is changed to f in the reduplicative syllable
§451. The f of the reduplicative syllable of f^, f^r and
284 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 451-464
far, takes it* Guna substitute before all terminations and the
radical £ is not gapated before vowel strong terminations.
§ 452. ^T and vq-f drop their arr after rednplication before
weak terminations; ^becomes ^T before ?j; , tsr, cf and *r. The
Par. Imperuti vt> 2 per. singulars are ~^ff and ^rf^ respectively.
§ 453. *ft optionally shortens its vowel before consonantal
weak terminations.
( a ) jrr and 51 ' to go r assume the forms fti^ and f*ffT before
vowel ^erminatioDS and fifrfr <JL"d fjr^r before consonantal ter-
minations.
§ 454. gr * to abandon ' assumes the forms irfg- or ^ff before
consonantal weak terminations except in the Pot. and »fpr before
vowel terminations and those of the Pot. The Imp. 2 sing.
forms are oT 5T and
Paradigms.
35 Par. ' to go. '
Present. Imperfect.
2.
3.
Imperative. Potential.
1.
2.
3.
>sn P. A. ' to place, to hold. '
Preeent.
1.
454 CONJUGATION OF VERBS 285
2.
3.
Imperfect.
1.
2.
3.
Imperative.
2.
5.
PflMnfta/.
1.
9.
3.
aj is similarly conjugated. The forma of 57 will be obtained
by changing v;r to qr wherever it occurs.
P. A. ' to cleanse. *
Present.
3.
Imperfect.
286 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB [.§454
Imperative.
2.
3.
Potential.
1.
3.*
Conjugate f^ P- A. similarly. ..
2 P^ to fill, to protect/
Present. Imperfect.
1, ftqfir
3..ftqf8 I%T: fqsifcr
• Imperative. Potential.
1.
2.
3.
f.P. 'top^tect, to fill/
Present. Imperfect.
2. iqqf^ fqq4: f^rf atfqq:
* See § 394.
§ 454 ] CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 287
Imperative. Potential.
1. ITOlfa
2.
3.
*ft P. ' to fear. ?
Imperfect.
2. fWift
3 fwft
Imperative. Potential.
1. ft*WTft ftw^ • 13*RUT
3.
*£. P. A. s to hold; to maintain.
Pretent.
1. ft^m ira: mR: ft& i&A
2. ftw ft^-T: l^JST ft*i^ ' I%H'4
/mpcr/^cf.
288 SANSKRIT GRAMMAK. [ § 454
3.
Imperative.
2.
3.
Potential.
1.
3.
HT A. ' to measure, to sound. '
Present. Imperfect
1. fift fifrfal ft*/l*f^ 9TTflfR
2.
3.
Imperative. Potential.
2. wfi5^ . fitersnn fojiNsp^ ftjfi^n*
3.
. A. • to pervade. '
§ 464 ] CONJUGATION OP VBBBS. 189
Imperfect.
3.
1.
Potential.
1
2.
3.
^T P. ' to abandon '
Present. Imperfect.
i.
3.
Imperative. Potential.
i.
2.
3.
TT. fl. O 19
290 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 455*456
Seventh or ^m? Class.
§ 455. In this class the base is formed by inserting ?r bet-
ween the radical vowel and the final consonant before the strong
and «j before the weak termii*ations.
§ 456. ( a ) The original nasal of a root is dropped.
( b ) In the case of the root ar^ , ^ is changed to % before
consonantal strong terminations.
Paradigms.
3T$ P. f to anoint/ &c.
~x
Present. Imperfect.
2.
3.
2.
3.
I operative. Potential.
1. «H^iiPi BR^TR
3.
A. ' to anoint, ' &c.
Present. Imperfect.
Imperative. . Potential.
* Also f^, ^^:, ^g^ f?E^> |^n^^ &c. See § 20 ( a )
§456]
CONJUeATION OP VBBB8
391
SP[ P. A. ' to pound. '
Present.
3.
Imperfect.
Imperative.
1.
2.
3.
1.
3.
Potential.
P. A. to break, 3*3- P. to be wet, %^ A. to suffer pain,
P. A. to cnt, ^ P. A. to shine, to play; ^g; P, to spin, to
surround; ^ P, A. to kill, to disregard; and %^ P. A. to
know, to consider, should be similarly conjugated. g7ff% 3rd.
Pro. of gR ; ^orf?r 3 sing. Pre. of ff^, &c.
P. ' to kill. '
Present.
Imperfect.
1.
292 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [ § 456
2.
3.
Imperative. Potential.
3.
ftr P. ' to grind. '
Present. Imperfect.
1. ffaft? fW'. f%T:
2. fi«n% fife; fte
3. ffafe ffe: ff^f^cl
Imperative, Potential.
2.
3. TOg ffeH, fi^ fif«2IRl.
%^ ' to distinguish ' should be similarly conjugated.
3^. P. A. ' to join.
Present.
\ . g^ir gp5(: 333*: gir
2.
3
Imperfect.
5<5«]
•CONJUGATION OF
Imperative.
293
1.
3. 3^ 3f 11
Potential.
.3. 35391^
Conjugate similarly 7*57^ P- ' to brfiak? ' OT p * to eBi°7» '
A . ' to eat/ (%^ P. ' to shake, to ramble/ and fir P ' to avoid. '
P. A. 4 to evacuate
Imperfect.
Imperative.
Potential.
294 SANSKRIT GBAHMAB. [ § 456
2. fczm
Conjugate similarly ^ P. A. <• to separate/ <fo^ P. ' to
contract ' and is ' to touch.'
. A. 'to obstruct/
Present.
Imperfect.
1. 3W*TO
3. siw^
Imperative.
2. ^B.
3. ^IJ
Potential
1. ^TOl
2. ^aiT:
3. 5*an^
* Or ^«r; &c.; see note • p. 290
§ 456-458 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 295
». ' to kill. '
Present. Imperfect.
2.
3.
Imperative. Potential
1.
2.
II. GENERAL
OB
NON^OONJUGATIONAL TENSES AND MOODS.
§457. In the General Tenses and Moods and in the
formation of verbal derivatives generally, the augment f is
prefixed ( necessarily or optionally ) to terminations begin-
ning with any consonant except q- in the case of certain roots.
Such roots as take the augment f necessarily are called S*t
(^T+f^t. e, with f )•, such as take it optionally are called
Wet ( 3T+TC. ), and those that do not, are called Anit ( 3*3+
^ i. e. without f ).
§ 458. ( a ) Roots of more than one syllable, derived roots
and roots of the 10th class are always Set.
( b ) Oi all monosyllabic roots ending in a vowel those given
in the following couplet ( Karika ) are Set and the rest Anit.
«. e. roots ending in long 37 and long ^, the roots 5,
296 SANSKRIT GBAKMAB. [ § 458
*fc«3,3,S» fa*r» ft, fIX. cl. A. and ? V. cl. P. A.
are Set ( excepting these, all monosyllabic roots ending in a
vowel are Anit).
( e ) Of monosyllabic roots ending in a oonsonant the follow-
ing 102 are Anit\ and the remaining Set.
f^r i
<d) The following roots are Wet:—
* The following qouplet give§ the endings of these roots and
their number in each:— '
The first line gives the ending consonants and thus enables
the students to know at once which root is Set and which is
Anit; 0. g. ^^may be at once known to be a set root as ^ does
not occur in the first line. The second line gives the number
of roots ending in a particular consonant. Thus roots ending
in ^ are ^ t. 0. one ( ^ being the first consonant ) in number,
roots ending in w are ^ i. e. 6, ( ^ being the 6th consonant );
roots ending in ^are ^ t. •. one, in number j and so on,
§ 458-463 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 297
Hi/3 HiJld *ii«t}
'* <r5w **<i<l ii ^ it
In V STTn
11 " n
H H u
II 5 II
§ 459. Roots ending <?, ^, and aft are to be treated as roots
ending in 3ft. Also the roots ft1 6. A. ' to throw ', «fr 9 P. A.
•'to kill/ and gfr 4. A. 'to perish/ before a termination causing
Gopa or Vrddbi- sft 9 P. 4 A. * to adhere or cling to ' changes
ita vowel to srf optionally nnder the same circumstances.
§ 460. Roots of the tenth class preserve their anq^( i. *. 3W
with the final 3? dropped ) with all the changes that the root
undergoes before it in the general tenses.
§ 461. The roots TO, ^, ft^, «r^r, q^c, js*, and ^ preserve
their oonjngational bases optionally.
§ 462. 3^ and g^ substitute for themselves ^ and ^
respectively.
§ 463. Neither Oupa nor Vrddhi is substituted for the vOWel
of a few roots of the 6th class even before a strong termination
•except the 37 of the 1st and 3rd person sing, of the Perfect, the
3TO of the causal and the f of th<? 3rd pers. sing, of the Passive
* These couplets as Well as those bearing on the 2nd variety
of the Aoriat are composed by Mr. Chintamana Atmlram Kelker,
the present learned S'astri at the Poona Training College.
298 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 463-169
Aorist. These are
, , , , , , ,
a *6W more not often to be met with.
§ 464. The root 9^ assumes the forms ^TSJ; and H^ in the
Non-conjugational Tenses.
§ 465. The penultimate ^r of ^^ and 3^ is changed to ^
before a consonantal strong termination in the General Tenses..
§ 466. The intermediate f is weak in the case of the root
f^C 6. A. 7 P.- and optionally so in the case of 3^5.
§ 467. The roots <£\ft 2 A. < to shine > and %^r 2 A. « to go r
do not take Guna or Vrddhi before any termination. They also
drop their final vowel before the intermediate f and 3. ^HST a^so
drops its 3fT before a non-conjugational termination except in
the Desiderative and the Aoriet where it retains it optionally.
THE Two FUTURES AND CONDITIONAL.
( 1 ) First Future ( g^)
ALso called Periphrastic Future.
§ 468. Terminations:—
Paraam. Atm.
1. cfff^T* ^q: 319?: 1. ^
2. cnr% ^I^T: ^n^i 2. 31%
5. ciT 31% 3R: 3. ^T cllf^ 5IR:
§ 469. To these terminations the augment f is prefixed in the
* The forms of the First Future may be derived by adding to
the Nom. sing, of the noun of agency derived with the affix <j the
forms of the Present Tense of the root 3^ * to be' in tne lst
and 2nd persons. The forms of the Nom. are the forms of
the 3rd pen.
§ 469-475 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS,
299
case of Set roots, optionally in the case of Wet roots, and not
fixed at all in that of Anit roots.
§ 470. All these terminations are strong. The final vowel
and the penoltimate short of a root therefore take their Gupa
substitute before these.
§ 471. Anit roots with a penultimate ^ change it to ^ op-
tionally before a strong termination beginning with any con-
sonant except a nasal or a semi-vowel; ^r-^nftRlT, MHIKW &c
P. A. ' to give &c., '
2.
3.
^Rfltt
2.
3.
•ft P. A. « carry '
&c.
: &o.
A.—
IRREGULAR BASES.
§472. The roots f^, *$ I A., ^, fi^ and ^ admit
optionally in the First Future; e. g. 1 sing. i»nHll7n,
§473. cFtf is optionally Parasm. in the First Future and
when so it rejects f : ^qRTTf , <fe<MI$i ^g^l^R 1 sing. &c.
§ 474. The augment f as added to ^ is long in all Non-
conjugational Tenses, except in the Perfect} ir^T(nf?JT 1 sing.
§ 475. The intermediate % is optionally lengthened in the
case of ^ and roots ending in ^? except in the Perfect, the
300 SANSKEIT GBAHHAB. [ § 475-480
^enedictive Atm. and the Aorist Par.
«ing.
§ 476. n if inserted before the ending consonant of the root
before which ^ it dropped, and after the vowel of JT^,
when they are followed by any consonant except a nasal or a
aemi-TOwel; inp &c.; ^CT, srftnTT. The ^ of irf^ is changed
to ^ when not dropped.
§ 477 TT is substituted for 3T^ 1 P. < to go 9 necessarily
before any non-con jugational termination, and optionally
before such as begin with any consonant except $r, %fTT,
) Second Future ( ^ ) »nd ( 3 ) Conditional ( ^
Terminations of the Second Future: —
Parasm. Atmtr*.
1. ^nfif* ^?Rt WW: 1.
2.
3.
§ 479. Terminations of the Conditional:—
JL« ^*ij| ^*4i*i \^n*i *• x*r
ju* 'W* WM*^ ^*in ^2.
O ^^»^F Q
§ 480. ^ is substituted for the ending ^ of a root when fol-
lowed by any non-conjugational termination beginning with 3.
* These terminations, it will be seen, are obtained by adding
those of the Present to fir with its 3T lengthened before initial
*T and *, and dropped before a vowel.
f These are obtained similarly by adding the terminations of
the Imperfect to <*r the usual rules of Sandhi beiag observed.
§ 481-484 ] CONJUGATION or VERBS. 301
§ 481. f is to be prefixed, or not, or optionally to the termi-
nations given above, according as the root is Set or Ami or
Wet. Before the terminations the final vowel and the penulti-
mate short take their Guiia substitute.
§ 482. In the Conditional the augment & 19 prefixed to the
root as in the Imperfect.
Paradigms.
Second Future
5T?55 P. 9 P.I A.
1. 3?pnft SIWK jwnv 1.
2. 3R3J% ww WT 2.
3. TOra siW' wrf^J 3.
Conditional.
1.
2. SRT^T: ww^i QTWRT 2.
3.
IRREGULAR BASKS.
§ 48S. ifH P. 5^[ and Anit roots ending in ^ admit f in the
Second Future and the Conditional; «ro P. ( also that substi-
tuted for f < to go ' and with 3^ * to remember ' ) also admits
it in the Desidorative; nfo«qTW, fH^HW, ^f^nftr, &c. Sec..
Fu. 1. sing, ammwr*, 3T^f^T^, 3*5R*n*, &c. Con. 1. eing.
§484. The roots ^r, a-^, ?vj, 3T>i and ^?| optionally take
Paras maipada terminations in the Second Future, Conditional
and the Desiderative. They reject the auement f whei Parac-
maipadi;
302 SANSKBIT GBAMMAB. [ § 484-487
Fat.
sing. Good.
§ 4«*. The roots ^^ ^, ^r, ^ and ^take f optionally
when followed by an ardhadhatuka ( Non-conjugational tenni-
nation ) beginning with ^ except in the Aorist;
Oond &c
§ 486. In the case of f with arft, in is optionally substu
tnted for f in the Oonditional and the Aorist. ^ is substituted
for the final vowel of the verbs 51 3 P. A. 1 P. *r, ^t»^,^, WT,
WIT, ITT ( substituted for f 2. P and 9 with grft, ) qr, ft, and
^ft before a consonantal weak termination. All terminations
added to ITT substituted for f are weak.
Paradigms.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
§ 487. We give below the first pers. sing, of some of the
roots of more difficult conjugation. The student should find
out the various rules by which he should arrive at them.
Boots. 1st Future. 2nd Future. Conditional.
§487]
CONJUGATION OP VKBBS.
303
ft*
^
Boots. First Future. Sec. Future. Conditional.
•3 2. P.
*
ft
804
Boots
TO to dwell
SANSKBIT GBAMMAB
1st Future. 2nd Future.
[§487
Conditional.
Wet roots:—
IK
31
* For the change of 3T to art in this and in
it.-note p. 317.
§ 487 ] CONJUGATION OF v EBBS. 305
Boots 1st Future 2nd Future Conditional.
d.
* Bee ft. note p. 320. f See ft. note p. 323. J ^ is set in the
2nd Fat. and tim Condi.
H. 8. G. 20,
306 SANSKUIT GRAMMAR. [ § 487-493
P. A. & ^ P. are similarly conjugated.
5ftGicii(*H
similarly conjugated.
(/) THE PERFECT
\/
§488. There are two kinds of Perfect, Reduplicative and
Periphrastic.
§ 489. The Reduplicative Perfect is formed of all mono-
syllabic roots beginning with consonants, as well as of those
beginning with the vowels 37 or a^r, And f 9 ^, and ^ short.
Exceptions — ^gr, g«w, ^r^, 3TT^. These take the Periphrastic
Perfect necessary.
§ 490. The Periphrastic Perfect is formed of all roots
beginning with any vowel except 3? or SH which is naturally or
prosodially long, and of roots of more than one syllable ( roots
of the 10th class and other derivative roots included ). Excep-
tions: — 5)1$ &1>d *fe-oi% which take the Reduplicative Perfects.
§ 491. The roots ^, fi^, 5TTO, >ff, ft, f , ^, and ^ftsrr take
both the perfects.
THE REDUPLICATIVE PERFECT. *
§ 492. The root is reduplicated according to the rules laid
down in §§ 444-449.
§ 493.
Terminations.
Parasmaipada. Atmanepada.
§ 493-497 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
307
tr 31335 3T %
3. 3T 3T^[ 3^ ^
§ 494. The Parasmaipada singular terminations are strong;
the rest weak. Before the strong terminations the penultimate
«hort vowel takes its Gnna substitute. The final vowel and
penultimate at take Vrddhi necessarily in the third and
optionally in the first person singular. In the 2nd person
singular the final vowel takes Guna and the penultimate 3f
remains unchanged.
§ 495. *8peoial rules about the admission of the intermedi-
ate f before the terminations*, *, *, %, *fc jff , «*; see (§457 )i
( a ) All roots, whether set or anit, except ^ 3, JT, £, ^,
g, 5, and g admit f . Bat ^ with ^ , and 9 admit It before
reject it
before
Anit roots ending in short ^g1, except
J as ^rfini f fom ^; but arrf^I from ^ .
( « ) Anit roots with a final vowel or with a penultimate gr
admit it optionally before 9.
§ 496. When initial f or gr of a root takes Guna or Vrddhi
substitute, the reduplicative f or ^ is changed to f^ or 3^;
otherwise the two vowels combine to form long j or 3»: as
§ 497. The final 3-, short or long, is changed to ^r before a
•vowel weak termiation and f to fv or q- as it is preceded by a
conjunct consonant or not; as f^+f9r=^[f^Rr 1 dnal;
vn. 2 is.
Kau
308 SANSKRIT GBAMMAE. [ § 498-502
§ 498. Boots ending in 3TT take aft instead of 3T in the 1st
and 3rd per. sing, and drop their final an before vowel weak
terminations, and before such as take the augment f • as
1st Per. ^^nr, ^f^r 2. Per. sing, o
§ 499. Gupa is substituted for the final vowel of roots end-
ing in ^£ preceded by a conjunct consonant, and in long sg
and of the roots 3^, ^^ and 5TTOt fls ^qrr^ 1 dual of ^, &c.
CT, ? and q* optionally take the GuDa substitute before the
weak terminations, and shorten their vowel when they do not*
dual of CT, &c.
§ 500. Monosyllabic roots, having a short 3? for their
penultimate, change it to <r and drop the reduplicative syllable
before the weak terminations and before q- when it takes f r
provided their initial letter undergoes no change in the
reduplication, «. g. ^ 1st dual ^at+^zr^+fq-^KTsr, qfasi
2 sing, 5fT%sr, 3731^4 2, sing, of ^r^, but 3Rff33T 2nd dual of
as the 3f here is prosodially long.
Exceptions: — Roots beginning with q- and the roots
and ^.
§501. ^ is inserted after the reduplicative syllable in the
case of roots beginning with 3? and ending in a conjunct
consonant and in thai- oi 373^ ' to pervade ' and 3T^£ ' to go. r
The reduplicative sr is changed to 3TT5 315^- 3T3T;>^+ 31=3? -»-
-f 3T=3TR^j similarly 3n^f 1 sing, of
of
§ 502. The change of a semi-vowel to its' corresponding
vowel is called Sampraaarana. Samprasaraoa generally takes
place before weak terminations in the case of the following
roots— *^[, *nj, cr*, ^5, ^ * to dwell, > % sq-, |^, f^, *^, fqr,
\?m» wsr , 5^, ir^, iP^[, ^^, 2T^ and 5^. In the case of the
Perfect the roots *re, ff* and , 9 form an exception.
•§ 503-504 ] CONJUGATION OF VBBBS. 309
§ 503 Before the strong terminations of the Perfect Sam-
prasarana takes place in the reduplicative syllable only. In this
case the initial conjunct consonant of a root is reduplicated as
it is ; t. a,
( a ) The vowel following the Samprasarana is dropped.
§ 504. The roots that reject f altogether in the Perfect —
> P. A. ' to do '
2.
3.
Conjugate similarly 3, £*, and ^ tMCcept in the 2nd per. sing.
which is ^?^.
But With
2.
3.
r i ^ M i r M
Pan. VI. 1. 137—139. 5 is prefixed to the root ^ after the
prepositions *tq and <rR when it means to ornament or collect
together ; and after the preposition OT in the above sense, as
well as in the senses of ' imparting an additional quality to a
thing without destroying the thing itself ( ^t 3WI«*NWf MM<4M:
Kas. on Pan. H. 3. 53. ) or preparing as food, or supplying
what is implied.7
f The 5R is changed to GuDa as it is preceded by a conjunct
consonant now ( Vide § 499. Sid. Eau. on Pan VII. 1. 10-11. )
J The tj of the terminations <fr^, t^, and ^ of 2nd per. pi
of the Benedictive, the Aorist and the Perfect, is changed to ^
when preceded by any vowel except 37 or an or by *r, r^, c^, ^ or 5.
When the intermediate f is added, this change is optional, if
the f be preceded by one of the consonants given above.
310 SANSKRIT GBAHHAB. [ § 504-606
^ P. A.
3. gsra
Conjugate similarly f , f , g.
§ 505, Boots that admit ? —
( 1 ) Set roots ending in a vowel.
^ 9. A. c to choose. '
1. 33R-TO ^fe 3^$ 1. ^
2. 33% 33^: 33^ 2.
3. 33R 35Rg: 33$ 3.
*J, ^, ^ &c. are similarly conjugated; a3Trc-ft9!T> atdR« &c.
^ 9 P. ' to tear, ' &c. ^ 2 P. « to sharpen. '
1. 5RIR 'W^ 9Riitn 1.
2.
3. 5R1R SRRs ^RR: 3.
^ is similarly conjugated
Oonjngate similarly ? and <£.
^ 2 P. A. ' to warble, to go, ' &c.
1
.
2. «J^l «3H: ^^ 2.
3. «R ^5: ^: 3.
Conjugate similarly 5 P. 3 P
§ $05 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 311
tft 2 A. ' to lie down.'
P. A. ' to resort to.'
1
2 ffofto i%i^: \Ww 2
8 I&TO ftf^: fii&g: 3
(2) Anit roots ending in a vowel : —
?T 1. P. A. ' to give.'
1 ^ ^3 3$$ 1 ^
2 ^PT-^T ^^: ^ 2
P. 'to sing/
2
3 5i 51*13: 513:
All other roots ending in 3TT> 7, q", and aft are similarly
conjugated. & — 3rd per. ^?ft, 5^$:, ^v^:. 3[t 'to cut' 3rd per.
2 P. c to go.'
2
3
f 1 P. 'to go' is regular; f^rrir-^ fftw tf*frf &c. f 1. 2, P.
4 A. * to go ' takes the peri. per/.
312 SANSKRIT GRAMMAS [ § 505
?ft P. A. r to carry.'
Far. itm.
See & 'to lie down above.
P. ' to remember.'
ft 5 P. A. ' to throw.' ft 9. P. A. ' to destroy/
1
3 f^ig: ftig: 3
^T. 9 P. 4 A. * to adhere.' 1. P. ' to melt/
/\
Par. Atm.
3 i%3Rf, fe fe^rg: i^g: Like
( 3 ) Anit roots ending in a consonant: —
5 P. ' to be able/
§ 505 ] CONJUGATION OP VBBBS. 3 IS
. A. 'to cook/
2.
to§t % 3. to toft
g^ 6 P. A. 'to release/
1. 9^^ ggfo? 99^ 1-
2. 3«ftfef 99^5: 99^ 2. 99^ 99^
991: 3.99% 99^
1 P. 'to separate/ A. 'to purge/
l.ft«
CdDJngate fl^ 7. P. A., f%^ 6. P. A.t fr^ 3 P. A.,
3. P. A., gsj; 7. P. A., 5^ 7. P. A., g^ 7. P. A. and others
having f or *f for their penultimate, similarly ; f|r^[ — f%%^
1 sing! f^ftM^i dual 5 i%frl%*r 2 sing. &c., g^— ^ft* 1 sing.
2 sing. &c.
6 P. 'to ask/
2
8
1 P. 'to abandon/
814 SANSKEIT GEAMMAB. [ § 506
7 P. 'to break or to destroy/
. P. A. 'to fry.'
1
3
4. A. 6. P.
1
2 tra&r ^5T: ^5f 2
3 ^RR ^1^.^13: ^^^ 3
SST^l. P. 'to see/
should be COD jugate d like Q^; ^^fir^r,
7. P. A. 'to cut'
1
2 Pj-«f^*( I^F^i^: ftP^ 2
3 i%^ ftf^<^'- ftf^: 3
q^ 4. A. 'to go. ^ 1. 6. P. 'to decay/
§605]
CONJUGATION OP VEBBS.
3 <& "
Conjugate *;* A., ^ P., ^ P. $pr P., A.,
A., ^ P., m* P., *«C A., ^ P., sfg P. similary;
2 iing.., -%nr^-^Tr^ 2 sing., ^ %m^-^^^ 2 sing.,
2 sing.,
1 P. ' to drop ' «|^. 9 P. * to bind '
2
fV
5. P. « to grow, to accomplish. 9 ^^ 6. P. ' to touch. *
^fifa TOi^fa 1
2 ^Dff^r ^ra*j: w% 2
3 w? ^n^: wig- 3
^5j and ^^x are similarly conjugated.
( 4 ) Set roots ending in a consonant.
1 P. < to be glad. > cTFT 1 A < to salute.'
2
3
. 1. P. < to dance g^ A. 1. ' to rejoice.
1. P. « to afflict.'
3 99^ 99^
6. P. < to go.
816 SANSKRIT GBAMMAE. [ § 505-506
2 3TRf?*T 9TW%: W*t 2
3 3TR^ 3TR% STffif '• '3
1. P- ' to worship. ' SR^ 1. A. to go, to acqnire ' &c.
3 3TH 9TR3: 3JR1: 3
g^ P. ' to vomit. ' ^ A. ' to give. '
2 ^Rffiw ^JT^: ^?T 2
3 ^TH 33^: ^9*. 3
6. P. ' to be crooked. ' ^5^ 6. P. ' to flash forth
' to cheat. ' ' to throb. '
IfraT 1
2 ^TCT 3f2g: 3f2 2
•3 ^fe 5f2^: 595: 3
§ 506. Roots taking ^TKTqrKOl ( regular and irregular
1. P. A. 'to worship. •
5 ^?T3l *l<j: ^: 3
t 1. 2. P. ' to speak. ' cr^l. P. ' to dwell/
1
* Roots of the 3?^ class ( see § 463 ) retain their vowel un-
changed option ally in the 1st pers. sing, of the Perf.j i-^pnw,
1st sing.
f ^ as a substitute for 5r may also be conjugated in At*
, 1 Per &c.
§ 506 ] CONJUGATION OP VEBBS. 317
2
3
1. P. A. 'to sow seed.'
2 Sqffa-S^ 3ftg: 3?? 2
3 3^rq ^^5: 353: 3
1. P. A. 'to carry/
2
3 3qif 3^: 5: 33%
1. P. 'to speak/ ( A. in some senses ).
2 33I^T ^3: ^ 2 3>[^ 35^13? 3jf^E[
3 33T^ 3>^3: -KJ: 3 3>^ 3J^IrT 3rf^
2. P. 4to sleep. ' 3ST 2 P. 'to grow old/
2 s**?q*r 9^3: OT? 2
3 S^i^ 95^'. §53- 3
q^2. P. «to desire. ' sg^ 6. P. 'to deceive/ 'to surround/
*When the ? substituted for the ?r of the roots ^ and ^ ia
dropped, the preceding sr is changed to &\ and not to an:
=:;3-5t? + *r, by § 416, 3, 4 =
-818 SANSKRIT QEAMMAB. [ j$ 506
9. P. A. 'to take.'
P. A. 'to pierce/
1. P. 'to swell.'
( Regular ).
% ( Irregular ).
13*RT
3^?
* ft it to be optionally considered as |f in the Perfect.
f % optionally assumes the form 3^9; before the strong, and
or ^ before the weak terminations of the Perfect.
<§ 506-508 ] CONJUGATION OF VBBBS. 919
3O ^>
3^2? 3»93: 3£J: 3 g^T
r\
^* P. A.
2
3 f^|4( Hsjjg: %: 3
- A. 'to call.'
consonantal terminations except ^T; ^f -^rprir^ 1 dual,
2 sing.; 5^11, ^vftsqr 2 sing, of ^, &c.
1. 7. P. 'to shrink, to contract.' 797 6 P. 'to cut.'
§ 507. Wet roots:—
§ 508. Ttie roots *j, ^ and ^ admit f necessarily before
1
2 ^i^T aerag: ^cW 2
3 ^P5 clcreg: ^55: 3
is similarly conjugated.
* oq- becomes f^sqr^ before strong terminations and ffi\ before
*he weak ones in the Perf . f "jj is to be considered as 5 in the Perf .
920 SANSKRIT GBAMMAE. [ g 508
. 2. P. « to purify. srar 7. P. « to anoint.'
1
2
3
4 P. 'to be wet/ ?RF 1. A f to distil.'
2
3 R^ ra%^: T%%|: 3
4. P. « to destroy.' T%^ 1 P
2
3^=^
1. P. € to be able.' 4. P. c to be
TT is similarly conjugated.
* tq^and ^insert a uasal when' their final is followed by a
vowel, r-^, however, does not do it in the Aorist or when ii
takes f, except in the Perf. f 8ee § 471.
§508]
CONJUGATION OP VERBS.
351
. A. ' to be ashamed/ $m 4. P. ' to forgive/
1. A. ' to forgive.1
5. A. 'to pervade/
'. ' to be afflicted/ ^ 4. P. ' fcrperish,
3 T^'SI RI^STjJ: ra%5j: 3
. P. ' to occupy.' ^ with ^^ 9. P. « to tear, to expeL'
1
pare' should be similarly conjugated.
* Sea § 512.
j- Roots ending in q change 'to ^ when followed by ^ or
t See. § 476.
H. S. G. 21.
322 SANSKBIT GRAMMAR. [ § .508
1. A. ' to enter/ 1. A. * to take/
A. is Set and should be
conjugated as such, in? 10 P.
A. takes the Periphrastic Per! .
1. P. A. ' to conceal/
3 ^J5 gg^: lap 3
c 6. P. * to kill/ <S 6. P. f to kill
2 cl^l: 33*3
3 ^| ^83: ^|: 3 ^
4. P. ' to bear malice.' ^ 6. P. * to hurt, to kill/
When^or i^is 6feppe<3. the preceding *r. ? or 3 is hsn> thrived.
§ 508-509 ] CONJUGATION OP VE*BS. 323
is similarly conjugated %f is similarly conjugated
»£f£tQ*r 58Ra I dual, gfTT%^r, ^wfifa-^W 2nd sing,
5KTC, gRt*ST - sing. &c. ^£ 1 daal
4. P. ' to love. '
3
is to bfr similarly conjugated.
IRREGULAR BASES.
§ 509. The roots sr?*r, 3T?gr, f*w. and ^f»^ drop their nasal
optionally before the terminations of the Perfect, <gr«t, !I^T
<W. obey § 500, even before the strong terminations -when their
nasal is dropped.
3
wr
* T&e final f of th« roots j^, gf , T^T^ ; and ^g^ is changed
to q or 9 when followed by any consonant except a nasal or a
)i vowel or by nothing.
324 SANSKRIT GRAMMAK. [ § 509-511
2
* $0. The a? of the roots inr , 5^[ > 3T^ , ^P^ and ^, is
dropped before vowel weak terminations except those of the
2nd variety of the Aorist; the ^ of ^j is then changed to 7 •
and 3Tt( and ^ become 5^ and ^respectively.
1
2 snrftsr WR^: smr 2
3HP*4
o ^PTTJT ^IH: ^n: 3
Conjugated in the
2 ^^ sfUfsT ^ft^ Perf. as a substitute
3 ^ ^ffiB ^fft? of 91 which see.
P. A.
2 ^^i ^^H: =^1 2
3 ^§n^ =^P5^: ^^: 3
§ 511. v^ is optionally substituted for aq^ in the Perfect..
§ 511-612 ] CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 825
§ 512 f The roots ^, cf^ ^, ^ and n^ when it means 4 to
offend or to injure' necessarily, and Xgj, ^^, ^ qnr, 1. P. to go,
T53[, ^T?r, ^^ and ^^ optionally obey § 500.
1 P. ' to cross. ? q^j 1 P. ' te bear fruit. '
3 qqfj
. A. 'to serve. ' &c
1
2
3 ^
5. P. with 3?q.
2
3
4. P. < to be old. ' ^[ 1. 4. P. ' to wander. '
1
* Vide § 515 f ^<^>?3T5fTai I
Pan VI. 4. 122-125.
326 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 512-514
2
1. A. ; to shine.' ^3W 1. P. ' to sound.'
3
»»
[» $rT5T> TT^ aTe to be similarly conjugated.
§ 513 T£ forms its base irregularly as
§ 414. 1% and ff are respectively changed to f*T and f^*
and f% optionally to %, after the reduplicative syllable in the
Perf. and the Desiderative.
&
1 1*1" I W
I5^FT
2
§ 514-518 ] CONJUGATION OF VEBBS. 827
2
3
§ 515. 3T^, 3f and scfr admit f necessarily before 37.
3R:
3JK aflfa arife? For 3^ and s^ see p. p. 325, 319;
'to go.'
3
§ 516. f ' to go ' lengthens its reduplicative ; before the
weak terminations
For the forms see p. 311.
§ 517. The base of f with 3tfr ' to study > is
2
3
§ 518. 37^ forms its base as 37153. Its vowel is optionally
not gnnated before a strong termination when it takes f.
* See £ 476. f See § 477
328 SANSKRIT GP.AMMAB. [ § 518-519
Par.
2
3
519. rarr and 7^7 are optionally substituted for ^r^in the
Perfect, and necessarily in the other Non-con jugational tenses.
and cf^rr take both the Padas.
Par.
Atm.
Atm.
5 520-527 J CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 329
§ 520. q^ifl prefixed to vowel weak terminations in the case
of ft 4. A. < to obey.'
1 fKA fcflWfc
2
§ 521. ^ 1. A. Ho protect' asstimes as its base the form
in the Perfect, ftifc, fltffcjsfy 1 sing, and dual. ftftnft-| 2 pi.
§ 522. ^i after reduplication assumes the form (533 •, f^T?
1 sing. , %ia<* 2 sing.
§ 523. <ft is. substituted for c^ 'to grow fat' in the Perfect
and in the Frequenf ative < f^- 1 sing. , rafor&-|> 2 pi.
§ 524. The root scng tak^s Samprasarana in the reduplicative
syllable in the Perfect j f%sq-«F 1 & 3 sing, forf^fty sing.
§ 525. For the forms of ft^, see § k466, f%>^ 1
ftftir 2 per. &e.
PERIPHRASTIC PEBPKOT.
§ 526. The Periphrastic Perfect is formed by adding 3U*T to
the root and then adding the forms of the reduplicated Perfect
ot&y Tg;, or 3if^ as terminations ; when the forms of ^, ar«
added, a Parasmaipadi root takes the Parasrnaipadi forms and
an Atmanepadi one takes the Atmanepadi forms.
§ 527. Before 3tre( the final vowel and the penultimate short
except that of f^ , take their Gun a substitute.
Paradigms.
$( 2. A. ' to praise/
330 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 527
frta* frtart
3
&c. are similarly conjugated
' to give.'
2 ^i-
3 ^?FI
— is similarly conjugated.
&c.
i3 similarly conjugated.
. 'P. 'to bum.'
, &c. sri^t^f^, &c.
3?^: 3fl
> &C. aJltlHJb^:, &C, 3ftafa3F>, &C.
, &c. an^itjttig:, &c. sfNi^i, &c.
P. 'to know/
5 527-528 ] CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 831
2
, &c. ft^WW^:, &C. f^TRRT, &C.
3 fiN ftfea--
f, &C. fifcWflS'., &C.
2. P. ' to awake.'
, &C. snifWTKR, &C.
3RRR^:
, &c. ^rncwRi?!:, &c. ^sTHRmw, &c.
, &C. 5IWWRQ:, &C. ^pRWTg:, &C.
TO~ ^PftTt *Tt<TT*Ji'c<*K, &c. 1 sing. ?»^f^r, ^S^Tt «?lmMW-
5^. &c. dual; ^firtlTO, ^»fr^ ifniM!^*HF, &c. 2 eing.
•'JT—^T, or ^qnrt^n^T, &c. 1 sing-
fHgr— ftfif^, or f5^^Tm«^TT> &c. 1 fing.
qrir— qot or qurNM^H ( 7araN^f according to Bopadeva )
&Q. 1 sing.
or
— 3?R(T or ^emirtw &c. 1 sing.
§ 628. When 3ttn is added to the roots »ft, £t w and ^ they
are first reduplicated as in the third conjugation} e. g.-
-ft 3. P. 'to fear/
fwr f^i^ rai^m
, &C. ft^Rf^f^, &C. WWl^fR, &C.
2 ft*jft«r, ft^r fl»?3: fi»r
, &C. ftw!^^:, &C. ftwf^ &C.
, &C. fi'*?^^: &C.
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 528-633
gt 3 P. ' to be ashamed.'
f^W
T, &C.
2
&C. f^lfa^g: &C. !%3fa$, &C.
, &c. l%qH^:, &c. 1%^f :, &C.
— ^!TT, TOT, fiH*r*OTT-*^-nRnr 1 sing.
1. sing. &o.
( 6 ) THK AORIST ^.
§ 629. There are seven Varieties or Form.9 of the Aorist.
The augment sr is perfixed to the root as in the Imperfecf
First Variety or Form.
§ 530. The terminations of the First Variety are the same
as those of the Imperf.. except that of third person plural
•wlrch is g: —
3 <l
§ 531. The radical 3fr is dropped before 3^.
§ 532. ^, ^SJT, ^f} ^f, and roots assuming the forms of %\ and
cIT ( Vide § 459 ), «Tf 'to drink7 and ^ take this Variety.
§ 533. Tho roots 97, \j,*ft> ^ti »nd *ft belong to this Variety
optionally. They optionally take the Sixth Form, t* takes
the Third Form also.
Paradigms.
P. ?Tt P.
§ 533-540 J CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 833
2. 3TCTT: 9WT^L aiwa 2.
3. arc*n^ 3rc*nfiUi arc^ 3;
§ 534. ^ takes 3^ instead of g^ in the 3rd per. pi. and
changes its vowel to ^[ before tbo vowel terminations ; «. g.
3TO?TC(> 3HI*, W*$* 1st pers.;^^, a^f* , 3POT 3rd per.
§ 535. ITT is substituted for f in tbe Aorist ; 3*irn*,
3TTTTR 1st per.-, ^ with 3n\J 'to remember '
arwrnr, &c.
§ 536. This Variety is exclusively Parasmaipadi. ^r, vn,
and ^r take the fourth Variety in tbe A tin. i^wbenAtm.
takes tbe fifth ; and with a^|% Atm. , the fourth.
Second Variety or Form.
§ 537. In this Variety 3? is added on to the root and then
the terminations of the Imperf. of the first group of conjuga-
tional classes are added; riz.
Par. Atm.
2. s <m ^ 2.
3. <* am, ^ 3.
§ 538. The preceding ^ ia dropped before ^jj;, a^j, and
3T?rT and lengthened before 7 and IT. The radical vowel except
a final ^-, short or long, and tbe 35 of g^j, does not undergo
Gupa or Vrddhi substitute.
§ 539. This Variety is Parasmaipada with a few exceptions
such as s?t with ^u , ^qr, ^; and 3?^ 'to throw; with a preposi-
tion. The roots fjj<r0 ft^, and *g take this form in the Par.
and optionally in the Atm., in which they also take the
Fourth Form.
§ 540. The penultimate nasal of a root is dropped, as £?l-
334 SANSKRIT GBAMHAB. [ § 541-542
§ 541. The roots 3T^, *$*rr, <T^, ^[? 5TTS; , 1% and g become
, »*, and g, respectively-, *. y.
, &c. 3rd uing.
§ 542. The roots giving the following couplets ( Karik&f
belong to this Variety necessarily: —
u 1 u
%[Rl:
u ^ ii
t I
w u ^ u
^i^ i
: «nnri&: ^ft: n ^ u
Rr^^Rf^^^T I
: 3«?%: tgf^: II X II
U ^ II
n * n
u ^ n
^ i
n s u
i
P. with ^E A.
3 a
§ 542 ] CONJUGATION OP VEBBS. 335
3F 3 P. < to go A. with
2 an*: 3n*craL 3n*3 2
3 9?R^ 3n^ sn^L 3
I . ' to go '
1 P. A.
3 3ffc^ STPIH «Tf^ 3
2. P. ( also that substituted for ; Par. and Atm. )
2 ,
3
P. A
2 3rflR: aifiracP*. 3rft^« 2
.3 BH%^ amRcn^ sjftR^ 3
1
2 orfeq: arfeqan. wfa^ 2
3 3rfc5«H^ srfeqcn aifeq 3
* f&r, f%5 aud^ ( also take the fourth Variety in the Atm)
336 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 542
. P. A. withqft
anww 1
2 3H^T: 3TfWTq afl^KT ?
3 3nwr anwrr^ ajiwi. 3
We give l>elow the 3rd per. siog. of the rest.
Roots. Roots,
* ( 5. 4. P. A.
4. P. < to collect.'—
. P. « to wallow/— ^g^j §rcr—
3n^f?f 5W-4. P. < to be c
4. P.' to be wet.'— 3=rr%3r^ TOT:--4. P. « to throw'— 3fft^
. P. ' to be oily.'— -
1 . 1 A 4. P. 'tobeuDctuoiiB, ^q^J — 4. 6. P. A.
to melt— 3ff£r$qi ^q:
t 6. P. A— mr^: ^*
1 P. ' to perish, to decay' 5»— ' to kill. —
- ' to kill—
— 4. 5. P. Ho prosper'-
ijvr 4. P. 'to covet'—
4. P. 'to hurt'—
* 5T3? 4. A. takes the Fourth, as well as the Fifth Variety,
in the Atm. 3T$TrE, 3T5rf%£ 3rd sing.
f ft^ A. takes the Fourth or Fifth Variety. 3fl%TT, 3T>f^ 3*d
sicg.
J gq^ takes the Fourth Form in the Atm;
§ 642-543 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 887
— 3T5TR<* SJ* 4. P. 'to be dry'
1. P. « to be confused or ^ 4. P. • to embrace' — 3*$^,
agitated.'— arerjT^ <qft-— 1. P. ' to eat'— -
. P. ' to be thin ' 3T^T^ 3TO( 4. P. ' to release'-—
3TO3T^ jre( 4. P. ' to fade away '
jj^ 4.P.«to falP— 3T^P1 ^[ 4. P/to decay, to perish ^
3TCITO ^[ 4. P. 'fco be straight'—
4. P. <to choose'— 3^r5T^ ft^ 4. P. cto go, to direct'—
. P. to be fMraty'— 3^w^ 55^ 4. P. 'to
. P. < to be spoiled/ &c, JT^ 4. P. ' to weigh, to change
[ 3T1^ form'—
— 4. P. 'to burn'— 3?g^ 5^ 4. P. 'to cut '
4. P. 'to injure, to kill'— ^ 4. P. 'to strive'
arf^ra; ^— same as ^
P. 'to be angry or vexed' fi^— same as
f ( I R—^f (
to spread through ^IT^—
4. P. «to divide'~
§ 543. The following roots belong to the 2nd Variety
optionally; they optionally take the Fourth or Fifth Variety
according as they are Auit or Set.
* fi^ Atm. takes the Seventh Variety,
H. S. G. 22
aSS SANSKBIT GBAMMAB. [ § 543
«
II * II
Boots. 3rd ting. Optional forms. Boots. 3rd sing. Optional forms
— 3?
313^,
takes the Third and Filth Varieties besides the 2nd.
§ 54S-544 ] CONJUGATION or VEBBS. 339
Boots. 3 sing. Optional forms. Boots. 3 sing. Optional forme.
§ 544. The following 25 roots, which are all Atmanepadi,
are conjugated in the Paraemaipada when they belong to this
Variety. In the Atmanepada they take the Fourth or Fifth
Variety according as they are Asit or Set.
\\ <\
: u H n
n x n
Boots. 3 sing. Optional forms. Boots. Ssing. Optional forms
3?— 3132^
340 SANSKBIT QKAIOCAB. [ § 645-648
THIBI» VABIETT OB FOBM.
§ 545. Terminations:-—
The same as those of the 2nd Variety.
§ 546. Boots oi the tenth class, cansals, some derivatives*.
the root qn^ and the roots f$r, g, and g when expressing the
agent, take this Variety necessarily, and the roots qr and ft
do it optionally.
§ 547. ( a ) The root is first reduplicated and then the aug-
ment gx and the terminations are added as in the 2nd Variety.
( b ) Final f and 3- are changed to fq^ and s^ before 3% and
final aft is dropped.
Paradigms.
fa P. A. 'to go,' Ac.
Par.
2
3
Atm
3
also, when it takes an^; see § 461 and § 648. )
3 sing. fo-3Tf5rftr<r^ ( see p. 338. foot-note )5 ^—
(% also takes 1st and 6th Varieties besides this ).
§ 548. Boots of the tenth Glass and Oansals:—
( « ) The gnr of the base is dropped ( the vowel changes tak-
ing place before it being retained ) and a short vowel subati-
§ 548-549 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 541
tuted for the long one ( q- and q- being shortened to f , and 3Jt
and sft to ^ ).
The base so modified is then reduplicated according to the
general rules; *rnnr ( Oau. B. -of jj ) =*rre=*T*=5nr^ after
reduplication; ^f^( from f%O=%a=f%^=l%T%aL &C*
( I ) f is substituted for the 3T of the reduplicative syllable if
ths syllable following it be short, and not proeodially long; the
f of the reduplicative syllable is lengthened if not followed by
a long syll. or a conjunct consonant; thu97H^=f^^=«firvT7;
ifof%^=^n%rj *^-^=^=T%*^, the f is not lengthened
as it is followed by a conjunct consonant ; ^qrd=rq^qrd only,
-as q- is followed by a syllable proeodially long.
( c ) Boots having a penultimate 35 , short or long, optionally
preserve it, the long *£ being changed to the short one ; 3^
causal base ^&r=^ after dropping gjq- and 33; by this : q^=
( d ) To the base so prepared the augment ar is to be prefixed
and the terminations added, P. & A., as in the 2nd Variety: —
from ^; yftftf%«g from f%g;. 3TMH^^dl-(T from
from
TV. B. The Atm. form in ft when not given should be
supposed to be understood.
§ 549. Bases with initial vowels: —
( a ) If a root begins with a vowel and ends in a single con-
sonant, the consonant is reduplicated and 5- added to it in the
reduplicative syllable: 3^=3T^=
( b ) If it ends in a conjunct consonant with q[t ^ or ^ for
its first member, the second member of the conjunct is redupU-
342 SANSKRIT GBAMMAE. [ § 549-552
oated : ^?^=vT5^=grf^[^ and finally 3ftf?5TC-ir 3 8ing.j similarly
[-fl f rom 3T£ ( considered as g?^, otherwise
from <fl arrfSrST^-cT from g, &c.
( c ) The roots 37^ , 3T|F, 3T^, 3T?>3C, 3^[, 3^ Atm. and some
others, substitute 3f| for 5^ in the reduplicative syllable* 3 ting.
§ 550. Hoots ending in 3-, short or long, substitute 3-
( changeable to 37 like jj ) for ^ in the reduplicative syllable,
provided it be not (immediately) followed by a labial consonant
or a semivowel or ^7 followed by 3T or 3H";
-^«*ld, 5-3T^T^-tf, &c. But
' to hasten ' ar^fnFT^ , 5 * to bind '— srrf^R^ , g * to
bind'
( a ) The roots $r, ^ y, w 'to go' w 'to swim7 and ^ optionally
retain the 5: arilrff^ or mflm%, 3rf|rsr^ or 34^81 «!<!,
or 3Tgr 5^ or
§ 551. The roots
'to moan' ^OT 'to sound,' <to go/ ^or 'to sound/ «r»T7 ^°^to sound/
«for 'to give' ^^6. P. A. (to cut/ 55 'to harass/ %, ^r , g^ and
. P; shorten their penultimate optionally; 1. sing.: —
or 3f^
°r s
or aq ^ or
or ^XJ^IUIH , 3TfRor^[ or
or 3{«tc(Ti!i^ , 3rr%?rnn3; or ^^nsrrop^ 9 3ita<3Mn or
or sriSfts^, 3T^^[ or 31^!^ ( sen § 553 below),
§ 552. The ar of the reduplicative syllable of ^, £, ?sn:, JT^T ,
' to pound, to wish/ *H, and ^q*^, is not changed to f ; ^^ 1. A.
§ 552-556 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 84*
f to surround* and %£ optionally change their £ to sr; 1 sing
§ 553. The roots g and fqq; can. take Samprasarana.
does it optionally; gT^^— P^or 5^> then
550 then 3T^T5n3[, 3T^TO ^rqc-^TT^
1st sing.
§ 554. The roots given under § 400 preserve their vowel
unchanged- s. 0. do not substitute f in the reduplicative syllable,
&Q. «E—
§ 555. Tbe roots
, s^ji^, %^, %^, and
others less important, do not shorten their penultimate; 3 sing.
&c-
§ 556. Roots which form their Causal Aorist irregularly: —
j with 3?ft <to study,~^tTm^,3itTnftinq[,(f with
'to rememW 3T\i?nfTiTJ^ )•
f «?j f to envy '—
arr —
^TT 'to drink' a^qr^rg; ( <TT 'to protect* forms its Causal Aorist
regularly as
544 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [£556-558
Paradigms,
fr'tCLdo.
Par. Atm.
SIXTH VARIETY OB FOBM.
( Only Parasmaipadi )
N. B. — The Sixth and the Seventh Varieties are given here
before the Fourth and Fifth as it is more convenient to do so.
§ 557. Terminations of the Sixth Form: —
2 tft:
3 ^tcj
§ 558. Hoots ending in srr (including those that change their
final to 31T ), the roots q^, ^ P. (i. a. with f?r, 9RT, *ft ) and R^
§ 558-563 ] CONJUGATION or VEBBS. 845
take this Variety, mj with s<T or 3^, A. and ^ A. take the
fourth Variety.
§ 559. The roots ending in sg which are restricted to the
First, Second and Third Varieties do not take this Variety.
PABADIGMS.
&C ; ?n — ST^nf^1^, &C ; S! — BT^STI^q^^ &c.; ft OF
, &C.;
SEVENTH "VABIETY OB FORM.
( Parasm. and Atm. )
§ 560. Terminations: —
Par. Atm.
2 m ^^ ^ 2
3 ^ ^^T^ ^ 3
§ 561. Anit roots ending in ^ ^, ^ and ? and having y, g-,
^ or cT for their penultimate take this Form, g^is an excep-
tion ; it therefore takes the Fourth Variety.
§ 562. 55^, ^5^ and ^, 1 P. 6 P. A. optionally belong to
this Variety.
§ 663. The roots ^ 7 f^ , f?J5 , and 5^ when Atmanepadi
drop the initial ^ or ^rr of the terminations of the 1st dual, 3rd
«ing. and 2nd sing, and pi. optionally.
846 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 563
PARADIGMS.
2
3
f^P.A.
1
3
5- is to be similarly conjugated.
2 sn%3T: 3n«^j^ 3Tf«gci 2
3 srf«^ arfe^ciiJi arf^e^ 8
P. A.
1
2
S^ being a Wet loot • optionally takes the Fifth Variety.
§ 563-566 ] CONJUGATION OF VEBBS. 347
Roots. 1 bing. Roots 1 sing.
. «*%
with
FOUBTH VABUSTY OB FOBH.
S 584. Terminations:—
Paraam. Atm,
1 J-JL 1 f^L
ft j_r,r
§ 565. ( a ) Anit roots not belonging to any of the preced-
ing Varieties take this Form. Anit roots that optionally
take any of the preceding Varieties and Wet roots optionally
belong to this Varirty.
* Wet roots which belong to this Variety, as Auit, optionally
take the 5th as Set.
348 SANSKBIT GRAMMAR. [ 565-567
Exceptions: —
( 1 ) ^j and $•, when Parasmaipadi, belong to the Fifth Variety.
( 2 ) Boots ending in 3* preceded by a conjunct consonant
may take Fourth or Fifth Form in the Atmanepada.
( 3 ) 3T5^ and ^ Par. take the Fifth Form only. 1% A. may
take the Fourth or the Fifth Form.
( 4 ) Of Set roots 3 and those ending in =^ ( long ) when Atm.
belong to either ( 4th or 5th Variety ). 35, and JR^ when A.
belong to the Fourth.
§ 566 ( a ) In the Parasmaipada the radical vowel takes
its Vrddhi substitute ; 5ft-3^fi*I » 35-31$ rffo ^S^anrisffS , &c.
( b ) In the Atmanepada, Guna is substituted for final f or
3", short or long; final ^ and the penultimate vowel remain
unchanged- final =£ is changed to f ^ or 37^; in accordance with
§ 394 ; t%-3T%^> ^T-3^; ^-3^ftg-, g;-3T^ft«r, ^ see below,
( e ) The Panultimate -^ of Anit roots is optionally ohanged
to T
§ 567. After a short vowel, and after a consonant except a
nasal or semi-vowel, the ^ of terminations beginning with ^
and TO is dropped y f -3Tf fT 3 sing.;
; ^T-3f^^ 3rd sing. &c.
Paradigms.
3
Conjugate similarly other Anit roots ending in consonants;
P. 1. sing.-, an%far Atm. 1. sing.; 5
§ 567 ] CONJUGATION OF VEBBS. 849
1. sing. P. &. A.., 5^-3rarT$rn» * sing, ararsn 2nd dual,
t with *nj[ A. *TH£T% 1 sing.; XTS^-^xn^ 1 sing.;
Wre 2 per. &c; *>J-3nrtc*n* 1 sing.;
2 sing.; areVire 2 per. dual., &c 5 A. 8^1% 1st sing.;
3rd sing, and Ldual5 — g^T^C 1 sing.;
2nd dual
fif P. with T* Atm.
2
3
Conjugate similarly j%, ^r, eft, t *c-> ^» 5» ^- P- A. &c.;
», P. 4. A. »r^ 1 sing.,
r, 1 sing.-,
3
f^[ P. A. is similarly conjugated. Conjugate 3 A. similarly
A. * A.
2 STft: ^S^ *$fr 2
3 Bif| aqjftgin Bf^T 3
A. ^ P.
* Vide § 465.
f Also take the 6th Variety when it substitutes an f or its finaL
t ?5l, ^C &nd ^t also take the 7th Variety; 3^ and ^ take
tne 2nd and 5th besides this.
350 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 567
2 ar^iBf: srStqwm arlif^ 2
3 arere sretarau whrer 3
. ^^
Atm. sf^rg, &c.
Conjugate 8i
2 Qror^r. swil«i srwi ^jT-a
3 snn^ «wi^«i «W!^: ^-aren^fa, »RSIT^; &c.
; &c.
. A.
2
3
with
similarly conjagatd
. &c.
' ^C-Vide § 480. 3T^+STf^=3TWRJ+^^=3reiTTnj 3rd
dual. IK A. takes the 5th Variety since it is Set.
t Also takes the 5th Variety.
§668-571] CONJUGATION or VEBBS. 351
Irregular Aprist or the Fourth Form.
§ 568. gft, ^7, and roots assuming the forms of ^r and ^r (Vide
§ 459 ) and ^JT substitute $• for their final vowel in the Atm.
This f does not take its Guna substitute. In the Parasm. these
roots take the first Variety ( vide § 532 ).
§ 569. 5^( ( with 3JT A. ) drops its nasal before the termi-
nations.
It takes the Fifth Form optionally both in the Parasm. and
Atm. in which case «pj is substituted for it.
§ 570. im, and q^ with gr<T ' to marry,' optionally drop
their nasal, when they take the Atm. terminations, qi^ when
it means < to give out ' ( as the faults of others ) necessarily
drops its nasal.
§ 571. The third person sing, of <r^ is arqrf^. ^[ 4. A.
takes the termination f optionally in the 3rd sing, before
which the penultimate gr takes Gun a.
Paradigms.
A ( with 3TT )
2
3
with 3& 3TT.
TO with
352 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 571-572
2
3 wrer
with ^ir to be similarly conjugated • grrpi%,
5T<Trfa*f|', 4m*J<Hlf3 1 dual, 3MHI*mi:, ^trnmn ^ sing.
2
3
? with
2
3
1 sing
FIFTH VABIBTY OB FOBM.
§ 572. Terminations:— These are obtained by prefixing the-
aagment *[ to the terminations of the Fourth Variety, dropping
the ^ in the case of the 2nd and 3rd per. sing.; «. g.
* Vide § 486.
§ 572-574 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 353
Par. Aim.
W *«* 1 0*
2 {: ^^L 52 2 ^T:
3 & 383, 5$: 3 ^
§ 573. All roots not restricted to any of the preceding
Varieties take this Variety. Consequently it is peculiar to Set
roots ( Vide § 565 ).
§ 574. ( a ) In the Paraarnaipada, the final radical vowel and
the penultimate 3f of roots ending in ^ or 3^ and that of ^? and
take their Vrddhi substitute necessarily; 3£-
(b) The penultimate short vowel of a root takes its Guna
substitute- f\J—
(e) Vrddhi is optionally substituted for the penultimate 3T,
not prosodially long, of roots having an initial consonant and
not ending in ^ or w ; q^--
(d) But the vowel of roots ending in ^ , ^ , q y and of the
roots ^,^,3^1,^, ^ 'to cover, to surround/ ^, 'to
break, to pierce,' ^r^, ssr^ , 'to ask, to beg,' qsrjto go or move/
*T*T < to churn,7 ^yir^ 'to stick or cling to/ ^ and |^ <to sound
or to be diminished/ does not take its Vrddhi substitute.
(0) In the Atmanepada the radical vowel takes its Guoa
substitute; *§;— 3*$yfir£.
Paradigms.
— 3KrTTfiq** 1 sing. areTTBTTS ^~3T«rfif% 1 sing
3 sing. 3 sing.
l sing, a^rrfr^ f and f — P
3 sing.
, WWrf^ 1 aing.
H S G 23.
354 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 574-575
1 eing
. 1 sing. cfi^ 3 sing
BT:— €fBT: 2 sing. 5^— 3**rrraTO[ 1 sing-
f/sr A.— 3Tm?ft-3T^Vfir 1 sing. 3 sing.
mftaft, 3TOfr*ft, &c- S5*— am***, aiwRnR 1 sing.
areRer: <>r ^^frar- Par- and Atm. ( See § 569 ).
2 sing. &o. sETCC— 3T5RmTO[ 1 eing. 3??fjjftg[
3 sing.
For the optional forms of these roots see the preceding Variety.
3 sing.
3 sing. g^r-SRTT^r^ 1 fling.
1 sing. 3TT«ltar 3 sing.
eing. W^-aroro?^ 1 sing,
sing. ^bH^fld. 3 sing.
3 sing.
— 7. P. f sjftfsm,. 6. A. 3 sing.
1 sing. sq^-^^rqi*^, 3R?rftl^ 1 fling.
W«TftrT»T 1 fling. ^—ST^rR V^ 1 sing.
Bing- awrtl^. 5T^— ^T5TT%^ 1 sing.
3 sing. iTTf^— 3T«m%ft 1 sing. STirrri^
sing. 5T^^ 3 sing.
gg— *<«iflW X ,3TUff ft 1 sing.
sing.
Irregular Aorists of the Fifth Form.
§ 575. The roots ^, 5T^, tp; , ?TT^ and cqr^ optionally sub
stitnte f for f^ ( third person sing. Atm. ).
* See § 475.
f Vide § 46ft. J Vide §461.
X Vide p. 249 foot-note f ; 3*^ also takes 7th Variety.
§ 576-578 ] OoNJuaATioir OP VEBBS. 355
§576. Roots of the 8fch class ending in or or ^ drop their
nasal and substitute optionally $rr^ and 3 for the terminations
fgT: and ?E of tbe 2nd and 3rd person ping. Atm. *ng
lengthens its vowel after dropping q[.
§ 577. The vowel of sn£ takes Vrddhi optionally in the
Parasm. i. c. optionally takes Gupa substitute; also it option*
ally remains unchanged before f ( Vide § § 466, 518 ):
§ 578. The su of ^TT i« optionally dropped in the A orist-
-consequently it takes the Sixth and the fifth Varieties.
PJLBADIGMS.
Parasm.
2
3
Atm
2
3
rni:— amrfirfw;
sing.
356 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 578-580
Boots of the 8th Class. Boots of the 8th Class.
1 sing. Par. ^— 3ran>?^, 3THRTO Par.
1 sing. Atm. 3Tm%ft Atm. 1 sing. OT-
3TT<T 2 & 3 aing. Atm. 2 & 3 sing. Atm.
I sing. Par.
1 sing Atm.
3TfsT?T 2 & 3" sing. Atm.
501^ — 3|%|fO|tf^v 3TOT&rf^r ^ sing. ^*3[ ^T^TRT^J S^R*?^ 1 sing.
Par. Atm. srornSTv 3T^r^TT'j Par. 3^RTf 1 fiinK. Atm.
c
^nrnir^, 3^?r 2 & 3 sing. S^TRHT*, 3?w^n.*; sraR'sr,
Atm. 3pygf 2 & 3 sing. Atm.
1 sing. Par. ^R[ — 3TOTRTO, 3it!M^^ 1 sing.
1 sing. Atm. Par. aroRftT, 1 sing. Atm.
2 & 3 sing. Atm. S^RT 2 & 3 sing. Atm.
(^6 ) THE BBNEBICTIVE (
§ 579. The Parasmaipada terminations of this mood may
be obtained by prefixing *rr^ to those of the Imperfect,
dropping its final ^ before the ^ and ^ of the 2nd and 3rd per.
sings.; and the Atmanepada ones by prefixing ^ to the
terminations of the Atm. Potential and also to the ^ and ^
occurring in them These, therefore, are: —
Parasm. At mane.
1
2
(a) Parasi. pada.
§ 58 o The Par. terminations are weak and therefore occasion
§ 580-587 ] CoNJUOiTiON or VERBS. 857
no Guna or Vrddhi change in the root. All roots reject the
augment f.
§ 581. The final f or 3- is lengthened; final 3* short is
changed to ft, and final ^ changed to f^ or to 3^ when preceded
by a labial or a^ before the Par. terminations of the Benedictive,
and the q- of the Passive; fir
§ 582. Final =5; preceded by a conjunct consonant and the
root ^t are changed to Guna under the same circumstances;
§ 583. Boots capable of taking Sampras arana take it.
substitutes f for its vowel.
§ 584. A penultimate nasal is generally dropped. Some of
the roots dropping their nasal thus are: — 3T
§ 585. ^T, \jf and roots assuming these forme, JTT, W, ^T,
^T, 'to drink', 51, 'to abandon' and ^r, change their nnal to q-.
Final 3TC ( original or substituted ; see § 459 )t if it ba preceded
by a conjunct consonant, is changed to (£ optionally : g[T — ^^"TT^,
iT--W^, %— *t*na;, ^r—i^rr^, i^T^ra[ &c.j but <rr to
'protect, qrq-r^.
A tmanepada.
§ 586. (a) f is prefixed to the terminations after Set roots
and optionally after Wet ones.
(b) Roots ending in ^f preceded by a conjunct consonant, the
root ^ and roots ending in =^ admit of f optionally.
§ 587. The Atm. terminations, are strong. Before these
radical vowel takes its GnDa substitute, but when the inter-
858 SANSKRIT GBAHHAB. [ § 587
mediate f is not prefixed to the terminations, the final ^
remains unchanged and ^ is changed to ^ or to QT if a labial
or ^precedes; f%— %^r, §
or <j«ffe, &c.
Paradigms.
fo.
Par. Atm.
3
2 ^n:
S n«t iwi Ti* 3
. P. A.
2
: 3
Par. 3R Par.
wn^r w^iw 1
2 w: wfePi w^?W 2
3 wiK w^ilwi^ wfe: 3
* A.
§ 587-589 ] CONJUGATION or VERBS. 359
2 ^K^fgr: wfrfawnj, 2
Conjugate ^ Par. like
1 sing
Irregular Benedict ives.
§ 588. f ' to go '— f?TRnc; but shortens its £ after a prepo-
aition j gf^TTH^: ; Atm- q-q^T. g^ also, when joined with
prepositions, shortens its ^before waak terminations beginning
with
SECTION II.
THE PASSIVE.
§ 589. Every root in every one of the ten conjugational
classes may take a Passive form conjugated like an Atmanepadi
root of the 4th Class.*
* The only difference is in the accent ; in the Passive it falls
on q, whereas in the case of the primitive verbs of the 4th class,
Atxn it falls on the radical syllable.
360 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB [ § 590-592
§ 590. There are three kinds of Passive Verbs:— ( 1 ) the
ve properly so called ( ^ftfor s?o ), as ^or jotf
( 2 ) an Impersonal Passive. ( >JT% *° ), a8 «T«T^ t it is
and(3) a Reflexive ( SF&ff^ft sro ), at gftf*: T^J% 'rice
la cooked. '
CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.
§ 591. Formation of base:—
( a ) IT is added to the root, which is weak t. «; no Guna or
Vrddhi substitute takes place before it j «ff — ;faT, ft^—fw
( b ) Before q* roots undergo the same changes as they do
before the Par. terminations of the Benedictive ; f$r — *ffa, $>—
farc, *^— w#, *T— w, f — sftJ, *— ^, ?f?yr— *w, ( but ft^-
f^^ ), ^[— gr^r, 1?^— ?z§r, &c.
( c ) The final art C original or substituted ) of ^r to give, '
%, ^T, ^TT, ^, ITT, ^rqrT ' to drink, ' ^t and ^r ' to abandon^ ' is
changed to f. in other cases it remains unchanged; 37 and ^ —
, fT— fTO"; but ^r ' to cut, to purify '— arizr, fir—
£ 592. The passive base is conjugated like a root of the 4th
class in the Atm.; e. g,
" It might even be suspected, that the occasional assumption of
an Intransitive signification and a Paraemaipada inflexion by a
passive verb, was the cause which gave rise to a 4th class of Primi-
tive verbs as distinct from the Passive. Instances are certainly
found of passive verbs taking Parasmaipada terminations, aud some
passive verbs ( e. g.jydyate, 4 he is born, ' fr. jan ; puryate, * he is
filled, ' fr. pr. ; and tapyate ' he is heated, ' fr. tap ) are regard-
ed by native grammarians as Atmane. verbs of cl. 4. Again,
many roots appear in class 4 as Intransitive verbs, which alao
appear in some one of the other nine as Transitive. For example,
yuj, * to join ' when used in a Transitive sense, is conjugated
either in cl. 7, or it the Causal; when in an Intransitive, in cl.
4. So also push, l to nourish, ' kahulh, l to agitate; ' Kltsh * to vex ';
Sidk, ' to accomplish. '
Monier Williams.
§ 592 ]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
361
Present.
Imperfect .
Imperative.
Potential.
5^ Present.
Imperfect.
362 SANSKRIT GBAHHAB. [ § 592-594
Imperative.
2
3
Potential.
3*3*114
§598. (a) Theroota^[, 5fsg[,?i^, and ^R[, optionally
drop their ^ and at the same time lengthen their ar$
( & ) 5ft 'to lie down' and ft form their bases as ^xf and
( e ) gjjj shortens its 37 when a preposition is prefixed to it.
( & ) Tft&T, ?[hff and %*ft drop their final vowel before q-.
( e ) aj and 3?^ substitute q^ and ig; for themselves) ^ and
•1^ also substitute 3?^ and sfr respectively.
§ 594. To assist the student, the 3rd sings, pie. of some
roots, regular and irregular, are given below.
Boots. 3 ring. Boots. 3 sing.
I
<n ' to drink '
qr ' to protect/
ur
§ 594 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. S6&
Boots. 8 ling. 'Boots. 3 sing.
tfP.
5T A.
' to drees '
^with S
&c. &c. &c. &c.
364 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 595-596
NON-CONJUGATIONAL TENSES AND MOODS.
( 1 ) The Perfect.
§ 595. ( a ) The Reduplicative Perfect of a root in the
Passive is formed in the ordinary way, every root being consi-
dered Atmanopadi : ;ft— f^r; ^— sr^s). R^[=f%R^ j
( b ) The Periphrastic Perfect of the Passive does not differ
from that of the Active, except in that the Auxiliary verbs take
Atmanepftdi terminations necessarily .
( 2, 3 ) The two Futures, ( 4 ) the Conditional and
(5') the Bemjedictive.
§ 596. ( a ) The forms of the two Futures, Conditional
and the Benedictive of the Passive are made up in the same
way as those of the Active, every root being supposed Atmane-
padi ; f
( b ) Roots ending in a vowel * and the roots 5^, jra^ and
£5j optionally form the two Futures, the Conditional and the
Benedictive of the Passive by changing their vowel to Vrddhi
and appending the Atmanepada termination of those tenses
with $ prefixed to them invariably • in the case of roots ending
in 3TT ( and in tr, q- and sffr changeable to an* ) ^ is inserted
between the root and this f ; ^r-^TFTm%, ^mrl; ^Tf
and similarly |f—
', t
1
&c
** y^ and ^ take Vrddhi in this case though ;it is usually
forbidden with them • see § 463 . ^rr takes Gupa only
Tho f of f ^ is changed to g; immediately before ^ and before
an affix containing a mute 5^ or TJT , t. e. q of the Passive, &c.
§ 597 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 365
(6) The Aorist.
3 597. (a) The Passive of the Aorist of foots belonging to
the 4th, 5th and 7th Varieties, is made up similarly by append-
ing the Atmanepada terminations to the base ; i£-3i?rftf5; fT —
&c.
(b) Boots belonging to the first, second, third and sixth
Varieties take the fourth, fifth or seventh Variety in the Passive,
in accordance with the general rules; f^-3tfWP? 1 8ino-;
(e) The third per. sing, of the Aorist Passive of all roots is
formed by adding f : —
(1) Before this f the penultimate ( prosodially ) short vowel
takes its Guna substitute and penultimate 3? except that of ^R;
and of Set roots ending in 3^ except ^p^ with STT, ^HL> an(*
and the final vowel take their Vrddhi substitute •
; but 3R[— 3T3^; T^— 3mTmj but^— 3TRf &c.
with an— 3ff:5rnfl'5 ?P— 3^n& &c. 4—
' ^ or >—
(2) Roots ending in an original or substituted ( t. 0. of roots
in ^, ^, 3TT ) insert ^before this f ;
&Q.
w insert a nasal before their final consonant,
so that their penultimate 3? cannot take Guna or Vrddhi
substitute ; 3TTfH, 3nrf* «r, 3TTp«T.
(4) ^^ without a preposition does the same optionally and
with a preposition necessarily 5 3T3i?«r, 3T5JTPTj but sn^r«r.
(5) v>^ 'to break ' forms K*lf«r or ^HTM? 5T^— 3^rffir *nd
3T5nf^ in the sense of ' to observe ( 10 A. ).'
(6) ^^ takes Vrddhi j 55 lengthens its vowel ; 3rmf5r, ?Hlfi.
(7) f ' to go ' has annfir; with arR A., arwnf? or
366 SANSKRIT GBAHHAB. [ § 597-598
(d) The roots at § 461 will have two forms ; gcr-3i*fnfi,
<nfir, ft^-sri*i%, arrS^^rwr &c.-, ^-arrfS or ^rRrw 3 sing.
(0) § 596 (b) holds good in the Fassiye Aoriat except in
the 3rd sing.; the optional forms must be made up by append-
ing the Aim. terminations of the 5th Variety as the roots
necessarily take ^; ^r— arf^ft, aw[rftrfti *— 31%flr, 3RTfirR;
3Tf»f%, 3T$Trcft; f *Z — 3TTfT%? ^^ififft; awfirft; 1 sing.. 31^—
§ 598. Roots of the tenth Glass—
(a) The gpj ( i . e. sw with the final sr dropped ) is optionally
dropped in the General Tenses, except the Perfect. The Aorist
forms, except that of the 3rd fiing., are made up by adding the
terminations of the Fifth Form ; ^r 1 sing,
Perf ; -^KJTjni^ ^RffT^1, 1st Fu.
2nd Fa.; 3T^t<firfir, <W^flf<i%, Aor. ^<H44)i|, -cTlK'fl^l Ben.
(b) Roots which do not lengthen thier penultimate sr ( see
also § 603 ) lengthen it optionally in the general Tense? of the
Passive, except in Perf., when srcis dropped; ^r^— ar^qpinft,
sref&fts A<>r. 1 sing., &c.
(^ The 3 per. sing, of the Pass. Aorist is formed by drop-
ping ar^ necessarily and adding y, ^W-^rtl^-ST
TT?, 3TOf$ Aor. 3 sing.;
Anrist, 3rd sing. &c.
PARADIGMS.
1^ 1 P. ' to know.'
Perf eel. 1st Future.
ikfosraft
§ 598-599 ] CONJUGATION OF VEBBS. 367
2nd Future.
Conditoinal.
Aorist.
2
Benedictive.
N. B. The Passive forms of roots of the tenth class do not
differ from the Passive forms of Causals for which see the forms
of g^cau. Pass, given in the next section.
SECTION III.
DERIVATIVE VERBS ( \
and
THEIB CONJUGATION.
S 599. The Derivative Verbs are divided into four classes : —
( 1 ) Causal* or Nijantas ( fargSRr: ); ( 2 ) Desideratives or
Sannantas ( fr*r?ff )i ( 3 ) Frequentative* or Yanantas ( q^?ar );
368 SANSKRIT GRAMAIAR. [ § 599*603
and ( 4 ) Denominatives or N&madhatus ( snuvimq: ). The
formation and the conjugation of these will be given in the
present section.
I CAUSALS.
§ 600. Any root belonging to any one of the Conjugational
classes may have causal form which is conjugated like a root
of the Tenth class.
§ 601. The Causal of a root implies that a person or a
thing causes or makes another person or thing to perform the
action, or to be in the condition, denoted by the root. It is
also employed, sometimes, to convert an intransitive verb into
a transitive one.
( a ) Formation of the Oausal Base.
§ 602. The Oausal Base of a root is formed like that of a
root of the Tenth class. In the case of roots of the Tenth
class the causal form is identical with the primitive. The
Oausal form takes either pada. Thus from ^j comes the causal
base *ftnr, ^tvnr^-^ ' he causes to know '; |J^-$ftWT% ' he
shakes or agitates/ *TtJT-*TOT*TfS * he causes to count, ' *fr-Hmmff
' he makes another lead or carry '; fj * to do ' and eg- to
scatter— ^r^rfif ' he causes to do or scatter ' ^—qfowra, &c.
§ 603. Roots ending in ar^, except 3^ 'to go' &c., ^
love/ ^pj 'to ctit/ 51?^ when it means ' to see ' and q^ when
it does not mean 'to eat/ and the roots* marked with an indica-
tory frdo not change their vowel : t. e. their vowel takes its Guna
substitute; n
* These are: — q^, s^ir, p^r, qg;, 'to spread/ JR[ 'to pound/
1 A. 'to destroy, to cut/ $33^1 A., 'to go/ f$£, ^n 1 A.
« to pity/ ^ , ^ 1 A., ?^, 3^r , n^ 1 Par. < to distil/ K ' to
surround/ ^, H^Ho speak/ sf^'to dance/ ^ 1 P. 'to resist/
^gr 1. P. <to shine/ sjng^P. 'to laugh/ ^p. Tto doubt/
'to cling to', g^, $i£, ^, ^?fiT, all meaning 'to cover/
<to move in a zigzag manner,' q^ ^ P. 'to go/
§ 603-606 ] CONJUGATION OF VEBBS. 860
bat jsn— -^TO^; ***tr- ^TTOTftr, 5H* 'to eee' 5rm*rf?r; but
in other cases; q^— q-rari%> &<M but g^ ' to eat ' — TOTT?}.
(a) The roots srij, ^,^3[, 3*c£, £$, and jr^, lengthen
their vowel optionally when not preceded bj a preposition; «f*nrfjtr
•llJUjft, but irararafit, &c.
{ 604. Boots ending in 3^ ( qr} <t or aft changeable to 31T; iee
§ 459 ) and the roots SR- « to go, ' ^r ' to be ashamed, ' fl- « to go, y
( 9 cl. ), 'to flow' ( 4. cl. A. ) and ssfr < to choose, to go/ insert
the augment a before ^{^f and their vowel takes Guoa substitute;
. ? or r \mT^ *r. ^ «TT«Wf* fr. «t &
§ 605. (a) fir 'to throw,' »ft 'to destroy,' ft 'to peri»h/ 1% to
conquer,' and s?r (to buy,' also insert T , but after changing their
final vowel to stf; nmfifr, ^CH^rfS, Sfmfif. HiT^Tf^.
( I ) The roots $", sir or £ « to cook' and jn ( wz»(. ), shorten
their vowel Becessarily, and ^ and 3T optionally, bofore ^h«
inserted <j when not preceded by prepositions., $mfir,
( q& if^w^tiays. sr^nwrS fi* &«. ); but irnfrt
rrarntf wHvf?t; but n»«i>4^f?r7 ^Mwm<jf?T only
C06. sft 'to pare, to sharpen, ' ^t 4 to cut,' *ft 'to flnisn/
P. * to give,, ^n^, IK^, a^mr , all P. and meaning ' to injure/
•to kill,' ^rw, 'to kill,r^, P. "to honour/ ^rw , ' to thine/ gj^,
JTJ^. * to shake/ Ho move/ f^r> V I P., « to fear/ ^ <to guide/ «n
(to cook, to boil,' ^T 'to kill, to gratify, to sharpeu, to manifest,
^rw, ^ , * to live or to be' (^gfflf in other senses), &f <to §port,
to loll the tongue/ R^ ' to be poor, to reduce/ s^t ^r^v 51^ ^,
^ 'to be crooked, to shine/ TOL,*H, *^, ir^^ndjirB^i P. «to go/
* Bee §605 (6).
H. 8. O. 24
370
SANSKRIT GBAXHAB.
[ § 606-610
4to call/ 5^ 'to cover/ % 'to weave/ % Ho waste away/ and
'to drink' insert ^ instead of *,
&o.
( a ) <n « to protect' and % when it means <to shake/ insert <$
and ^ respectively before awj TOraft 'he protects/ «M<jfi *n*
shakes.'
§ 607. The roots gn^, ^%j , 5pr , and ^^ insert a nasal before
their final; 3f*inrnT%, T^nmf-«t, &c.
§ 608. The roots 5^, ftr^r, ^f <P3T, q^[, and ^f^ have two
forms in the causal, *^rfi|%, ift<rnnrfo-?r;
&c.
§ 609. ^fhfr, %4r «nd ^fhtr drop their final vowel before SRT,
§610 The following roots form their Causal base anoma-
lously:—
to go'-
* to remember.1-
study'
with u fti— STrM i M << in.
or ^jar 'to sound/ &c. <HN<l(d 'he causes to sound. f
tremble* simnrf?r , tremble.
'to conceal'
5 cl. 'to collect'
10 cL
,f „ „
conceal.
,, collect.
'to awake
3^— -'to sin, to be
unchaste'
'to shake'
'to please'
'to fear.'—
be rouses
he causes to sin
but
the sense of ' he corrupts or
makes depraved.'
he causes to shake.
„ „ „ pi«asc.
he frightens with.
fear-
5 610-611 ] CONJUGATION OF VBBBS. 371
e causes to fry.
— <to wipe'
— to dye' — rwrfR he dyes or paints : also in the sense of
<he propitiates or satisfies'; ef. 'winft jtf ;f *1T-
trfi' Bh. Ni. Sa. 3. Bat firgft only, in the
sense of he hunts deer"; (Vide Kir. VI. 84).
to grow'—ft^Tflr-%, ftamft-% he plants or causes to grow.
take7 and ) 3RWfir%, ft»nnrft%5 and <ft*vft,
•jft — -'to embrace/ > grrTTfit in the eenae of ' melting an
d )
/ >
J
adhere' nnotuons sobetanoe.'
'to blow' — armfft he causes to blow or move.
TOWfft he shakes.
to smile' — feHmmjfft he causes a smile by? or astonishes
or frightnes by. Rwiq^ he astonishes.
4r— »irprf&, ^nnrft he causes to conceive ;
9rmrft% in other senses.
'to fa*T- ir^qft he eauses to fall, cuts down.
he causes to go.
he accomplishes or prepares.
be %rf?t, he makes perfect, &c. with reference
accomplished7 I to sacred rites or things only, as 3ro
r-'*° swell' *n»mnTlt he c«uses to swell.
^TC— 'to tremble ; to shine forth.' wt?^tS, fVfWrfft he causes
to tremble or shine.
TC 'to strike or kill'— vnurA he causes to strike, &c.
(5) Conjugation of theOansal Base.
§ 611. The Oausal base is conjugated like the base of a root
of the 10th or Ohnr*di class in all the ten Tenses and Moods of
272 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 611-612
the Parasmaipada, the Atmanepada and the Passive. The
with the final 3T dropped is retained, as remarked before, in
the General Tenses, except the Aorist and the Benedict! ve, and.
U dropped before the q- of the Passive. The formation of the
Aoriat of cansals has bean fully explained along with that of the
roots of the Tenth class, at § 548-656.
- § 612. Paradigms of all the Tenses and Moods in the Par.
Atm. and Pass, of Causal base
Special Tenses.
Present.
Par. Atm.
2
S
Imperfect.
P.
2
3
A.
2
3
P. Imperative* A.
1
2
2
1st Future.
Par.
Atm.
3
2nd Future.
Parasm.
§ 612 ] CONJUGATION OP VMBS. *7*
P. Potential.
1
2
3
General Tenses.
Perfect.
Par.
2
3
Atm.
* Also ihnniT
374 SANSKBIT OBAKHAB.
Atm.
2
3
Conditional.
Par.
2
3
Benedictive.
Parasm.
2
3
Atm.
,&C.
Atm.
Par. Aorist. Atm,
Passive.
Present Imperfect
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 375
Imperative. Potential
3 ^
2 ^h*j^ q(«<)«fi+^ ih^MH. 2
3 ^qai^ fMai*^ 'fl^'dlH, 3
Perfect.
1st Future.
2nd future.
SANSKRIT G&AXKAB. [ § 612-613
Conditional.
Benedtetive.
1
Aorist.
2
For the various irregularities, &c. see the third Variety.
11. DESIDEBATIVES.
§ 613. Any primitive root of the ten classes,, as well &s
any causal base, may optionally* take a Desiderative form
* Or the notion of desire may be conveyed by means of a
sentence; t. «. fatfsifa or MQ^ft^ft 'he wishes to read,7 &c.
§ 613-416 ] CONJUGATION OP VEBBS. 377
which, like the causal base, it conjugated in all the ten Tenses
.and Moods of three voices.
§ 614. The Desiderative expresses the notion that a person
or thing wishes ( or is about ) to perform the action, or to be
in the condition denoted by the root or the desiderative base;
fttrfsroff * He wishes to study > from q^; g*$fr ' he is about
to die ' fr. ^; &c.
615. There are a few primitive roots, which, though they
take a Desiderative form, do dot convey a desiderative sense
( See § 396 ). As these are looked upon as primitive roots,
new Desiderative bases may be derived from them according
to the rules given below; as ^ft^qfr * he wishes to censure '
from ^m^ &c.
§ 616. The Desiderative base is formed by reduplicating the
root or base according to the general rules of reduplication
given at § 444-449 and § 649 (a) (fc), and by adding ^ ( which
may by changed to 3 according to the rules of Sandhi ) to it.
The ST of the reduplicative syllable is changed to f } e. y. TCT
by *he following rule.
N. B. The ^ of a primitive root is not changed to \ when
the characteristic ^ is changed to 5-, f%-fa*Tl^, flr^-ftn%8^
M%*rflrc *-ss*;b*t wr-rasr^-, sra^cau. of
3, however, forms
Note: — (1) A root takes a Desiderative form only, when the
agent of the wish and of the action expressed by the root is the
same; so f^T: *&% I* f^rfft S* and not fW^?W; also the
sense of the root must be the object of the wish:
cannot, therefore, be equal to M
Note:— (2) Though the Deaiderative form of a root is not
to be found often used in cltssictl language in its character of
a verb, yet nominal and participal derivatives from it are not
uncommonly to be met with.
378 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR [ § 617-61*
§ 617. To this ^ the augment f is to be prefixed after Set
roots, optionally after Wet ones and not after those that are
A nit, subject to the following exceptions: —
(1) Boots ending in 3- or 37, ^ and 3? short; and the* roots
3T£ and 35 do not take f - 3-333; Vide § 618> ( <*)> *rTO, &c-
Exceptions:— ^ 'to go/ 5 A. 'to respect/ * 6 A. 'to hold/
»nd i A. 'to purify/ admit of f . ( see also 4 below.)
(8) far, 3T3?^, ST^, *t?^ take f necessarily.
(3) fg^, ^ , sp* , *q^- and gp^do not admit of f in the
Par. ( see § 484 ). In the Atm. they admit f , the last two do
so optionally; 33-T'<i3r«l«t, ftqidlc), &c.
(4) Boots ending in long ^ and f? and the roots rffer, fir,
3T^, 5, f , ^, ^, ^t«^' *o prosper/ 5*j£, ^iR^ ffq^C •• •• ?H^of
the 10 cl. and optional Can. Base of ^T ), ^ ' to give/ ffs;, ^,
Vide § 485. ) take f optionally.
Exceptions: — ^ 'to scatter/ ij 'to swallow/ take f neces-
sarily The intermediate f is not lengthened in the case of these
&o.
(5) The roota g^, if^and w take f in the Par. and reject
it in the Atm.
§ 618. The radical Towels undergo the following changes-
before ^ —
(a) The ^ with f is strong and without f weak.
The usual rule as to GuDa substitute holds good in the
one case and does not in the other; gq^ftqffo,
(ft) The final f and 7 and the penultimate «f of ^ and
( Bubstitut-d for f 2 Par. 'to go/ and for f with 3|fr 'to
§ 618-621 ] CONJUGATION OP VEBBB, 879
remember ' or ' to stud j ' ) are lengthened and final ^ , abort or
long, changed to y^ , or to snt a*ter labials or * when the ^ is
nnaugmented; ra-ftnfta , £-55^, ^-1%^K, 1-mrfH, ?-gS&
*-SS$, &c.
( 6 ) The roots ^ , fir^ and g^ do not change their vowel
to Guna ; and the roots OT , ^tr and jr^r take Sampras AraD a;
( n ) Roots with an initial consonant, and having f or %*
short for their penultimate, and ending in any consonant, except
ir^or 3., change their vowel to Guna optionally whan f ii
prefixed to ^ - ^-%mf » f^TfN ; ST-OT% or 5^% &c-
§ 619. The formation of Desiderative bases of cauiali and
of roots of the Tenth class does not differ from that of
primitive roots.
Art. § 550. should be attended to in forming Desiderativea
from Oansals and roots of the Tenth class.
§ 620. Roots in their Desiderative forms take the same
terminations, Parasm. cr Atmane. that they do in the primitive.
The roots ^n, ££, f? And g$r take Atm. terminations in the
Desiderative.
§ 621. The following roots form their Desiderative bases
irregularly: —
Roots. Desider. base. Third pers sing. Pre.
a to eat '
' to go ;
with erfa ' to study '
with sjfrf * to be convinced'
' to sound '
380 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 621
Boots. Deiidar. base Third pen. sing, Pre
^J 'to give'
^ 'to protect'
% 'to cat'
' to prosper*
with *m, A
to swallow'
' to gather '
ft 'to conquer'
fP3[ 10 cl. & optional) fft^ |fr*n%
Oau. Base of m— )
Hi^ opt cau B. of 9T
9^ 'to stretch' ftd^ or
or
<te'tokffl'
§ 621 ]
Boots.
„
m 'to mewure'
fit Ho throw'
lit 'to destroy'
fc 'to barter'
CONJUGATION OF VXBBB 381
Desider. base. 3rd pen. sing Pre_
injure, to kill'
to propitiate'
desires for Ubei»tion.r
38* SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 621*623
Boots. Desiderative base Third pers. sing. Pre.
^ 8. P. A. <to
obtain'
i*mm
<to throw'
f**T*R
,» rfS IT1TH5T***
(b) Conjugation of the Deaideratiye Base.
Conjugational Tensef
§ 622. 91 is added to the base in the Conjugational Tenses
and then it is conjugated like the special base of the 6th class
in thfl Active and Passive.
Non-Oonjugational Tenses.
3 623. (a) The Perfect is formed by adding srn^ to the base
and appending the Perfect forms of the auxiliary verbs 3T^. ^.
and ^ ( see § 490, 526 ).
(6) In the Aorist the Desiderative Bases take the terminations
of the 5th Variety.
(c) In the Benedict! ve the Parasm. terminations are added
without f and the Atm. ones with the intermediate f .
(d) The remaining tenses have no peculiarities.
* These roots do not change their ^ to ^,
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
383
§ 624. In the Passive, the Aorist 3rd sing, is formed accord-
ing to § 597. ( e ). The forms of the remaining tenses are
made up in the usual way.
Paradigms.
f£ desi. ( 3rd sing. )
'Tenses. Par. Atm. Passive.
Present
Imperfect
Imperative
Potential
Perfect
.F. Future
Sec. Future
Conditional
.Aorist
Benediotive
T^T^»
Boots. 3 sing. Pre.
Roots. 3 sing.
Pre.
-P. A.
^-, ***
^ — l^
. A.
-1 P.
384 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 624-626
Boots. 3 sing. Pre. Roots. 3 sing. Pre.
?t,
&c.
III. FREQUKNTATJ
§ 625. A Frequentative or Intensive form may be derived'
from any monosyllabic root of the first nine classes, beginning
with a consonant. The Frequentative or Intensive is used to
signify the repetition or the intensity of the action denoted
by the verb from which it is derived. *
Exceptions:—
§ 626. (a) f A Frequentative may be formed from 315
' to go, » *t « to go, 3^ ' to eat ' and 3^5 ' to conceal, ' though
these begin with a vowel; and from 35^ cl. 10 ' to hint, ' ^
cl. 10 < to string together ', and 33" c). 10. though they belong
to the 10th cl.
( ft ) The Frequentative of roots signifying motion convey*
the notion of tortuous motion and not of repetition. J The
Frequentative of roots ^^' to cut, ' ^ ' to sink down, ' ^r^
* to go ' 3f^' to mutter prayers, ' 3f^' to yawn, ' ^ ' to bum, '
3^* to bite, ' and JT ' to swallow, ' imply reproach on the-
manner of doing the act $. 9*!'$ar% < he cuts awkwardly, *
falls down badly, '
I P»? Ill 1. 23
» Sid. Kau.
t ^M $f* R^y^rw^orf ^yfr in^WT^r: I Vart. on the above
t fa* *h%*q- *tA \ Pan. III. 1; 23.
$ Q'^tk^^t^">i »i^ij^«3wrr HWTBjMW I Pan. III. 1. 24.
§ 627-629 J CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
385
§ 627. There are two kinds of Frequentative bases derived
from roots; hot a arc formed by a peculiar reduplication of the
root} but in one the affix q- ( q^; ) is added to the root before
reduplication takes nlace, and the base is conjugated in the
Atm. alone; in tho other the affix q- is dropped ( q^^r?F )
and the base is conjugated in Parasm. only ( in the Atm. ulso,
according to some grammarians). It will bo convenient to
call the one of the Atm. Frequentative, and the other the
Parasm. Frequentative.
ATM ANE PA DA -FREQUENTATIVE.
§ 628. The Atm. Frequentative base is formed by adding
q- to the root before which it undergoes the same changes as
before the q- of the Passive; ^T— qffar, T%— xfrqr, sff—
£— 3TO, f
— *q &c.
( « ) 5TT and VRT change their vowel to i\ and ^ preceded
by one radical consonant is changed to ft? and not to f%. ^TT —
roots sir^, sqvjr, fq^7 f^, ar^, sr^, y^ and
take Samprasarana; ?qr and ^ substitute £, and %, 37
for their final vowel} ^TT^ becomes f^n( and
( c ) § 395 should be observed.
§ 629. The form in q- derived as above is reduplicated
according to tho general rules of reduplication.
( « ) If a root begins with a vowel, the following syllable
is reduplicated.
( b ) The vowels ^ and 3- of the reduplicative syllable take
H. S. G. 25.
386 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 629-630
t
their Guna substitute and the ar of the reduplicative syllable is
lengthened; sp
^•^ by § 628 f^fw by reduplication *^fnr by 629
reduplication
„ by reduplication
similarly ^f^ —
§ 630. When a root ends in a nasal preceded by 3? and the
nasal is not dropped, 3 ( changeable to an Anuswara or the
nasal of the class to which the letter following it belongs ) is
inserted between the reduplicative & and the first radical
consonant; the 3T of the reduplicative syllable remtdns un-
changed ( against § 629 b. )
or 3TST«lct, but when 3T53[=3fFr> the A. Freq. base is
3rd sing. *||<H14J^.
( a ) The same rule applies to the roots ^r, q^, 5fl
3R i 3?^' <5^>^ &nd ^?X. ^^ &n^ ^S?rxa^er inserting ^ change
the 3( of the following syllable to 3", ^n;='
or ^T5^=5%^|J^ o' ^F&^Srlr by § 394. qn?£=
or viv»fctrq?t; yg^TST— ^arTST=V^Irt or
or
CONJUGATION OP VEEBS.
§ 631. When a root contains a penultimate 3^ ( ^ ) original
or brought in by samprasarana the syllable f( is inserted between
the 3? of the reduplicative sy 11. ( which remains short against
§ 629 b) and the radical consonant; ^=^T=?r^?qt=
Conjugation of the Atm. Freq. Base.
§ 632. In the Oonjugational Tenses the Atm. Freq. Base
is conjugated like the Cocjugational base of the 4th class in Atm
In the General Tenses, and in all the Tenses of the Passive, the
base loses its final gg when the final q- is preceded by a vowel
and drops the *r itself, -when it is preceded by a consonant.
As regards the Perfect, the Fre. Base takes the Periphrastic
Perfect. In the Aorist the Atm. terminations of the 5th
form are added. In the remaining Tenses the Atm. termina-
tions with the intermediate f prefixed to them are added
as usual. The passive is also formed like the Passive of
derived verbs.
§ 633. Paradigms:— The 3 sing, of sn^W the Atm. Fraq,
Base of the root *z and w tiiat °* the root 37
Tenses. Active. Passive.
Present
Imperfect,
Imperative,
Potential.
388 SANSKRIT GBIMMAS. [ § 633-637
Tense. Active. Passive.
Perfect. itatal>,&c. ^fR?N%&c. Like the Active.
F. Future. ftlf^T ^ftutaf Like the Active.
Sec. Future.
Conditional.
Benedictive.
N. B. Irregular Aim. Fre. Bases will be given under § 639.
PARASMAIPADA FRZQUENTATIVES.
The Paraem. Frequentative is peculiar to the Veda. It*
forms arc very rarely to be met with in Classical composition.
Formation of the Base.
§ G34. The root is reduplicated according to the genera]
rules ol reduplication -, the vowels 5* and g- of the reduplicative
syllable take their guna substitute; and the sr of the redupli-
cative syllable is lengthened ;
§ 635. The rules § 630 (a) (b) apply likewise to the
Parasm. Frequen. Base; ?m-tnw: or §"T^i -<R or
§ 656. ^ or the syllable ft or fr is inserted between the 3?
of the reduplicative pliable and the radical consonant of roots
ending in short ^j" or having it for their penultimate ; similarly
or or is inserted in the case of ; =^-9 or
or
Conjugation of the Parasm. Fre. Base.
§ 637. In the Con jugatlonal Tenses the Paiarm. Frequeatatives
§ 637-638 ] CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 389
follow the conjugation of the special base of a root of the 3rd
class, f is optionally prefixed to the terminations of the singulars
of the Present, of the 2nd and 3rd singulars of the Iinperf.
and of the 3rd sing, of the Impera.. when £ is prefixed to these,
a penultimate short vowel does not take Gupa; ^T-^T^lfft or
or sm^fir or ^n*f£ or srfrfrm or srfirftfSr or
or r ^ or
or
§ 638. As regards the formation of the Non-conjngational
tenses grammarians seom to be at variance. The Perfect follows
the usual rules for the polysyllabic roots. In the remaining
tenses the augment f ia always prefixed except in the Benediotive.
As this form of the Freq. is mostly confined to the Veda
details are not given here
Paradigms.
*rfa£ or «rnr^f rora the root *£.
Present. Imperfect.
or
2 *im\fir ^1^5: ^1^4 3RiH: or
or $w4i& 3Riw:
3 itoitft ftvra: ftqfe swft^ or
Imperative Potential.
1
x 2
or
390 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
Perfect.
or
3
&c.
or Wfl3 or st*jj «ftgra3, 3t*n^ ^iw or ^
, &c. it^t^^:
;: &c.
, &c.
I
Korist
Future.
&c. &c. &c.
2nd Future.
Ac, &c. &e.
Con^Viona?.
&XJ. Ac. &0.
§ 638-639 ]
CONJUGATION OP VEBBS.
39L
Bencdictive.
•v
&C. &C. &C.
Tenses. Atmanepada. Passive.
Pre.
Imperf .
Imp.
Pot.
Perf.
1st Fu. sitHftciT *mmr or
2nd Fu. itafifaict WiSl**in or
Con. wfofSww sr^vrisfczra or
Aor. awtafite
Bened. *ta$Kte ft^OTts or
§ 639. The following roots form their Frequentative*
irregularly.
Boots. Atm. Fre. Par. Freq.
3$ to cover
5 1 cl. to sound
dig
3 to swallow
^ to walk
to worship
be born
to shine
to expand
or
or
, &c.
See § 630 a.
See § 630 a.
See S 630 a.
or
or
or
or
or
392 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [ § 639-642
3ft to lie down W^^ra PTift or
ft to swell stl%ft or smcf ^Mift or
^ to obtain *te»3?[ or SM^RT sfcffitfif or
to inure \zft *t*m or
in other cases siRffi or
IV. NOMINAL VERBS.
§ 640. Verbs are formed from nominal bases by means of
certain affixes. Those ate not very much in common use and are
generally used in the Present Tense. They have various mean-
ings. They sometimes convey the notion of performing, practis-
ing, or using, or treating like the thing or quality expressed
by the noon and are used transitively; sometimes they express
the idea of acting, behaving or becoming like the person or
thing expressed by the noun ; and at others they yield the sense
of desiring or wishing for the thing expressed by the noun.
These will be arranged here under four heads, according to the
affixes by which they are derived.
( a ) By means of the affix ^ ( «RT^[ ) and
Conjugated in Parasm.
§641. When the sense of 'wish' is to expressed, a nominal
verb may be derived from any Subanta or nominal stem by affix-
ing q- to i^. The derivative verbal base derived in this manner
is conjugated in the Parasm. only.
§ 642. Before this q>,
( 1 ) final ar and stf are changed to £; 5^ 3TPJR: **&{%— 5*fr-
1T?r ( T3T + * = 33fHq"M<iT ) 'he wishes for a son.'
( 2 ) final 5 and g- are lengthened ; 9»fl — 3^tafff ' he wishes
ior a poet.'
( 3 ) final ^ is changed to ft}
§ 642-645 ] CONJUGATION OP VBEBS. 393
( 4 ) final aft and aft are changed to 3ftt an^
( 5 ) a final nasal ia dropped and tho preceding vowel is changed
like an original final «owe!5 TTH^Ksftaffr 'he wishes for a king.'
( 6 ) in other cases the final consonant remains unchanged;
sr^Farra 4he wishes for words/ f^-f|gifft ( Sftenlr according
to eomo ) 'he wishes for heaven, ^rftr^— flf«rwft ' he wishes for
holy sticks/ &c.
( 1 ) The Tad. affix expressing ' a descendant of is dropped
and then the changes mentioned above take place; irrttT ( the
son of »nJ
§ 643. The consonant ^ and the syllable 3f^ are inserted
between any nominal stem and the affix *T; jrg 3ftr3«T
W\p*Tf% or trererft '^e wiahes for honey'; so srfv
&c. Final af ifl dropped before 3^5 ^fqfh
(a) 3T^ is inserted niter g^ and apq- when the sense to be con-
veyed is that of longing for them, after $frT *nd &9BT when the
one is desired to be drunk and the4 other to be licked; sr^^rfk *fr:
•the cow longs for the ox/ 3^J^qla> 33T3T 'the mare longs for the
horse/ $frT<qftt ^T5J: ' the child desires to drink/
•the camel wishes for licking the salt.' But fwnrm 'he desires to
have a bull/ artfurifr 'he wishes for a horse/
§ 644. The affix q- is not added to nouns ending in ^ and to
indeclinables; qn^^l^ ^R^iTfR ( he longs for heaven ).
§ 646. 3f$R has af^nrrqiff ' he wishes to eat/ and ar^rsfnTUT
le wishes to possess food/ ^p has ^5q-f%; 'he wishes to drink
water ' and 34^ far ' he wishes to possess water/ and %R has
394 SANSKBIT GRAMMAR. [§645-650
'he wishes to acquire money.' and ^rfium 'he wishes to
be wealthy, '
§ 646. This form of the Nominal verb has not always a
desidertfive meaning.
(AT) Tiie affix q- U added in the sense cf 'treating or considering
like-/ gsfanl* OTPJ, *ta treats the pupil as a son/ f%w>r*rra
<he treats the Brahmana like Vishnu/
beggar considers his hut a palace/ f^rqfa smn^^nn **he king
in his palace considers himself to be in a hut.7
(b) Tt is added to «nT^, *R^ an<* f%3" ^ the senses of 'ador-
ing/ ' serving* and 'striking with wonder respectively, HIWJf?r
'he adores the gods', q-Rgwfff 5*^ 'he serves the preceptor7,
qra 3ft»rq( ^e strikes the people with wonder.' It is also
added to <rq^ in the sesse of ' practising/
§ 647. In the general tenses the affix *r ( $*r^ and
be given hereafter ) is dropped when preceded by a consonant,
*ftqfett»K Pwf .' 1 sing, qfaflm, ^rftriwn^ l»t. and 2nd Fo.
3 sing, from ^mvTf?T, but H^NMfeK from
(b) By meats of theaffii^rwT (^TT^ ) trad conjugated in Par.
§ 648. To express the sense of wishing for that which is denoted
by the noun; the affix $mr is also added like the above and the
base so derived conjugated in the Par. as before, g^qsimfft * he
wishes for a son/ U^i^feimR /he wishes for fame/ q|7fc»imtff 'he
wishes for ghtej
§ 649. The restriction given at § 644 does not hold good in
the case of this affix, fefcl^M, W^l^lrf
(c) By means of the affix T%rjo) and conjugated in Par.
$ 650. Nominal bases are formed without the addition of any
affix: the characteristic signs of the tenses and moods and the
§ 650-653 ] CONJUGATION OP VKBBS.
395
personal termin tions being added immediately to the nominal
base. The bases thus derived convey the notion of acting or
behaving like that which is expressed by the noun , and are cdn-
jugated in the Parasm.
§ 651. The penultimate 37 of a noun ending in a nasal is
lengthened. Tbe base is treated like a root of the 1st con-
jugation , its last yowel only taking Guna before this 3?; 3T
( name of Vishnu ) f^ a<H<ffi — 3TT?T ' he acts like Vishnu, r
< he acts like fjwr ' ( %wum lat sing. ), 9?f%— ^r-
I act the poet or behave like a poet, ' ft— ^TW ' he be-
haves like a bird, ' m3T-mdll3 ' ^e or it acts like a garland '
( Peri mate* &c. ), fas-far^ 4he acts like a father.' ^-H^ft
* act? like the earth ' ( Perl. fWT^, &o. as ^ is the base),
fnr^nfTRf^ ' he acts like a king/ qrw^-q-^iRffw ' it serves as
aroad/&c So f^r«rf?t from f^, ife^mffi from
name of Indra.
( b ) The words aumiyii ( a bold man ), gt? ( & child ) and
take the affixes ^TSF and f^optionally and are conjugated
in the At man t 4|q4|?«r?t or ^^il^MIMc^, j)4d or C^SIM^, |^R?f
or jfi-mq^.
( d ) By means of the affix q- ( ^q^ ) and
conjugated in the Atm.
§ 652. The affix tr ( 3*r^ ) is added in the same sense aa
above to nominal sterna and the nominal verbs so derived are
conjugated in the Atm.
§ 653. Before this affix the final 37 of a nominal base is
lengthened, 3ff remains unchanged, other final letters undergo
the same changes as they do before the other q- ( 73^ ). Tbe
final of a noun ii changed to srr optionally and that of
396 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 653-655
and 3U3T^ necessarily, ^jsor $% 3TT^KT, ^OTTT^ ' he acts like
$**; ' *TOTE— qgmflv ^Siro* ' he behaves like one who is
famous, ' f%5^— re^nfifr, re5**rW * be acts like a learned man,
&c.; bat 3TMfT-3Tl^nM ' acts like one who is lustrous ' ( power-
ful ;; mcq<^-^CH^rqd « she behaves like an Apsaras/
( a ) A feminine noun not having ^ for its penultimate drops
its fern, term., f:ffHR airatti*— $*rm*n* ' he behaves like a
girl/ $Ruii* aiKKfil Sttornrft ' she acts like a female deer';
'acts like a stout woman.' But tHR^aT f ^
'she acta like a female cook,7 and not
she acts like a
co-wife, TrenT has ^Ta^i 'she behaves like a young woman.'
§ 654. The affix q- is added to a few nouns, such as ^
'much/ Jirgp 'alow/ 'qw^W1 'learned,' fpreff 'generous-minded^,
^"^H^ 'agitated/ &o. in the sense of 'becoming what it was not
before/ or 'what it was not like to before/ gr^r: *rem ^TT7?T ' what
was not much now becomes much/ 3?9TOTqi% ' he ( who was not
agitated before ) becomes agitated/ similarly giHiqff &c.
§ 655. The following are the different senses in which the
affix qpiTj^ is nsed in the particular cases given below.
(a) It is added to ^3, ^^ ^s^ and lyf^ in the sense of ' de-
sirous of committing sin/ <rrqr f%WUf— tf^TOfr, ^^nTff, &c.,
added to ^^ it has also the sense of ' prompt in',
( <ntf ^gSc^Tf^ i«nl:, Sid Kau. ).
(b) to f^TTtq- used obiectively, flR^nqcT {is ruminating.'
(c) to ^rsj 'taars/ 3^Jnj 'heat/ and qn«T,in the sense of 'send-
ing forth, vomiting.' ^|^M|i|ff ' he iheds tears/ ^RpfFT ' gives
out heat/ qr^TPTfr \ sends forth foam.'
§ 655-657 ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 397
( d ) to 3Hr and others in the sense of ' experiencing or enjoy-
g»' S# %^T^ SOTTR ' he enjoys happiness '• but
' he show* the happiness of another.'
( « ) to 5T5?, %r, **J*, 31*, q^ * sin', ^f^T 'a fair day',
<a cloudy day' and jfrsn; ' f °g, kea^y d®w/ in the sense of 'mak-
ing or doing;1 ^ri* <E^ra $l«*iWtt c he makes a sound '(also
cau. it
( 0 ) By means of the affix cpr? ( q- ; and
conjugated in Parasm. and Atm.
§ 656. The affix q- is added to &\\fa and some other words
and to words ending in the affix srr (€Tx[)andthe nominal
base thus formed is conjugated in the Parasm. and Atinane.;
*- 9- «Jtfi?r— WlrfffPTirr-^ 'becomes red:' q^Mdl^ ' utters the
sound Pat pat/
( /) By means of the affix f ( foi^r and
and conjugated in Parasm. and Atm.
§ 657. Verbal bases are formed from the nouns given below
by the addition of the affixes 5 ( for^T ), and y ( ftr^) with vari-
ous senses; those derived by means of for? are conjugated in
the Atm. and those by fur^[ in the Par.; e. y. 5^5- with |%, 35
and qft — T?H^3^ *raiscs the tail,' ftg-o^rf, qff^'ci^^} fT»«na^-
?jar 'collects together the vessels'; ^^fjgpcq^ f*Tg: 'the mendicant
collects together or wears tattered garments-/
Manavaka'j f^sr~m«T^fff 3W*C ' ne
boiled rice with ( curds, curry, &c. );'
weaves cloth of a very thin texturej'
salt with condiments; ? sT^qr^t «nT^ 'he observes the vow of
living uoon milk only;' jr^gfar^ri^fi^* he observes the vow of
398 SANSKBIT GBAMMAE. [ § 657-660
abstaining from eating food at a Shadra's house*,'
'he clothes with a garment;, 555— gfKrfff 'he uses a large
plough-/ qn%— cj^ra1 ' he quarrel* ! ' &*— 5*^ (
Sid. Kau. ); <j^f « sin or hait or matted hair, ' ( g^
I Sid. Kau. )— g^ri?r ' ties into a
braid the hair}' &c.
§ 658. f is changed to grffq when added to ^q-, 3^^- and
§ 659. ^ is further added in the following cases; —
( declares her variegated.); &c., &c.
The various changes taking place here before the affix q- the
student will easily notice as irregularities.
( g ) By means of the affix ? ( *Tf> ).
g 660. There are several loots* which are also Praiipadi-
kas and which may ba regarded as Nominal verbal bases derived
from those Pratipadikas by means of the affix *r ( q^ ). The
more important of these are given below: —
f*ri=Hr he scratches. *m— ««rff& ^« worships.
he offends against, f^^-f^q^fri treats medically.
he becomes angry, also g^-f!|Ujfd it contains arrows.
tfg-gflr according to ^T5?T. Tg?—*»^«>tf ne stammers.
becomes hand- %gnr, ^f— %<<ftr4lc), «<4Wl3
some, mild or gentle, honours, he sports or becomes merry.
STS— 3T^?nff% ( 3TWTH ) he is f eft— ftjfWfr h® is angry or
jealous, he envies, &'. feels ashamed.
* In the Kaumudi these roots aje classed separately under
the head of*^jrf^Tor^or the group of roots beginning
§ 660-661 ] PARASMAIPADA & ATMANEPADA. 399
he shines. ^WT— 3*3" wfi he approaches.
it dawns. JTfV— irffrKT he is adored, &c.
he is quick in f?PKfr— M<t^f% he disappears.
understanding, 3CT^-3W3rnT he becomes healthy.
5W — &^*\ IT ftek happy. 3T^— 3T^n?^he becomes powerful.
unhappy. <ni^— M<4t«lfd it spreads.
CHAPTER XIII.
Parasmaipada and Atmanepada.
§ 661. As already remarked there are two Padas in Sans-
krit, the Parasmaipada and the Almanepada. The Parasm.
denotes that the fruit of the action accrues to some one differnt
from the agent, as q-^fff 'he cooks for another/ frM-ufi *' makes
soma one do something for another, &c.' The Atm. denotes
that the fruit of the action is (fcjmffi »'. 0. it accrues to the agent,
cpqrt <he cooks for himself,' ifeK^rt 'he makes another do some-
hing for himself,* &c.
( a ) If, however, there be a word showing the accrual of the
fruit of the action to the agent, the Atm. is optionally used, as
*nnT or ^nrfff ' he off era his own sacrifice/ ^ ^r ^^ Or
'he weaves his own mat/ ^ ir^ q5T^fer% &c.
^b) When the causal form of a transitive verb is used re-
flexively, or when the object in the primitive sense becomes
* This distinction, however, seems to be very little observed
in practice. Even the best Sanskrit writers are found using
both the Padas promiscuously. It cannot even be supposed
that this distinction is meant to be observed where a root
admits of both the Padas. The Dashaknmaraohafita and the
Kadambari afford several instances in which the two Padas are
used exactly in the same sense.
400 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 661-662
the agent in the causal, the Atm. is used except in the sense of
'remembering with eagerness, &c./ *nur *4 mqPd Devotees see
Bhava/ WT WH; %$ifa 'Bhava *hows himself to his devotees/
bat f HTfcT
**<ftc*ro: (Sid, Kau.). Vide Sid Kau. on Pan. 1. 3. 67.
(e) When the agent of the action denoted by a verb cannot
be other than an animal, the causal of the verb takes the Par.
even when the action refers to the agent as frog: $T?T 'Krishna
sleeps/ iftfr spot 3TT<nrft 'the cowherdess lulls Krishna to sleep/
but qrw qanr <tne fruit falls down.' *rg: qj# vmm 'the wind
causes the fruit to fall down/ &c.
( d ) In the case of verbs meaning <to eat/ except 3^ t and
'to move,' their causals take the Parasm. even when the f rait of
the action refers to the agent ; HUKqui, 3TT9Q1W 'makes another
eat/ ^RSWrft, ^Pnrft, 'he shakes' &c.
Exceptions to ( c ) and ( d) — to ( c ) ^ •' to pacify, ' qrjj with
3Tf ' to draw in ' q^ with 3fT * to endeavour, ' qf?JJ^ ' to faint?
^^ ( to shine, ' 9^ ' to apeak, 7 ^w ' to dwell ', and ^ < to
drink; ' to ( d ) — qr ( to drink, ' ^ ' to dance; ' in the case
of these roots the usual rule holds good;
§ 662. When the notion of gafctrfrtfTl t. e. doing wbat is not
proper for one to do, or the exchange of duties is to be implied.
the Mm. is used, 3T5HJT: ^^TTR clffcf^fth ' the Brahmana reaps
corn7 ( which is the work of a Sudra and not his ). vrjj: °?n^ar
' the religious duty is changed' ( as when a S'ndra discharges
the duties enjoined upon a Vaisya, &c. ^rgT^rV n^lrf: 'tho kings
exchange blows.
(a) But verbs implying motion, or meaning to kill, the
roots £3[ and other similar roots do not take the Atm. even
when an exchange of action is implied,
668-664] PABASMAIPADA & ATMANEFADA. 401
§ 663. The Oausals of the roots 5^ , g^, 5T^, f with 3»ft, J ,
are P***8111? ^lM<rQ <nrn, 'JfawrtS ^nrrfo «fisiufB
: (Bid.
Kau. ); arwift fldim^wfr ( Sid. Kau. ).
( Sid. Kan. ).
664. The following is an alphabetical list of the roots that
change their proper Fada after certain prepositions under tine
circumstances given in each case.
g^g-. — when preceded by a preposition is conjugated in either
Pada ; ^r\f ^rorf*t%.
f with smj-in tbe causal takes the Parasm. ^UH
— when preceded by a preposition is conjugated in either
Pada; qr^r arf^ft-^i 'he destroys sin ;' ftTftfft 'discards •/ fr^r
gfa"-^ 'he gathers together.'
^ with 5^ is Atm.; qim*l TOnfhCT: Bh. VIII. 16; <aJI
my desires have come to me »'. e: are gratified/
3|f^^with ^ns[ — is Par. when used transitively, and Atm.
when used intransitively; ^x^ffi 'he collects ;' ti^^^ *ii
collected/
fT — without a preposition admits of either Pada. It i»
Parasm. with 315 and qrj*j 3Tg*»ftfS ?HWat STRWORir I (K«d.>,
?ft ^^M<lt^< &c- ( Bhatti. VIII. 50. ); it is Atm. with
preposition in following senses:— (1 ) 4j«.vn f or 'hurting/ 'kill-
ing/ as 3r^^?t ' informs against ( with a view to injure );'
( 2 ) 3T*£TO or 'censuring, overcoming /
'the hawk reproves the snail/ ( 8 ) ^r«T or -serving, attending
. 3. 79.
t *I
H. 8. O. 26
402 SANSKBIT GBAMHAB. [ § 664
upon}' as 5Kgf *& 'he serves Hari/ ( 4 ) ;&Tf finFT or 'acting
violently/ 'outraging/ as trf^rn^ JT$^ 'outrages another's
;' ( 5 ) qfefo^ or 'imparting an additional quality' ( ^fr
T Kashika \ as <T\T: a^tfctU ST^ar 'fnel imparts
heat to water / ( 6 ) sn^qR or reciting.,' as «TTOT: U&*ft 'recite*
stories from the Vedas ;' ( 7 ) 3"<rot*T or 'applying to use ;' at ^nf
*Tf^ ( ^I?T§ 5RT l^fogTF ??W ) Devotes a hundred ( Rupees,
&c.) to holy purposes-/ cf. also Bhatti. VIII. 18.— with grrq-*
it is Atm. in the sense of ' forgiving or overpowering / 51?
srf^^^ff ^forgives or overpowers bis enemy./ bat CTgqrMfvifrOfff
^y^- 'the S*astra authorises men/ With fq-f it ia Atm. when
used transitively. ^T*T \^W^ 'P^P^3 study/
*THT^: M he musician varies the tones/ but r%?f
<Love affects the mind/ fiif$ qrift ;^r Bh. VIII. 21. ^ with
grq- in the sense of ' helping or doing good to ' is used in both
the Padas; ^ ffc sr^i<ft <TmT**T ^Tf^rT: ( Shar. Bha. ) 'two
strong lights do not indeed help ( t. e. serve to intesify ) each
other / ^Tf 5J^(^T^ff ^Tf <T^HT 'that is wealth by means of
which one obliges another' ( Kir. VIL 28. ).
The Oausal of 5 is Atm. when ffnOT is prefixed to it ; q^
'mispronounces the accent on the syllable.'
?37 — <to scatter' with stTt ^s Atm. in the sense of 'turning up
or scratching with joy/ or turning up with the intention of
making an abode or for maintenance ( by quadrupeds or birds )•/
in this sense ^ is prefixed to ap, 3TTf?C?lt yft %& 'the bull turns
up the ground in joy/ similarly 3jtrr%^ $cr$4l
a hole for lying in) *qr STOCTTraf; ^
. 9).
Pan. 1. 3. 33.
: I STCT^g- 1 Pan. 1. 3. 34-35.
P&Q- VI. 3. 142.
Sid.
§664 ]
PARASMAIPAPA & ATMANEPADA.
403
When the root has its original sanee, the Far. is used and
^ is not inserted: ^fjmf^ aTTfo'rfa' ^fir 'the woman scatters
flowery 3rtTT%tfff «T^t '<jf§^ I
f^H* — when not preceded by a preposition is conjugated hi both
the Padas. But it is used in Atm. by itself when the meaning ii
'free movement, energy, development or increase, '&c;. ^ Rj 5TO7t
: 'his intellect moves freely in (i.e. proves very powerful in
mastering) the Rigveda;'tfriji4iuftRqV^ 'moving unobstructed in
the assembly of the enemy' (Bh. VIII. 22); ^vmjJTW *RTOt 'shows
ability or energy for studying;' * T^Rnr i&ft >H^MIH I Vikra.1.16
'the Sh&stras find enlargement in him or are
satisfactorily mastered by him.' In the same senses it is Atm.
when preceded by CT nnd qrr only (t. e. is Par. if preceded by any
other prep. ) siaRW*, <m*»*ra cf. ffg^^f ^ mt&B ( showed his
might ); T#ft3g7nKfjff ( made bold ) wpft «TW AffilUC I Bh.
VIII. 22-23; but *tamf7r ( *rr%S f%: )• When preceded by 3TT it
is Atm. in tne sense of 'the ascending or the rising of a heavenly
body;' annsufr *& 'the sun rises,' but 3TOUmft OTt f^ftmT^ 'the
smoke issues forth from the upper terrace;' Also when preceded by
ft, in the sense of 'a graceful movement of the feet, or ascending,'
*T>J ft*Flfit wnft 'the horse movei gracefully;' tortfforiTrTf *&*'
'the joint splits;' — and by sr and ^r in the sense of 'beginning/
as in ^ «T: M I Kum. III. ^. 'thus began to
talk with him in private;' but sn&mffl 'goes
'to buy' is Atm. when the prepositions 3T¥, <rR and
are prefixed to it (with f^ it means 'to sell1),
e/. Bh. VIII. 8.
Vart. %•
t
;
J4«)l
. 1.2.38-43.
: Pan. 1. 3. 18.
404 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [ § 664
aft**— '*o play1 IB Atm. after the prepositions g^, 3fT,
and ^, 3l3-3TT-<TfT-tf-3frgit> bnt not when «*$ governs a noun,
fa> t. «. 'plays with Manavaka.
'
Par. when it means 'to creak as a wheel/ as
throw* is Par when preceded by the preposition*
3rf*r, q% and «rra; ^rprf^Rr 'throws up/ ^MI^Mf^ 'throws
'throws back.'
TO— with ^ is Atm; ^^ 5^ ' whets or sharpens his
weaponj ' safest ^^ < dispels anxiety.'
— with^isAtro. in the sense of 'to be proper, unite
with, join'; *r^f d*l**a, ^TTH: ^firss^, &c., but
goes to a village.' In the Causal it takes the Atm. in the sense of
< having patience or waiting/^ |«m*w ?mr^ ' have patience first'.
3J\ar— 'to be greedy' is Atm in the Can. when the sense is 'to
deceive/ monns »riNr?* ' he deceives MAnavaka-' but *$& <|^fd
'he makes the dog greedy. '
tr§ — with ^ro is Atm. when the meaning is 'to pledge one's
word, to promise, to proclaim;' ^filf?T ^T«^ 'he pledges his word;
S& ^fiRW ^e promises 100 (Rupees, &c.)/ ^m^ **MftHl 5^0^
* proclaims Hie merits of his master/ but ^rTrrm 2TO *he swallows
down a mouthful.' If it ( t. e ij 6 Oon. ) be preceded by 3ft-, it
is Atm. srefttTO ^TTftnf R5Tr«r: * the fiend drinks blood. '
'to walk' with 35 is Atm. when used transitively-
* *?ter3*<n?wr*rPan,. 1. 3. 21. 3^: ^fjTf^RPTmi Sid.Kau.
t 3TWT??rmwr: f|nr: I Pan. 1. 3. 80.
t ^»Tt ^^f^WTT^ I Pan- * . 3. 29.
S 5R^T^?: fTH: Jn%5TT^ I P^. 1. 3. 51-52.
$ 3n[W ^T^«S*i^ I ^'fl^dV^T^Tfj^ I ^MW fTF
Pan. 1. 3. 63-79.
'§664 ] PABASMAIPADA & ATMANEPADA. 405
' ne transgresses his duty.' MM$lWi:
\ Bhatf. VIII. 31j but «Hmm<ft ' vapour rises up.'
With fro or ^HH^l it is Atm. when used with the instrumental
of a vehicle; T^T H^(<\ 'he moves In a chariot' ( See Bh.
VIII. 32 ); arf%*ror 3^Rfc S»mt Bag. XIU. 19. « now passes
through the path of gods/
3T3 — in the Causal takes the Parasm.
T%* — when preceded by fi and qn in the sense of ' to con-
quer/ and <to defeat' or <to find unbearable/ respectively, is
Atm. fasro%, 3Tf^ «UlsHqe*, ~3ren«Hldl WWlfr 'gets tired of
study/ ^ q<MqHMl^r 'filling up the sky, &c .' ?ft
'her who was getting disgusted with/ &c. Bhatt.
VIII. 9. 71.
— < to know' used intransitively by itself is Atm.
( ^rmi ^^l^r snrS?T Sid. Kau. i. e. ^proceeds to perform
a sacrifice having obtained ghee for it ); with the preposition
3W it is Atm. in the sense of 'denying/ as ^nf 3pr*TRnt denies
« hundred-/ with srfft in the sense of * acknowledging or
promising/ and with ^nc in the sense of 'expecting/ it is also
Atm.; snr STKftTTsfift * acknowledges a hundred/
promises the hand of his daughter by ( t. e.
on the condition of ) the drawing of Hara's bow/ $Ttt
'looks for a hundred/ *n?rft «nprf ^nsmff 'thinks of his
mother/ When this is used without a preposition and when
the fruit accrues to the agent it takes the Atm. irf *rr4ft;
when a preposition is prefixed to it and it is used transitively,
it takes the Par. *ric£t$ * iMMtft *g? :. In the Desiderative
this root takes the Atm.
<TtrJ— ' to heat' with ft or ^ , when used intransitively, is
I Pan. 1. 3. 19.
4tqaH«Di^ I ^^yf^lWJIHHIWI^ I P&n. 1. 3. 44— 46j
I Pan- I- 3- 27. m^rf^iiffi Irfcm I Vart.
406 SANSKBIT GBAMMAE. [ § 664
Aim. ^rfqit or QdMH TJ$:} when used transitively it ia Atm.
if it has a limb of the body of the agent for its object;
or ftw&l ITfifT * he warms his hand, but STTTllr 5*o
<a goldsmith heats gold', 4bft JtsRT ^TfoTSrTTm; when it means
'to practise penance7 it is Atm. and is conjugated like a root
of the fourth class.
According to some cT<r with 3jg is Atm; 3*3cfq?t -repents/
^T — #<to give ' ( 3 cl. ) by itself takes either pada; but when
preceded by 3H it is Atm. in any other sense than opening ( the
mouth, &c. ); \CT 3ir3% 'accepts money ;' fifaf 3JT^% 'acquires
knowledge-/ ^r^% ^r^at *Wf*T W «Tg4 ( Sak. ) * does not pluck
your foliage through affection-,' but g^- cqjTTTfff 'opens his
mouth-/ l^qiT^t c?rr53Tf?T S^T1 ' tDe doctor opens the tumour on
the root/ «f^t$9 eTT^fffT ' breaks open the bank of a river;'
but if the mouth belongs to another the exception is removed;
sUTSTJT mifW gtf frftf^r: 'ants break open the mouth of a
moth' ( M&h. Bhar. ).
^T — <to give' ( I. cl. ) when preceded by the preposition ^m
singly or coupled with any other preposition takes the Atm.
provided it is used with the Instrumental in the sense of the
Dative; ^TWT tta-ogci or tfsnTx^ ' gives ( something ) to the
maid-sei vant/ but ^TTOT ^CT ^9*T^*n% f%?R ' gives wealth to a
BrahmaDa through Ma maid-servant.'
S^— 'to see preceded by ^q1 and used intransitively takes the
Atm.; ^rowi 'sees ( thinks ) well;' this root takes the Atm. in
the Desiderative; f^frld 'wishes to see.'
y — <to run' is Par. in the Oau.
3 — with ^r^ is Atm. in the sepse of 'preparing, being ready
rf^dt I Pan. 1. 3, 20.
Sid. Kau. qTT^I^ R^f: I V&r..
§ 664 ] PABASMAIPADA & ATMANEPADA. 407
' prepares for battle- ef.
Bha.
— 'to beg or solicit for any thing ' is used in the Par. in
the sense of ' to hope for', 'to wish well' or <to give blessings to/
it ia exclusively Atm. *rf<Nt TTO
Sid. Kau. ifrgm ;mn* 51%: ( Bhop, )
In " *rO% T%g <rfff * W*1* " Kir. XIII. £9. the root is
used in the Atroanep&da. Bat Bhattoji Dikshit supposes that
the reading here should be <?ro% and not JTTO^T. Mammata also
in his KavyapraKasha finds fault with the Atm. use of this root
when critising the verse ^ fSTm^TSW ^^\ ^STT^t HT $*tt:
&c. and says that »n$rrf should be ^i^rfar,
^Tj — < to lead or carry ' with a preposition or with the pre-
positions 3*3*. g'q- or {$ is Atm. in the following senses:—
( 1 ) ^T^T^^ or < showing regard for; ' ^i^- ^^r * gives in-
struction in the COD elusions of the S Astra ' (
Sid. Kau. ), ( 2 ) ^^r^^ or * raising up; '
:; ( 3 ) Stt^T&ROT or l initiating into sacred rites, '
ftR[?fT ^PRCmfM sn^cft^^: I 3<ra*Ri<feaTmTT-
f| 3<Ffan an^'tef &H^ ( Sid. Kan. ); ( 4 ) ^f or 4 ascer-
taining the real nature of; ' 3r4r ^Tff RfsTJUtfTHr^: ; ( 5 ) *fa
or ' employing on wages; ' ^Hch'<|§(T?RT?V * employs labourers on
wage*. ( 6 ) RTn^T or ' paying off aa a debt, taxes ' &o ; ^
f^Wff *r|r$tf wm ^%A^ViAn(!^ and ( 7 ) &m or < spending
or applying to good use; ' ^Tcf f%«T7% vrrf^ ltm3% ?r?r^: ( Sid.
* 3TTf$[ft ^T^ .« Vartika.
t B^
^dfBT I PAn. I. 3. 3G-37
q;^ ^115 '
i tn? Q*i
I Sid. Kau.
408 SANSKBIT GRAMMAS. [ § 664
Kan. ). sft with ft is Aim. when the object is something other
than a limb of the body but exists in the agent; as q?ft frnrit;
trat sfr ifrvf f*=wf> fSpar: , irrrt ftsnrft ( turns aside ).
9 — with «n* is Atm. sn^tt 'he praises. '
srs^*— with 3RT is Atm. in the sense of ( taking leave of —
« 3nT*9K* ffcrereWS*" Meg. 10. « take leave of this thy dear
friend, ' also with the preposition gr$ when nsed intransitively,
'he ascertains. '
Atm. except in the sense of ' protecting, ' 3Jt3«f
« eats food/ 553* sfirflW sftrfftr* «**3T* ' th« protector of
the earth enjoyed ( experienced the pleasure from the possession
of ) the earth alone;' f ^ 3f4t f :*rOTTftr ^F ' old people suffer
hundreds of miseries; ' JTff ^Rfe ' protects the world. '
^r;— with qft is Par.; sR^tqQ < endures; ' but gfr^sirfr « he
touches. '
inc J — with 3rf is Atm. either when used intransitively or has
a limb of the body of the agent for its object; auq-cgfo ^: ' the
tree spreads; ' <^N-o^ Trftr^' stretches forth the hand; ' but
arnrsgriR ^mgvr^ t draws up the rope from the well7; preceded
by JETCL, ^X and ^ ifc is Atm< excePf- ^en ifc has a literary
work for its object; v^f ^N^$S 'puts on a garment jj7
'lifts up a load;' rf^ 3*4^ ( gathers rice;' but
* tries hard to learn the Veda '. qg;— with 77 is Atm. in the
of 'accepting, or espousing a girl;'^r«T dM^Wfr Accepts the
: iVartika.
t S^t^TO I P*n. 1. 3. 65.
*1 IH
t «H#t «mf5T: I P»n. 1. 3. 28. mKUfcufr TOT 3F$r I Pan. 1. 3.
75. mm; ^f^^ Pan. 1. 3. 2. 56. ftjfrtfwtf I Pan. 1. 2. 16.
§664] PARASMAIPADJL & ATMANEPADA. 409
gift given;' CTira&Tt ^7VT 'marries a girl'; in the Aoriat this
drops its nasal optionally; TT*T: ^Tmt a*4Nd (See TJttar. III. 112),
; but <r^q- *TT*rf ^nrs^ 'makes another's wife his own.'
— pjeceded by sr or ^rr, or generally by a prep, beginning
or ending with a vowel, and does not refer to sacrificial vessels,
is Atm. ST5%, T^%, *3OTT: fOTT *ro ( Bh. VIII. 39): but
'arranges the sacrificial vessels ;> q- f*rf 3mm-
"srS ftifrk (S'ak.) 'who appoints her to the duties of the hermitage';
sfl^JTi, S^rftW fWfc Rag. XI 62. 'the lord of the earth asked
his preceptor ;' <TUHrH3m»mnMa: ^IT^ 'Aja employed the
six expedients beginning with peace.' Bag. VIII. 21.
zpj[~-in the Cau. takes the Par.
^jrj-— «to sport' changes its Pada when preceded by the pre-
positions ft, ?RT and qft; *?§?TflTriff*JT * cease, oh child, from
this»( Uttar. I. 33.). nft>* arfcfh* Ibid. I. 27.
Manu. II 79.
4 was for a moment delighted with his sight.' With grrr it is
Par.; ^^ ^mrm fJW?ft??nJ: ( Sid. Kau. ) When intran-
sitively used it takes either Pada ; ^MiHI^-l. Sports'; cf .
, &c. Bhatt. VIII. 54. 55.
#• — 'to melt, to embrace' is Atm. in the cau. in the tense of
Adoring, defeating or deceiving. ' vHdlftgsFM^ 'is adorable on
account of his matted hairV Zp^* &W*1<\ *3\ 'the dog is defeated
by means of a stick ;' 5*5^ gffo»lggimm ^i^Rl^: ( over-
powers ) ; m^ir ^rqu^r WT^rnr.* ' the Brahmana is deceived by
reason of his folly.'
— in the can. is Atm. in the sense of 'deceiving;'
'deceives Minavaka;' but stfjf TOTTff 'avoids a serpent.'
- 3- 64.
\ Vartika.
t «II<MR>Wt TR: I ^re I f^TTT^^^T^ I Pan- I. 3. 83-85.
t ^fiq=*«ft: TOwnT Pan. 1. 3. 69.
410 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 664
^ — f'to apeak' is Atm. in the following senses: — ( 1 ;
or 'showing brightness ( pioficiency in )jf ^n% sr^T 'is adept in
the Sastra ;' ( 2 ) ^q^iVTTT or 'conciliating or coaxing' (generally
preceded by ^q- ); Wfirr?^^^ mc^rrftaw-, ( 3 ) =TR or 'know-
ledge' srrer 1& 'knows the Sastra/ ( 4 ) trgr or 'effort, toil;'
^ ^^% 'labours in the field-' (5)frof*f or 'disagreement,
quarrel,' ( generally preceded by f% in this sense ); N<4^rd; q^Qft
HHr*i 'of mutually conflicting Saatras / and
( 6 ) ^mrsror or 'coaxing, requesting / ^r^rf ^<T^T 'praises the
donour,' &c • with ^fsr it is Atm. in the sense of 'distinct and
loud speech (as that of men gathered together )•' ^
'the Brahmanas are speaking aloud together .' bat
7%orJj TTr!3 ^OT^f^cT <§?F^T: 'oh beautiful one, the cocks are
crowingj' with 3^5 it is Atm. when used intrasitively; atffi^fr
tt> 3ttmW -the Katha BrabniaDa imitates ( speaks on the side
of : or recites like ) the Kalapa Brahmana;7 but 337 3f«|3$lff
•'reproduces what is said j' '^g^m snoTf 'the lute imitates the
notes (indistinctly );' with f%sr it is optionally Atm. in the sense
of 'disagreeing or disputing -' |%ST^7^T-^ %?TT: the physicians
disagree; with grq- it is Atm. in the sense of 'reviling, reproach-
ing, refusing/ when the fruit of the action refers to the agent •
^T? 'greedy of we<h reviles others unjustly-7
'refuses justice ;' but ^M^^lff 'reproaches' ( when
the result does not refer to the agent ); cf.
Manu. IV. 236; when the fruit of the action is indicated as
referring to the agent the Atm. is optional ; ^3^ STT^r^m-'cr ^f
( Sid. Kau. on Pan. 1. 3. 77 ); ^ with ^qr in the sense of 'advis-
ing or speaking stealthily/ when used transitively, is Atm.
ft«t 3<nr^T 'gives advice to his pupil;' M^KK sq-^ ' speaks
stealthily with another's wife.
t
: I Pan. 1. 3. 47-50, 73.
§ 664 ] PARASMAIPADA & ATMANBPADA. 411
rc— is both Par. and Atm. but with % is restricted to the
Parl
f%^* — ' to know ' ( 2nd cl. ) with *fij is Atm. when used
intransitively in the sense of ' knowing of, being aware of/ and
adds j; to ^ optionally in the 3rd per. plural; ^ft^r or tff^r
•they know well;' cf. % * fiN^d srtfr&n^rftTOT^RjaTT Bh. VIII.
17.; * who do not know that the mountain Mainaka ia the friend
of Vayu ?.' but *n%rf: FSH^jft <T^fif> ^TOT Bhatt. V. 37,
aa it is used transitively. It is also Atm. with ^f^ in the sense
of ' recognising-,' as tfnNf.
f^tf— with ft is Atm. fti$^?t; %pq;;qrf} rgfc$l(T &o, Bhatt
VI. 143. Alao when ^ft is prefixed to f%, 3TmRR5Tff ^JTHT
( Sid. Kan. ) 'takes to a good path-/ see Bh. VIII. 80.
3T<jJ- — meaning <to reproach or to abuse' takes the Atm.
even when the fruit of the action does not accrue to the agent;
S — takes the Atm. in the sense of * wishing to study;'
f%$T<T * wishes to study archery.'
3£ — ft <to ^ear ' witn ^f^ ifl Atm. when used intransitively;
frsjqj^r ' hears well-/ ^5jnj«^ 3W ( Bhat. VII. 16. ) < Listen with
heed, oh monkey/ cf. f%ar5T T: ^oyff ^T fip SJS: Kir. 1. 5; but
' he hears the sound/ This root takes the Atm. in
the Deaiderative, except when 3TT or srf?T precedes it, ^^It; but
3*T — TOT — S^fpT-
— with ^F, 3??r, sr and ft is
*
Vartika. %wf3rHP?r Pan.
t %ft^T: Pan. I. o. 17. J ^rq" STToJ*^ I Vartika.
i Vartika.
: | Pan. 1.3.22 3^ srfd^l^ligTO^TR^ Vartika
| Pan. 1, 323. 24
Vartikas. ^TT^H^^ot I Pan. 1. 3. 25.
Vaitikas.
1. 3. ^6.
412 SANSKRIT GRAMMAE. [ § 664
. 1. 36. ) 'fearing an outrage does not abide by
one who is mild, ' Bee Mrch. 1. 36. ( In the sense of standing
•till, &c. it is used in the Par. grot * qfiteld sfn^N
| Hariv. ); ^RtTO?^ 1*^(3^3: ) ' if * 'being
remains breathing though only for a moment; '
I Sis. 11. 34. srfifff?* SeeRagh. IV. 6; Kum.
22. f*filH%; *)$* WTCtr fttfisriTR Sis. IV. 4; with HT it is
Atm. in the sense of ' laying down a proposition, asserting
solemnly;' ^rs^ f*ftf 3*Tm&^ ' Affirms that sound is eternal; '
H* ft* WT W CTTOHIWKft ( Mah. Bh&. ) ' for thy sake I will
drink water or poison;7 in the sense of ' observing' it takes the
Par. when used transitively; ftfimrf^BrfS ' observes the vow.'
TOT is Atm. by itself in the sense of ' disclosing one's intention
or abiding by;' iftcfjr $«nw faerfr, 3H^nf ST*HHIlft ffq*p I
Kir. IIL 14; 'who, when in doubt, takes
recourse to Karna and others ( as the deciders of the matter in
'hand ).' With 3^ it is Atm. except in the sense of 'getting up
or getting by right.' Htfcl^frlB^ 'earnestly thinks of (aspires to)
absolution-/ ( See Kir. XI. 13. and Sis. XIV. 17. >, but <ffor-
a hundred is yielded to him by a
village ( as tax, &c. ).' With 37 it is Atm. in the sense of:
( 1 ) * worshipping with the recital of holy texts,' s?rjJ
' worships the Agnidhra fire with the recital of Vedic
texts,' * ^Jgrrr^T% ***- Bh. VIII. 13, but H
5* C or qft^ftBft ;nfr Vop. ) where the meaning is « to appro-
ach for intercourse, to serve,' See Bhatt. V. 68, ( 2 ) < waiting
upon, worshipping ( a divine being )' am^rg^fflTSHj ( the Atm.
use of the root in ^5?^ fgftffrreqrf^aw STTWft' Rag. VI. 6.
is to be explained, thinks Bhattoji Df kshita, by the fact that the
king is considered to be a divine being ), (3) 'uniting or joining;
d; ( 4 ) ' forming iriendship with '
^: (Sid. Kau.); and (5) 'to lead to'
rf%B% 'this way leads to Srughna.' When a desire to get something
i« implied &n with &t takes either Pada; Age:
§ 664 ] PARABMAIFADA & ATMANEPADA. 418
<a beggar waits on a lord ( with desire of getting something ).
When it is used intransitively it takes the Atm;
ftfgft 'comes at the dinner time.'
*3 — is Atm. in the Desideratiye; 3fq$t
f—is Par. in the causal;
^r — with fr^ and 3TT is Atm.j ^fosrfr 'roars so as to lerrifj}'
Bhatt. IX. 28. ww* 'utters a loud sound.'
fjj* — with an* when used intransitively or when it has a limb
of the body of the agent for its object is Atm.; 3TT$^ 'kills or
dashes down-/ **%T 3TTfrf Strikes his own head;' but
( Bid. Kau. )
ft — with 3f3 is Atm. in the senses of 'following the habits
of, acquiring the natural Quality of;' ^[CTrar 3HS<«fr 'hones
always follow the gait of their progenitors;' so mcTf Tnc~
3*357%; in the sense of ' acquiring a new quality by imitation '
it takes the Par. fMtUH«i5<fd ' imitates his father. '
|rj — ^q} preceded by ^q, ft, f%, and ^p^ and used intransiti-
vely is Atm. ^r— ft—T^— ^— gT%; with 3»r it is Atm. in the
sense of ' challenging;' $>MJl84im^H!£y^ < Krishna challenges
Oh&nura to battle;' ^rgff ^K<IU^<fR Sis. XXI. 1. but
in.
The following Kansas, extracted from the A'khy&tachan-
drika are subjoined here, with some alterations herb and there,
as a help to the student in remembering much of what is given
in the present chapter.
fffc WRW I HT5* WT
STT I Sid. Kau. f gTff^fffffl^1<^ Vartika.
t ftWiMftgft 5: 5 wfrmT!?F: Pan. 1. 3. 30, 31
-414 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. 664
11
ii * it
: II
II3.M
: II v H
u x u
: U
1%: ^q: u $ u
II
U vs !|
u
n « u
II
3 ^^Mft II n II
: II
IMV u
u
w. sr?»: IM^ u
;§ 664 ] PARASMAIPADA & ATMANEPADA. 416
n
u
u i* n
: u
^ ||
u
: IM% U
: u
II *o n
: ^^ II
: U
u ^^ n
416 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [ § 664-666
u
: U
U
CHAPTER XIV.
VERBAL DERIVATIVES
or
PBIMABY NOMINAL BASES.
Derived by means of the Krt Affixes.
§ 665. The Krt affixes (Vide § 337) are added to roots or
to their modified forms to form nouns, adjectives, and indecli-
<fe^H &c. These are called Krdantas or Primary Nominal Base*
as distinguished from the Secondary Derivatives formed with,
the Taddhita affixes.
§ 666. There is a peculiar class of Krt or Primary affixes
technically designated by Sanskrit grammarians — Vnadi or
those beginning with the affix sqr i. 0. the affix 3* with the
mute or indicatory letter cj , go called from the words gap
9T5. &c. in the first Sutra being derived with the affix. These
TJjQadi affixes form primary nouns, like other Krt affixes forirt
verbal roots, but are classed separately because their applica-
tion is limited, because the nouns derived by their means are*
either formed irregularly, or the connection between their
senses and the meanings of roots from which they are-
supposed to be derived is not BO clearly discernible as in the
case of other primary derivatives; •. g. arsg^ 3*c*R «7TRtmi
9T 3T^: "a horse7 which is derived either from 3^ 'to pervade/
or from 3TO3( ' road;' and 3TTT with f%, &c- OT^ ' an artisan
from & 'to do,' &c.
§667]
PBIMABY NOMINAL BASES.
417
SECTION I.
PARTICIPLES ( Declinable and Indeclinable ).
1. Participles ( DacUnable )
( a ) Participles of the Present Tense.
§ 667. The participle of the present Purasm. is formed by
the addition of the affix g^ to that form of a root, primitive
or derivative, which it assumes before the third person plural
termination of the Present Tense. If the base ends in *r, the 3T
is dropped; e. g.
T%( 1 cl. ) — *T^4- 3Tfr?r Pro. 3rd pi. TO+ 3T^=? *Rcl Pre. P. being.
„ standing.
„ hating.
( 1 cl. )—
similarly from
3R[ ( 2 cl. ) 3Tf^ eating. ^( 7 cl. ) ^v^ preventing.
qT ( 2 el. ) qj<j going. 3, ( 8 cl. ) $%£ doing.
£ ( 3 cl. ) ^^ sacrificing ^ ( 8 cl. ) <T«r^ stretching, &c.
4 cl. ) frars playing. gpr (0 cl. ) fft°n* buying.
( 5 cl. ) ^?^ extracting. g^ ( 9 cl. ) g«or^ stealing, &c.
^ ( 6 °1. ) 3^. giving Pain- 5JT ( 10 cj- ) ^""^ stesHng.
lu. of §VT , ^NHfl causing to know,
desid. of ^vj , ^tm^^ desiring to know,
desid. of ^ f%cWX desiring to give.
[. of f^T^, %f^nr^ throwing again and again.
&c. &c. &c. &c. &c.
( a ) The term. 3^ is optionally changed to ^ when added
to the root fa^; ft§[^ or Rl^ ' knowing. '
( b ) The affix ar^ when added to fi^ and ^ ' to extract Soma
juice in a sacrifice7 has the sense of an agent; agf^^OT. 'an enemy.'
Tfl' ^rS ti^^'d- 'all are the extractors of Soma juice in a sacrifice.
H. S. G. 27
418 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB [ § 667-671
re) When affixed to 3*£ it has the sense of < fitness, respect;'
one deserving respect, respectable/
' ( d ) f 2 P. and ^ can. take the affix 3^ when the idea of di-
fficulty is not present^ 3TOT*T5t'stu lying without experiencing any
difficulty/ VTIT^^ 'holding or bearing with ease-,' but
§ 668. The declension of the Participles in stfj has been
treated of in §116.
§ 669. The participles of the Present Aim. is formed by
adding sfffi to the root which undergoes the same changes
Before it, as before the termination 3^ or gr«% of the 3rd pi.
pre. 3JT5T is changed to OTT, in the caw of roots of the 1st, 4th,
6th and 10th. classes, and all derived roots, or rather when the
base ends in 3T> before which the 3T of the base remains un-
changed- 9. g, iryr ( 1. cl. ) l^NTR < growing;' ^ ( 1 cl. )
< saluting'; tfV ( 2. cl. ) ^TR 'lying down./ fift ( 2. cl. )
tt with STT ( 2. cl. ) armT* ' killing.' ^ ( 3. cl. ) ^VTR folding;
f ( 3. cl.) ^^T; f^(4.cl.) fTSTOR 'playing./ 5(6. cl. ) ^reTR
« extracting;' 5^ ( 6. ol. ) g^TTR * giving pain/ ^ ( 7. cJ. )
^v\|M 'obstructing;7 ff ( 8. cl ) $sftor 'doing;' ^ ( 8. cl. )
'stretching-7 nft ( 9. cl. ) *froF?T ' buying/ ^r (10, cl.)
'stealing/ &c. 5^ ( 1. ol. )— cau, ^r^snrwr-^r^iTRTSf 'causing
to know/ — desideratlve f Jftf^W-^tRl^RniT 'being desirous
to know/ &c.
§ 670. ( « ) The an of ^TR is changed to | in the case of
the root sn^ ( 2. cl. ) 'to eit/ Pre. P. 3TRft5r.
f 6 ) 3TR added to the roots ^ and q^; forms nouns; e. g,
q^HRR: ' that which purifies, hence, the wind7 (c/. Rag. VIII. 9.)
abo, 'one of the saored fires;' IMHH- 'one who sacrifices.
§ 671. * The termination an* may be added to any root
-^TH^t 1 Pan. III. 2. 126.
§ 671-675 ] PBIMARY NOMINAL BASES.
419
in the sense of ' in the habit of ' or ' to show a particular
standard of age, or capacity to do a thing; *. g. ^frij $*iw.
* one habituated to enjoy pleasures:' ^^ I%flTOT: * of a sufficient
ago i. e. young enough to bear armour;' 37^ TOffR: ' able to kill
the enemy, ' &o.
§ 672. The participle of the Pre. Passive is formed by adding
HPT to the Passive base in q-. e. g. gui^M ' who or what is
known, ' 3rcrflT«T ' what is eaten, ' gfiqin* who or what is given,
who or what is gathered. * famjim * what is done, '
' what is scattered, ' -cOJmm ' who or what is
stolen ' gj^T; — cau. Pass. ^rctntttT < who or what is caused to
know, ' De9. Pass. ^rf^7RTOT ' who or what is debired
to know, ' $c.
§ 673. The participles formed according to § 669 are de-
clined like nouns ending in gf ni.f. and n.
( b ) Participles of the Perfect.
§ 674 The termtea*kms of the Perf. and the Past parti-
oiples are weak, and therefore the radical vowel does not take
its Guna substitute before toese. The penultimate nasal is
generally dropped ( see § 584 ).
§ 675. The participle of the Perf . Par. and Aim. is formed
by adding m^ and an*T generally to that form of the root which
it assumes before the termination of the 3rd per. plural. If this
form consists of one syllable only or when the root ends in sn,
1^ has the intermediate f added to it. f is optionally prefixed
to ^ in the case of the roots ipj; , f 5*, 5r*> fi& and f^» ( 6 cl. );
5T3 and ^r^ , and trq[ and ^ when tbey do not take 5, form this
participle from that base which they would asiume before the
2nd per. sing, termination, *. g.
PABASKAIPADA.
Root Perf. Base ( 3rd pi ) Pers. Ptc.
f to go ??i ift*^t w^° Of
420
SANSKRIT GRAMMAB.
[§676
Boots Perf. Base ( 3rd pi. )
sfr to carry fifcft
to cook
to speak
to sacrifice
to break
to throw
to praise
to do
to split
to give
to eat
to see
to know,&c.
to enter
r has
or
or
or
( 1 ) In the cage of roots beginning with
as it is in the Perfect;
Perf. ptc.
who or what
carried.
>, cooked.
„ spoke.
,, sacrificed.
,> broke.
„ threw.
» praised.
ate.
saw.
entered.
or
, and
is not inserted
( a ) For the declension of these participles see § 124.
ATMANEPADA.
f to carry
r to give
7 to cook
to sacrifice
3? to do
q^to speak
?5 to praise
sg to hear
&c. &c. &c.
a
§675-681] PIUMAKY NOMINAL BASES. 421
( h ) These are declined like nouns ending in 3^ m.f. n.
§676. Boots ending in ^ ( fj and 3? ineladed ) form their
Perf. P. irregularly; ^ is added to the root, which then
undergoes the changes mentioned in § 394, and is finally redu-
plicated: when a root is Atm. it is first reduplicated and
afterwards added, the final *% changing aa before; 0. g. «F +
, by reduplication j%£r!^; |r — by reduplication ^Tjf +
similarly <— •
§ C77. The Perfect participle is not frequently used. The
only participles that are most commonly to be met with are
those formed from the roots , q f%rr and g.
§ 678. The participles of the Periphrastic Perfect Par. and
Atm. are formed by the addition of the Perf. Participal forms
of the auxiliary verbs 3?, 3^ or ^ to the base in 3TPA[ 8- </•
(c) Past^Passive Partioiplea.
§ 679. The Past Passive Participle is formed by the addition
of the affix «r to the root- e. g. ^T-^fcf ' bathed, ' fsr-^fcT l con-
quered, ' rff-^tff ' carried/ ^-^rT 'heard,' ^-^ t become/ 5-5^
* taken away/ fiT^-^TT^ 'abandoned/ T%5-f%TT/ 'thought or me-
ditated upon/ &c.
§ 680. Roots capable of taking Sampras&rana take it before
she affix ft.
jj 681. The affix ft is weak.
Exceptions: —
(a) The roots ^ft, ft*^ 1 ol., m^, fklfy W and W adaiit of
the Qaoa change bafore ft when f is prefixed to it; ^1 A. also
loes the same when it takes f ( see § 6866 ).
422. SANSKRIT QBAMMAE. [§ 681-684
Such of the roots 01 tte 1st class as have ? for their
penultimate change their vowel to Gtina optionally, when the
affix a- is added with the intermediate f , and the P. P. Parti-
ciple is used impersonally, or when it conveys tho sense of
beginning to perform the action or undergoing the condition
expressed by the root; g^ Ho delight' gf^r<T, but < to begin to
delight ' JTg% or STRtf^TJ srg%t or U]Rtf%?t *TW *gTt<T-' or
snrri%<P SrgJJ similarly, ^-XT^firtf or ^rfc* &c.
§ 682. The Penultimate radical nasal is generally dropped,
( See § 674 ).
§ 683. The augment f ia prefixed to this & in the case of
certain roots, optionally in the caae of some and not at all in
the case of others.
§ 684. As a general rule, all roots ending in a vowel, and
guch as take the f optionally before any termination, and AnU
roots ending in consonants generally, do not take %• the rules
of Sardhi given in the foregoing chapters that are applicable in
particular cases ought to be observed. —
Roots. P. P. Ptc. Boots. P. P. Ptc.
<TT— TKT protected ?^— m?G abandoned.
f«T — f«r?T resorted ta W^~ W fried,
carried. ^— ?^ sacrificed.
heard. 1^—1^ awakened.
become. Sjrvj-.f^ pierced.
done. ^r— QTT slept.
covered. cJ^Q— 5J»sr obtained.
T woven. ^p^ — ^5 bound.
covered. ff^— ^ seen.
%* — g<T called &c., ^^—^^ cri«d out &c.
*% substitutes gr for its
§ 684-685 ] PRIMARY NOKIKAL BASES. 425
Boots. P. P. Ptc. Rooti. P. P. Ptc.
spoken ?j^ — ^ bitten
concealed fjft — f^j hated, &c.
™ped off> &°- srraf— rite governed
accomplished, &o. ^j — ^rq- bnrot
Tfc-«J* satiified ^5—3^ borne
«*?£ — <T? perished, &c. ^ — FTT endured
^>J— ^1 grown ««f^— WW destroyed
happened, completed, f^JJ — *ftf licked
&c. gg- — gr? or ^f fainted
able ^—^9* bound
[— T%T!» sprinkled tf^— ^T«T diopped
--^r asked
Exceptions: —
( a ) $ft, grig, ^TT *nd 3[flffT take f , the final yowel of the
first two takes Gnna substitute, and the last two drop their
final; ^rRffr, sfnrffa; f^qn?r ,
( b ) q^ takes f though it admits of f optionally in the
Desiderative
( e ) The A nit roots *^ and gy^ admit f before ft and
§ 685. Set roots ( subject to § 684 ), and all derived roots
admit of f • roots of the Tenth Glass and causals reject their
leal sw, Par. Frequent a tivea their final 3?, and Atm.
Frequent at ives their q*: —
Roots P. P. Ptc. Boots. P. P. Ptc.
'inspected.' ^[— ^RlfT 'told.1
'spoken.' TO— STfoRT Spread.'
*Vide § 437.
424 SANSKBIT GBAMMAE. [ § 685-686
Booto. P. P. Pto. Roots. P. P. Ptc.
tT*— <*Rnr 'increased ^r^ oau. Base of gv
'made to know.7
'shaken.1 f%pH[ des. b. of 3?
'desired to do/
Stolen} deceived.' ^tfW Atm. Fre. Base of f>r
sfrgftcT ' frequently known/
'taken.' «f|i£ir— Par. Fre. Base of
Exceptions: — f?«r, ^[, 'to go, to kill,' &c., f%g^ 'to know,
to observe,' &c.,^j(,*s, •,*, and
JV. -B. There are many Set roots which reject the intermediate
f but as some of them form their P. P. participles in «f and
others irregular ly, they will be given in their proper places.
§ 686. The following roots insert f optionally: —
with 3TT, and ^'4. 1. Par. when used with 5^*73 'the
hair/ or when it means Ho be surprised or disappointed;'
?ftW; ( see § 696 a. ), sTfrff, ^filrT; ipr ( see G88 ),
'wasted, perished/ qiftRtt VW, «ftw>. ITST,
See § 696 a ), 3ifHcTj ^3;
* horripilated with joy/
a ?TT^
) fi^t and ^ take ? optionally oefore ?f and
Icf >
( c ) The following roots admit of f optionally before 3 when
the P. P. Participle is used impersonally or conveys the sense
of beginning to perform the action or to undergo the state
expressed by the root; i£;,«n;, TC, q>«£, 1%> *&$
4, cl. ^r ^. % and % 1. 4. P. 1. A.;
§ 686-690 ] PRIMARY NOMINAL BASES. 425
'- or srf?ro: $?: 'Chaitra has begun to perspire;' ST^f^cT or
he has perspired/ &o.; f^r^ 4 cl. has f^rf^r also.
N. B. When the participle is not need in the sense given
above these roots reject ^. \&~$ — f^oruur; 'perspired, sounded
inarticulately/ &c.
§ 687. (a) 3f>^[ in the sense of 'to worship7 takes f ; arfsjrT
'worshipped •/ but 3^: 'gone'; with ^-^3, ( WrM 3H"f% <TT?t)
(b) ^ and ^r^ reject % when they express the idea of 'immo-
desty or rudeness / TJE <rucle/ fifSTW 'ill- mannered';' but qffa
overpowered, trifled with/ &c., ft^TKffT 'tormented or ill-treated'
§ 688. ;f* is substituted for 3 when it immediately follows a
final ^ or ^r; this final ^ is also changed to ^: f*R[-f3n5r, ST-
Exceptions : —
(a) fvr^ has f«iTf when it means 'a party a portion;' pro in
other senses.
(b) f%^ 0 P. A. takes <T iQ the serse of 'fit for enjoyment or
famous;' ffi^r 'wealth, property/ (%TT: 'famous' ;f%5T in other cases.
(c) W^, 5T and ^^J ^Tf, rf 'filled/ (alsov^pf when it means
the same as ^ ), ^.
§ 689. Roots ending in ajr* ( q-, cr and sfiT cnacgeable to snr )
and beginuing with a conjunct consonant containing a semi-
vowel also substitute «r for cT5 JfT ' to run, to sleep/ groT} y§ < to
fade/ T$yT5Ti v3'-?wn«T 'collected to a mass/ &o.
Exceptions : — ^^r 'to name/ &c. ^ 'to contemplate/ sq- and
-, ^Tcf, VTTTff , ^HT and g?r.
§ 690. *The roots given at § 414 and *m substitute »f for ?f.
* ?5TOT RBTrfl *f J
Pan VIII. 2. 42-44.
426
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
[ § 690-692
Old
Boots. P. P. Ptc. Boots
fr to flow, to move
$T to melt, etc.
Scft to go, to hold
$V to go, to move
T£ to shake
^ to destroy
<g to out
^t to go
^ to scatter
IT to utter a sound,
to praise, etc. ifurr
§ 691. 3 and 'Q Ho sound indistinctly/ substitute
lengthen their vowels } ^ 'gone/ ijtf.
$ 692. The following roots substitute ^ for ff:—
P. P. Ptc.
3} tO
I to tear
^ to load
«T to fill, to gratify
w to bear, to nourish
jj to hurt, to kill
^ to choose
jq to tear asunder
^H to scatter
to grow old
?ftof
3/TiT
for
Boots.
^ft 4 A. to fly
£ to torment
^ to hold, to
accomplish
&T 4* A.
ifV^ A. to give
pain
«flr „ to perish,
to waste
€r „ hurfc
fTto go
CT to abandon
P. P. Ptc.
Boots.
P. P. Ptc.
% to dry, to be languid
?ft 4 A. to move, to cover
ft 1. P, to grow, to swell
$4. A. to bring forth.
to produce
to
fror
6. P.
,, to break
6. A.
to be ashamed
— with {«>
with qft
4. A.
far
§ 693-695 ] PBIMABY NOMINAL BASES. 427
§ 693. ( a ) 5R-* when it means ' to incur debt ' substitutes ;?>
' debt} but 379, ' gone. '
( * ) f§T, when the P. P. Participle has an active sense, substi-
tutes ^r and lengthens its f ; ^fi^T; reduced, emaciated; but when
a curse is implied, or pity expressed, the change is optional;
$fiorTS: or %mg: HW t. «. ' die;' gfiar: or fiftf-* a^tf H<TC$T ' oh,
the poor ascetic has grown thin ' but
( c ) f ff ^ takes ^ when it does not mean < to gamble-, '
( a sport in which nothing is staked. ' but qtf ' gambling. '
( cJ ) t err with f%^ takes ^ except when it has *n* for its
subject; fjfcfofrsflr: <fche fire is extinguished; » ft^Wfr gfti the
•age is absolved- but
) ^ takes ;T when the notion of touch is not pretenlf
: '& scorpion contracted through cold;' when it
means 'to be coagulated or cold' it* 3 takes qnm<m (f ); ^fpt ^?t,
but ^ffct T^F &^d not ^ftf as the idea of touch is present here;
also when preceded by srfirj mTl^T fff, &c.; with g^fir and an*
the change if optional; 3?nr^n4 or arfi^fW ^ff, a^VH«ft or a^r-
:; but
§ 694. The roots 3^ , ft^, 6. A., ^^, t, WT and ft take * or
IT; 35Tolr3W> f*W or ft^r, 3rroror^T?(,irroror OTf and ftor or^H.
§ 695. ccrrar has ^frsr when it is used with 'one's own limbs/
<ffa 9^, aud c*n;f or cffa in other cases, as cqrqr: or <fhr: ^y:;
when it is preceded by a preposition, f is not substituted for its
vowel; srcqro:; but when it is used with 3*73 or 37^ with the
preposition STT, f in necessarily substituted; arm^: 3?^, »nf fH
Pan. VIII. 2. 60. f
I Pan. VIII. 2. 49-50
428 SANSKBIT GRAMMAR. [ § 696-699
§ 696. ( a ) Roots ending in a nasal long then their penulti-
mate vowel before a weak termination beginning with any
consonant except a nasal or a semivowel, or before the affix
( b ) Anit roots ending in a nasal, the root sr^ 1. P. and the
eight roots of the 8th class-^ and others ( seo p. 355 ) drop
their nasal before a weak termination beginning with any
consonant except a nasal or a semivowel: —
Roots. P. P. Ptc. Roots P. P. Ptc.
Trq( 'to. think', &c. $nT ^ 'to bow' «fef
53 * to strike/ f fT *rq( 'to restrain ' *j?T
r^ 'to sport1 f?f ^ 1. P. 'to sound,
*TH 'to go ' TO to serve,' &<?. ^
<TO cTcf ^ 'to shine'' ^
^T«T gpr 'to graze' ^
§ 697. The roots 373, ^ and ^[, drop their nasal and at
the S3 mo time lengthen their vowel; ^fcT, SffiT,
§ 698. A radical ^ preceding or following a vowel is some-
times changed to 37 before cT or *T; when it is preceded by ^ it is
dropped; ^^3701, ^—gtiT, 5$— gtft, %»— ^^T, R^— ^ or
^T ( See § 693, o. ).
§699. The following roots (some forming their P. P. P.
irregularly ) reject 5 in the limited sense attached to each: —
'a churning handle.' f^^—ftfts^T *a note.'
Uhe mind.' ^Ipa^— TOTC) <a decoction easily
'darkness.' prepared.' (
'attached.' OTrafi^fr Sid. Kau. )
'indistinct.' ^r—^^ ' much/
§ 699-701 ] PRIMARY NOMINAL BASES.
429
In their usual senses they have gf*r?r,
and
§ 700. <rf 'to give/ and %, form their P. P. Ptc. as ^T; the
3* of ^rf is dropped after a preposition ending in a vowel ; srrf-
3t3rT &c.; in this latter case the preceding 5 or & is lengthened;
*fhf, ^rf, &c.j ^ may optionally be retained also ; j^rf, 3T3RTW,
•5T* * &c.
§ 701. The following roots form their P. P. Participle?
irregularly: —
Hoots.
to eat.
with
or
P. P. Ptc.
w
in the sense
of 'being near.'
in other cases
1. A . to weave.
^ to be diffi-
cult or pain- «fe<m^. The
ful. study of gram-
mar is very diffi-
' gold rubbed on
the touchstone.'
he lean.
be intoxicated.
to stink.
to shake
to be thin
to sing
to split
Roots. P. P. Ptc.
to instruct.
ft to cut.
£|j > to be bulky or strong,
g^ 5 otherwise
MTT to put.
q7c[ to cleanse. vfrff or
vf to suck
q^r to cook.
qr to drink.
ifQ to stink, to putrify.
expand.
^ to bind.
C to measure,
to barter,
faint.
or
'conva-
lescent.'
3 (f) ? or ? (t) 5 <fftW a master,
(ff)f5cT 4c. 'grown, increased'].
^Tt 'to sharpen,' ^TTcT or
430
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
[ § 701-705
Boots. P. P. Ptc.
go, to become dry.' &
«to delight'
to cook (also CTCT 'boiled'
cau. of SIT ) (when it quali-
Roots.
- with sr
with
with
P. P. Ptc.
with srfifr srfff*«|3«r,
and ft ivr ( here the ^
is not changed
to*).
or
'sounded.
'clever.'
* skilful,
experienced, cle-
ver.' ( lit. one
who knows the
dangerous spots
in a river )• but
in other cases.
§ 702. ( a ) The roots 3 and q^ take the affix q-gr like ft
in an active sense; Q*93 'one who extracted Soma juice/
*nCT3( 'one who has offered a sacrifice*/ 3^; is added to sr
optionally in the same sense; gfto? or 5f^ ' one who has
become old7 ( also gfjuiclfl )>
§ 703. The participles in ft or ft follow the Declension of
nouns in 3?.
§ The P. P. participles have not always a passive force: —
§ 704. * The affix ft added to roots having the sense of
'sitting or going, or eating' shows the place where the action
takes place; 53- H$^H1 3TT%ft 'this is the place where Mukunda
to sit, ' | $ qift ronrft: ' this is the path by which the husband
of Kam& used to pass, ' *p£ q^ BTtfrTOT 'this is the place where
Ananta took his food, ' &c.
§ 705. The P. P. Participles of roots implying motion, of
intransitive roots, and of the roots fsr^, $ft,W,3Tr% ^ *'° dwell/
5FH , ^T, and ^ 4. cl. have an active sense; irftts? W5TSTO 'I went to
Madras/ v&rtft 9R9F*' 'the boy has become languid; ' g^flHlf%gtgft*
' Hari embraced Lakshmi: ' ^rTHT^rraiT: ' slept on Besha; '
. III. 4, 48.
§ 706-709 ] PRIMARY NOMINAL BASES. 431
: ' dwelt in Vaikuntha/ f5T*g<Tf%<T: k served Shiva/ ^R
' observed a fast on the day sacred to Hari/
: ' was born after Rama;' «n>3H|fr$t sat on Garuda;
: ' grew old after the world.'
§ 706 P. P. Participles have sometimes the sense of neuter
abstract nouns; as 5TT5TO 'speech', $rftr<T 'sleep*, 5%rT 'laughing/
similarly fcnt, TK, etc.; Bee Bhati. VII. 125.
§ 707. The P. P. Participles of roots meaning <to think or to
wish/ 'to know,' ' to adore/ and of the roots §r*j, *fr etc. have
tfie sense of the present Tense; TT^T- RcT; ' he w honoured by the
king/ TOrf ^1%^: f^: 3U%: ^he fire is kindled/ so *rm: etc.
(d) Past Active Participles.
§ 708 Past Active participles are derived from the P.
Passive Participles in 3 or tf by adding to them the affix *?r ; e.g.
Roots. P. P. Pto. P. Ac. Pto.
13- to be *j?T "^Wl^ one or *hat has been
5 to do ^!T 3»ff*g; ;j » done
^ to scatter qftof ^of^g; „ „ scattered
T%^ to cut %*r fi^ST^ » ,» cufc
etc. etc. etc. etc.
( e ) Participle of the Future Tense.
§ 709. The Participle of the Simple Future, Active as well
as Passive, is formed from the third person singular form of
the Second Future of a root. The Pararsm. Ptc. is formed
simply by dropping the final f , and the Atm. and the Passive
one by substituting *n«T for the final ft; e. g.
Participles.
Roots. Par. Atm. Passive.
or
or
432 SANSKRIT GBAMMAR. [ § 709-712
Roots. Par. Atm. Passive.
or
— A.
Similarly fqTft^ Veal. Base of q^—
&c.: off iff Fre. B« of ^—sTPTf^l^J^ , «TiH(3^m FT, &c.
§ 710. These Participles are declined like words ending in
<T and 3T.
( / ) Potential Participles ( and Verbal Adjectives ).
§ 711. The Potential Participle is formed by means of the
affixes *<&?> 3RT*T, ?T and rarely «rf^r, added to a root or deriva-
tive verb. This is Passive when the verb is transitive and
impersonal when the verb is intransitive. It is also used like
an adjective when denoting fitness, &c.
( 1 ) Participles in 357 and 3t«fhr
§712. The affixes <T3r or 3T*fi*T are added to roots or
derivative bases in the sense of 'must be fit to be/ &c. Before
these the ending vowel and the penultimate short of a root
take their Guna substitute. Before ftzq Set roots take f , Anit
roots do not, and Wet roots take it optionally. Before srfhr
penultimate eg* is always changed to 3ftr and not to ^ ( as it
sometimes does )• e. g.
T: | P&n.'HI. 1. 96. arfsrax ^rmanair I Vdrtika,
$ 712-713 ] PRIMABY NOMINAL BASES.
433
Boats.
•ft —
Pot. Ptc.
what must or ought to be given,
what must or ought to be searched into, &c.
„ carried.
„ „ heard.
„ „ been.
„ „ done.
„ „ known.
,, ,, released.
„ wiped.
„ created.
fried.
„ „ censured.
„ „ coccealed.
§713. The final 3T&; of root 8 of the tenth class and of can-
sals, the final 3? of Atm. Freq. Bases, when the q- is preceded
by a vowel and the whole q- when it is preceded by a consonant,
are dropped before SRiq". To Deeiderative bases it is added
without any change e. g.
what must, or ought to be told.
„ „ atolen.
,, ,, made to know.
Atm.
Freq. Base of „ arftTHT*! 5> „ known frequently
* The %- of ^53; is changed to gn^r against § 712.
f The 7 of Q^ is lengthened instead of being Gupated before
a strong; termination beginning with a vowel.
H. 8. G. 28.
484 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 713-717
r — Atm. freq.
Base of *%— ^pg-qsftq' what must or ought to be frequently.
Besi. Base
of fvj; fJlfvUuftir „ „ desired to know.
(2) Participles in q- ( q^, ^q<i and uq^ ).
By means of qq^ ( q ).
§ 714. The affix q (q^)* is added on to roots ending in a
vowel in the sense of 'fit for, or fit to be, or ought to be.' Before
this q the radical vowel undergoes Gupa substitute and final
3CT (<£,<£• and aft changeable to gn ) is changed to tr.
^f — %q* what is fit or ought to be given.
%— %r „ ,, sucked.
„ „
STf— IN" „ ,, cut.
f%— %q- „ „ collected.
^— sfrr „ „ led or carried.
§ 715. Roots having $r for their penultimate and ending in
a consonant of the labial class take the affix q*
(a) When &* is preceded by 3TT, ^ ( changed to ^ ) is inserted
between 5 and )^; 3TT?M— SlRtfvq 'what ought or is fit to be
killed •/ 3( is also inserted when ^p^ is preceded by 97 if the
meaning be <to prise •/ ^q^yq: ^ig: 'a Sadhn onght to be
praised •/ but ^q^ni ^ 'wealth ought to be acquired.'
§ 716. The roots ff^ 'to laugh at/ 5^ 'to kill/ ^r^ to
'look for, to ask/ q^ao strive/ ^r^, ^T^ and frg take the
affix q-; rT^T 'what is fit to be laughed at/ ^q 'what ought to
be killed;' &c.
§ 717. The roots ^ , ^ , ^ and q^ , take the affix q when
not preceded by a preposition ; ZI^-ITO 'what ought to be spoken
[II. 1. 97.
§ 717-722 ] PRIMARY NOMINAL BASES. 435
or told/ JTCT, ^£, 1WT ^with 3tt may take this affix, if it does
not mean 'a preceptor;' in which case it takes the affix crq-g- ( if )
- <a country fit to be gone to, but arixTTq': 'a preceptor.'
§ 718. The roots 3^ implying reproach, qurx meaning ' to
traneact business/ and ^ 9. Atm. not denoting limit or restraint,
take the suffix q-; as STTC ^T<T ^in is reprehensible or merits con.
dentation/ but 3*9^ ( 3^+ST^+^n> «• T ) Q*FWt 'the name
of a preceptor ought not to be tittered ( out of respect )/ qtnrr
ift: 4a cow is saleable-/ but <nuir: ( qor+inr^i'. «• *T ) aTgW * a
BrahmaDa deserving praise/ q$ ' that can be chosen or Bought
after/ as ^5T **A ^«TT ' hundred men ( t. e. any one ) can seek
the hand of a girl/ but 3737 ( f +W*^ •'. «• T ) ^«TT ' to be married
by a particular man.
§719. The root ^5 not denoting an instrument for carrying,
and 3t in the sense of ' a master ora Vaishya' take q-; qngj* ' a
carriage or a vehicle/ but ^rr$T ( ^-FTO^ ) 'wrhat can be borne/
grf: c a master or a Vaishya; r but anq ('K' + WT^) 'fit to be
approached or adored.'
§ 720. ^ with ^q in the sense of 'being conceived' takes the
affix *rj as ^tTCPIT ifr: irvfnrr^ ^TOT gr^T?g ^P^?gu: ( Bid.
Kau. ) but 3<rennT ( 3-T^ + tni^) ^r^ff snw^T f«q^: (Sid. Kau.).
§ 721 3| takes this affix with the negative particle prefixed
to it and forms snrq* 'what cannot grow old' but this must
qualify ^fl 'friendship/ c/.
Bhatti. VI. 53. In
XV3II. 7, the word ^qcT must be considered as understood. If it
does not qualify ^JTJT, it will take the affix $; as 3T3rft«TT ^^^--
§ 722. 5^ takos the affix qr^ optionally, before which ^J is
substituted for it; 5^ + q>=^«T = <what ought to be killed/
it optionally takes inr^, in which case *rr^ is substituted
for it:
436" SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [ § 723-728
By means of the affix ^mrj *r )
| 723. The roots f 1 . 2. P. 'to go/ ^ ^ , * 5. P. A.
^q(, and roots haying SR- short for their penultimate, except
and ^^t take the affix cpq^r ( «r) in th« name sense as q-^ . When
a root ends -in a short vowel, ^ is inserted between the final
vowel and the affix ?• t. g. f-fRT 'worthy of being approached./
^T 'deserving praise:' 5THJ— fSr^T 'fit to be instructed j
f— BTTSfir; 35*— sjsq1 'worthy of Doing served/ ^-
<fit to be increased as wealth, &c. ' but ^cq- ( opr^+q^ ) 'able/
^g- — ^rrif ( =3Tj;-ftnT^ ) 'that ought to be teased or hurt.'
§ 724. According to V&mana, the roots ^f^, ^ and aj take
^M »n1x opttonally; ^-^TW 'praiseworthy/ f^— pr» 5^
optionally they take the affix inn]; ( to be given hereafter );
§ 725. ^g[ also takes this affix optionally; 359 'what is fit
or ought to be cleansed ^ optionally it takes uq^ before which
the final ^ is changed to IT *, ITR^.
§726. ( a ) ^ when it has a Subanta prefixed to it and is
without a preposition takes the attix ^rq^impersonallyj srgnnr
*fl^: *{&>%$ * identity with Brahncan.' When no Habanta is uaed
prepositionally with it, it takes the affix q^> *r^T or sr^oq*.
( a ) g^ under similar circsmstances takes either cfq-q: or 17*73;
in a passive sense or impersonally; sr^i^ or ^^<4<| ' expounding
the Veda' ( *3T %^ X*t ^f Sid. Kan. %
727. ^ t^kes this affix, but drops its ^ and adds f to its
penultimate vowel g^+q-rr^r+^s^r+f-l-q-s^ir * what is fit
or ought to be dng or excavated.'
728. £ 1 ol. takes this affix when the participle so derived
does not form, a name, *pqr:'tnose who ought to be nourished
or maintained, her ce servants/ &c.; bu^, ^[q^: (if+oqjO a
class of Kshatriyaa'; when ^q precedes >r, gpq^ acd <nr^ are
added optionally $&qi; or
§728-731] PBIMABY NOMINAL BABES. 487
N. B, The word war meirinj; < a wife ' ought to be derived
from JT of the 3rd class and affix rjq^.
§ 729. *The following seven words are irregularly formed
with the affix ^q-gr in the sense given in each case: —
» or * 6. P. 'to incite/ 'to im-
falsehood '
( from OTT + *3[+ ^^ ); H^af ffff ^^T:» ^f (any base metal) fr.
OT + WU 5TTT^: &* ^ TOH7T^ I ^^^(Tf^ST *T* ^T^ » W
Kir. I. 35. Manu. VII. 96. sjcKn other cases take* the affix inr^;
what ought to be concealed ' $g ^ir^^ q^*^ ^^q^|:
3 ^^ ^oi'H^FTT: I ' growing in cnltiv*t€d
: 'not feeling pain. '
§ 730. ( a ) The following two words which are the names of
two rivers are derived by means of this nfiix; f¥Rf?T ^9 fw:
; see Rag XI. 8.
In other cases these roots take the affix
( i ) Similarly the words 3«tr: and fcr^Vo both the names of
the constellation Pushya, are derived from 5^ and far respecti-
vely with the affix sprr ; 5«ir5^f|eniraf: S^v f^W^WRR^C %W.\
§731. The roots ^ , sft and fo, preceded by f%, take tnis
affix, when they are connected with the words fpr, ^?^ and f^
respectively; f^^Efl1 553:' The Munja grass to be prepared for
weaving into a rope7 ( fpsrif^jTornr sfrefqW'l' fwnf: Sid.
Kau. ); f^fm: <5&6: '«in which ought to be destroyed-,' ftrerafr
i I Pan. 111. I. 114. V ide
Sid. Kau. 'on the same.
t C/. finft ^Hl^ld^ft ^nrrV, &c. Rig. III. 59. 1.
438 SANSKRIT GB AMMAR . [§731-736
f: 'The plough to be pulled with great force/ 3%«r *hj»cq:, in
other cases thesd take the affix q^; iqirrq, fiJRq, ^q\
§ 732. The following words are derived from the root 52-
with the affix ^qtr: — 3?3q$f, SPJ5J, <Tf <two technical terms in
grammar/ qjp^r: 'birds restrained from free motion, euch as-
parrots,, &o.; ' T^TII^«T«%»f ^(T^sfr^TcTr ??q^T I Sid Kau.
mmign %rff * an army stationed outside a village'; HTq^^T^'
3n*fa|i: a?<I$nmcT farf: ( Sid. Kau. ) < siding *ith the noble. '
See Bag. II. 43.
§ 733. The roots 3? and 3 take both cpr<r and irq^; ^?qv
^rf; 3~<*X> wi 'what ought to be chosen, best/ &c.
§ 734. 5^; in the sense of 'to be harnessed' takes the affix
3*n and changes its final to ITJ *rrq: iff: ' a bull to ba harnessed
to the yoke;' in other senses it takes the affix o>q^-tfr5q>.
By means of the affix aq^.
§ 735. Roots ending in ^, and those ending in a consonant
take the affix uqq; (q1) in the same sense as q^. Before this affix
the ending ^ and ^f of a root are changed to ^ and rr respecti-
vely and the final vowel and the penultimate 37 take Vriddhi
substitute;; any other penultimate vowel generally takes Gupa.
3> — qn*$ 'what ought to be done/ \% — vff^f * what ought to be
worn/ &c.j jr^ — 1W&, SK^IVJ 'what ought to be impelled/ &c.j
W^MUcMfr 'what is. arranged, a sentence/ T^— qn^q1 'what is to
be cooked/ ^^ — wti} ' what is to be purified/ &c.
§ 736. The root sr^[ when preceded by 3?m 'with' takes the
affix uu^ before which the penultimate 3^ is optionlly changed
to Vriddhi; 3jqr ^ff q^TJTiTifqT ^"^anpf swranrr <>r 3TWr 'the day
on which the sun and the moon are with each other t. 0. t»re in
conjunction/
(a) igs^ when preceded by <rrfor or the preposition wm takes
the affix rnr^; as <nf&ivqf ^q% ^rftRrnrf ^3:5 similarly ^jrq^niT-
§ 737-740 ] Pr.iMABY NOMINAL BASES 439
§ 737. ( a ) The roots ^ , ?n^, ^[ , ST^[, W^, and <r
do not change their ^or^to^orjj before
qr^ra; ; ft^nj; t srar^r^, ( a^H^iq1: ), 3*^?, rm*q,
( i ) 7^ does not change its w to ^> before gq^g; when the
meaning i3 'what ought to bespoken out, speech/ *r«q-; but
*: a sentence.'
( c ) ^5^ when it means 'to go' does not change ^r its to
; 35^73. ; when it means ' to bend' the ^ is changed to
^ ) 5^ when it is preceded by sr and nr, takes the affix
the sense of 'what is possible or capable of;' and does
not change its ^ to IT;
( • ) 3TC has ^7 meaning ' food, ' and ifr^ 'what is fit
to be enjoyed.'
§ 738. Boots ending in 7, short or long, take the affix <nrq[
in the sense of 'what ought or must necessarily be done;*'
5>— 3T&T 'what must necessarily be cu'^ off;' <n3* 'what
must necessarily be purified; g; with 3H — aiimai, 3 'to
( a ) The roots ^, ^, w$, w^ and ^q; also do the same-
*what must necessarily be sown.' fT«^, 'what must be
spoken of distinctly;' 3JTc<rs[ , «rr«r^ , ^fc^.
§ 739. The following woids are irregularly derived by
means of the affix uq^; 3TRTW 'what ought to be brought from
the G&rhapatya t. e. the Dakshinagni;' ( fr. ;ft with aur )
( Sid. Kau.. ) but Sffffq- in other cases; as 'ajar;'
( fr. ;ft with q- ) 4frT- sft«T3r£ ?«W ( Sid. Kau. )5 < disgusted
with worldly pleasures;' as sron^'^^T^T f%*tE" S*W I but
in other cases.
740 jfnTit 3*%T ffcT JT^ ' a measure ' ( fr. ITT )} ^T*T^ •nqfr
^jumfffff xrm fft ^n«f«r ( from- 'rir with ^^ ) fffarttsiT: 'a
kind of offering ( See Sis XI. 41. )';
440 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 740-745
r:(fr. T% with ft);
fr.
: ( a sacrifice); <rfigpar:,
( particular place? for depositing the sacrificial fire);
other cases
§741. The roota >g; and ^ take the affix
nd^r^,^ and <r<£ take inr^, in an active sense;
S3
^: ( also HOTW^H )j nni^ff^ *fa: * one who sings'
/ also ?ft ^TIT 3R5T )> ST^RHT: 4one who speaks' 3<rwfar: <one
who stands by'. ST^p, «5JT«T:, qr^T'-
( 3 ) By means of %fam; ( ^%W )•
§ 742. A few transitive roots take the affix frf^nr having
the same force as the affix *r: q%m*r fr. ^, «fit to ripen or to
be cooked- as q%f»iTT *m:; fi^TOP ( if. f^[ ) <&TOT: ' the pine
trees ought to be felled-' &o.
§ 743. The declension of these Participles follows that of
nouns ending in 3*.
II. INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES.
( a ) Indeclinable Past Participles.
§ 744. The Indeclinable Past Participles are of the nature
of gerunds. They fall under two heads: — ( 1 ) Those derived
by affixing HTT tc the simple root) and ( 2 ) Those derived by
means of q- affixed to tho root compounded with prepositions or
words used prepositionally. «pj — *WT 'having gone;' ig; with
3?3 — 3l31*r ' having experienced;' &c.
I. Indeclinable Participles formed with ?^rr.
§ 745. The indeclinable Past Participle or gerund in CT is
formed of all roots or derivative verbal bases to which no pre-
position ( nor a prepositional word ) is prefixed. The affix aw is
of the same nature as the 3 of the Past Passive Participle, so
§ 745 ] PBIMAJLY NOMINAL BASES. 441
that all the changes that take place before ft generally also take
place before ?ST. In other wojds from the P. P. Ptc. of a root,
separate the ft or ^ from it, add ?9T instead, and this will be the
form of the gerund in rctf e. g.
Roots. P. P. Ptc. Ind. P. Ptc.
to know
to give
to stand
5 T to go
fT to abandon
W to place
nr to conquer
^ to purify qf%ft or
^ to be i£ft
^ to do ffft
^ to cross rfW
I to fill <iat
3* to protect
gxf to release
31^ to eat
^jt to out
f^ to see
to be hungry
•: to dwell
• to speak
to carry
r to sacrifice
tO BOW
to bind
to know
to rule ?%y
— - • —
* See § 684 ( e ); $ 750
442 SANBKBIT GRAMMAR. [ § 746-747
§ 746. When the intermediate f is inserted, the preceding
vowel takes its Guna substitute
( a ) The roots 33, 33, $* and ^ take Gu]?a optionally
or JTffoT, ^ftr^T or jrffor, ^fo*IT or ^fforT, 5^—
or affifalT-
( b ) But the roots ^,^r, g>£,$*,g*> and r%^, the roots
mentioned at § 463 and f$*r , 7 cl. do not take Gnna; ?£3^?[%(3T
' having rejoiced;' — ^f^T, S*J-H3W*T ' having covered jr
or
§ 747. Wet roots, except g^^ which takes f necessarily, and
^, ^ and ^ which reject $*, the five roots given under § 472 and
the roots marked with an indicatory 7* admit of f optionally
before ??rr «. g.
Roots. Ind. P. Ptc. or Ger.
to cleanse WTrir?*T, ^T
to enter TlfSfTT, TT|T
The following are the more important of the roots marked
with TJ BT^ 1 P. A. 3T5^1. 10. P. A. 3T^ 4 P. SR^, ^U( 5. P.
1. A. $^, ^ I- P. ff* 4. P. ^ 8. P. A. f^ 8. P. A.
1.4. P.^l.P.^1- P. *P* 1. P. A. ^4. P. ir^
?T5r 1. P. x^^ 1. P. rgs^ 1. P. fur 8. P. A. ^ 1. P.
T. P. ^r* 1. 5. P. q^; 7. 5. A. ar* 1. P. 5T^ 4. P. 10. P. A.
1. P. a^ 8. P. A. 1. P. A. 10, P. 3^8. P. A <^5. P.
4. P. f%^4. P. 10. A. *rr^ I. P. A. «ft( 1. A. ^ 1. P.
fl. P. ^ 4. P. ^ 4. P. ^[1. 4. P. <Kl. A. 4. P. *$
A. n^8. A. ^l.P. f^, i^,^^,^5^,l.P.^» 5^,
5^, all of the 4th cl. P. ^>^, 1. P. A. cp* 8. P. sr^. 4 P.
1. P. ^ 1. 4. A. 10. P: A. ^ 1. A. 10. P. A. ^ar 1. P.
4. P. A. ^ 1. P. ^ 1. P. 5TF^ 1. P. 2. P. A. ^ 1. P. A.
. P. «« 4. P. r^ 1. 4. P. %i 1. P. ** I- P. 8. P. A.
1. 4. P. ftr^ 1. 4. P. *p^, ^cfw, 4. 9. P. *m I-
§ 747-749 ] PBIMABY NOMINAL BASES. 443
Root*. Ind. P. Ptc. or Ger.
- to conceal nfzt*r nrcWr JJTT
to protect
to desire ^Tf^f^r or
to endure *ri%f3T or
to covet 3tPt?3T or
to go, to worship 3f7?3T having gone, srHiPIT having
worshipped
to kill
to dig
to stretch
to tame
to pacify
to go &c.
4 P. to be straight, &o.
1 A. to be rffrftrr or a^Tr &c> &o.
But jr^^-
§ 748. The roots fa, ^r, ^fr, ^and ?r, Set roots ending ID
consonants, roots of the 10th class and all derivative verbs,
admit f before rqr; roots of the 10th cl. preserve their aw be-
fore f^r fa-^rc^T ^f-s-fir^T -orf(f«rT or
desi. f^tT%%^r} Atm. fre.
§ 749. (a) The roots ^^ and m do not drop their nasal}
(b) The penultimate nasal of roots ending in si or <$• and
that of ^5^ 'to roam abroad,' ^to deceive' and g3^[ *to tear out/
are optionally dropped;
The 3T is lengthened optionally btfore
444 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 749-752
(c) Roots ending in sj such as *pa , jsf , ^na , ^^ &c. and
•x »s *x «x
the root tf^rf optionally drop their nasal before f^f; *r«r
«£— tsRTT or ?[^T$ 3T3T— BTf%!r*r, ST^rST or
and ^^ insert a nasal optionally. R^r or
or 5|£T.
§ 750. Gnpa is optionally substituted for the penultimate
•f and 3-, roots beginning with any consonant and ending in
any except sr or a^when ?^r has f prefixed to it,
or Sr%??rr; ffe[-T%ftr^T or fer^r ( also ffer^r );
or ^rf*r?5r
so ^ , &c.,
2. Indeclinable Participles formed with q-.
§ 751. When a root is compounded with ons or more pre-
positions or words prefixed to verbs like prepositions, the
indeclinable participle is formed by affixing q- immediately to
it • the q- is changed to r7 after a short radical vowel ( even
when it combines with the final vowel of a preposition to a
Jong vowel ) • e. y.
%[ with an— 3*T^FT * with ST— 5^T
f%" with R^-f^fW?^ ^ with ^n3[ —
fif with qrr— ^mBffq1 & with
;ft with f%— f^^rq- ft^ with
^ with ^3— 3Tgij*r ^^ with 3-
f with 3ifvT — ^^fTrq' &c. &c. &ct
§ 752. The rules given at § §394, 39^459, 502 and 587
apply to Che roots also in the gerund in *r: —
g — MJr«y with q- —
with 3
with OT—zn? ?r with f%—
752-760 1 PRIMARY NOMINAL BASES. 445
% with
m,Tt, *TT and ^ with g-<r— ^Tf TT
H* with 3*3— 3T3*rnr <ft with ft-f^ftq- or
i|r with <rft— qfr^rq" &c. &c. &c.
^ with 3TT — 3flT^TT
§ 753. Roots of the 8th class ending in a nasal, except 9^
and the roots rr^, 3^ and ^ , drop their nasal necessarily. ?jjy ?
SfH, q-iy and ^ do it optionally; ^ with T%-f%cTf^; «^[ with
3T*-3TcTJTrTT; ?TH- with ^— Rq^q- or \7ftzr, ** with |^— f^^y or
or xrorfq", &c.
§ 754. The roots ^, 5T^ and frq( have respectively R^?q--
§ 755. r% lengthens its ^ before the affix q- and srrq changes
its final vowel to Qupa; sr$fnT; snrrn^.
§ 756. %, ^qr and ^ do not take Samprasarapa- STTHT;
sr^qiq" 'having become old;' xiMmnr 'having covered-/ but ^r
with qfr or ^r^ , takes Samprasarapa optionally; qn^rrq- or
'Tft^PT; ti°<^i*i or ^cfirq'.
§ 757. The roots mentioned under § 486 do not change
their an to Jj irq^, STOnT, XTHPT, &o.
§ 758. Boots of the Tenth class and Causals preserve their
3^ before q-, if it be preceded by a short penultimate vowel; if
not, it is dropped-, ^faq'-sHrr*?; aftOT-snffrq-j ^— can. f%gn$5 sft
cau. win anr— attsrisq", &c ; but 11^-^101^, anrfl^sr, ST^IW;
sr^m^q* ' having again and agaiu caused to be broken.'
§ 759. ( a ) 3T(<1. cau. may retain its ${& optionally-srrcq*
or irmiq.
§ 760. Desiderative bases add q- immediately and Freq,
bases add it after dropping their q-, when it is preceded by a
consonant and dropping the final 3? when it is preceded by a
vowel; f\i-snmrft«rt Fre.
* It changes its final to f optionally; so srsftTcq1 also.
44C SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. { § 761-763
( b ) THE ADVERBIAL INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLE
OB
The Gerund in g^-
§ 7<>1. There is another Indeclinable Participle having the
same sense as that in r^T, formed with the affix 3^ . Before
this the root or the derivative verbal base generally undergoes
the same changes as it does before the f of the Pass. Aorist
3rd sing.; sfr-tTnnr 'having carried or led', ^r-^nn^ 'having
given'- ^-TO*, ft?-*^, Tf-^TW, »H*-«nP*, &c.
§ 762. This Participle is generally used at the end of com.
pounds- ff Ste'SRT **'• <he wa« pelted to death;'
( Vik. I. ) 'She was taken a captive.'
( Bhatti. I. 2. ) 'He totally exterminated his enemies, &c.'
§ 763. The participles in r^j and ar^* when repeated yield
the sense of repetition of the r * ion or condition expressed by
the verb; f^?fr fqw or ^jrrt fir, — ; 4having repeatedly remem-
bered; <ftr?T "TTf^T or <Tnr WJH -having drunk again and again-'
similarly ^^— &FZ1 g^T or ^nt ^HHC; ^-^T g?*T or
siw^ , *TH-n?*r n?5rr or irr
or 5JW ^fww or 55TH ?yT«T^»
Pan III. 4. 22.
At the end of compounds this may not be repeated and yet
have f he sense of repetition ; as in
? Bhatti. 11.11
The descendant of Kakutsths, smiling gently, repeatedly
bending down the creepers would pluck their flowers, wading
through every stream ( that he came across ), would sip the
waters, and seating himself on every charming slab would
remain there ( in admiration of the scenery ).
§ 764-767 ] PBIMABY NOMINAL BASES. 447
§764 The Gerund 3T^ does not, in many instances, express
the notion of repetition.
§ 765. This gerund or the one in f^r is nsed with the words
3T2JT, ITW and 3^, used as prepositions, although the notion of
repetition ia not present in these compound?., 3nnTt3T-:ff?r9T *T
'having first eaten be goes out*' so snrevfnr or
or
§ 766. The gerund in s^ of the root $j is used *
( a ) with the noun governed by it, if it be compounded with
it prepositionally when censure is implied- ^fTOTT 3TTeFl^TfR
( .J^lgj s^r'pj-fir*}: ) ' cries out ( he is ) a thief; a thief.' In this
case ^is added to the noun governed.
( ft ) with the words sn$, SR^j and ^q^f, n being added to
these as before;
'he eats having sweetened er seasoned his food.'
( e ) with the words 3T7qr«iT, tft, ?f^t, and qjtf, provided the
root 3» loses its sense; ^^i^icHif a;?* 'he speaks in a different
manner-/ tnforT ^% <he eats thus:' similarly
but
( d ) with the particles inn and H«T when an angry reply
is given; mn^it ifa% ?TOT*T* ^^ f% rT^T^T ( Sid. Kau. );
•I will eat in this mnnner, I will eat in that manner, what
have you do with that ?'
§ 767. The Gerund of the roots 5^ and f§^r f « compounded
with their objects and expresse totality; *^r^«j
1 chooses as many girls as he sees, ». e. all of them*/
448 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR [§767-769
( Sid. Kau. ) < be feeds every Brahmana tbat he knows or comes
across or renembers t. e. all of them '
( a ) *The gerunds of f^ ' to get' and *fH[ 'to live' are joined
witb qrsra in the same sense; qrclt? £% 'eats wbat be gets.'
( 5 ) f Witb the words ^jfa and g^? the gerund of ij£ is used;
eat8 so as to fil1 ^
§ 768. Tfeis gerund of f^[ is uaed with gs^t ^pf and
t S^^r farfe s5^ ftsnR^* ( Sid. Kau. ). so
'be grinds to powder.'
§ 769. ^J With tbe words ^TCJ?, 3T^TT and ^ft^r are used res-
pectively the gerunds in sn^ of the roots 5^ , i& and q^ in a cog-
nate sense- ^OTTff £r% 'kills destroying the roots t. e totally'.
tr& 'does what ought not to have been done;'
' captures him so aa to preserve him i. t. alive.'
( a ) The gerund of f^and fq^ is used with words signify-
ing instruments ( of action ). qrr^^Tcf 5f?ff=qf^T fPfT 'l strikes
( kicking ) wi^h foot;' gr^q1 R5Tr%=3T3%^ I^Tf% * grinds with
( using ) the water.
( b ) Similarly the gerund of ^ and ?TJ» is used with 5^
'and its synonyms, and tbat of 5^ with ^r- ^^?r^S qtftrft; so
^^^*3[» f^^Jf 5T%^T 9?n<frc*r$h I Sid. Kau.;
similarly TTffenfW , ^nrif^, &o.
Pan. III. 4. 30.
t ^rHhr^fr: $.- \?™. in. 4. 31.;
t S«^T^^ ft* I P*"- HI. 4. 35.
I P&n III. 4. 36—40.
] 770-772 J PBIMABY NOMINAL BASES. 449
§770. * The gerund of ^^is used with words denoting
peculiar arrangements of stanzas, &c.,
§ 771. f With the words gffa and s^r used subjectively the
gerunds of ;^ and ^ are used;
( a ) J The gerunds of g^ and ojr are used with gprf simi-
larly;
rr T^ *mtfl«f& i Sid. Kau.
( 5 ) f f Sometimes the Gerund in ara; is used with words de-
noting a standard of comparison; ^rTRvrm RfgH 5T^ ' the
water was kept with as much care as ghee-' 3OTC3T3T
I* TO
§ 772. § The gerund in sr^ of roots haying the sense Of
'to strike/ &c. are used with words denoting the instrument
when the object of the gerund and of the principal verb is the
same; qusWmd <TT: OTSJTfir •• *• 4U)<fi<<tll<f ' he collects to-
gether cows beating ( them ) with a stick;' 3<J«dl€H i but
P «M«*im.
( a ) The gerunds of qr^ ^ and ^, with grq-, are used
with nouns having the sense of the Loc. or the Inst,: qp^q^fhr
Ti Sid. Kau.
( b ) Similarly
. ni. 4. 41. 42.
- HI- 4. 43.
fr I Pan. III. 4. 44.
Pan. III. 4. 45.
i
i fm^rm *r i P»n. HI. 4. 48-63.
H. s. o. 29.
450 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 772-775
t.
( c ) Nouns having the sense of the Ablative and the
Accusative are used with this gerund of a root when haste
or hurry is intended; ^ittftrorrf ^T^fil 'runs having quickly
got up from the bed;' ^fejTTfr 5^5^; tftgmgH, &c.
§ 773. *A root may be used in its gerundive form in gp^
with its object prefixed to it if that object be a part of the bodj
which can be severed without fatal effects; ^rf%^tf grenjf^ 'nar-
rates contracting the eyebrows* but %T 3"T?$T**T (not f$R3f$TqT^)
as the severance of the head would cause death
( a ) Similarly when a part of the body is completely hurt
or pressed in the action, the gerund in sw is used with that
part; gr:xrffrW 3W% ». «. ^Tg*: <f(3TTW ' afflicting the
whole bosom-/
§ 774. fThe roots ft^, tr^, q^, and ^r^ are used in theit
gerundive forms in 3T*r in the sense of ' complete occupation or
pervasion or repetition' with nouns which if not compounded
would have stood in the Acc.?
i so-
§ 775. ( a ) J The gerunds of 3^ and 3^ are used with nouns
denoting a period of time intervening between the repetition or
performance of the action; g^^Tf^mf or fr^SHrqw ITTJ m^^fd 'he
makes the cows drink water allowing two days to intervene,
t. « . every third day' 3^1 <rnrfoc9rr ^snT
( Sid. Kau. ); similarly gifcm or
* ^Hf^ I ( ** f%*T 5T 3fT^ *&£&( I Sid Kau.
l Pan. III. 4. 64, 55.
t ftftnfWfe**5^ OT*qHHfawngnft: Pan. HI- 4. 56.
§ 775-777 ] PRIMARY NOMINAL BASES.
451
( b )* Similarly the gerunds of f^ with 3jr, and q are uied
with ;nJR( and in the sense of the Ace.; JUff^gTHM
^Ifll^TlW, &c.
( c ) The gerund of ^may optionally be used after
( c ) The Infinitive.
§ 776. The Infinitive is formed by the affix grj with the same
•effect as the
Booti.
f to go
tpj to grow
5T to give
•ft to carry
3? to do
•^ to be
H to shake
to choose
to sing
* to go
n of the Future; e. y.
Infinitive Hoots.
Infinitive.
or
to compose
to cook
to cut
to cover
to baar
to steal
Caa.
Desi.
Atm. Freq
&c.
&
SECTION II.
VERBAL NOUNS FORMED BY MEANS
of
Various Krt Aflixea,
§ 777. In the following list are alphabetically arranged
almost all the common Krt affixes forming nouns ( substantive
adjective ) with various significations from roots or deriva-
Lve bases. — 3 3 r ^^, ^gr, ^
: I Pan III. 4. 57. 58.
462 BANSKBIT GBAMMAE, [§777
31^— denoting < the agent' is added to— q^ and other roots*
: ' one who cooks
j— to £ and q^, when the words gfrc and ^
are prefixed to them respectively; sm*Hr <an adulteress/
»qq^r: t a Chandala ' — to g when the noun governed by it
is used prepositionally and when the idea of difficulty is not
present or when the whole compound denotes 'age;7 3^t
entitled to a share, a heir *• but *m$K: ' a load-
bearer ' ( TSTK+ f + 3T?r ); <M<4S*: ' a young child; * also when
3fT is prefixed to it in the sense of ' in the habit of.'
ff sfrsmST 3Rft S^Tf*:;— to the root q^ when the wor
« a missile, ' ^^ < a plough/ af^r ' an iron hook, '
javelin/ qi% <a stick/ ^7, ^ and q^ are prefixed to it;
?T%iTf : 'one armed with a spear/ &c;
&c.; also when 3^ is prefixed to it and the root is used in the
sense of ' wearing '; ^nnr: ' wearing a sacred thread; ' but
*SWTf : ( 5?T+ Hf + 3T7T) * one who takes in his hand a sacred
thread;' — to 3^ when a noun used objectively is prefixed to
it; l^fmSdTffr f3TT?T HT^QP ' a Brahmana deserving worship^
— to ^ and 3ft£ when the words ^3*3 and gjof in the Loc.
are prefixed to them respectively; tfl^W * an elephant, r
(taui^q; 'one who whispers into the ear, a spy/ — to any root
when the word $ is prefixed, j&v, $**'•> ^fa^ &c.,-to ^fir
when a word showing the place of action precedes, ^ ^r ^~
( ^ )^T?: 'dwelling in the sky, ' BO g-fe^W ' dwelling in the
heart, *. e Madana'; also when words like qr$ ^T> £?> &c-
•md ^fTH, ^c. precede, qp§— ^^— W— W- ' sleeping on the
aides/ &c., ^fTR^r?: 'lying on the back with the face up-
ward!/ so 3H«ttfciq: («WR?ft %& 3WT ?TOT $^) *• «. 'with the
lace downwards. ' When added to roots ending in f and to
•ome others it forms abstract nouns, T% — ^m * & collection/
ftr— 3HT:, ift— -W, ^— W 'a shower of rain.' &c.
3Tur— is added to roots when the words forming their objects are
prefixed to them, 5>*rOTr> * a potter, ' ^mOT*:— Wliea a su-
777 ] P&IHABY NOMINAL BABES. 453
hanta is prefixed to ^ with q^9 the n of this root is changed
to ^optionally; quj^Vjiq: or-j: 'a collection of words.'
added to roots ending inland ^ short or long* it
sometimes forms abstract nouns, sometimes shows the place
or the instrument of action denoted by the root ; ^j— ^f:
praise, 5— TO: barley, ^— <jw:, ^— ^^:, ^— ^: the instru-
nient of doing anything ». «. the hand, Jj— *K: poison, 5 — TT:
fear, f— ^T: a boon &c., ^ with f%— f^^: a tree or a seat,
:fo*TC: otherwise ; 5^ with ^ takes this affix ; ^fa: a collec-
tion; jp^ also takes it, nm.'; 3?^ preceded by a pre[ osition
takes this affix and is changed to ^ ; RTOv STW:, ft^Rf:
&c.; food or eating 5 ( when no preposition precedes, it takes
^s? — ^TO*' ); the roots srq^and s^nj; not preceded by a preposi
tion take 3i<Tj 3TT: muttering prayers, ^nr: the act of piercing;
( but when a preposition precedes, they take ^T 5 as gMvHIM:
secret whispering into the ear, separation, &c. ); the roots
^^[ and ^ by themselves take sr^or ^3^; ^^-Wr: or WR:
sound; f^-f^: or ^RT'i with a preposition they take the
latter oiily; srWT;-, Vfl^r: &c.; qi^ without any preposition
or with the preposition OT, M, ft and *rq takes either arq^or
^rsi^; *nr- or qTH: restraint, control, &c , 3TW or inw:
marriage; similarly fn^M-' or p^m: &c.; the roots iy^ , ^,
fr^ and ^^, with R take 3r^or TST^; ^iiif: or f^iTTT: speech,
HH^» or HHK^ sound, &c. ^[ with or without ft takes IT^
or trst; 9)QT: or ^TOT:, Rl^QT: or-g^n;: the eound of a lute;
•the root j^ when a word other than a preposition is prefixed
to it takes STVJ with a preposition it takes ^jsr 5 ^rnr^: the
pride of wealth, ^Ffrr^*' madness, insanity; but when pre-
ceded by sr or ^r^ it takes s^when the meaning is joy; srjr^:
or ^jTT-» in otller Ct8es ifc takeB TO.? SHTT^:, ^HTT careless-
ness, oversight, a blunder. The affixes sjq^and -qor are added
to several other roots too numerous to note here; the
difference between these is that ^n? occasions Vriddhi of the
preceding vowel, 31^ does not.
454 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 777
— is added to roots having f , ?, 5^, or <£ for their penulti-
mate, and to the roots sft and SFT and denotes the agent • f^?ar-
f§Ng-: one who writes, %<T-f§Tq:; one who throws, spj-3j«r: &c.
ift-nnr one who pleases ; 3£ — f%j: one who scatters ; it is also
added to roots ending in grr with or without any preposition,
the final 3jr being dropped ; ^rr- ^n or jr^f: one who knows,
wise ; ^ — if: or 3TTg: one who calls ; also when a subanta is
used prepcsitionally with it ; ^r-iff^: one who gives cows or
cuts the hair; qt-flTT- ( ffTvqf ITOfTfa* ) an elephant; when
added to ^jf it has various meanings ; *T*TW happy; f3q!WU:
placed in difficulties; jrof: a measure of corn, i&c. This is
also added to n? — ajf a house, JJ^T: a wife, a house.
T — is added to g^ not meaning 'to see' when a prononn pre-
cedes it; a<I+?^=3T=?rr?5r; like that; also when the words
and 3^qr precede ; ^r^r: like to, 3(WirS3i: like another
is added similarly;
and ^f^- — Before these the 3? of the noun forming the object
of the root with which it is used prepositionaiiy inserts the
syllable ^ after it. ^ {s added to the root ^ after
and ^r; ftq- ^^fn% ft^nr^: ' one who speaks sweetly ;
' subject to the iuflnence of, obedient to the will of; — ^ after
the words $frr, fro, ifg", and *r*r; J^H — fs(q>-^-cR>: doing good,
&c.; OT^r: causing fear, dreadful, 3?^?T^T:i — to the root ip^
after a subanta ; i%|prr: passing through the sky, a bird;
—to the roots ^, <f, 3, fir, ^, ^, ^ and ^ when the
whole is a name; f^HWTJ God; T^hft a portion of the Sama
Veda; qffon a birde who chooses her husband; ^[5r?nr: an
elephant, ?TJT^^: name of a mountain; ^faq*: name of a
king; 3WTW: name of a king 5— to *n* after ^r^, ^T^nTJT:
one who restrains his speech for the observation of a vow mr
— to the roots ^ and g- after the words ^ and ^ respec-
tively ; flifagT the^earth ? $faf: Indra.-— to ^ after the words-
W and ^flT» frilCT: all destroying, all powerful -r
f 777 ] PRIMABY NOMINAL BASKS. 455
also a rogue; $*£CTT ( a river ) sweeping away its banks;
*fttar: dashing against, coming in collision with the clonds
as the wind; cgfiq^qj blowing away dry cowdung, as a strong
wind or gale, ^^is added to q^ cau. as in *ffiifrvq': making
the people tremble with fear; name of a king; — to
3^ and 5T 'to go' after the words *RT, S*, ffteT and
flatulenof ; *T?W3T: facing the wind, a kind of deer;
kitten; ffos^p an oilman; ana ^T^^ff: causing flatulence
( ITPTT ) » kind of bean;— to §• and \JJTT after the words
and ^7, re?pectively. *9RTC: a t aby sucking breast;
( *f )W a goldsmith;— to g^ after f^j and
the afflictor of the moon »'. e. Rahu. sr^g^: (
5^ffrf^r ) wounding the vital .parts, painful- — to q^[ after
words showing measure as sr^f^r^T WT3T, OTfifT^ ^^Tf: and
after fax and •HS'-ftmTC: one who cooks measured corn, a
raiser; SHafa^rr nail-scorctiing ( as ir^r^: );— to 5^ ond f!^
after the words 3*3$ and ^9T?; <«^3<I^Ui: those who do not
see the sun t. e. the queens of a king who are shut up in
the harem; srarijaT: scorching the forehead;— to £^, jr^ and
«TT afer gir, ^^ and ^TT^T respectively; ^^7 of a fierce
aipect, f n?^: lightning; (rrfwrq: a road ( shrouded in such
darkness that one has to clap one's hands for driving away
serpents &c. that may be in the way ); to ^ meaning 'to
consider oneself as, tfifefiRT, a pedant, who considers
himself a Pandita; irfaHf: one who considers himself a cow
» e. who is very humble; &c.
— is added to any root with {^,53; or $ prefixed to it
when the idea of ease or difficulty is present, £T?^T-* done
easily; 5*3^ done with difficulty; 53^ done easily; so g:$rrcR;
qSr&i, &c. &c.
— is added in the sense of the place or the instrument of the
action or forma abstract nouns ; 5? with 3rr-3TT^T^ A mine ; *&%
with 3Hr» 3TT^r: & spade; trot with ^T, 3WTO: a place of traffic ;
a- touch-stone ; ^r — ifr^T" & pasture-ground;
: a path; srg-— ^5: a shoulder j ft*m: that by which the
456 SANSKEIT GBAMHAB. [§777
people are guided, thb Veda; unr: and anp. a Ian. Before this
not preceded by more than one preposition becomes 3*
^T3J-— added to roots ending in consonants has almost a universal
application and a variety of senses*, before bhis the final ^ or
V£ are changed to ^ or jj; q^_^rr^: food; ^^— ^nr: desire*
*TIT— f^MTlT: rest; 5— w, strength, substance, with arft-grft-
or 3Kfr€rrr- dysentery; £—51^: * necklace, ^ — <rr^: a foot;
^;— Tsn* being, a thing &c . fr^— ^f: a house-
a disease- ^^^— W& touch; f?>j— ^: fuel;
laxity; f%-^mr: ( *q^6R«^Rm^ ) the body, with ft— .
: a house, &c.; — to 55 when preceded by a preposition,
r : the warbling of birds ( otherwise ^: ). The roots
and fijr^change their vowel to 3TT before this; fro?: or
: the throbbing of the hand, &c. ^ and J preceded by 3n
take bDth ^37 and arr; arrtnT: or — ^r: a loud sound, angro-
^r: a deluge. Sometimes the affixes q*^ and 377 are used in
different senses; «ft — mq*: chief, jronr: friendship, kindness;
-* the act of moving a piece at chess, draughts, &c.
". marriage: f with t^-^rrq': justice, wrq-: ruin; ^ with
8TT or r%— 3Wimr: or RJTTf : impediment, separation, 3^99:
a grammatical mark; ^rc^T f^3Tf! ^e confinement of a
thief; but 3t3iTT?: — JTf '• draught, want of rain, fcr after 307
take the affix ^sr when the whole means 'gathering flowers
with the hands' s*u«o|Hj:, DU^ H^^^: 'collecting flowers with
a stick' &c.» it is also added to ^ and &s^ with ft; ^n
the hand; 7335?: hump-backed, the Nyagrodha tree.
^— is added— to the root ff preceded by f^rr, «rr^, ^. <T^, f%«[,
a numeral, and nouns governed by it; f%^r ^tfrfer f^WSTs,
vfT^T: the sun, ^C^TI &c.:— to ^ preceded by 5^:, annr:> 3*,
and ^i}:, grifT*:, 3Tim:HT: a leader, &0., and to ^ preceded
f*$n> ^TT) 7HT and words showing the place of action;
« a soldier, &c.
777 ] PBIMABY NOMINAL BASES. 457
affixed to ^ preceded by arm or ^ f3* changing to fr
the whole meaning 'bearing an inauspicious mark '; a hus-
band causing the death of his wife-^rnmr bearing a mark
on his body indicative of the death of his wife-, similarly
<rfSrOTj — ^is is also added to g^ when the agent of the action
is not a man; ffalT checking bile, such as ghee* <rf^sfr (TTftJT-
^OT ), &c.; — to g-qr preceded by (f^f^and ^TTH" in the sense of
'having the power to do what is denoted oy the root;' fffOT
4one able to kill an elephant/ &c.; — and preceded by qrftt and
arc in the sense of (one having the skill;' qrftre: 'one "ho beats
time with the hand, also a drummer ( beating a drum with
the hand );'— to qr 'to drink' and if if not preceded by a pre-
position; ^ftnq1: 'one who drinks the Soma juice';
'one who chants the Sama Veda ', .but qimUliq: (when
a prep, precede? it ); <TT 'to protect' takes 3?; $fTTTT STTSCnfir, &c.
T— U affixed to ip* preceded by 3T?<T, *ic*l»fl, are*^, ^T , TR, *rf,
3f?ftT, ^fer, qv creeping on the ground, ' ^ **<* ftfHT^
and denotes the agent) to irq preceded by ^r and ^ and shows
the place of action; before this the final consonant with the
preceding vowel or the final vowel of a root is dropped; SRptf
4|*btfrflri 4i»rii|: 'one who goes to the end;' araif: 'a traveller;9
TOT, gffP '» serpent;' r%nT3( is changed to f^—fHir: '*
bird/ ^: 'a fortress,'&c.; — to 5^ when a blessing is implied'
<re S^r: ^Tff •' YV%^ 'may thy son be the destroyer of his enemies;9
—also to 5^ with anr after the words fj^r and ^rr^t %5U^f :
'removing pain, consoling, a son;' fl*Ttq^: 'the dispeller of
darkness, the sun;'-to 5^ preceded by a word having. the senss
of the Loc. or of the Ab. and not denoting a class, or when it
ii preceded by a preposition and the whole is a name; R^H'
* born in a stable;' mi^M <a lotus;' qM>K>H: 'produced after
some operation;' 3f^T3T: &c.; !r5TT:, 9f^r: «a younger brother}'
ihe words fl^r:, 9HT:, ^^uili'' &c. are also formed by meant
of this affix- this is also added to ff^ with qft ; qftgr 'a ditch7
458 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 77?
or— is added to roots ending in arr which insert tr be--
fore it; 3T-3TV: 'one who receives a share/ ^r— qw ' one
who holds/ Ac — to 3$ when preceded by are and sift,
* mist, frost/ srfifctrnr ' a catarrh or cold; — to f ,
and f preceded by a preposition; ararnr ' violation, '
: ' oozing, trickling/ arrow ' end ', aregTT. ' a thief, a
seamonster';— to r%$, %TX, H$, «<n*, >^[and^;?Jf: 'a
lambative, an electuary/ *TO 'an embrace/ irif : 'an alligator/
?irnrt 'a hunter/ ifr*?: ' respiration/ nrw: ' a thing* — to ;ft
and 5 not preceded by a preposition; ^TT-* ' a leader', ^TO: ' a
forest-fire;' — to **»£, ^77, 5R[, Z^[ * to be confused1, ^7
'to smell/ $4?, 9T($, ^5 » $r^> ^^
(these may
also take 3f^[ ); ^T5J: ( or STO*. )> flwne or bla/e/ &c: —
to qfoff, 77 and ^8T^, when their objects are prefixed to
them; RRr$fTcJ: ' one who keeps flesh;1 irffr^vr: ' one who
wishes for flesh;' iri*PT$r: ' one who eats flesh'; — to
and ^ with 3^-, 5Wsnfts?: ' one desiring happiness/
'forgiving much.' ^qTOTT^TTf : 'good-conducted-,'— to ^, if and
HT after their objects; f^if £*T^ WTSnT:> ?ig^PT: (a weaver,
VM«*miq: ' measure of corn-/-to 3^^ w[th ft, «r^: ' food. '
— is added to <rr, JTT, WT, vt, and ^^; qr-ftv: l one who
drinks;' Hf — jsnr: « one who emells; g^ — q^qr ' one who
sees; — to $r and vjr 3 cl.; ^T-^*: ' one who gives, ' w —
«^T: 'one who holds; — to f^and f%^; faf^J 'On« who plasters;'
ftvqp'one who knows/ also when the former is preceded by ft
and the latter by iff and other words; frf^PT: * a god/
'name of Vishno'.' 3TTT%^: ' a lotus/ — to the Oau. of
tpfwith i-q^, and \j; %^q-: (ono who thinks or knows/
' one who fills'; g^ro: 'one who makes another tremble/ cft
Bbatti. 1. 25. vnr<T: l one who holds' ; added to all roots it
forms abstract fern. nonna> ^-farqr * an act; '
'wish/ ^^-^fr^niT 'service-/ qir-^nrr 'hunting;'
3|^T»n ^ambling;' gfpj — 5nTtrf ' wakefulness, &c. '
§ 777 ]
PRIMARY NOMINAL BASES.
459
3T -forms abstract nouns from derivative bases; ^-ftqffa »•
desire to do; ^n»imr a desire to have a son, &c. Also from
roots ending in a consonant having a long vowel for their
penultimate; f£-?ffT desire, 3?f — 3TfT a guess; reasoning, &c^
3^— similarly forms abstract nonns; it is added to roots marked
with an indicatory f and to ft^ and others; ij'— 3TTT old age ~
OT-OTT shame, &c.; M^-f*T^T distinction; separation; ]%^-
f%rm contemplation, anxiety; ^T-^HT cleansing &c. — to VRI
which changes its ^ to SKHS^T mercy ; to roots ending in srr if-
a preposition or the words «r^ and 3f?ff^ precede, ^T-ST^T giving
gift, *TT-inrT lustre, &c. ^T with snj—sr^r faith; with
f disappearance.
s added to ^5^5 *3T*»: ' a washerman. '
io affixed to all roots and ^notes the agent of the action;
3>— ^TT3»: one who makes, acting, &c.5 q^[ — *Ttt'> one who
cooks; S^-*rnre: ^T— ^P^:> W— ^TW, &c; it is added to
5T*J and other roots of that group; but in this case the preced-
ing vowel is not lengthened. 5n^-$m$:, ^if-^IW, ^Rp:
a killer, 3f^^: a father, &c. A.dded to some roots it forms
the name of diseases; ^-JT^^fSf^T vomiting; *g-siqifl<fc|
dysentery; diarrhoea; ^^-f^^M^I itch, scab, &c; sometinfos
it is added to denote the meanings of roots arr^-anfi^i
sitting, ^fr-^nRr^r sleeping, &c.; sometimes it has the sense
of futurity,, ^uf ^fa^f TnR he goes desirous of seeing
Krishna; ^flf qRWP &c.
— is added to f;^, fifa, fimi W% s^with ft, f^with ^R
T j , ^, ^, *rn* ' and ^ in the sense of the ' agent/ or ' in the
habit of;' f%^T — ^^^: <ODe wno blames or is in the habit of
blaming or censuring others,' flfa;— fifa*:
— to f^and ^^ preceded by 3rr;^T^rfr: 'a gambler/
<one wno calls out or vociferates, reviler. '
460 &AN8KBIT GRAHHAB. [ § 777
is added to sr, 3f and ^ in the sense 'ekilul in/
'skilful in walking}' 553^: 'skilful in cutting:' this
may by added to any root when the idea of a blessing is to be
conveyed; srfiqq^ T^qr: 'mayest thou live for many years/
H»yiwq ^rr: 'may eat thou be the giver of delight.7
^q^-4r added to ^5, OT and ^ in the sense of 'one who knows
the art of/ ?r?fe: 'one who knows the art of dancing/ 13^5:
<a digger/ «a miner/ ?&fq>: <a dyer/
3*3— <3!^()— %^>T^: 'tremor;' fa— ^q^: dwelling, a
tumour/ '£—343: 'pain, anxiety/ &c.
affixed to 5|f and fT; irrqR : *a singer/ ^nrsn 4 a year/ « a
kind of rice/
— is affixed to verbs meaning 'to go or to sound/
one who moves.' ^-fcror: 'one who makes a sound/
It it also affixed to verbs meaning 'to ornament, to deck, and to
be angry/ — flgro: serving as an ornament:
, irascible. '-to ^, ^, q
: ' a swift walker: ' ^-^OT: ' one who
goes ' ^j— ipfif: ' a glutton;' **<$<{'• 'that which blazes,
fire;'— to some other roots ending in a consonant,
f^-W^r: &c.:-to the freq. of m^ and ^, ^SJm
* one who goes again and again ', it also forms fern, abstract
nouns with the cauials of roots and the verbs srw , ^, «r^
and %% not meaning ' to wish/ f7-»KUU ' doing action, '
?*T. f«[ with g^^Aiqun • searching. '
affixed to ?rr^ and other roots; rf ^T: ' one who delights, a
son/ j^ — VT^«r: 'he who exhilarates, the god of love, ',^rra-
' one who accomplishes, ' e^ — ^T^T: ' one who bears, '
'thekiUer of Madhu, ' 3^— sr^f: « the
chastiser of the sinful/ ^ — R*fi^ui: ' terrifier, name of
B&vana's brother.'
§ 777 ] PBIMABY NOMINAL BASES. 461
— is added to all nouns to form neu. abstract noons; *£ —
endurance, 5^— f S* langhing, $ft— ^nPT sleeping, <rr-
drinking, g^— i*T3R, *rp£-*rnR, &c. This is also added
in the sense of * the instrument of an action '; jr*^ — 73ER: an
instrument for cutting; an axe, &c; ^ — Jfpftf^nr a milk
vessel ( here it shows the place of action of Adhikarana ).
— ( TOS )— is affixed to m^f fa*, $| g^and * in the
sense of 'in the habit of •/ W*WK: ( srf^Tg qnaHW ) 'a
prattler; f^sjr-f^TT^: ' a beggar-/ $gre?: ' he who divides or
cuts;' 33TO: 'a robber;' 9TTO* '* poor man.'
destructive, hurtful; 4^— ^T^ praising, a
panegyrist.
is added to the cau. of ^g, q^; and q^, to ?r^ and to
the words r%r, JT^T and sn^; ^^*s5 longing for, desirous
of; ^ing compassionate; ftgrg disposed to sleep; *MUg:,
^r^r^;' full of faith.'
f — ( f^> f3^* ^ » % >—
: <one who tills the ground'; ^-fnR: a mountain.
is added to TT^ and other roots; 471^: a well; ^TT%- a
dwelling.
fqr— is added to ^r^ and other roots of the group; sm%: a
battle, arrfit: &c.
r% — is added to the roots ^r and tTT and others assuming these
forms; <qr— ^qif^r: fraud, condition, &c.; ftf^r: a treasure,
^Rr: a joint, peace, &c.; 5T»f^: the sea ( here it is used In
the sense of 3Tnj<Mi)l )-
is added to 'It i ^ ^» ^ > Wt «K> and ^nr; ^r—
a rudder, helm- an oar. afrir a sickle; vrw^ a fan
made of the deer's skin; ^rfosf cause of generation;
spade; ^rftsf patience, forbearance;
462 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 777
is affixed to 3j with sr, ffr,?, %, T3T with ft, ***,
with an, 3T* with affir, ^ with qft and ^ with if;
swift-going; srRn* a conqueror; ^ft^ timid. &c., ^rfq^ wast-
ing away; it is also added to fft with ft- when the noun go-
verned by it is prefixed to it and when the idea of censure
or reproach is to be conveyed; ifcftiMn, ^tRTTOft, &c.
-is affixed to ^^, ^jf, snj, 3*, %, 55 35,
^witharr, ^, ^t^and ^ with an; *?, %;
^»ff,^»^^*W,WC, ^, W*» all with
and ^r?; with f%5 55? , ^, JTW, 9^ , 9^; all with n; ^ with
3rffT and gi<r ; y^ with grf^r, ^r with 3^3; and denotes the
agent; ?*ra[— HIlfiK one who abandons, rrfir^ .all of passion,
impassioned, a lover ; srrftni one who takes a share, ^rf^ one
who blaxnes; similarly ifnret , fflfttT > &c.; this is also added to
«jra[ and the other /oota of that group but without occasioning
any change in the roots; ^rq—^rfffi; tranquil; jr^—irf^^j but
with or
— is added to the roots of the q?r group in the sense of
'the agent;' yz^jmft jrrfN 'one who takes;'
f% with K— f%wh! 'a sensualist-/ f r^r with 3fqr
'one who is guilty;' *f with ^R-^R^ff^ fono who defeats;'
&c.;— to f^ when precede* by ^ITR and ^; ^inf f^mm
'one who murders a child,' sfnivHid«3l 'one who cuts
off the head.' This is added to any root, when the subanta
other than one denoting a class, precedes it, in the sense of
'in the habit of/ 'disposed to'; ^<crHTT5r^ ( T«W ^f^r
'^tt&tfCT ) 'one who eats hot things-' ^rr^rf^t ' one who acts
well;' W5T3Tf^ 'one who expounds the Vedas or the nature
of Brahman;' — to q^ after any subanta. <TTO^<Tmft«j[ 'one
who considers himsalf a Pandits/ ^jnfhnTTI^ 'one who con-
siders himself handsome,' &o.; this is added in the sense of
the Past Tense to q^ preceded by the name of a sacrifice;
^, 'one who Las performed the Soma sacrifice-/ so
777 ] PBIMARY NOMINAL BASES. 463
and to f^ when the noun governed by it is
prefixed to it; flqmmfrtq[ 'one who hat killed his ancle.'
This is also added to a root when a noun signifying a standard
of comparison is prefixed to it; 3?tRr%i( 'one who alters a
sound like that of a camel'; vqifrmfq< 'one who cries like a
crow-1 this is also added when the observance of a vow is to
be indicated; ^fegqnfcq 'one who observes the vow of
sleeping on the alter)' also in the sense of 'necessity' or the
payment of a debt ; STOtrvrrfcg 'what takes place of necessity-/
'one who pays off a debt of Rs. 100.'
is added to ^ with stf and f%r, sn*
with sr, q^, <HJ and H^ all with 3?^, ^, 37 with an:, 3*,
^•5, and ^ in the sense of 'in the habit of, possessed of the
properties of,' or 'expert in1 'acting well .' arsteRwr, 'decorat-
ing, skilled in decorations ; ftficg qn#**r ftfreftv ( see
Bhatti. Y. 1 .) 'repudiating, turning aside ;' ^?<rr%tj 'clever
in flying up;' ^fffwj, ^fqrwy, ffftroj, fti%^, &<M it is found
added to some other roots also by poets ; e. g. S^TRTOJ ''powerw
'resplendent,'
and ^«F-( f^por^, ^^^? ) are added to >g with the words
*«T, *^&t TfefT, sflTi ^VT and fiw prefixed to it in the
Sense of SfigCTgTW 'being what a thing or person was not
before:' 3R|^r: srresF WHfff' 3TT^JKW^: or— -Hf^?: becom-
ing rich not being rich at first, ( see Bhatti. III. 1. ) so
— is added to Desiderative bases to form nouns;
desirous of doing; Rfifift^' ^eairous of conquering, &c.j and
to sr^ with 3U, f>T<^, f^[ , and f» ; 3TT5tg: desirous, hopeful.
fvng: a beggar j fqrg: one who knows, knowing ; %^ wishing.
is added to ^ with f%, IT, and^q[. f^: all pervading,
mighty, srif: able, ^: creating; also to ? — TOrT?-' that which
464 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 777
moves to a measured distance; ^Tffg: which runs in a hundred
streams, Name of a river.
affixed to ^, **,-*
and sr and denotes the agent; 55^—^1^^: sporting, glittering
falling ^—inpj: happening, living- ^—^355:
: amorons.
affixed to ti^,.f%n[, and f%^; f^: 'who knows,
knowirg;' ft&i 'breaking, brittle;' %^: ' cutting.'
( ^*F ) is added to arpj and the Fre. Bases of *nj, sr
and qpgr; 3TT*T^ ' watchful/ &c. ( Vide Bhatti. II. 22. Bag.
XIV. 85. Sis. XX 36 )- 5^: $*: gffir^r *T
' one who performs sacrifices frequently' (see Bhatti.
II. 20. ); 5^-: ^: 3Tfff$nfr ^T «TMrfim 3f«T^: *one who
mutters prayers repeatedly, an ascetic;' 5^: g^: arm^T^r *f
^Trftm ^T^I^* ' biting frequently, a serpent, demon ' ( vide
Bhatti I. 26 ).
ndfu* — Derivatives are formed with these affixes
which are added to roots and then dropped; the difference
between the first two is that in the case of the latter
3 is inserted between it and the root, if it ends in a
short vowel.
a affixed to f g$^ preceded by a sulanta ; >^T$3^ 'one w^°
touches ghee; H WOT/ one who touches anything after recit-
ing a holy verse,' &o. except when the subanta means water;
^33^31: «one who touches water' and not ^33?*%^. The
following words are to be accepted as they are ; *n^-qnir^[
(Jtift ^Jt^ft flft) sacrificing regularly at every season;
a priest who officiates at a sacrifice* >j^- — ^^ — proud,
haughty; ^[— ?r^ a garland; f^— f%«^ a direction;^—
^rf«OT^ name of a metre, words like m^fa derived from the
roots srs^and the words 333; and SRSST ought to be considered
as derived by means of this affix.
8777]
PRIMARY NOMINAL BASIS.
465
is is added to a root with or without any preposition
prefixed to it ; ^ a^ft ^: or ir^: one who bring-- forth,
a mother ; ^ — 3^5' those who sit in heaven, the gods,
fjj[q[— jrfij^a powerful enemy; 3^ — 3P?3^ the constellation
of stars called (Aswini •' ;ft — %^T«ft the leader of an army;
^ — OTi^ the creator ; nr — 3lf?ff%r^ one who consecrate*
the sacred fire, a householder ; f$f — ijrfrfafr the conqueror of
Iiidra, name of Havana's son- *g — ^Tfg^he who praises the
gods* 5 — €t*T$r^ the extractor of Soma juice; ^>— CT$5^,
n^, &c. This is also added to g^, ^^, and.
when the object governed by them is prefixed to them;
seeing all; *n?*S^ touch! Dg the vitals; f^^ the
creator of the universe; — to 3?^ and 5^5 ffioTT^ a flesh-eater,
a demon ; al#$<l the Killer of a Brahmana ; — to ^57^ changed
to 3^; g^ga^ a garment. Before this affix roots ending in
a nasal lengthen their penultimate; as $rar-ST$n^ tranquil.
one who stretches, &c., except in the case of roots
m , and ft«| , which drop their nasal and then obey
the general rule; arc^R *T^mfa sraiftt a traveller ; qft
— ^flcT^ stretching on all sides ; 3^ yielding, poor;
well restrained, &c.; the an1 of ^rr^ is changed to f
before this ; fjnr ^iKcftfd — ftwf^nt one who givefl advice to
his friend ; 3TTT3T^ a blessing . IT forms fiftr speech ; the roots
?fc(, &1^> an^ ^^ dr°P their nasal and insert ^ before their
final ; qrf «RL dropping down from a vehicle, 3KIH3. dropping
down from a vessel ; MuKqg; falling down from a leaf ; before
this amx (^7 changes its 3 to 7 and other roots change their
^ to 37; 3?^r^ (31$ifr3irm) a gambler; %-^T: a weaver;
protector ; this forms Vriddhi with a preceding 3?;
=3Rr: the protector of the people, ^nr — ^jr feverish,
swift-going ; before this affix ^ or ^ following ^ is
dropped; q^-^J swooned. g§-^ hurting, injuring; Vtyttg
what troubles, ». e. presses heavily on the axle of a carriage,
hence the cart-load: the following words are irregularly
H. 8. Q. SO
466 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ g 777
derived ; 3^(— *T^ speech, sr^— SH^T one who asks •
acting by will; name of Shiva, a kind of worm, a gambler*
&o.; isr— 3ft; wealth; ^— qft^T^ an aecetic; f^—
lightning ; iy^— 3^!^ the world ; vq* — %ft the intellect.
- — is affixed to *T33[ which lengthens its sr before it;
one who takes a share ; SHH^C devoted to, worshipping, &c.
forms fern, abstract nouns - ^ — ^f^ an act, &c.;
P^ise; irn-irfir gait, &c.; ^-n% sport; ^-^
a bow; TOF— fan% state; *t— *fn% a song, &c; qr-qrra: drink-
ing. q^g^— qfifc: cooking; q^f — 5%; a sacrifice, &c.. It is
added to the roots §|, ^55; , f ?r and ff in the sense of ' the
instrument of; sgfff: the instrumen4: of hearing t. e. the ear,
&c. To the root q^ with ^ri^ or •,%, f%^[ or r%q; is added ;
<f*qf%: or ^r»q^, prosperity, ft<n%: or ^q^ adversity; ft
instead of ft is added to roots ending in ^ and to <£• and
others ; ^-^tffr: scattering. The following words are to be
taken as they are:— ^t — ^TH% end5 f^— %|?T a weapon-,
H — ( 3^, ^53; ) — ^^.—is affixed to all roots and denotes the
agent7 tT-*<f a doer; jr^-ir^, q^C-Tf , ^-^tf or ^f|?j,
f^-^ or 1% &c-; 5^-^ or flRra or ?Rf^ one who goes,
&c., ft^ 'one habitually sacrificing7 ( ^ ) &c.
r_^ is added to ^T or $ f, sft,
q^-, q^} ^ and ^^ and shows the instrument of the action
denoted by the root ; ^j or ^t-^Tsr an instrument for cutting,
a sickle, ?njr the instrument of guidance i. e. the eye, ^r^—
^f a weapon, ^TT^— ^TT^f, S-'ETTST, 3^-m^3r the rope by
which an animal is tied to the pole of a carriage, ^-*rrre
a hymn of praise, g-cfnr a whip, f%^r~%^T a watering pot,
m*—fcf , q^;— q^ a vehicle, the wing of a bird, &c. n^— snfV
a leather-strap, ^^ — ^rj the jaw; it is also added to — i^in the
aenae given— qtsr the snout of a hog, a ploughshare, the thun-
§ 777 ] PRIMARY NOMINAL BASES. 467
derbolt, a garment. — qj^sf an instrument for purifying, a sort
of ring of Jtusha, grass worn on the fourth finger on religious
occasions, and to ^ And \n; vrrar: a mother, a foster mother,
the earth, name of a tree, Emhlic myrobalan.
— ( fqparac ) is added to a few roots-, <nr— <n$3TT: (
fqr$TT: ) ripened, matured; frf^flT artificial from ^
produced by gift ( see Bhatti. I. 10, 13 ).
*re» — *ir— *mre: a singer.
f— < ^T^, ^ )—
^— is added to q^, *rr^, *r^, f^£, *^, and ^w; jy^r: a
sacrifice, qrair Beggary, q^f: an effort, f%^r: going, lustre,
sr^r a question, ^TJT: protector.
^—*grSP sleep, a dream.
^— ( HRT^ )— is added to **^, ^, and \jq^, in the sense of
' in the habit of ;' ^SHJ sleepy, ^wr^ thirsty, ijsor^ bold,
confident.
3— (W3)— i8 added to 5ng^, ^;, >j^and %q;in the sense of
*in the habit of;' g-fsj timid, qg^ covetous, greedy, Tjvn; bold,
%^5 throwing, casting.
*TC— ( ^RT^ ^- ^5ITT going, a kind of deer, ^— ^jr^ and
voracious, gluttonous, glutton.
is added to ^35;, q^[ and ^r and forms fern.
abstract nouns; 3*qi asceticism, an attack, f^qr a sacrifice,
$?qr doing; it also takes 51 andf%^; fSfirr, ^fti; it is
affixed to 3^, ( not changed to sfr in this case ) with »<p^,
^ and q^ with ft, R3J, ra^, 5» ^ 1 and f in *ho sense of
either the place or the instrument of the action denoted by
the root?; ^TT^qT assembly, f^TOT a couch, a market place,
the hall where an assembly meets, FWrqT slippery ground,
JT?CTT the nape of the neck, fror, 3OT a sprinkling with the
Soma juioa, ^ruTT * bed, ^?qT wages, ^n a vehicle.
468 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 777-778
— ig affixed to sp|, 5?^, ffcr, ^, fifc, and tf <r ; TO bowing
down, yielding, q^Fir shaking, tremulous, ^ smiling, ^
desirous, beautiful, fjfa injurious, murderous, sfhr shining.
The word g^TO adt>. is also derived from gr^ with * (changed
to 3T ; and T-
added to ^r, ^ %, ^ and ^; ^r— ^T*: 'one who gives
or eats;' §• — vn& 'one who drinks-/ %^: * one who binds-/
one who goes or destroys-/ ^5: ' one who goei or takes
me who has seen the other
side, hence, adept in/ lim^m<, < one who has fought with a
king'; similarly 4M$r<K, 'H^Wi,, and -U4$r4^
q^ — ( IET^ ) is affixed to the roots f , fsr, *f%i and ^; ??^T go-
ing, cruel, fncMi victorious, ^^^ perishable, fleeting) it is
also added to irq; ip^T transient, going.
CHAPTER XV.
§ 778. Syntax deals with the mode of arranging words in
sentences. Of the three divisions of Syntax — Concord, Govern-
ment and Order, the Syntax of Sanskrit is mainly concerned
with the first two. Syntax in English depends principally
upon the last. In Sanskrit and other cognate Languages
which are rich in inflection, the relation f which one word
bears to another in a sentence is determined by its grammatical
form, and no change occurs in the meaning of the sentences,
how-so-ever the order of words be changed. But in English
and other languages, deficient in inflection, 'order' is every-
thing. Change the order of words and there is a corresponding
change in. the meaning. In Sanskrit, therefore, the mere order
§ 778-780 ] SYNTAX. 469
of words is not of material importance, though a perfect
arbitrariness in that respect is not allowable. Sanskrit Syntax
also takes farther into account the meaning and use of partici-
ples, the various tenses and moods, and participles. * These
•will be treated of in their proper order.
THE ARTICLE.
§ 779. There are no articles in Sanskrit corresponding to
the English Definite and Indefinite articles. The words cfifsar^
ud q-^, however, are often used in the sense of 'a ceitain ' and
v*ie pron. fT3" m. f. n. as equivalent to 'the*' ^f%gr<i ^: a certain
man; <r^: qjRr: a traveller; 3- ^j3T the king, &c.
§ 780. As already remarked ( See § 54 ) there are three
numbers in Sanskrit: a singular number, denoting a single indi-
vidual, a dual number denoting two, and a plural number
denoting more than two. Besides these general senses —
* As the great bulk of Sanskrit literature is thrown in the
form of verse, the laws of Syntax will be found not to be al-
ways observed by the poets. In ordinary prose writings the
usual order of words in a sentence is, first the subject with its
adjuncts, then the object with its adjuncts, then the adverbs
and other indeclinables ( extensions of the predicate ) and lastly
the predicate. The chief characteristics of Sanskrit style are
in the words of Prof. Max Muller, 'the predominance of co-
ordination, the use of the Locative Absolute, a fondness for
compounds and indeclinable participles supplying the place
of subordinate clauses, the frequent employment of the Past
Participle instead of the finite verb, a predilection for passive
forms, and the absence of the indirect construction and of the
subjunctive mood. For the latter reason the use of the tenses
and moods is comparatively simple; on the other haud, the use
of the cases, being much less definite than in Latin and Greek
presents some difficulties.7
M. Williams1 Grammar for Beginners.
470 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 780
( a ) The singular may be used to denote a clas§;
W^il^T-' the lion is the king of beast?. ^f%lT^ «T?: SIB*: &o.
(b) The dual sometimes denotes a male and a female of the
same class} ffcRT parents; ^?$?r a male and a female of sparrow.
( 1 ) Note: — Words like g[q-, fgrihr, gir, £f , &c. meaning
*a pair/ &c. which are dual in sense but singular in form ought
to be always used in the singular, except when eevcral pairs
are meant.
( 2 ) Note:— Words like ?*cfr, *%, TTsfr, &c. should always
be used in the dual in Sanskrit.
( c ) The plural, like the singular, may represent a class,
STTgratt: *£*3t. ( or sn^fur: *&?'• ) Brabmanas (*. e. the Brahmana
class ) are adorable.
( 1 ) The plural is hot unfrequently used as a mark of res-
pect oj reverence, f i% 3fr$fc?TCTOT:> so ( says ) the venerable
Shankaraeharya; ft^ aTI^I^TT^T^ this is the opinion of the
revered preceptor, &c.
( 2 ) In the first person, great personages and writers some-
times use the plural instead of the singular;
: we ( t. e. 1, ) too ask you something;
but we (,t. e. I, the writer ) hold this opinion;
jfr^H% we rule over speech ( ». a. language ).
( 3 ) Words like^m:, ^fTv 3WTTJ,ffr^fr«, 3TT<f:,
&o. are always used in the plural, though some of them aie
singular in sense.
( 4 ) Names of countries which are really the names of the
people inhabiting them, must be used in the plural; ^r f%55n£
gTCTtHlV be went to Videha, &c.
But in the case of compounds ending in words denoting a
country, such as ^^f, ftw* &c. the sing, must be used; an%
IT«T^^T ^IdlSa-H sn^ ^JIT^ there is a town called Pataliputra
in the country of Magadha.
( 5 ) The plural of proper nouns denotes a family or race-
as in English;
§ 781-784 ] SYNTAX. 471
SECTION I.
CONCOED.
§ 781. Oonoord is the agreement of words in a sentence a*
regards gender, number, person or tense.
The concords deserving notice in Sanskrit are three: — ( 1 )
Concord of the verb with the Subject; ( 2 ) Concord of the
Adjective with the Substantive; and ( 3 ) Concord of the Rela-
tive with its Antecedent.
CONOOBD OF THE VERB WITH THE SUBJECT.
§ 782. The verb must agree with its subject in number and
person; amffa TT3TT 5T5JT 3m there was a king, Nala by name;
3Tf *P53Tf& I go; STTSTofr *T*W two Brahmanas go, &c.
§ 783. ( a ) When two or more subjects differing in number
are connected by 'and' the verb must be plural; prft: ^fr ^T
c. Mah. Bha.
Sometimes the verb agrees with the nearest subject in number,
qf[ »H^Tft ^T ^Slf^ft I
II Mah. Bha.
( b ) Bat when they are connected by 'or' and are all sing.
the verb will be singular, and when the subject differ in
number the verb will agree with the one nearest to it; *TR-'
'Let Rama or Govinda go,' *r qr f W ^RmTT
nim or these b°ys take tne mano° f™it.'
§ 784. ( a ) When a verb agrees with two or more subjects
of Different persons connected by 'and,' the first person has
preference over the second or third, and the second over the
third; &mt nRshr^wnw: Rama, y°u and * sha11 do this; ^
( 6 ) But when the subjects are connected by 'or', the Terb
472 SANSKEIT GRAMMAR. [ § 784-786
tgwes with the one nearest to it ^r^T W *T aedmVIIR? he
or we accomplish thtt, 3f£ Tnd*WT fl^TT S^WaTt *T vfotft
either I or King Kama or Lakahmana will perish.
§ 785. The predicate may not always be a finite verb; but
a participle, or an adjective or a noun may take its place.
(a ) When a participle is need as the predicate it must
agree witfc the subject in number and gender; *f H^rfi^K he
•«i& tnat, ^r^pnft she said that, jfrr ^VRTf^ ITOTfir their
bonds were cat off, CT$ 5<T the work is done, 3cTT f^Tr the
creeper is cat; &c.
(b) When an ad jective-or a noua is used as the predicate,
a form of the roots 3^ or ^ may be used with it or may be
omitted; the adjective osed predicatively agrees with the
subject in number and gender-, 'words like mifqq, qrsr,
^ &c- retain their gender and number; igywr: ^^: a
good servant is difficult to be obtained, 55^: ftg:
good son is the object of his father's pride,
riches are the abode of miseries, ^ 5 cffqr 3^f^tHM*im': &cr*
in these cases the verb agrees with the subject in number and
sot with the noun used predicatively •
and not
§ 786. When a substantive or an adjective is used predica-
tively with verbs of incomplete predication such as l to grow,
to seem, to be, to appear,' &c. the substantive or adjective so
used must agree with the subject in case; crqf *r fovzm this is
my resolve; ^ igjmr: JHimTOSr: 5*W* *aat king seems
emaciated through wakefulness; ST^^^«T^q^r desirous of
being the lord of the three worlds.
( a ) The same applies to transitive roots of incomplete
predication used passively; fo gf^RT * W^: ^& f»<T: by
that sage the mouse was made ( transformed into ) a cat, &c.:
a king is thought to be Vishnu.
§ 7*7-789 ] SYNTAX. 473
§ 787. When an indeclinable used with an adjectival force
takes the place of the verb, the object governed by it is pat in
the Nominative case. *
II. 55. ) it is not fit to cat down even a poisonous tree having
first reared it up* here the indeclinable 3roT9cT is equivalent to
and the whole sentence to %$ ^§ tf *&3 BTOTttKT ( *
Concord of the Adjective with the Substantive.
§ 788. An adjective, particpial or qualitative, most agree
with the substantive it qualifies in gender, number and case;
a handsome man; ^q^cTr ^fr a beautiful woman;
a. great calamity, q
f
But numeral adjectives of fixed gender and number remain
unchanged: — $ref 3T9TOTT: * hundred Brahmaoas; ^nt \^j: a
hundred women, firsrf^ ^fg5<gllH twenty children.
§ 789. When an adjectives qnalifie two or more substantives
it agrees with them in their combined number; when the
substantives differ in gender, the adjective will be masculine
when the substantives are masculine and feminine-^ and neuter
when they arc masculine, feminine and neuter n^TT CT^T ^
^f^^KcU ^cT- the king and his queen are of laudable
conduct; ^: qjms* ?W f€: SR!>T: g^ W I 3?Wi^cTn^ ^RTTOT
Sf^h?ar ?T ^"5T?T.! fulfilment of duty, satisfaction of desires, pride,
auger, happiness snd long Iife5 all these proceed undoubtedly
from wealth.
( a ) Sometimes the adjective takes the gender of the majority
of the substantives; ^V ^r *TT(TTffafy ^TW WT? g?T: \&g: I
^T^^Tit ^^T Hrferr IT3T^r3 I! aged parents, a good wife and
v young son should be maintained even by doing u hundred
ioul deeds, so has Manu spoken ( laid down ).
Viman.
474 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 789-793
( I ) And sometimes it takes the gender and number of the
substantive nearest to it when the particle ^ is need; 3^:
<F«Jf « ^DTf : 3lMWHr ^r ^fe Rejection, quarrel and an itching
sensation prevail all the more they are attended to; q^q- *f*hn;
&fd«ft ^T ^ Wttfr ^ ( $?OR ) by whose valour we have be-
come happy and so have the three worlds.
§ 790. W^eQ * P^ti or potential passive participle is used
as predicate with a noon in apposition to the subject, the parti-
ciple agrees with the subject-, ^m: 3R3* fftorr d4lti<T: ( S'ak-
VI. ) the demons are made the marks of your arrows by Hari.
CONCORD OF RELATIVE wim IT^ ANTECEDENT.
§ 791. The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender,
number and person, the cases of the relative and its antecedent
being determined by their relation to their respective clauses;
*T IT : $*for he who has wealth has a noble family
«TW; lifar ^vHlft ^1% ^VW'dvf vl^^ what, which
is fit to be united with anything, a wise man should unite
with it &c.
§ 792. When the relative has for its predicate a noun
differing in gender from the antecedent the relative generally
takes the gender of the antecedent noun, the demonstrative
pronoun following that of the noun it qualifies;
fiT *T?*r ^HHHF PnHfsr: -non-endurance of the merits of another is
but the nature of the wicked;
§ 793. The relative pronoun q^ nsu. sing, is used like the
English ' that ' to introduce a clause, the gender of the demon-
strative pronoun being the same as that of the antecedent noun;
*ff £TC( &W SR: arerre^iUNicf ff VRinf W it is tfce pride of
wealth that even a learned man slights another; &Hfrq-
it is a true saying that one good fortune
follows another.
§ 793-797 ] SYNTAX. 475
Obs: — Sometimes the antecedent noun or pronoun is omitted
and has to be inferred from the gender and number of the
relative*; «. g. vr^T f% *ft JT ^TT<T *TT^% »• «• 3*3 -T^T. &c. what
is the use of wealth to him who does not bestow it on men-
dicants, &c.
SECTION II.
GOVERNMENT.
§ 794. The only portion of Syntax treated separately in
Sanskrit grammars ie the KarakaprakaraDa or the chapter on
Government. Karaka 'is the name given to the relation
-Bsisting between a noun and a verb in a sentence. There are
six Karakas in Sanskrit belonging to the first seven cases,
except the Genitive, which is, therefore, not a Karaka case.
These are <£<rr, qjff, 3?W, tfsr^R, aWT^R and aiRreTUI,
§ 795. There are several indeclinables in Sanskrit which also
govern cases. Oases governed by indeclinables are called Upa-
padavibhaktis, as distinguished from those governed by verbs
which are called Karaka vibhaktis. In cases where both are
possible the latter predominates over the former (
); as in gfRstf snr*^ although srjr^ alone
would govern the Dative.
§ 796. The Nominative, as in English and other languages
is simply the naming case; its office, when used by itself, is to
express the crude form of a word, gender, measure and number
and nothing more.* When used with a verb it forms its Subject.
THE ACCUSATIVE
§ 797. The Accusative denotes the object i. e. the person ol
thing upon whom or which the effect of an action takes place-
srom Pan. II. 3. 46.
476 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 797-800
he worships Hari; ?ntf H^jgtf wrf* going to a
Tillage he touches grass. *
§ 798. All transitive verbs govern *n Accusative;
ft«Jtfit collects flowers; an q* franrfcft ( the creator ) created
water first, &c. Several transitive verbs govern what is called
in English a factitive object besides a direct object;
Kum. II. 13. they consider thee to be
Prakriti, they know thee to be Parnsha; griTft ^cTK 1?W having
made Kumara the leader ( of the forces );
made his son Aja by name.
$ 799. \ Intransitive roots govern the Accusative nouns
denoting space or country, or duration of time and distance-
sleeps in the country oi the Kurus. <f
there he dwelt for some days. 4U<
he sits down till a cow is milked; sFf^f srms'nf he walks for a
Kosa- ^t^T ^>|^^| ^^V the course of the river is winding for a
Kosa; but 1TRTW fef^i^ studies twice a month; sft^rcq^^r qfe:
the hill is situated in a part of a Kosa.
§ 800. Boots having the sense of motion, real or metaphori-
cal govern the Accusative of the place to which it is directed.
fJW «l-odffi goes to a village; amMvMl (wm m* with his
bow strung he roamed all over the forest; <HIH^^J qrt
irx^^[ they reached the highest point of joy; j^
goes to Krishiia (thinks of him) mentally; ^ M<d^^^ ^T I%t
while thus pondering he sank into sleep.
(a) When the motion is real, the Dative may also be used;
IJTO «rf ir^sfff; bat not of words denoting 'a road;'
4 But when the relation ot object and verb is expressed by
the passive termination the noun forming the object is put in
the nominative case; fft: ^^Jrt
t OTOTS^r*c*r?cT&frit I Pan- n. 3. 5.
§ 800-804 ] SYNTAX. 477
qnjpf «l^fo only; but z<v*fr qft <I«91W he retches the main
road by taking a by-path.
§ 801. The roots* $ft, ^Err and 3rr^ , with arRr, govern the
Accusative of the place where the action takes place; 3rf\r-
reclining
on a stone-slab; srofcrf tfrsrft^tfsRCWT occupied half of Indra'a
seat; sromH *ri&3OTlWtWT* lived in Ayodhyl delightful in
all seasons.
§ 802. f f*K **& ariStfa governs the Accusative;
he Pannes the path of goodness; urnrr
is that harlot girl on
whom you have fixed your mind ( see Bhatti. VIII. 80. ).
Barely this governs the Loc. 3TmRT^ra Tft1 fondly resorts
to sin. f%^ with a preposition governs the Ace. but with OT
meaning 'to sit9 takes the Loc. autfteffa^rffr^T sit on this seat.
5 803. J The root ^ preceded by the prepositions
and 3TT governs the Accusative case ; 5^-
: Hari dwells in Vaikuntha ; ^^HH^ffgit he dwelt in
a dreary forest ; but ^ with ^q- meaning 'to abstain from food'
is used with the Loc.; g-q^flrm ^T fHT: Hama observes a fast in
the forest.
§ 804. f Tbe particles
|RRT:, qfttT-', *mrr, f%^TT, ?T and srf^r meaning <tO, and
'between/ and 3??fWOT 'without/ «regaidiDg to/ govern
the Accusative ; &mm: fair *far the cowherds are on both
. 1. 4. 46. | 3?«ftf^T«r Pan. 1. 4. 47.
t ^TT^OT^TO: | Pan. I. 4. 48.
T
I 3rmcT: ^ftcT« ^TOTT ft**T fT sri^fntft I Vartikas on Pan.
4 48.
478 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 804-805
sides of Krisbna-^gfcT: 5TOHT$ ^TOTO T^Tmop guards keep vigil
on all sides of the palace. sqTjq'R sjfa? 5TT-* Hari is over all the
worlds; 3T'IT*4t 35T3P qidTg: Patala is below the world,
c*fa^-, ftnfr 3TT?m^ fie upon you rogues; ft?f*
upon the lord of the Kurns, with all his brothers; ( fvf^ ) is
used sometimes with the Norn, and sometimes with the Voc.
faiTW <E'£K3mn fie upon wealth which is attended with
troubles; fogr ^ fie upon thee fool; T^ffa %f^ qftSt f%H^-
4lF'MqT3fr5fiw STVTR** ( Bhatti I. 12 ) he dispelled the demons
from around the altar and offered sacrifices to the minor deities
arranged round the principal one. sjnTcTST ^T^3: ^5* <?R-
cTfrT>Kir. XI. 8; irrtf ^TR^r-f^qT sT3Tf% goes near to the
village. Vide Sis. I. 68, VI. 75. jr ^OR^J woe to him who
is not a devotee of Krishna; R??frf^RrRR 5T*RTO«i mH I have
but a faint desire to go to the town; airaTTr ?^f jr*r
^T ^ happinesi is not possible without Hari; %g
with reference to queen Vasumati.
Some of the indeclinables given above are used with the
Genitive ; e. g. 3<rg<TK T^fRn%^ &* ^3THT ( he stood ) very
high above all by his lustre, like the sun, &c.
§ 805. * The following prepositions are used with the
Accusative.
(") 311% 'superior to, higher than/ 3^3 'just after, after, by
the side of, inferior to,' 3?fn -close to' and ^r 'near, inferior
to ;' e. g. arfar %^R[ fT^OT: Krishna excels gods in might j 3n%TTR
^ri%?^: Govinda ie superior to Rama ; TTq'R^ 71^^ it rained
just after the muttering of praj ers ; ^ Rrjrg ^everything
f%£m Pan. II, 3. 8. Prepositions used by
themselves and governing nouns are called Kaimapravachaniya.
**fRT*r i ?R i «<rift% ^ 1 5y^5tf»4^;m^<
^: I 3TTHT^Tit I Pan. 1. 4. 85-87. 90. 91.
§ 805-806 ] SYNTAX. 479
of thee ia after niine; 3^3 fq^ *Tx^f?r 5cf: the son imitates
his father; * vig^ ajg wi ^ if you are not inferior to Rama;
9-o 3T3 5R STT:, *TT£T sf? 3TT*f the devotee is close to Hari; ZV^R
«T ^ frf your act is not like that of a hero ( lit. is inferor to
his af j: &c.
(£) The prepositions 3TPT, 3T$, *rf* and srf?r are used with the
Accusative when they refer to particular things; frrf^ — ^rpr—
3T3 — <Tfc— srfff— f^fmff t%5(r the lightning flashes towards the
mountain; also whea they mean 'to every one,' &c. f^- ^ajjry^-
waters each and every tree; so 3)ft—
r: \
also govern tl^e Accusative when they
imply 'one's own share-/ «H?*ft: 5 fnT3-*lft-S?eT Lakshmi ia the
proper share ( property ) of Hari.
§ 800. The roots given in the following Karika govern a
double Accusative —
i. 9. the roots ^ to milk, <ra^to cook, ^ir^to punish,
obstruct, ST^SJ^ to ask, f% to collect, sr to speak, ^TTf^ to instruct,
f^T to win ( as a wager ), uro to churn, and j^ to steal-, as
also ^r, f > and ^^ and ^ ; and the synonyms of these; qf ^if^T
qq1: he milks ( draws milk from ) the cow; ^fS iTFaftt ^gvjt he
begs the earth of Bali; cTOgn^r^r ^rfff be cooks rice (into food);
similarly
So
; Vide Bhatti. VI. 8-10.
480 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 807-808
§ 807. * When these verbs are used in the passive, the
secondary object in the case of the first twelve roots and the
principal one in that of the last fonr is put in the Nominative
case, the other Accusative remaining as before; qtj*. *pff
•» <**
§ 808. f In the case of the causals of roots implying 'mo-
tion,' 'knowledge,' 'eating/ roots having come literary work for
their object, intransitive roots and the roots g^ and sit?. «rrc[
with arj; V* with ft, trg-and sj, their subject in the primitive
sense is put in the Accusative case.
: n Sid.
That venerable Harl is my refuge who despatched the enemies
( of gods ) to the next world, explained the meaning of the
Vedas to his ( followers ), made the gods drink nectar, taught
Veda to the Creator ano^ seated the earth ( made it rest )
on valors.
3RT*HT ?nf *t|jR[ iie makes- the devotees see Hari; ^c^TTir
cf. Knm. i. 52).
- But when the double causal is used the
subject ceases to be the subject of the root in the primitive
sense and therefore takes the Instrumental;
O3«: — 35^18 sometimes found used with the Dative;
Rag. XII. 54.
( a ) The causals of ;fr, «nd ^ when it has for its subject a
* * vvtf* H«T: Sid.
on Pan. VII. 1. 69.
fi^i*<^»i«Ri»<ifli ^m ^ w
52. ^^ftMfff^Ty^f^n I *$V Vartikis.
§808-809] SYNTAX. 481
noun othar than one denoting a driver, govern the Instrumental
of the primitive subject ;* 5TT*HTfS *r$ <TT?f *T *TR f^?r he makea
hid servant carry a load ; but ^Tifqiff ^ <41SK ^T- the charioteer
makea the horses draw the chariot.
( 1 ) t Th« same holds good in the case of the causal of 3^ and
WTT ; auqm'ff mqqft *T 3F3* Wgtt he makes the boy eat his food.
( 2 ) J *ra^ when it has not the sense of f^rr ' pain or injury
to a sentient thing' does the same; *K«TqKJ j STjpTT; but H$Rf?t
( when the loss of corn causes pain to the mind).
( £ ) ^T and srr which denote a kind of knowledge are construed
with the Instrumental, though the former when meaning
'to remember with pain' is sometimes found used with the
Accusative also ; tHit^ici siismift IT ^r^%»T; 3rf5"
Vide also Sis. VI. 66.
( 0 ) § The causal of the denominative ^1«^|^| also is construed
with the Instrumental; gis^i^qi^ ^4ri|ff he causes Devadatta
to make a sound.
Note: — ^ By intransitive roots are, meant such roots as are
not capable of governing an object other than one denoting
.space, time, &o. and not such as, though transitive, may be
used without their object being actually expressed ; JT
but ^*3%^ qrorft and not *%&&[ though the object of
is not actually expressed.
§ 809. $ The primitive subject of the verbs g and 3?, of
* sffctft* I M^Vl^j^^ q%Tl^n I Vartikas.
t ST^WT^ I Vartlka. ; Kr|rrf^T^ ^ I Vart §
Vart.
: i
Sid. Kan.
I. 4. 43.
H. 8. G. 31
482 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB [ § 809-812
37HTC^, and £$[ when used in the Aim. is either pnt in the
Accusative or the Instrumental; giT^m cfcR^ft 3T
causes the servant to take or weave a mat ;
rfc *1%«T 3T be makes the devotee bow down to,
or see, God.
§ 810. *When the causal forms are used in the passive, the
principal object ( *'. e. the primitive subject ) is put in the
Nominative case ; but in the case of roots implying 'knowledge
or eating' and roots having a literary work for their object
the principal object is pnt in the Nominative case and the
secondary object in the Accusative or vice versa-
Devadatta prepares a mat— ^^t
he makes Devadatta prepare a mat,
. goes to a village; ^r^f 3Tm *UWm causes Dev..to
go to a village ; g^rT* TTH ^l^Ud; Devadatta is made to go,
he makes Minavaka know his duty ;
$ %fo *l- M&navaka is made to
know, &c.j sr^RtT ^t^r^nfr te makes the child eat food; 9^-
or 414^ ^Hm the boy is made, &c.
§ 811. As regards the causal of roots governing two Accusa-
tives the general rules given at § 808 hold good ;
THE INSTRUMENTAL CASE.
§ 812. f The Instrumental case primarily expresses either the
agent ( when the construction is passive ) or the instrument or
means by which an action is done . (mqftnTH 3MMHT*nTT 3TCT^-
thou wast disrespected by me, not knowing thy greatness •
ll Sid. Kau. on Pin. VII. 1. 69.
I Pan. II. 3. 18.
812-814 ] SYNTAX. 483
H waa killed b7 R»ma witn an arrow
( here TltTO i8 fc^e aSent; «TT^R the instrument ).
fl ) * The Instrumental is also used in the following senses.
RTT. lovely by nature-, srrqrtir. *TT%^: he is almost a
ritualist; Tfr^ror irm? : Gargya byjamily name-,
with ease- so ^riffilcf , nPTHtJTTkj &c. f&sT)ui«4 ^(1*3 ^RTTinT he buys
two dronas of corn at a time; ^TT^&ur T2^»3[ sfelUHIrt be buys one
thousand beasts at a time, &c.
( 1 ) In the case of numerals and words expressive of
sure the Ace. may also be used*
( J ) 05s: — f The root f^ < to play/ however, governs the
Accusative or the Instrumental of the instrument used*
9T frarfiT he plays at dice.
( c ) f The root 37 with ^ also governs the Accusative or
the Instrumental; (qr^j Reft ^T ^^Hl U^T be recognises or lives in
peace with his father, but fS^ij ^sr |rfig^' remember Vishnu.
§ 813 | When the accomplishment of an object is to be
expressed, the Instrumental of words expressing the length of
time or space is used; g^r cFT^T mgtripfcr. the section ( of
the Veda ) was studied by him in a day, or a Kosa ( t. *. by
going over it >, but RTSWtftar JTPIT^ as the accomplishment
does not take place.
§ 814. § Words expressing some defect in a limb of the
body govern the Instrumental of the defective limb* 3r$orf
blind of one eye; so
Vart.
f f&: w ^r | ^^tr^TcTT^Jt CTICT I Pan. I. 4. 43, II. 3.
I Pan. II. 3. 6. 3f<r**f:
3. 20.
484 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 815-817
§ 815. * A characteristic attribute indicative of the existence
of $ particular state or condition is put in the Instrumental;
3T?TTm- rTTTO: he is an ascetic ( whic* ia apparent ) from his
matted hair ( sHdMimdim^qftf^re f?*nS: Sid. Kau. ).
§ 816. f The Instrumental is also used to express the cause
or motive or the object of purpose of an action as distinguished
from the mere instrument of it- ijuqTT £HT ?7T' Hari was seen
by ( virtue of ) merit; Ifarrnfo 5*i35fif% thou art to be
punished for that fault; aronr^r srcrfrt dwells for the purpose of
studying; aleo when the object to be accomplished is simply
implied; && mflm away with your efforts t. e. the; will not
succeed- swar ^TW ^Trficf f^T^J: ( Sid. Kau. )
§ 817 The Instrumental is used with words expressing the
idea of—
( a ) excelling; ^pfa H^nTHF <nTTTrTO% Oh fortunate one, you
excel your ancestors in that ( devotion );
: ( Mu. 3. 17. ) he surpasses, by his lustre, the lustre
of the suDj f ff^PTT ^T^ !jft^^T5T^rTT «H<rf<iTT%: I S'ak. I.
( b ) reaemblance, likeness, equality; ^ffQT f^fl-^ftfrT resembles
his father in voice; %5^^-R ^OT ^T Tm^sT^fTlW ( Utta. 4. );
his face resembles that of his mother;.
equal to Vishnu in valour.
( c ) swearing; Hid«Hc*HI ^tt ^ I swear by Bharata and
myself, ^nf^f% TO sfWSfR I conjure thee by my life.
( d ) rejoicing, being pleased; Yr^Rrf S^
I am pleased with thee by thy devotion to Your preceptor and
compassion upon me; ^(^M: ^yHJ>Hift g^^Tfef » low person IB
satisfied with little.
. 3.21.
II-
J^
Sid Kau.
§ 817-819 ] SYNTAX. 485
(0) motion ( the conveyance or the part of the body on which
a thing is carried being put in the Instrumental case ): ^ifr
^TRft ' he moves about in a chariot.'
(/) price ( real or metaphorical ) at which a thing is
bought; 3i%»r 5^: bought for a hundred ( rupees, etc. );
*$ruftirr: Uf^W: 'the life of a friend ought
to be saved even at the cost of one's life/ •
§ 818. The following words also govern tha Instrumental
case: —
( a ) Words expressing the idea of use or need,, such as f$r,
3PRT, 3T3T, qqfcM and the like, and the root ^ with j% used in
the same sense; ^H«T f% <n &c. what is the use of his wealth who
&c-; ^t«T SEW ^WU'WOTra; — ' oven the rich sometimes stand in
need of grass,' similarly
( b ) The particles 3^ and &$ meaning ' enough-/ 3^
^enough of your weeping ( do not weep ):' 5^ afHrr^oT ' away
with overpressing'; && is also used with a gerund
^roH" 'away with misunderstanding/
( c ) Particles expressing ' accompaniment ' such as
*T§, ?nt, ^, &c.. SIR* ^ETT^ -R^T ^ ( Bh. VIII. 70. );
mi FnfrrRr snr?r: Rag. XIV. 63; 3^^ firsrr-^rrR ?rif
Sak I. 27. &c.
( d ) Words meaning " having or destitute of;'
) ' though possessed of wealth/ &c.;
: Destitute of wealth/
N. B. For the optional use of the Instrumental see the Abl.,
the Gen. and the Loc. cases.
THE DATIVE CASK.
§819. * The primary sense of the Dativ« easels Sainpra-
* «?T5^ W5& Pto- II- 3. 13.
Pan. I. 4. 32. T%^r TOf*r^r% ^ftfr ^sr^nr VArt
486 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 819-822
dina ( ^nr^TH ). The indirect object of the root arj is called
SampradAna; also the person or thing with reference to whom
or which an action is done- f^Miq nt $$l\!\ * he gives a cow to
a BrahmaDa-/ 5^rq- ^TfrW 'prepares for battle-/ ;r ^j^rir
'The Sndra should not be instructed in the Veda, &c.'
*Bnt in the ease of the root q-^ the proper object is pnt in
the Instrumental case and the indirect object in the Accusa-
tive, qgFTT T* TH?t 'be sacrifices a bnll to Rudra/
Note: — Though the root 57 ought to govern the Dat. of the
indirect object, it is sometimes found used with the Gen. or the
Loc. *T3* TOrifrf 5* % ^Tftr <f* ^T Oh sky-wanderer, I
will give you the prosperous kingdom of the Sibifl; ' i&3 *T«T
^n% 'thou who art thinking of bestowing the earth
upon Rama/ &c,
§ 820. f The roots 5^ and others having the same sense
govern the Dative of the person or thing pleased or satisfied;
*rfrF: 'Hari likes devotion;' g^t ft 5*1* * 3lfl*IKI
a stream of sweet water, cool and per-
fumed, is not liked by one who has already drunk enough of water/
§ 821. JThe roots sgr^ 'to praise/ ^ 'to hide,' ^n *: ^ *tand/
and ^rqr * to swear/ govern the Dative of tho person to whom
some object or feeling is to be conveyed. *n<fr TOTT3. f»«mT^T
— %3m[-5ni% ^T ' a cowherdess being incited by love
flatters Krshna or apparently conceals her feeling from him
or waits for him or swears before him-/ ( Vide Bhatti. VII. 73.
74. ); but <l^M sgisiW 5r?Cr '» minister praises his king/
§ 822. § The creditor ( or the parson to whom something is
t ^n*RT sfNWT-' Pan. I. 4. 83.
% ^mgg^Wi #T<*mR: I Pan. I. 4. 34.
§ qftHHOi: I fStftfcfrcr I Pan. I. 4. 35, 36.
I Vait.
§ 822-824 ] SYNTAX. 487
due ) in the case of the root <j ' to owe; ' and the person or the
thing desired in the case of ^g^, are put in the Datfve case; f $r-
* you owe me two sprinklings of trees * ( Sa'k. ).;
wrsf sfc ; ( Sid . Kaa. ) ^ qjsMHTqfreft * he
longing for her ( Bhatti VIII . 15. ) ; ' jtsqrvqr: gr^fff < he longs
for flowers ;' but tronfor tg53f% where no longing is implied.
§ 823. * The roots !R\T, ?f , fs^, and sj^, and others hav-
ing the same sense govern the Dative of the person against whom
the feeling of anger, hatred, &c. is directed; 5^ ^*rfa fSTW-
$ «JffT-3T*jqrr?r ^r (Sid. Kau. ) < he is angry with Hari, or^ears
hatred towards him, or is jealous of him or finds fault with
him; ' tfrafr ^rire^Rrrcii^jr ( Bhatt. VIII. 75. ) • he did
neither get angry with Sit& nor find fault with her; ' but *rnrf-
' he keeps a jealous watch over his wife ' ( that others
y not see her ^RrsNY^STr^rlf^fff Sid. Kau. )
( a ) f But ^3; and ^ preceded oy H preposition govern tho
Accusative case; f% fl-f ^ffreqr% ' why do you get an^ry with
me ? ' f^qTOH^ffrjrpTOnr^ na^ ( Mud. I. ) ' he always endea-
vours to do harm to my body. '
Obi; — gg with 3THT is also found used with the Bat.;
Utta. VII. ).
§ 824. J The roots ^r^C. an^ i*% ^ot^ mewrin8 * to detemine
the good or bad fortune of govern the Dative of the person
with reference to whom the inquiry is made; $MJU<T
I 1 »nf: *rtf ^TRSHra^wnfs I Sid. Kau.
Pan. I. 4. 37.
«
i Bid
- l 4- 88-
I. 4. 39.
488 SANSKRIT GBAHMAB. [ § 825-827
§ 825. * |j with qfft and srr meaning ' to promise, ' gov-
erns the Dative of the person to whom a promise is made after
solicitation fisrnr ui sfifsnjftfir STT^fRT *TT I ROT IT^T
§826. f The root a?r with <rft Ho hire, as a servent,' &c.,
optionally governs the Dative ( and optionally the Inst. )
of the price at which he is hired ^Kfr 31cTTO *T <rRa?fa: I
Sid. Kau.
§827. J ( « ) A noun expressive of the purpose for which
anything is done, or the result to which anything leads or the
effect for which anything exists, is put in the Dative case;
' worships Hari for final beatitude; '
5Tr*t?T SI ' devotion leads to knowledge-, '
( Mb. ) 'water gtuel tends to
( produce ) urine, ' $ugdiq" fjr^nr ( Mah. Bhfts. ) ' gold for
£un da la ( a kind of ornament ) ; ' ^mu ^i^ ' wood for a
sacrificial post, ' &c.
N. B. The roots ^ or g^ are often omitted after a .Dative
used in this sense qErstf TT5T% ( WTO )» poetry is for fame. *
. (d) § An evil foreboded by a poiteotcus phenomenon is
also put in the Dative case; ^TcTf7 %>ft&\ Rgd[ l the tawny
lightning forebodes a storm. '
(c) $ The word f|ft is used with the Dative;
' good for a Brahmans. 7
Pan. 4. 40.
I Pan. 4. 44.
I Sid. Kau.
rgtfr srixm i ^csft ^nr^mR ^r i Vfirtika.
§ ^?Tr?r5T ^rwit ^ i Vart.
§ 828-829 ] SYNTAX. 489
§ 828. * The object governed by an infinitive mood not
actually need but implied, is put in the Dative;
in or^er to brin8 )
( •. *. 3T%*W33F3ffi6 ) ' We bow down to Nrisimha
( to propitiate him ).'
( a ) The Dative of an abstract noun formed from a root may
be usd to express tho sense of the infinitive of the same root;
* goes to perform a sacrifice; » HJIHN
( Bag. 1. 7. ) < who had amassed wealth in order to give it
away,' &c.
§ 829. f The particles w.t **ffcr, ^rr?T and *^r ( exclama-
tions used in offering oblations to gods and manes respectively),
S|<$ meaning < equal to, a match for ' and *^r ( an exclamation
accompanying an oblation to a deity ) govern the Dative case-
rns' 5m: 5i*fr ' bow to that Sambhu; ' snrnRT: f*i% ' may it be
well with the subjects; ' ^^^3 ff ( Rag. V. 17. ) ' Farewell to
thee; ' 3^ ^r^T ' this offering to Agni; ' similarly f^ppq-: f^iT;
$FTt¥7t ?R- 3^y ' Hari is a match for the demons; ' so 375 trgt
HftHj ( Mab. Bhas. ) ' one wrestler is a match for another; ( see
Rag. II. 39. Bhatti. VIII. 98.); |OT TO 'thii oblation
tolndra.'
( a ) But when 5 is used with qriP, it becomes the principal
verb J and therefore goveros the Accusative case; '
l bows down to gods' ( when the souse of an infinitive is
suppressed, of course the Dative will be used, see $ 828 ).
( b ) Words having the sense of 379, such as sr*j: *TfTO:, 5H&:>
&c. and also the verb 719;, are used with the Dative ( Sid. Kan. )
ar. II. 94.); JT3
the other words may also be used with the Genitive ( Bid. Kau. )
II. 3. 14, 15.
t Sfl.*
490 SANSKRIT GBAHMAB. [ § 829-831
: ( Mai. Mad. IV. ) the great
king has power over his daughter.
( c ) Verbs meaning ' to salute ' such as srorac , STOPF^, &c.
may govern the Dative or the Accusative,
( Kad.) they do not bow down to deities; ffT H
saluted her with a mind bowed down with devotion;
srafo% Sffiptf ( Bag. X. 15. ) the gods bowed
respectfully to him, the annihilate r of the enemies of the
immortals: «rrifi$f ( ^rfnrmffo: ) xrftniar ( Kum. II. 3. ) having
bowed to the lord of speech &c.
§ 830. "With verbs of telling such as qs^, ^err, ^ ,
ftft^ can. &c. and of sendirg such as f| with sr, ^ with
&c. the Dative of the indirect object is used;
: I ( Bag. XI. 37. ); He told the king
of Mithila that Rama was eager to see the bow;
: ( Bhag. XI. 31. ) Tell me, who thou art in
this fierce form, &c., ^f^rat ffrrW 5^% fif^^nft ( S'ak. IV. )
I will tell my preceptor that it is time to offer the morning
oblations; fr%*& tKl'Hl syRimg ( Bag. VHI. 79. ) Indra sent a
heavenly damsel against him ( i. 0. to disturb his contempla-
tions ); ?^rw^ Hjtq^ MM^N ( Bag. XV. 21. ).
§ 83?. *The indirect object of the root m cl. 4. ' to think '
if not an animal, may be put in the Accusative or the Dative
base when contempt is to be shown; tf RTT ^ur TT?% 3<mtf *T I do
not consider thee a straw; but ^ r^t ^OT H?lr ( «R[ cl.; 8 ) when
mere comparison is meant, the Accusative is used; ?qf ^n*
Pa?. II. 3. 17.
Katyayana remarks '
' ». 0. " Instead of 'If not »n animal' it should be said,
If Tiot one of a ship, or foo9 or a crow or a parrot or a jackal/'
5T?5rf R^STHf 3T5I5rT,5r^tS%'^R^r^; «> the former c«se
though neither ?{f nor ^^c is an animal, the Accusative ought
to be used, in the latter though ^ is an animal the Dative
may be optionally used.
§ 832-834 ] SYNTAX. 491
§ 832. * The object of roots imply log motion ( i. e. the
place to which the motion is directed ), if it be not a road, is
put in the Accusative or the Dative, when actnal motion is
meant j jrrtf «U«I«I *T *T^fa ' goes to a village } ' but H5RTT tf$
THE ABLATIVE CASE.
§ 833. The principal sense of the Ablative case is mm$H or
'motion away from •)•;' hence the noun from which the motion,
real or conceived, takes place ia put in the Ablative case ;
' comes from a village-,' ^R^TPTm^ 'falls down
from a running horse';
(a) I Words having the sense of ^j*jcgr, Q<IH or 'cessation/
'pause,' and JTRTT^ ' swerving from/ also govern the Ablative
case ; qrnrr *S«a?* ' he hates sin •
. ( Rag. VIII. 22. ) the new monarch, steady in
action, did not desist from efforts until they bore their fruit ';
'swerves from duty '. OTTWSffmam^ ( Meg. I. )
4 careless, failing in the discharge of the duties ( of his office )'•
so ^un^Sinff ; SRTWT^T f^efo ^Kt^^T *T$nnT<I ( Manu Smr,
V. 49.), &c.
with sr in the flense of 'to be careless about' is used with
the Loc. also; gfiftaFir smrcfcr M^^l^ Rqfeld: I ( Manu Smr.
II. 213) on this account wise men are not careless about
their wives.
§ 834. § In the case of words expressing fear or protection
from fear, that from which or whom the fear proceeds is put
in the Ablative case-, ^fTTil^fft i* afraid of a thief ; *fmt **t
was afraid of the white-horsed one t. 0. Arjuna ;
( Bhag. II. 40 ) even a little
. II. 3. 12.
TSI^ <r23Hf I Pan II. 3. 28 ^UMiq 3iqnfR^ Pan. 1. 4. 24.
I V&rt.
1.4.25.
492 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 834-837
of this ( kind of ) pi^ty saves one from great fear ; $JqT^lf%^«IT-
373. ( Bhatt IX. 11. ) were afraid of the roar of the monkey.
(a) * That from which one is kept off is also put in the
Ablative ; Wttfinmvm wards off from sin; q&ft irf gWlfd
keeps off the cow f rbm barley.
§ 835. f In toe case of fir with <rn the thing unbearable is
put in the Ablative case ; 3renRTcTO*T*KT finds study unbearable
or difficult ; at mimmiHt « jftfr ( Bhatti. VIII. 71. ) who got
disgusted with the love ( of Havana ); but
§ 836. \ When concealment is to be had recourse to, that
whose sight one desires to avoid is put in the Ablative case ;
* Krishna conceals himself from his mother;
but
§ 837. (a) § The teacher from whom something is learnt
regularly is put in the Ablative case ; ;?qTUINI<^M learns from
fche preceptor ; but s^pr «mit
(b) Similarly the prime or original cause in the case of 573
to be born, and the source in the case of i£ are put in the Abla-
sr*TT: ST5fm% the creation proceeds from Brahinau ;
^HlW the scorpion is born from cowdung;
The Ganges riles from the Himalayas .
from desire anger is produced.
: — Verbs meaning 'to bo born' or 'to be begotten upon'
are often used with the Lpc.; «rerf 31dl«M afaf^lt^^TPTcf from
her was born Satananda Angirasa ; »»H<fet<llii^yt begotten upon
Henaka. See Manu Smr. 154. I. 9.
: I Pan. I. 4. 27.
I Pan. I. 4. 26.
I Pan. I. 4. 28.
Pan. 1. 4. 29
Pan. I. 4. 30. 31.
§ 838-840 ] SYNTAX. 49*
§ 838. *When the sense of an indeclinable participle is sap-
pressed in a sentence the object governed by that ptc. or the
placo at or on which the action takes place is pnt in the
Ablative case; qwT^T^ 3T$m sees from a palace (
Sid. Kan. ); similarly
Sid. Kan.
§ 839. ( a ) f The place or time from which the distance of
another place or point of time is to be expressed is pnt in the
Ablative case; the distance in space being pnt in the Nomina-
tive or the Locative and that in time in the Locative; 3*71^
*T ( Sid. Kan. ) the village is a yojana from
the forest; irfnjjra: ^rfor^T ^?*Tft *ff3TRTR **%$ Tftftg *T (Mb.) ;
( Sid. Kau. ) the fnll moonday of
Hlrgasirsha is a month ( at the interval of a month ) from thao
of Kaitika
( b ) The Ablative is also used in questions and answers
^m whence art thon ? from the river;
where do you come from ? Pataliputra.
§ 840. JThe words 3T?<T, ?«!T »ud others having a similar
sense, the particles a^TT^ ' near or distant, ' 5}^ * without, T
words expressive of direction used with reference to time or
space ( except when they refer to the limos of the boby ) and
those derived from the root 3^ at the end of componnds, and
in declinables ending in aft and srift are constructed with the
Ablative; 3^ f*F5T fcTH ^T frrorr^ different from Krishna; f?fft
if? Bh|ti. VII. 106. If he be one other
than Havana and a follower of Rama; awni'^T^. near or
from the forest- ^T cFPT^HNId: ( Bhatti. VII. 105 ) come
without ( setting aside ) his cruelty; JimTrS?? 3tTfr *T *o the
Vart.
HST
Jran. II. o. 29.
494 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 840-841
east or the north of the village; 4hnqL§: TO?3PP the month of
Falguna is prior to that of Chaitra; bat trjj <fcr^HT the (forepart)
of the body; sm> STrq^qr *4midl to *te east or to the west of the
village-, sn^sreraT^ ( Bhatti. VII. 106 ) before the day dawned;
the south or in the southern direction
of the village; SrTTT ^&*K( Bhatti.) in the north of the sea.
Obs: — =5ft is sometimes used with the Accusative; ^PT r^t
!T *rfqmPcr *r5 ( Bhag. XI. 32 ) even without thee all will die.
( a ) Words like snjUT, am^T, srff.', 3TTOTC, 3TtS, & &c. are
used with the Ablative; the first word may also be used with
adverbs of time; ctWrf^TTSnifSr from that day;
since then; 3*^*3^5^% ^rf^T ^W: (Kum. V. 86);
outside the
village; 5**n*tHrWtW%Q: ( 1%T^T^ ) wenfc out of the emerald
gate of the town; gj^J ^^r^<T3: ( M- S- IX. 77 ) after a year-
hence forward; 3r*fr: Vf ( Hag. I. 17 ) beyond the path;
: if; S^luN^lM«lWI4''*'?«Tf ( Rag. III. 70. ) after the
dropping of old leaves; see Bhag. XII. 12.
§ 841. * The ablative is used with—
( a ) The prepositions 5W and <rf? meaning * away from,
without ' and 3H meaning 'as far as7 or 'including, comprehend-
ing ' 5 *?OT*r<T ^ifoiRft ZRWri **i«Arra( ( B&m. > now that he
dwelt in Lanka, in terror, away from the worlds; 3TO f^:
^•HU: Samsara exists outside Hari; ZR f%n««f^ ^Jf ^: it
rained everywhere, except in the country of Trigarta. Similarly
^f^rSvift^r^: ( Vop. )
Brahman pervades every thingj
until the learned are satisfied.
* 3TWT TO-flT I 31T^rarfal*pgfr I Pan. I. 4, 88-89.
: Pan. II. 3. 10 srfo: sri?f^ftl|f?^R^ I Pan I. 4. 92.
Pin. II. 3. 11.
§ 841-844 1 SYNTAX. 495
( & ) SfffT meaning 'the representative of, in exchange for or
giving in return for;' sr-gg: &m|fijfff ( Sid. Kan. ) Pradyurana
is the representative of Krishna-, fft§¥tr: srfitan^rfer HHi< gives
mashas in return for aesamum.
§ 842. * When a word expressive of 'a debt,' is merely
intended to be stated as a cause, it is put in the Ablative case;
«<? a thing mortgaged for a hundred rupees;
tied down as it were by the debt he owes.
§ 843. ( a ) The Ablative often denotes the cause of an action
or condition and may be translated by ' on account of, by reasou
of/ &c.« ti\H|r^j: irtHftt one is considered a fool by reason of
his silence ( if he keeps silence); «ftma*nmt *qrgt ( H. ) on
account of my killing cows and men.
( b ) The Ablative is used to make a causative assertion or to
advance an argument. q$ft 3%m^ ^m^l The mountain is
fiery ( has fire on it ), because there is smoke; *
( Ved. Su. II. 1. 1 ) A
disputant says—- if you say that our argument is liable to the
fault of giving no scope to your smritis then we reply: this your
argument will not hold; for in that case other smritis will
have no scope given to them.
( c ) The Ablative is used with comparatives or words having
a comparative sense; ^rnuwrfgt STRmn: ^rrq the way of
knowledge is more efficient than that of dsvotion. aT(rfFU|un<U«l
smaller than an atom; ap^TOphar: *TfUiNirafl^nr truth
alone is superior to a thousand horse-sacrifices, ^a^vri^^ft not
inferior to Chaitraratha.
§ 844. f The indeclinables trzr^r, f*RT &&d ^rqr govern the
Ablative, the Accusative and the Instrumental cases; ^^
from or without Rama; so 5fT*T TTR,
n
* 3^£ot rajft I Pan. n. 4. 25.
t ^Tl ^RT»TT*TriVR^[rfl M i *<4 n T V4 \ «^ I Pan. II. 3.
496 OANSKBIT GRAMMAR. f § 844-847
&c. jfRT HTflf ftwffOT ateMHI ( Vop. ) worldly life is vain
•without a woman ( wife )
§ 845. * The words ^fa? ' a little.' g^ « a little, ' %&% 'diffU
culty, ' and jgftqq" 'some 9 when used in an adverbial sense with
verbs, are used in the Ablative or the Instrumental;
' let off with little; similarly 3T5^T a^TRSrU:,
: clone with difficulty; ^fffaifa ^ffTWTfT STO', but
killed with a little poison; when used adver-
bially they take the Accusative also; ^ftt& T^rrff goes a little.
( « ) <pf and ^TrfT^ and others having the same sense, are
used in the Ablative, the Accusative and the Instrumental cases;
3TriOTOTT3.it ^or^TT away from the- village; so ajfcd«fel^3n^fr
3TT%%3; 31 near the village.
THE GENITIVE CASE.
§ 846. f The Genitive, as already remarked, is not a Karaka
case. It, therefore, expresses simply the relation of one noun
to anothar in a sentence, such as that of a servant and hi»
master ( a relation which is other than that expressed by a
Karaka case ) - iffi: 55% 53TW mcTT> 5«*rW 3*T: &c. j and evert
in those cases where the genitive is used in the eeuse of
other cases it expresses simple relation or JH^VT only, as in
§847. J When the word 55 ( cause, object ) is used in a
s en ten e, that which is the object and the word %g are put in the
I Pan. II. 3. 33. 35.
t TOT ^% Pan. II. 3. 50. ST^Jrrffof^rtf ( the sense of the
Sid. Kan.
twVfcaspflVlP4n.IL3.27.
§ 847-849 ] SYNTAX. 497
Genitive case; sngRV WtTOlft dwells for the sake of ( with the
object cf getting ) food; ftl^ft **T fc?fr: Mark P. 23. 12.
( Bhatti. VIII. 103. ) he
b0gau to £;-• j her *n account of Rama in order to show her
that Ue ( Lr<v/.inTOat ) was Rama's messenger.
( a ) * When & pronoun is used with the word ^j, the Instru-
mental and the Genitive may both be used; g^q %?fr, %* ts^r,
with what object? Why? The Ablative may also be used;
ifcT %S*T, <WTT%?l1v ?W Sift:} when a word having the same sense
as Jg, such as ftftrw* <hKm, &c., is used with a pronoun it may
be used in any case in agreement with the pronoun; ^q* RffTrlftr,
&c.; but they are
generally used in the Accusative used like an adverb;
38KU|-M*njff«i-3**T, &c- when a pronoun is not used, any case
except the Nominative and the Accusative may be used; ^|^H
QJH^H ( fR: %o«T: ), ^MIU ftftnTRT with the object of acquir-
ing knowledge.
§ 848. f Words ending in the termination ^ and showing
direction and others having the same sense, such as
with the Genitive; mHHI 3fT%Wf: 31TT<T: &c. to the south or te
the north of the village, &c.; ^4^qR ( 8'ak. II. 8. ) on the
Arka plant. <r^nm^: ( S'ak. I. ) under the trees-
: (Meg.) standing before him with great difficulty, &o.
( a ) I Words ending in ^ such as ^T$rT, gsftor, &c. are
used with the Genitive or the Accusative;
to the south of the village; avHm ^r^i ( Mai. Mad. IX. 24. )
to the north of the river; ^o^?T5^%ui^ ( Bhatti. VIII.108. ^
( Meg. 80 ) to the north of Kubera's palace.
§ 849. + The words ant and sif^re and their synonyms
I fWwj</l<JH<iUt ^nfTt XTR^fT^ I Vlrt
t TOlTTO*rr^^R Pan. H- 3. 30.
t triT^rfitwnn I P&n. II. 3.31.
l3": ^5y«^«<WR I Pan. n« 3. 34.
. 8. G. 32,
498 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 849-851
govern either the Genitive or the Ablative; mm^ jjfmq qr T«f
the forest is distant ftr/n or near the village-,
be who is away from Rama
or Siva is near sin; HHim^fr RTM€iwU4M<W close to the bower
of the Madhavi creeper; «r^qr qehUf» &c.
§ 650. * The root ^rr meaning 'to have an incorrect know-
ledge of ' governs the Genitive; %$ ^affat srnffit supposes oil to
be ghee-, but ^rf
( a ) Verbs implying ' to think of, to remember/ such as ^, %
with srf^, 'to be master of/ such as fsr , ^ with sr, &c. and to have
compassion on such as B^ &c., govern the genitive of their
object, yf^^: ^R^% (Meg. 90) dost thou remember the lord?
Ram. VI. 60. 8
: ( Bhatti VIII. 119. ) Lakshmaaa remembers thecj
: ( Mai. Mad. 4. ) the great king has
mastery over his daughter; ^ <t
( Uttar. ) if after I see him I shall have control overmyself;
?rnfmt 9*5fh$ft4f$ff ^rr? ( S'ak. II. ) I have lost all power over
my limbs; ^Bftftor Wf^t ^5S*- ( Kum. III. 34. ) with great
difficulty they could control their minds- qriqRtMSHf TOOT ^
5T ?FWT^( Bhatt. II. 33. ) why dost thou
feel no compassion for those whose wealth does not see
the morrow ? *TKCT 3TOR: ( Ibid. VIII 119 ) taking pity
OA Rama.
( £ ) 3£ meaning * to impart additional properties ' governs the
Genitive; <nrfcCTO ^TT^^ ' fuel imparts heat to water, 'm
: Bhalti. VIII. 119.
§ 851. t Verbs meaning <to be afflicted with a disease
* trif%fw sstfr i ^
11.3.51-53,
t 4>^ll4lHf *4IM^^HHIn^: I Pan. II. 3. 54.
§851-855]
SYNTAX.
499
govern the Genitive of their object when used impersonally or
when they have for their subject names of diseases;
the thief is afflicted with the pain of fever;
: dysentery inflicts pain on the man; except when
and *KfTO are used as subjects; ( vide Bhatti. VIII. 120; ) ?f
or ^mi-* fever or affliction pains him.
§ 852. * srr^ meaning 'to wish' governs the Genitive when
the idea of a benediction is implied) Tjfqr STOW wish to have
desires to have wealth. So q
itience;
§ 853. f The roots 5T^, ^ with ft or * or with both, ^,
randf^ govern the Genitive when meaning to injure, to
punish, &c ; *JUHft*dl«qra *HTT a king punishes a thief?
l ( Sis. I. 37. ) to kill the enemies of the world
( the demons ) by his own power; H«fn>aan«qMH; kill (drive
away ) your anger; tigUIMi ftgQt
or n^pimQ *TR: H&ma
°r g
will kill
q or
the R'akahaias.
ra does injury to a Vrishala-
^nr: &c; in other senses they govern the Accusative;
ffaf% ^e grinds fried rice.
§ 854. { The roots STTf ( t. 6. f- with ft and 3T* ), ITT and
when they all mean to transact business, or to stake in
he staked
gambling^ govern the Genitive of their object;
invests a hundred rupees in business; yiuiMiHM
Ms life; 3j%*flfr f^ifrrnrf lost his brothers and pleasures in
gambling, &c.; but when f^ is preceded by a preposition,
the Accusative may also be used; ^nTW ST* *T irfiWsq^
( Sid. Kau. )
§ 855. H Words having the senses of ^^: t. e. denoting fre-
* 3TT%ft Tm: Pan. II. 3. 55.
t 'HlRlfimuiHld*h|VtriW1
t
II. 3. 56.
fer I fw«u^Mti«i I Pan. II.3.57-59.
i Pin. n. 3. 64.
500 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB [ § 855-856
quency of time, such as f$:, r%:, <ne^??P &c. govern the Genitive
of the time in the sense of the Locative; <refec4l&l vfrs&m
taking food five times a day; fgft^f 5^%:, &c.
§ 856. * The Genitive is used subjectively and objectively
with Kridantas or Primary Nominal Bases derived by mean*
of the Krit affixes ( i. e. is used in the sense of the subject or
the object of the action denoted by the Kridantas );
an act of Krishna s. e. of which Krishna is the agent;
the Creator of the world, which is the object of the action
denoted by the noun gs<£; similarly ^r?rf qfgS#: the protector of
the good; qire: trrjj the drinking of milk; flfq- ^ (for a work
of that poet; ^NHufi wftftq- * *TTf : ( JUmacharita XII. 117. ).
This is not a common creation of Brahman.
(a) ] In the case of verbs governing two Accusatives the
secondary object of the K rid ant a may be put in the Genitive 01
in the Accusative; Tftrerw ^ l^T ^T ( Sid. Kau. ) the taker
of the hone to Srughna.
( b ) J When the agent and the object of the bases derived
by means of Krit affixes are used in a sentence, the object is put
in the Genitive ease and not the agent; snwfr 9T3T ^l^l^li^H
the milking of cows by one who is not a cowherd is a wonder.
Exceptions. — This rule does not apply to Krit nouns ending
in the affixes 3U» and ^ when feminijuty ftflrWT W^T *T W**
gnTcf: ( Sid. Kau. ) the desire of Rudra to split the universe or
the splitting of the universe by Hud ra. According to some when
the Krit affixes are of feminine gender, and according to others
. II. 3. 65.
3TWI&UHI 4>Mfu| I Pan. II. 3. 66.
\
Sid. Kau.
§ 856-858 ] SYNTAX. 501
when they are of any gender, and the agent and the object are
both used, the agent is put in the Instrumental or Genitive case ;
r wonderful is the creation of the
world by Hari ; 3l«4Mmd$ll*MHMl3uiMl4*<l 3T ( Sid. Kan. );
§ 857. * When past passive participles are used in the sense
of the present tense the Genitive is used ? ^njrf JTrff 3^
3T respected, known or honoured by kings • ?ff *nf ' ?J TOft
Bhatti. VIII. 124.
(a) Past participles showing the place of an action, as well
as those used as abstract nouns are used with the Genitive
M
Mb.
See. Bhatt. VIII. 125.
§858. f The Genitive is not used with present participles
except that of f^f, verbal derivatives ending in 7 and 3-3?
except that derived from 3^, verbal indecli cables, past parti-
ciples, passive and active, nouns formed with the affix ^^ ( see
p. 456 ) and with such as mean <in the habit of, or having the
properties of or doing any thing well'; «if $q^ or $qiu|t; but
& ST^T *T ll^ fR: Hari, the enemy of Mura.jrft %g: desir-
ous of seeing Hari; $ft afaff?«uj:, |?qrn; ^3^^: Hari is the
killer of demons . 5j$5?r: cRg^:, onrT, ^ ^S &c-
ftoTT worldly life goes easy
with Hari. 3TTcHTfr Mg»fiMa? in habit of decorating oneself;
: a habitual beggar; ^ *ff? one who prepares a mat;
also in the case of nouns derived by means of the terminations
I Pan. II. 67-68.
t T ^l^ftai^-JflHiq; I Pan. II. 3. 69.
t ^Hl^RMj^NHUq^l: | Pan. II. 3. 70.
502 SANSKBIT GEAHXAB. [ § 858-861
showing futurity and f^ showing necessary payment; fjfc
ri& he goes desiring to see Hari- ^rtf ?fpft one who ha*
to pay a hundred ( rupees. ).
§ 85V. * In the case of Potential passive participles the agent
of the action is put in the Genitive or in the Instrumental case;:
Hari ought to be served by me;
1W& WH nsrfrof ** ( Bhatti. V III. 129. ) this forest which the
lord of the demons ought to preserve must be destroyed by me -
&o. ( Meg. > Thou should go to Alakft
§ 860. f In the case of words denoting equality or likeness,
such as jjpr, fTSST, &c., the person or thing with whom or which*
any object is compared is put in the Genitive case, except in
the case of gstt «""* 3TOT, gpr: ^T^T: *nfr *T ^WTW &*ft* ^T
equal to or like Krishna; SJtwftfw *C5T$ft WT who else is equal
to me ? but ^UIR? g^r ^TRT ^T 5ffR<T ( Sid. Kau. ).
06*.— The words 337 and d<(W, however, are found used by
good anthers with the Insrtumental against PaDini's rule^
( Kum. V. 34. ) which rises to the high
position of being compared with your lip.
3fc£TT ( Sis. 1. 4. ) clearly deserving to be compared with 8'ambhn.
white with ashes; see Bag, VIII. 15.
§ 861. t The words ans**, W*, **, $*#, 5*, 3** «"»d fi?f
and words having the same sense, when used in a sentence con-
taining a benediction, govern the Dative or the Genitive case ;
WT ^TRT (Sid. Kau.); may
Krishna live long., similarly IT?, iRf, $*rtf, M<m4,
, ftli", 1^" IT H5II9. ( Sid. Kau. ).
Pau. II. 3. 72.
§ 862-864 ] SYNTAX. 503
§ 862. The Genitive is used with1 indeclinables like
^ft> 35%, &C. ; JIFHTT *T^ ^ *T in the middle or on the other
side of the Ganges ; 3ufwr muiHT $ft for the sake of this life.
§ 863. With superlative?, and words having the sense of
tht» superlative, the Genitive is used; ^ja
( Hag. V. 4. ) the chief of sages, the authors to the
Mantras.
Note: — Words having the sense of comparatives are used
with the Ablative and sometimes with the Instrumental; spr-
33CT £R: or 3TT*ta»: tnis person is superior or inferior to
him in strength ; similarly ^^fft 73 4*11*5' *j^lf *Tj «lt 5
H7T WA° WH1 nave a happier end than 1 ? The word
is used with the Genitive, the Locative or the Instru-
mental , 5^f| dmmffoPTffr tftsw^ he was more ( i. e. dearer )
to them than their sons ; ^rTRan'^^T ITT^T: T^f ^T $RP$T ^TTP
they passed five months and twelve nights more than ( those
yean )• $g^.s(^nE» ST^cr* -^ Pratt ha is larger than a Kudavb.
THE LOCATIVE OASB.
§ 864. * The place where an action takes place with re-
ference to the subject or object is called Adhikarana ( SfivreTO )
and is put in the Locative case; f ^RfR Aftr*? (Bham. 1. 60);
WTflt sf*5*»Hfr ( H>M 64 ); yqi^qr ^RpT 'nrft **ooks food in a
cooking utensil- e^of 3HraT% tells ( something ; into the ear;
3Trc<T; &c- The Locative also denotes the time when
ua action takes place 5 m?«R[ RggrtT: ^T& (^ft^r: ( Kiim. II.
1. ) the gods being harassed at that time ; f^TR^ ffi^gilT <I^t
( Bag. II. 15. )
( a ) I Verbal derivatives in ?^ and having the sense of the
p. p. participle govern the Locative of their object -, STOTttt
I f 3HmR|*.<ul ^ I Pan. 1. 4. 45, II. 3. 36.
^ I Yaiukas.
504 SANSKBIT GBAHHAB. [ § 864-866
one by whom grammar is studied,
whom the six Anga» were mastered, &c.
The words ^rrg and 3TW$ govern the Locative of that with
reference to which they are used ; *ng: ^07? RTrTft well be-
lieved towards his mother ; ^^iv^m^^ ill-behaved towards his
maternal uncle.
( b ) * The object or purpose for which any thing is done
is put in the Locative case when the thing desired is intima-
tely connected with that on which the action takes place •
<t«tf*H*5I*'fl ^^3?*^ I
( Mb ). ( Man ) kills the tiger for his skin, the elephant for his
tusks, the Chamary deer for her hair and the musk-deer for his
musk. If there is no intimato union the Dative is used.
Obs. — Sometimes the Instrumental is used to denote the
object for which any thing is done; %flifo ( for wages ) ^F^T
^tilfft. Sometimes the Loc. is used to denote the object in
general ; *ran ^tfa ^rrsrT ^£& **W* ftince von are created by
the creator to do duty, fulfil it.
§ 865. f The Locative or the Genitive is used with the
words ^rmt a master, %*&, 3fft<n3 a lord, ^nTT? a heir, grf§F* ,
STO^ a bail, and srOT born for- ir^f iftl *T ^trft the master of
kine • ^i%5qr^ or ^i^rsqT 1PW the lord of the earth; HTHTOlt or
r: toe lord of villages, similarly fofeiw ftsr^t ^T
^Tf ^TT^ftj ^^ 3T^f«Tfr 5T uRl^ ( surety
for appearance in a court ) } ifY^ T9T «Tf 5T^rT: 'TTT* a cowherd
is born for cows.
§ 866. I The words ail^Tfe and ^r^T meaning 'appointed
Vart.
| Sid. Kau. ^rvr^pr: Rr^^^r^: (constant, inseparable
union ). Tark. Kau.
t T^iHi^tijyMin^Niqtift^sriff^M^iSnwi I Pw^. H« 3« 39.
II. 3. 40.
§«66-870] SYNTAX. 505
or devoted to ' are construed with the Locative or the Genitive
4HI&*: $*!<& *F SKfr*ft ffffrmw *T appointed to worship
Hari; OTdl^umiumgtft fcrern'or I ( Bhatti. VIII. 115. ) In
other senses they are construed with the Locative-
5T$%- a bull harnessed to the yoke of a carriage; <£jff6fr
expert in the performance of an act.
§ 867. *When an object or an individual is to be distinguish-
ed from a whole class, the Locative or the Genitive is used;
?n STTgrar: OT: ( see Mann 8. I. 96. ),
( Sid. Kan. )
§ 868. f The words ^n§ and T^gor, not preceded by the pre-
positions 3Tg, qf^ and srnr, are used with the Loc. when the
sense of adoration is to be conveyed; iHftft ^rnjRTJofr 7T reveren-
tially disposed towards his mother; bnt fsnpir: VT$: apq*: a clever
servant of the king. When preceded by the prepositions 313, qft
and srfc these are used with the Accusative;
§ 869. | With the words <rf&cr &nd g<^^, the Locative or
the Instrnmental is used; srftr?T 3<%£\ 31 ?ftarr sft ^ intent
upon Hari; <rc*n qft^^ «Tf§r srf^R ^T fflftfrtt^r, a woman gets
anxious ( or restless ) when her husband goes out;
Kir. XVI. 7
§ 870. § When the names of Naltthatrat are need as showing
particular time the Locative or the Instrumental is used; 339-
t ffir *r i ( Sid. Kau. )
Sid. Kau.
. n. 3. 43.
I Vart.
I Pan. II. 3. 44.
^cft^TT I Bharata on Bhatti. VIII. 117
506 SANSKRIT GEAMMAB. [ § 871-875
§ 871. * Words expressive of the interval of time or space
are wed with the Ablative or the Locative; a^T gtyquf sf|
^TrFT having dined to-day he will dine again after two
*T W* f%^H standing here he will hit
a mark two miles distant.
§ 872. f The prepositions 37 in the sense of ' exceeding '
and arftf in that of ' the master of ' govern the Locative; stpRpJ
: the merits of Hari exceed a par&rdha; srnj >f 1% TFR: or sjftr
ij: Kama is the lord of the earth; in other senses these
prepositions ara used with the Accusative, for which see § 805»
§ 873. The words 57 and 3ff£ere »ad others having the same
aid used in the Locative also;
§ 874. Verbs having the sense of ' love, regard for, attach-
ment to ' such as T%{[, m&*^, 21TH^, T^, &o. and their deriva-
tives generally govern the Locative- fq^T ^ f%fm * father
loves his son; aim $T ift^Qsiri q:«^ ( S'ak. 1)1 have a^
sisterly affection for them also; ;f
I do not, indeed, love the ascetic's daughter,
people do not love a king whose ministers are
corrupt; nrfl4flW TOfaf $ia<*3fl ^m?f: ( Manu. S. HI. 179 ).
TO% TH?T ( Mai. Mad. III. 2. ) takes pleasure in solitude; *ff»
Bhatt. I. ) devoted to his welfare.
Note: — ^§|6^ an(i *?TH^^[ are sometimes used with the
Accusative also; ^H^H^^I^d (Bama.); ^I^MMdNnO
(Bhatt. IV. 22.)
§875. Verbs of acting, behaving towards,&c. such as 373 r
STOg, &c. and of throwing, such as 3!^, 5^, %?, &c. govern
the Locative; aj^ RH^H ^T^: ^^F one shoald act modestly
towards respectable persons; ^ fHq^^ffi ^Mc^MH (
Pan. II. 3. 5.
I Pan. II 3. 9.
§ 75-878] SYNTAX. 507
I ( S'ak. I. ); fff*U4ll
( Rag. VII. 23- ).
§ 876. The root n>J with 3fq- ' fc° offend' is generally construed
with the Locative and sometimes with the Genitive; »it)MM(q
S'akuntala has offended some one deserving
respect; ^ 3 ifl^*0q gmiiWI^ 3*185 ( 6'ak. IH. 9. ),
THE GENITIVE AND THE LOCATIVE ABSOLUTES.
§ 877. " When the participle agrees with a subject different
from the subject of the verb, the phrase is said to be in the abso-
lute construction. " Bain.
In English, the Nominative is used as an Absolute case- in
Sanskrit the Genitive and the Locative are so used. The English,
Nominative Absolute ought, therefore, to be translated by the
Sanskrit Locative Absolute. When the Absolute Construction
is to be used, the subject of the participle must be put in the
Genitive or the Locative case and the participle made to agree
with it in gender, number and case.
N. B. When the subject or object of the principal sentence is
the same as that of the participal phrase, the absolute contrac-
tion should not be used-, as arqtvqi Mi^Hl *mt TT^W$(H and
not 3T3t£*f M^% THT *T &c. ;
and not arjira ft>i ^vq-: &o.
§ 878. * When the action done or suffered by a person or
thing indicates another action i. 0. when the time of the happen-
ing of the one action which is known indicates that of the second
action, the Locative Absolute be used; iff<J $m*JMIfi TOT.*
he went away while the cows were being milked;
Pan. II. 3. 87.
Sid. Kau.
508 SANSKBIT GRAMMAR. [ § 878-882
^nft the night being ended. $at V| fifth m ft g: ?Enrt T%tTft srfir
whence can there be obstacles to our religions rites when thou
art the protector of the good.
879. The locative or Genitive Absolute may be used to
express the sense of the English particles 'when, while, since,
although/' &c. ( and may thus supply the place of a pluperfect
tenso ); q% ?nft: <RW ^^.'; while they two were thus talking ;
5% S^ STfft H«IMIwUt«<ii«m ( Meg. 40 ); Thou wilt accomplish
the rest of thy journey when the son rises again.
§ 880. * When ' contempt or disregard' is to be shown, the
Genitive or the Locative Absolute is used •, ^^fff *>3<ft 3T 5%
STO* ^T STcrraX ne turned out a recluse disregarding his weep-
ing son ». e. in spite of the weeping of his son. In this sense
the Genitive Absolute is used more often. The Locative or the
Genitive absolute may thus have the sense of 'in spite of/
'notwithstanding,' &c. in English.
( a ) The Locative Absolute be made to express the idea of
i as soon as, ' ' no sooner than, ' ' the moment that ' &c. by
compounding it with the word q* or jrr^; dl?m*..-HfiidHM *&
( Rag. XVI. 78. ) no sooner was the arrow fixed, &c.
V trnr scarcely had I finished my speech when.
Section III.
PBONOUNS.
§881. The chief peculiarities in the Syntax of pronouns
have been already noticed in chapter IV.
§ 882. The pronouns of the first and second person viz.
ve no g«nder. The other pronouns follow the
38.
§ 882-889 ]
SYNTAX.
50&
gender of the noons they refer to. For the uses of the shorter
forms of dWId, an^ ^4*dl see chapter IV.
§ 883. Irakis used in the second person like 'you' in English
as a courteous form of address though it is to be regarded as a
pronoun of the third person and ought to be treated as such,
WTO 3TST TOsq-: you ought to be asked here,
you may also go there.
( a ) When respect is to be shown, srar and tnr are prefixed to
H«T^ according as the person with reference to whom it is used
is near, or at a distance or absent; 3HM3K STT^TT: the venerable
Kashyapa ( who is near ); $qumH 3TgfKldmwrra: may you
occupy ( lit. ornament ) this seat ; H^rWYT g<l3dl lady Iravati
( who is not present ). Sometimes ft^r is used with sr^rg; to show
respect; as *Trjrr ftWf3«N * TOT^ftsf; I Mai. Mad. I.
§ 884. The pronoun R^ has often the sense of 'well known,
renowned/ &c. ft mJcflmft'qfr those (well-known) Parvati and
Parame swaraj rTr^^ ^H^<yilf% those well-known forest sites.
(a) When repeated, this pronoun has the sense of 'various,
several-/ ?fcj «5 ^^cft^ WT^^ in those various highly delightful
spots. $foft ^: 5HT^: notwithstanding several
: &c. ( Bhag. VII. 20 ).
§ 885. The pronouns q^ and
plural in the sense of 'some—others}'
or
are used in the
H«Hgrg:
some think that widow-
remarriage is sanctioned by the S'astras, some say that it is pro-
hibited by them, while others hold that it is not allowed in the
Kali age. %r%^may take the place of <{%.
§ 886. The pronouns 3UH^> 5**?^ , *T3C and f%^ are often
used in combination with other pronouns; ^f^
that I will describe the race of the Raghue;
510 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 889-890
that I am the most degraded of all the people; ^ & sr$ret
— TO^ that thou dwelling in my fire-sanctuary;
&o.; 7r *? W4~<*4$ 'SRW gPnTlfSUHH we, of this description,
roam over the earth for ( in search of ) Damayanti; sometimes
3*173; may he understood} ^rr (§IM*4l(rt8 t*fr *l& *T ». «•
that thou quickly sit in a chariot or mount an elephant.
'tfttf 35Rcl* *T5g^rf <mmMI f%3?TT this is that son of thine, the
aubduer of elephants shedding ichor}
wno wifll1 to ^ve 8till> even tbo°Sn deprired of my
ions in that manner, &c. &c.
COMPARATIVE AND SUPEEL^TIVE DEOBZES.
§ 887. Adjectives in the Comparative degree are used with
the Ablative; 3A$TO[$roT sfr: protection ( of one's subjects ) is
better than aggrandizement. 3iJHI^fcf§ft ^ro r^C Udhisthira
was older than Arjuna.
( a ) Sometimes the comparative is used with the Instru-
mental; snor fstaft: dearer than life. See also § 863 Note.
§ 888. The superlative may either be construed with the
Genitive or Locative;
§ 889. The sense of the comparative and the superlative may
also be expressed by the particular case used; 3Rq- g^4 Mniuil«fe-
f%% his heart is harder than stone- graimt ^T^ ^T $*: qf :
Ohaitra is the cleverest of all students.
§ 890. The words *? and snn; when used in the sense of the
superlative govern the Genitive or the Locative. 53- tq$Ndl m^:
'a son is the best of things possessed of touch;' -rj^m^j *fb srqTTT
9tfT*ft ^n^ «Tt ' the cow is the best of quadrupeds and gold of
metals'; the neu. sing of qrt is used { with a word expressive
of negation ) in the sense of 'better and not, or but not;' sr^orf-
f doing any thing slowly is better than not doing
-§ 890-894 ] SYNTAX. 611
it at all j aMMqd*H3IUil mmeft sr ^Tf^fir of ( the three kinds
of ) sons — not born, born and dead, and foolish, the first two
are better, but not the last,
Meg. I. 6. ^ STfft: fl*fnr: * 3 WRSTft: better death
than disgrace.
Section IV.
PABTICIPLEB.
§ 891. All declinable participles in Sanskrit partake of the
mature of adjectives i. 9. they agree with the nouns they qualify
in gender, number, and case. The participles often discharge
the functions of verbs. They are largely empolyed to take the
place of the Past and Future tenses and more especially of
passive verbs. When BO employed they follow the same rules
of syntax as are laid down for the roots from which they
.are derived.
PRESENT PABTICIPLEB.
§892. The present particple is to be used when contem-
poraneity of action is to be indicated. It is often idiomatically
-used to express the sense of 'while' or 'whilst* in English ; auofr
^•^ while wandering in the forest ; ftfrr? SPHJ^ f%H?T *?? while
.he yet wore the marriage string.
Vide 670. ( b ).
§ 893. *The present participle is used to denote the manner
in which an action is done or the cause or object of an action ;
*T*5fT: the Yavanas dine by lying down ; ffif
a man is absolved by ( reason of his ) seeing Hari;
( Mb. ).
§ 894. The roots grr^ and ror are generally used with present
participles to show the continuity of the action denoted by
them ; <rg5ft ^ ffH arr^ used to kill ( always kept on killing )
animals ; <t Wl^TTOT^ rTW remained waiting for him.
?^: f%^rnn: Pan. IIL 2. 126.^: ^ ^HW^T I Sid. Kau.
512 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 895-900
THE PERFECT PARTICIPLES.
§ 895. The use of the perfect participles is very limited ; it
is used in the sense of < who or what has done &o.'5 <f dfimql*>
H*i<lM3sU% ( Bag. V. 61. ) him who had halted in the vicinity
of the city ; ^m% *refnnri*3TfgTOr ( Bag. V. 34. ) of thee who
hast obtained all good things, ^ g^jfrK^H ( Bhatti. I. 20 >
when he heard his words • &c.
THE PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.
§ 896. The past passive participle is very frequently used to
supply the place of a verb; sometimes in conjunction with the
auxiliary verbs 3^ and ^. The past passive participle agrees
adjectively with the object in gender, number and case, the
agent being put in the Instrumental, while the past active
participle is treated exactly like the verb in the past tense ; ffr
^rfr V& b7 aim the work was done j fa q-VMlM Qtflft by him
the bonds were cut ; 3flfsren?fT ^T Mlffum I am commanded
by queen Dharini ; sr ^T$ &d3K he did the work ; w- ^WTT
5ft*T? Rama killed the B&kshasas - 5cTsrr3T% *Tl^vfKmr thou
didst never despise me, &c.
§ 897. In the case of past passive participles of intransitive
roots the agent is put in the Nominative case ;
then the king of demons wept;
§ 898. The past passive participles are often used imperson-
ally, the agent being put in the Intrumental case; s^fffrf ov
?T* it is shone by the sun; j^rq- prRfOTT victorious ( all
powerful ) is the affection for sons ; qfiUdlNd d^M<<<5l he
showed his learning; ggf^ or q-Rrf^r ^TfSTT, &c.
§ 899. The past passive participles of the roots jn;, gy
and 33t an(i their synonyms are used in the sense of the Present
tense and are construed with the Genitive. ( See § 857. )
For further particulars vide §§ 705—707.
§ 900. Many past passive participles are used actively in
§ 900-906 ] SYNTAX. 51S
which case they may govern the Accusative case, like a Perfect
tense active} ^ntjc&rrfr^ ( Rag. VI. 77. ) which had ascended
the mountain ^;, similarly iriRTOmr^: *rfir«T» armTOrfW:
crossed i. t. got over the calamity; 4^ l<fc^m<ftof: descended
to the bank o'l the Yamuna, &e.
§ 901. The past passive participle is used as a neuter sub-
stantive; irtf departure; spfr a gift, ^rnt an excavation,
§ 902 The past passive participle active and passive, may be
used with the auxiliaries 3^ and ^ in any tense, the mean-
ing of the participle changing aocoidingly; irat^R or
I have or am gone; so Tr<raR«Y7 or iHTCRKT or TKTfr? I had
or was gone; so %aqRl'W; TaY SR «^T «rra%m TTO: that Rama
is to go to the forest to-morrow- ^srnr: ^fffir^cJf nfifcq/H
thou wilt obtain great glory, &c.
THE FUTURE PAETICIPLBS.
§ 903 The future participle denotes that a person or thing
is doing, or is about to do the action or to undergo the condi
tion, expressed by the root; q»KStrq[ going or about to do;
about to do or what is about to be done.
§ 904, Besides showing simple futurity participle expresses
intention or purpose. 3*337*9^ gRcTJ^TT^; wishing to follow
the daughter of the sage; 3^73 wishing to give/, qrqrc
l3^»qfc(4 $Sf.*JT9K wishing, as it were, to tame the wild beasts.
POTENTIAL PASSIVE PARTICIPLES.
§ 905. The Potential psssive participle Is used in the sense
of ' what should or ought to be done; ' beeidts this, this parti-
ciple yields the sense of < fitness, obligation, neccsiity, capacity, >
&c., the agent being put in the Instrumental case;
( Devi Bhig. IV. 7.1.) he considered in
his mind what he ought to do; <nT:3Tgq<uTNs religions duty ought
H. 8. O. 33.
614 SANSKBIT GRAMMAR. [ § 905-909
to be followed, ^n *mt W^ft^n thon art able to bear this burden;
: this rogue deserves to be killed; 4|*dcUi ?t ?«fcU«5«l
thoa will have to go to Alaka, the habitation
of the lordb of Yakshas, &c.
Obs. — Sometimes the agent is put in the Genitive case, «pr
Hari is to be served by me; fi^idlnl W& 3RT boiled
rice to be eaten by Brahmanas.
§ 906. Occasionally this participle is used impersonally in
the neuter gender and singular number; d^^^df HMNH
his honour should go to the penance grove* ?r*n
should have to dwell in the company of Chandalas &c.
§ 907. The neuter forms *n%fcqr ^d vrf^T are used imper-
sonally in the sense of ' being, ' or ' what must be or in all pro-
bability is, ' the noun denoting the agent being put in the In-
strumental case: are %*rft tfeKfr* irftasi there must be some
cause; H^r q*m»T|m qfUF^ir ^^W or m±m± in all probabi-
lity his strength must be corresponding to his sound; srnhiT srsTTS -
cnrr^^n ^rf^Hai^ the lady must ( in all likelihood ) be seated
in the carriage, &c.
§ 908. This participle is sometimes used as a noun;
to him who asked what was to be asked;
let that, which is to happen, happen.
INDECLINABLE PAST PARTICIPLES OB GEBUKDS.
§ 909. The past indeclinable participle in Sanskrit denotes
the prior of two actions done by the same agent and corres-
ponds to the perfect participle in English;
having said this he stopped;
having seated them on his back, he carried them to the lake
and ate them up.
As the past indeclinable participles or gerunds serve the
purpose of carrying on the action of the verb and act as
§ 909-911 ] SYNTAX. 515
connecting links between sentences, they account for the spar-
ing use made in Sanskrit composition of relative pronouns, con-
junctions and connecting particles. When several gerunds are
used in a sentence they should be translated by verbal tenses
and copulative conjunctions;
when the evening time approached,
Ohandr&pida went to the royal palace on foot, remained in the
presence of his father for an hour, saw Vilftsavati, &c.
§ 910. A few gerunds are used prepositionally in Sanskrit;
f*?nr, g^fST except, *n^m with, xsQ^U, ^tQ&rq, <4<i<>ti4 with
reference to, &o.
THE iNpnrrrtvB MOOD.
§ 911. The infinitive in Sanskrit generally expresses the
purpose or that for which an action is done and thus corres-
ponds to the infinitive of purpose or gerund in English. The
infinitive in Sanskrit thus involves the sense of the Dative and
may, if desired, be replaced by the Dative of the verbal noun
derived from the root 5 qr^rtf TT3 *JHH14>^ aTOWH: descended
to the bank of the Yamuna to drink water j here qrjj may be re-
placed by ITRHT ( m«fl<w IRHT ); 3i*^<fiP«nnjK *frjF ( Bag.
X. 25. ) where ^^=^mr.
"The infinitive < formed with 3^ fern ) in Sanskrit " remarks
Prof. Monier Williams, "cannot be employed with the same
latitude as in other languages. Its use is very limited cor-
responding to that of the Latin supines, as its termination Ju»»
indicates "
(a) "Let the student, therefore, distinguish between the in-
fiinitive of Sanskrit and that of Latin and Greek. In these latter
languages we have the infinitive made the subject of a proposi-
tion; or, in other words, standing in the place of a Nominative
and an Accusative case often admissible before it. We have it
also assuming different forms, to express present, past, or future
516 SANSKRIT GBAHMAB. [ § 911-912
time, «nd completeness or incompleteness in the progress of
the action. The Sanskrit infinitive, on the otber hand, can
never be made the subject of a verb, admits of no Accusative
before it, and can only express indeterminate time and incom-
plete action. Wherever it occurs, it must be considered as the
object, and never the subject of some verb expressed or under-
stood. As the object of the verb, it may be regarded as
equivalent to a verbal substantive, in which the force of two
cases, an Accusative and Dative, is inherent and which
differs from other substantives in its power of governing a case.
Its use as a substantive, with the force of the Accutative case,
corresponds to our use of the Latin infinitive; thus
f M?TW ' I desire to hear all that/ 'id audire capio,' where
and audire are both equivalent to Accusative. Similarly,
ST3CT 'she began to weep/ and *r£f ^Tg 3TFC^, he began to conquer
the earth, where H^Mq 3TKH, he began the conquest of the earth,
would be equally correct,"
(&) "Bopp considers the termination of the infinitive to be
the Accusative of the suffix tu ( § 458. Obs. ), and it is certain
that in the veda other cases of nouns formed with this suffix in
the sense of infinitives occur; e. g. a Dative in tave r>r tavai, as
from han comes hantave 'to kill;' fr. anu-i amxtave, <to follow;'
f r. man, mantavai, 'to think/ there is also a form in tot generally
in the sense of an Ablative; e. g. f r. i. comes etos ( from going;'
fr. han, hantos, as in pur a hantos, t before killing;7 and a form in
tvi corresponding to the indeclinable participle in tva of the
classical language; a. g. fr. han, hatvi ' killing/ fr. bhu bhutvi
'being/ &c. &c. " Sanskrit Grammar. •
§ 912. The infinitive cannot be used as the subject or object
of a verb, abstract nouns supplying its place in this case.
Where, therefore, the infinitive occurs in English as tae subject
or the object in a sentence, the abstract noun derived from the-
! 912-916 J SYOTAX. 517
uooi most be used in Sanskrit ; ^\mfcn«ft Qirnrf to do
duty is beneficial and not W
§ 913. * The infinitive is nsed with verbs and verbal nouns
meaning (to wish or desire' provided the agent of it is the same
«s that of the verb; qfr gjfWQ *>' t?W ( Mud. I. ) who
wishes to snatch away the jaws of the lion ;
Bhartr. II 6. But flilflrm^rffr I wish
him to do this, is wrong.
§ 914. f The infinitive is also used with :—
( a ) verbs meaning to be able, to make bold, to know, to
be wearied, to strive, to begin, to set about, to bear, to be
pleased and to be; * 5Tf£rfar f*RlW VTRftg ( Kad. ) is not able
to support tis neck; &jRlf% €t<r flgflj you know how to re-
strain anger ; srjp^r ^EfW 4l4Hvn'5'g (Bhatti. XV. 77) he strove
to fight with Angada ; ^g^^W^^^m^ ( Meg. 22. ) thou wilt
try to go ; cnfr M&ft«4i: (Meg. 103.) begin to speak ; %T%-iWffr-
f%?m 9f ^t-^.^^T ( Bid. Kau. ) there is food to eat, &c.
( I ) \ words like 3^ and others meaning sufficient or able,
proficient or fikilled in, &c.; qqlnfRT SHITs «TT3 ( Rag. X. 25 )
thou art able to protect the creation ; q;:
who is able to change destiny; mm^regt ^Nd^^ (Meg. 66 )
the palaces are able to stand comparison with thee- jfr^T snfhd:
J *&R ( Sid- Kftu- ) BkiUed Jn eating.
(c) § words haying the sense of ' it is time to do anything ;'
Y %cJT 3r%^T *T *&%* (Sid. Kau.) it is time to
take food.
§ 915. The infinitive in Sanskrit has no passive form. In
* «HM*<i^ 33* P&n. III. 3. 158.
t 9iefc^^i*«9i^e<<«itf*<'*«t^i'&i^^I^ 313ft * Pan. HI- 4. 65.
Vide Apte's Guide § 176 and note thereon.
mff I Pan. HI. 4. 66.
§ ^T^TRn^rg E* t P&n- HI. 3. 167.
518 SANSXBXT GBAIOCAB. [§915-918
turning, therefore, an active construction involving an infinitive
into a passive one, the verb should be changed into the passive,
the infinitive and the woids governed by it remaining unaffected-
«• JJTrf T*3 f^gfft, ft* STTR *F3 f«int-except where the object of
the infinitive and the verb is the same, ^r *nt Wtf fi
§ 916. The root sr| ' to deserve ' when used ( in the second
person ) in combination with the infinitive expresses 'a request,
a respectful entreaty,' and is generally, equivalent to the
English < I pray, be pleased, &c.;' sr?3r ^nTf^rffir ( Meg. 55 >
please put out the fire; * ^flgHl srffa^prffir ( Kum. V. 40 )
if you have nothing to conceal from me, please answer me ;
( Bag. V. 25 ) pray wait for two or three
days, O respectable one ! &c. Sometimes it is equivalent to a
gentle command ; fin M*U$I*J4HSI% ( Bag. I. 89 ) you ought to
please her } ;f tf ^tf%gi*i% you ought not to bewail him. In
the third person and under the same circumstances it expresses
power or ability and can be translated by ' can; ' gfor T%
. Bhar. IV. 58. 27.
§ 917. * The infinitive with the final ^ dropped is joined with
the nouns $ro and n^^ to form an adjectival compound mean-
ing < wishing or having a mind to do any thing-/ Hdfq$q*q|
&c. ( Rag. V. 18 ) the disciple of the
great sage was desirous of returning &o.5 3nf z&:
( Kum. V. 40 ) this person has a mind to ask you a question.
TENSES AND MOODS.
THE PBESKNT TENSE.
§918. The Present, tense shows that an action is taking
place at the present time ; awHHi^'ft a? S^r here comes ( is
S 918-920] SYNTAX. 510
coming ) thy son. * It is the Present progressive, which expresses
the continuance of an action which is begcn over sometime
and is, remarks Prof. Bain, a true or strict Present tense. .It
is only by means of a special adverb or the context that the
sense of the present tense can be limited to that of a present
act solely; gflg^r fT fut sf? 3nvfcq'3 now he dwells in this city.
§ 919. Besides the general sense given above the Present
tense in Sanskrit baa the following senses: —
( a ) f It is sometimes used in the sense of ' immediate futu-
rity; ' 9^ Tft**n9 when wilfc thou g° ? TT Thrift Here I go
( i . «. shall go ); an£ fir* ggft!% I shall die an honr alter.
( b ) It may also be used to denote an action which is recently
completed; ^r ?$ qimqHIdlfc— 3^HMH»aiffr when didst thon
come from the city ? Here I come ( have come just now ).
( e ) In narrations it is used for the Past tense; JJOT 3$
qptft the vnltnre says, ' who art thon ' P
( d ) Sometimes it is used to denote a habitual or repeated
action;
§ 920. I When a question ia asked and an answer is given to
it, the Present is used in the sense of the Past tense when the
particle 5fg is used; qs£ ST^rtf: fi^— 5T5 *ETtf& 4t: where
* " The principal use of the Present Indefinite is to express
what is true at all times; 'the sun gives light; twice two is
lour * * V Hence a more suitable name would be the Universal
tense. It expresses present time only as representing all tii/ie.
The permanent arrangements and laws of nature, the peculiari-
ties, habits and propensities of living beings and whatever ia
constant, regular and uniform, have to be represented by the
Present Indefinite. ** It is only by a special adverb or by
the context that we can confine this tense to mean a present
act solely. " Bain, Higher English Grammar.
f Pin. III. 3. 131. Seep. 525.
t *ift 5wfinre% » f^tfrim i P*n. m. 2. 120, 121.
520 SANSKBIT GRAHUAB. [ § 920-42$
is equivalent to mcfelMH ; when the particles ^ and 3 are used
the Present may be optionally used; $d*w(?- f%^ — T Wllk or
or
§ 921. * With interrogatives the Present is often used in the
sense of the Future when thought or desire is implied; fifc qaflfft
i. e. (»R«qrifr X 3> T^lfa f. e. ( nftmnft ) What shall I do ?
Whither shall I go ? q^ft: SJR£ or qfof ^TtW *?faro% ( *. «. St-
^flfeq'Rr or ifanPldlRr ) which of these persons will you feed ?
c.; but <$: mnr 5
( a ) It is also used in the sense of the Future in conditional
sentences as implying a condition and the fulfilment of the
desired object. ^ ^rfSr ( ?TfTT *T*rfS *T ) *T **i? *nfi* ( ?nm
qr^rm 3T ) fae, who offers ( or will offer ) food, goes ( or will go )
to heaven i. e. if one offers &c.
§ 922. With the words qr3cT> RT3<£ and others having a
similar sense, tho Present is sometimes used in the sense of the
Future perfect ; in**W ^f STM^fcdl^mm before he sees
you, move away ( before he shall have seen you, &c. ).
( b ) f With the particles grr and irr*^ the Present has the
sense of the Future when certainty is indicated;
' I ( Rag.V. 25. ) I will endeavour to accomplish your
object, sn ^ETTOFrf 5Wft *3qT* ( S'ak. VII. 33 ) he will
conquer the earth consisting of seven continents, gflffifclfr rTO
rnaR* OT: I Kir. VIII. 8.
§ 923. 1 The particle ?JT wbenused with the Present converts it
into a Pas t tense j 3rf8rf«*5ftBT5* ffiTSr^nrf 5TflT ZH&W irfitTOfif W
in a certain village there dwelt a Brahmaoa Mitrasarma by name;
**T the citizens ran in hundreds. The particle
r i Pan. in. i. e. 7.
t 1T«R5Tr i^THiftW^ Pan. III. 3. 4.
Sid. Kan.
S 923-927 ] SYNTAX. 5il
W may not necessarily be joined with it; #
§ 924. * When 3TTr3 or arR is need in a sentence and con-
demnation or censure is implied, the Present may be used in the
seme of tbe three tenses;
where rq*TT§ and 3TTE^% may have also the sense of the Past or
the Futnre tense; grrg *H*HH 1*WK <4lvHm<T ( you will even
make a 8'udra perform a sacrifice ).
IMPERFECT, PERFECT AND AOEIST.
§ 925. In Sanskrit there are three tenses denoting a past
action, viz. the Imperfect, the Perfect, and the Aorst. Oh-
ginally each bf these three tenses had a signfioation of its own
and was used in its proper sense in ancient writings, f After
Sanskrit ceased to be a spoken language the exact senses of
these tenses were lost sight of and writers began to use them
.promiscuously, so that now any of these may be used to denote
past time with certain limitations. The original senses of these
as well as their other peculiarities are noticed below.
IMPEBEECT.
§ 926. J The Imperfect according to P&nini denotes past
action not done to-day t. 0. done at some time prior to the cur-
rent day, ftT«nOTTO <rHKCT ( Bhatti. ) Bibhlshapa spoke to them.
§ 927. The Imperfect is optionally used for the Perfect
when the particles f and ^TM?£ we n*ed in a sentence; ffir f
or
(a ) f It may also be optionally ueei in asking questions refer-
* TSTtf dgfi«IHft: I Pan III. 3. 142.
f For a farther explanation of the 'difference between these
three tenses the student is referred to Dr. Bh&ndarkar's preface
to the 1st Edition of his 2nd Book of Sanskrit.
t 3R<K^ <*<£ I Pan. III. 2. 111.
§ ifraMk* i 1 srir <*mr* *r$ » Pan m. 2. m, in.
522 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 927-930
ring to a very recent time; 3T*ns^ fifc ( Qu.) ( Ant )
or an) TO %? snrrcr; but when the question refers to a very remote
time the Perfect alone ought to be used, ^coj: ^ 3nTRT% ? STOR..
§ 928. When the particle *rr in combination with *jris need
with the Imperfect in the sense of the Imperative, the augment
3T is dropped;
PEBFECT.
§ 929. *Tfae Perfect denotes an action done before the current
day and not witnessed by the speaker. It has reference to a very
remote time and should, therefore, be used in narrating events
of the remote past; <rf dld^K^I foriViM *nr I Bama killed her
whose name was Tataka. spnnfq«*R<mm«fr (Bhatti. XIV.1«. ).
( a ) In the 1st person the Perfect shows that the speaker was
in a distracted state of mind or was unconscious when the event
took place, or that he wants utterly to deny something that he-
has done; *£ 5fir^ STSTniTO grnfeoM^ ( Sis XL 39 ) being
frenzied I prattled much, I am told, before him; *
didst thou dwell in the country of the Kalingas P sn
*Tnr I never went to Kalingas. With these exceptions the Per-
fect should not be used in the 1st person.
AORIST.
§ 930. f The Aorist simply expresses past action indefinitely
». e. without reference to any particular time ( ^d-Kim^ g^" );
(Bhatt. I. 2.) 'He studied the Vedas, offered
sacrifices to the gods, satisfied his departed ancestors, honoured
Pan. III. 2. 115,.
( Sid. B^au. ); ^ri4*dlM^ fS^ Wrfjsq^ I Vart.
f 5 Pan. HI. 2. 110.
§ 930-933 ] SYNTAX. 523
his relatives, snbdned the collection of six ( i. 0. the fix pas-
sions ), took delight in politics and totally annihilated his
enemies. The Aorist, however, properly denotes a recent
action or one done during the coarse of the present day. "It
is similar to the English present Perfect, " remarks Dr.
Bhandarkar*, ''which the student will remember defines an
action as having happened in a portion of time which is not
yet expired; it brings past action in connection with the pre-
sent time," 3T^f f%TO it rained to-day.
§ 931. f The Aorist ought to be used when the idea of the
continuonsness or iiearnees of an action is to be implied;
( Sid. Kau. ) gave food throughout hi* life; $
( Sid. Kau. ) he consecrat-
ed the fire on the last Pnrnima day ( the full-moon day ) and
offered Soma, &c.
§ 932. | With the particle g^r not joined with **r, the Aor-
ist, the Imperfect, the Perfect or the Present may be used
I ( Sid. Kau. ) here formerly
dwelt pupils. But when *H is used with grr the present alone
can be used; q*ric| TO 3TT he formerly sacrificed.
§ 933. Tne Aorist is used with the prohibitive particle ITT
( HT^F ) or ITT fIT, with the temporal augment 3\ cut off, and has
then the sense of the Imperative; ffjr *<t ^$rat m ^ Ma. Bha. V.
132. 16. have no doubt &c. in CT mfft *W do not go against.
Barely in ancient woiks the augment is retained JTF f^TT^
: may you not live, oh Nishada for
many years. When a root is preceded by a preposition, the
3T is sometimes not dropped; *n H^q^mrqm. do not submit to
* Second Book of Sanskrit, P. 154.
f Pan. III. 3. 135. See next Page.
1 5ft 5^ *n* i P»n in. 2. 122.
3 w^Rt i Sid. Kau.
524 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 933-935'
-sorrow or anger ( here the 3? is not dropped ); sometime* it is
-dropped; as in milMn: ^mcHl4 do not despise your coul
( conscience ). Some explain these anomalies by considering
the particle to be in and not !TT^.
THE Two FUTUBES.
§934. The difference between the Two Futures is the
same as that between the Imperfect and the Aorist, the only
difference being that the former refers to a future time and the
latter to a past one. The First or Periphrastic expresses
futurity definitely hot not of this day; the Second or Simple
Future Axpresaes futurity indefinitely as also that of to-day;
it is also employed to denote recent and future continuous
time; a* artmf >*: *nrrmr% *ft irorm^HT* (Bhatti xxii, )
oh monkey, to-morrow you will go to Ayodhya governed by
Bharata; *<
( Rhatti. XXII. 14. ) they will be delighted
on seeing yon and will ask you questions about the welfare of
us two and Sitft; and Bharata also will be greatly pleased;
*>Fft»a3t| ( Kir. IH. 22 ) they will be extirpated
by the monkey-bannered one ( Arjuna ); mH»HJ<l ^*tl^l S'ak.
IV.) 6akuntaHwill go (goes) to-day; ufounft ft^ ^T
( Bhatti XVI. 13 ) if my sons are killed I will
die or kill the enemy, &c
THE FIRST FUTTJBS OB PEBIPHBASTIC FUTUBE.
§ 935. 06*. * When the continuousness of an action or
nearness of time ( i. «. the non-intervention of the same period
between the two points of time referred to) is to be expressed the
First Future must not be used; mq^NHfrf ?T**jfff he will give
food throughout his life; and not
Pan. III. 3. 135-I38.
§ 936-930] SYNTAX. 525
te will consecrate the fires and
offer a Soma sacrifice on the coming Amavasyfi day} and not
gmrrar and *njT; also when limit of time or place is expressed
and the word 3CTT is used in a sentence ; ir: aujnw <IHf»T:
not
and not Hsftcmsfr but when the word |5 is used
the First Future may be used; qtf HTO: w\*uift jf^q- q-:
M-^^^KM: cTaT srorarwft w« will study in the earlier fortnight
of the coming mouth. When the period of time meant lies
beyond a certain point of time, the First or the Second Future
may be used;
« or
THE SECOND OB SIMPLE FUTUBE.
§ 936. * When the close proximity of a future action is
intended, the Second Future or the Present may be used; ^qj^rfr
**T% when will you go ? <r^ n^m% or J|fomifa I shall just go,
§ 937. f When there is the idea of hope implied in a
conditional form, the Aorist, the Present or the Simple Future
may be need in both the clauses to denote a future time-,
( Sid.
Kau ). if it were to rain we would sow corn.
§ 938. The Simple Future is sometimes used as a courte-
ous way of command; WTW srfS ifawjft ( Vik. IV. ) then
you will go (i.e. please then go ) to the laker &c,
§ 939. J The Simple Future is alone used when the idea of
hope is conveyed by f^nr and words having the sense
i ^n. ill. 3. 131.
I Pan. III. 3. 132.
. III. 3. 133.
526 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 939-942
?*ffcf «TT *m<Tfif 5far «nwm: if a shower were to
-come quickly we would at once sow corn.
§ 940. When the word q^j is not used with roots meaning
1 to remember/ such as ^, &c. the Second Future is used in
the sense of the Imperfect; *R*fa 50* »H$gfr gWIIT Krishna,
do you remember that we dwelt in Gokula >
§ 941. * When disbelief in or intolerance of an action u
intended to be expressed, and especially in the form of a ques-
tion, the Simple Future is used optionally in the sense of the
Potential; 5f ^MN<Tlffr or 5f jrfa TOTHC fff R^ or fffi^mfly
I never believe, or cannot tolerate it, that you would or should
speak ill of Hari; ^: or *&&: ^nr: %ft fo%% or RF^miq who
will speak ill of Hari ( I do not believe that any body will,
&c. ); ^r ^T£ *rqr^ <IM*H or iiwftwrfjf, &3.; when the word
f%%9 t ( a P&rticle, showing great anger ) and roots having the
sense of 'to be' precede, the Simple Future only should be used;
«r ^nfRrrftr or ^r vwr^ T%ifF$y ^rw ?fsnra^ifd I &o not believe
or like that yon should make a Sndra perform a sacrifice; so
§ 942, When the idea of wonder is to be expressed and
the words q^f, q*^ and qf^1 do not occur in a sentence, the
Simple Future should be used; arregrqsrrvft STTR f wf sT^rfff it is
a wonder that a blind man sees Hari.
(a) The Simple Future is also used when the particles
OT and arfr expressing a doubt are used, ^r ^rg-: irfifarTjT will
the stick fall ? arft WTftt will he close the door ?
(b) This Future is also used when the particle srsJ mean-
ing sure or able is used; ^ ffroft 5%* fR«Tftr Krishna is
sure or able to kill the elephant.
^n. III. 3.144,145.
? I Pan. in. 3. 146.
S 943-944 J SYNTAX. 527
THE MOODS.
THE IMPERATIVE MOOD.
§ 943. * The Imperative Mood does not express merely com-
mand, but also entreaty, benediction, courteous enquiry, gentle
advice, ability, &o.
( a ) In tne second person this Mood is used to express com-
mand, entreaty, gentle advice and benedictions or blessings;
( ?* ) $flHSH go to Kusumapura;
help ! gmwmiq O God I forgive my faults, &c.;
$* fsfrrcn&fiff% qWI*A ( Sak. IV. ) serve your elders and treat
your co-wives as if they were your friends ; trfqr fr[j^fc<M *T *r?*T
jr^r ^nr% be thou my messenger, go to Raghava, and say to
him; 4H<4|KM qfctalgglfd ^BT ?T€TO^rrHf?TT S^OT she wts
addressed the truth by Hara when he said 'do thou obtain u
husband not devoted to any other lady.'
(k) In the third person it is often used to express a blessing
and sometimes gentle command ; Hm-dl T%f% ^f • • •sr^fo? : SwrnHT
this handful of flowers scattered on the
feet oi Hari give us success. q-TJTqr q»T9CTfr ^"^3 may rain pour
down in time; MfcJIMB^ «frn: ^T*H<MH«: ( Mud. V. II. ).
(0) In the first person it expresses a question, necessity, abi-
lity, &cj f% 3FWm ft what should I do for you ? 3^TTf *K^|f^
I must go nowi »<^|^afq %ft fW a^ we will ( are able to ) do
this thing, oh queen, which is agreeable to you; stff Tdrrq- ^fr
q»<3Hm*4 ^ Hm: (Bhalti XX. 6, ) let your thought be ' I must
not commit the horrible murder of an ambassador.'
§ 944. The third person singular of the Imperative in the
passive voice is often used and sometimes as a courteous form
*3l^ I Pan. III. 3. 162. Vide Pan. III. 3. 161. quoted on
the next page.
528 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB. [ § 944-050
of expression. 3TT«STTm <MH^: tne prince should be brought
3pm *Tf <rffcrm: may you hear, ye Pandits ;
take this seat.
§ 945. When time after a gg& ( nearly equal to an hour ) is
expressed, the Imperative is used ; g&dfcudl *JT offer the sacri-
fice after an hoar.
§ 946. The Imperative with the particle w is used when a
request is courteously expressed ; qidm-qmq wr please teach
the child.
§ 947. The Imperative has sometimes the force of the pre-
sent when used in combination with the particle *fT; jrr *nrg
it is not so ; *rr
§ 948. fs?rft *Hll«mfl« or &m% I *ish you should dine.
See § 958.
§949. * There is a peculiar use of the Imperative which
ought to be noticed. The Imperative second person signlar is
repeated when frequency of an'act is indicated and the whole
used with the root in any tense; qrft Trf£ f 1% Tlftr ( Sid. Kau. )»
he goes every now and then ; so trnr *TT?ffiT %$ *mT; Trft mfranrr-
H^Tl m I vfl «^f H vfr^ he studies steadily. The Imperative
second person is also used when several acts are described as
done by the same person; ^^ ffo >JRT: *sn^wre?*fir ( Sid.
Kau. ) he takes his food, now eating barley, now eating fried
rice, similarly spgfr ^^ smTOTTST^q^iwresnf ( Sid. Kau. ).
THE POTENTIAL MOOD.
§ 950. f The Potential Mood expresses the sense of ?%ra (com-
mand,, directing a subordinate, &c. ), RH^TUl ( pressing in vita-
I tifj^^ tn*ir«^«i'«ifit<< i P&a III. 4.
1-5. T%*mmfafTT ft WT^- FVart.
t f»foM*4rs<ui i R?^m>ftgwr%nmRf r% i P»^. HL 3. 16
950-953 ] SYNTAX. 529
tion ), 3TO**tfr ( giving permission ), srrfte ( telling one to at-
tend to an honorary office or duty ), *fsr*^r ( courteously asking
a person a question), and srnfsrr prayer, qifa one should perform
a sacrifice; RT ffTH »T^: go to the village; f 5 «r^r^ gsfa your
honour should take food here; fgrcftcT WH* you > may sit here;
yon naay teach my eon ( a? an honorary duty );
3-<T <reb* what, oh ! shall I learn the Veda or
logic ? vft ^t3R 5J^T good Sir, can I get food here ? t. a. will
yon kindly give me food? (All these senses are optionally
expressed by the Imperative also ).
( a ) * In the case of the first two senses viz. f^rvj- and
and in that of ' proper time ', the potential participle may
also be used for the Potential; vnrof TCeTCy &c.
§ 951. f When the words ' after an hour ' are need the Poten-
tial ( also Imperative ) or the Potential participle may be used-
r ( Sid. Kau. ).
§ 952. J The Potential is used with the words
and yr, when the word n^is used, ^i ^inr: %OT «TT
it is time now that you should dine.
§ 953. § When the idea of fitness is to be expressed the
Potential or the Potential participle may be used; and some-
times the noun in 3 also; a? qjrtrf 3%:, ?*r ^^iqT" TtOT or
yon are fit to marry the girl.
( a ) The Potential or the Potential participle may be used
when the sense of capability is implied; vrrt <4 wfr: or
: thou canst ( art able to ) carry the load.
n Pan. III. 3. 163.
i. 3. 164.
. III. 3. 168.
I Vfc fat * I PAD. HI. 3. 169. 172.
ft 8. G. 34
530 SANSKRIT GB&KMAB. [ § 954-958
§ 954. *With interrogative words such as fijj, 153*, ^<m, &c.
the Potential or the Simple Future may be used when censure
is implied ( see § 937 )-, gj: ^cffr ^T ffif
( a ) When wonder is implied the simple Future is used in
preference to the Potential if the word *rf^ be not used} 3ff3?3
it is a wonder that a blind man should see
Hari; but arts*? *ff^ ^TTrfWfa it is wonder if he study.
§ 955. | When hope is expressed without the use of the
word c|sT%3 tUe potential is generally used;
it is my desire ( I hope ) that you will eat; but
hope he lives.
§ 956. J When the sense of ' I expect ' is implied, the
^otential or the 2nd Future may be used provided the word *r^
used; ^Mi4<l:lft 5«flr?T ifit^ ^f ^RTR[ I expect you will
at; but ^n^HTTm ^hlT^f^ ( Sid. Kau. ).
§ 9 57. ^[ When in a conditional sentence one thing is expressed
as depending upon another as effect upon a cause, the Potential
or the Simple Future may be used; ^of ?rfr%?
if be will bow to Krishna he will attain happiness ; so
§ 958. $ When words having the sense of ' to wish, ' such as
. &"• are used, the Potential or Imperative is used ;
cT or ^rKl^ * wish you should dine;
Pan. ni. 3. 144. (
. III. 3. 151.
t »iwft^ ^l%ft I Pan. III. 3, 153.
i fr*™ vrm> ^UNH^^OTT^ i Pan. m. 3. 155.
. HI. 3. 156.
$ *^ dl I f * I Pan HI. 3. 167. 159.
§ 958-961 ] SYNTAX. 531
*T WF* ( Sid. Kan. ) I wish Your Hcnonr will drink
Soma.
(a) Bnt when the agents of both the actions are the same, the
Potential alone is used in the sense of the Infinitive; *f ^fr^TrfT-
x^ ( Sid. Kan. ) t. «. Hl^ffl^M wishes that he will eat
( wishes to eat ).
§ 959. Sometimes the Potential is used without a subject
when it is used in the sense of 'a preeept or advice';
II a
should save money for adversity; he should save his wife at the
cost of his wealth and himself even at the expense of his wife
and wealthj q^sTl^d &rwJWTl£<JI<tH<^<; ( one ) should serve
BrAhmanas with all that they like, without being jealous.
THE BENEDICTINE MOOD.
§ 960. The Benedict! ve Mood is used to confer a blessing
or to express the speaker's wish; f%^ sftsqr?!; af^T3* may you
live long ! srRrftHT: *roft& ^3TR?t f?3^0: I
^TT^W-Tt ^WT ST^f?«nftll (Bhatti. XIX. 26);
may I be successful !
THE CONDITIONAL.
§ 961. * The Conditional is used in those conditional
sentiences in which the Potential may be used when the nonper-
formanco of the action is implied or in which tbc falsity of the
antecedent is involved as a matter of fact. It expresses both
future and past time. It must be used in both the antecedent
and the consequent clauses;
if there would be plentiful rain there would be an abundance of.
n. III.
Sid. Kau.
532 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 961-96$
corn;
bads t thou obtained ( which thou hast not ) the sweet
fragrance of hei breath, wouldst thou have had any liking for
this lotus ?
Obs. § 962. * When a past action is to be indicated toe
Conditional may be optionally used in the sense of the
Potential} ^q ^m ^^F^nfoar^q^ or RT%: how could jou
give up your religion ?
(a) Also where the Potential is used in conjunction with the
particles 3cT, arft, 3^3 &c. ; arf^ ra %: tfhff
?^ TTH ^fraTf%5p^tr^ H (Bhatti.
XXI. 8. 4. )
( b ) When wonder is to be expressed the Conditional ifr
optionally used where the Potential is used in combination with
the particles tr?? tr? or qr^ when the action does not take place-,.
r ^^6^^^^ ?T9r i srrfrr^^rf ftHiai^ fife
II ( Bhatti. XXI. 8 ).
SECTION V.
Indeclinables.
ADVEBBS.
§ 963. The mu. singulars of the Nominative and other cases
of several nouns are used as adverbs; f%f or f%^or or
Wr^T having contemplated for a long time; jtf or 5:
Ee is in distress; so 3^- or
(a) The word ftvjr ia used adverbially in combination with
. III. 3.140.
§ 963-966 ] STNTAX. 633
several words such as srj , STRT, &c.; ^fttf, srorri*^ in various
ways. The word ^ is also nsed adverbially as the latter
member of a compound when some action is to be expressed as
having happened before; qfrtmj? having said something by way
of consolation*, gi%3TC thoughtfully, ( t. e. thought preceding
a certain action ); 3Tf%o£ mi^g^n 5?TT TOTT O venerable Sir,
I killed this cow unwittingly; ^TTO^ 3*^mJd &c.
PBErOSITIONS.
§ 964. The use of Prepositions has already been explained
at § 365-371. The Prepositions governing cases are already
noticed under the various cases.
CONJUNCTIONS.
§ 065. The use of Conjunctions has not many syntactical
Peculiarities and needs no special notice here. They are nsed
in their proper senses in sentences.
§ 966. The most important of these conjunctions and the
one very frequently used is ^r. It can never stand first in a
sentence; nor can it be nsed like 'and' in English. It is used
with such of the words or assertions it connects or is placed
after the last of the words or assertions it joins together; TOW
«J$ROT%sr or TOT c5$ROw; OT«W 3|f3*ldmMi »ntfUtf qg love with
its excellences expanded, and fresh youth;
( a ) Sometimes this particle hes a disjunctive force;
f&^ITT'W^ fgrrfifr ^r mj.— the hermitage is tranquil yet my
arm throbs.
b ) Rarely this particle is used in the sejtta of ' if;
oh fool, if you wuh to live,&c.
534 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 966-968
( e ) Sometimes it is used aa an expletive;
( d ) Sometimes it is used to connect a subordinate fact
with a main one nrgnrrcr it *c|M<J wander for alms and bring
a cow; $(|«ir ^ ^nftcfT *Tt<ft ^r wr^rftai ^q%5sgr H<**d»* the
procuress was chastised, the cowherdess was expelled and
Kandarpaketu was honoured.
(e) When the particle is repeated it hao sometimes the
sense of 'on the one hand/ 'on the other hand/ 'and yet/ ^ ^
sfityfrMi sfrfttf ^rfiftfa* s> ^ Rftraft TOT SSRTRT: srcret where,
on the one hand, is the extremely frail life of fawns, and
where, on the other, are thy arrows hard like adamant and
falling sharply; * $&w H<&r$$H*\ ^ *TT
?T^ I on the one hand the full moon-faced lady is not easy to
obtain and yet there is this unaccountable sport of love.
(/) Sometimes the repetition of ^ shows the simultaneous
or undelayed occurrence of two events; ^ ^
r they reached the ocean and at the same time the
primeval Being also awoke.
§ 967. trar 'likewise' often supplies the place of
Eama and Lakshmana;
both Anagatavidhata and Pratyutpannamati; ^TT f$ means * for
instance, to be more plain/ ^ETT ^ 'likewise/ both are often used
introducing quotations.
§ 968. 5 but, f% for, because, and qt are also excluded from
the first place in a sentence. 3TTcOT $&: ^T^T «n^rr &s$ 5 fficIT
l%^y the son is one's own self, t}ie wife one's friend, but the
daughter a source of anxiety;
§ 968-970 ] SYNTAX. 535
( V. 10. ); arWTTOf *T 5nM *T *W choose either the missiles or
your person.
§ 969. *n? &ad %^ 'if ' are usually used with the Potential
or the Conditional; as q^ Hff *T%l%ffir tft^ cfrf TO
he were here he would assist me; q-f^ %*^rft
had Devadatta been here, he would have undoubtedly
done this; but they are also construed with the Present Indica-
tive; q-f% 5n*ft Wl% Wift if he lives he will see prosperity;
*rf$ RST %*<TT^RT TOf3Wtt% if Your Majesty has any thing
to do with me, &c.;
I conjure you by my life if you will not tell it in words,
is never used at the beginning of a sentence; tf ^fcrf
§fr TT^f?®!^ ( S'ak. VII. 4 ) if the thousand-rayed ore ( sun )
did not place him at the yoke of his car; &rf$ TiTgCr^fftfa
( have recourf e to ) ^t %g; &c.. Bha. V. I. 44.
The Particles s^1 and ffn.
§ 970. *3nET is used in the following senses: — ( 1 ) aa a sign
of auspiciousness f- awmt Sfrf^nW now begins the inquiry
about Brahma; cf. the Bhaaya on this sutra. ( 2 ) marks the
beginning or commencement of a work; arefoHR*-^ 5T«Tff 3^=^
now is begun the 1st Tantra; so spsi iftirr^n^R^C, &c $ (3) 'then'
after that,' &c.; gr^ snnsniTi^! &c. ( Rag. II. 1. ) After that
i. e. passing of the night ) the lord of the earth, &c. ( 4 ) asks
a question 3W tnTCT^ SJteTsJiJfTO $3$t ^|^M.' is the venerable
Kasyapa all right that he may oblige the world ? aw $|cHffi *&&
are you able to eat? ( 5 ) 'and, including'; tfrJT: 31^7 &&'• Bhima
and also Arjuna; ( 6 ) « if ; ' 3^PT ^<um^^a^y 3T??ft: if death is
sure to befall a creature, &c.
Amara.
f Properly speaking this is not the sensa of sni. The mere
utterance or hearing of this word if considered as auspicious
as the wotd is supposed to have emanated from the throat
of Brahma.
536 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB. [ § 971-972
§ 971. As 3T«r marks the beginning, so ffa, marks the close
of a composition. This particle is used in the following senses;
( 1 ) to quote the exact words spoken by some one, thus taking
the place of the quotation marks and being used generally after
the words quoted; *
ft certain Chandala girl requests Your Majesty ( saying ) ...... " I
who have come to ycur majesty's feet wish to enjoy the happi-
ness of the sight of Your Majesty;' argnrrr: g>xj: ^a$ajr: *W
3^ the Brahmaoas said '' we have accomplished our objects; "
( 2 ) cause ( rendered in English because, since &c. );
I ask you because I am a foreigner;
if every thing is not good simply because it is old- ( 3 )
purpose or motive; ;RT ^fTSTR^Rl *fftnTS*W- they two took
a limited number of servants with them that there should be no
disturbance, &c.; (4 ) so, thus; as follows;
< 5 ) in the capacity of, as regards; fqnRr
as a father he ought to be respected, as a teacher ought to be
censured; ( 6 ) to state an opinion; f fft 3T13RTOT this is the
opinion of Asmara thy a. It is often used by commentators in
the sense of ( according to the rule'; ;fft
INTEBJECTIONS.
§ 972. The following stanza from the Bhatli Kavya
illustrates the uses of some of these interjections:-*
3?r: v& ^RT fir fin* r
* In Sanskrit there is no indirect construction, so that in
translating indirect constructions the actual words of the
speaker followed by ffar must be used.
Appendix II.
DHATUKOSHA.
Abbreviations.
Pre. Present 3^ . Im. Imperative gr^. Imp. Imperfect
Pot. Potential ftft&?. Perf. Perfect f§^. P. f. Periphrastic
or 1st future g^. Fut. simple or 2nd Future $r£. Con. Condi
tional <g. Aor. Aorist . Ben. Benedictive
Causal T%^> D. or Des. Deaiderative ^. Fr. Frequentative
JTJfcrff or ^g*raT. P. Parasmaipada; A. Atmanepada5 U. Ubha-
yapada; Pass. Passive; p. p. past Passive participle. Inf. Infi-
nitive. Ger. Gerund. The figures 1, 2, &c. after the roots refer
to the conjugations to which the roots belong. Pre. p. Present
Participle ( $M«^ when the root is Paraam* $TR*Trff when Atm. )
Pot. p. Potential participle.
U. f%>rnn* to distribute; $QrafiHt ( also afcnmifa-% )
r— **$& per. ^wn^rftwr P. fot.
[-rT Aor. 3T?n 9fTfinft?T Ben.
10 U. like the above with the only difference of ^ for
1. A. infti to go- a|f ar Pre. ^^ Perf. atffcfT. P. fut.
Aor. atfWte Ben.; Can. -3^^% Pre. arrRjf^HT Aor.
10 U. vwft to shine; ^rf^-% Pre.
pert 3fffarr P- fat. 3TH%5eT-^ Aor. sfalTS, ^Tfftff^ ben.
inf. atflcT. p. p.
to move tortnonsly; «f^ft pre
& 5. P. to reach, to pervade, to accumulate;
3 sing. 3T^T%-3T^iftft 2 sing. 3TSnffr-3*$oitW. l Bin8, Pre-
3TF^^ Imperf.
Impera.
pot. 3TT^T perf.
2 SANSKRIT QBAMMAB.
p. 1 srfsrorteMcwff f«t. an^n^ ben.
aor. 3TT%ETH-3nST* 3rd dual, 3m%S:-3YTg: 3rd Pl-
ri%$Tf?T Des. Pass.— 3^3- pre. 3m% aor. Oau.—
P'e. arn%$rar-tT aor. are p.p. art^r-aT^T ger.
r^n inf. a?nr$^ Perf. Part.
1 P. ffSarot *nft to move tortuously; g^fS pre. an«T per! .
3TpmT p. fat. arnftg a»r.
10 U. THT^or to go wrong, to sin; aregf^ pre.
&c. peri. Bnrftcfr P- f. 3rn%^ra[-tT aor.
1 A. 55^T to mark; ar^fr pre. 3TJTT J perf . srf|^r p. *
con. vf&fri ben.
10 U. q^[ 55Wt ^ to count, to mark or stain, to stigmatise;
pw. 3T3-^rra^r-3mr-3T^gN^T-^^ pert.
P. t arf^Tf%-?r int. 3TTRr«g?i:-?T con.
aor. aTf^lT^-aT|ff^fT7 ben. BTf^rf^T^— 3" des. Pass.
-BT^^ra ( also 3TfTOT% )
1 P. to go; gflTTRT P'e. 3TH1P Perf • ^^RfT P- 1 «rnfac aor-
s del. 3m inf.
10 U. same as
l A. ir^n^rqr to go, to blame; gfaft pre. arnftr perf.
p. f . srtftc aor. Tnnft«: ben. 9?%|^m^ des.
1 U. »r?fr arfflTWTOW ^T to go, to speak indistinctly;
W P'e. arra or 3TT% perf. 3rf%?rr p. f. SH^fta — ^rf^g aor.
B?^rf%^fcr% des. «np PP. arf%?3T, ars^T 8er-
1. P. nftOTngt: to go, to run, to censure; arsrm P*e.
ftfigg, arrmg, f%figw, WTSTR 1st d. and pi. ftrf
arrfim 2nd sing. perf. %CTT or arfiRTr P-f.
iut, argsq^-arrfiT^con. arl^-arnfl^ao
des. jfa or an^nr p.p. sffarr or
DHA'TUKOSHA.
ger. Cau.— *T*T*Tlft— ?T pre. arefhnr^— fl aor. Pass.—
pre. flcft perf . ^riqm, *<TT> VIWTr p. f . ?TTR«*ra—
Jut. *rrWre, irra— wWre ben.
3TTRW<T con. a^rHJ 3rd 8ing
^rranr 3rd dual; 3^mh^
2. pi. aor.
1 P. !|fff<£Hctf P *o go, to worship ; 3?3am pre. 3TT5T2I
arnaeTT p. f. 3ri%«rm fut. aream may he go.
he worship, ben. airsfra aor. 3TTT^«q^: COD- Cau r
pTO. 3n^f%^l% dcs. 3^fiicf, 3Trf), with ^ij, ^Rrfj
or 3T3F??T ( when it means to go ) ger.
1 U. uaV 1T^% TT to go, to beg ; 3T^afff-^ P'e.
perf. 3?f?i«siTfff-^ fat. 3TRjrg[7 3m%1£ aor. pass.—
3Ttl> p- p. 3TT3^r?cTT ger. 3H^T5^ inf.
10 U. f^^tw to individualise; 3?*^gm-% pre
&e. perf. 3T>^1^af p. f.
ben.
WW 7 P. oU fts n ^ u| ^n nnrf^^ to make clear, to anoint, to deco-
rate, to go; 4CTr% Pr«- 3TR^-ir^imp. 3T^\ (
aing. ) Im^ra. ^SUI^ pot. arr^ P»»f.
p. f. srrefamr, a?^priir fat. 3?rr%«
•or. ar^n^ ben. s?T%r^Trff d»s. Pa9s.-3^?q% pre
Can. 3T3rom-3T5raiT pre. 3Trr%3T^-?T aor. 3^ p. p
3T^Fc?r, e?|p5r, pot. p. 3if%[r^r, ar^f^rr, ar^^r g«r. with
ft- oirsq- ger. arfog** , 3T^9^ i»f -
3^ 1 P. i|tfV to roam, to wander; sr?f?f pre. 3^r? perf, 5Tf^TTs
p. f. arfeyifff fat. arreTtJ aor. ^J^r^ ben. srijfHNrrff des.
Oau.^3Ti^nff% pre. 3?n%??l Aor. 3^12*^ Freq.
3Tf 1 A. 3Tm«RR01|^nTT: to transgress, to kill; Hfff pre._3TRS1
" perf. 3Tf|?rT P- f. 3?f|^ff fat. 3Tflf 7 aor. arf^fT^-T^f^-
es. Cau.— Hf ufrf-ai pre. 3TTT?f 5-*T ^nf^^-ff aor.
. VI. 4. 30, sf3^ in tne sense of ' to
•worship ' does not drop its nasal before weak terminations.
SANSKBIT GBAMMAB.
U. STJTT^ to despise; arfeggt-^rf^gfr Aor.
ben. ^gftg^ inf.
to sound ; arcirft pre. STTOT perf . arrftRTT P-
aor. ajfurrorera des. Oau.-3Trurorf?t-% pre.
Aor.
A, JJTOT* to breathe, to live; 3Ttrq^ pr
p. f. 3Tl?oT**ra fut. arnbre aor. arfiWte ben. STfoifan^ des.
Pass.— 3T<nm Pre. 3TFTOT Aor.
1 P. ^THrq-«TPR to go constantly ; 3raf^ pre. arTcf per*.
aor. ^Rrfaqf^ ^es. Pass.-^^Rt pre. 3T[j& aor.
fft-ii pre. 3TrfS?T^-cT Apr. 3Tf?RT P-P-
2 P. «r^r$r to eat- arRr per. Bn?: 2nd sing. 3fr^, 3rd sing.
Imp. 3n^> ^nrRT perf. ^TtTT *p. * • 3TrWT% f at. 3T^T^ aor.
fgr^rft des. anf^r^ con. 3TOT^ ben. Oau.— 3Tl^rar P'e
( also STfcFrfeT 'ar^fwn^' ) 3TTff^:iT aor. Pass.— arafr
pre. 3T^-3T^- perf. ^nf ( and 3?^ food ) p. p. 5ro3T-snnnr
ger. sr^^inf.
.2 Pi ST<n% to breathe, to live; 3*&f?r pre. 5Tf*r:-^: 2nd sing.
Ng»Hi*i:3TR3. 3rd sing. Imp., 3^R P«'f • ^raRfT P- *
con. arpftg; aor. ^TRftqfar des. Cau.-BTr*nrfff-% pre.
A»r. Pass. — affq^r pw. a^rR aor. 3TRr3TT ger. with
4 A, to live- *Tfq^ pre. 3TPT perf. 3Tf^T P. f. This root
Is Hie same as orror.
P. ^*> *o bind ; 3TrJTT% pre. 3|f^f^rfff fut. 3Tf5^f!^ Aor.
Ben. Cau-3i?<nTW BTr^ffl-cT Aor.
10 U. gp^prerfr gg^M^lgT^ to be blind, to close the eye«
pw. aiT^ri^r^ con. srrf^racff Aor.
ben
1 P. itrfi- to go, to wander 5 3T*fS pre. snsnr perf. srr^ftri: Aor.
1 P. TfiRT5^^%5 to go, to sound, to eat ; sreft pre. anw
aor. Cau.-3rrR^-^ pre.
p. p.
10 U. frit to afflict with pain;
Aor. 3jWTT-gmf3*fte ben.
DHA'TUKOSHSL,
Aor. grmfOTm Des. Pass.— anfa. Aor.
Pre.
1 A. *r? to go. sniff, with iprr— q^rq^ pre. amt'BW perf.
3TfiraT p. 1 3TTreS aor. arfWt^ ben. 3TOHT^ des. Pass.
— aqwNf pre. annr aor. Oau. — arnHT^-^ P'e. ^iftqd.-ff Aor.
<RfV^T, with q^T,— WWJ. ger.
10 U. ?TT% ftfWflT ^ to heat, to praise; 3^9%—% pre.
^t^^T-^ — 3TT^— ^33" perf. 3T%ft<TT P f
aor. 3Tq=qr^, aT%f^fn? ben. arf%cT p. p.
P. ^QT to be worth, tp^ost; sHrfa pre. 3TR^ perf.
p. f . srr^ra: aor. arfifftrifJr des Can.— 3r5*rft-^ pre.
^-cT Aor.
1 P. ^TTTqT to worship; STrFfa pre. 3)R^ perf . arftlfT p. f.
aor- 5T^IT Se»* Hf%l%^W des. Can.
Pre-
pre
a<>r. arf%^T ger.
10 U. to worship;
— ^ perf.
ben. 3^4^*1^— ff con. aTlft^^— <T »or.
des. Pass.— 3^^ pre. 3?rf% (
3rd dual ) Aor.
1. P. 3f^r to procure, to take; 3T*ffff pre. 3TPT^ perf.
p.
Can.—
10 U. ( also can. of the above ) srnTO% 3<TT3% ^T to procure,
to acquire; sr^fq-^r^ fut. BTi^nrRr^Iff-^ des. Pass.—
^Trflr ( arrJn4^1d^--^lf?»^lfllH dual. ) Aor.
10 A. ^WT^STTTOC t« request, to sue; sr&ft pre.
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
perf. 3T*JftrTT p. f . 3Tnfa<T aor.
d*s. Pass.— 3?«fo srofaTf* ro- 3TTf5r Aor.
1 P. Jfifr *ra% ^ to go, to beg; sr^nT P*e. 3THT? perf.
p. * arrf^wr^ con. arrsff^aor. anff^ben. 3Tl?f^iifr des. Oau.
pre. snf^r^— <r aor. Pass.— ST^ P'e
( asked ), 3TVTO ( near ) p. p.
10 U. fg^HTP* to kill;9nf^-ir Aor.3T?
-ff dea. Pass.— 3^^ pre. 3nf| Aor. 5??^ p. p.
W*l& ^[ to worship, to deserve; artfk pre.
perf 3*ffrTT P« *• STrfl^g; con. 3Tr#T^aor. Sfnh^ben.
des. Pass.— 3?p->r pre. 3TTl£ aor. Can.— See below
« 10 U.
10 U. to worship, to deserve-, ar^rnHf pro-
^RCTC-^5frperf. ar^TfTTp.f. 3?Tf5f^:«T Aor.
ben. 5Tf3Tf fam des. Pass.-ar^ pre. 3Tff| Aor. 3T£fir?*T ger.
1 U. *<TOT<ra?f?frRdt3 to adorn, fco be competent, to prevent^
^TSfff-^ per. 3TT5J— BTf^ perf. 3Ti%?fT P. * - 3Tfsfat-3Trf&E aor.
Can.— arrasft-?* pre. 3Tr%cJ^-fT aor. ^fiHf^r-% dee.
( according to some this root is Atm. )
P. wanrreforf^rTlTSc^^
to defend, to protect, to do
good, to please, to know ( and a variety of other
meaning?. ^^n'Sr Pre. 3TF5T perf. arftffT P- *• wfi^ a°r-
3?an^ben. Cau.~3TTgwm-^ pre.anfS^-tT Aor. 3rft?f p. p.
Pa§8.— 3T5*ft pre. 3TTit aor.
5. A. ounfr B^lSf ^ to pervade, to accumulate; 3?^ pre.
perf. 3?(|rm-3TCT P- *• 3Tf§r«q*— 3T^ fut. 3n%««I?T,
f r^rar-3TT? aor. ¥rer?^r, 5Tf^nfl«: ben. Oau-- ^rr^r-
pre. anftr^arrr Aor. 3T^T%^ des. Pass.
pre. 9rr% aor. »T« P. p. BTT, arftTWT, Ger.
DHA'TUKOSHA.
P. Hl3T% to eat ( with sr, to drink ); 3i^mS P'e.
2nd sing. Jmpera. arTST perf. 3tt%<TT P- *. 3*T$fT^ aor.
ben. arfafsma dee. Can.— air^^llr pre. affraOTt Aor. Pass.
—31TWfr P'e. a?lftr Aor. aif$T?T P- P-
2 P. gfc to be; aw<T pre. trfa 2nd pers. sing. Impera.
perf. ^r«Ttrr P. f . *fr«iTfpr fut. &c.
4 P. $faot to throw; awniT P^. 3Tr^ perf. an%fTT p. f .
or^con. atrro^aor. ^qrr^ben. arf%rr%^fir des. Oau.—
^m-flf pre.^TmFc^— cT aor. Pass — HCTft
p. p. 3Tr%?^r, ar^^r ger. sTRrs^ ^f.
3TT—
P. 3TTOTfc to lengthen; MT»?f?r Pre- SfTSfF ( according to-
some arouse:) perf. arrrl^rTT p.f- arrfe^m'S fat.
con. arr»tfr^ Aor. 3TfT%%«?fff des. Cau.
pre. anfia^T^— cT Aor.
10 U. STT^Org^ to sing, to rock- 3^33^— ff Aor.
to prevade, to obtain; srrsfttS, ^T^ft, 3TTSftm 1st,
2nd & 3rd sing. (3Tfc^: 1st dual. 5Tfcg^fe?r 3rd. plu. ) pre.
3TTJfr^ 3rd Sing ( s?nr*H 1st 8ing. Hfc^ 1st dual,
3rd plu.) Imp.— HTSftS 3id sing, arnr^rf^ l«k sing-
2nd sing. 3Tn^"?5 3rd. pin. Impera. am perf. 3TTWT p. '.
t. arn*^ con. OTTT^ aor. Can.— arr<T*rffr— ^ pre.
-f! aor. 3UR p. p. 3?rc?^T ger. arr^iaf-
, 10 U. 5jni% to get; ajrft^— * Aor. ( 10 conj. )
2 A. to sit; arra* pre. ansnrfc— ^r^— arr^r per^ arrftrrr
p. f. 3TfT%nr^ fut. ri?rf%«»m con. STffite aor. aTTRf^hf ben.
Pass.— arrror pre. Can.— arn=wfif.
* ar^h^: I ^ is substituted for ar^ in the non-coojugational
tenses.
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR,
f —
3 1 P. jnft to go; arotfj pre. arRTg-Imperf . ^jq perf . <THT p. f
vjwjft fat. q-sq^con. <£4V^ Aor. ygnj; ben. Cau. — >TRnjfS
pre. arnTOct— <f Aor.f ^frrfer des. Pass.— f^r pre. arriS Aor
f 2 P. irrflT to go; <rr?r pre. %*m perf. tr^r p. fat. qriarf^ fut
<f«rgL can. SRrat Aor. Pass. — fgpf pre. 3T»TTf9 — aor. Oau
— n*rof?r— % pre. ^afrTjr^-— tr aor. ( wi
2 A. with arfo srwq% to study.
P- fut. oT^^ff fut. ^Tg^iTT^m-aT^m d con.
aor., 3TOTff?r ben. Pass.— BTqfam pre.
(3rd dual,
ben. Oau.— STgqmqQ pre.
aor. Hvfhr p.p.
1 P. n«ff to go, to move; tr^f pre. *$^r perf. ^r%ff p. fut.
TT^ Aor.
1 P to go, to agitate; ffm pre. ffTO^re-^S^-arrer perf.
flflT P- fat. ^pfc aor. f flpff P.p. [Also A. see Bhag. VI. 16]
1 P. nrft to go; tr^fir pre. f^? perf. ^ft^T P- *«t ^ft^ aor.
1 P. ^T&^5 to have great power; ^r^nf pre. ^g[ Imperf.
— ^rr^ Ferf- ? F^?fT P. fut. ffr^nw fat.
ben. f|%?r p.p.
7 A. ^fhfir to sHine, to kindle; f^ pre. f?>jt^— 5TTfT— «TS?T
(f^T in the Veda ) perf. fiFcKTT p. fat ff^'a'^r fat.
con. ^f^viz Ao. . Ifcftqit des. tfom ben. Pass.—
Oau.— f ?vnif?r— % pre. ^ p.p.
6 P. f=s^nTr^to wish; ?^j^ pre. fifa perf. q^r or
DHA'TUKOSHA. 9
p. fut. <rf^rf?T fut. ^fawrg; con. ^ffa Aor. qftf^ft des.
mrrs ben. Pass.— ^jjppre. %fo aor. Oau.
P*e. ^fa?a;— <T aor. ^TT or qfiqrqi ger. f ^ p. p.
4 P. ?|ffV to go; fwnff pre. tn^cTT p. fut. ffaf p. p.
ger. Other forms like those of the above.
9 P- *nnffcft to repeat; f OTTTW pre. 5%^ &c. like those
of 6.
^ 1 P. JTrft to go; 2 P. to go, to pervade &c.; ^^-inar pre.
3nn-^^IT-W^-3TT^r perf. ^r P. fat. ifMjfff fat. "C^T^
con. ^ifr^ aor.
f 4 A. to go; J^ pre. awH** Perf- ^?T fat. $s Aor.
f iff^ des. Oau— 3TFref?H* pw.
1 A. g^ to look at, to see, f^^ pre. ^rt-^:-^j^— 3TRT
perf. t%aT p. fat. i%«ry^ fafct $%**?[ con. 1%^ ben.
^TO aor. Cau— j^rfff-^ pre. ^i^r^-?r a6r. |f%%^
des. Pass— l^ilr pre. ^r% aor. |r%?T P. P. lr%?^T ger
$%3H inf.
1 A. irfff^^Tlt: to go, to censure; f3T?t pre.
^T^ aor. f fira p. p.
x 2 A. ^r to praise; %$ pre. j^Ni-^^i^— an^T perf;
p. fut. ff€«nf ^t. ^WTrf con. ^f|-^ aor. %faftz ben.
Pass— |gir?r pre. Cau— ^qffl-% pre. ^j%^-?f aor.
ger. if%-gn inf. t%?r P. P.
1 p. q£f to go, to shake; |<m pre. f Rcf P- p-
2 A. iirfr to go &c.; |w pre. i?r^» perf. Ifrm p. fat
fut. ^frsim con. ^KC aor. Jfalte ben. Cau— f ^jfir-^ pre»
aor. f R?f p. p.
* According to some, the forms of the p. fut. and the
gerund in ?^T of this root are qpnn and ITJ^T only.
10 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
10 U. ^ to mov«, to throw; fT^flr— * pre. <qUi»K or
Perf. ^ftT<r-?T aor. fTWcTF P. fat.
-<T con. f<rf3-£nM^te Ben. ffc?T P. P-
1 P. farfanc to envy. £s$fir pre.
perf. £f£q-fTT p. fut. i?W*Tra fut. <tf«ro3 con.
aor. fajfirrrer or tfamft dea. Oau— oft
— aor.
2 A q*1^ to command, to ml*, to posses*; fj- pre.
rar p. xut.
^ aor- P»99-— f 9Tai pre. $T§r aor. Cau—
-^ Pre- ^rfsfT^T^-«T Aor. f %ff p. r.
1 A. iTT?ff?f?T^r^ to RO, to kill, to see; j^ pre. f^sriK
perf. ffqrai P fit- tfirarir f«t. ^rfq^?T con. ^fte aor.
ff^lhr ben. ff^f p. p.
1 A ^^TUT^^O aim at; £5% pre. fsNrfc-amr-W perf.
tfc?TT p. fut. (ffvq^r fut. qrfinr?r con. q-ff« aor. f f
des. frHre beQ. Cau— f^ffT-^ pre.
Tx 1. P. fc^r to sprinkle, to wet- g^m pre.
3fffr perf. afirar P. fut. ^%^f?r fut. afrfitfsiKr con.
aor. Tgqrqt ben. ^f^f^T^fS des. ^%<f p. p.
1 P. to go, to move; *fi^f^ pro. 5?f^^ imperf. g^t^ perf.
p. fut. ^r%«?rf?r fut. 3?r%«r3 con. arr^ir^ aor.
es. TCTT^ ben. Pass— y^q^ pre. Cau.
or ^%?f p. p. ( also written as
pre. &c. )
* P. *nrer<r to collect together; T^crfff pre. T^t^" perf.
P. fat. offf%«TO fat. «frf%«ni con« ^«TOC ben.
or ^r p. p.
DHA'TUKOSHA.
11
1 P.
perf.
to -finish, to abandon;
fat. 3rn%T^aor
aor
pre.
&c.
. Can—
p. p.
753T ft P- 3r^r*T to abandon, to avoid;
3U*r-*>i^r porf. g-ftsnrr p- fut.
con. sfr^fh^ «or. Cau—
p. p
Pre»
fut.
1, ft P. to glean; g^j'f'ff pre.
Aor. 37%^l%T
p. p.
perf.
. Oau.—
1 P. dMmri to strike, to destroy; »ff3f5f pre ^y perf.
«T P- f»t *flwfif f*t. «rtf r3 Aor. TTJff p. P-
pre.
7 P. cF^^ to wet, to moisten;
perf. grf?^r P- fat. 3T%«Tf^ fut.
aor. ^F^ftTf^ ^es. ^^ or ^gr P. P
&'c.
con.
or ^Tij 6 P. 55^1 to fill with, to cover over; 3-vrfefr or
pre. Tsfr* or g-^n^^^rr perf. aftfawmr or
Hin?^ or *?f*>?rc* aor, ^f^ff or ^(PR<T p. p.
1 A.
to measure, to play; gff pre. '
perf. 3rf?«TT P- fut. 3rn£«ri* fnt. Hir^ con.
aor. 3?f£f^?T des Can.— ^gm-ff pre. 'i?h^-?T aor.
^ 1 P.
to kill; g^ffif p'e. 3r3rrf^ri?rT perf. 3rfSr?TT p.
con. sfaf 3 »or.
1 P. ^f> to burn, to puni§h.,3TT<rfr pre.^TnT^
-^S5 perf. ofn^Tf P- fut. 3?tfr«TrlT fut.
ben. B^iaor. ^rf^r-7<%<T P P.
1 P. a?§^ to hurt, to kill, to destroy; oft?ft pre. ^fif pert
Aor- ^ftff or «fti?Jf p. p.
12 SANSKRIT GBAHMAB.
_ 10 U. qftsm to lessen, grrofflT-?* pre. g^f^lffir fat.
-<T Aor. grft;fro*ffiT-% des.
gj* 1 A. arg^tf!^ to weave, to sew; &qft pre. grqT^*
arre pert grfqwr p. fit. grftsqlt fat. 3?jrfirwr<r con.
aor. grf^fte ben. Oau— 37^^%% pw. g?<r P- fir
1, 10 U. ^JJrrorwr: to strengthen, to live;
aor.
2 U. srrsgrr^ to cover, to hide; gruffer, 37ourar or
pre. 3T^rr^--5Tf or g^^% perf. grafftfTT or 3J^fr%c!T p. fat.
or
or ^ro aor
ben. Oau— 3rafan<t-% Pre- aft'^W^-cf aor. Pass.
P'e. g^fg^T perf. gfrotf^ aor. grfjrfsRTT, groift%c!T or
p. fat- g>o?fWte, g»crri%^te or gnjjf^fre ben.
or
1 A, to sport, to play; gj^^ pre. ( same as ^F, )
P, 5*fr?n^ to be diseased or disordered^grtfer P'e.
^RR &e. perf. afWfa; aor. grfq«f p, p.
1 A. (sometimes P.) itcT$ to conjecture, to reason, to infer;
pre. 3?f5?r imperf. 4»£M& &c. perf. ^^5TT P- fnt. ^ff »
fut. 3?ft3*reT con. 3?nt^ aor. grT>Fr^ ben. Pass— gj^
pre. 3^f| aor. Oau— gr5qi%-ai pre. ^Bf^-rT aor.
p. p. grftf^T ger:
1 P. merqnoi'ft; to go, to get; ^^rfar pre. \
Per •
p* °
DHA/TUKOSHA.. 13
fat. ^IK^tT con. g^fac ben. Pass.— irffa pre.
fat. airrf^fte-^fre ben. Cau.— 31^-% pre. 3n<FT^-ff aor.
arftfof^ des. sir?T ( also ^or debt ) p.p. 3R^f Ger.
6 P. ?fgcfl- to praise, to shine; %^|d pre. 3TR^ perf. aireff^
aor. g|rf%rT p.p.
P. *mn^l H d*J gnrerq^ to become hard, to fail in
faculties, to go- SR^^rff pre. 3O^^ Imperf. 3TR^ perf.
^f^rr p. fut. sjtf^gr«rnT*ut. 3^^^ Aor. Can.
Pre. 3ni%^a;-g[ aor. %Ml^MfS des. ^tf^5?T P P-
1 A. *TT?ft*ITsrnfcT<n^$ to go, to acquire; 3nfo pre.
perf. arfsTrfT p. fat. ^fSl^^ f»t. arrfSfarT con. arfsf^ aor.
3llSff^^ des. arf&fre ben. Pass.— ^r&j* pre. 3rri3r aor.
Cau.— 3T*TI%-^ pre. mifdafd^ aor. SR-fsf^ p.p.
8 U. to go; ^nnn^-^t^.3wfl^-3f|^pre. 3TRof,
p. fat. Blotter, 3rrf3iE-»Cr# Aor. 3n%|OTW^ des.
mrt ^r to cenaure, to be compassionate;
pre. sfctftaNrH? &c. or srnrS perf ^ttflffrflr or
p. fut. sirfirnrwT^, ^rfii^riir fut. ^taVRrTi^-^tf'ng: ben.
or Crater aor.
p. f^ to prosper, to please- ^wiff pre. 3HTO perf
, P. fat. arr^Ta *°r- «Tf%ivfrf^, f?«^ft des. s^ p. p.
5 P. to increase, to prosper; ^-^11% pre. 3Tl^ aor. ( For
the remaining forme see the root ^pJ^4 P. )
, ^WK* 6 P- to kill* *&*$<, &*ft Pre. Wffc
&c. perf.
6 P. approach, to injure- ^qf% pre. STTsrJ perf.
fut. arfttq-lTl fat. ;smTc5; aor. sj^ p.p.
*This is not in the Dhatupatha but it is given in the
Sutra « 3E?|fpT^ "
E. 8. G. 37
14 SANSKRIT GBA.MMAR.
9 P. to go; to move. s^OTTIFT p*e. ^flo-^l^R &o. p if.
or 3T?KTT P. fat. Hf^qift or arfpaTRT fat. Hlf^ aor.
1 A. sfnff to shine, P. ^R^ to shake; <T3T%— ft pro.
imperi. ir^rregj-^r^ perl. irRrrar P. fut. frf^si
•^r^q-ff^con. ^nre,-^*^ aor. irf^m PP.
1 A. «rTOrar to annoy, to resist; ir^ pre. iff^ pp.
1 A. £^[jr to grow, to prosper; ir^ pre.
perf . <rRrffT p. fat. ^rfvr^ fat. ^fa«i?r con. ^f^r aor.
<rr^Rr?% des. irRrfi^ Ben. Pass.— iry^ pre.^ aor. Oau.—
cnwm-%. ^f^-^T Aor. irfof p.p.
1 A. to go; ipf^ pre.
1 P. ^•oiRyiTWr: to be dry, to adorn, to be sufficient;
pre. aftm f wrc -g^r-^mr perf. ^r%?n p. fat.
fat. afrftr
Can.— aifcrei%-% pre.
^ 10 u- ^?Srtft to throw up; aTRytrg-gf^-^ pre. ^Tcyf^ff p.p.
at"'.
to wish to be proud; ^T pre. ^,% parf.
P. fut. ^^sq% fat. 3T^fi«?Tff con. sr^f^ir aor.
P. f^T to laugh; s?<3fer pre. ^^TW perf. cpfaffr p. fat.
f it. 3Tf?ftr*r? con. gr^r-s^n aor.
* with OT = ?f . t With sr =
DHA'TUKOSHA. 15
1 A. to go; qfofr pre. ^£fc perf. fcfttTT p. fut.
aor. $r%ff p.p.
1 P. ;3> to sound - g?^ft pre. ^^T^T perf. ^r%?fr p. fut.
^Rr^rnt fut. 5T^f^wT?r, con. ^Tfj-OT-^r^ aor-
1 A. *e\i^ to bind ; ^ft pre. ^fr% perf. 3n%^r p. fat.
con. 35B'«T aor.
or q^g^l P. to go . ^^ffr or ^m pre. ^^RT or ^fe perf.
^TffcTTor qlfecTrp- fut. ^f?«qTff or ^fe^i^ fat.
or 3^^%«^g con. 3T«?T or 3&€tft aor.
P. g»-tt«Tw% to live in difficulty ; ^?r P'«. »|j^frf fut.
Aor
P. 10 U. atre^TM to remember with regret; 4>-
fT P«re. ^r^r, gfenNqnT-^? &e- perf- ^<TT or
p. fnt. ^fysufar, ^1^5inff-?r fnt.
con 3* - aor
q^ig; 1 A. *>ff% to be anxious ( with g^ ); 5^3^ pre. -rjcfc^ perf.
P. fut. 3TOTS"? aor.
^ to be proud; ^-ftf-fl pre. ^qfrg cr ^^3% perf.
aor.
10 U. H^% ( *r^ l%g^r^TOT ) T^for ^r to separate the chaff,
to protect j $>4gr*TTW — K pre. 4j?nTF?i^H[~xiiiifj &c. perf. ^^~-
1 P. 3UrK7f to cry in distress ; ^ori% pre. =^^rir perf.
p. fut, qpf^t^rffT fut. 3i3)lui&tr<^ con,
Aor
10 U. ntficg^ to wink ; ^rorqf«-?r pre.
Aor.
1 TJ. JTrgrfw^nftt to rub, to scratch ; ?Ff qrff -^ pre.
Aor. rrr, ^gftffB' ben.
16 SANSKRIT QBAHHAB.
1 A. sgrerqrn to praise, to boast; q??^ pre.
p. fut. ^/rfercq-ft fnt. $rer|?$rs*i?r con. chf3a«ft£ ben.
l?sre aor. n^f&PKT des. tfrf&m p.p.
U. cnrcHfWq- to tell; s&snfii-^ Pro. groqi^TC, &c. Perl.
P. frit. ^UHJ*<ff*T-% fut. 3T^Tf^T^-cT con.
1 A. %£& to grieve; ^& pre. xf^ perf. cn^cTT p.
aor. ^ffe ben.
1 P. a£ifiteT??cf*ri^5 to shine &o. ; ^fft pre. ^T^R perf.
P. f ut- 3«5sft^ aor-
denom. ) cfe^Rr pre.
1 A. ^TFcft to desire ; ^r«T^ pre. ^^^ or qewit^fr &c.
perl, cpTfTT^frT or spTTOT p. fat. ^wRl^far or $rf&*qfr fut.
or 3T^fH«Trf con. CTtTTO^fe or cblH<(|? ben.
or a^^^^y aor. Pass. ^TRraf or ^»q% pre
.
aor. Cau.—eCTOTfiT-flr pre. ^fr^ p. p. «Kffirccrr-«f?RTr,
ftrw ger.
A. ^ar% to shake, to tremble; *q^ pre. ^rCT perf.
"
p. fut. ^TM^d fut. «T^if?^T?f con. ^rfiC" ben. arofqs aor.
Pass.— gjcgfr pre. Oau.— £q*n1Ht pre. 3r^JWT^-?T Aor.
f%»'ffM^ dee.
P. to go; q?HT% pre. ^(^^ perf. ^T^cir P. fat.
to pierce; *uuift-% pre. ^UNJ-q^K-^ perf.
aor.
10 U. ;§rf$i<vq' to slacken; effctqi^-^ pre. 3T^^sn9[—<T Aor.
1 A. ^T^^TR^T: to sound, to count; ^3% pre. ^r^ perf.
p. fut. ^f%c<q[^ fut. 3tcfo|<i0ui(| con. ^T^TT? ben.
aor. gpfOT P-P-
DHA'TUKOSHA. 17
10 U. naf *tem^ ** to 8°> *° c<>ant; SOTlS-fr pre.
perf. cj^facfr p. fat. fedft&Jjft-W fat.
fT COD. 3r3T*^-a aor. ftregftvfiKt dos. ^rfita pp.
«JiriS*-*r pre. fcl^MfrU &o. p«rf.
. 3<4l*gra;-?T Aor. fafrMmft-fr des. Pass.
Aor. ^n%ff p. p.
1 A. f^fft ^ft^r ^ to praise; ^ft pre. ^^ perf .
fut. ar^ftw con. 3TT aor
p. ^it to 80und» ^^rfir pre. mchsHd, 3T«T5na; Aor.
A. irifl3IHH<ft: to go, to punish; Cff P'e. ^^t
^f|r«TT P. fat. ar^fjrc aor.
1 P. -^oir to teat, to soratch. ^rr« pre. ^^r^ perf. ^wr P.
fat. *rft*rf?r fut. sr^f%5^ con. aretfis-srarrfrs aor.
f^tfT des. sjftf ( ^^ painful p. p. ).
1 P. to go; ^^ft pre. ^r^RT perf. OT%HT P. ^ -.
con. 3T2Fm'hi:,-^^ft3:aor. f%W?f%*ft des. Oau.
pre. 3r3ft^ET^-ff aor.
2 A. irffl^i^T^q'Y: to go, to destroy; ^ pre. 3ren%ff Aor.
( Also written qp^ . )
P. ^t^mif to desire, to wish; OT3TW P'e. ^^RT perf .
P. fut/rtf^rft fnt. mcfeifama con. 3r^f»ft^ aor.
ben. f%$tf%r?ffr des. ^f%ff P- P.
1, 4 A. qfrjft to shine; ^rjTff or ?^?q% pre.
P. iut. ^rfircirW fat. 3Tfe|f$tUJA con.
^?t de§. 3^?n?irar aor. Oau. OTsnrfSr-fr Pre
pre. cfdi^m p.p. ^T%^5TT, !^I^T ger.
1 A. ^s^f^rnrra to cough; cm^ pre.-^mN^ &c. perf.
P, AUC. ^rft^?t iut. 3reTT%«ra con. 3r^fr%«7 aor,
es. s»rftr^beD.Gan.-$re*riiT-ft oT^^RT-ff aor.
18 SANSKBIT GRIMM AH.
1 P. *h*T^ fl«MSH3r ^ to suspect, to cure;
. perf. T%fin?«nn p. fat. f%|%tcqt»q(d fat.
aor. Pass.-f^T%r^r% pre. Can.
s. ( Also A. f%T%?^% pre.
1 P. fx^rprt to desire, to live; %m?r P*e. f%%?f perf.
aor.
10 P. f^T% to dwell; %<rom pre.
aor.
1 P. 5^fWTl^t: to become white, to sport, i%^ri pre.
perf. %f§«TT P- fa*. %I%^T% fut. 3wfam<| COD.
P. «r?g% to bind; ^iffiJT% pre. f%¥hy peif. ^tf^fTT P.
aor, f%^Tlf^^m des.
1 A. ST*^ to sound; gp^ pre. ^3% peif. ^RfT p. int.
fot. 3T con. 3« aor
2 P. to sound; gpjfrm pre. ^?rw ( 5^ft^I, ^ito 2nd sing. >
perf. 9JfcTT p. fut. ^t^TTff fat. 3T^t«^ con. afT^t^ aor-
6 A ^r*^ ( 3TT?f^: ) to sound, to moan; 3^ pre. 3$% perf_
pTT P. fat. 3Tf7T aor. ^f^^ freq.
1 P. ?&* ?TK ^M^^H%y??fft<>a4-MHft^H^ 'ST to sound
loudly, to come in contact, to ba crooked &c.; ^n7f% pre.
P. fat. aFTi%^^ fut. 3r^t%«l^ con.
6 P. ^N^T ( $STft ) to contract; ^rffi pre. ^t^ (
2nd sing. ) perf. 3T^€r^ aor. T%f%VH des.
6 P. to curve, to bend; ^nr pre. 5^7 ( g$feq| 2nd sing. )
perf. ^f%ffr p. fat. ^T?«^T^ fat. S^fS^g- con.
pre. ^i%?r p. p.
DHA'TUKOSHA.
6. P. ^TOfta^'Wii: to sound, to support;
perf . gffm?u p. tut sreftur?^ aor. $f8r?T p. p.
1. p. jrnhrnt to be blunted. $u*f?r pre. ^u<f|^ aor.
10. U. qreSr to cover; $Udmd-fr pre. 3T^f!i^-?T Aor.
10. A. 3T-r$r<nfr to abuse; $rH<Jd pre. cpnqMcfe &c. perf.
fut. ^r^cT aor. r^Rr'frS' ben.
1. P. frHT^TTOr: to kill &c.; ^rfif pre. ^^pr perf.
con-
4 P. ^r^r to be angry; $t<iffr pre. ^5^T P«rf. qftftff p.
fut. ST^/^r^ con. gr^r^ aor.
dea. ^OTT^ ben. ^fta p.p. ^tftg^ Inf.
10 U. *nwwf Wr ^ to apeak, to ehine;
<rar?r Aor.
l A. ^VWT to play; $$* perf. ^^ perf. 3T^f^r Aor.
10 U. 1 P. ^nft to shine; f^TT^-%, $5H* P'e.
^rifr; ^^^r P6''. ^ftiNdi, ^RMT p. fut. at 5^
aor.
9 P. f^s9 to tear,to expel; foiTTnT pre. ^tw* perf .
p. fut ^Ftf^n^ fnt. 3?^^ aor.
des. Pass. ^sq% pre. 3RFn% Aor.
Aor.
4 P. ^rs^t to embrace, f^qrft pre 5?^ perf. <fe)ftm p.
fnt. ^tfwisq-i^ fut. ^^if^^d. con. f^t^ Ben. 3Tf^nj^ aor.
des. ftw, qFrt%r«rT ger.
10. U. l P. ^rnrnyt to speak; f^nnft-fr, ^m pre.
* With % this root is Wet; fwsrfaf, fro^t* 2sifig. perf.
int.
SANSKRIT GBAMMAB.
10 A. frwroi* to astonish. %&ft pre. $^M&, *c. perl,
6 A. 3^ to sound, to cry in distress: ^q% Pfe.
$f%?fr P. fat $f*«^ fnt. STfRrsqa con. sr^ffe aor.
0 U. sn% to sound; qprrA-afilt pre. *ft*rffr% fat.
arefoff Aor.
1 P. 3i^g-% ^T^ to make an inarticulate sound, to coo;
$tfrm pre. ^^gfr perf. ^fSmr p. fut. ^r9r«n% f ut. ar^fit^^
'cou. 3?^5ng[ aor. ^3*nc3" Ben. Pass. — ^qw P'e. 3T^j% aor.
pre. ^f§rc*T ger. ^i%?f p.p.
to be firm; ^5 pre. ^^y perf. ^fofr p. fat.
10 U. 3TT«n^ to speak, to converse:^jrqrf&-% ^
10 A. 4*NH to close; ^q|ir^ pre. 3T^^or?T Aor g^ORT p. p^
1 U. {tTKNli^ to jump, to frolic, ^|%-% pre. $f$j p.p.
1 P. oTT^oT to cover, ^^r pre. ^^y perf. $i%ffr P-s fat-
fT ». U. ^'fmrr^ to hurt, to kill; ^uftffr-^^r pre.
& 8 U. ^?dr to do; ^^-^?r pre. ^rerc-^ perf, *rf p.
f ut. 3T^T<«ir^-?rcon. 3T^nff^-^T^?r aor.
Ben. Pass.-|%a>r pre. arerft ( 3rd dual
P. fa
R*«nT con. Oau.-
des. ^?r p.p.
ger. ^g^ inf.
6 P. %^)r to cut, to divide; &rffo pre. ^&$ perf.
fat. q»f%*n% fut- ^^M^d. con. 3?^a7^ aor. TrVT Ben.
des. Oau.-q?*n?Mt pre.
l aor. Pa3s.-$*qft pre. at^iTr Aor. ^r p. p.
ger. tftft 31; Inf.
to surround; ^urt% pre} for perf. and other
iorms see tb« above root.
DHATUKOSHA. 21
4. P. ?m;ETar to become lean or thin ; &&ft pre.
-perl grfirsq-KT fat.
1 P. fcz&ft to draw, to pull, to plough; cfft pre.
perf. 9JST or TOTT p. f at. q^hff or a^nfer Int.
^T^con. areTSffa; or 3TBaK*frg; or sr^g; aor. fyffi dee.
Can.— ^rft% pre, 3^fT^T^-?f or ^^»^-<T aor. 5^ p.p
ffljr Ger. Pa99.—^«q% pre. 3T^rf% Aor.
6 P. A. H^jtH to make farrows, to plough;
^5$-^f»^ perf. 5ir^ or *ROT P- fat. ^^faf-% or
fat. Sff^^I^-tT > 3T^f^n^-?T con.
aor. U^n^'^ft^ ben. T%fRTf?r-?r ^es. w p.p
6 P. f%$r^ to pour ont, to scatter • faifa pre. ^»|< perf.
or ^ftfff p. f u«. gsf^rfir-^tl1^!^' fllt- 3^4?K*^et-«i«i»fl-
con. ar^T aor. tfirf ben. f^R^Rr des. Pa»8.—
p.p.
•«| 9 U. ffm^fic to injure, to kill } ^nm« or f?oft?r
perf. 3T$[fl<, 3T?FfT-fT-fT 3?^f* aor.
des.
10U.%5i5^rtoname,to glorify ;
^f perf. ^frftrffr p. *ut
con. afrr-^^TO; Ben. 3TTf|»d^-<T aor. Pass— ^ffe
p.p.
1 A. *rm%<f to be able or fit for. susq^ pre. -B|«H^ perf.
p. fnt. ^TBiTa', ^c^IW-1
aor. ^f^qqt^: Scstfte Den-
des. cpf^rr, ^?^r ger.
1 A. cfiwnr to shake ; %q^ pre. f%%^ perf. 3?%f^r aor.
1 P. ^-55% to shake ; %5J1% pre. SR%^ aor. %rg?r p.p.
1 P. sr^ to sound; ^mf% pre. ^r^jr perf. ^T?fr p.
int. 3^^r^i;con. 3T^T^tg[ aor. ^ppn^ Ben.
des. Pass.— -
22 SANSKRIT
1 P. 10 U. ffcnnn to kill; ^n%, a^nrfar-?t pre.
aor.
9 U. to sound; 7q*nrff-73?ff% P*e.
. A. 5T5% 3»^ ^ to make a creaking sound; ^3^% pre.
3<Hi$ Perf- ^irfifaT p fat- ^flfara fut. 3*^jf*re aor.
Can.— sEmft-iT pre. 3^3^-^ aor. ^^j5q^ des.
1 P. fr^Jt, 3Trgl% to civ, to weep, to call ; aF?fT% pre.
perf. ^fr?^fT p. fut. 5RT%*<im *
ben. 3T?F?fr^ «or. |%SRT^TI% dea, Oau,-^^r^m-fl pre.
Aor. Pass.— -gpRi?t, «inf^?cT P-P- (Also Atm.
aor.
10 U. ( gs»^ ) fiTrlHr to cry continually ; generally with
p*e. ^^iirm^r-ir^r &c. perf. ^^^f^crr P. fot.
^t. ^af^T-FT con. arecfcr-fr aor.
1 U. & 4 P. trr^R^ to walk, to step } ^7Rm, 8FT«Tl%,
pre. -dsfem-^gfw perf. ^•(Har-^^TT p. fut. ?Rm««
fut. gRgK-wc^q, 3iarcq?T con. ^»q-rgr^fl^ ben.
aor. i%arfw«TT%, T%3T^% des. Oau.— ^jrufir-fT
aor. Pass, g^int pre. ^j?cT p.p. 9FffWf^T 5ET?PSrT,
ger.
9 U. ffwrfrffm^to buy, to purchase; ^mn% or ajM^ pre.
f%aft^ f%i%^ Fe'f. l&cTr p. fut. a:^^-^ fut. afnrrg;,
ben. 3?^ftg:, 3?^ aor. f%a?t*ft-ft des. Pass.—
3Twn^ aor. afn; p.p. Oaus.— arnrom-%, ^T%a?T^ Aor.
l P. mmrra; to amuse oneself, to play; an^lff pre,
perl gfn%aT p. fut. afifir^iff fut. grafn%«r^ con.
ben. ari^f^i^ aor. T%^rT%7Iff des. Pass.—sp|?Rrff
aor. Gau.— ^T^rfff-ar? 3n%RT^ aor. 5fiffi«r p.p.
ger. ^TOp[ inf.
4 P. ^ to be angiy ; ^«rm pre. ^ahvr perf. fftraCT p. fut.
fat, gR^r^g^con. ffE?rr^benk 3^\r^aor. f^[ p.p.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 23
pre. 3f^tft aor. Oau.—
Aor. ^jfcVtffl des.
I. P. 3*nt% TT5* ^ to call, to cry, to lament; aft^rm pre.
^sfetel perf. gfrer P- fat-. ^m% fut. ajsIJt^a; con.
ben. BTr^Tcl aor. Pass.— fr^fT, HafhST aor. Can.
aor- 3^rm des. $7 p.p. wrT ger. ^!^ inf.
. A. OT% to ierve; %^ pre. f%^% perf. ^T%T P.
1. P tft^ to lament, to call; sfcm pre. ^tf perf.
P. fat. 31^1 aor-
4 A. l^^r to be confused: &fo pre. ^l^ perf. $ft«TT p.
fat gE aor.
10 U. 3!oiTTp^r^ *o whisper; ^T*rift-% pre.
p. fa — aor
1 & 4 P. T55Tifr to be fatigued or tired; f£mf?T & WiWlffif Pre
erf. ^mrTT P. fat. ^5^T«zrf?r fut. 4i0HI<l ben
aor. f^cRJm^flr des. cF7T??T PP.
4 P. 3ttf$r*r> to become wet; 7%
P. fat. j^wrfiir, tariff fu
aor. T%^T p.p. Pass.— 1%^, ST^ft aor
perf. T%^ffT P. fat. f^^cqRT-W fat. 3Tf[«^-fT con.
f. Pass.
4 A. ^qm% (rarely P.) to be afflicted, to suffer;
pre. i%r^^t perf. §n%?rr p. fut. sf^Ttsq^ fut. gR£f^T«*r<T con
ben. sr&fte aor. ftffcftl^, P»tf%^, des. Pass.
pre., 31^% aor. f|^r or i%ftm P.P-
P. feniq*l to torment, to distress^ f^%m?r P'e.
perf' £fsrar, j^r P. fat. ^r^m, *??^r fat. «
Ben. 3TfT, srf^T^ aor.
24 SANSKRIT GBAIDIAB.
des. fef^lrf or %5T p.p.
1 A sroisS to be timid, jf^ft P*e. f%fft% p^f. fffftm p.
fut. arffjfTO aor.
. A, srsqjEWi *rf^ to speak inarticulately;
perf. ^TrTF P. fat. &%*r?|- fut. fafefina des.
1 P. $H5qTfa3l*> to hum, to tinkle; UOTI^ pre. 'g^rnr perf.
P. ^ut. grfBr^i'^ fat. gnirfihuj^con. g)u<4ia^ ben.
aor. 9)fvTfl> P-P.
to boil, to digest; u^rfir pw. ^RCTOT perf.
P. fat. ebfa^fo fut. ^^T^Mjr^ con. i)%eno; Ben.
aor. P^i^^fa des.
1 A. cr^ to kill, ^nr^ pre- gjfitmfr fut. gr^I^TS Aor.
1 A. lift 51% ^r to move, to give; q&ft pre. ^iT perf .
STnren P- fat. ^^i%«: aor. ( Also 10 U. i. P. ) $f3nii%-£
^nlS P'e. $fcrf3W? ^iNini p. fut. 3T^^i*yH?T-?T, ^^i^ftd,
aor.
8 U. ft^nrf to hurt, to break, to kill? srutrfjr, ^«J^ P»o.
IW* 2nd sing. Impera. ^rror. ^if^r perf. ^rf8r?TT p.
rforori?Mf fut. 3T^fBi«n^-?T con. 9r^nfr^»
aor. Cau.— ^rnrrirfff-^ pre. (%^fanrm-?r des.
ger.
10 U. ^^nf ^ to send, te direct; $r<r?rft-% pre.
-^* &c. perf. $i<rrq!TT P. *ut. ^trf^rfir-^ fut.
con.— a^^nrgc-JT aor. ?%^nfir^f%-% des.
1 A. *$$[ to allow, to suffer, grwff pre. ^fT^ pe^
p. fut. srfftwm, ^r% fut, 3TSTm<STg;-3 con.
ben. 3I$Tfire, *X$tt aor. f%^finW, f^f^l^d des. Oau-
^ra;-fr aor. $nnr, ^fi[?f p-p.
ger. Pass^— ^«r^ 3^rr% aor.
DHA'ITTKOSH!. 25
P. *cf% to endure; $rr«rf& pre. ^m perl $rm?TT or
P- fot. srft«<*fi*, stwffr fut. STSTWWJ^ uiqtai^ con.
ben. arrir aor. fTftnTlff, f%$Nrft des.
to flow- to diatil» ST*ft pre. ^frr? perf. grfarr p.
. ^rf?«q-|1r fnt. 3^1^- con. ^Twrft^ aor. ft^ffiffi dee.
P- P.
10 U. ^ft^r^wflt to wash, to cleanse, &c.; STT3^rfilr% pre.
P. fu
Ben.
P. P- Sometimea 1 P. also.
Aor. f%n% dei.
1 P. ^ to decay; ^rf?r pre. ^ r%9mr perf. ^ff p. Int.
5. P. fismm to destroy, | ^qT^T fat. w^sir^
%tntftr pre. con. qfrqTT ben. »^ft
?• aor. T%rffrTff del. Pan-
OTnn<8-?t,
6 P. ftmwfrto dwell; Aor.i%jT,
pre. J ger. Pas
to kill. r^oftiS or ^oftft, f?r^ or ^^ pre.
or r%l%ot perf. £iofeir p. fat. ^forsq^-ff fut.
-?r con. 3T^^ or 3TfiTO-3rf|rff aor.
des.
P. ^ot to throw, to cast; {$wft pre. f%^q perf. |rHT p.
fut. ^c^rfff fut. swc^ con. g?^c^ aor. %cqrr^ ben,
Pass -rcqr^-3ri^ aor. Oau -<nrf5r-%, 3TT%r%-?T aor.
U. to throw; fifm%-% pre. rMfa, ftr^ perf. |nrr p.
e^r^r-% fat. 3^c^, &{#* aor. T%f§raf3r-ft des.
1, 4. P. fWjfr to spit5 ^ft, ^N?n% pre. R^ perf.
fat. aifra Aor. f%ftfatir lf& des.
4 A. ft^rwt to killj tfiifif pre. f%%> perf. 3i$fe Aor. Oau «
Aor.
26 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
8fr 9 P t,> kill; tffarrfir pre. f%$rnrperf. ^<n. p. fut. £arfft fat.
con. mn ben. 3Thf? aor-
1. P. 3*5q%i$T3£ to Bound inarticulately; gfrsrfJr P*e.
perf . $?fh%(tt p. fat. smsfanefr fat. arsfrrstaig: con.
ben. arsftefc* aor. ftsnRftffr des. Cau. $fnPri?Mr, «CT%-
A. *% to be intoxicated., ^^ pre. faffr perf.
P. fut. ^frf^q^ fat. 3T$frf3re aor. cau.-afr^rf^-% pre.
$fWT-«T aor. T^r^TRr^ff des.
1 P. f%^% to spitj $ffWT% pre. f^fhr perf. ^fifiRTr P.
3T$foftff aor.
2 P. 515^ to cough; rfn?T l>re. ^TTeT l>erf. wf^TT p. fat.
ft^g; con. arsnCr^aor. ajirr^ben.
rsrrfir aor
inf
7 U. *mot to strike against, to pound; grnrffT, ^J%. pre.
5^r» 39ft Perf- wfif p. fat. ^ffcf?n%^ fat. ^n?^. g^te
ben. 3Tg?fT, arefaftv , 3?^<T aor. 5^?5Er%-% des. gwir p.p.
4 P. £$$rnri to be hungry; ^WM pre. ^ff\-r perf. ^ff^r P.
fat. gfiTTOnft fat. s^HcWri; con. ^mg; Ben. ar^ra; aor.
Cau.— $fi\|qra%. 3T^^ra;-tT aor. ^fvRT P-P. ^ftf^T> gl^T
ger. Pass.-^t^ff pre. 3T$frft aor.
1 A ff^5J% to be agitated, to disturb; $ffiTn pre. ^JH I>erf.
p. fat. gftfteqftr fat. 3T^ntWT?T con. M"ff*nffe Ben.
Aor. Pass.-v^ff 3f«TIM[ aor.
4. & 9 p. to tremble; gpRrfr & H^rf^ P^e. ^RTfH perf.
P. fat. sfrf^ilf fat. 3?^ftf*i^T5 con. gprar^ Ben.
4 ) ar^r^frg: ( 6 ) aor. gs^, ^m?T p.p.
6 P. ft^fcft to scratob or draw lines; ^fSf pre. ^^ perf.
P. fat. aisffafa aor,
DHA'IUKOSHA. 27
1. P. STO to waste; smnrpre. ^frperf. ^ftff p. fat.
fat. 3TSm*q; con. grafts aor. Can -^Wm— ?
Aor. fesmrra des. ^m p.p.
2 P. ^fsT to sharpen; ^nVf^ pre. ^qfOTW perf. ^orfirtTT P.
fat. $omr«*jf?t ^t. 3*$oift«g^ con. ar^OTT^ aor.
des. $gj<T p.p.
A. ft\j?f% to shake; ^HTff pre. ^$*W Perf-
aor. f%^RTm«^ ties. ^RTI^?f P.p.
1 U. 4 P. ^m^R^ft: to be wet, to release;
^|- perf. ^T%ffT P.
con. aifi^g;, 3T^^t%ei 3rf^«i^ aor«
or !£ p.p.
1 U. 4 P. *>5?TRr^nfr: to be unctuous, to release.,
^, %?rm pre. f%^, f%f^r^perf.^f%?rr P.
fut. ^%f^^— ffcon. 4 P. 3*f$*^
aor. r%l$^TI%-^; T%^%ia-^, des. f^uor or ff p.p.
to tremble; $tcJi^ P^e. f%^gr perf. ^TOTr P. fat.
<>r. Cau.— $%$jqrrt-?r> 3Tl%^$y^— cf aor.
des.
P. 5 ^ to laugh; ^FwfSr P^. ^I3^^ perf. ^rfqp^Tf p. fat.
fut. ac aor - Ben
9 P. -^srr^gr to be born or produced again; ^T=jf^ pre.
^TWT^r perf. ^-f^ffT P. fut. jjrfacqfif fut. 3?^^g[ or
aor. T%c^r^Rf<T des.
1 P. ( T-rjrft: ) R-^ to churn, to agitate-, ^3Tf?r pre.
p.p.
1 P. *rf?l%^q- to limp, to walk lame; ^ymw P'e.
perf. ^i3TcTr P. fut ^T^cq-ja fut. ^f^q'ri; con.
Aor. ^?n^ Ben. ^r%(T P- P.
GBAMMAE.
I P. +HJHN1H to desire, to wish, to search;
perf . ^feTT p. iut ^f|«n% fut. aTOTf£*T5 con
Aor.
10 U. ?fo^r to coyer; *3f*riS— % pre.
A. Srqpr to break, to disturb- tf&t pre. «^r p.p.
10 U. also. ^-D^qfH— of pre. 3RT^U^^-ff Aor.
des.
1 P. ^qrf^rr>^n|^ to be steady, to kill, to eat; ^^% pre;
fut. 3!^«T^ con. gf^fh^
pre. 3^m% aor. Oan-
Aor. RmQ^(& des.
1 U. 3TW^Rft to dig; ^fjJr-% pre. ^3T5r or m£ perf.
p. int. jarf^rrar— ^ fot. a^f^^^— ^ con. au^du
aor. ^f?ng ^wra ^M*T^ Ben. Pass.—
des. OT3 p.p. ^Tf^r or ^rf5?^T ger. ( with
1 P. im> to go; ^^fif pre. *r&fo perf.
1 P. ^Icq^q^t: to worship, to pain, to be uneasy;
pre. ^ronsr perf. w?rarr p. fut. ^n^rrar fut. gnafaMTfr con
^^rmq; Aor. ^fim p.p.
1 P. **&& *° bitej^ft pre. ^^ P«f. ^*TT p.
P.P.
1 P. ^ to be proud, to go, to move; ^?r pre.
perf. arorifat aor. ^ff&t p.p.
IP. ?3PR, ^g^r xf to move, to gather; ^cJia1 pre.
perf. ?^%?fr p. **t. ^l%^lfe int. 3WTcfl^aor. ^y?r p.p.
9 P. ^nn^rfftr to come forth, to purify; «Mlft pre.
Another reading for
DHA'TUKOSHA.
29
pre. ^JT* perf,
COD. HTT < aor
we i P. ffrmn* to kill;
If H[ 1 P. *$r«fr to eat, to devour;
p. fat. OTT^crfff fat.
Ben. tml^n p.p.
6 P. <rfhm* <rffrft ^ to strike, to afflict- 1%^ pre.
perf. $WT p. fat. ^qfa fat. s^fr^ con. 3d^ffi?j; aot.
p.p.
4 & 7 A. \*r to be depressed, to suffer pain or misery;
•or. rtr p.p.
6 P. ?T^ to glean-
1 P. 4^^l^<u| to steal-, £r3Tft pre, ^pr P-P.
6 P. ^^ to cutj ^^ pre. 3^fi^ aor.
1 A. afNTTTOC to sport; ^ pre.
1 P ^ to shake, to move to and f ro;
fat
P. fat.
aor. Can.— ^ynfir pre.
pre.
oon.
des.
to sport;
p. *. a
1 A. §q% to serve; ^r^
Ao-. Oau— ^^rfir— ft.
IP. $5^ to strike &c;
1 P. irfiisrfii^T^ to limp;
ft$%perf
pre.
pre.
&c. perf.
fat.
fat
or.
Aor.
* P. JWI^ to relate, to tell, ^jgrfft pre.
3rd pi. Imperf. ?sqTcT p.p. This is conjugated in
Oonju. tenses only, According to the Nyasakara this is
nied with the prep.
the
not
1 P. ^r^ n$ ^ to roar, to be drunk;
irfiwT p. fat. »nnf!^, aronfis Aor
H. B. a. 38,
pro.
perf.
30 SANSKRIT GRAM&AB.
1 P. to sound in a particular way; ipRTft t>re. CTmff perf.
irfsiaT p. fut. 3T*rafttt aor.
1 P. *RR to distil, to drawj inrtaf pre. snai" perf.
P. fut. 3T*r|><T Aor.
10 U. STTOTFT to count «mimerate: ironrffHf pre.
-^ifr &c. pert. irorfgcTr p. fa*. TOTKtariir— ^ fat.
?rcon. anfmoiri:— ?r, ^snroi^— n aor.
BeD. f
Pass. — IT.TJW ( *iunm<i according to some) pre.
1 P. SJnfTOT ^lf% to speak; IT^I^ pre. snTT^ perf. irf^HT p.
fut. nf^CTia' ^ °t. 3TTf%W^ COD. £W^ll<Ht, 3TTnfi^ aor. iRTT^
ben. (Snrf^Tfr ^es. Cau. — ^ll^U'Tf— % pre. 3nft*T$^— W »or.
Pass.— »nre P'e. snrrRf aor. fF%«rrger.»Ti%5irinf
10 A. 3^^r to injure, to ask, to go} ir^snr^ pre.
Aor.
1 . P. irrfr to go5 if'SSfffr pre. snTTO per/. ip^T P- '«t
fut. 8fnRr«^con. wmr^ aor. irwrn* Ben. f>Mfl(im des.
Pass.— 11*0%, snnuT aor. C«n.~
im p.p. »Tf^T ger.
1 P. ^r^ to thunder, to romr; ?nif7r pre. 5HT5T perf.
p. fut. *THT*qrcr fat 3Tir!%«7^ con. snrifnt aor- I^T^ Ben.
10 U. to roar} ngieT—ff Pfe. STaTiT^— ^1 Aor.
1 P. ^ to §ocnd, to roar^ jnfrd pre. arirf perf.
fut. an*rfn* Aor.
10 U. to sound. Tf{<rui--% pre. ir^l^^^Tf-^R &c. perf.
10 U. ^mr^f^TT^f to wish^ir^r^r—^ pre. ^I
&c. perf. arar^— % Aor.
^ 1 P. to go; irir% pre. 3T1TW perf. ifftfu p. fut. iriS^qYR p. ml.
1 P. 3$ to be proud; irW?T pre. snrf perf. nfir?fT p. fnt.
" Aor.
DHA'TUKOSHI. 31
£ 10 A. ur% to be proud; iTTCft pre. anmwff Aor. ftrrrefr
£ 1 A. ^cfTm to blame; *r$% pre. *riif perf. irffflT p. fnt.
fut. 3yj|f|njH con. snrffe aor. jrfi<fte Ben. Can.—
pro 3nrrr£?i-?r Aor.
10 U. 1. P. frfa?^ to censure, to reproach;
TfPr pre. ir£*ra*rr— ^SK &c. mif perf. njj7jdr, irftwr P.
fat. ir^f^r-%; irs^m fat. 3!3fir-ff 3HT aor.
1 P. *$m ^n% ^ to eat, to drop, to fall down; irjyfir pre.
perf. «rfOTT p. fnt. Jifa^qfff ^Q*. 3Ti?%«^ con.
tor. fsnrfOTf^ des. Paaa.-ir?^ pre.
10 A. ^TO to ponr out, to filter; 'irrgw?t pre.
perf. 3fafnr5T?f Aor. irferf p-P.
1 A. \TTCT to be bold ( generally with * ); ir^rar pre.
perf. 3TX|Q«I^ Aor. fffirf^Wir clea.
10 a. nr<fvT to hunt for, to seek; qftwT
&c. perf. 4|^^[f^dl P- f«t. *r%Tfq^Td — ff fnt.
aor. ^ftw p.p. «nT^fir?fT ger.
4T|[ 10U. iTf^r to be thick, to enter deepy into; ir£*7m— ?r pre.
T£qTS^»rT— ^ &c. perf. 9T3mf ^—tT Aor.
*TT i A. to go? irm pre. 3T»t perf. irmr p. fut. irr^it fat.
con.' 3TTTW aor. iTT«rer Ben, nrm&fr ^es. Can.
pre. anaffnqqN— ff aor. Pass.— irr^rfT pre. 3T«T?f^ aor.
«Tf 3 P. to praise; fsTOTm pre. ( Vedic. )
1 A. snffOTfS^qrhf?^^ to stand, to seek, to compose;
pre. 5TOT^ perf. irn'V'en P, fnt. JTTfvrc^ fut. 3mmr? aor.
mTvitrhr Ben. Pass.— irrarft pre. 3firtf^ aor. Oqrf^wt des..
1 A. fcrfHM to 4ive into, to bathe, i^ir pre. sntTf perf.
or »n?r p. fut. nrf^r?T; ^r^ fat.
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
Con. wrrife *nn* aor. nrfWte* *r$ft« Ben.
Can.— »rr5*rf?T-% pre. *nft»T5^— ff aor. ins, irrf^r p.p.
trftffT, or Tf$T g«r. *III?$H 9 ITfJ in'.
1 A: 3f3T% 5T^ *nft ^T to sound indistinctly, to go;
pre. ^g% perf. ^tWT p. fat. ift^ fat. «nftigiT COD.
aor. ifrfhf ben. ^glRKt des. Oau.— m^mS-
Aor.
6 P. 5^*^nf to void by stooij OTft pw. ^Tra perf.
p. fat. QvcrA1 fat. 3fgeq7j£ con. H^ft^ aor. ij3f p.p.
1. P. &S& to hum, to buzz, ifftffo 9^^ pre.
perf. ajgsfta^y H^fh^ Aor.
6 P. ^t to protect; 55% p*«. syifre" ( ^^f^vj 2nd pers.
sing. ) perf. STOTfa Aor.
lOU.miWWtto invite; to advise, to multiply; gonrr%—?r
p*e. yuH4|o^4CTT — ^%r P«''. SUffiRir P. fa*. ^Ulf^^lf^l fut.
3K&u|(i)iq<l con. ^v^U|^ — ?T aor. ^pjnrftqTff-a' des.
10 U. ihB^ to cover, jto enclose^ 9037^--% pre. ar^^u^-rr
Aor. ^ueP>^ffi— ^ des. Also 1 P. &izfo pre. ^jrry perf.
5ftW p.p. ( Generally with 177 ).
I A. nfhflirn^ to play, to sport; ift^T pw. %&% perf
3T»ftl^ Aor. frf^fr p.p.
1 A. to sport; ?ft^ pre. 355^P«rf. iftAVT P» «". ( the same-
4 P. qftStesT to cover; 5Wft pre. ^ifh^ perf.
9 P. ^% to be angry, &snfa pre. ( See the above root. )
1 P. TSrfr to defend, to protect, to conceal; irtqwA per.
. perf. iftqrfirar, *fh?ar, «fhrr P. fat.
fut. ariuqnTT^, 3nr>^ aor.
es. Oau.
P«M.— »frn^^ QCQf^ pre. Ji^TlfficT, OT P-P-
or,
DHA'TUKOSHA. 83
1 A. f%?*Tqn* to censure, ^ygi^rfr pre. ^MH)*«fe P«rf . OT'
P- fat/ ^Juf^^J/fc fat. 3T5>jf^r£ *or- ^ll^U^te Hen.
-3jsc^rft pre.
4 P. nn$<g% to be confnsed or disturbed; gcxrft pre.
perf. iftf^TT p. fut. anjq^ aor. Oau.-^rqfS-^ pre.
ff «or. ^Qf^ffir, 4^IMV?d dee. gf^f p. p.
lOU. itrnrrat^T^ ^ to speak, to shine; ifrq*fiH* pre.
-^ parf . ift^Tf^nr p. fat. H^TT^-ff aor.
des. iftftw p.p.
6 P. jpSf to string together., 3^,
P®1"'. *ftftHlr <iP*cfr p. fat. sJHftlTltil, ST^^fh^ aor.
Qffofifl p.p. <|f%cHI ger.
( $srf^ ) 6 A. ^m^ to make an effort; &ft pre. ^jsfr perf.
3i?m p. fut. sff^Tr fat. »rofr*m con. ^Rfte Ben. *rofi*
aor. Pass.— 5^ pre. «mtft aor. Cau.-ifftirft— ft pra.
H^JT^-tT aor. sraf^WT des. oft p. p. gj^p; inf.
1 A. a^^nrt to play; ij^ pre. !J$*r«r f«t. 8?n^ aor.
10 U. Q$^ to dwell; irf^fir-% per. HJni^»U-^» &o.
fat. 3Tic-fT aor.
1 U. £wt to cover, to keep secret; Iftm-ff pre. ^ijf OF
or ift?T p. fat. ?rj5«gtH-^, ^t^rtS-^ fat.
V) arws-a- or ***&
or 5 ben. ^prf%% des. Pass
aor. an -Uf*rfo-%, 8T^f^-?T aer. ny p.p.
4 A.ffcnrt'fr: to kill, to go; n^ pre. ^r^ perf. qJf^T P.
fat. Hijjfo aor. ^i^^ des. qor p.p.
10 A. ^TR% to make an effort; ij^jfrT pro. 3T^9^ aor.
10 U. fjifr to praise; nfrrft-fr P'e. M^H^-ff Aor.
1 P. %g% to sprinkle, to wet; ircfiii pre. gnjrf perf. iR|f p.
fat. «nrnfi Aor,
34 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
1 P. sr^ to sound, to roar- imf^ pre. gnrsf perf.
Aor. Cau.-ir&n?r% pre. STSTHZST^-tT, 3nfT&T;!T Aor. Also
pre. 3Tqsf perf. ar^^fa; Aor.
4 P. arfa^teRr** to covet, to desire; ^wra pre. snrS P«ri.
p. fat. STS^ aor. Ca
-rT Aor. i%J?fSrtfiT des. q^[ p.p.
1 A. g^ot to take, to seize; »Tf^ pre. 5fq^ perf.
p. fut. »rfi«r3r, ^?r fut. ariTf|«q>?i-Mv^m con.
Ben. STnf, 3T^Tff aor. f^finq% mf de^ Cau.-
10 A jrfnfr to 8wzt, ^jf g^r pre.
6 P. R^ot to swallow, to devour, to emit; fittffr or
pre. 5THTT or STSTlcJ' pe^f . JlRrTT, iffar or qf§RTT, TcfffTT p.
fut. iri?**na-, irfi^fff or *i%«iffir, *T3fT«an%, fut. arwicr °r
. Orm?TfS or nTTT%^ des. Cau.
r. Pass -ift^^ pre. grmfr or gmT% aor.
p.p.
9 P. ^TS^ to call out, to speak; ^rrf^ pre. ^»TTT perf.
iftm P. fut. nfrarfSr, ^T^rft fat. griTI^ aor.
^ pre. snTriT^-tT aor.
P. p.
1 A. %g^ to serve; it^ pre. fSr*t% perf. s?TH^? Aor.
1 A. grfo^raii* to ieek; «t^% pre. f%ift perf. %ft^% fut.
9|9ti^e- Aor.irsorp. p.
IP. fia^" to sing, to speak in singing manner- trrirft pre.
m P. *nt. «nwfS *nt. ^Hl^dL c<>n. ^»n^ aor.
n. finTT^T% des. Pass.— «fafrf pre. 3mrt^ aor. Cau.
p^e. «f5fhnrg:-?r aor. ifar p. p. ift^r ( with a
preposition iprrtr..) ger.
1 A. ^?n% to assemble; ifttf% pre. ^iftt perf. 3i*ftfS^ Aor-
DHA'TUKOSHA. 35
1 A. *|Q^ to be crooKea; tf*j^ pre. 5fa»$| perf. tffw&WT p.
fat. irfw^q% fat. 3nrf?sre aor. fsrarforo* des.
pre. 3nrp*T aor. »rf?sr?r p. p.
9 P *r;^3 to put together, to fasten; ff«^TTff pro.
2nd sing. Impera. snr^T pe*f. vfSqCT P. fat,
aor. freqrg; ben. Pass-ffwrfr pre 3Tflf^ aor.
pre. 3T*T«r?^-<T aor. i$nTi?*rTto des. jrfsRT
p. p. irRr?5rr, irf^Tcgr ger.
10 U. ^?vi^, 3?3?T ^T to string together, to compose;
&c. perf. u?«jf^fTr P. fat.
aor. ipvqrrri, TOrw^ ben. T%ir?srf^m-?r
Also 1 P. !r re 3^c Aor
1 A. 3|^% to swallow- ircKlr pre. 3f3T% psrf. ammT p. fat.
nn%^ aor. qT%^f?^ ben. Can.-qr^nTl% ooly pre.
Aor. nTSTTftfTaf des. i^r p. p. ufiff^r or q^*T ger.
10 U. jr^oT to take; !TnEr<U«-ar pre. 3UWTCra[— «T Aor.
9 U. *m%ft to take hold of, to seize; ^fipfiir, q^r pre.
2nd sing. Impera. ^Tin?, 5f^ perf. jrft?!T P. f ut.
— rt fQt. 8?? Hq aor. l TWm ben.
— % des. Pass. -^RT% pre. armft aor.
pre. arr%!nr^-?r aor. qtf<r p. p. jrfr^inf
10 U. MTfl^t to invite; UTH^m— ^ Pre.
1 P. ^?nr^t JTifl- ^ to rob, to go; ifrenr P'e. %pfc* perf.
P. fat. STlft^i:, Wt^aor. g^n^ ben.
fd des. Oau. ^ft^iHff— ^ pre. H^^^~?T Aor.
i A. sf^- to take- i<t*& pre. *&&$[ perf. ^f^MJft fat.
fT^jfTO Aor. J5J^r p.p.
1 A. ^TT^R to take; j$yf ff pre. ^155^ perf. BT^fi^ Aor.
1. P. KT<jqa<ui iHV ^ to steal, to 30; i<»l*lf8 pre.
perf. T^tf%«f T p. fat. ?^F P. P. This root is the same as
1 P. to go; J^yeHd pre. ^^^^ perf. T^fom p. fat.
36 SANSKRIT GBAMMAE.
1 A. ^r*fr $u<3 ^r to be poor, to tremble; igfrq^ pre.
per*. Tnjj \| MJ n fut. 34Jm(uv Aor.
perf. T^foarfr fat. srr&ft'ff Aor.
l p. ¥%ST^ ( IJ&ft vrqjsro: ) to be weary; JaNfft pre.
ST*^ perf. TSJtflT P. fut. TgreTUT *nt. aT'cCT^ con. ^111^.
Ben. a?Ton€rgt aor- fsfitsrera des. Pass.-ToynT^ pw,
aor. Can.— T^yqrrfff-^r, »5JTqiTr%-^ pre. T5JR p. p.
1 P. $*% to laugh, to mortify; ^nn^ pre. snrnr perf.
snrr^^ Aor.
! A 5%^niR to be busy with, to happen; 'ER^r P*e.
perf. ^fScTT p. fut. 'En^uw f«t. '?rf^^ ben. a^rf^r ax>r.
, WCTT P. fut
con. a^rrfir, ^rr
aor. Rf^RT^r des.
10 U. ^FfRt ^^rm ^ to speak, to collect together;
, &c. perf. BT5fhr^-cT Aor.
es.
I A. ^55>r to shake, to touch; *rf^ pre. 5nsf| perf. '?r?IT p.
P.P.
10 U ^gy^r to stir, to disturb; ^j^r% pre. 8T3nr§^r Aor.
i«i^gi*rTiS-?t des.
10 ^ >iTmTOt to speak; quaqft-fr pre. n>HMUdd.-<T Aor. Also
1 P. V^ P'e. ar^r^ Aor.
1 P. to eat; qqfy pre. ar^ra: Imperf . gnrTST aor. 'q^TT P- f ut.
^f^% fut. grtrc^i^ con. af^r^aor. ^T?«Tff des. ^c p.p.
1 A. irjut to take; f^ro^r pre. ^n%ot perf. ari%ioiire Aor.
*This is a defective root and is very often used for the
root ara\ It is conjugated in the Perf . as an optional substi-
tute for a^.
DHA'TUKOOEA. 37
1 A. 3T*^ to sonnd , ^ffr pro. 355* perl, gnfte Aor.
de8- S?T p.p.
1 A. <marfl^ to return, to exchange ; ftefr pre. ^y^r per*.
3»1^, arotfro aor. iftfl p- p.
6 P. tfihrut ( fCTT? ) to strike against; gsfft pre. ^fte
( 3}gQ^ 2nd sing. ) perf. 3^<Jld Aor.
6 P. to strike ; ^Q pre. ( the same as above ).
6 P. %nTTfr to roll, to turn ronudj ^orf^ pre. ^vjlm perf.
sftfadi p. fat. ar^itnftg; Aor. gfdnr p.p.
1 A. HJTOir to roll, to whirl; ^Rt pre. ^ot perf. gnfH^
aor.
A. jjfot to take, to receive; 50-01^ pre. ^^uot pert
p. fut. atgfoor? aor- sPuicf P. P-
6 P. ^iwnf^TS^ft; to be frightful, to sound ; gffif pre.
perl ^tft«TT P- fut. ^rft«^ fat. H^tR^T^, «<»•
1 P. 3ffi^rs;^ ( ^r^ f f^r^r ) to sound, to declare ;
Perf- ^tf^TT P. fat. mfWH% ^at 5^H^ ben.
r- Oau.— ^^nt% pre. sr^g^ aor.
des. ^f^, ^rfor or 53- p.p. •
1 A. OTreTOHCT to be bright-, ^tq% pre. g^r perf
10 U. rar$TS3% to proclaim aloud • 3TT + f^=?f^^rnr^.to cry
continuously; ^^rfir-^r pre. ^tqqio-TlcfciT-'TO &o- perf.
P. fat. \rtsflui Q% ^t. 3i^T5-?T aor. gftr-fe p.p.
4 A. f|^H^^|^i|: to kill, to become old ; ^ pre.
Aor.
6 U. OTof to move to and fro, to whirl ; ^Trn^T, ^jS^1 pre.
, ^qJ Perf. ^fSrfiT p. fat. ^f$t*rft-fr fat.
38 SANSKBIT GRAMMAE.
con. aj^oSfe aor. ^nffcqQ-fr dee. Pass.— ^info pre.
aor. Cau.— 'gjforft-% pre. ar^of^-ff aor. ^ffar P- P-
IP. %*g% & 10 U. TOratJj- ^T^T ^T to sprinkle, to cover;
^m% & *TITm%% pre. 3TW, WITS^^TT &c. perf.
*rr*fonT P. fut. snTRTg;, *3fT^-fT aor. *a, ^nftrf p.p.
8 u- frHT to shine, to burn . gofrf^, wTl% &
pre. 3!^rf, 5j^T perf. ^fSlfTF p. fut. V||oiim^% fut.
anrffe, *Fgl, aor. fsrqrfoi^-^ des. ^ p.p. *jfor?*T, ^T ger.
1 P. ?t^ ^T^lt^ to rub, to crush, to rival, ^Hm P'e.
3re$ perf. ^nffor p. fut. ^rfts^ fut. srqffergt con.
aor. ^JT^ ben. firqfW^ des. Pass.— TOT^ pre.
& ^T ger.
IP. «i?^Nnn^r to smell., nwm pre. ^nTr perf. srrar p. fut.
ben. fsrsrreffT des. Paes.— jrr^ pw. ami? aor. Cau.—
pre. 3Ti5TSr<T5:cT, aTf3TflnT?T ,-?T aor. ^m, Win? P-P.
1 A ^T^[ to sound ; ?r^ pre. ^% peri far p. fut.
aor. #iifte ben. des.
1 A. ^ xrfJmi^ ^r to be satisfied, to resist; ^^ pre
^TT%?TT P. fut. ^fomd fut. 3T^%r Aor. Oau
pre. 3^fr^T^-?f aor. f^T||»1H des. ^tfca p.p.
1 P. 3*ft to be satisfied} ^fir pre. ^p^r^ perf
lut. 3?xi^ , BT^T^ aor. Oau-— ^^rr^-% pre. M^
dee. Pasa.— ^rf^ pre. 3T^f%, 3i'3rT% Aor.
2 U- 3fnft to shine, to b« prosperous; ^^|Rff-^ pre.
rifi «c. perf. ^-^rftifTT P. fut. ^rmwrlr fut.
con. 3T^r^T^fr^. 3R"^rf%?r aor. Can. —
DHA'TUKOSHA. 89
aor. ^reiflm p.p.
ger. ^^Ti%5^ inf.
2 A. ^f^m *Ti% to speak, to tell, to say, ^ pre.
^$r per* • <$*jifli; TOTRT p. fat.
aor. *$<n<J|<l, ipfrlRi) Jjin
ben. Can. — ^7nroiff-?t, ^TFW/S-ff pre.
aor. f^TT^fir% des.
1 P. to go; to jump; ^^ pre. ^Tf^r pert ^%^m p. fut
aR^o^fi^ aor. ^f?3|<r P-P-
,l P. gqfcwqt: to break, to cover-, ^reifT pre.
p. fnt. 3T3r^ aor. Can.— ^rjq"ft-?
U. it^ to kill, to injure, to break; ^r^m% pre.
, &c. per/. H<*Rl^> P- fat. sjdfqmft-% fat.
con. aTrfNE^-?T aor. ^ft?r p.p.
P. ^ i\£ ^ to give; sgrom P'«. 'g^TOT perf. ^-ftmT p.
ut. STErtfTrT, HWfofVfi: aor. Oau.— ^ropTm-n', firaflr^ffir dea.
1 A. to be angry; ^737* pre. *?**% perf ^rfuTBT P. fat.
^^fo^r aor. Also P. V^fff P". M^a/i^ aor.
10 U. Tju^qi^-^ pre. ara^u^-ff Aor. Ri^u^^ffi-^ dec.
1 U. q-r^^ to ask; ^r^ft-ft pre. ^r^fTf-^ perf .
fut. 3T^T 3T^I? Aor.
P- ff^rm to kill, ^Rm pre. ^5TR perf. ^Mccrffi fat.
Aor,
10 u- «H5T^!Wt: to believe, to itfike;
-?T Aor.
l P. 3TT^ ^f A ^ to be glad, to shine., ^r^fit pre.
perf. ^i^m P. fat. 3lfefH^ aor. fe-jPaqfa de«,
'"•This root is defective in the Non-con jngational tenses.
When it means 'to leave7 it does not substitute
aor.
40 SANSKRIT OKAMKAB.
I- P. sri«r*rt to console; ^ref^ pre. ^m pe*f. <*PhTT p. fat.
% pre. f%r^fq<TT% des.
' 0 U. ilRtfecrift to grind; ^refif-% pre. Trmis^pC-^rifc pe»f .
'^nfifcrc p. fit. aH-JNMfl-fr aor.
r 10 U. to go, to move; ^Fqm%-% pre. f|
perf. ^tqfttrr P. fat.
W 1 P. 3*5% to eat ( with an to drink ); ^rwf% pre.
•p. ^l*c9T or
1 A. to go- ^q^f pre. pperf ^^rrTT P-
aor.
1 p. jj^ to walk ( with air to perferm )• ^nrr% PTe.
perf. 5^rfttTT P. fat. ^rR^rft fat. gRxrR^g; COD.— -^g; Ben.
r. M^Rqfif des. Pass.— ^i% P*e. ad^rft aor.
p.
10 ^, ^f5T^ to doubt; ( with ft, 8T^> to remove a douU );
^TT*n?T-% pre. ay-Jf^^-ff *<>r.
1 P. trfbUquiUJmri^S, to abuse, to discuss; ^f^ pre.
perf. ^f%«TT P. fat. ^f%^^TI% fat. g^rf%«q^ con.
aor. ^f%<f p.p.
10 U. 3TOT*R to read over, to study; 'sHpj'fr-iT pre.
&c. perf. ^RfrTr P. fat. 3^^^-^ aor.
1 P. 3T^T & 10 U. ^^rot to eat,, to chew; ^^rt &
pre. ^5rf & ^TToTT-^ perf. ^tTF &
1 P. ^q^| to stir, to shake; ^^ pre. ^5n*ra perf.
fut. 3Fsrrafa aor. Oau.— ^^n%-% ( s*TOTTlr% ) pre
aor. ^fgpfr p.p.
6. P. Rtf^ to sport, to frolio; ^r^(% pre. ( see above for
the other forms ).
DH'ATUKOSHA. 41
*r 10 U. j|ri> to foster; ^55^%-^ pre. ^TOTfo^STT^ &c.
peif. 3?WTO5^ Aor.
to eat. ^Ti%-?T pre. ^^^, %% perf
1 P. & 10 U. <rfw?^r to .a wicked; ^51* & ^f*rf?r-?r pre.
Aor.
U. SHTFTJimsTOT: to worship, to ob3eive; ^rqft-^ pre.
perf. ^rpRn p. f ut. ^rRi«irf?r% fut.
aor. Oau-^rq<jfff% pre. ^^^rzr^-^ aor.
dee.
f% 5 U. «^j% to heap up, to collect; f%;frpr, T%g% pre.
f^nr, f%?fq-, l%^> perf. %cTT p. ^. ^«ir1
con. 3T%rir^, 3T%?r aor. ^fnHfT , %<fte ben
Pas?.-^ta« pre. 3i^rft aor. r%rT p. p. f%?^T ger.
ft- 10 U. to gather, ^snrffHt, ^Rm%-% P'e.
P. & 10 U. 7^5^ to send out;
&c. perf. %^T, %2f«I?TT p. fnt.
aor.
P. frqn^r to notice, to understand; %frf^ pre. f%%ar p«rf.
p. fut. %ra«ifr f^t. ^%rW^ra: con.
ben. f%rf%faTfff, f%r%f?ni
pre. 3T^tf%fl^-?T aor. Pass. — 1%?^ pre. 3t%fif aor.
P. P. f%Rf*rr & ^T%r^T ger.
f%?r 10 A. ^HicTJf to perceive, to be anxious; %flir« pre.
f^RTcT Aor. f^^Tf^T^ ^es.
10 U. f%^^ur 3T^fT^^ ^ to paint &c.; i%5Qfff-^ pre.
3T^rf%^g;-cT Aor. f%r%*fft«ruHt de?.
1. P. tbink, (%cTft pre. f%{%T perf. f%ftar p. <u
P. p.
to tbink, to consider. Rram'S-^ pre.
42 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR,
-^5F, &c. pert. f%fffinTr p. fut.
& !%<ffirif? ben. Pass-f^Tff pre. Hf^for aor. f%ft?T P. P.
6 P. q-^jf to put on clothes, to dres?. r%£fft pre
perf. %RRTT P. fut. 3T%gfh* aor.
I P. srfiretr to become loose; f%grra pre. f^TST perf.
%%?rr p. f ut. arfTr§fra; aor. f%r%er P. p.
10 U. l P. 3TTirfar to suff ar; «€r^of^-?r, ^nFrlr pre.
P.
1 A. qp?^;r to boast, sfwr pre. f%^fr% p»rf.
1 U. aTr^rTO^fnff: to take, to cover; ^r*f?r-jfr pre.
% parf. ^ffirrTF p. fut. 3T^r^f^ & af^rfif? aor.
10 U. HHTRTT 3fr?fir xf to speak, to shine;
1 P. STfW^ to bathe; ^qf?l pre. ^^T perf.
fut. atfh Aor.
6 P. ^r ( f arf% ) to cat; ^ft pre. ^f* perf. rcfT p
fut.
6F. **m (f?rf^) to conceal; ^-f^ pre. ^t* perf.
^fjTffT p. fut. 3^ jr^ »or.
10 U. 1 P. ^"^ to cutj ^gjirft^, ^(Idld pre.
Aor.
10 U. ^%r^> to direct, ta tnrow; ^r^nff-fT pre.
c. parf- ^r^ftffr P. fa*. %l$fimfft-ft fat.
con. a*^5<-<r aor. ^f^iWlr-ar de8 ^rf^cT p. p.
1 P. *^r*TT «Tar to move slow^s ^tqf?f pre. ^iw perf.
P. fat. M^w?j aor. .^.f^nTi des.
1 P. 9qp9ff<Tnt to kiss; 5^f?r pre. ^^^^ psrf. ^fHWf p.
fut. H^f l?xaor. xr^^fgr dee. ^^?T p. p.
DHAVUKOSHA. 43
^*^ 10 U. fttfFTTH to kill ; ^f^rra% pre.
perf . ^«rre<rr p- fat. 3*33*^ a°r- ^fo* p. p.
^ 10 U. ^^ to steal or rob, to take- ^Rgf?r-?T pre.
^R-^ff, &c. perf. ^ff*%IT p. fut. ^rrEr«qT*HT fat.
aor. ^RrraL, ^tTmT^ ben. ^xrma'Tnt-Jt des. Paas.
g^rf* aor. ^tf*<T p. p. ^TTTOcSTT ger.
5?5 10 U. fr^'B^T to raise . ^r^^-% pre.
%£ 4 A. tfr to burn ; *gfe pre. ^r perf. sr^ffe Aor. ^ p. p,
U. "^TOT, ^C^M'H to reduce to powder, to contract;
&c. psrf. ^uif^frr p. fut.
fat. 3Tfpfrq^^-?T «ou. a^pijifo--^ aor. «^roirT p. p.
1 P. <n> to drink, to suck ; ^rrff pre. ^^5 perf ^<Tr p.
fat, 3Tffr^ aor. 'g^r^ri^ des. *n p. p.
6 P. fjmir^qr^.* to hurt, to kill, to connect .;
perf. s^rftfTf p. f«t. 5?^^firT aor.
10 U. ^2fn% to kindle; ^rnf?r-% pre. ^rqirr^^^rT-^flF &c.
perf. ^ftdl p. fat. ST^STT^-rT, 3F^r<fej-rT aor. Also 1 P.
^qfa pre. SR'lffr aor.
^l P. ^y?r to move, to go ; %^r% pre. f%^« perf. %f&aT
p. fut. 3T%WT^ aor.
1 A. %CT^t to stir, to make efforts 5 %CT pre. f%%f? perf.
p. fat. %fe*r% fut. 3?%r%^ aor. %[%fr? Ben. f%%-
des. Cau.-%?q-rff pre. 3TfV%^[, 8?^%?^ Aor. Pass.-
. %ffe<T p. p.
1 A inft- to go, to drop down ; ^q-^r pre.
p. fut «qT^ fut. 3^lt£ aor. x7Cfr? ben.
»^^frrdes. xjcTp. p.
1 P. arrir^r to flow, to drop down; ^fi?fi% pre.
perf. ^fn%rfr P. fat. «niW<VRT fat. H^g?!^, ST5?fi?T?^ aor.
ben. Cau-wrffm%% pre. H^«5^-?T aor.
, f«r«ftf^rfir des. ^5?^, ^ftmer P. p.
44 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
1 U. 8TT^n^?r to cover ; ^[<t% pre. ^^|$, ^xgr^ perf „
p. fut. «?^^Tct., 3re»i<£iq;, sr^Qvi aor. M^-
-?T des. TO p. p. Pass, g^, par. s^Slf^ aor. Oau.-
10 U. to conceal j ^r^11%-^ pre. OT^TTSxr^-^fr, &c. perf.
p. *ut. 3Ti%5^g--?T Aor.
P.
1 P. 3T^% to eat ; &t\% pre. ^^m perf. ^ffldl p. fut.
iMJItfta aor. ^T^?T p. P. yfftf^ll, ^r*ri(| ger.
to vomit; ^na-% pre. ^iTr5xr^r^-^^ perf.
%^^-?f aor. T%^^f^T[^%des. ^f|^ p.p.
7 U. %vgfi^?ot to cut, to mow ; f&tft & f^% pro. f%x^f,
perf. ^rVT P. fut. %r^rf^-^ fut. aidHqfrcT con.
Ben. 3rf^^^? Sf^d'^'h^ & 3TT%^T aor»
% des. )%^ p. p.
10 U. M3{% to bore; f^OTn*% pre. aTf^rr%{f c^-cT Aor.
to put; j^ pre.
p. ut.
P. 5pr$ to touch. |prf?r pre. ^x^T perf . ^ftrr P: fut.
fat. 3»5>con. ^Tttfi aor.
6 P. ^r^ ( f ?lf? ) to intermix, to cut ; grflr pre.
perf. ^f?«^ ^t. 3^f£?Tat Aor- ^!S^^ de*.
I P. & 10 U. $£rft to kindle; ^$^, rf%-?t pre.
P
con
7 U. ^KS^raft: to shine, to play, to vomit;
fut.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 45
aor. t*j|<, ttf*U? &
ben.
10 U. Stfta*of to divide, to cut; $*qm-?* pre.
arf^d^-cf Aor.
4 P. ^^ to out; ^rffr pre. ^^T perf. 3TcTT P. fat,
fat. 3^ffK*7^ con. 3^53T^, 3T5*n-tffc* aor. fH^mf^ des.
fir?T P- P. ^Tf5TT> fe^rr ger. Paas.-^n* pre: ^^|(^ aor.
P. ^TTfH?T^t: to eat, to consume, to laugh, 5TT%iS
»T3W^ 3T3T^ff^, imperf. 3nr$T perf. oTWITT p. fat.
fat. 3nr%^?i; con. an^fr^ aor. 3T$qr^ ben. CaD.
pre. anmsT^ aor. i3nn%^f% ^es. ^%ff p. p.
1 P. 3% to fight., 5T*Tnr> snsir'S pre. ^nrnr> sfinff p«rf.
fat.
1 P. ^rfit to clot, to become twisted; 5T?i% pre.
3ffl<TT p. fat. 3T^f^> BT^TRfr^. aor.
The same as above.
4 A. 3H5«n% to be born- 5Tm% pre. 5T^t perf. Tn^ffT p. fat.
fat. 3T^f^r«nr con, anr^-ann^ aor. 3ff5^ ben.
f^qirT des. Pass.— 3T«m or 5TnTrT pre. gra^ Aor. Oau.-
pre. 3T5fT5R^ aor. fHMI^^ des. ^mr, tfsT^r, srf^rT
ger. 5TT?f P. P-
1 P. WtBWf ^Tl% IH5T& ^ to mutter; 5TTft pre. sfnTTT perf.
grftrfT p. fat. sTftwror fat. ^^ffmd. con. 3^1^, tnrrfr*
«or. gr^TT^ben. f5T3Ti^TI« des. Pass.— sre^ pre. arorft aor.
Oau^-5rnwrj?r-^ pre. adrfjsf^-ff aor. ^n^ p. p.
1 A. iH^rfirTT^ to yawnj 5W?f pre. 3T3T»^ perf. 3TT«WT p.
fat. (Snrfnre aor. 3T^^ ben. f§nri**rot d«
^rf% pre. a?3T3T*H^ aor. Pa89.-<3T»^, aR[3n»«T aor.
1 P. 8?^ to eat; 3THI^ pre. 5nT!»T perf. snftm p. fat.
ifhr aor- «n?!i p. p-
H. S. G. 39
BANSKBIT GBAMMAR.
1 P. 10 U. ;rrcft to destroy; Sfwrfo, 5T»inn%-% pro.
&c. perf. arsTwfjg;, anr^nrg; Aor.
1 P.- ^TlrR to be sharp. gr$rf% pro. 3HTT^ra[ Aor.
10 U. amndr to cover, gfT5nrfS% pre. mil^g^ Aor.
P. bOTfcWJ srrfe1 to murmur, to prattle; sreror pre.
perf. *rf5<raT p. fut. gfrf^n^ fat. irarfiqani COD
aor. f*rai?q<n% des. Paes.-^ar% pre. 3T3f^T aor
1 P. ff^nrr to hurt, to kill; 3T^f5f pre. 5nrr* perf. srf^fir P.
fut.
4 P. jfteTdr to set free- srernt pre. 5nrrfT perf. 3TT%cfT P.
aor. 5T^f p. p.
10 u. i P. frnrf ar^r ^r to hurt
pre.
&c. srerrcr perf. ^r^f^cTT, STT^IIT p.
aor
des.
10 U. 1 P. ?$r&T jfr^ot ^T to protect; to release;
3fam pre. ^^nf^-rf, 3T3TOT5 Aor.
2 P. f^ffT^TQ' to awake; 3ff«rf?T pre. snTTTTC-TT &
perf. STTHfTfTT P. fit. snw^fff fat.
aor. ^rr»T?Tr^ ben. f^gnirt^Tfit de*. Pass.—
pre. 3T4TTirTft aor. C*u.-3nnnrni-ifr pre. 5mTK?T p. p.
1 P. 3T^r 3riw> ^ to conquer; swfif pre. ftm* perf.
p. fat. 5H«?n% fat. g?^T^ con. 3T^?r^ aor. ?fhn^
des. Can.— 3Tmffr-% P*e. 3f3fr3Tq^-cf aor.
^3Tfa freq. t%pr p. p. fir?^T ger. %^int
P. sfmi^r to please; fs&wfo pre. ^rnr^perf. snft^fta; Aor.
i P. 10 U. vnrnrt to speak-, M^M, ^nvirft pre.
&c. perf. fsii^ir, fSF^ftcTT P- fn
aor.
* It is Atmanepadi wLen preceded by% the prepositions
DHA'IUKOSHA. 47
1 P. ir$r5t to eat; irm% pre. ftnm perf. a^rfr* Aor.
p.p.
P. to kill; ftrftomTir pre. ( Vedic ).
1 P. *N% $*^ <% to sprinkle, to serve; ^fR pre.
perf. irfau p. fat. ^«irr^ fat. 3T^fa; aor. 3*nvTrT,
ger.
1 P. srr*rtJK$r to live; gffakf pre. fsrsn* perf. sftroTT p. fut.
int. 3nTTT9Pnjcr COD. 3nfhffa[ aor. Pass.-^frsir^ pre.
aor. Oau.-^fr^^-^ pre. zftfifti ger. sfff^jn inf.
p.p.
6 P- ( fCTft ) V^T> to tie up or bind; ^ft pre.
6 P. inft to go; ^37% pre. 3Tfff#T?x; Aor.
1 A. *rm^ to shine; ^r<tfr pre. ^Tf^WT^ fut. ^T^fn%^ Aor.
6 A. sFrfn%^5rfV: to like, to enjoy; ^q?f pre. ^% per
p. fut. 3nfff%£ aor. Pasa.-^^a- pre. arenft aor.
irfS-?r P'e. af^^MT aor. ^fnTOT, ^^fr??T des. ^y* p.p.
1 P. & 10 U. qR?T*ar ^RrT^ot ^ to think, to examine, to be
satisfied; sfrrof & ^nmm-^ pre. ^5TT^ & ^TT^irna^TT-^iff
perf. ^frfcr, ^r^f^rTT P- fwt. 3r*T<ftcr & 3r^^-?l aor.
-W des. ^ p. p.
4 A. fJhrreq'rfT^r. to kill, to grow old, ^tf* pre.
perf. 3T^|R^ aor.
1 P. fifaret to kill. *£tft pre. 3r3JTfa[ Aor.
1 A. JTTSrftrfRr, to yawu; gjwi^r pre. 3nj^T perf. ^f»^mr p.
fut. nfriwer fut. 3T3fr*«re aor. Rnrf*«i^ff des. *£i*w p. p.
^3T 4, P. ^frfTsTr to grow old. sfroft pre. ^inT perf . 5TKfft or 3Tff-
^ p. fut. 3TK*QrriT, 3Tfr^rf?r, fut. ^^H«U^ , anrfrni^ con.
. Cau. — STOrfcrft pre. Pasfl.-gfrqft pre, ^ftof p. P
48 SANSKBIT GBAIOCAB.
gj I & 9 P. to wear out, g^ffr- sromfft, pre. gnff* perf .
p. fat. anrKhj- aor. Cau.-3rre*rra% pre.
10 U. to grow old; 3TTTm<H* pro
perf. STRfifrfT p. fat 3T^TT^-rT aor. iQMKftqfa-fr des.
1 A. to go; 5R7T pre. fsrift perf. ;£r?<fT p fat. ar^ft? aor.
1 A. snr£r jiRft ^r to try, to go; ^ pre. faSffr perf.
p. fut. 3|iHf7 aor.
1 P. ^ to decay; srnrfir pre. 3nft pe?f. grnn p. fat.
aor. «|<4ld, ben. fn^H^ft des.
10 U. ^rrar 5m% ^ to know, to cause to know, to see, to
please; ^rmft-ft P*e. 5n*TC9CTr-^r&, &c. perf. ^rtrfafr p»
fnt. 5rri5«q^r% fat. 3f5Trft«rs-?T c°n- 3rfif^r«r^f aor.
-^ dee. Pass.-srfq^ pre. gr^, gn^nft aor. ^reff,
p. p.
9 U. 3TTOta% to know; 3TRnS, STTsflfr pre. gf^ft, 5rfr perf.
^rnrr p- ftit. ^rrf^rfft-w ^a
aor. 5fnrr^, ^n^» ^mfm ben.
^rft-% & ^nnn'S-if (in the sense of ' to gratify, "to slay or to
cause to see, ) pre. 3inqTT^ ?T aor. Pass.-^rnnf pre.
•or. ^nsn inf. ^TTRrr ger. STRT p.p.
10 U. froftr to direct; 5rnrinS% pre.
p fat. 3n<rfo«Qui-?T fat. Pass— ^rrcq^. ^n^ p.p
9 P. ^5Rr to become old; t%m% pre, nr^ perf.
p. fut. ggTWTff fat. 3THHW5 con. ai^nfft^ aor. sffiTRt ben.
aor.
pre. gfrr p.p. 5ft?fT ger.
33 1 A. to go; vpr^ pre. ^53% perf. ^ff^T p. fat. 3^?tfc aor.
f^r 1 P. 3»tr 3?nm> ^ to conquer, to defeat. OTfir pre.
perf. ^f|T Pr fut. ari^fta aor.
7% 10 U. *ift*TJV to become ol<j; vnnmr-^ pre.
c. perf. ^
DHA'TUKOSHA. 49
1 P. ^- to be hot with fever or passion; s^HM pre.
perf. vRftm p. fat. v?9K«qT% |at. STy^r^-. aor. 0*u -
aor. fosTft^ft des. STO} p. p.
1 P. qfhft to bum, to glow, Scr^r* pre. 3T5^y perf.
P. fat. v?t«f&«lfd fat. 3^|<;fiq; aor. Oan.-^^^M-^T,
( with ST-iT??rgprf?t% ) pre. fsr?*/OTm des. vprf^rT p. P.
1 P. ^rrer to be collected or matted together;
Aor.
1 P. 3r^ to eat; ^mer pre. ^TRrTf P. fatn ^^m^ Aor.
1 P. fffaro-n* to kill; fr^ pre. 3TSTNT Pcrf- *n^T p. fat.
aor.
1 U. 3Tr^T^^fonTr: to take, to put on, to conceal;
pre. 5T5rnr, STSPT perf. ^rfqm p. fat.
aor.
4. 9. P. ^ff^RV to become old; sfrfR, ^OfTm pre.
perf. 5rff cTT, |m?TT p. fat. 3T5rrff^ Aor.
1 P. 10 U. to bind, to tie; ?g:f^, 3T|^f^-% pre
TT-1^ &o. perf. arf^fTT> 7g:T%fTT p. fat.
aor. 2-f|pf p. p.
1. P. IrS'S^r to be confused; j^fS pre. £^51 perf.
1 A. to go, to move; %^ff pre. fil%% perf. %T%rn P.
aor. Oan.^^rfir-% pre. 3Tri%^rr-fT aor.
1 0 U. ^r to throw, to send; %<nrnr-?r pre.
perf. %trft?TT p fat. an^T^-cT aor.
50 SANSKBIT GBAMMAB.
1 A. to go, to move; tf$% pre. &$% peif.
aqafiifc aor. T«fn%q^ des.
1. A. to go, £&$( pre. greif%S Aor.
10 A. 3m% to gather, to heap; ^TT^ft pre. <SIM«m>^* perf.
CTTfoar P. fut. 3T^te<Tar aor.
10 A. ^% to throw, to send;**^-^ pre.
, perf. s*^1%T p. f^t. s«n^n?r-% f ut. 3?^r?5^-cT Aor..
4 P. $ft to throw? |%c^i^ pre. T%%q perf . %ft?Tr p. f ut.
10 A. ^Kn?t to gather; %q^[ pre. %qq|o.^& perf. ^m^dl p.
fat. Hglfeqa aor.
1 A. fi^T^raT Tcfr to fly, to go; ^rcr pre. ft^j- perf.
p. fut. 5TRT«q^ fut. 3^Rr^ aor. »f^fr^ BOD. O
ar, ^#nnrqL-?T Aor. |%5rf^^ dee. ^{^RT, ?& (with ^5) p. p..
4 A. to fly, to goj ^i^r pre. f%^ perf. ^ffa p. p. For other
forms see 1 A.
10 u- to throw UP; <t»^l94lf pre. tt9WI9Vin^-^fr perf..
P. fit. 3?"5J^-<f aor.
1 A. JTcft to go, to approach; ^^ pre. ^r% perf.
p. fut. A%s^ fut. an^fJs apr.
•% pre. Sljiri^-rf aor. ^frfiqW des.
P.P.
1 P. TO^T fr5^ ^ to laugh, to bear-, agnlf pre. a?u^ perf.
«T%rTT P. f at. 3TH^, 3TrT[^ra[ aor. m%?T p. p.
1 P. ^g% ( f^^R WTot ^^Tq^ ^ ) to conceal, to pare-
perf. a%3T P- f«t. 3T?T^fi^ Aor.
DHA'IUKOSHA.
1 P. |I3$TO} to pare, to cut; ^ft, flfamiir pre. ( belongs
to 5th eonj. optionally in the Conj. Tenses ) jflfgr, P61*-
m%rTf P. fut. CUSTOM, <r$^fo fut. 3T<rsfr^ aor. ?rsnrft ben.
re p p. m%rTT, a^T ger.
1 P. ircYTfCT?* 3>*R ^ to go, to stumble, to shake;
pre. *a^ perf . *fif<n p. fut. arasftq; aor. jf^f p. p,
P. to go ;
aor. <TrE p. P. m^^r^T, cT^?^r ger.
P. ^cjvreH to contract, to shrink; a;n% pre. ffa^^r perf.
P- fQt- cf^^na1, rlf^«q7% fut;
name as
1 P. S^T^ to grow j ?RTm P'e. atTf? perf. «ff^T p. fat.
aor.
U. 3?TVT^ W?r^lt ^ to beat ; an^m-^ pre.
&c. perf. dlgpJHI P. fa
•aor. Pass.— HT^T^ pre. «fi%?T P. P.
A. aT^?f to beat; <&& pre. «?nrt perf. ?rft^ffT p. *«*.
aor.
8 U. f%flTK to spread, to go- ?Rtfiir,?fg% P'e. eT?TR,
JfRffT P. fat. ?fHsqifr% fut
»or. «T^TTr & HM'fr? ben
des. Pass.— a^z & aro?t pre. 3TfTlM aor. Cau.—
pre. 3mhT^-?T aor. rT?T P- P. fTHf^F, cfW go*.
IP. 10. U. «rtrq^TOT^: to believe, to subserve j
pre. 3C?Rr^, 3f«TT5fr^, HfflWT^-«f Aor.
A. ^^\3TRot to support, to govern; inxrik pre
perf. ^cw?5|?f Aor. mcf?srf^?t dee,
IP. ^Rtr^t to shine, to heat; ^fff pre. ffffn, per*.
62 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
p. frit. Mdictfffr aor. aujia; ben. fcamft des. Pass.— cfeqfc
pre. SfrTfT aor. Can. — cTmift-^ P*e. wfhTT^-rT aor. <nf P. P.
4 A. ^r«^ to rule, to be powerful ; fluff* pre. aft p«*f. 5IHT
p. fat. ffC^rTf fut. 3M<-{qd con. 3TrTff aor. rfc^r? ben. <re p. p.
10 U. to boat ; JTTTirfff-?* pro. mMMI^^R-^SR &c. perf.
4 P. qn^nif %^ ^ to be anxiou8, to be fatigued ;
pre. tffTW porf. rfmfTT P. fut. fffasirfn f Qt. 3I?Tm^^ con-
3TtT«g[ aor. frrr?r p. p. ff^f^T & rT^^T ger.
1 A. to go ?nflr P'e. a% perf . cTfoff T P. fit. arafire aor.
10 U. ftfT% to guess, to suppose,
«g->T, &c. perf . xkffctt p. fat. ?f
con. aTtftT^-rT aor. rfr%rT p. p cr
1 P. Ts&ffo to threaten, to menace ; a 3? fif pro. «?T^ p«'f.
p. f«it. rTf9ran?r fat. SKfflnarg; con. 3l<nTrfi; aor.
P. P.
10 A. ^r?^ to blame; ff^^ pre. ^ jm»^& perf.
p. fat. aKHCTff aor. tTm?r P. P.
IP. fr^nrt to kill, to hurt; ff^fff pro. <r?r£ perf. cT^
p. fut. aPKtffoaor.
10 U.snflSTTt to establish
4 P. aq^fr to be decreased ; rTFTm pre. 3^^^ Aor.
1 P &. 10 U. St&gror to decorate, to assume . ?ffn%
pre. cT^H, PTfnrni^K ^ pert rffffar, TOftffT P. f«t.
l A. KdHmmul: to spread, to protect;
perf. cnfttlT p. fat. armfTO, 3fim«T aor. Cau.
pre. 3TH?Tr«Tq:-cT aor.
DnA'TUKOSHA. 53
I A. to go; a^ pre. >r%cTT p. fut. vfafc? aor.
5 P. 3U*E^ *3r ^T to attack; fa-j^ffif "pre. fifiro perf,
P- ut. aur; aor.
5 P. to attack; ffrsfrifT pre. faffHT perf. kfartt p. fut. 3
aor.
5 P. fJ^TTin to hurt; i%^nff pro. f?fa^ pcrf.
1 A. OTnir ^ to endure, to suffer with courage;
pre. fafasrnpnrar porf. mmi%?fr p. fn^. ftfaw*ra fut.
aor. ftnirgTTOT ben. mfin^r?^ ties. Cau.-f^r-
-k. When it means to sharpen ( R5TR ) fTHW pre.
3T^f%^ aor.
10 U. M^TT% to whot; ?T»T^Tff% pre. fTimFTWK'^'sf; P«rf.
%^TRcTr P. fut. 3TcfTm^?T-ff aor.
1 A. ^dr to drop dowu, to sprinkle; ^q^ pre. ftfflft perf.
P. f'lt. ffc^ fut.^jr^g^ con. fiirc^iq- ben. -tffmr aor.
P. 3*15?*^ to be wot; ftwrnT pro. f^fTBT per/, ^rfffff f p. fat.
3?^RT^aor. |%RrWTI?r, fJfaWTfff des. f^fTTfT p. p.
1 P. iTfTf to go; hc5lff pro. mffgr perf. iffgRff p. iut.
aor.
6 P. & 10 U. to be oily or unctuous; f^rffr, rf^dfR-^ pro.
hcyqTv^^rf-^r &<-•• perf. afaRTT, H$rf^<rr p. fut.
, ancfrfdcJrf -ar aor.
1 P. to go. fa&fo pr«. 3?fer?f(^ Aor.
I A. to go; jfr^ pre. fffai$«perf mr%cTT p. fut. 3Km%^ aor.
4 P. i£ef5| to be wet, ?fpPf ft pre. anftifk Aor.
P. *$1& to be fat. R?^ pre. ftrfhr perf. mf^c^F p.
Aor
54 SANSKRIT GBAMHAB.
2 P. irfiUrf%ft*TS to go, to *row, to kill, <ftm, <rftf?f P'e.
3?TT* perf. £ffn p. fnt. ?ft«*n« fut. arai*^ COD. amHjqr aor.
1 P. nNroTO to kill, to hurt; ^Tff Pre- 3^^ perf. jfif^mr
p, fut. ararjfr^ aor.
1 P. siTirut fsNrTOT «r§ ^r to reach, to kill, to be powerful;
g«lfiir pre. 35^ perf. gftmr p. fut. SR^r?^ aor.
3% go^: 10 u- f^«T5r5yT^T^R%r!^f to kill, to be strong, to live-
^f^ia-ff pre. ffrsrmo^r^R-^^. &c.
, &c. perf. cTFHf^cTT, g^f5?Tr P. 1^.
$£ 6 P. ^Wf^RIOT ( ^Tl^ ) to quarrel, to cut-, g?r% pre.
perf. gfereTT p. f nt. 3?g?hi aor.
9f 1, 6 ( f 7T^ ) p- at5% to tear, to killj at^m, g^ pre0
1 P. 3?rrT^> to mortify; g|rf?T pre. 3igf r^r Aor.
6 P. ^h%^ to curve; goifff P^. gmnr perf. efffuraT p.
31^nif[fr aor.
sj 10 U. 3Tnrc<jt to cover; g?«i?im-^ pre. angg^rT-ff Aor.
6 U. sq^gft to strike, to wound; g?fm-ar pre.
perf. atwr p. fut. a^qiA-^ fut. a?^r^T^-?T con.
* 3*gTT aor. 3?TiiT-^|r€r^ ben. ggr^m-ff de
pre. 3Tcfif^ aor. Oau -^f^qrf?T-% pre. ar^Sfr^rT aor.g^T P. P«
1 P. to search; 5??f?«T pre. gg»^[ perf. gi^cfT P- fit.
aor.
1 & 6 P. ft^t^ to kill; <rnrfiT, grifT pre. g?ft<i perf.
p. fut. 3RU<ffar, aor.
It 6 P. ff?=rnU to kill, see the above root; anifr &c-
A. f^rrqt to kill. ^H^ pre. arg«T?T, 3*<rrftre Aor.
&9 P. to hurt, to kill; gvgTff, gv*cm pre. gat^ perf;
p. fut. 3ig(4) a^ftg; (9) aor.
DHA'TUKGSHA. 55
1, 6. ( See g<r , 5^ above )• gwnft, gwfffr pre.
1 P. «$% to hurt, to give pain; gHTT% pre.
Also 10 U.
S 3P.*f3rtomake haste; gtftfS pre. g<rfr perf . <ftftm p.
fut. smtfra; aor. ( Vedio )
t 1 P. ff OTCrn* to kill, to hurt; gsf/ft pre. gq^ per/, qfim P.
10 U. ?ynM to weigh, to examine; (Ttetlffr-ft pre.
perf. ?Tr^r5<TT P. fat. cfro5f5T«^-^ fut.
Ben. ^55^^ aor. Pass.— ^rfr pre.
Aor. a'ffOTP. P.
4 P. ^eV to be pleased or satisfied; g^rm pre. gtTfa perf.
«t?r P. fut. «r$*rifT fut- 3T^tWgL con. 55^^ ben. 3T3^»or.
Can.— m^gf^-% pre. STcjg^-rT aor. 55^?% des. Pass.—
3*ft pre. 3mtft aor. g^ p. p. g£f ger. m^^ inf. '
1 P. to sound; ?fftrfr pre. gafrr perf. fftr%«TT P. fut
IP. art^T^^ to torment, to kill; cfafa pre.
3T«nfr^ Aor. 55-^r-i%q% des.
10 A. ^ut to fill up; ^orgar pre. wg^cT Aor.
4 A. ^faf^mff ^nft: to go hastily, to kill; <gfa pre.
perf. g;ft«r p. fut. ar^ft* aor. 5^^ d«.
1 P. f^c^r to determine the quantity or weight of;
pre. gfgrorM fut. 3?(j5?r^ aor.
1 P. to go; SST,% pre. fff 5T perf. ^fwTr p. fat. 3TJ$fr^ aor.
5^TT^ ben.
8 U. mfr to eat; «roffrff; ?r^ar, 901^-90^ Pre-
perf. fffSrwr p. fut. luaTunlr «i fut- ^aorf
aor. fiftrionm% des. ^ P- P. ^fiff^l, ^T ger-
1 6 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB.
% 7 U. ftUMKfMT: to destroy, to disregard; gor%, ^p% pre.
perf. fff^fT P. 'at. qflsqfi-ft, ^?^n^-% fat.
COD. 3T$^, srarcfr^, araffe aor. <jrrnj>
ben.. (defiant, fftgrtyffi dee. avar p. p.
ger.
4 P. £tgfy to become satisfied; rrwrter pre. <*?!$ perf.
, 5r<iT p. fat.
eo. ntarmfS, m<% des.
aor- ^r P. P.
P. sfrow to be pleased, to please; ^sfn% pre. ?T?^ perf.
P. fut. amfrg: aor. <prr^ ben. forffara, m^^r1& dee.
P. p. cfffer ger.
6 P. to be pleased, to please; $<n% pre. ( for other forms
see above ).
1 P. &. 10 U. g^^qfr5* to be satisfied, to light, to
kindle., <tft%, arfaid-fr pre. ?r?rf, dfa>5-^^l<-^T^; &c. perf.
p. fut. 3icrir^, «nni^Er«r wft^ra-ff aor.
P. P.
P. sfh%, to please; ^(%, ^P^rm pre. 3Trnfot-
r-
9 P. sfrorfr to please; ^RrS P'e. ^fwr^rS fat. ^^qlg; aor.
4 P. RqRTTHi^ to be thirsty; %*uft pre. <ra* perf. afocfT p
fut. ffT%qrfS iat. 3jm5«ra; con- ^^ aor. |wng; ben.
Cau.— ?mf^-^ pre. ar?TT^^^-?r Hfffl^-«T aor. m^f^ft
des. <nr p. p. $ft^T, <fftr^r ger.
6 P. f^TT^f to kill, to hurt; 35^ pre. ?RT£ perf. ?fft?frj jf^r,
p. fat. aYi^TriT, <w??r f at. 3T?rera;, ^g; aor.
des. Cau. (see the next root). <%$ p. p.
7 P. to injure, to kill; ^ilr pre. ff«Tf porf . affccrr p. fut.
fut. ^dfi^l con. aTcfh aor-
DHA'TUKOBHA. 57
Oau. — ?r£*rra-^ pre. 3<dd?fo-<T wft^^-?T aoi. Pass.,
pro. 3m$ aor. ^ffiT p. p. tn??*T ger. mtgn inf.
6 P. to kill ; <jsm pre. ajf perf. ^rftfTT, ^ST P. f«t. ^
t. 3T?jYrac, atctriEsft* aor- isns ben- fi^rfir, firt-
<*es. ff: J inf.
1 P. $FRctT°nft: to cross over^to swim; ?rrm P'e.
pe'f. rff%r, rTTfrTT P- fut. ?TR«nf^, ?rft«in'S fut. ^rnfl^ aor.
rffan^ ben. f^m^rer, f^fft^m, mcffrrm dee. ?nor p.p.
ger. Pass.— fftirW pre. ?ft perf. mf^TT, aKtTT & ?m?TT P-
gUcHK aor. mrfT^^, «TR«fh2:> & ?Mfe ben.
pre. 3T<fm* ^-fT Aor.
1 P. RSTM ^I5JH ^ to whet, to protect! ^H^- pre.
perf. ^nTrrr P. f ut. 3^3ff^ aor-
1 A. ^rrot ?pwt ^?fr ^ to drop down, to shake-, aqft pre.
m?ft perf. ^fqrcTT p. fnt. vfafov Aor.
1 A. "^rjf to play ; Jfcfa pre. 3?^? Aor.
1 P. ^RT to abandon ; <q*ifo P'e. cT^rnT perf. f?npf p.
COD. 3Tf^ffl aor. HTvRrn ben. Oao-
pre. 3T?q7nT aor. Rr?F P. P. HT^^r ger. HJ^H inf.
1 A. to go ; =r|Pff pre. cf5r|: perf. ^ff cTT p. fat. 3^^ aor
,5i^ 1 P. to go;
^iSdr-^TfcTT p. fut.
1 P. to move- snpft pre. c^F P^ef. ^1%?TT P.
aor.
1 A. 5J3iHTf to be ashamed ; ^q^ pre. W5f perf.
p. fut. 5rfq**I%, ^^^5RT fnt. 3?5ifq5iTcT, ai^cwar con.
aor. 5jmh?, Sfctfrc ben. Oao.—
«». m5fN^ des. SCR p. P.
58 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB.
1 & 4 P. 3**t to tremble, to fear, s^riff, srwft pte.
perf. sifiraT P. fat. 3n%cvft fafc. a*5rftf*Ta[ con.
srofni; aor arcing; ben. Pd8?. — swff pro. 31311% aor.
Cau.— =nrcnriS-?t pro. ajffcr^-a aor. fiNfTOTRI cles.
p. p. *fffrrr ger. arm's** inf.
10 U. ir^ot ^r?ot gr*<fr ^ to take, to hold, to oppose ;
pre. air«nTT>^T*-^ &c. perf. ^rr^rfimr p. fut.
aor.
1 P. 10 U. *TTrgt to speak; sftrrTT, 4wA-?t P'e.
Aor.
fiff 1 P. to go } ftgft pre. |%nrf perf. farff «T p. tut,
aor.
P. ^% ( f^rf? ) to tear, to break., f gq-f^ pre. gpjfe
f f%cTT p. fut. f i%s^ fufc. 3^ JRJ; aor. f ^n?T ben. Can.—
^CTTrf-sr pre. ^^farg-cT aor. .gfr%*ft des. Pass.
pre. 3Tafn% aor. jr?cT p.p. jnfjfSTr ger.
10 A. ^^ to tear ; $i&ft pre. ^ld<il>^ perf. ^f^<Tr P.
aor. =fT<rft^r« ben.
P- f$*TT*f to kill- ^TTff, f ^ P'e.
Aor.
or ^?qr Same as above.
1 A. <rr$j% to protect; 3ncr> pre. 1& perf. ^TTifT P. fu
fut. 3T5rrWTiT con. a^r^cT aor. srmt? ben. Oau.—
pre. srmgrq^-rT aor. r%^T^ deak Pass.— =rfqtt pre. STsrrt aor.
p.p.
1 A. to go ; =ft^% pre. 5-^ perf. ^iffeTT P. fat.
fut aretfl^ aor
P. tr^tfr to pare . ?wf?r pre. rfRr^r perf . ?^%wr, ?^«r P.
fut ?*fir«if?r, **Wft fat. 8TfTOra;-3T?*T$ffc aor-
ben. f^csrf%^&, (Stererft des. ?^f p.p.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 59
1 P. T<?r 3?*^ ^ to go, to shake; ^npfo pre. fTf^np perf.
^Qidr p- fut. 3Tr?TffT^ aor.
6 P. ^fc^dt to coverj ror^rir pre- fTrTr^sT perf. fsrf^TfTT P- fut.
1 P. to go, to move; rf Sift pre. ffrW^ perf. **r%tTr p. fut
-sfrs aor. c^nS ben. ftrTf^TOT dea. Pass.— ?^^.
1 A. ^^JT to hurry, to move with speed; <?j% pre.
perf. ??TRfTT P- fut. 3T«n?e aor- ffft
c^rfTeT or qrfr p. p. Oau.— ?^firfk% pre.
1 U. sfhft to shine, to glitter; ?>^rff-
perf. ?>*T p. fat. ?>^qfff-ff fut. ^f^^-cT con.
aor. mfN'^riff-^ des.
I P. ^^«Tc?T to proceed with fraud; ftftf^ pre. cffHR perf.
P. f ut. 3Tr^rfrci: aor.
G P. £^Sr ( ^rf? ) to cover, to hide; ^fff pre.
perf. ^RTfTr P. fut. ar^ri aor.
1 P. ff*Trqr to injure, to hurt; ^fff pre. g^ perf.
p. fut.
1 P. ^5fT> to bite, to sting; to speak; ( *rnn<ri ^r) ^rff pre.
^^T perf. 2f«T p. fat. ^ft fut. 3^?^ ( 3[^fer^ dual )
aor. ^qrs beu. f^^fff des. Pass.— ^^, srtfil aor. 5^
p.p. ^^ inf. sjr gar.
10 A. ^51% to bite; ^g^ pre. 3T^5r?T Aor. f^TmeT dea
Pass. — ^q-ff pre. ^TjJTrf p. p.
10 U. *n<qrr*TT to speak; ^iriff-flr pre. 3Tf ^T^-?f Aor.
1 A. ^fr ^frm^r ( *rftff ^T'frw ) to grow, to go in speed,
to go, to hurt; 3 fl^r pre. ^ft perf. 2f%«^ fat. 3^f|TO Aor.
60 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
5 P. •STRT^ <HWfr ^ to kill, to protect; ^(^ pro. ^\^ perf,
p. fut. ^^fa, 3TTrfr<r, aor. ( Vedie ).
10 U. ^tr^-f^iTTrT^ ^T% ^ to GDO, to punish;
. &e. perf. ^u^f^?rr P. fu
fut. 3F??tfS<i-<T aor. ?°^nr<fre des. ^forer p.p.
1 A. ^ to give-, s^f pre. 5^ perf. ^i%Tr p.
fut. 3TTf%^ aof. ^^TT^ ben. f^f^<rai dos. Cau.—
pre. s?^T^^:<T aor.
1 A. vn^ot to hold, to present; ^Rt pre. ^ perf
fut. a^fre aor. ^wf[V bon. fffWT <*e8. Cau.—
pre. Pass. — j^qfr Pre.
5 P. ^'H^T to hurt, to deceive;
p. fut. ^fhrwrrn fut. 3f^HT^ aor.
^ des. Pass.— ^wftT pre. ^^rfhr aor. ^j p.p.
ger.
10 U. ^ot to send; ^wn%% pre. ^«WTv^-liTT-^%, &c.
perf. 3i3^¥if3-cT Aor. ^P¥?rr?j: ^^HT'fre' bon. Paaa — 3f*vg^
4 P. irqrjn JT to be tamed: ^rwrnr pro. ^-fji porf. r^mfrr p.
^H?r aor. Oau.
aor. Pass.— ^m; 3l^TW-, <X^n?T aor.
p. p. ^mf^r, 5?r7f^T gor.
1 A. ^RqRff j^nnf^HT^m^ to give, to be pity, to protect, to
injure, to take; ^qft pre. ^m>-4^7. &o. perf. ^W^I P. f«t7
•jftmjfr f«t. 3^TR^ aor. ^^^ bun. ft^f^T^ dc8- ^f^Tff p.p.
2 P. ^ihft to be poor or needy; ^ftsrn^ Pr*.
P. fut. 3p?i?5fnr, ai^Rsrnff^ aor.
ben. f^^fT^T^RT, f^fTO«ri?T <*63. ^RfftrT P-P.
1 P. fylfot to burst open, to expand; ^jf^ pre. ^r$J
P. fut. ^^|^?T *>r. ^fe?T p.p. Oau.— to cut, to tear
es.
10 U. ft^R* to tear; ^reuffir pre. 3^f^-rT Aor
DHA'TUKOSHA. 61
4 P. s<re^ to perish; ^rfS pre. s^TCT perf. ^ftpfT P- fat.
^Hd, aor-
1 P. 10 A. ^Jf^SFRpfr: to see, to bite, ^fafiT, sfrnn* P*e.
f^T, ^nrna% &c. perl, a^fa, ^^<f Aor,
( 1 P. 10 U. ^nrnri to speak; sr^rft, 5*njft-** p*e.
1 P. TOffeTQt to burn, to pain; 55 fa pre. 3^15 perf. ^rr p.
fut. \n^rfo fut. aror$tf<i; ( 3T^TTVTT»r dual ) aor. 2f5r[fT bon.
ft>ir?rf5f des. Oau.-^r^q-^% pro. ^itfi^^-W aor. Pas
pro- 3T?Tf£ aor. ^r\qr p.p. ^3TT ger- ^3^C inf«
IP. ^r^r to give; ^^ji^ pre. ^aft perf. ^raT P- fat-
fut. 3T^T^?T con. 3?^T^ aor. ?rqrq; ben. f^^rfff des. Pass.-
?ffq^ pra. -^fW aor. Oau-^mmff% P'e. ^Tfr^T^-rT aor. ^f
P. P. ^WT ger. <£Tg^ inf.
T 2 P. ^r^ to cut; 5ifir P'e. ( 'or perf. and fut. see above,
ar^reft^ aor ^pn^ ben. f^mi?r des. Pass.— ^T^. 5T?T p. p.
T 3 U. ^r% to give, to put. ^rf^, ^W pre. ^r, 3% perf. ^^
p. fut. ^q-f^ fat. 3T^R7?[rfT «<>n. 3^5, 3T^?T aor. ^itT,
^nft? ben. f%^rm^r des. ^w P- P. *T*T ger- ^5^ inf. Pass.-
gffant pre. sr^lfq' aor.
1 U. ^nr^^r *TTiTsr ^ to cut, to make straight; ^I^Q%
pre. ^tfTT^I^rT-^ &c. perf. sr^roiq;, 3T^?^tr%^ Aor.
10 U. ^% to cut. ^RUm-ft Pr®. ^fr^^cf-rT Aor.
1 A. fr% to give; ^piar pre. ^ffqr Porf« ^lf^«?m fut
aor.
1 u. ^T=T to give; ^T^TF%-^ pre. 5^, ^T^t, perf.
ar^rrftrz. aor.
5 P. f^nqf to kill, to injure; ^rsfrfa pre. ( Vedic ).
^ U. ^r;r to give; ?rj^-ff pro. a^Tfn^, 3l^TfTO aor.
4 P. 'RT^TT^iJi'fi^Jo^^gf^^Tn^^glffWf^H^t^H^llTl^iifT^ to
play, to sell, to shine, to wish; to conquer, to trifle with, to
H. 3. G. 40.
62 SANSKRIT -GRAMMAR.
rejoice, to be sleepy, &c; %qfif pre. f^T* perf. ^fofT P. f»t.
3?MH aop- fteira; ben. ^?f?r, TW^fa des. Pass.— <ft=tr?r
pre. Cau.-^irfft-tt pre. ^frf^^-fT «or. ?jrr or VR p. p.
1 P. & 10 U. *%% to rub; g^fa, ^rgffl-% pro. f^r, ^*-
qT5^3»TT-^» &c. perf. ^f^fr^, HfrRr^-rT aor.
10 A, qK^TSTk to cause, to lament; ^q% pre. 3T^Ti%3cT Aor.
6 U. 3Tfff?T^ to grant, to allovr. f^^rpr-^ pre.
porf. \<& p. fut. ^q-ra:-% fat. 3^:^-^ con.
f^^TT^, f^^frer ben. f^%3Tfir-% des. Pass.-f%^iT^
aor. Cau.-^^nrrS-W pre. ^rfrf^^T^-tT aor. f%% p. p. ^n inf.
2 U. g-^^q- to augment, to anoint; %(?<*, f%r§ pre.
P- fut. ^q-r%% fut. 3}^T
aor- t^?rr^, r%rfr^ ben.
Pass -f^?Tar pre. BTffl aor. Cau.-^ft-^ pre.
aor. f^T\jr p. p. f^nz^T ger. ^r^^ inf.
4 A. OT to perish; ^r?T pre. f^fr^T perf. ^ffTf p.
fat. ar^rrrcon. 5??TW aor. ?f[ffrc ben. f^fnH des.^R p.p.
1 A. mii€^72fr<CTCRM4J4dclf^3ri to invest with a sacred
thread, to dedicate oneself to, to sacrifice, &c.; gfr^rff pre.
rr p. fut. 3?^r%^ aor. Pass.-^m pre.
. Cau — ^q-fS-ff pre. 3n^fr^gr«T aor.
de§. sfrfSta P. P- ^rf^TfTTr ger.
A. gfriH^Tiff: to shine; to appear; qfhfr?T pre.
perf. frfactt p fut. frmsqff fut. 3TfrRnj Aor. ( Vedic..)
4 A . <fra> to ahine, to bnrn; frcir^ pre. f^rf iqr perf.
p. fut. 3Tfrfq^, 3T3frfr aor. afiTWr^ ben. r^rm^ des. Can.-
ft^rcT & ^K^l^-ff aor. Paas.-^reir% pre.
aor. ?fff p. p.
<* 1 P. to go; ^f?r pre. ( for other forms sae the following
root. ) ^f p.p.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 63
5 P. gtnfFt to burn, to distress, to give pain; ^frfa1 pre.
g^pf perf. ^TCTT p. fut. ^Tm fut. 3?^T*iT^ con. ST^tfr^ aor.
f?TTci; ben. ^<nff des. Pass.— f*m pre. 3^rf% aor. ^ p. p.
10 U. 5:*irfarara( to give pain; ^r^rfff P^. 3^:^-?T Aor
1 P. fjfawr* to kill; fift p'o. ^rr perf.
aor.
10 U. ^F^ to shake to and f ro: ^t^qi^-?r P'e.
^ perf. ^rafinTT p. fat. 3?^5T^-<T aor.
4 P. %^^" to be wrong, to be impure; ^TffiT pre. ^f? perf.
p. f«t. 3Tfr^^ «on. frwrer *ut. 31^?^ aor. ^qrr^ ben-
-|tnifff-?r> also ^q-f?r-?r ( to make depraved ) pre. 3^-
aor. ^^frr des. Pass.-^^ pre. arfifq aor. ^ p. p.
1 P. aqf^ to au*t, to give pain; ^tfTff pre. ^ff perf.
<arm fut. 3^?g[, 3T^r^. aor. ^fjff p. p.
2 U. ST^TOT to milk, to make profit; «frf»vr, ^ pre.
55% perf. f (Tijr p. fut. >ft^Tf?r-w fat. 3?^^, 3T^5Tcr &
STf^T*0'- 5§Tr?T, ^fgr^ ben. 5^f?f-^de?. Pass.— %$fa
( also ^ se« Pan. III. 1. 89 ) pre. ar^tfj ( also w^,
aor. Cau.-^n%-pr P'e. 3*£§^ciaor. ^ivr p. p.
4 A. qftfTl^ to suffer pain, to be sorry; £<KT p
SfofT P. fu!:. ^r%qrff fut. 3T^T>nTff con. 3T^T^ aor.
ben. 5|5?t des. Cau.— $|qqfd-fr pro. Hf^gr ?T aor. Paas.-
HK* pre. a^rfir aor. ^ p. p.
6 A.3TT3[> to worship, to regard (wither); fiNft pre.
^t perf. ^f p. fut. greff aor. ^ffe ben. f%$Rqft de«. Pass.—
ft^pre. s^rftaor. Cau.— ^rwf^-% pre. 3T^TO-«T aor.
5<T P. p. S"?^T ger. 53^ inf.
4 P. gT*T(5«nft: to b« glad, to be proud; fcqrm pre. ^
perf. qtffar, ^, jrqfT p. «ut. ^r9«rtS, f^Wir, srcwfir fut.
SANSKRIT GBAMMAB.
aor. FCITT^ ben. f^ffafS or %ttffir des. Can.—
Pre- 3T<figq*ifr> ^Tf^rt"?r ax>r. 5fr p.p. sffarr, r**r
ger. ^rftj, ^tf , 5*3* inf.
1 P. & 10 U. tf#<n*to excite, to kindle; ^tfft, <?ftn%% pre.
p. fat. 3T^fi^, 3TfT^[-?T, 3T^gr-?T aor.
pre. a^f aor. gif, ^?T p. p.
6 P. gr^r to string, to put together;
'e. a^Tl'^-rT, 3T^r^g[-?f aor.
p- p. ?m?*T ger.
1 P. 10 U. w ^S ^ to fear, to string together. Differ
^T^m% pre.
1 P. ST^ot to see, to visit, to know; q^fir pre. ^^f perf.
fut. 5^rm fut. 3i?^r^ con. 3T^T3 , 3T3T$fTa[ aor.
ben. f^ffr dos. Oan.— ^mfk-ff pre.
aor. ?fT5^^, ?i5ftfir, ^f& freq.
pre. 5T^T aor. g^ p.p. ^ ger. 515^ inf.
^5 1 P ^ to be fixed or firm, to grow; ^ff& or
Pr®. ^ff or ^|f perf. tffcn or iffrTT p. iut. 3^% or
3??^. aor. g?: ( strong ) or gfftT, |lf?T P- P.
1 P; H^ to fear; ^fJr pre. ^TT perf . ^R-fHfT p. fut.
TT^ aor.
9 P. T^Tfot to tear, to divide; grorrm P*e.
p. fut. ^*niT, ^ft^rm
con. 3T^rfr^ aor. ^TUT^ ben.
des. Cau.— ^T^m-^, ( ^T^rm% in the eense of
to fear ' ). Pass.-^ff§?r pre. 9T^TK aor. ^rof p. p.
1 A. 11155^ to protect, to cherish, ^q% pre. f^T perf.
p. fut arf^rT aor. ^r€m ben. T^fW des. Pass— ^a pre.
Can.— ^NTOT%-?f pie. «rfT^ra[-<T aor. atf^ p. p.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 65
1 A. ^r% to sport, to lament ; ^^ pre. |^r pe**. %1%fTT p.
fat. ^f^sqfr fat. '^f^iHT OOD. ttftftz aor. f^f^T des.
Pass -^Kt pre
IP. snw to purify, to be purified j frofS pre. ^r P«rf.
p. fut. ^rwfff iut. 3T^Tfq^ COD. a^T^ft^ aor.
des. Pass.— ^Tir>f pre. Can.— 5mf%-?T pre.
?T aor. ^ra p. P.
4 P. H9*gtrg% to cut, to divide, to move ; gM pre.
perf. ^ffff p. fut. 3T^ni; or ^TT^ beD. f^cflrS de8- ^atu —
^T<TTm-% p*e. ft?r p. p. f^rr, s^ro ger.
2 P. 3Tpr*m% to advance towards, to attack ;
^^rrg- perf. gr?fT p. fnt. ^frwrfrT fut. 3rifr«T^ COD.
aor. 5g«?Tff de§. Pass.— oir^ pre. 3TOTT? aor. Cau
ff pre. 3f£?nr^-?T aor. ** p. p.
1 A. gfnft to shine ; ^Tar pre. i%^^ perf. cTrmfTT p.
con. 3^fti^, 3TgtTci; aor.
ben. ^f^^ f^Tfm^ des. Cau.— ^fhnrfSr-^ pre.
aor. ^pnt, ^ui\freq. jmrT-^frafT P. P-
§ 1 P. WI^^T to despise; *rT<rft pre. mm p. fat. arfrrffa; aor.
?TT^Tfl, %*TT^ Ben.
5^ 1 P. inft to iun; j«rf^ pre. ^m perf. 3«niina[ aor.
5T 2 P. <pEmri Trff ^W ^T to run, to sleep ( generally with
T% ); *n% P^. <f?r perf . ^TtTT P. *ut. Jrrwfir fut. !HRfm<
con. 3T?Tjm^ aor. 5TTT?1, arm^ ben. |%TOfft des. yror p. p.
A. fimw, 3mrm to be able, to lengthen; srrefr P?e
^jfT% perf. 3?jrjfw aor. yri^ffc ben.
1 P. %**7f3rd to make a discordant sound ; ?a^rf^ pre.
W3jT perf. 3T?[f^fhi: aor-
1 P. *mV to ran, to rush, to melt; swfa pre. |ynr peff.
p. fat. 5T6ITT& fut. 3fTjrs^^ con. sr^ aor. fA del.
66 SANSKRIT GBAMXAB.
Pass.— jpET?r pre. arjrf* aor. Can.— gTTOft P**.
3T3*wg[ aor. <Hf TO, 5ta*h%, ft*Tl% freq. g<f p. p.
6 P. nmf^rorr^s to kill; to go &c..,
perf. jfHfoTlt fat. 3T5Ton<* aor.
4 p. f*roroT«rn^ to bear malice or hatred ; ygrm pre
p
des Cau—
aor. gnr or |^ P. P- ffrft
ger.
9 U. ^wrq to kill, to hurt; gorriSi pfi^ pre.
perf. OT^riSMr fat. 3TfT?fi^, a?5^ aor.
1 A. ^l^oHT^: to sound, to show energy; fc$*f pre.
perf. 5tr%«?i% fat. a^rfirc aor.
1 P. *3j|- to sleep ( generally with M ); 5TTfi> P'e. ^jr perf.
3?fltTtfT5 aor. ffTTra:, $*n«^ben.
u ^sfm> to hate; itr% or f^ pre. ?%£& ( 3H%^[-^: 3rd
pi. ) Imp. ft%*, f^ii^ parf. ^r p. fat. ^nm% fut.
^f^-tfcon. 3?%r^-?T aor. TfwrT^, fifefts- ben.
des. Cau.-^^nrm^ pre. 3Ti%i>?g;-fr aor. |fi^
ftft-freq. Pass.-f|^r> pre. ^^ aor. T^ p. p.
1 P. tf^ur 3T#T^fr ^ to cover, to accept; 3*^ pre.
Perl
10 U. iTTOfr to destroy;
perf, 3T^f^-?r *>*.
trot, 1 P. ?n% to sound. *ron?f pre. 3TMTofrg[,
^[ 1 P. to sound; vrrff pre.
^ ( Vedic ) 3 P. ^T^T to produce ftuit;
pre. ^m*f Perf. MHM/I^ fat
LEUL'TUCOSHA. 67
1 P. *T?ft to go-, \F*fff pre. 3*9* p«rf. *ra?fot aor.
*T * U. \mum1quiqVrfr ^ to pat, to grant, to produce, to
bear; ^rm, MT% pre. ^ift & ^ perf, *nrr pc fut. TOVTOT-tt
fot. 3T9reygc«T «OD. aror^, am'fo aor. OTTg(, vntfhr ben.
nNrft-K de*. Pass.— tfar% pre. ^vrrfi- aor. Oau.— tfrnrfif-%
pre. 3T^r\TT^-?f aor. ^\ftgfr, ^TVnffr, ^fif freq. ftw P. p.
^T, ^fv^ir ger.
1 U. irid^^vTi: to rub, to wash, to cleanse; \H3lrf-fr pre.
con. aroraffa & 3d\rrfTO aor. ^rsurg;, ^arrfWi^ ben.
^fii % de3. Cau.— vn^rrff-?T pre. s^fnaw^-eT aor.
p. p. >rrf%?^T, vrb^r, TOTS^ ger.
6 P. ^T^t to have, to hold; j^m pre. f^rr* pcrf.
aor. f^fq^f% dea.
*o be fatigued, to lire*
pre. ^f^ perf. ft%**rlr fat.
P. rfnn% te deHght, to please; T^ftfif pre.
p. fat. srf^figL w. fif^n^ ben. Ai^nr P. p.
3 P. to sound; f%$fi pre. ( used in the Vedas )4
4 A. grrvrf^ to hold; ^ft pre. f^^T perf. %«ir^ fat.
aor. Cau.-vrnroi%-% P»e. «|^r^T^-
5 U. ^pq% to shake to excite; g%Tff & gg?t pre
perf. ifrtTT P. fut- ^^W-?r fat. srvf
ben. srerftS & ^^t^ aor- W?H* dea. ^?f p. p.
1 A. yC^Hfe^MvHr^f to be kindled, to be weaiy, to liv*;
e. 55^ perf. $%<fr p. fut. 3T^%^ aor.
. P-
1 U. **q% * 6 P. f^prst to shake;
2nd iingular of 6 which is
68 SANSKRIT GBAJOCAB.
P. fut. *Tfr*rf8r%, sfwft tot.
con. gronffaj;, arqrft^, 3T^ft^, aor.
ben. ^ p. p. Ufirj ( 1 ) gftgn ( 6 ) inf.
5 & 9 U. 9^ to shake; ^jftffT, ^, gsflfif, §*fir pre.
I>erf. \ftrlT, WcTT p.
con.
ben. ^r^% des. Oau.—
aor. Pa«8.-^r% pre. wtrft aor. ^ ( 5 ) tjsf (9) p.p.
10. U to shake; Tjjnrra-?* pre. ^m^R-^ pert
f at. g^T^ aor. i$*n^, ^{^(\E b«n. Oau.-vj^gr^ pre.
1 P. ^T> to heat, to be heated; >j<Tnri^ pre.
P. ^t.
con. 3Tr, ^TTR aor.
& w«rrs ben.
^TC^i^-tT aor.
^TT^r p*e. am, aR^j^TO aor. >jT, i&ttc p. p.
10 U. iTrqrrcNNter to speak, to shine; ijgiri8-%
s^r^rr-'^ &c. perf. >j(rf^JT P. fat. 3Tf^^[^ aor-
4 A. fgWTKfr: to kill, to goj q;qw pre. ^^ perf. anif^r aor
V* P- P-
U. >^Tor to hold. \rem% pre
2 sing. ) perf. ijaf p. fut. \rff«^- fut. 3?^Rw^-cf COD.
aor. f&«rr & ^fr^ ben. f^Afffir% des. Can.-
a<>r. fWSr Pass. ^?r P.P.
1 A. aTTCcfeft to destroy; vr^ pre. See the above root.
6 A. 3TTOTR to be, to exist; ftqft pre. f^nr??T dee. For
other forms see Atm. forms of ^ 1 U. above.
10 U. \rr?ot to hold, to bear, to support; \rrnrf5r-7r pro.
^. &c. perf, vrru^rm p. fut. arafro^-a aor. qm
ben. <- des.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 69
1 P. infr to go, to move, lysjft, ^srffr pre.
perf. arsrsn^-aTOsfar; »or.
1 P. to come together, to hurt, qifo pre. yrf perf.
5 P. STMIgfrft to be bold, to be confident, to be proud or
brave; igntriff pre. ^ perf . ^fan p. fat. qfalft tut.
con. BTOtffcaor. Cau.— T=nfcn?r-?t P™. 3«fTWJ-ff,
aor. f^srfarof des. uffa, ^s ( immodest ) p. p.
1 P. & 10 U. srg^* to offend, to insult, to conquer;
ben.
9 P. to become old Tjum?* pre. vrfr-fr-^fS fut 3nrT^I<r aor.
1 P. <n% to suck, to draw away ; \nn% pre. ?'<fr perf. \nffr p.
iot. sror^, 3^n^?5, 3T^r^ aor. OTT^ ben. pfrfffS des.
Pass. — \ffaft pre. 3T^rW aor. Cau.— -vrrtrqft ( Paras m. also, if
it does not convey a reflective sense ; qr^
pre. arcfrror aor. ^ P-P-
^I^ 1 P. ?rm^rrg5 to tread skilfully, to be skilful , \fftm pre..
5^tT perf. arfrtfgt aor-
1RT 1 P. ^Tgnsrcqi'TOV: to exhale, to blow, to throw away;
Wt% pre. ^-RT perf. «rmr P- ^t. VRTWfa fat. 3TVmW5;
con. areRrofitl aor. wnir^ or v^Mltl ben. f^irram des.
Pass.— \:RF^ pre. 3?«TTWT aor. Cau.— WTtRn%-^ pre. trf$-
wn^-gr aor. wm p.p.
1 P. f^-dNIH to think of, to ponder over; cqr^A pre.
perf. OTtU p. fut. Tamqf? fat. 3^\3m^ oon.
aor. vauni or wnnat ben. f^tTHHT^ des. Pass.—wrnnt pre.
aor. Oau.— «vfWTei% pre. ^l
p.p. H^rTf^rr ger. VTTTg^ inf
( also H>SC ) 1 P. jr?f> to go ; inrft or troft pre.
perf. arosfl*, BTOT^, aismrff aor.
70 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB.
1 P. ;n% to sound, to beat a drum ; srqrfft pre.
ilforsq-ra fat.; vnrafct, Winft^aor.
9 P. %*& to glean ; iremlr pre. ^jPET pert STfiteriSf fat.
sren=fhl> 3*URfta[ aor. BKcT P-P.
10 u. i P. to glean sn^priirft, srertS pre.
perf. ijRrifcTT, OT«?rT P. fat. 3?T%srera;-?r,
1 P. to wish, to sound ; $T.r$TI% pre.
1 A. WHR33T to be able ; yr^TW pre. ^UT% perf. snnfvjg aor.
1 A. fi^KUl to cut, to tear; ur^ff pre. 3|£rrr3? Aor.
1 P. to go 5 snrfff pre. 3131*317% fat. arosifa Aor.
1 P. ^$fqr to be firm 5 SJ^TcT Pre. 5^^ perf. ifiHI ?• fot,
6 p- ( W&*% ) *f faw&fc to S°» *° b® "tea^y ; ^m pre.
( another reading for the above ); ^3TO pre. TVTT^ (
sing. ) perf. ^f%«qT?T fat. STSJ^i^ Aor.
1 P. <CHt to be pleased or satisfied, STfitfiT pre
1 A. 3TC$fcpir TcTi ^T to fall down, to perish; v^fT^ pre.
perf. ^Ttifii p. fat. Witi^in fat. STT^n^fsCRC C9n.
or 3!>i^f%? aor. tUri^WHS ben. |^v4l^l^ des. Pass.—
pre. 3resfr% aor. Cau. — v4tt<*ft% pre. WW p.p.
, TsSfr^T ger.
1 P. to go. %CI<JI)A> ^>Jiia pre.
1 P. ^T^1 to sound, to echo, to thunder* ^prf^ pre.
perf. Ts5rf*nfT p. fut. £m*f*3TcT fat. 3T^n*T5^r^i °o
01* gfV4f«Tl<l aor. Oau. — to sound as a bell , ^H^fd-^i to
utter indistinctly, ^rT?nn^-%; pre. Q^ffi^ffi des.
( darkness ) p.p.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 71
10 U. 3Tsq% ST^- to sound indistinctly j \-*;nrf^-% pre.
fr des. Pass. — vg^d pre. smf* aor
1 P. *£5^r to kill, to praise, to describe- CTrfft P*e.
perf. amrfra; aor.
10 U. HIJ>M to perish; sf^jffl-ff pre.
1 P. to go, to move; ^^f?T pre. m$ perf.
1 P. to go. ^^% pre. 3T^fr^-3WT?ft^ aor.
1 P ^^ t.) dance, to actj ^fff pre. snns pe'f. TOW p.
fat. 3T!fT%«^ con. 3?^T^ or 3?^T3T^ aor. Oau.-
) pre. 3T5ft5Rr^-?f aor. ft^rfir^des. Pass.—
*wfe aor. *fex p.p.
10 U. *n^nn^ to speak, to shine, maqiff-fr pre.
1 P. 3?5q% ^T^ to souud, to thnnder-, ^r^ pre.
fut. 3*5fT3fHor 3R^ aor.
aor. ^Rf^Iff des. ^?r p.p.
10 U. to speak, to shine; 5TT^rrW-?r P'e.
1 P. H*i*$\ to be pleased; to thrive- H^kT pre.
5ff^«T p. fut. SR^fr^ aor. H^UId. ben. RH^T^f
p.p. Cau.—qr?fn^-% pre. Pass.— 5fr*nfr pre.
1 A. h^MiHMfcsfr to kill, to hurt; ^^ pre. ^ perf.
1 P. ^^(% ^T^ ^r to salute, to bend, to sound; ;mfff pre.
perf. ?r?m p. <«t. ^fqr% fut. 3RCT3 COD- W^l^ aor-
ben. f^m% ^es. Cau.— ^H^ or jrm*TI% pre. srfV-
aor. Paps.— ^RT^ pre. 3Tflrr^ »or. ^jf P-P- 5T?^T ger.
1 A. to go, to protect; srirfr pre. ^ perf. »R^S aor.
IP. ^T^ to bellow, to roar, to sound j ( sr ) ^^ pre
perf. Jff^fT P. fut. 5fft«*n$ fut. ^^f^mq. con. 3T^f^ aor.
P-P-
72
P. *?% ***fr 1 to smell, to bind; sf&ft pre. 5Rra per-
fut.
10 U. Hunrrat to speak, 8Hdqfo.% pre. Sffafcmfd-fr fnt.
aor.
4 P. sr^sft to be lost, to perish; qrwfff pre. *RT$T perf.
*%*TT or jff F p. fat. ^%^f&, jqqfif fut. BTJTftTwrg-.ST^r^
COD. Bf^T^aor, ^^?T^ ben. f%^T(^ or RJTT%^ des. Can.~
5TT5rqrfir-% pre. 3TJff?T^-?T »or. ^^ p.p. ^f, ^|j or
ger. ^T^, sff^ inf.
4 Q. ^j% to tie, to bind; 5Tfri?f-?r pre. SRTS , %% perf.
P. fut. 5T?Pn?r-^ fat. SWcWfrtr con. 3RffHh[, 3T^[ aor.
*5Tra[, sffffi^ ben. ftsf^H%-% des. Pass.— jfgrn PW.
aor. Can. — SfTfTflf-ifr pre. 3T^r?^^[-rT aor.
.p. 5Tr ger.
1 P.qT^ft^rrh^r^ffV^ to ask, to oe master,
pre. ^RHT perf. ^m?TT p. fut.«^mft^»or. 1 A. to bless-,
pre. ^n^ perf. jfrfirCT p. fut. 3RTm7 aor. sm^RT p.p.
^ -A- the same as ifrtr A.
TJ. ^ft^ql^mq): to wash, to be purified, to nourish;
pre. fwr, r%^^ peif. %W p. fat. ^rfif-^r fat. «w-
con. BTM^T^, ^T^Fnr , 3T^rF aor. R^Hrr^i ft^ft^T ben.
-ff des. Pass.— f^RI^ pre. ^m aor. Can.
pre. ^H>H^-fT aor. f^U p.p. R^p^r ger.
A. wsgV to wash, to purify; f%fr ( snor^ ) p?e.
perf . Rf«^ff fut 3TRfw? Aor. R?^^ ben.
des. Cau —H«Wr?%-% pre. Pass.— ffe3*T?f pre. ^rf^f^T Aor.
p.p.
P. ^rHNIH to blame, to find fault with, to condemn;
re. wfts* p«»f . ftfi^^r p. fat.
ben. ^Brf*^TW dea. Oaq.— ft^jjfer-^ pre.
Pass.— ftrow pre. ftfJfir p.p.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 78
1 U. $rqmRiWft:lto blame, to reach; %gfr?T% pre.
aor.
1 P. S^ %W% ^ to sprinkle, to eat; f^fffr pre.
perf . arista; Aor.
6 P. ( jnr* ) to become thick; fttrft pre. fifr* perf
sgfir fut. u£cf|<£ aor.
1 P. ^nprrvft to think, to meditate; %^ft pre. s*ft«trft fnt.
1 P. *T€R to sprinkle- %trffr pre. ftfhT perf . 3T%*qr Aor.
10 A. qfrmot to weigh, to measure; flvfcqft P^e
a^% perf f^^T%^ fat BTRpT'^rT Aor.
2 A, ^if* to kiss; f^- pre. fitfft perf. f^ftr^ fut.
aor.
1 U. jrrtrot to lead, to carry off, to marry, to settle;
pre. f^rnr-R«r perf. %ar p. fut. ^cqiff-31 fut. 3T^«q^-fr con.
aor. «fnn^» 'faflH' ben. fi|finfl'ff-?t des. Pass.-—
pre. aTTrft' aor. Cau.— «n<T<TIH% pre. 3T«ff«T7^?l> aor.
freq. efttf p.p. sffarr ger. %^ inf.
1 P. WOT to colour; vffcft pre. s?»froft<I Aor.
1 P. WF«t to become fat, to grow. HNft -pre. H*0^ perf.
9T«fT^r^ Aor.
3 2 P. fg<fr to praise, to commend; ^IfT pre. 3419 perf. ^fqrfl
i. 3T3*rW^-?T Aor. ^^rsr^rfff % des. 3^ p.p.
to push, to incite, to remove, to throw;
•or. gtirg^ 3?*fre b*11' 33?fri^-fr des.
r-> pre. 3T3«F(3;<t aor' ^>a.fls> — 3^ Pre- fltft
aor. 3^- or 3^ p.p.
6 P. *3m ( ^rn^* ) to praise; 3^fjf pre. 3*^W ( i«jf^*i 2nd-
74 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
sing.) perf. ^f^iT p. fut. 3f%*rfir *nt. 9139}* Aor.
des. Cau.— ;nsrera-% pre. 3T^5f^[-tT Aor. ^ p.p. 3^31* inf.
4 P. <TT?l%^ to dance, to represent on the stage- ^rtrfft
pre. 5Rcf perf. ^ffr«TT P- *nt. 3W<ft^ aor. ^rUT^ben. f^f-
firTRf— f^rfriS des. Pass.— ^«j% pre. 3f;n3 aor. Oau.—
jffclH only pre. ar^FKT, BT«R&I aor. ^r p.p.
;T 1 & 9 P. ^ to carry, to lead; s^ft, ^UMM pre.
P. fut. 5rR«TT%» 5fft«in% fnt. ar^fat Aor. Oau.—
1 A. to go, to reach; %q^ pre. R^% perf. 3T^ft« Aor.
1 P. & 10 U. qrfTJT^ to take, to accept; <r$rfff, <T$x*rf^-& pre.
fat. ah S^' - Aor
1 U. to cook, to digest; <ro%-fr pre.
p. fat. <T*irfar-ar fut. ^q^r^-jr con.
ben. fHVJHfd% des. Pass.-^xq^ pre. aTTtfa aor. Oau.-
pre. ^T^r^^.^ aor. q^ p.p.
A. soTFrqs^r to make clear, ^ft pre. qq^ perf.
fut. Brq-Ra Aor.
10 U. 1 P. ft^K^^^ to spread; qwf$f-W, q^if^ pre.
or.
1 P. to go, to move-, q^ift pre. qqRf perf. qfe?rr P. fnt.
fut. 3Tqf%^T^ con. arq^f^ or ar^TSn^ aor. Oau. —
pre. a^frr^-ff aor. ftqfeqft dea.
10 U. 4T^$ to clothe, to envelop; q?<n%-5 per.
&c. perf. Mzffim p. fot. STq^r^rfr aor
rot ^ar to speak, to coyer; qryqf%% pre,
-fr fut.
DHA'IUKOBHA.
76
1 P. WHETTf WTf% f5flfrdHHJ*Ma * to read> to "tody, *o
describe; q^m pre. qqry perf. qfsm p. fat. qf^drfft fnt.arq-
f%*q-g; con. BTq^fiJ. or 3WI3I3. aor. fqqfs^fft des. Pass. — q$rit
pre. arqrf? aor. Cau.— qTOTm-ff pre. arim^-ff aor. qftif
p.p. ifJw g«'. H/San. in'.
1 A. imt to go; <nrs^c pre. qqfTT perf. nqfcr^r aor. qf^nr p.p.
10 U. ^T^ to destroy; 1 P. qrft ^ to heap together,
to collect; q<r^rf%%, qv^m pre.
1 A. arw^ft to bargain, to bet or stake at ploy; qorff pre.
*^5lr perf. qfoniT p. fit. srqfnr^ aor. qforqhr ben.
dei. Can. — qrorq-f^-W pre. 3^^^-^ aor. qfor?T p.p
qqr 1 A. ( Parasm. with 3TP* ) ^?ft to praise;
c. <Hif perf. MUllNdT-qfdRTT.
pre.
aor.
ben.
Oau. —
*or. IM^UI
des.
p.p.
1 P. to fly, to alight, to fall; qar?f pre. qqnf perf.
ut. mnfAUJd, COD- ^MH< aor. q^TTr^ ben.
des. PaBS.--qfir% pre. arqrffi aor. Cau.
pre. 5fffrr^-ir aor. q?ftqwr, qrf)q«fift, q^frrffT freq.
p.p. qfffarr ger. qfir^ inf.
4 A. qrsgir to be master of, to rule; qfq-ff pre. ^?r perf.
r^ 1 P. to go; q^fS pre. qqw perf. srnfcj; aor.
10 U. ir^ft to throw, to send; qr*nnf&% pre.
4 A. ifT to go; to attain; q^% pre. ^ perf. q^r p. fut.
q?^t |ut. 3rq?^rfT con. 0?^ aor. q?ffte ben. fq?^r des.
Pass.— q^r pre. arqrft aor. Oau.— qnpTffr-^ pre.
aor. qw p.p. WT ger. q^^ inf.
76 SANSKBIT GBAMHAB
10 A. ii?ft to go; q^q^ pre. q^n??% perf.
3WWT aor- ft^ft^ <*es. Pass.— qro pre. g*<n$ aor.
1 A. to praise; q^fr, qsinrnr pre. qfr, MHWl^frK, &o. perl
lf3dl P- fut. qfiferW; H»lift«*Jli9 ^t
r. ^fir^fte, ^r^TT9[ ^en. ^?r» MHiNd p.p
U. & 1 P. to go; qarafiHr, ^Ef^ pre
1 A. to go, to move; q^f p*e. q^1 perf. Brqfqrer aor.
10 U. g-f?<nn£ to make green; qoftrffi-^ pie. qu
^JK perf. qrfftrTT p. f«t; srqqof^-fT aor.
1 A. to break wind; q£^ pre. qq^ perf. a^qf^ aor.
1 P. to go; qqi% pre. qqq perf. STTO^ aor.
1 P. to go; q^nfr pre. qq^ perf.
1 P. sjfi to fill; q^ft per. qq$ perf. arqqffg; aor.
1 P. to go, to move qsrfw pre. qrrra perf. a^Rft^ aor.
10 U. ^?^r% to bind; qT5TqT^% pre. 3T«Trq^-ff aor.
ben.
10 U. to go; qqgm% pre.
10 U. & 1 P. sn^rW to
<T I P. qr% to drink, to absorb; fqfffJr pre. qqjr pe»l ^TRTT p.
fat. qr^rfA fat. ^mt^<x COD. 3Tqrg[ aor. qirr^ ben. (Tim<H^
des. Pass.— <r?ir^ pre. atqrft aor. Cau.— qrq^nft-^ pre
p.p.
qr 2 P. T^t to protect, to rule, qrfir pre. qq> perf. qrfsrfS fat.
con. srqnfTC aor. qpn^ ben. fqqRn% des. Pass.—
e. Oau.— qRjirr%% pre. 9nfh9^-ir aor. i\* p.p.
10 U. »^*<IH> to finish, to get through or over; qR*rfff%
|>re. HKUIiJ^U-TO' perf. qrrfhn P. fut. m^mif)-^ fat.
DHA'TUKOSHA.. 77
con- *H<mK4rflT aor. Pass. — qrifo pre,
p. p.
10 U. ?r$Tfcr to protect; q|<0<jft% pre. MI<^lo-^*K-^ &c.
perf. qidNflf p. fnt. 3pfiqw^-?T aor. Pass.-qnaj% pree
MifSrf P. P. mdftrtH ger.
6 P. to go, to shake- \3uft pre. sfrng; aor.
A ^ift ^q-4f^ to colour, to touch; &c.f^%pre. sri^f^^ aor.
10 U. & 1 P. «n^nrt ^tnV ^ to shine, to live, to give, to
kill; fasWf^-?*, N3n?f pr
aor.
1 p ^T^B^rrmrT: to sound, to collect, to heap togethe
pre. ft^ perf. ztfrft^ aor.
1 P. fifarife^RUft: to kiU, to injure; ^n% pre.
A., 10 U. & 1 P q^qrar to heap; to roll into a lump. iq^7
P'e. fqfq%, R^pn^a^TT-^^ ftl^^" perl.
» 3Ji5«^l«^aor. i^{u«(f p, p.
10 U. to throw, to incite; q^fft-fc P". ^TT3ff^TT-^%, &c.
perf. Q^Ndl p. fut
1 P. ^r% %^- ^ to sprinkle, to serve; tqwn?T pre.
perf. ftf^fT P. fat. ftf^^m fat. 3Tiqr^«Tir^ con.
aor. fqson^ ben. Pas8.-fq?OT>
P. ar^l% ft&m ^ to form, to kindle, to light j
pre, fq^r perf. qi%<rr P- ^nt. ^^ftcC aor. O
pre. 3Rcftt%^-?T aor. iqiq|%*rft, fq^i^^lS des. )^nr P- p.
ger.
P. ^fjj% to grind, to hurt, f^fl% pre. fq^f perf. iq^r p.
ii fut. Bf^rg; con. srfq^ aor. fq^TH; ben. Pass.
e. 3^f*aor. Can.— qqir^.^ pre. artVl^T- cT Aor.
des. ft«^r p. p. fop ger. ^ inf.
H. 8. G. 41
78 BAVBKUT
1 P. to gO;>*Rr pre. ffi^fr perf. ^mr P. fat. OTfft*; Aor.
10 U. to go; <renrra-l* pre. Mqqna»H-^g> &c. perl.
4 A. *|3r to drink; <fhrft pre. igc* perf. TOft fat.
Oan.^mnrft-% pre. wrfN^-lf, Aor. fq^TTO dee.
10 U. to press, to hnrt, to oppose; <ftarf>-% P™«
?CTT-^r% perf. jfofym P. fat. Ml€fqmffi-?r fat. s*uf
con. 3TfVRvi:ir, 3TfWr^-ff, aor.
P. P-
1 P. wf^- to become fat or strong^ ^ftwr pre. f fftr^f^ fat.
3frfWi^Aor.
10 U. Hfiwfo to increaae, to crash; 3*nrfif-W pro.
6 ^ fh^rot ( $2TTI^ ) to embrace; s^fir pre. 5^ ( 53% 3
2nd sing. ) perf. starrer fat. a^f^ aor.
10 U. tf*$ to bind together; ssirfiHt pre. 9?f^nTr p. fat.
tFrggz^-ff Aor.
10 U. trwnrf gfr^r ^T to speak, to shine, to reduce to powder;
p'e. qt^cn^^r^R-^ &c. perf. Mteftmffl-fr fat 9^-
aor.
1 P. w|% to grind; <?(*,% pre. 3^ parf. ffTft^TnT fat.
^ Aor.
6 P. s?*5? ( ^n'? ) to leaye, to discover; 5^ pre.
fa*. 3^5^ Aor. ssfOTft des.
5 P- S*^1*^ to be pious, 511% pre. W&r«*frT fat.
Aor 55-it-flwfir des.
4 P. nfanrn* to kill, to injnre; gOTnT pre. ^w perf.
Aor.
10 U. HT^nrr <VA ^ to speak, to shine; <fwnS% pre. 9fjr^Bjf-
Aor.
1 P. ftfrr «fe$Rift: to kill, to torment; 5*9% pre.
int. avnfi? Aor.
DHA'TUKOSHA.
6 P. snnra* to go ahead, srffr pre. 5^ perl. *rfturi& *at.
Aor.
1 P. S*ot to fill; ykfo pre. 5^ perf. sj^ft fut.
Aor. Pass. — ^sqft pro. ST^ffT aor.
10 U. ffifcll* ^ dwell; S]fcrft-fr pra. rfftffr p. f ol.
- Aor.
1 & 6 P. irr^ & 10 U. ( fhn% ^ ) to grow, to become tall;
A or
4 P. 5^r to nourish, to develop, to bear, to ihow; $qrftr pre.
5<fnf perf. qfer p. fat <rt$m% fat. 3rfr^r^ con. BT5T^ aor.
5^"^ ben. 55^rm des.^ p. p.
1 & 9 P. to nourish. &c; $irof?r, swrrft pre. 5^ perf.
<ftfan. p. fut. qtR«qfer fat. snHfat »or. Pas§.— 5sq% pre.
3jiftf% aor. Oau.— qr^rf?r-^r pre. 3TTO^-W aor. jfif
also ) p. p. sffar, ^rf^nr ger.
1° U. ^rrot to maintain, to promote; qtTOfa% pre.
^K-^T &c. perf. ^nrftrTT p. fat. STfS^-cT Aor.
dee.
4. P. |%3F^RT to open, to blow; grc^rfff P*e. 55^ perf.
fat. sf3q<sqf?T fut. 3T5f^T^ra[ con. ST^wfi^aor.
pre. 5?*qrT p. p.
10 U. ^WMK<4ir: to regard, to mortify, to tie,
pre. 3TSS^-?T aor.
1 A. q^r to purify, to winnow, to invent; q^ pre. g^> perf.
TfttTT p. fat. sraf^T aor. qfir^ ben. iqqf^?r des. Oau.-qr^-
^riS% pre. 3fqtw^-fT Aor, qt^T?f , qtq^f f?r, <faftf^ f 'eq. ^ P. p.
9 U. to purify &c; s*rfo, 5^ Pre- 5^nr, 55^ perf. qftfTT
P. fat. qfar^rfff-fT fut. spn^T^-rT con. >^M|5j7d , 3TTW^ aor.
^<TT^, qftClH ^ea- ST^^1 des- ^?T P» P-
10 U. ^STTTT^ to adore, to receive with honour, to present
with, Y^raftMi pre. \LHi| I (4H» ff-1^ &«• perf. ^f)^f P«
80 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
fut. £3r(*T**rfR-% fut. ST^iKi^l^-lf con. 3T^53TcI;rT aor.
g^ra^fff-FT des. sjfifrr p. p. ^SlftT^T ger. ^ffftg^ inf.
10 U. to heap together} spnifa'-erpre. ^nm^RslT-^W, &c. perfc.
1 A.f^TTar^T^^ to split, to putrify; *gft pre
perf. trrom P. fut- ar^nhj aor. Oan.—<T»r^% pre.
aor. stjfwr des. tr?r P. P.
4 A. 3?p:<TT*T* to fill, to satisfy; -q^r pre. 5^ perl
p. fut. 3m^T, ST'jft aor. Oau.-^mT^-% pre. 3^^^^ aor.
gtjn-qk des. T%£ p. p.
10 U. & 1 P. to fill, to blow, to cover; ^q-T^%, ^fg- pre.
, 35? perf. ^rftrTr, if^TT p. fut.
con.
P. P- Pass.-q^^ Pre.
10 U. ^^rrW to heap, to gather, tjpfcrfr-n-, pre. 3*S*|p?^-?r Aor.
TO 1 P. & 10. U. to gather; to collect. 3^, ^5^% pre.
SJfocTr, ^cjftrTr P ^t. ar^T^ ,3?iSo5^-?r Aor.
ojr 1 P. ^>togrow;^q:,%i)re.5^perf.^ftwn^fut.g?^^Aor.
^ 3 P. <TTOT^TOFIT: to protect, to fill, to bring outj mf^ pre.
3rfqqr: imperf . ^TTT P*rf. qi?^|^ fut. 3jgr^ Aor. fq-^T^
ben. Cau.-7T^fff-?T pre. 3WN?^-?r aor. 3£<Jft dea.
^ 6 A- sqrqm s^nqR ^ to be busy, to be active, ( mostly used
with &n ), fqrorrT pre. qaT perf. q^rf p. fut. irf^^ fnt. wffq»rT
con. s*fre ben. 3?^T «or. Pass.-f^ pre. Oau.— fn^T%-%
Dre. grfi^^-cT aor. 53$* des. ^ p. p. <^ inf,
5^ 2 A. -HM-JH to come in contact with; ^% pre. tf^% perf.
qf%rlT p- fut. oTTf%^ aor. fqqf%q^ dea. ^?F p. p.
^ 7 P. to unite, to join; £urf%> pre. qfr^ perf. qf%«q^ fut.
aiq-^fd, a°r. fMqM^ des. £^> p. p. qf%?«rr ger. q-faft^ inf.
^ 1 P. & 10 U. to hinder, to join; q^fr?r, T^7T%-cT pre.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 81
2 A. to com. in contact with; ^4.^ pro. q^ perf.
6 P. gn% to please, to delight. 331% Pre-
6 P. sftoft to please, to satisfy, tjuri?T pre. armffa. aor.
10 tJ- srgft to throw, to send; <TO*rf?ir% pre.
fat 3- 3<*r- Aor.
1 P.%^f£*rm$FSR$ to sprinkle, to kill, to give pain to;
trqffT pre. <pr$ perf. 3^^ aor. Oau.-irfof^-?r pre.
3m^ra;-tT Aor. ftqffaft des. qTOT, ^ p.p.
3 P. ^MH^ui^i: to fill, to blow? to refresh; f^rffr pre.
perf. irfcrr, ^rfmr p. fut. ^ftwrfff, q6«^t, f«t. srorffc* aor.
ben. ^^ff% or ftqrf^nt, ftqfT^I% clea. Pass.— ^ pre.
<rTT<Tn*-?t pre. 3Ttft^^-?T aor. wrf, vR^ p. p. wrf ger.
9 P. to fill. ^irr!% pre. <T<rr?C perf. &c.; see the above root.
?*<l pre. p.
10 U. & 1 P. qrR^%5 TTT% pre. q
1 P. & 10 U. to go, to shake; ^ft, ^jirr%% pre.
1 A. %^ to serve; ^r^ pre. aftfro aor.
r 1 A. %^ f^%sr^ xni% ^ to serve, to resolve-, q^et pre.
aor.
1 P. togo;^rf§rpre,
1 P. to dry, to wither; <rnrf?T pre. 3TTT^ aor.
r 1 P. *rf?rircors«^% to go, to tell, to embrace; Vfft t>re.
A. ^^ to grow, to swell, to increase; cqrqrr pre.
perf. uj|(7irll p. fnt. Miif^tijd' fut. 3fc^|fq&(|^ con.
^^rfiJtt »or. fquqifq^ des. c?rj^, ^ p.p.
t A $^fir to grow, &c.J on^T pre. <r^ perf. prnff p. fut.
fut. ^mi^d con. anm?r aor. «fl^ p.p.
P. sftmium to ask> to Be«k for; ^3 pi«% q^gp petf .
82 SANSKRIT GBAHMAB.
p. fat sr^ffi fut. 3«r$«r^ con. OTTSft^ ( WX\m dual >
aor. fpsgsm* ben. ft^t^f^T-^ defl. Pass.— 315^^ pre..
pre. ^ p.p. ST ger. JT inf.
1 A. muj|^ to become famous, to increase, to rise;
pre. TO$ perf. srforr p. fut. srfir«qW fut. awfH|«q<r con.
ansrftreaor. Can.— sr*rofir-?f pre. aTqinRT-fT aor.
del. srftff P-P-
10 U. to become famous., srori?t% pre.
&c. perf. troftctt P- fut. ai^nni^-fT «or. ffiirqftqfo^ des.
srr IP. ^t to filij xnift pre. inft perf. STRTT p. fut. ^nmfi^
aor. mm^, OTn^ben. Pass.-srprW.
ift 4 A. sftrfr to feel affection for, to be satisfied^ sfriff pre.
ftflfr perf. ^?rr p. fut. aft* aor. ir^T ben. mh?t des. xfj?f
p.p. sfl^r ger. sT5H inf.
sft 9 U. afa & to please, to take delight in; jrlonifr, sftaftlf pre.
ftxrnr> ftfW- perf. 3r?rr p. fat. !r^ft-W fut.
aor. ifhTT^ , Wrs ben. f^xflHTm-^ defl. sft^ p.p.
ift 10 U. & 1 U. ?^ot to please; sffURfft%, snn^ pre.
*Tft%, 55^%% fat. 3TfWnira[-cT, 3l5^, 3f^E aor.
5- 1 A. inft to go, to jump. spr?r pre, 55^ perf. jf^TT P. fat
snrhraor. Pass— igifc pre. Can.— inwirf?r% pre.
5^ 1 P. JT^ to rub; qfcfa pre. 5^ perf. 3nrt£ta aor.
5^ 1 P. 51% to burn; xft^S pre. ^sffr perf. sftf^r^r fat..
aor. 5EfW^» HMlfilll'S. des. s^ p.p. gjr, sf)Rrcjr,
ger.
P. ^•tff^[<r«fy«ll tf> become wet, to sprinkle, to fill;
pre. ffRff p.p. ^rf^T ger.
U. STFflOT to swing, to shake; fcft?*gft% pre.
aor. Pass.— sr^aft pre.
1 A. to go; "^ft pre. 9^rA? Aor,
89
1 U. qirfcft to be full, to be equal to-, *tuf?NT pre.
1 U. 3Hr% to eat; ^«fW pr*. 3T^ft^, 3*3%* «or.
1 P. to go; $ffir-ft pro. 3|^r aor.
9 P. to go; sr*n% pre. &qft fut. 3T$«fa[ Aor.
1 A. im> to float, to fly, to jump; ytft pre. gcg% perf.
p. fut. ^r«iT% tut, 3TgTKr?T con. aq^: aor. O
P'e. ^scjy^.^, 3Tf^5^[-fr Aor. cgrT P.p.
1 & 4 P. ^ to burn, ^jrsfif , ^^uft pre. 35^
p. fnt. t^Tfftuift fnt. ^c^jtfr^^coD. ^Tt^nft^C 1 )
( 4 ) aor. c^s ( 1 ) cgfof ( 4 ) p. p. c^r ( 1 >
( 1> 4 ) ger.
l^ to iprinkle, to fill, to be wet,
Aor. Other forms like ( 4 above ).
2 P. trgfdr to devour, to eat? q&rft P'e. <rWV perf. c^WT p.
rrorfar fut. ^mi^^ con. 3jmi4ta aor. c^rqr^,
ben. f^TTQm des. Pasf.— cfrrcr^ pre. Cau.—c*rnrtrft
pre. 3lfttf|^ aor. efnff P-P-
I P. 5fr4Nhft to behave il)5 to go loftly; qrarft pre.
perf. anrWT^ Aor. ^ffftnf P.p.
1 P. irRr^TWt: to go, to produce easiJy; qrortJI pre.
perf. qtf&nTT p. fu^. ^rqrof^, 3Hpifts aor- VWHH ben.
falft dee. Cau.— tFOTirf^.?r pre.' 3T«ft<ini|^:?T aor. <sft|?T p.p.
i ?. fihffTor to bunt, to open, to split, ^^ pre. qiffra
perf. qTO?TT p. fnt. <Ff§*in% fut. aiqrfeisir^ con. 3nqn^I^
•or. ftvf?wf^ des. 5^ ( sr^g ) p.p.
1 P. f^Tfft to go, to bear fruit, to result, to be successful;
*«ri?t pro. ftc. qrfi&fT p.p. Other forms like those of the.
above
84 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
1 P. fta*% to open, to blow ( as a flower ), graft pre,
porf. gr%rTT P. fat. grf^TT^r fat. 3Tgr%<*r^ con.
aor. H&Qsqfd des.
1 P. to goffer pre. srfi^fr fat. 31*^ aor.
g I A. f ;|}r to grow, to increase; sfeW pre. tiffcqfr fat. gr
f|<s? aor. stflw p.p.
1 P. to grow; ^frT pre.
r 1 P. 5T5% to sound j ^otlff P*e. ^^for perf, 3R-^r-oft^ aor.
1 P. to be steady; sr^fif pre. ^srTT P*T*' 3&-*n-^ aor.
1 A. f%TTfir^T> to loathe, to be disgusted with.
pre. ^rHrOTSPI^-STO-^ perf. ^T%?TT P. fat.
fut. 3TCrHf?^qrT con. ^TW^fl^ ben. 3T5frW^ aor.
t%^% des. Pass.-^hTfW% pre. 3T^r«ri?fT aor. ^hrr%fT.p
i 10 U. ^^ff^r to bind, to restrain; ^nif%, WHTW pre.
srvra: ?r Aor. srr^rr^, ^rvrmr^ ben. f%^r^mm% des.
9 P. ^rigR- to bind, to attract, to form; ^$r?f^ p/e.
perf. ^^f p. fut. vrrc^TfiT fnt. 3TW=fW?[ con. 3T*TT?f€
n. fif^r?^m des. Pass.—^-q^ pre. Oau.
pre. g^ir?^-^ aor. «T^[ p.p. ^;^r ger.
U. to Mnd4 5F\nnK% pre. ^7^^^^^-^K &c. perf,
^T^^^-rr Aor. fw*rpfal%% des. Pas8.-^r^r% pre.
1 P. to go.x^f?r pre. ^ pexf . ^f%cTT p. fut.
1 A. ^KMrT!iir^rrar^T%5 to speak, to give, to hurt;
pre.^Wf perf. amf^Aor.
10 U. fj^rrof ^rrnrt fr^fr ^ kill; to speak, &c.;
pre. 3T^f^-rT Aor.
1- P. STTOR qHimilra% ^r to live-, to hoard grain;
pre. ^r$y perf. srf&cTT P- fut. H^T^ aor.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 85
10 U. STTofr to breathe ; 3^nf^r-% pre.
4 P. w^ to stop; ^rra pre. g^rtf perf. ^fefr p, fut.
aor
1 A. arrpjsq- to bathe, to dive; ^r^ft pre. «ro% perf.
Aor
1 A. 3H€% to oppress, to torment ; vt^ pre.
^TTvfaT p. fut. ^mfanr fut. 3*5rrpi**re con.
Oau.— -^rqtn^-it pre. 3T^5Tr\rg;-?r aor. Pass.
ST^Tlvr aor. vft«T P. P. ^Tf5rc5rr ger. sm^gi* in'.
1 p ajran^r to swear, to curse, to shout-, %sft pre. ft>?
perf. %forr P. fut. 3T%^rg; aor.
l P. 3T^q% to split, to divide; fSr^fff pre. ftri^ perf.
ftp3[rrr p. fat.
6 P.^r^ to break; i%m pre. (%%$y perf. >%«TT p. fat.
3T%c5T<J: aor. 10 U. %OTf3r-?Jr pre. &c.
4 P. £q^or ^ to throw, to instigate, to go; f^RTHf pre-
fHfr perf. %%«qr% fut. 3^f%^ Aor.
1 P. & 10 U. *rnot to bark, to speak; f^fk, f^^fH-^ pre.
1 U. ^t^^ to know, to mark, to esteem; ^faf^-?r Pr«
f 4tM, ^f% perf. «rmjar p. fut. ^f^^w-?r fut. arwhnNr^-f
con. 3Tf^, wnfTcC, 3T€lTTO aor. Cau.— ^tvnn?r-ff pre
^Cf^-«T aor. fgfwlT%, f^tf^TTrt-?T de3. Pass.—
pre. ^^"Tf^ aor. ^for p. p. ft^T, ^TW^T ger.
4 A. to know, to understand ; ^-q*ff P'«- ^^ perf.
p. fut. ^ff^im fut. arwmtfrT con. 3T^^[t 3T^tf^ aor. -
ben. ^^f^r% des. Pass.-^rjr pre. Cau.-5rvi?ir^-^ pre
P. P- !^T ger. ^t^ inf.
10 U. to sink, to plunge;
perf. ^raforTr p. fut.
4 P. to discharge, to emit ; ^^m pre. f^t^ perf.
86
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
10 U. to honour, to treat Honourably*
sarorannf-^ perf. f^rftm p. fat.
15 1 P. &ft to grow, to increase; wfl% pre. ^*f perf.
p. fat. */i«n%
6 P. 3<i*rt to work;
sing. ) perf.
p. p.
COD.
pre.
fat
aor.
2nd
. Can.—
ger.
to grow, to roar ;
dee.
1 P.
izirnT fat. nf <hj aor.
1 A. S[^?ir to strive; %f?t pre.
2 U. oQlfflrat ^fT% to speak
^% perf. ?nur p. fnt.
aor.
pre. ^f perf.
aor.
pre.
10 U.
perf.
oen. Pass. —
pre
con.
pre. Oau.
aor.
p. p. 33FETT ger.
inf.
to kill, to hnrt;
P. fat.
aor.
fat.
P™.
des.
1 U. see ww.
10 U. 3T^% to nse, to eat, to bite;
perf. *TsrfmT p. fat.
aor TfCSqra;, ^n^^ ben.
pre. ^T%tf p. p. ^^f^T Ker.
1 U. ^<4iUT^ to serve, to take possession of, to choose, to
honour ; *TSfTK% pre. ^rr^T, ^% perf. ^fiftf p. fat. ^^rr%%
con. 3!^T^rra[, 3WTU aor. ^PTTH , VT^fi'sj ben.
ben. Pass.— *ren% pre. 3THT1% aor. Oau.— T
pre. stfhnfH^ aor. ^nii p. p. *nR*r ges.
DH'ATUKOSHA. * 87
10 U. mnofr to cook, to giro, *nnrf?M* pro
&c. perf. xrnrfarr P. frt. arflinra-* aor. f**r*
*>^ 10 U. mrorf $ti <* to speak, to illumine ; *wn?Ht pro.
«WreTS.-rT aor.
P 3Tmt% to spilt, to disappoint, mff% pre. **rer perf.
p. fat. *^^rf?T fut. 3m^$*T3 con.
ben. f%*33T?JT des. Pass.— ^^ pre.
Oaa.-^3flfTTi^% pre. 3^?^^-^ aor. ^|r p.p.
ger . n inf.
1 P. $cft to receive wages, to nourish; *T5TT^ pre.
P. frit.
A, fTR«n?ot to upbraid, to jest; *r<n^T pre, 3Hifj%- perf.
p. fut. ann^r aor.
10 U. 5F?qrct ^^ XTcTrcot ^ to make fortunate, to cheat 5
r^> &€• P«rf . Htil'RrrTr p. fnt.
aor. Aho 1 P. wr^KT pre. 3fWJ#T5 *or'
1 P. 5is\ to speak, to call ; wife pre. ^rroT perf. trftfim P«
fut. ^rm«mt fut. awfar , 3rnTofKaor. firwiT&des. Pats-
aor. ^rot?r p.p. ^foafT ger.
10 A. ( rarely P. ) to menace, to threaten, to abuse, to
deride; *rfif*T?r pre. ^fangf*? perf. W^nfaT p. fut. a^-
aor. firHf^I^T des.
1 A. qftyrqml^|^lH<| to speak, to kill, to give5
aor.
10 A. 3TnfO¥% to see; HTcJ^TT pre. H|^|o.*d^ &c. perf.
^r5jft?TT p- fat. MhTOfT aor.
1 A. ^r?Wrorf^rr^5 to describe, to wound, to giver
pre. «TH^ perf. ^f^rTT P- fnt. Wtrfwz aor. qfeft p.p.
88 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
1 P. to bark, to rail against- w% pre. ^TT* pert <rft?rr
p, fat. 3T*tfr^aor. ft^Affir des.
3 P. HfH^^t'- to censure, to blame, to shine $ 3?rffcT P*e.
perf. ( used in the Vedas only ).
2 P. $& to shiffe, to appear, to be ; *m% P*e.
3rd pi. Imperf. ^xft perf. *n<TT P. fat. grortfr^aor. Pass.—
aor. Oau.— i*mfiT% Pre- OTTXTIiT-rT aor.
10 U. ^r^T^T to divide; *nnrft% pre.
perl iTf3Tftrrr p. fut- aW^nrnr-rT aor.
p- p.
1 A. SKTO to be angry ; jrrjra pre. ir^^ perf.
aor.
1 A. to speak, to call ; >frn?r pre. WT% pe'f. ^rri^TT p. fat.
aor. 10 U. also 3T*»TR?r-rT aor.
A. f^nmif arr?tS3CT*r ^ to oeg, to obtain • fir^ pre.
perf. ftr%rTT p. fat. mr%«^ fat. «rf5rt%E aor. Cau-pRT-
pre. 3rf^ft$rg;?T Aor.
7 U. f^rfdr to separate, to break down ;
perf. ^r=?fT P- fat. "^Tf^m-^ fut. 3^^?^??-^ con.
T (ST^rrrnr dual ), STT^TT aor. Cau -
Aor. fiffeir^T des. %fir
Aor. f^RT ( also f^RT ). P-P-
l P. to div:de, to cut. ft?^ pre. firf^ perf.
Aor. Pass.— fK^^RT pre.
3 P. ^r to fear, to be anxious about ; fir^1% pre. fihfnT or
c. perf. ^rff p. fat. WTIff fat. 3TH«I?T con.
. HPTT^ben. fir^P?r^ des. Pass.-wr^ pre
aor. Cau.— HT^mS, <IT^, >fT^^ Pre. artfr^
Aor. %fw^, %vrifn%; %$f?T freq. *<T p.p
DHA'TUKOSHA. 89
6 P. &(%& to bend, to curve-, g^TTiT pre. ftfnr perf.
p. Int. 3nfr$n^ aor. gg- P. P.
7 U. qTOTTWreSTC'lt: to protect-, 3^*% ( A. ) to eat, to
consume, to enjoy, ( P. ) to rule, to govern-, ^ntf, gijr pre.
ftrPF P- fut. *TT$qm-?T fut. 3f*ft$^-<T coil.
aor- S^TS, ^f^T ben. f^rft des. Pass.—
aor. f^q, 9T^m» THTT *eq. g^ p. p.
) 1 P. ( rarely Atm. ) to be, to live, to be bornj
pre. ^^, ^^ perf. *rforr P- fufc-
?T dea. Pass.-^j^ prd. ^nf%?n, >Tl%cTr p. fnt.
fut. awr^ aor. wir<fi^ ifirfWlS fcen. Cau -*rrgpn^% pre.
$f p.p.
10 A. srnft to attain, to obtain; ^TT^% pre. *«i^q|^8h perf.
P. fut. aj^TTOcT aor. ^T^ft^t^ ben.
10 U. (3TTO5^r) to be purified, to consider, to mix;
PT pre. qreqiyelSK-^ perf. >?r?rfqrTT p. fut.
aor. HTSirn, ^RTI^f ben.
P. ( Wd$\\ ) to adorn; \grft pre. &%$ perf. T^R?TT p. fut.
Aor.
10 U. to adorn*, ^nriff-?r pre. ^^^o-^^TT-^1 &c. perf.
p. fut. 3Tf ^5^-rT Aor. ^n^ , ^^filll^ ben.
des. Pass -^cg^, 3?^T? Aor. igfqfT p. p.
1 U. «rrnr to nourish, to fill; ^T?ff-?r pre. ^TTT-^ perf .
TStifi p. fut. 'trRarfir-fT fut. ar^Khr 9
ben. f^ft-*, ft«?T*rf?T-?t des.
freq. Pass.-fini^. ^(T p. p.
SANSKRIT QRAHMAB.
3 U. MRnm^t^r: to hold, to support; ftwfa, f^fr pro.
TOTT, *fr^ fWT>TOTT-^T &c. perf. vtft p. fut.
fat. 3T*fma-. 3T£?T aor. f*>ri?*17T, 3Wl8 deB
pre. awrfr tor. Caa.-infiTO% pro. atfhrra-rT aor.
1 A. «r£% to parch, to fry; *nfo pre. *^ perf.
fat. 3rirfS aor. ^fSnft^ ben. Can.-^3nn^%; ^HUJ
de». PasB.-wgrii^ pre. gr^f^ aor. ^F P- P-
4 P. awra* to fall down; ^rift pre. ^r?T pe»f.
fut. 3T^r^ Aor. TO p. p. irflrw, -^T.
9 P. to fry, to reproach, to support; wuma" Pr«.
WrTT, *TfhTT P- ^t. 3?^nfl^ Aor. IJTJT p. p.
1 U. V^ itfft ^ to be afraid, to go; w*T-3T P'O.
fut. srWr^ , ar^n^ Aor. ^rr^, ^^r ben.
1 A. 3(93r*r* & 4 P. 3?>i:q?T^ to fall, to decline, to escape;
¥T3T?T, W5*n% pre. ^wfT, TO^T perf. wffcrarr P. fat.
fut. . 3njf3T^ 3TflT^T^; 31^51^ aor.
aor. T%W%^-fT dea. >TTfl^^, S
P. P. *%?^rr, OTT ger
1 A. &. 4 P. to fall down; ifclK, WTli pre. (same aa
with the change of ^ for »^)
1 U. ar^ to eat; ^^rm% pre. ^W?T-^ perf yfsKrr P- fut-
aor.
1 P ^TS> to sound; ^oif^ pre. ^^nr perf. wfoirTr p. fat,
oft^, snnofta: aor.
1 'sra^ & 4 CTreroiir P. to roam about, to totter;
*rwrfiT pre. gr>nfT, ( ^WW^, SffiTO 2nd sing. ) perf.
p. fut. ^m^mff fat. (IP.) arflift^ ( 4 P. )
aor. Oau.-^rjrirf^ pre. 3TISTfflT^ Aor. f^Tirftrf fo des.
WTff, ^vnfn%, *«Tf%T freq. P*98.-wWT?r P'e. BTW^T aor.
P. P« wfflTf^r, ¥TTn:*T ger.
DHA'TUKOBHA. 91
1 A. arofa^ to fall; WOT pre. **$ ?'•*•
tJ. <rr$ to fry, to parch; ^srfS% P*e.
perf . WET, *IST P. fut. w$*rra-?
, snra, auri »or. jpin^ 5^^, H??rhr ben
pre. swfir, 3nrf«r «or. Oau.—
^T^THr^^T, M^M^-fT aor. w^ p. p. >^f, «f£n inf.
l A. fpHT to shine, to beam; *nfit P'e. ^rr9r, ^T p«rf.
P. fut. mfa^d fot- srFifif^ »or. u^^^^^ ben.
pre. 3ff^«lT^-fT, 3T^«T3T^-rT aor. ffWlfn^
dea. Pa88.««T^I?f pre. 3WTf5T aor. WTT%?T P.P.
( VcJTST,) 1 & 4 A. ^nft to shine; WT^IH, ^T^3rW, pre. V5TTJt-¥Sr
perf. mf^idr p. f»t. 3wf5re aor- OT^r'fr? ben.
pre. anrffT^T^-fT aor. fqirftiq^ des. Hf%fT pp. «r%5^ inf.
— same as above.
9 P. ^ *Rtir f^Ti? to tear, to protect; feoufo ^mn%i P*e.
mmr perf. ^^T^ fut. ^shtfat Aor-
6 P. arrs^r^T *y*% to cover, to collect; g^fa pre. f^rc
f ffiTO (as this is ^nn%,), P«rf- jrf?^r p. fut. 3?^^ Aor-
10 A. 3Tn5nft?T^^: to wish, to put confidence in.
pre. ^TOIITT*^* perf. ^prfqcfT P. fat. s^fVOIrT Aor. y
ben. oifWT des.
1 A. Tuft to shine, to glitter; ^^ pre. f%&% perf.
^f%^ tut arefa^ Aor.
1 U. w »Tfff ^T to go, to be afraid: vrf KT-?T pre.
perf. arerfro Aor.
1U. to eat-, ¥5J^m% P'e. ^v^QT-^v^ perf.
Aor.
92 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
> changing ^ to w.
:»
W (see n ^O- 3
TT
OT 1 A. ^fr to grow; P. ^rr^nit ^hft ^ to speak, to shinej
fffTTT p. fat. 3Tlff5^r ^TR^T^ Aorc
n. Pass.— jf^r^ fRlif^W-f^ des. wffrT p. p-
10 U. to speak, to shine; ^sftiufff-ff fut. 3T«Wf 3;rT Aor.
1 A. to go, to move; TTg&ft* pre. JTRis perf. 3Tflfs^ aor.
1 P. ^nw to accumulate, to he angry; TT^ITC pre. vnr^T
1 P. ifrft to go, to creep; ITOTft P'e. PTRT^ perf. JTT^frrr ?•
1 A. HU^H to adorn; irj;^- pre. jm|r perf. H%rTr p. fat.
ITf 1 P. Jfrft to go; fffft pre. HRf perf. iTilrTr p. fat.
" aor. Pass.-irf qft pre. am% aor.
9f|p IP. to go, to move; ( same as abo?e ).
•\
ITff 1 P. inrs% to adorn, to deoorate; jr^-.f^ pre. imy perl.
^ lifter p. fat. 3T*Nfa; aor. Pass.-H^7>r
1 A. vrarr^ft 3TTT*^ ^c!% ^T to move quickly, to start; to
begin, to cheat; ifrref pre. mq perf. wftcTT P. fat 3T«nRT
aor. Hnnfte ben.
I A. ^r^r c^r«i% ^^Hf ^ to cheat, to be wicked, to boast, to
pound; H^ pre. R% perf. prf^rfTT P- fat- 3TRf%^T aor.
i A. VTFofT^iq^HH^ to hold, to grow high, to go, to adore;
to shine- jr-j^T pre. HH% pe'f- m^cTT P. fat. 3TRT^E »or.
10 U. 5T5> to sound; uajrof^fr pre.
perf. irSffifcfT P. fat. 3Tftw^^-?T aor.
DHA'TTJKOSHA. 93
jr?r 1 P. fV^H^rRR^ n to grind, to dwell, to go ;
perf. msar p. fat. arngr^ aor.
A. 511% to remember with regret, to long for; nufld perf.
RHU4 perf. HnferTT P- fat. 3T«foro aor.
1 P. sis to sound, to murmur; tmft pre. TOP* perf. Rfifcn1
p. fat. 3TJrofrer aor.
P. ^qnjru[ to decorate oneself } irtT^IH pre. R^U^- perf.
nfu^HI p. f^t. flfa^ajf^ fut. 3TRTT5T3; aor. ira^r^ ben. Can.
-R<r3TTfiT-?T pre. 3TCTR°^-<T aor. WWm^qiW des.
1 A. f^iTT^ to distribute. *T<r^T pre. WRay perf.
p. fut. ^rf^^ fat. 3Tl?fa^^ aor. ^f^W ben.
des. Paae. — Rn^r pre. 3Tflfo^ Aor.
U. to adorn ;• iTO^^f^-a" pre. RU^^n^r^-^r?R &c. perf.
p. fat. 3T»mtl^-tT aor.
1 P. A9t?^ to stir, to churn ; wra^f^T fnt. am«ih( Aor.
Can.— wm^iw% 'e. STlTm^-fT aor.
4 P. 5«T5^TRifT: to be glad, to be in a pitiable condition;
re. OTF? perf. n$cffp. ^t. R^fS fat. ^mfa-
aor- Can.— n^7jRr% ( WT^I1%% to madden, to ine-
briate ) pre. anfrffl^-rT aor. ft«R[int des.
Hmm ^ req. Pass, mx pre. 3TflTf^, 3=WT^ aor. j^f p.p.
10 A. qffiraft to please •, RT^ff pre. WT^ing% p
p. fut. msfifSK* fufc. snfm^r aor. RT^mrsr ben.
des. Paas.-RreKT pre. 3TRT1^ aor. «r^r p.p.
4 A. ^fT% to know, io think j n?^W pre. ^ perf. i^nfT p.
fut. Wtt ^t. 3Tm^fT con. 3TR^ aor. «tfrST ben. WR?Tflr des.
Oau.— ^T^niTa-% pre. 3TvfmR^-(T aoif. JTO^rft, R^^rf^, HWT-
F??T, & freq. R?T p.p. Rf^T ger. Rr^ inf.
8 A. 3Tw€mqf to consider, to esteem ; jyg^ pre. &^ perf.
RftHTp. fnt.
H. 8. O. 42.
94 SANSKRIT QBAKMAR*
2nd §ing. arnftft 1. «ing. ) mor, fanft«r?r des. afsfcgn iaf.
Can. &c., — see the above root.
10 A. *<Ti:* to be proud. RTTOW pre. flraOTSPft perf.
I%T p. fat. 3TfTw^T aor. RMftfo ben.
Pass.— RT«JH pre. jrrfta p.p.
IO A. sjfftrforrenf to consult, to ad vine, to speak;
( sometimes, flr^afrf also ) pre. Hraimsgfc perf. Rr^iqirr P.
fat. 3^j^5T?T aor. u<M^m?T des.
& 9 (^rar^) P. to churn, to agit%te;
pre. ( traCT Impera. 2nd sing. 9 oonj.) RIV^T perf. Yrf^qilT P.
fat. nf^sqiS fat. STIT^T^ aor. troTT^ ben. T^TH^^I% <^e«.
Pass.— *?%2I% pre. sm^iT aor. Cau.— .*T?OTf^-flf pre. «m-
aor. HTRWT?*, WT«wrflf?T, WTRf?rT f req. wfiwf P- p.
g«r. w?^ (1) !T€cr?J (9) pre. p.
1 P- f?^fH^5r5nfr: to kill, to torment; 3RW*nT pre.
perf. m^IrTT p. fa*. WP^^qf^ fat. 3?!??^ aor.
pre. 3TfTT>*J aor. i?f?«nf p.p. m^T**r ger.
L A. >gmm^H<H«»lPd»Tia^ to praise or be praiied, to be
glad, to laijqnisb, to sleep, to shine, to loiter; ifT^Jf pre.
«nr^ perf. Ri^ai p. fat. ^f^cim fnt. 3TRT^^ aor.
ben. Pft8s.-«yq|r pre.
1 P. •ufr to go, to move; ireft pre. Rir^f perf.
fat. snnfi aor
1 A. to go, to move; m* pro. WIW perf.
ben.
10 U. 3T«% qfOt ^ to take, to sound, to go, to injure;
Vm% pre. ireirrsrcrr.^riK &c. perf. RWfTr p. fat.
11 »or irsq^, R^ft^fi^ ben.
1 P. to go, to move; wifo pre. **{ perf.
DHA'TUKOBHA. 95
1 P. <jtfT to fill; R^ pre RR$ perf. wftrTT p. fat.
aor. Oau. — to sound- treirfft-ft pre.
1 A. & 10 U. *TTTO to hold, to possess-, R^, R^gr^ pre.
&c. perf.
1 A. to hold, to possess ; Rgffl" pre. same as above.
1 P. ^^r fiforof ^ to fasten, to bind, to kill; R*ft pre.
RRT* perf. JTf^fTT p. fut. 3TRCra;, STHTCr^ aor.
1 P. 3TS> ^ ^T to bu/z, to be angry ; JTSlfr pre.
perf. nf^TfTT p. fut. STR^fT^T, STRTt^firaL aor-
1 P. ff^rgt 5T5^f ^ to hart, to destroy ; fnft pre.
perf. RTOT P. fat. 3TR-RT-fr^ aor.
4 P. qr?Rm to weigh, to change from; wilS pre.
perf. RTOrft P. fat. 3TRTO aor. am p.p. Rmg^ inf.
1 A. to go, to move; R^^ pre. Rjrf% perf. Rf^rTT p. fut.
5Rf^«I^ fat. 3TW7TO aor.
P. ^-^r to bathe, to sink, to purify ; R^fM pre.
(RRfsHT, JTRJ^l 2nd aing. ) porf. JT^T p. fat.
fut. 3TRf$fai; ( 3rd dual 3TRT^TH ) aor. R^2JT?C ben.
des. Cau.-R3rq^ pre. 3TRR«f^ fT aor. Pass.-R«r^, JT?T p.p.
1 P. & 10 U. ^nTTfl[, to honour, to delight, to increase;
JTfft, *mf?Ntpre. RRTJ, Rfi?r3a*K-^f &c. per/.
W|l"ydl p. fat. 3TR^t^, 3TRRf^[-?T aor. f^Rf%TTff, ftRf
?f dea. Can. (conj. 1 )-Rr^lf?r-ff, 3T^TRf^-cT aor.
pre. Rff«T p.p.
10 A. ^HFITHto honour; Rfhr^ P". R<tqni% &c. perf.
fat. 3TRtf^ Aor.
2 P. RT^T to measure, to limit, to compare with, to form, to
show, &c; wrft pre. inft perf. HmT p- fat. RTWlft fat.
con. 3TRtff aor- ^T D8D- fw?«f& des.
96 £? AN SKB IT GRAMMAR.
freq. Pass.— jfta?r pre. amif* aor. Oau.—
?r pre. 3Tlfra<T^-<T aor. forT p.p. fw^F ger.
3 & 4 A. to measure, &c ; froiH, WWT pre. irfr perf.
p. f ut. mWcT fat. 3TRT«f aor. Rrate ben. m*T?f des . lor
other forms see the above RT.
1 P. ^t^rmr^ to wish, to desire • miff^r pre.
1 A. nqfTffren* *t> »eek knowledge, JTTRm?f p*e.
Rf^?TT P. ^t. 3TlfriTfT%^ aor.
des. Can .-^tfmi^d.-fT aor. Pass. —
pre. 3Tlfmir% aor. jfTRT7%T p. p.
10 A. ?rf^ to stop, to be proud; tfRir^ pre.
, Aor RT5ffa^fTgr ben.
10 & 1 P. ^TCTT^to honour, to worship.
pre. 3TfftfR3, STW^ Aor. TPTIfT^mm, ffifRTmiff des.
P. Hg%yit to seek, to chase; m*W§r pre. JRRT$T perf.
mftflT P *ut. aTRHfi^ aor. fflTRTfnfRf des. Pass.—
pre. 3TRTPr aor. «
10. U. to seek for, to go, to decorate. JTrfcrft-af pre.
^%, &c. perf. RpfrQ^r p. **
aor. irrrqf^ , WrnRffT^T des. *rrf»nT P. P.
[ 10 U. ^ ^r ^r to sound, to purify, to wipe-
pre. m^Hr^ir-^%, &o. perf. jrnri%r p. f«t,
aor. m^mr, Hnfftfre ben. ft*rnn3<?m-it des.
T% 6 U. srjreut to throw, to scatter, to measure; finrfd,
pre. irm, TR^T peif. RMT p. fut. RTTOS-ff
amrFcT aor. jffcTRr , *mfi^ ben. m?Ff?H<r deg-
pre. Cau. — RmnT ft pre. HmR^tT aor. firftp. p.
U. wvnf^OTt: to unite, to understand, to hurt, to seize;,
pre. ffirw, ftffift'perf. ftft?rr.p. fat.
aor. ffr«rr, %wff^ ben.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 97
1 A. ttffi to be unctuous, to melt, to love; S^t pre.
.M^P:fat.3Tm^,3TRl$s aor. trf^fe ben.
, fftftf^T des. Oau.-^r^ri?T% pre.
P- P. fof*r*T, Wfc*T ger.
4 P. to melt, &c., SwpT pre. fRifcr perf . ftr^n p. f ut.
aor. %-* des.
U. ( aee f*nOSr*f?T% pre. &c.
1 P. & 10 U ( eee ft^ 1 A. ); m^f^, ffir^fMt pre
p. u. ar!7f 3Tmrf^-rT aor.
to honour, to sprinkle; fflf?^ pre.
aor.
6 U. t*IR to join, to be united; ftaft-it P^e. fflWoJ,
perf . Rr%cTT P. fut. feftrarfHt f at. 3T^fi5^g;-rT oon.
or 3TRT^ aor. ftl^%q^-^. TR^^m-?r des.
pre. 3rfcf§T aor. Oau.-%55?iT?r% pre. 3T«Tf&3^-fT aor.
P- P. f^fcJ^T* *ri%f*r ger.
1 P. ^T^ fn^ ^ to make a sound or noise, to be angry;
Sr^rfiT P'e. f?lr^ perf. *j%cfr P. fnt. aT^r^aor.
10 U. ^r% to mix, to mingle; ffttnri^-!r pre.
. perf. ft^fqrsnr P. fat. 3TWf&^-rT aor.
en. mffPHT5^% des. mmcT p.p. T?toffc*T ger.
P. to open the eyes, to look at. fR^fS pre. ft^ perf
p. fat. 3TR^ra[ w. fwftmm, fR^rmf^ des.
1 P. ^TTK to wet, to sprinkle; Irafft pre. &c. see the above
root, fftfrori, *rft?^T, ffirgr ger.
1 P. %^T to make water, to wet; wsfff P™. mife perf. *T?T
p. fat. R^nt fut. 3TT%^^ aor. f«f«T^f^ des. Cau.-R^f^-^
pre. 3T*mRf^-fT aor. rifa p.p. ifrff^r ger. ^§1* inf.
4 A. ft«r«Tf ( fi?*re srrarT^tiT: ) to die, perish; jft^ pre.
98 OANSKRIT GBAHMAB
ft^T per/. SparW fat. 3^^ aor. mrfufc des. C»u.-nnnil?r-?t
pre. 3Tifow<r-?T aor.
*ff ^ U. fiforaTflC to kill, to lessen, to change, to be lost
tftenfir, iftsfft pre. irift, ft^ p«*f. «r?rr p. fat. awrffr^
aor. jfrqr^, WTffre bep. iSffrtfr-W des. Pass.—
pre. Cau.— RTTOfS-lt pre. 3T*fm^-<T aor. jflcf p.p.
ger.
1 P. & 10 U. ^?ft to go, to understand; Rqf^, «nnj<?r-^ P*e.
fronr, Rnnin^R-^^, &c. perf. ^?rr, wT^rftcTT p. fut. 3^^
aor.
iftr? 1 P. f*5TO to close ( as the eyes ); to twinkle, to be*
closed or shut ( as the eyes of flowers ), to meet, to
cause to shut; iftdfl pre. forfrw perf. jfr^rr P. fatfc
aor. AifltS^ft dei.
P. **Jte^ to grow fat; to move jfouft pre. mrfr«T
p. fut. srrfrfftTO aor.
1 A. cfegch^ to deceive, to cheat;
3Tg]%ar aor.
6 U. ffrgrot to loose, to set free, to leave, to abandon;
p*e. s^r, 55% Perf- WT^T p. fnt.
3T5^ aor. g^n^, g$fte ben.
iutran. ) des. Oau.-^r!5rq%% pre. 3TiJg^5-fT aor.
g^f^F ger.
or 553^; 1 P. & 10 U. $T5^ to cleanse, to purify, to sound.
1 P. to *r$^ to crush, to grind, to kill, tfrefif pre. gRt£ perf
WffefT P. fit. 3mufta aor-
6 P 3Tr$lMHJmfVR% to blame, to crush, to bind; 557^ pre
See the above root.
DHA'TUKOSHA.
10 U. %^rar% to pound, to break; jJiOTffl'-a' pre
aor.
to crash, to grind; gajftf pre. J^Ud perf.
r*
p. fut.
1 A. trra^r <renR *T *o protect, to run away; j£<r<r% pre.
perf. ?jr1jyrTTp.fut.3TSniro aor. gfoyfrgrbeD. Pass.^o^f pre.
P. igv^ to shave, to grind; grnrff P*r. ggOT psrf. gfuadT
p. fut. 3TSV?tct aor. Ssfo^fTff des. Cau.-gg^uj^-?f pie.
aor.
A. m$R wsft m to sink; gcr^t pre.
p. fat. 3Tgra?re aor.
6 P. srfjqTT^ to promise-, ^on^ pre. gam perf. flTforfTT p»
fnt. ararofra; «or.
1 A. 5$ to rejoice, to be glad; JTT^ Pre- 5ET Perf
p. fat. ^Tft^g^ fut. 3TOTTT? aor. ^TTfTOT ben.
Hlftf^a' des. gf^rf, Htf^tT p. P.
10 U. ^«f to mix, to blend, to purify; tfr^Q--^ pre.
^ttf^fc Pfcrf. RT^WrTT P- f^t. 3^5^-^ aor.
* P. 3%S^ to cover; g^ pre. g^T^ perf. 3TmCra[ aor.
1 P. Wf^g^T^nfT.' to faint, to become senseless, to grow,
to prevail, to be match for; q^fft Pr®. fg^tf Per^. ^
p. fut. 3T«J^T$ aor. *l^^TcT ben. Can.-^x^tud-ff pre.
aor. g^^OTT^ des. ^f%?T, ^JT P-P.
1 P. «rf\r> to bind, to tie; &l\$ pre. gg£ perf0 gftfTT p.
3Tg€r^ aor.
See .
9 P. ^ to steal, to carry off; gcorri^ pre. g^ror 2nd sing.
Impera. gjfrq" perf. Rtf^TT P. fQfc
100 SANSKRIT GRAMMAS .
•or. g^rac ben. ggfirofit des. gffa p.p. gftcWT, *HPV ger.
4 P. JJTJS^ to cleave, to divide- gwfif pre. g*t«r per*.
10 U. ^fcrfi* co heap up, to gather; g^rof^f pre.
pert gprforTTP. fut. 318HW^-<T aor.
4 P. |f%^- to faint, to swoon, to fall, to err, to be foolish.
5UW Pre- 5«Tf perf. «rff?rT, ^r^TT or tfrgT p. *o
or j?T^Rr ^t. amtft'sq-gr^RY^nr con. 3T5f9[aor-
or gg^rfS des. Pass.-g^ pre.
pre. ar^gf^ff aor. 5?^ or. q$ p.p.
ger. Rh%gn, Rti^, Ht[ inf.
1 A. ^r% to fasten, ts tie; i&fa pre. 55% perf .
1 P. srmSTOn* to be firm, to stand f ast- ^rf^ pre.
perf; i|f§jcTT p. fut. 3Ti|5fig;aor. gijf^^r des.
aor.
10 U. ffaft to plant, to sprout;
^fSK part w^ftrTr P. ^t. »lf g^^f aor.
des. $i&3 p. p.
1 P. *?r> to rob, to plunder; »prm pre. g^ perf.
aor. gijr^fS des. Oau.-rm^% pre. 3?83]TCC-ff aor.
6 A. * STTOTfUlifr to die., to perish- fifaft pre. JTRfT I»rft
p. fut. RR«m% fat. 3T5 ?T aor. ^fhj ben. g*rqr|W des. Pass —
T%*m pre. Cau.-JTK*rHT-fr pre. ^*fm^-?f aor. q$ p.p.
inf. ^r?^T ger. and the Desiderative.
* It is Parasmaipadi in the Perfect, the two Futures, the
Conditional and the Desiderative.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 101
1 P. *Tf T?T to strike, to collect; ^rar pre. im^ perf.
aor.
4 P. <?T?snrrr to seek, to hunt, to examine,, to beg;
perf. jrffcrr p. fut. jjfJpsrfir fat. 3W*!T^ aor. 5|flt?T p.p.
10 A. 3F**oir to seek, &c.? ^*ra?r pre. ^»Rrna% perf.
p. fat. 4£J|ftujH fut. 3TM^*ld aor. mifq^Vg ben.
des. Pass.— ^nra pre. 3Tf nt aor.
1 P. ^T^T$yfT^t: to wipe etcj irriflH pre. HITTW perf . ( See
the root below ).
2 P. §FjfV to wipe off, to rule, to carry ( as a hone ), to
adorn; *rfs pre. xnrr£ perf. nrfSr?TT or uref p.
or wr?p5f?r fut. amtm^r^-amr^ con. amT^ or
aor. ^nrra: DeD- ft^^Tff, WRrfS^ dea. Pass.— ^jq^ pre.
?mfif aor. Can.— RnfaffMr pre- 3T*mT^-?T 3TRT?3T^-?T, aor.
^£, *m*RT p. p.
10 U. ^^TcJp^T.' to wipe off &c.; ^Tsftrm^ p
, perf. msft^n p. fat. nn*fo«*<<T% fat.
aor. Pass.— HT3$t pre. STRlfif aor.
6 &^9 P. ^^IH to be gracious, to pardon, to be delighted;
and S^fTfa pro. JITO perf. ^fifcTT P. fat. 3mrffa[ aor.
6 P. fjfanTTH to kill, to destroy; ^nn?r pre. JTJTO? perf.
off^aor.
9 P. ^1^ to press, to crush, to kill, to rub off; ^jrjn^ pre.
TO$ perf. Hf^ p. fut. nf!*^ fut. 3TRT3r^TrTx con.
aor. Pass.— ^TH pre. 3fj|f| aor. Oau.— «^qi?r-ff pre.
or aTRlT^-rT aor. fimf^rfir des. ^cT p. p.
1 U. 3733 ( fJffnTTf ^T ) to be moist, to hurt, to kill, ( in the
Vedas ) to dieregard; mfj^T pre. JTR^ or jr^ perf.
aor. *fW, ^WT ger.
102 SANSKRIT GRAMMAK.
6 P. 3JTJT5i% to touch, to shake, to consider; ^iVd pre.
? perf , RET or ^^ p. *ut. ^^ft^ or a^rfff fut.
aor. m^$rfft des. Pass.— -^qar p
aor. Oau.— JT^fafiT-iT pre. ^jfT^^T^-cT or STRwr^-fT aor.
P. P. S£T ger.
1 P. %^ to sprinkle, to bear; jjqiH prt. R^i perf.
p. f ut. 3Wr% aor. Oau.— jrfoft% pre. 3T«H^-r
aor.
1 U. ^Tf^r to bear, to sprinkle; jrq^% pre. ( See the follow-
ing root for the other forms ).
4 U. fm^TST^ *o suffer, to allow, to pardon; ^naim% pre.
or TT^q- perf. *ffar p. fut. Ri^f^-?T *Qt, 3TR^ or
aor. ffomf^ des. Pass. — q**ft pre. Oau.— -
pre. ^T%^T qft^T, ger.
10 U. to suffer &c.; OT?rfS% pre. imT^i^TT-^, P«rf.
RrTT p. fut. ^jfT^T^-cT, 3TRlTOC-rT aor.
9 P. if*T<lT^to hurt, to kiU- ^oiri^ pre. TOT* perf.
or nrftHT p. fut. RK^lS or RfrofiT ^t. 3TOTflH aor.
des.
1 A. sjfor^TflT to exchange, to barter; qift pre. HPT perf.
p. fut. RTWf?T fut. arerccT aor. RT^fl^ ben- ffrr^ des. Oau.—
pre. anfmq* X aor. Pass.— jfni^ pre. 3THTI^ aor.
P. to be mad; «rjf^, ff^m pre.
1 U.^TT^R^: to know, to hurt; fc^-% P'e. ft^T-^lf
perf. RfafTT p. fut. sr^TW aor.
1 U. ( ^fft ) to meet ( See the above root )
I A. ^ to go, to move; ?rq% pre. ftlft perf. 3T«fq^r aor.
1 A. %^% to worship, to attend upon; ^r*?t pre.
1 P. & 10 U. to release, to loose, to shedj
pre. 5^r^T, *fh^l^fel*K~;q% perl.
DHA'TUXOSHA. 103
IP. 3TV3T% to repeat in the mind, to learn, to remember,
to praise ( in the Vedas ); ir^f^ pro. utatr perf. wtmr P. *ut.
ftrreriff f«t. 3rorcfT3 &or. 473 or wUrr^b
deb. Can.— wfmf?T% pre. 3flTrB<l^-?T aor. Pass.—
aor. «fT?r p.p.
1 P. *Wf to collect, to strike; fRffft pre. mn$ perf.
p. fat. arerrsfT^ »<>'.
10 U. #«ftjf^ && »^^^r ^ to heap, to mix, to anoint.
to speak indistinctly^ WsnTf^ pre. fT
p. fut. 3T5RlT^^-?r aor. a^R, W^fWfe ben.
1 A. *$< to ponnd; ^^ pre. R«^ perf. wf^an* fat.
3Wf^ «or. ftirf^?r de§.
1 P. to go; ^rf?T pre. gfft^ pe'f. ^*Vm, 3WNh^ aor.
ger.
1 P. to go; jraifar pre. gf^j perf. $f^i*rfft ***. ^Kf^Br^ aor.
W des. |TTf> p.p. 5f%<^T> 5^^T ger.
1 P. to be mad; fe( ¥ )fir P^e.
10 U. to cut, to divide;
perf. »$^RmT p. Int.
P. to go- wiY^fff pre. g*8t^ perf.
fut. 3T or
1 P. to go; *gsanr pre. g^g^i perf.
P. & 10 U. 3Tsir% «^ ( 3WST^ 3TTO«t W ) tospeak
indistinctly or barbarously; *^^ld, 1^5 ^M-^ pre.
P. p-
or i^jj 1 P. ^yjrr£ to be mad: 9$zft or J^rft pre
1 A.%^?r to worship, to serve; *%qfr pre. fffrg^ perr.
fut. 3pdfc aor.
104 SANSKRIT GRAMMAB.
1 P. 5 i|$r% to fade, to grow weary, to be sad; *5TRmr pre.
fT^ perf . J^TrTT p. fat. ^TWIfT fat. 34 M 1*0 4 aor. 4^41414
or *$mfr ben. Oau.—^jrqirfif-ar pre. HftPoPHl-V aor.
des. Pass.— fgrroft per. 8T*oJTi$r tor. *fcR p. p.
1 P. to stir, to move; *r$rt?r pre. mr$r perf. qfgrar p. f«t.
3TO$fiat aor.
10 A. ^mi^ to honour, to adore ; irqfift pre. i^nn^l^
perf. q-^rfiRTr P- fut. 3WW?T aor. ?yRnr P.p.
1 U. 4^i^dl^*lM»iUNq1H^IHl to sacntiee, to make an
oblation to, to give, to associate with; rofiNt P*e.
. TCf P. fat. q-^irm-ff fat. ^f^^^r con.
da.), &qz aor. 4^1^, niftc ben. ftq*rm-*t des.
Paas— f^m pre. srorBr aor. Oau.— irnrafir-% pw.
^nra;-fT aoi. ft p.p. *ff, ^rf*nw ger. 115^ inf.
1 A. xnr^ to attempt, to strive after, to labour, &c;
pre. ^ perf . ?rSrm p. fat. qflr^r^ f at. 8Tgf?|Rr aor.
ben. fimm^ de«. Pa88.-q-??Tfr P*e. 3rq-rf5lr aor. Oau.
^ pre. 8T<fara^rT aor. ^JT p.p. sfitW, ^W« ger.
10 U. EtelfTMreUJft: to injure, to encourage,
aor. i^irrqrf^rfit-^ del.
?T«C 10 U. TOt% to restrain, &c; *THnxfi!r-flr Pre-
, &c. perf. ifrsrfarr p. fut.
aor. WT53rft^T%-% des. Pass.— *r?wrfr «re. qrf?sr?r p.p.
to cohabit; *Tirfo pre. ^mr perf. ?r«rT fat.
fut. anre^r^ con. anrrctfrS aor. Can.— ^nnrf^% pre.
aor. nfrrcair des.
I P> 3^T«r to check, to offer, to lift up, to go, to show, T5^
perf. ipwr p. fat. ^flr fut. 3rt^ con.
DHATUKOSHA. 105
-<T aor. Pass -*rwr?r pre. S?T p. p. UW ger
10 U. qfi^fc to surroand; ^m^-% P*e. 3rfnm^-?T »or
4 P. srq^ to strive, to endeavour; TOf?r.*iwrtt pre.
perf . trffTCTT P. *at. ^fif^fS fat. 3TTO^ aor. Oau.—
pre. (with3Tf A. only) TOT p- p. *wNr, **?*T ger
ITT 2 P. siRfr ( 5T^ lf?fs ) to do, to invade, to pass away;
pre. mft perf. uiHT ?• ^t. ureifft ^t. 3
bea. ftqrafw de«. PaM.—^Tq>T pre. Oen.— ^T<R1W% pre.
3rfR<T^.-?T aor. npf p. p. ?nmT, SHTHT ger. m<j^ inf.
1 P. A. qr^WPI to beg, to demand in marriage;
pre. *nrra-iraT% perf. qr^RTT p. fnt. qiftsqft-fr fat.
3T^T^, 3WTft^r «or. m«IT^, iH^frsr ben.
pre. 3TOT*S-ff »or. ?jn%?r p. p. qift^T ger.
2 P. msrdrtffarat ^ to join, to separate,, lunr pre.
perf. qffcrr p. fnt. ^NUjQ fut. 3^^ aor. ^r^ ben.
or ft^mfS de«. Pass.— ^m pre. armw aor.
pre. 3T<fannfcflr aor. ^ p. p.
9 U. ^r^r to join, to mix; ^m or 5^1% prt>. qinw or
perf. ^fiTT p..^tt. ^TGiifS'% fot. arqHr^or srqr^ aor.
vNr? ben. 5^j|fS% des. 5?r p. p-
10 A. sjgtOTan^ to censnre; qpnr^ pre. UFplTii% perf.
P. fot. snftn^cT aor. mronfoRT ^e§.
- ****& ** nnite» &0> 'T3TTH pre. 5^nr perf. ^frCT P- int
r. 55«i?r des.
4 A. ^rm to concentrate the mind; g>*rar pre. 53^ perf.
p. fnt. qtWT fat. 3Wr^r?r con. arg^y aor. 5^5 ben.
des. Caa.-uTsHqfd-fT pre. 3T^S5f^?T aor.
* q^ not preceded by a preposition except 31^ optionally
belongs to the 1st conj.
106 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
7 U. iftit to unite, to put to, to appoint, to give, to
prepare, &c; 3*1% or 5^ pro. ^jfnr or 35^ parf. iffajT p.
fat. iftgirnHt fat. 3Tg3T^, Htftofat or H5^ aor.
g$fre ben. Pass.-g5<r% pre. Cau.-tffanri^-rt pre.
*T aor. S5$?T%-% des. 5^ p. p.
10 U. H*m> to join, &c; lfMHfd-% P'
perl ijmfirrrr P. *ut. ifmf&^vf^-ff fat. n^53T^Hf aor.
10 A. to censure; ifhnrifr pre.
1 A. *l*R to shine; qrot pre. 55% perf. ifrfasim fat.
WTfite aor.
4 A. *hrffr to fight, to conqaer in fight; jpqrf pro.
perf. ifr^T P- ^Qt. ift^gif f"t. 3nftfW?T con. 3^5^ aor.
ben. Pa93.-5«rlr pre. 3T«frf^ aor. Oau.— 4f^in%-% pre.
3flj£isn*-?r aor. ggffrit des. 3^ p. p.
4 P. f^iftfW to blot out, to trouble, to make smooth;
pe. 30^ perf. fftfqm P- fat. 3Tg^aor.
1 r ufftnn^ to injure, to kill, qjfii pte
1 A. srqr> to try, to attempt; i^r pw. T^q^ perf.
aor.
1 P. to join, together; *fte(*)ft pre
1 P. ir^r to move, to flow; f^ft pre. ^rf perf.
p. fat. 3Rg^ aor. Oan.--^^^ pre. aretfa; 5f aor.
10 U. 4144144 JTnfir Wi to taste, to get ; iifciffo ^r pxe.
f.KbOfll p. fat. TT*q I ***>'! *-^% perf. ^fl^^Hy ao*. Also
nr*^^
DHA'TUKOBHA. 107
^3T 1 P. qT5OT to protect, to avoid, ^^ pr0. ffff perf.
p. fiit. *f5?KTTO ^t. 3TT$fra; aor. TSSnj ben. Pa98.-?$*rft pre.
Oau.-*$rora-?f pro. 3*TTSTrTr<T aor. KTWm des. ?ftm p. p.
j^ 1 P. to go, to move; ^f^ P*e. Tfn* perf. STTff T^ , 3TCT*fa
aor.
^ i P. 3Tf rent; to doubt ; *HJH pre. ^r*r pet f .
^ 1 P. to go, to move; ?%fo pre. ^1* pe'f. 3Tnfra. aor-
^ 1 U. to go quick ; T^ra'-W P'e. ^f^, n^T perf . tnTrTT p. fat.
3Tbfao 3T^W aor-
T^ 10 U. to shine, to speak ; S^njfa1-^ pre. ^
10 U. qfn'q'r^ to arrange, to make, to write, to adorn, to
direct; T^Tf?T% pre. r*Tirai$re-^» perf. t^wxn p. fut.
fat. 3T^^^H-tT aor. fcrgWTO-k des. ^f%n p. p.
ger.
1 & 4 U. ^fit to be coloured, to paint, to be pleased, to be
devoted to, to be in love wilh ; T3?f%%, f S*nTT-?T pie.
^^ perf. ^^r p.fat. t^^-k fut. 3Tr^r^-(T c
or 3TC^ aor. wn^ or ^^ ben. RWT?T% des. Can.—
to dye, &c. T^wf^-^ P*e. 3TTT^^-rf aor. — to hunt deer,
P'e. 3TOrH^-fT aor. Paae.-rsifar pre. ^n^. p. p.
(1) rnr^, ^TUT^ (4) preStp.
1 P. qfoTTW to shout, to call out, to sbout with joy;
pre. 5H[T2r perf. f fecTT p. fut. 3TO?T^, 3TWF^ aor. ffffff p. p .
1 P. to speak; ^pr pre. ^TJ perf.
1 P. 5r££ to sound, to go, to rejoice ( in the Vedas );
pre. ^TOT perf. ^foRTT p. fat. 3TTOI^, smtiftl aor. Oau.
IP. ft§^% to split; to gnaw, to dig; ^pf^ pre. ?*pf perfj
P. fat. tf^lfiT fat. 3TC^ or anT^ aor. RT^ffS" des.
108 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
:) to hurt, to destroy, to
subdue, to finish, to accomplish, ( to be completed, in the-
Vedas ); rsilS P*e. *f^ perf. * ffol or ^ p. Int. <fttqft
or TO^rer fat. 3T*ftifaj^3TC?^ con. 3^^ aor. Pass. —
*u& pre. 3TT^r aor. Oau.— jrtnrf^% P*e. STCJr^-ar aor.
ftf fifafR, ft^^tifl <ks. ^f p.p.
I P. otronrf *Tfir to speak distinctly, to praise ( in the
Vedas); ^qfirpre. ^r<Tperf. STfqraL^nfT^, aor.
des.
IP. fjfcnrzit ^ ** to go, to hurt ; fqrS pre. ^n? perf .
1 A. ^TYT^ to begin, to embrace, to long for, to act rashly f
r«% pre. %^r perf. ^JTT p. fat. T**1?T fat. 3TfHqK con.
aor. ^c^n^ ben. ftc^r^ des. Cau.—^wnift-^ pre.
aor. Pass -^PKT pre. grrf»>T aor. ^r P» p.
1 A. to play, to rejoice at, to take rest; Tuifrpre. ^ perf,
p. fat. TWf fut. srtWrT con. arhcf, with ft, str^ffT^ tor.
ff^W des. Pass.— ^q^r pre. Oau.— ?rwfc-% pre.
aor. ^<T p. p. T?3T, 3TTC«T, 3TTC?T ger.
1 P. ^[ to sound ; ^m^ pre. ^»^ perf. *fa*i?r fut.
aor.
1 A. to go, to movej ^j?r pre. ^ perf. ^%rr p. fat.
aor. f ftff p. p.
IP. ^r^f to roar, to make a noise, to sing, to praise ( in the
Vedaa ); r^f?r pre. T?T^T peif. ffifcTT P-
aor.
* It is Parasm. when it is preceded by ft, 3TT, qft and
DHA'TUKOSHA. 109
10 U. Sffwr^r^^fift: to taste, to feel, ^nrf?Ht pre. m-
HI'dHfrU^fr perf . 3K<^-(T aor
1 P. nriit to quit, to desert; ff/t pre. *fff perf. *t?KT p.
fat. tft*^ fat. 3*^ aor- r%$Tfir defl.
10 U. amr to leave, to abandon; Tfuft-fr pre.
'cffc perf. Tfnmr P. fat. iSfS^fl-ifr 'at. 31TTTC-H aor.
P.p. *ffo?*T ger.
2 P. ^r% to give, to bestow, nfif pre. ^ perf. ficTT P.
aor. Oau.-nwfS-fr pre. ^fliq-a aor.
^ p- 3il«im»<!W&i1: to be dry, to adorn, to be able, to
suffice; *TWfa P'e. TTW perf. amtfr^aor.
1 A. wm$ to be able; n^T P". ^m perf. fri%*Rf fut.
1 U. afnft to shine, to glitter, to appear, to direct, to
be at the h^ad; fnirf?H* pre. ^T3T, ^T, ^ p***-
p. fit. ^rf^qrfir-^ fut. arn^irac,, Hfn%«r aor.
flRltfte ben. f?^n%qft-% des. ^|f5|fl p. p.
ger.
4 P. ^ to grow, to prosper; ^TWTW pre ^HT perf.
p. fut. n?Wf?T fat. STTTrW^ con. fTWT^ ben.
dual ) aor. Cau.-arfhreH:* aor. f?fr?^f& des
^rmt ^ to accomplish, to kill, to propitiate,
Pre. ^T^r(2nd sing, with 3TT,
wishes to kill ) des. *reg
1 A. ?JT^[ to cry, to yell, to sound;
grnftrc aor. far<%q?t des.
ft 6 P. to go, to move; |^n% pre, ftriq- perf. ^«rr^ fut.
8Tf *f?5 aor.
ft 5 P. to hart; fiofrf^ pre. ( Vedic ). ftffrtff ^es.
ft 9 U. to drive oat, to expel, to go .to lurt, to emit, to
keparate. ( in the V*dae ); ftorr^, ftofi^ pre.
H. 8. G. 43
110 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
l P. n*r to go;>*rfcT pre. fi^r perf. ?f$r**fr fat. af*^ aor.
or ft w 1 P. «mV to crawl, to creep, to go slowly; fqpft or
f?Wfar pre. ftftf or fifi^ perf. arfrffcr , srfc^ifr^ ao*-
7 U. f?T^T7 to empty, to clear, to deprive of, to give up,
or frig1 pre. fi^r or fJR%- perf. ^yr p. fnfc.
^q7j-?r COD. arft^*, aftsft^ , 3riTr|> aor.
i? ben. Pass.— f^qfr pr*». 3T>f% aor
pre. 3Tfrft^^-cT aor. ftf?^T?T-?r des. RrF p.p. H^?fT ger.
1 & 10 P f^iM^H^^M^HiTi: to divide, to leave, to come
tog-ther; ?^r?T, T^Tim, pre. frr*- ^^rqraj^rr perf. 3T>$ft^,
aor. fTT?^ffr» ft^Tliq^lft-jf des. Vf%?T p. P.
to boa^t, to speak, to fight,
to utter a rough grafing sound, to give fNnw pre.
perf. Vr%rfTp. fut. af^r^ aor. ftRf^TT^ fitfW& dee.
PfiTff P.p. ( also written a* ftg ).
1 A . to crackle, to murmur, to chatter; ^fif pre. fnT^" P°rf.
6 P. to hurt, to kill; f^FTHr pre. ftR^ir perf. m^HfT P«^
f a* . 3<R*q>H aor-
P. |JHr<iMC to tear, to injure, f^rfa Pre. f^5T perf . ^rr
p. fat. f^nS fat. aft^T^con. 3|ft^^ aor. KK^Tlff dea.
1 & 4 P. f^rnn^to kill, to fail, to perish, to be injured;.
Wf, ft^HrT pre. ft^ perf, ^|^ or ^gr P
fot. 3,>^ ( 1st cl. ), BTTT?^ ( 4th cl. ) aor.
des. f^r p.p.
4 A. ^r^ to trickle, to ooze, to flow; foft pre. fi% perf.
int. a^f aor.
9 P. Jififrvinft: to go, to Injure, to howl; ftirrft pre.
perf. T*Tft fut. 3T<:^ aor. ftf^ni des.
1 U. to take, ta cover; Creft-ft pre.
1 A. *rfaftTO$r: to go, to hurt, to break to pieces (in the
DHATUKOBHA. Ill
Vedas ); TO* pre. 55% perf. ^^r P- frt. s^ft? wr. Oao.-
Tr*Tfft% P*e. aWT*^-?! pre. ^^ des.
2 P. $75^ to cry, to yell, to ham as bses, to sound in gene*
ral; frff or ^frm pre. **TW perf. rffcrf p. fat. T^TORf fut.
5*rrf r^ aor. ^7f^ ben. ^sxft des. Pass. — ^m pro. Oau. —
n^rf?r% pre. &? p.p.
1 A. ^T«TgrpTjfTrfr ^ to shine, to look beautiful, to be pleased
with ( a person ); fpOT pre. ^^% perf. ftl%fTT p. fut. rrf%-
«T^r fat. 3TS^> 3Trrf^ aor. ««R|^f STTFnft des. Oau.
-Ttxrq^ pre. 3T^$^T aor. ^nf p.p.
6 P. qrjp to break to pieces, to afflict, to pain; ^rirfrr pre.
sftar Pdrf- *ra>r P- fut- *i$*fit ^t. srftgfr
dual ). aor. Oau.— frsrafff-FT pre. 3T^^T^-?f aor.
*ror p.p. ^F^T ger.
10 U. ft^fq-r^ to hurt, to kill; frsnrft-^ pre.
perf. Tt3ffir?Tr P. fat. 3T^T3Ta:-?T aor.
I A. q-Krerar to strike dosm-, fr?ff pre. ?f^r perf.
10 U. to obstruct, to resist, to shine, to speak*
pre. fl?qi*xr^fT-^% P9'f. ^^i^-cT aor.
1 P. g-<nrrar to strike; flr^f?r pre. ^O7 perf. frf^lUr fut.
10 U. *TTTWt ^rf ^ to speak, to shine; ffer*flr% fut.
fJTiS^^-^ perf. 3T^^qc«T aor.
1 A. to resist, to oppose, to torment, to sufiSr pain;
pre. ^^r perf.
I P. ^ to rob, steal; ^ir^Rf pre. ^J£ perf. sr^JTT^ Aor
Pas?.— ^r<raw pre. 3T^fa? aor.
1 P. to go, to steal, to tame, to oppose; ^ujfff pr<».
perf. This is the same as the above root; also written as
2 P. ir&ftlifr^ to cry, to weep, to roar; Tfferlr pre
112 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
Imperf . ^ct^ perf. tf%r P. fat. 3?^ or
aor. ww^ ben. ^f^M des. Pass.— ?5*Rf P*e. 3^lf^ aor.
Oau.— TTFrfa-fc pre. 3T^f^-?f aor. tffcf p.p.
4 A. ( with 3t5 ) OTfr to dasire, to obey., ^sqft pre. 55% perf.
*T?sre fat. srar aor. ^^ dee.
7 U. 3*mut to besiege, to oppose, to hold up, to oppress;
*Uft% or ^ pre.^ ^far or ^^ perf. ^[T P. fat. d^A%
fut. BT^T?? atttafiigj 3H^5[ ( ST^sSiTH, 31^r^MliC cl»al ) aor.
^^TO , ^^TO ben. ^^^n%-?r des. Pass.-^cq^r pre. vmft
•or. Can.— ^r«Wl?l% P'e. 3TC$^cT aor. ^[ p.p. fng^ inf.
4 P. f^WT5^ to confound, to suffer, to violate, tox pain
( in the Vedas ), to diiturb; ^cq^ pre. ^^ perf. a^i^aor.
Omu.-rt^rft-^ pw. ar^^q^aor. ^^ft^ft, ^jfWar dea.
6 P. f^rnn^ to hurt, to destroy, ^^ftr pre. 5^ perf.
9^fT^ aor. TO$ri9 des.
10 U. 1 P. Tflrnrof fmV ^ to speak, to ihine;
pre. ^r^itS, ^flr^ft fat.
1 P. fgepTT^ to kill, to hurt, to be annoyed;
perf. frf%?fT or TOT p. fafc Tinf«rtSr fat. armii
^tiWar des. ^fffWT, frffoT, ^r ger. f|%^, ftj^ inf.
4 P. to kill, to hurt, to vex; ?ro1?r pre. 9T^!f^ aor. ( For
the other forms see the above root ).
10 U. fi% to be angry. fHirft-it pre. aT*$W$-ff aor.
1 P. ^MsHrUK m&fo ** to grow, to increase, to rise, to
reach; fiflS pre. ^riy perf. fa p. fut. Tfr$rS fu^.
ben. STCSTfT aor. **%& des. ^^ p.p.
10 U. qr^^ to be rough, to be unkind, to mak* dry, ( in
the Vedas )• ^r^ffi-^ pre. *$raT3rerc ^T9» pert. ^n%lT P-
fat. aTC^srerlf aor-
10 U. ^q-f9Rtn*rra[ to find oat, to form, to consider, to fiz>
to appoint; ^qir?cT-Sr pre
fat. a^^^qqcT aor. wrre^fir-ft des.
DHJL'TUKOBHA. 113
1 P. ^JFTR to adorn, to decorate, to anoint; CTft Pre.
5^ pe'f. sfararr p. fat. unsfa; aor. ^j^f p.p.
1 A. gifiq} to donbt, to inspeotj ^sft pre. f^% perf .
fut. aftfissr aor*
1 A. to shine, to shake; ^sft1 pre.
1 U. <rftirnrir to apeak, to ask; ^ft pre. fife perf.
aor.
1 A. to go; ^r pre. ^r9*q^ f ut. aftftfc aor.
1 A. %f*% to sound, to low; ^«r% pre.
1 A. BT3H% ?^ to ntter an indistinct sound, to neigh;
pre. f$% perf. iffin p. fut. aftfar aor. %% p.p. (Also
written as ^).
1 P. to sound, to bark at; n*Rr pre. & perf. 3mfffe *or
P. SRTf* ^?WI^ ^T to despise; jfrfc pre. ^t^ perf.
aor.
( ^ also ) 1 P. to despise, ffefir, forTf pre.
& -
10 U. 3TR*T5% sTT^ir ^ to taste, to obtain; STCTfcfr pre.
p. fat. 3TSJfi$$>9t"<T aor.
A. an^Jt^ to perceive, to observe; &qfa pre. ^y^r perf.
5J%tTt P. fat. 3^f§TO aor. 3J$rfirfte ben.
10 U- ^RTfsnffi to notice, to define, to regard; 5^rr%4T
pre. ^^nTT^i^K-^flff &o. perf. ^^Ndl P.. fat. ^rf^tHdrcT aor
pp. fir^^^r%-* de§ .
1 P. to go; srofir or ^jft pre.
1 P. ^ to attach oneself to, to touch, to meet, to follow
closely; fljifft pre. ^^riT perf. ^Rmr p. f^t. ^^ifi^ aor. fj^-
Pmft des. 551T P.P.
10 U. 8TTC*T^T srnft ^ to taste, to obtain; snnrffr% pre.
p. fat. 3T^9<f^-fT aor.
114 SANSKBIT GBAMMAB.
1 P. to go, to go lame; ejfrlrl pre.
1 P. 5rt*Ffr to dry, (iftqraf 5l*ft *fllTTra*fiW ^r ) to speak, to
shine, to transgress; A. ireret Ht3Trrf*^Tft ^ to go, to fast;
3?<?nre aor. SJI^RT p. p.
10 U. to speak, to shine-, ctosrm-fr pie. ^i*TWjfff% fut.
1 P. 5J$Tflf to mark; <j5xuf% p*e. ^^^3T perf.
1 P. *r£r to fry; 5J5TUT per. a^FST perf. 5Ji^<TT p. fat. 3t«J-
*ft<^, STcJl^fT^ aor. ( Also written as &**£ ).
6 A. sfi5% to be ashamed; ^nr^ P*e. ^st perf. ^yf^TtTT P- fnt.
3T5yf^^ aor. i%^rf^^ des. 555- p.p.
10 U. ST^T^r^ to appear; <£gfraf3-^; 3TWn^t to conceal, cjnf-
^ifff 3" pfe. ^ITini^Tf-^r^ SJnreT^ISRTT ^99 &c- perf. ^yiT-
1 P. i^HT3^?Rf%%rRS vrr^rTt ^TRT ^T to kill, to be
powerful, to take, to dwell, to speak, to shine; 33?]^ pre.
51 perf. 3TO3fhl aor.
U. ( see the above root ) to give also; cZ^nrfft-% pre.
[^5 perf. c^^f^cir P. fut.
1 P. ^r^q- to be or act like a child, to prattle, to cry;
pre. <?<£(<£ perf. 3T9^ft«I aor.
1 P. flaflT to play, to sport; gsffi pre. v&ifa
10 U. 3q%3T3T to fondle, to caress; 55r¥*jfd-% pre.
^1T-^% perf. STcJtofeq^cT aor.
"
1 P. s^rhrur VTT% to talk in genera), to wail, to whisper,
to lament* {$<r|rT pre. jgjojm perf. ^jpfar p. fat. 3
H aor. Oau.— -<>jmt|fii-?t pre. ^IcfldMtt-Q aor
'A. srnft to get, to take, to have, to be able, &c.; ^^ Pre.
DHA'TU KOSH A. 115
perf. $j5\n p. fut. oroq?r fut. 3T«5MT aor. f&c^ff des. Oau.-
pre. 3Tc5c5^^rf aor. 555^ p. p.
1 A. sfl«% 3*3^% ^ to sound, to hang down, to eii k, &c.j
. 5555^ perf. afttRTT p. fut. 3T9f*3* aor. Pass.—
e. *T$5i«f aor. Cau.— $3wrqj?r-?r pro. H33*^;cT aor.
des. sferT ]>. P.
1 A. to go, to move; 55^ pre. ^q- perf. grf^r p. fut. 3T5J1TO
aor.
1 P. to go, to move; 55^ pre. 5jg^ perf. 3^^ aor.
1 P. RoJl^T to play, to move about. ^§jf^ pre. cJ^rsr Per*.
l»t. 3T55^iq[ aor. f55oJR«im des. Cau,—
aor. 55^ P. p.
10 A. fc^rqt to desire, to fondle; $JT3TO^ Pre.
perf. ^rafqfrr p. iut. ^STSgrf aor. T%9To5ftqrr &
10 U. f^qiJjr to use any art; ^5171^-^ pre.
=gfo perf. 3T$Ji^5i^ a aor. V. 1. for 5*3;.
1 & 4 U. $Rft to wish, to long for; 9^m-^, 5JW7M-^ pre.
99TT or g% perf. afq^T P- ^t.3T9«ft^, 3T9Til^ 9?9m> ftor.
^tofrrid d^s. 9i%?r p. p.
1 P. s0quT5RT^^qr: to appear, to embrace, to play, to
shine; $rofff P™. cS^TfT perf. ^Rfcft P. ***.
aor. Oau.— 3T*RT%-*T P'e. 3J9T9^rcT aor.
cjRlcf P. P-
10U.f^?q*n<t See 55^ above.
A. gfa% to be ashamed, to blush; 5T3f?T pre. 5y^^ perf.
P. f«t. 8?5Ji^^ aor. Pass.— S3?qft pre. 3???% aor.
Oau— 321%% re. «T93--?T aoi.
9?T P- P-
2 P. 3rr?T^ ^T% ^ to take, to obtain; anfr pre.
grr^r p. fut. 3T$JT*ftgt aor. Oau.— anrefiW*, ^T97w% ( to
cauay to melt ) pre. 3T$5TOTSrcT, 3T#r97gt-*r aor. l%9Tfrfir de«.
SANSKRIT GBAMKJLB.
P. 3l1«HUItfHv5<ft; to be dry, to adorn, to suffice;
P*e. ^WKSMO, aor. Can. — MI<flUft%-
1 A. ^m«? to b» eqnal to or able-, &i*fr pre. ararftre aor.
or afa$ 1 P. *(£% ^^ ^ to fry> to blame* araiffr or
pre. ar&refftf , STcJTsftq^Aor,
P. SSTOt to mark. «JT5^ pre. WJlJl^ aor.
P. »T^Tf^rr& to write, to rub, to touch, to peck af a
bird; few% pre. f§^gr perf. %r%<TF p. fnt. gq%^ aor.
or /&Sl%mt des. Oau -§^nS% pre.
1 P. to go, to move; feff* P*e.
1 P, to go, to move; \&yft pre. i%f§^p perf. r%|%?TT p.
aor- ^%r P. P.
inflect (»noun);
p. <«t
aor.
6 U. ^[| ( gq^ft ff^[: ) to anoint, to cover, to stain;
IOT perf. &HT p. *nt. &c^ri^% fut.
aor, Oau.— %qqf&-^ pre. 3TofTl%^-ff aor.
des. f^ p. p.
A. 3^fn?|% to be email or reduced; f^J% fat.
perf. %^ fut. 3Ti%5^T aor. Cau.-?fc$nnfS% pre.
aor. f§J?%^ des. f^ p. p.
6 P. to go; fitaiift pre. Q§$r perf. 3R!«^d, aor. ftft^f^ des.
2 U. 3nm^ to lick, to taste; $r%, 5^* pre. Ufa,
perf. ^r P- fat.^rr%% fut. 3rf§^f^-?r, Vfift* aor.
^fr« Den. T%«%^-W des. gf^ p. p.
1 P. & 10 U. gflerik to melt, to diesolve;
pre. i%^nr annnwJTT-^rfc &c. perf.
aor. TO^wf?f) ftciMN^ffi-^ des.
4 A. %ro to stick, to lie on;
DHA'TUKOSHA. 117
p. fat. o&tutr, $IHJ<1 fut.
ben. Can.— dUjqfl-fr pre. |%cfrq% des. &i* p.p.
eft 9 P. sgro to adhere, to melt ; fo^TlS P'e. f&5JPT, B55> perf .
«&IT, 55KTT ?. ftt. ^*jft, OTWfiT fut. 3^5, 3»«JT*fa[ aor.
Id of H Iff des.
1 P. 3?g^q^- to pluck, to pull, to tear off. 5331% pre. 5531
perf. g.%<TT P. ^t. H^fr^ aor. gfgfwm dea. gr%f p.p.
1 P. & 10 U. fSqNtfT$MM&TiT5 WTTqt ^inV ^T to kill, to
be strong &c. ^^f^, g^im^r pre. arg5^, argg^rS aor-
1 A. qfrt^T to oppose- £tHW pre. 53% perf. 3n?<U P. 'nt.
^l^dd , 3T$yf l^8T aor. g"^ft^ des.
1 P. fsh?jte% to roll, to wallow on the ground ; wzfy pre.
§5Jte perf. ^lf%cTr p. fut. 3T^r#T^ aor. 5^^ or g<0iQqifl
des. Oau.— ^t?^l%% P'e- 3Tc5S?T^-cT, 3Ts55Jte^-?T ***•
^ftn, ^ffer p. P.
4P. to roll, &c., g^rfff pre. g^ perf. Stf^rTT p. fut;
^^^d; aor. ( See the above root for the other forme. )
6 P. (fsrf^: ) ^sg^t see g^ below.
10 TJ. JfFTnif ?Tfft ^ to speak, to shine; 3fcnri&% P'e.
«5t^n^^TT-^K &c. perf. ^gftcU p. fu^.
1 P. g-q^rf^ to strike, to knock down-, ^fd P'e.
perf. 3TfiffT p. f«t. 3T^nrT^aor. Cau.— 3T^S^^-fT,
^-ff aor.
1 A. jrfenrra to oppose, to roll; &\tt P^- 33* P«rf.
^tfi^TT P. fat. 3Tg£<r, ^IcJl'Qe a<>r-
6P. JBJ^ot (f*ri%:) tc wallow; 571% P™. g^ftj perf.
aor ft des-
.
1 P. f%S5t3^r to stir, to churn ; ?yt^T^ pre. ^yrg" perf.
— - d
p. fut. 3T5JT5^-aor. Oau.— «te*nfT-fr pre.
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
6 P. ( ^rrf£: ) to cover, to adhere ; g^fa pre. ( See gy
above for the other forms. )
1 P. ^r> to rob, to be lazy ; guafa pre. gguff perf „
Sfo^wift fat. 3fgOdY3 aor.
gu^ 10 U. see ^03- below.
P. STI^qr srifnrnt^T to be idle, to agitate; guaft pre.
gfSawm f»t. argusrg; aor. Oau. gusnrfff-a pre.
cT aor. ggfu^fifr des.
10 U. *?rq- to rob, to plunder ; gU^fS-l* pre.
fut. 3T5^7^-rT aor.
g0S; 10 U: to plunder 5 gg^rrS% pn>. ^o^(j|^^K-^^ perf.
( Same as ^05 )
P. ff^rfe^T^fr: to strike, to kill;
perf. gf?^Qm fat. 3^?aft^ aor.
4 P. f%f|t5% to confound, to be destroyed j ^cq-r^ pre.
perf. cfif^tir p. fut. 3*^^ aor. Oau.— ^rrqrfr-^ pre.
^•fT, 3T^yiT^-cT aor. ^5^1%, ^infanr> des.
SN^r, cfn^f^T ger. §ff p. p.
6 tJ. ^-^ to break, to take away, to seize, to suppress;
^WTT^-% pre. 5<?r<T> $5$^ perf. ^ytRT P- fat. *IQV«^, 3T^pET
aor. gcqr^, ^c^ ben. g^^rm-^ des. Pass.— gccr> P'e.
3^tiqp aor. Can.— ( See the above root ) ; gff p. p
1 & 4 P. »mS to covet, to be perplexed ; ^mm, ^vqr?^ pre.
g^yt«r perf. 5^mtTT, c^TT p. fat. 3r^p(0q ( 1 ) 3?$^ ( 4 )
aor. Cau.— ^twn?T% pre. 3T5j5«j^-cT aor.
TH^rfff des. g»sr P. P.
6 P. f%Rrf% to be bewildered, to confound •
^5Tr*fr^ aor. ^far p. P.
1 P. 3^ to torment, 5^?% pre. 3jg*»fl^ Aor.
9 U. ^gr% to divide, to cut off j
DHA'TUKOSHA. 119
perf. cJittTT p. fut. 3?gmfhr, ^f^ aor.
g35Tff-?t des. Can.— <jnroilT-?r pre. $5 p. p.
1 P. >I5PTti <£*!% pre. 53^ perf. 3^5^ aor.
10 U. ffflrot to injure, to rob; ^wft-flr Pr*.
*tt perf. 3T<5§TO-rT aor.
JFJ 4 P. f^5T t'» stumble ; 55^1% P'e. 3T«^frg; aor.
1 A. to go, to worship ; &*fc pre. 3T$5pre aor.
1 P. to go, to send, to embrace; ^orffT pre. ST^ofriT aor.
1 A. ^r^r to see. to perceive; 5ji^ pre. «jgff% perf. 5fTT%HT
p. fut. 3T5Tni^ aor. ^^1%^ des. Can.— 8*r$!rnT-;t pre.
3T3^rfv?T-?r aor. 5Jrf5i<T p. p.
10 U. *?nnrt ^-gr ^ to behold, to shine, to know, to seek;
?r pre. sft-Etrf^FTT-^ perf. sftseftrU P- ^*. 3Tg-"
aor. ^r^rgqr^-^ des,
.^^ to 8e«; ^ft^rR1 pre. ^T% perf. BTi'%rTT p. fut.
aor. 5Jif%ff p. p.
10 U. to speak, to shine. $yi^niTff-?r pre. cJt^^nSI^TT ^T^-
«n^-r^ peif. afra%r P. fut. 3Tf^Tr^-?r aor. (See #r^
10 above).
1 P. *t?3 tfvf* ^& ^ to deceive, to precede- sfeft pre.
perf. 3TsfreKaor-
A. fhrfar to heap up; &}<&< pre. ^"ig- peif. 3Tatl%5> aor.
1 P. ?ft H^ ^T to be angry, to grow ; *$rf& P*e. Sfar^T perf.
t. 3T^^fr?l aor.
1 P. to go, to move; ^^f?f, grf m P'e. ^T
1 A. ^rf?^T I^T ^ to be crooked, to go; *$% pre.
aor.
1 P. to go ; ?npf^ pre. ; same as ^5
120 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
2 P. qftwtfT to speak, to relate, *frF pre. ^rpET perf.
P. fat. *r$*rft fat. aret^a; aor. 7*qr5 ben. ft^rfft des.
Oau.— srnEnrfe«r-% pre. g^fhr^-W aor.
1 P. & 10 Ur to §peak, to read, ref?*, *rxnrfiir% p*e.
^TT-'Sfsfc', &0- perf. *rET> Jl^fftdT P. fat.
aor. ^rw, 'srrTcf p. P.
1 P. to go, to roam about, *3ff^ pre. ^rnr perf. ?f§Tfir p.
fet. ^R^[, arenft^ aor.
10 U. to trim, to go; ^r^^-% pre. e(Mm*THH &o.
aor.
P. to go> to arrive at, srarlf pre. ^^ perf. ^i%?fTp. fut.
aor. fi-^i^f^ des. ^T%cf p. p. Pass.— q^q^ pre.
10 A. 33mft to cheat ; ^^q^ pre. ywiqiK &o. perf.
aor.
1 P. ^^ft to surround , to cover ; izft P'e. w^RT perf .
10 U. gff^r, f%*TT3T% to stfing, to divide, to surround,
*Tm-% pre. ^iTT^^-^rlj perf. 3T3ftaS3-tT aor
des.
10 P. ^vflyfr to be strong or fat ; ^fflT pre. <*crra perf.
3T«n<fi^ aor.
.1 P. ^is^ to sound ; ^nn% pre. 3TW<lfi^, 3T^Tofta[ aor.
i P. &. 10 U. fwrsr;* to divide ^rjfir, OTCTft-% pw.
««rtS, ^nsfi^rfJr fat. gwrsra;, amnvd^-iT aor.
1 P. oU^iql ^Ti% to say, to tell, to lay down ; g^ P'e.
P^f. ^n P. ^ gwrfr^aor. firtf^lft 4es. Pass.—
pre. arerf^ aor. ^f^T p. p.
1 & 10 U. ^>^STT|> to inform ; ^ft%, ?T^rf^ % pre. ^r^,
^TT &c. perf. apRT^K) 3f*ft^T, arft^t^-W aor.
DHA'TUKOBHA. 121
1 P. 3T3% *rwnf ^ to sound, to honour, to aid; *Rf& pre.
«r?r* perf . *froi% fut. awfts, awRTg; aor- Cau.— ?rorft-7
pre. ft*ft*l% des.
8 A. ( P. according to ^73; ) to beg, to seek for. 333- pre.
%^ perf. 3mTO, 3lWcT aor. f%3TWlr dee.
1 P. & 10 U to favour, to injure, to sound, *
pre.
1 A. arfvrei4H44*4T: to talute, to adore, to praise;
pre. m?% perf. ^f^frTT p. fut. arefag aor. f
pre. ?&<& p. p.
1 U. «FnW?dH ^^ ^ to sow, to scatter, to weave, to cut,
to shave-, 5T<n%-?f pre. s^rnr, 3T> perf. ^n p. fut.
3TW5T aor. ^wrrg[, gr^n^ ben. Cau.-?rrqTn%-% pre.
aor. f%^c^iff^ des. Pass.— ^cq^ pre. 3T^rft aor.
1 P. to go$ **fff P'e. 3T^^ aor.
1 P. ^f^TOt to vomit, to pour out; ^W pre.
^WcTT P ^t. 8?TOTrai aor. Cao.—^irm^-^r, ^TinTft-?t ( with
a prep, grrcrm-^ only ) Pre. ^«fl*t*4d;rT aor. ^m?r, (
according to some ) p. p.
1 A. to go; snrir pre. *fiix& fut. <^TTO aor.
10 U i^PfT^t to ask for, to get; sr^rfff-% pre.
perf. ^rfqcTT p. fut. 3Ter^-gr aor.
1 A. srnfr to shine, to be bright; ^fr pre. ^^ perf.
aor.
10 U. ^T^TfTOTS^^r^^^nC^rto colour, to explain,
to extol, to send, *o grii)d; ^ohrfa% pre. cnriq-f'^Rf-1^^-
3TTH-W^^ perf. sroiftrcTT P. fat. 3T^ro?^-cT aor. r^OTi^TI% ft
des. sfofa p. p.
10 U. ^T^fn^t: to cut, to fill; ^v|qfff-?r pre. aw^iT aor.
1 A. irfqr »o love-, ^ pre. Bf^fq^ aor.
122 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
1 A. 3«rrat> *T2J r$r 'Br to cover, to move about;
W%-*ra ^t. 3T*i%s aor. |%ff§TTf?r-?f des.
10 U. gftvrTTO to speak; 9?59TcT-?t pr
perf. 3T5T^^-?r aor.
1 U. to go, to dance, to be pleased, to eat; q^irnr-ff pre.
w»t perf. *f£irm p. fut. 3w*ro, ^nrfcire aor.
p. p.
A. wnr* to eat; *«vfa pre. 3T*f?ire aor.
1. A. H3T3T to cover or be covered; *gy?r pre. ^^% perf.
1 A. qfyymrrfWT^ f W g; to sppak, to Jbe prominent, to kill,
to give; mfr pre. ?R% perf. ST^f? ao"".
2 P. ^RJ?r to wish, to shine; *T% pre. 741^1 perf. 3T5THT P-
fnt. 3TW5fr^, BT^hr aor- ^^T^ ben. f^rf5TTT% ^ea. Pass.—
5r^T?r pre. 3T^rr5T aor. gflirr p. p.
1 P. ff^TJqrt to injure, to kill; ^r?r pre. *arr* perf.
3T^m5 aor.
1 P. ftg-m to dwell, to be, to spend (time). ?m1v p
perf. srf?ir p. f ut. 3TqT?JTrcI aor. 3^qTtJ ben. f^^mfrT dei,
Pass.— T*rar pre. 3T^rRT aor. C«»u.— ?m«Tr
?T aor. gr^JT P. p. SlV^T, sft^ ger.
2 A. 3TT^r^ to wear> to Put on» '% Pre-
p. fat. ^T^ra^ aor. Cau.—crr^nim-?r pre. 3T^T^^^-?T aor.
N^fHIff des. *HTC p. p.
4 P.frW to be straight, to be firm, to fix; 7*>nft pre.
sq-(?r fut. WW*7T aor. ^^T p. p. ^ftf^T, gTfRTT g«r.
10 U. ^fx^rrjf^ to love, to cut, to take away.
^f pre. q-f^fWm-ff fut. STfr^FT^-rT aor. ^^qTrJ ,
ben.
10 U. far*r% to dwell; ^^Hff% pre. sr^nKTr P fut
aor.
1 A. to go- ^r^?ff pre. ^Tf^^tT lat. 3T-Tf?£? aor.
10 A. 3T^3r to hurt, to kill, to ask, to go;
perf. ^^Tf^TcT aor. ( Also written as
DHA'TTTKOSHA. 123
• tJ. SHW *o bear along, to carry, to fl>w, to marry
( with s^ ) &c. **f5H* pre. g^ry, 3Tf perf. *t*r P. f«t.
fut. 3T*T*fr^ , ifTTRT aor ^JRT, *$TTC ben.
3f dea. Cau.-qrT^JKf% pro. 3T*r*5<£*T »or. 3^" p.p.
2 P. ufa'n^VRifr: to blow, to go, to strik?, to kill;
snft perf. ^rar p. 'nt. ararrtfhr aor. ^nn^ ben- Oaa.— to
cause to blow, *nnn%%; to shake, *nr«7T?Ht pre. f^^T^rm
des. 3t?T p.p. ( with |%(~^rffor when ^r?f <wind' is not the
subject; as R^trfT g^TT^r ).
1 P. ^f^TT^t to wish, to desire, ^hTO pre. *tf$tofff fat.
1 P. ?l>^tqr^ to wish, to desire, to seek for.
^^- perf. srfcsraT p. faf. BT^r^rf^ aor.
Pass. — y|»^^ff pre. ^<||^ aor.
1 A. to bathe, to dive; ST3ft pre. <m j perf.
10 U. ^^Ir^^tit: to be happy, to serve;
firof^-?* fut. sT^rm^-rT aor. f%^TrTRrqia% des.
4 A. 5T^ to roar, to hum; ^r^qft pre. **r§r pre.
fut. amfsTC »or. wTf^TfT p.p.
10 U 3-ir^nrf to scent, to make fragrant;
pre. grmq-nEre'T-^ &o. perf. TmT^ffT p. fnt.
aor. f^m^ft^ des.
1 A. q-^?% to try, to make an effort; sry^ pre. **!%• perf.
7 U. 7^T*n^ to separate &c.; R^rr%, fir^ pre.
perf. \Trpr P. fuf. 3Tlr^, 3?^^^, 3Tf^TF aor.
ben. T>lr^Tm% des fifF P-P-
6 r. to go; Hx^r^fR Pre. fgrrt^r, ft^rni^TT &c. perf.
P. fat arfir^rq; 3Tf^^TcTTcT aor. Cau.—
-^r pre. arRr^r^ w, sn^fN^nm-ir
aor. j%i^r%?n^, ftfV^rrftw des. Pass.-f^s^HT,
pre.
124 SANSKRIT GP.AMMAB.
3JTRV^to apeak, to shine; fHduft-fr pro.
7 p rf . ^Rfl-^d-ff aor.
3 U. £«rniTV to *pearate to distinguish; %%f?fr, %ft$ pre.
perf. %^rr%-% fat. arfl^, srlgfrg;, srt^ aor.
6 A. nq-^SFTOf: *o fear, to tremble; f|*i% pre. Qft^ pert
P. fut. arfjfire a<>r. Oau.— %*rafft pre. 3T^TT^5Tg; aor.
7 P. to shake, to feart ft^ri% pre. fi^ST perf.
aor.
1 P. 3TF5RHt 5T«T ^T to curse, to sound, to rail at; tsfS pre.
perf. WefVg: aor.
same as
10 U. fi^^f to mock, to deceive; ft«M^fd-% pre.
T^W^-rl aor.
1 A. qr^T to bf g; %^ pre. %f^T^ fat.
2 P. ^ to know, to regard; %fo ^ pre.
perf. gf5«Jlft fut. 3T?CT^ aor- l^<n^ b611 f^?T P.p. Oau.—
%5*ria-ft pre. 3T€fft^r?T aor. ^f|R[«nS% des.
4 A.. fTTfnrt to happen, lo be; f^jr^ pre. ftftf^ perf. ^p p.
fut. %f^ff fat. 3T(^rT aor. frctfte; ben. T%%^ dee. ftw P-P-
6 U. 5J fir to get, to find, to feel; ft?rfr% Pre. fi^,
perf. %f^rTT, %rH p. *at. arf^, 3H?TT. 3T%T% aor.
) P.P.
7 A. fi^TT^t to discues, to consider; {%?% pre. ftl^ perf.
ffiw or fag p. p. For other forma aee ftgr 4 A.
10 A. %cT^T^R^^T%^ to feel, to tell, to dwell; %^r% pre.
perf. ?$\fa[ p. fat. arfAqff aor. fi^Tft^ P®8,
pre. 3T%I^ aor.
DHA'TUKOSHA.
6 p. ftvft to pierce: forfa- pre. *fo*mr *a*. s^ft^ aor.
Can.— %W?T% pre. 3^%^-^ aor.
P. u%5i% to enter, to fall to the share of; f^ffa pre. fi%$r
perf. %OT P. fut. 3Tfir$T<t-<T aor. fo8r$TI^ des. f%^ p. p.
1 P. %^T to sprinkle, to pour oat; ^rm pre. fi^ perf.
%OTff f nt. srf*^ aor. T^ p.p.
3 U. sqrrffr to pervade, to surround, %qr%. %i>t pre. f^r,
ftf^T perf. TOT P- f«t. 3rfi^?^, ZWn&t aor. M^^.?t dea.
9 P. %nrt«t to separate; f^mrrA P'e. fif%<? perf. arf^^ aor.
10 A fsfanit to kill; U. <ro% to eee; firs^l^, ftwifft-fr pre.
aor.
2 P. i||doMlfSr^nr?R^T^r^RWr^% to go, to pervade, to
conceive, to be born, to shine, to botain, to throw, to be
beautiful, to desire, to eat; tfff pre. rawr perf. %m p. fnt.
or. sffarOen. f|?fi^fS des. Can.— fm^-lt, ( *TT-
pre. ^r?T p.p.
10 U. 5*nf5T to fan; sfhw^^ pre. 3T5fTl%3T5-<T aor.
ICKA^ Qda|rd> to display valour; *?c*nfr pre. tftrfi«trft fut.
3Tfir^r^cf aor.
1 U. 3TF*TTFfr to cover, to surround: 9Tiff-ft pre. (Seethe
following root ).
5 U. *^ to choose, &c.; ^intf^, ^r pre. *3rfr, ^ perf.
.fut. 3iqmd, ^i«ift«, STTfr^T, 3T^rT aor.
ben. Oau.-«rTT<T^% pre. 3T^Tg;-?f aor.
9 A. to choose &c.; ^ofrk pre, V2t perf. ( Same as the
above A. ).
1 A. 3TT5T^ to take, to accept; *g& pre. ^% perf.
fot.3wf%^ aor. ft*&qfr.des.
1 A. aRR^ to cover; ^cr^ pre. *%& perf. 3??%^ aor.
7 P. *^% to choose; ^nn% pre. v*4f perf.
3T^ff^aor. f^j p.p.
H. 8. G. 44.
126 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
2 A. q-^ to avoid, to shunj ^> pre. fT^T perf. 3f§T<ar?r fat.
3T*T3re aor. Qcn'Snfr des.
7 P. STH% to avoid, to choose, to turn away, to move, to
hurt- ^TfTT% pre. ^*T perf. ^Mdl P- fat.
1 P. & 10 U. to shun, to abandon, to exclude &c.;
*3nrra% Pfe- ^*T> W^I'iSi^W-^fe &c. perf.
p. fut. 3^^fr^ , 3^€ff 3T^-fT, 3^^^-cT aor.
A. wzfo to avoid; ^ pre. ^T^Tff fat.
6 P. sfror> to give pleasure; ^°jfir pre. ^or perf.
1 A. 3-jfo to exist, to happen, to live on, to occupy &c.;
^t pre. ^ perf. ^fS^r P- fat ^m^qr^, ^?rff?l fat. 3T^cT^,
r aor. srffnfre ben. f%WOT^, r%^?fm dee. Can.—
-ff P'e. 3T^rf?Tg[-cT, 3T^cf5riT aor. ^j p. p.
4 A. 3W to choose, to divide; fftfft pre. ( See the above
root. )
1 P. &'10 U. HFTnri ^vSt ^r to speak, to shine;
ITO^ pre. ^^ff, ^fam'W-^% &c. perf. 3T^cTfg
«T, 3T^rS^-cT aor.
1 A. f^r to grow; ^^ pre. ^^ perf. ^f§T(fT p. fut.
ff^ fut. 3ff^g;, tarafvre aor. srfWirep ben. ^5 p.p.
1 P. & 10 U. irprnrf fwt ^ to speak, to shine;
^r% pre. ( See ^ above ).
4 P. ^T$r to choose; ^^rfff pre. srTO perf. <rf%*iif?ir fat. grf-
3% 1 P. %^TTf Hrl^^T^ to rain, to pour forth, to torment-
snrm pre ^<f perf. ^ft?IT p. fat. H^r?l aor. f^ffaffT des,
^ P. P-
* It is also Parasmaipadi in the 2nd future, conditional, aorist,
and desiderative.
DHA'TUKOBHA. 127
10 A. $r%*9V|^ to have virile power; j^q^ pre
fut. «?^snf, 3ppnfo aor.
* P. SW% to exist, to work; ( see vg ).
<| 9 U, **or to choose; furrft, jofw pre. *fR, **> perf.
P. fat. awns;, 3**fre» awrro, 3?f£ aor.
1 U. ay^fr^fJT to weave, to cover; **rft-ft pre.
3^» W^, *> perf. cTRTT P. f«it. 3T*ref(5, 3WW aor.
n. rl^r*rfar-% des. Cau.— ^Pl^-?t pre. Pass.—
. 3T^rW aor. Tff P.p. ^?^f, ST^T^ ger.
1 U. irf^rRf^fTrR^rrRH^rRsui 5 ui 5 to go, to know, to
contemplate &c.; rofiMT P'e. fir>OT, fSWr per
fut. 3^011^, 3T%fore aor.
1 A. qr^JT to b9g, to solicit; ^JH pre. ^T>Rl^ aor.
Same as %ur which see.
1 A. ^pr> to tremble, to quake; %q^ pre. f%>^ perf.
p. fat. 3r%f^r aor. Oaa.— ^wr%-?r P^e. 3fWhT^-«f aor.
1 P. ^r$y> to shake, to be wanton; %$rffr pre.
%f%ffT p. fut. 3T%5*X aor.
10 U. q?r^qRf5t to count the time. %^(Tl9^ pre.
^rlfr perf. %5y&<TT P- fut. 3?^%^-^ aor.
1 P. ^ra^ to go, to shake. %$far pre. f%% perf. H^ft^ aor.
%cfr 2 A. irffrs^T^nf^ to 8°» to ODtain, to be pregnant, to
pervade, to eat, to wish, to shine; %sfRT pre. ar^firs aor.
( Vedic ).
%£• 1 A. %7>r to surround, to wind round, to dress; %^ pre.
fCTT P. fat. 3T%fesaor. Can.— Tffirf^.^ pre.
des.
1 A. to endeavour; ^ft pre. ft^% perf . «Rfie aor.
% 1 P. ^fm^t to dry, to oe weary; *T*H% pre. *$ perf.
aor-
1 28 S ANSKBIT OBAHHAB .
6 P. m|gft»nu| to cheat, to surround, to pervade;
p*e. ft&n^ perf. VJl^dl P- fot. anHRfttJC, 3T3qTTft^ aor.
fS'STRt ben- Pass.-f^r?f pre. ftm.fimft des. Oau.-sqrorfif-
pre. t%%T P-p.
1 A. utMgHqt to fear, to be vexed or afflicted, to tremble;
. f$zq§ perf. 5*n*J<fT P. *ut
des. 5gfir?T P.p.
to hurt, to pierce; f%OTT?T pre. f^mr perf.
p. fut. 3*wrflSrg; aor. firWT^ beD^t%^?^Tff des. Pass.-
«ronTlS-*T pre. 3Ti%H^g;?T aor. {^ p.p.
^ 1 O. to go; 5imfeT% pre. ^sjrq-, ^si?% perf. otipimm-fr fut.
a°r.
U. ft^^H^f^^f to expend, to bestow- snrqnfr?t pre.
c. perf. «^fir«n1f-% fat. STSoS^-?! aor.
dea.
4 P. 51% ftsn'f ^ to burn, to separate; eg*n% Pre-
perf. siftf^Tm fnt.. STBift^ftg;, ( STc^^to separate ) aor.
1 U. tf**ufr to cover, to sew; sqtmr-?* P»e. f%sqTT, ft^T perf.
sirnTT p. fnt. 9Toq7tfirat, ^r^rer aor. gfiqT5[, SUTtTl^ ben.
frrei-% des. Pat*.— sffa^ pre. Oan.-sgnrm%-?r pre.
ar aor. jfa p. p.
1 P. to proceed, to pass away ( as time ); THlcT pre.
perf. sfirm p. fat. 3*srr5fHaor. NdM^f^ des srf^r P-P.
10 U. m*rar*CT?«T3fr to sweep the way, to go;
pre. ariiar^^-tT aor.
6 P. OT^T ( $srt? ) to cover, to be gathered, to sink;
pre. ^f%^rm f«t. 3T3^}^aor.
1 P. ^ to sound; «r0nn?? pre. «nor perf.
10 U. UTari^&H to wound; 9UFD^% pre.
perf. H^^m^-tf aor.
6 P. %^ to cut, to tear, to wound; &xft pre. *aw pert
DHA'TTJKOSHA. 129
4 A. *rot to select; rfhnt pr. ftfifr perf. H*H* tot.
aor. sffor p.p.
9 P. to choose? ftornft, rfforrft pre. fcwrft fut. 3Tifcfa[ aor,
4 P. %^ SJWnrt ^ to throw, to be ashamed; jftanft Pre-
/Wte perf. anfaft* aor.
9 P. *tft to' select, to go; f^RTift pre. sgwfi^ fit.
aor. Oau
1 P. tjpft ^^ir ^T to relate, to suggest, to praise, to hurt;
Sfafir pre. ^T5T^ perf. stfiRTT p. fut. 3T5ffft^ aor.
ben. f$r^rftr^f?r des. Pass.-s^T^ pre. Sfltfm aor.
ger. ^nfT P.p. 5 with grf A. f^7?rt to hope, to bless;
Pfe. 3TT^fr%^^ fot. ^(^f|^^ aor. ^i^if^^TlVi ben.
4 U. n$or to endure, to be able- 5T^qr?fr% pre.
perf. ^T%cfT, ^rRT P. f^t. srf%*irr%%, ^^'^
3T^Tf%^, 3T5nf> aor. T%5T^rit% des.
o P. ^iT^r to be able, to endure, to be powerful; ^igfclfi pre.
perf. ^nFT P. fut. ar^rq^ aor. ^|^|^ ben. T%^TT% des.
pre. Catt.— ^ll^Ulff-% pre. 3T^n^-«T aor.
1 A. ^ruf to doubfc, to be afraid; 51 J% pre. ^^ perf.
^Tf^Hl p. fut. 3T5Tf|pS aor. %^rf|^^ des. ^f^ p.p.
1 A. sqifjnn ^Tf% to speak, to tell; srgft pre. ^f% perf •
3^rf%^ aor.
1 P. %?T% to deceive, to hurt, to kill, to suffer; to pain;
5raf?r pre. srsrre perf. srretir p. fat. 3^ryr^ , ar^n^ra: aor-
10 U. ^pqir^^TTW to speak well or ill, to deceive; $|gqf8~
ff pre. ^T^rngrg^TT &c. perf. ^ryrq^T P. fut. 3T3T$ra^-cT aor.
^iTirT p.p.
10 U. 3Wfrprc*Tc*fr: to leave unfinished, to go;
pre. ?TTTfir«qtS% fit. ar^idd-a" Aor- W^W p.p.
130 SANSKBIT GBAMMAB.
10 A. sgremMo flatter; OT3TO* pre.
aor- $l<f P.p.
1 P. ^T% »nfr ^T to give, to go; ^rnrfS pre. STSTTOT perf.
^rfiiiwria* fut. 3T$nj?h;, arsnoft^ aor.
1 P. ( but Atm. in conjugational tenses- ) ^TfHK to perish, to
decay; qfarn* pre. ^^n^ perf. snu p. fut. 3T^I^ aor. 51^
ben. %5rfFf% des. Cau.-^T?nn?r-W, (alao^T^n?T-^) pre.
1 & 4 U. arr^r^- to curse, to wear, to blame;
Perf- ^TKT p^ fut. 3T^TTCBnr-3T^Tff aor.
ben. Pass.— ^rtqTT P'e. Oau.— {jTN^fff-^ P*e.
aor. %?n^^% des. *rff p. p.
10 U. to sound, to call out, to speak; srssmff-ar pre. 31*^-
ini^R-'^ perf. ^5^fir?TT P. fut. 3T^^T5^-fT aoi . vi^?T p.p.
4 P. g-qr^TR to grow calm, to put an end to, to stop; ^n^fff"
perf. ^TT%t!T P. fut. 3T5UT^aor. ^l^ld ben.
pre. Cau-5Tirof5f.%, ^^^-^ pre. ^TPff P. P.
10 A. 3Tr^T^ to look at, to show- ^mnrfr pre. ^imm^^
&c. perf. srmfoar P- *»*. 3T5fT^TH?T aor. f%5Tmf^^ des.
U. 9*3?q% to accumulate, to collect together; 5T*-^qra%
pre. ^P^n^^FTTT-^% &c. perf. a^T^T^^-cT Aor.
1 P. to go, to injure, to kill; qrfft pre. ^t^nJ perf.
i P. ftfrnn^ to kill;
1 A. ^dH^«K<M«ft: to shake, to agitate; *$&% pre. ^& perf,
^ifddr p. fut. g^rfirar Aor.
1 P. to go, to run; ^^yfar pre. ^U<g perf.
A. *cU|% to praise, to boast; $\<*Vft pre. ^r^r^ perf.
1 P. to go, to approach, to utter; ^^ pre. ^r^rgr perf.
1 P. jancft to leap, to jump; ^rfS P'e. ^TRRT perf.
p. fut. 3T$T3ftcTN, 3*5U ^n^ aor.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 131
hUrt' *° kil
Aor.
) cut up, to destroy; 5^ pre. ^n^T perf.
p. fut; ar^I^, arSTRfta; aor. ST^T p. p.
to pervade; STTWHT pre. a^rr^T^ Aor.
1 U. f*H> to sharpen, to whet; sfrcrtaf^ pre. ^rtf%«^-
fut. 3fTrm'h, aifrTire Aor
1 A. ^n^rqf ^fnfV XT to tell, to praise, to shine, r**^ pre.
perf. ^rrf§j^^ fut. a^rrfOT Aor. l%^TTf&^ dee.
P. 3j«|f$l^1 to teach, to inform, to govern, to correct, to
advise; 517% pre. 51317^ perf. 5rrT%cTr p. fut. 3tri$m. aor.
ben. m%<TW des. Pass. — fsimft pre. f^re p. p.
with ^n 2 A. $^m\ to expect, to blese; 3TT5TI^ pre.
Aor.
5 U. R^W, to whet, to sharpen, to excite;
fir^perf. ^qi?r% fut. 3T^fr^, 3T$^ Aor.
des
A, QO>WI«M to learn; f^T^ pre. %Tff^ perf.
p. fut. 3if|r%^ aor. f5TT%^^ des. f5T%?T p. p.
1 P. to go; T%ff?T pre. %T%g: perf. f?rrf^nt fct.
aor.
P. STTSTTOt to smell; ftnTT^ pre. f%f3N perf. %fV?TT p. fat.
^ivfl^ Aor.
2 A. srsinfr ?T^ to tinkle, to jingle; f%% pre. 3Tr?TT%^
Aor.
P. ar^T2T> to disregard, sfcft pre. fir^ perf. ar^ftcl Aor.
1 P. fiNrwt to hurt, to' kill; ^Tft pre. f^T P«rf.
Aor. ( According to some this is Set;
1 P. & 10 U. to leave a residue (with ft to excel;
182 SANSKRIT GBAMMAB.
&o. perf.
Aor.
7 P. ft^ptft to leave, to distinguish from others;
pre. f^T^ta perf. $^r p. fit. srffcre^ aor- fil^
%%$rf?T des. Cau.— $W%% pre. f$& p. p.
2 A. ^5r to lie down, to sleep; jrer pre. f|n^ perf. SfftcfT P-
fat 3T$rfSre aor. ^fqifr? ben. %^rRrq^ <^es. Pass.
pre. srsrrio- aor. Cau.-^rnTq-r8% pre. ^rffiw p. p.
1 A.%^^ to sprinkle, to move gently; sffa^ pre.
perf. 8T5nr%^r Aor.
1 P. & 10 U. STHWr to be angry; ( 10 U.
to speak, to shine; sfrarffif, ^Tr^ri^-^r pre.
^TT-^ perf.
l A. gj?qft to speak, to communicate, ^ft^ pre.
perf. aT^ftnr^ Aor.
1 P. *rJW?r to contemplate; ^(^yfS pre. f$|^i1^ perf.
p. fut. a^fi^rg; aor.
U. gftrqrf ot to study, to exercise, to honour, to visit;
pre. sfr^n^snT-^fr perf. ^ugflfaT p. fat
des.
1 P. to go, to move; ^fr^T% P'e. ^TT^ perf. ^ft%tfT p. fat.
aor.
1 P. sft% to bewail, to grieve for, to regret; $ffafff pre.
perf . ^t^cTT p. fat.
des. gf%«T, ^flMrf P- P.
4 U. ^fTJTTV ( f^ ) to be wet, to be afflicted. ^n?Mfr pre.
^r Per^- ^fft%fnr p. fat. sr^j^^, ar^fl-nfi^,
aor. ^T%rf p. p.
. HIHMi4H&<H-l«-m3% to bathe, to distil, to churn to
press ; §£5qffT pre. QQ^ perf. 3T^grg[ Aor.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 133
1 P. to resist, to be lame, to be impeded; tftjft pre.
perf. sftfOTT P. *at. *TOtrffc aor.
10 U- *TOf^ to be idle, to be lazy; srt^fiHT P™.
WC-xTfc perf. g<3i§Jddl:3 Aor.
P. (see ^ above). ^ufl^. Aor.
P.& 10 U. srreuf to dry, to purify; SJUOT* SJTOtlfilHt pre.
u^r^FK-^JIj perf.
4 P. $ft% to be pure, to have the doubts removed*
perf. s^T P- ^t. S^ST^aor. Pass.— ^ig^ pre.
aor. Oau.— ^ftvrqf^^ pre. m^qra-cT aor. ^§j^Q
p. p.
6 P. to go, to move, ^rfq- pw. g^fhr perf. arsfoft^ Aor«
P. $re> & 10 U. ^^^wfui to purify, to clear;
^^nrf&% pre. g^TT, grVpn^r^TT-^ per*.
^^S5^-?T Aor- ^f^Trr P. P.
1 A. ?fhfV to shine, to be happy; ^^ pre. ^g^r perf.
p- *^t. ST^^T^, ^^DRr? aor-
l p- *rr^, HRR fiNnri ^r to speak, to shine, to hurt.
perf.
fut. 9i^U«n^» ^(Si^tl Aor. grjvrcT? ^TtnTff, ^W?T P. p.
6 P. ^fn^nrf to shine, to be splendid; gsmf pre. g-ftcf p. p.
^^ pre. p. ( also gwr )
lO U. <qfd^H to gain, to pay, to forsake; ^^rf^-%
pre. §J<»<|»m£|chK-:5r% per/. ST^^^d.-cT aor.
( 3^) 10 U. ITT^ to measure, to produce; gr^(5*)qrf?T% pre.
4 P. 3HW to dry up, to be dried, to be afflicted;
pre. gr^rft perf. ^ftw P. f»t. 3?^^ aor, Oau.
pre. 3TB^^T Aor. g^rft des. &SG p. p.
4 A. I^IHiVMH^: to strike, to be firm; ^j^r pre. 5^ perf.
Aor. tgqr p. p.
134 SANSKRIT GBASIMAB.
10 A. reflRFcft to act as the hero, to make great exertions;
^W^ Pre- 31**^% p<*f. 3T^r^r Aor. Qfigfoft dea.
10 U. JTT> to measure-, ^jfanH* pre. ^n^^TT-^T% perf,
Aor.
* p. S^rnrf ^TRfr ^r to be ill, to collect; ^jjriR pre.
perf . a^fig- Aor.
1 P. sreft to produce, to bring forth; ^j^f pre. $ffl$ peri
1 A. qifrjffcKUTT^ ( but it is also Parasmaipadi in the 2nd
future,, aorist & conditional ) to break wind downwards;
Pre- ^r^ Perf- ^nfen p. fat. $rrfcr?r, sim
des. 5^[ p. p
1 U. ^53% to be wet or moist; ?nvftS% pre.
1 P. 10 U. xr^t to mock at, to ridicule-
pre. ar^nffg;, BT^T^I^-JT, 3T^fT5|vraL-<T Aor
9 P. fj^rnrt to tear to Dieoes, to hurt, to kill: srorrf^ pre.
perf. ^rft^r, ^'m p. fut. 3T^llfl^ aor-
des. Pass — ^f^ pre. tf4 P- p.
1 P. to go, to tremble; ^rsriSf Pr®. 1%^ pe'f . ^f^dF p. fat.
1 A. %sft to serve; $^ pre. ( See
IP. <n% to cook; ^mrf^ pre. ^TTWW fnt. 3T5mff^ Aor.
4 P. ff^RoT to sharpen, to make thin; ^qfjr pre. ^i> perf.
$inrr p« 'at. 319 id. > snnr^ft^ aor- ^r^TRnS dee.
pre. Oau. — ^rnn7ft% P'e. ^mr, T%?f P. P-
P. TuST^ts to become red, to go; ^fnmS pre. ^r^froT perf.
Aor.
P. if? to be proud or haughty; ^ffe(^)fS pre.
fat. sn^jW^ aor.
1 P. ?r^ to ooze» to trickle» «tmf^ pre.
p. fut. ^«Tr?f^, gr^ro aor. ^f^f, s£rma p. P.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 135
1 P. to ooze, to scatter gaftafd pre. ( See the above root).
P. r^ft^dt to wink, to contract the eyelids ; ^jfojfft pre.
f^nprfte perf . ST^TT^ Aor.
*ir 1 A. to go, to dry np, to congratulate; 3*nrit pre*
perf. ^FtTT p. fat. 3T5*m«T aor. ^rnT, ^fpr, ^ffa P. P-
1 A. to go, to creep ; «rjF?t pre. ^r«|: perf. 3wf|pE Aor.
1 P. to go, to move ; «nf ft pre. $r«rf perf.
or 1 P. & 10 U. 5i5f ( generally with fir ) to give, te bestow ;
pre. ^rsnor, ^rroror^i^n:-^^ perf.
Aor.
1 P. nfcrnrt to injure, to kill; gram P'e. ^TVTTTT perf.
3T*WTcT, -STSTRfr^ Aor.
«rtr 1 P. & 10 U. HTSro l^rnrf f?^% to liberate, to release, to
kill; 9T«nH, smwfft-ft Pre. ^T'HnT, STnTrnS^TT-^r^ perf .
Aor.
*HJ 10 U. rfeq-to be weak; STOTfif-fc pre.
perf. snriirftf p. fut. 3T5ranjg;^r aor.
A. jtmgq to be loose, 3F*lfr pre. WSF% perf. 3wf?*re aor.
P. f^wt^rqm^qr: to loosen, to delight, to arrange;
gTVMlfi pre. ^T«r^r, ^r perf. srpTcTT p. fut.
aor. T?!^r^l^m des.
P. & 10 U. g-^i^F^S to conipose a work, sryqf
pre.
4 P. <rrr§ ^ ^T to take 'pains, to mortify, to be fatigued;
pre. sntrnr perf. srWfTr P. fat. uwtud. a°r- srr^f p. p.
1 A. snn% to be careless, to err; ypnfe pre. 5^^ perf.
?rf^«mT p. fut. arsrfvTir^ aor. ^rsv^ p. p.
2 P. <rr% to cook, to dress- srrfSr pre. ^reft perf . STTcTT p.
fat. 9WT*fa( aor. Cau.— 9rrqtrfft-% pre. «rm, *rfur p. p.
186 SANSKRIT QBAMMAE.
ItJ. jN'wt to cling to, to depend upon, srgft-% pre.
fofr perf. *rftwT P. fat. srf^T^-rT aor. afan^,
ben. f^reffrfff-fr, f^TSnfarfiHt des- Pass.—sfrq^ pre.
aor. Can.— srrorarifr% pre. 3rf$rsr<r^-?c aor. fifa p. p.
1 P. ^ffr to burn ; vftft pre, %^r perf.
9U. qr% to cook, todresa, to boil;
^rfsnfr Per^. ^"^T ?• ^ut. Slijtft^, 3T07 aor.
des. afa p. p.
T^dt to hear, to obey; «raftfi* pre. ^srrar perf.
p. fut. ^^flft^aor. ^[qr^ben. 3psjq?r des. Pass— 53^ pre.
- aor. Oau.— srr^fS-^ pre. 3?srf <rT, sn^^-lf aor.
IP. qi% to cook ; SfTdfir pre. ^TSTT perf . snrTT p. f nt.
aor. STTOT^J OTf^, ben.
P. ^nfr to collect, to be collected; ?TTOif& P^. ^TOT perf.
1 A. to go, to move ; ^pr pre. ?&?!% perf. ST^afjpa Aor.
1 A. to go, to move; ^yf% pre. ^r^ip P«rf.
P. fifaprt to hurt, to be loose; 3$rarX P'e. ^55T«T perf.
TSSTOt^ Aor.
P. s^TT^to pervade; ^JT^fSr pre. m&m petf. 3T555T-
Aor.
A. ^f^% to-praise, to flatter, to boast of ; ^|V|^ pre.
pert. ^rj^raT p. ^t. ^^rf^ff aor.
P. P
P. ^ to burn 5 ^OTT% pre %?^ perf. j^PMl P.
^T^ Aor. f^^ p. p. fi^Plc^r, 3$ftw, f^5^r ger-
P. grr%f% to embrace, to cling to, to join; f33*riw pre.
firSOT perf. ^^T p. fat. 3rfoj$T^ ( to embrace ), arfom
( in «oy other sense ) Aor. r%R5WR des. ffos P- P-
10 TJ» f^taor to embrace ; ^r^T^-W pro. arffrRdT^-cT aor.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 137
1 A. ^frnf?T to compose in verse, to acquire;
perf. 3Tsgri%fc Aor. sjsgtre^ <*es.
P. 3*lfit to heap together; s^torfff pre.
Aor.
1 A. to go, to move; *qpt pre. 5n\q£ perf.
1 A. to go, to be opened; t&ft, ^^ pre.
perf. 3T^T%5*, 3^*1%^ Aor.
10 U. 3^^TT<Trift: to leave unfinished, to go;
^^n^«n:-5f> &e- I>erf- ^Wfu^M-% f^t. 3Tf$p^^.<T Aor.
( Also
10 U. *p*nrq-*rnjot to speak well or ill; *q^nef-?t pre.
Aor
I U. to go, to make a hole., »wri&-?r Pr».
perf.
1 P. mi§jim% to run; 9*&fa pre. ^»^T^ P«rf . «^I%?TT p.
U. qft>TTTnt to tell; >q*3CTl5-?ir pre. aq?^in?i^T^-^r%, &o.
pref. 5«V^v*gC:?f Aor.
P. 34!&<m^ to run; »erwf^ Pre- W*& Perf 3?^^ Aor.
2 P. srroi^ to breathe, to sigh, to hiss, «qr%W pre. ^P^TCT
perf. >^fimT P. fut- 3T^^ aor. T%5^T%TT% dee. ^T%?r ( but
3TF»^ff ) P. p.
Pi 1 P. »Tf^a[^: to go, to swell, to increase; *qin^ pre.
or f^rqpr perf. »^?TT P- fut.
bee. T%^ft^Tff des. .Pass.— ^pr^ pre. 3T^n9 aor.
Oau.— «OTirfS^ pre. ^ftpq^-rr, 3T^T^-n aor. q$ p. -p.
ilffiTWT, ^5^IT ger.
1 A. ^d{ to become white; $nft pre. f%^>r perf.
Aor.
138 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
1 A. stf^ to become white} fa?^ pre. |%t%% perf.
Aor.
1 & 4 P. f*TH* to spit, to sputter: ST*,^. ST«jfa pre.
perf. jfiraT p. fut. 3*%ifrxaor. #nqT<5[ ben.
^TfTif des. Cau.— %-^g|ff% pre. 3^ p. p.
1 A. to go, to move; s^s^ff pre. qc^c% perf. €^i%?ff p. fit.
aor
1 P. ^Wt to cover; *nri?T pre. frf^^ffT fat. 3?^nf^ Aor.
5 P. fjftrrat to kill; ^rf^ pre. srcnfi^ , 3T«rniT^ Aor.
10 U. srm^at to invite; ^ff^m-ar pre. ar^rl1^^-^ Aor.
10 A. x& to fight. HinpRiff pre. ^rrm^s^ fut.
Aor.
1 A. %^ ^> ^ to sprinkle, to serve;
3TFT%^ Aor.
1 U. *rjrer% to be collected,
1 P. ^|f to embrace, to cling to, to fasten; fnsffa pre
TCT3r perf. *rg^r p. fat. ^mfsfra; aor. *T5*n5 beo. Pass -
r^^ pre. sr^f^ aor. ^nf? p.^p.
1 P. 3T^^T to be a limb or part of; ^rafff pre.
10 U. fffTT^t to kill, to be strong, to dwell, to give;
^ pre. ^Tfqrr^^rc-^% perf. ^rff^fTF P- fat. <x*X$*l :X aor.
10 U. to finish, to adorn, to go, to leave unfinished; ^rryqrff
•^ pre. *T5*TT23sr*-^ Per^- ^ryfir^TT P. ^t. 3TefrTO^-ff aor.
DHA'TUEOSHA. 139
10 A. qrftMfforret to extend; fnnm pre. iMftmft **t. 3TO
6 P. fq3Km*lfUmHI3^J£ to break, to go, to sink down, to
decay, to be languid; tft^lft pre. ft^T^ perf. ^niT p.
. mild, ben. m^rm des. Pais — ^^ pre. Oau.
pre. aTHT^^-ff aor. ^ p. p.
10 U. to go; OT^lfN* P^. Htfta^T Aor.
des.
1 P. WXift to divide & 8 U. ^f to give, to worship}
pert ffMHT p. *ut.
(8) aor. r%*rft<TKT
. Pass.— f^a^, *wft pre.
( 1 ) *T?T ( 8 ) p. p.
1 P. qH«M% to connect- ^nrf?r pre. mm perf.
- to serve, to honour, to gratify
Aor.
1 P. %^ to be confused; H»n% pre. ^^7^ perf.
Aor.
4 P. ^ROIT^ to be transformed; wrfiT pre. ^renT perf.
Aor
1 P. *T*^MT> to be connected-, SFfHT Pre. fm«r perf.
p. fut. arcvCTct aor.
lOU. to collect; ^TRr«TI^% pre. wmr^%K-^RK perf.
3«r^^-<T Aor.
1 A. to go, to move; ^qfr pre. ^r^ perf.
1 P. 'ETlfo to gain, to earn by labour; ^fft pre. fTOiT perf.
frfir?TT P. ^t. 3^*7^ aor.
1 P. to go, to move; ^ft pre. ^ftsufff i«t. ar^^ffg: Aor.
140 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
t 1 P- «nft S^TOt ^ to go, to hurt, to kill. *pfft pre. ^ perf .
to go, to move; ^ETSmrpre. ^rfrr^ perf. aR^rafat Aor.
2 P. ^fjt to sleep. , ^rT??T pro. ^rnT perf . ( Vedic ).
1 U. »nft to go, to become ready. *T5fT?r-% pre. ^rat perf.
p. tot.
1 A. n4ft to suffer, to allow, to forbear ; ^r^ pre.
perf . *rf|far, ?^T p. fut. *fj*Tft fnt. 3i^f?^ aor.
ben. t%*rf|tt% des. Oau.— ?JT^n?T-W pre. 3Ttfi^-?T aor.
des. *& p. p.
4P. ^fl-to be pleased, to endure; ^rfn% pre. ^raff perf.
P. fet. g^T^ Aor. r%*ft<?fr des. ff% p. p.
1 P. 10 U. *ffft to forbear; ^rS, ^rf^-W pre.
Aor. CT^ft, ^Tft<T p. p.
P. tfr%|?r to finish, to accomplish; frrefinr pre. ^TFST perf.
P- fut- ^T^tS fnt. ^fTTf^aor. Can.
des.
U. ^rmsnnif to appease, to comfort, to soothe;
w. ^T^WTT^^TT-^% &c. perf. ^rpr^^T P. int.,
;-cf aor. RtWtrqft*n3% des. ^ri^ff p. p.
^TT^ 10 U. ^TPWI^'t to conciliate; CTtrafff-ft P'«.
Aor. ffiWTfTfitam% des.
10 U. ^fc^ to be weak; ^R^rfir-^ pre. af^raTT^-«T Aor.
fir 5 & 9 U. **& to bind, to tie, ftRtft, Rrg?r, f^RT/S,
pre. f%wr, 7%^ perf. %wr P. to
ben. fM^fif-* des. Pass— tffoft pre. i^^r, fin* p. p.
6 U. grcft to sprinkle, to water, to pour in, to impregnate-
PW. f$TO) fflnft% perf. %Tf5T p. tot. -tf^lo-ft tot.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 141
aor. fij<wj|^, |%$fTF ben.
des. Pass.— fifaim P™. 3T^f% aor. Oau.— ^mfl-fr pre.
fitrfj P- p.
1 P. 3RT^ to disregard, to despise; ^f?T Pre-
Aor.
P. to go, to drive off; ^jit pre. m^T perf. ^ffar p. fut.
anHrac aor. ftftTTO ben. Oau.— %-\anrf^-?T pre.
aor. ftftffinft, fiftftwt ***• %^[ p. p.
P. $n% m^-r^l ^r to ordain, to command, to turn out
auspiciously; fi^r ( T%%n**T, T%%^[ 2nd sing. ) perf. $f%TT,
^5T p. fut. 3T%^VcT» 3T&tfh* ( H'Rf^W, 3T^<T^ dual )
aor.
4 P. ^TT^V *o reach, to attain one's end, to succeed, to ac-
complish; f%«ir^ p*e. ftr^r pe'f. ^[T P- fut. 3Tfiro^ aor.
T%T%?^ des. Oau.— ^TT^innfr^ ( ^rvnn?r-^ to cause one to
ascertain ).
to wet, T%^Tm pre. f%f%^ perf. T%l%cTT p. fat.
aor.
4 P. <T^^rfT% to sew, to write, to join; *fjoqfi pre.
perf. %ftf!T P. fat. 3T^t^ aor. ^ftsqi^ ben. Pass.—
pre. TOT p. P- %ft?*T> ^^r ger,
1 A. 4N* to sprinkle, to go, to move; ^ft^r pra;
perf. ^fti%?TT P. fut. anftf$V aor.
IP. sr^r^'q^: to permit, to prosper., *nrfR pre. g^T perf .
iBfaT p. fut. aRTT<t^, BT^'fig: aor. §351$% des.
5 2 P, srerVwst: to allow, to possess power or supremacy}
*ftffr pre. ^^T^ Perf. *ft?TT p. fut. 3^4^ aor-
5 5 U. ^^fi^^R^r^?^n^5 to sprinkle, to pour out, to
bathe, to press out juice, to distil; f£Jfti%, IRJiT pre. ^qrw,
3^ perf. ^n?rr p. fut, aretfni, nffle- aor. Q^Tgf, ?ft4hr ben.
H. S. Q. 45
142
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR,
pre.
-?T des. Pass.—
pre. 3?35*<I-?T aor.
10 U. S^f^qT^rt to make happy;
10 U. 3RR[> to despise; s^nff-% Pre'
1 & 6 P. irrerfgflrer: to speak, to hurt;
3T*Wfat Aor. Also 3p>r 1 & 6 P.
2 & 4 A.
aor. Can.—
pre.
pre.
to bring forth, to produce; ^,
perf. ffmr, *rfo<TT p. *ut. a^TS, 3mffcr aor.
beu. ^Q^r% des. Pass. — qifc pre. srmi^ aor.
C«n.— frr^qi^% pre. 3TOT^-<f aor. ^JT ( 2 ), ^ ( 4 ) p. p.
6. P. >*dt to excite, to impel-, 3*^ pre. ^ft^rft fut. 3WT^
Aor.
10 U. ^7? to point out, to betray; to indicate by gesture,
to trace out; g^rT%% pre. ^pm&&K-^ perf.
p. fut. arg^^^-cT aor. Q^rAwRir-ll ^es. q;i%*r p-. p.
10 U. %^?f to string, to write in the form of a concise
rule, to plan, to unbindj q^rqi%-% pre.
P. fat. 3T^g^.?r aor.
1 A. $rrdr fco strike, to pour out, to deposit, to destroy.
35?* Pre. S^f perf. qfaf p. fut. 3dgj^j aor. ggf^ des.
Oau.— ^rirm-W pre. *Hq&33;cT aor.
10 U. ^r?it to incite, to strike, to cook, to dress, to pour
out, to promise; s^*n%-?T pre. TOqTSTOTC-^fc per/. ^Rar
p. fut. 3TQ&^3-rr aor- ^%<T p. P.
1 P. 3^r^> to respect, to disregard; ^gfr^ pre. 5^ perf.
^f§HT p. fat. ayqgfig Aor.
3 ( Vedic ) & 1 P. to go, to run. ^r^fS
runs ) pre. ^STT perf. *?fr p. fat. 3T^TT<3[ ( 3 P. ),
(IP.) aor. %grg^ ben. f%tfpmf des. Oau,— ^n^rff.^r pre.
4 A. fq-^if to let loose, to send forth; f|?7ar pre. $r$tr% fut.
Aor. f%?T des
DHA'TUKOSHA. 143
6 P. f%^ir to create, to let loose, to she4i Q3Tfa pre. *nr
perf . $rer P. *ut. ^um fut. arorefh* Mr. 5*^ ben. %^-
Sffft des. 3^ p.p. $T£ ^ inf.
1 P- iraY to creep, to go; ^TTO pr«. H*T$ perf. *nrf, SOT p.
fut. ^<rqr aor. ^cirirj; ben. ffngcffft des. Oau.—
pre. 3T*r*r<nj ff, s?mfT^-<T »or. ^g p.p.
P. f^^nrr to kill, to injure, HHRT ^»«rRf pre.
1 A. to .go, to move; %$ft pre. fift% perf. ^rf%?n p.
3T%f%^ aor.
' P. to go, to move, ^r$yf^ pre. r%^y perf. ^rOTT p. fat
1 A. %^r to ierve, to pursue, to enjoy, ^ff pre. f«%% perf;
aor. r%%Rq^ des. Oau.~ %W*fif-?f
P.p.
1 P. ^ to waste away, to decline; *rpn% p*e. ^rrwr% fat
4 P. 9Trrf^Tfr% to destroy, to bring to an ena; &ifa pre.
perf, ^TrU p. fut. Sffff^ ^^rr^fTa aor. %*rrs ben. r%^f-
des. Pass.—^fnr^ pre. Cau.— ^TO^f?T-?r pre. faff p. p.
1 P irfn^frvoi^r: to go, to jump, to be dried, to perishj.
pre. ^r^^ perf. *^?WT P- ^a
aor. ^^rr^ ben. T%^rf^ des. Pass.— *^i% pre. Oau. —
aor. *^5T P-P-
U. to collect; f$?OTt%-(t P'e. ^?^<IT^I^rT-^ft perf.
A. siffar?^ to stop; f^mWp'e. ^R^«Tperf. 3T^ff«reaor.
9. P. fnCTKfHRtft: to create, to hinder, to restrain}
5cr^«r perf. f^ft«raT p. fat. srowa;,
ben. ^s^r p.p.
5 & 9. U. ansRot to go by leaps, to approach, to cover, to
lift; *$5ftfil, *f 5^> ^^T^, *$*ft* Pre- 3^TT, ^^T per(.
p. fut. H*15WK, *K$rS «or. ^ft^ des. .
144 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
1 A. snq^ijf to jump, to lift up; 4^*4^ pre.
perf. 3T^€£T*^% Aor.
5 & 9 P. ft^^r STKOT ^ to stop, to hold} ^$¥Hi(fr,
pre. 3T^*HT^aor-
1 A Hsrr^nt to rout, to cut, to destroy; *W<£\ pre.
P" ^rai^T to move; to totter, to err; ^T55T% pre.
perf. ^3rf§cTT P- fat. 3T**3T5?T^aor. ftH^fS^ld des. ^forf p. p.
1 P. y Id VIM to resist, to strike against; frT^ft pre. rfWT^P
perf . fcTHspiT p. fat. 3^rtT^ff^ aor.
1 P. ffc^oir to cover; ^TT^r pre. ^rlf5t^TI% ^at. 3)^cTift^ Aor.
1 P. 31^- to sound, to thunder, to sigh; ^•rra1 pre. ff^TT«T
perf. ^cTRcTT p. fut. SftcTiftc^, 3TWT5TT3[ *or« f^JWH^RT des.
Can.— *ftq?rr3-% pre.
10 U.^SJT^- to thunder* ^nfmrT% pre.
perf. 3Tft4Eft*T3rcT aor.
1 P. aq&fgoqr not to be confused or weak;
perf. 3Utfu1f^ Aor.
. A . iff?R7^r to make immovable, to support, to stop.
pre. <TCcTTOt perf. Mi^^THT p. fat. STWI^TH' aor.
& 9 P. ft^R ^Rot ^ to stop, to fix firmly, to support;
^W**fidL aor. ^*^IT3[ ben. f^^f^RIW des. Pass. — ^T^w^
pre. Oau. — ^n^^^iff-^T pre. ^cT«^r p.p. ^nf^Hr^T, W«WT ger.
A. ^r^dt to drip, to drop. ^aTff P'e. faiH^1 perf. 3{^f%?
aor. nTOTffaH, fiftfT?<fa% des.
or ^H; ^ P. 3TTBr«tt% to become wet, to become fixed;
fiit. aftrfh s^^ftrft Aor.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 145
2 U. ^jft to praise, to extol, to worship by hymns;
wfrft, *&-*$tib p™. g^nr, g^r porf . tifcn p. fat.
-% fut. *r*rtnfh(, STfflre aor. frgtfTZ, mt<fte b«
dei. Pass.-sjire pre. 3TtfttI% a<<r. Cau.— *m*
arSWTH1 aor. ?3?f p.p.
1 A. #T*'> to stop, to suppress; fatW pre. g^H perf.
IH?T AC* . ^Pr?^r, ^^r ger.
5 & 9 P. ^Ffr MTTOt ^ to stop, to expel, to stupify.,
pre. gH perf. 3TfgTirt<r Aor.
4 P. & 10 U. 5Frg«f r^ to heap up, to erect;
- &e
U. 3TT^rn^ to cover,
(TR^ , 3?^JcT aor.
ben. m^ffTO-ff des. Pd39.~fcf^r pre
pre.
1 P. to go, to move; S£$rf?r pre. ?r^j^r parf. 3^1^ aor
'6 P. fifaHW to strike, to kill; ^jf^ pre. <RX% perf.
p. fat. STfrTf?^, W?J%T^aor. (^rjf?'?i7i,
Aor-
U. 3Uf?TT<Tr to spread, to oover; ^jairf^, fffdn?r pre
perf. ^RcTF, ^T^tfTr p. f«t. 3T*frfr
aor. f cfrrn t ben.
10 U. ^Tff to steal; ^rgfar-^ pre. ^^^T^r^TT-^r% perf .
^T^-rT aor.
1 A. '<Tfot to ooze; *%qtf pre. ffTCT perf. *%fWT p. fat.
f^ aor.
1 P. TC*r to cover, to put on, to adorn; ?CT<rfff P'e,
perf. HSTT*ft^ aor.
1 P. 3T*7tttrT<T<fr: to sound, to collect into a heap, to spread
146 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
about; sm^rfa pre. ?r*aft perf . farmr p. fat.
P. ^srfdr to cover; ^jirf?T pre. aroTT perf. raft^T p. fat.
BTOnft^ aor. rawfitalr des. Cau.-**nnrf?l-ffr pre.
Aor.
1 P. WT* to stand firm* WcriS pre. flwra P«rf.
fat.
1 P. irfffftfrff to stand, to wait, to be, to be at hand &*
pre. ff^ft perf. romi P. fit. 3TWT^ aor. ^TT^ ben.
es. Pass.— **fcm pre. 3T^TT^r aor. Oau.
pre. 3?%q^-<f aor , %RT P-P. falrZl ger.
P. ^Rift to cover; ?^% pre. griinr perf .
*^w ( Derom. ) P. to become big or stout; ^?iuidl pre.
3HP'Q&^ aor.
4 P. 1%^ to object; ^prm pre. ^rerrer perf.
2 P. ^fr% to bathe, to perform an ablution; ^rf^ pre.
perf. srmt P- fnt;. :3mnn^aor. ^RT^, ^Tn ben.
des. Pass.— «rraw pre. Bf^rrtl^ aor. ^r?T, ( but ft^^rm profi-
cient in ) p.p. Cau.— ^q*n?T, ^Tq^fS pre.
4 P. ^% to have affection for, to be kind to; %3TiW pre..
, ^T p. fut. 3T%f^ aor.
p. p.
or
10 U. ^t to love;%^rf?f-% pre. 3?ftrf&r*3-rT Aor.
2 P. to flow, to distil; sfh?f pre. ^«on^ perf. ^paT P
^^Nl^ aor. ^rTT^ ben. Pass.— ^iff pre. Can.—
pre. 3^«OT5r^-tT aor. ^?r p.p.
4 P.^^uttovomit-^55rrapre. ^oiTf perf.
p. fot. ^tf|czn% ^t^ri% fat. awg^g; aor.
. p.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 147
IP. %sfr ( srtwnrarr SU^ ^r^ ) to dress, to envelop?
«|HjR pre. ^^ perf. M^Rn^ Aor.
I A. T%nt^5^T to throb, to go; *q?^% pre. q^r^ perf.
fqf?5rTT p. fut. sreqf?^ aor. fwf^TTff des.
pre. 3*<TC<F^ aor. *<if^?T P. P.
1 A. ^roq to contend with, to challenge;
perf. *<jf5?TT P. *ut. STprpfor aor. fq^rRr?^ des.
10 A. to touch, to take, to embrace; ^iiar pre.
&c. perf. fq^ffqTcfT p. *ut. STq^WT aor.
1 U. ^TqR*<T^r;ror: to obstruct, to touch, to spy;
P'e. qf«TT5T, <T*T5f perf. 3^7^, 3?^^, 5T^^T%« Aor.
10 A. jrfOT^quT^r: to take, to embrace;
Aor.
5 U. to gratify, to protect, *£oum pre. CRCTTT perf - ( Vedic )
T^R" to ^OUCDJ to come in contact with;
perf. ^q^r, ^T^T p. f»t. 3T^rT^fT
aor. *£3nni; ben. ft^^TT% des. Cau.— ^r^fqr^-ff P™.
P.P. ^* >**&* inf .
10 U. ttenm* to desire, to envy; ^qro-ir pre.
&c..perf. ^ftfTT p. fut. 3Tn^f^-<T aor. Pass.
pw. fr^^fq^m-rr des. *sf|?T p.p.
9 P. to hurt, to kill- *<TOm?f pre. <T^TTT per.
6 P. ( ^217?: ) ^R3«% to tremble, to throb; ^rf^ pre
1 A. %^-f to increase, to grow fat; wratl P'e.
P. fut. ^r^^T^— aor. Cau.— ^n^gf?r-ar pre
aor. f?*q7rfa*?ir dea. ^cT P.P-
10 U. ^Tf ;r to love; *qfT£*riff-3r pre
pelf. 3?fqrr%T^-fT Aor.
10 U. nforem* to kill, ftl^fff-ff p*e. 3TT?f^T|^-rr Aor.
A. f3T3»^% to blow, to burst open; P. R^Rnt to split open,
148 SANSKRIT OBAMMAB.
to break
Aor. S^ftlllT, U^fe^, SWId^ des. Can.—
p*e. 3)3f$kdci;-cT A or. t^Tea? ^rfer p. p.
6 P- ( f <n^: ) fel&ft to split open, to blossom;
pre. 5?qft7, (S^f?** 2 sing-,) pert, fgrfefr p. fat.
aor. 3?$77*ra des- ^^rfef p. p.
10 U H^pr to break open. VKf?mff-?t pro.
&c. perf. 3T5^5T?g[-fT Aor.
6 p ^^^t ( f^n%: ) to cover., ^gr^nr pre,
2nd sing. ) perf. 3T*5^r^ Aor.
1 P. qff5T> to joke, to jest; *$-o<iid pro. 3^U?r perf.
^rfa^CTlS fut. 3T^l?Tg; Aor.
; 10 0. to joke, tolaughat; ^Td^qfar-ff P^. ^^Ug^-yf Aor.
P. Si 10 U. game as ^07 .
P. ?$•*% ( ^?n%: ) to tremble, to throb, to flash, to shine;
pre. s*<£rr perf. sgrftfTT p. ^t. 3K$rO<i a<>r.
p. P. Oau.— TOTT^Iff, 'WnT^m pre.
1 P. f^cfir to spread; ^x^fff pre. 5^5^ perf.
Aor. ^f^r, ^TOT p p.
1 P. *r^5aft ( ^?n%: ) to tremble, to collect, to kill
pre. s*qfrc* ( SFSTTSTO 2nd sing. ,) perf. attgrsfrci: Aor.
1 P. SHTR^fa to thunder, to glitter, ^^{ar pre.
SrF§fcTT p. fat ^^^ffc^ aor. Sf^fOTTrt des. Oau.—
^ pie. 3TS*S5*ra[-jfT aor. ^isn!, f§^or p. p.
1 A. £q^3r to smile, to bloom; *jrq-> pre. fti^flW perf.
p. t ut. 31^5 aor. ftmm^ des.
10 U. ^rfrg^ to despise, to love, to go;
tolT^^TT-^% perf. SR?f<rar p. fat. ^f&lT«2^-fT aor.
1 P. ft^'Tot to wink, to blink; tfi&ft. pre. r%wte peri
DHA'TOKOBHI. 149
1 P. fayfliqi to rememl>er; ^TCTJT% to think upon or long
lor; flRdrf pre. flWIT perf. *H<f| p. fut.- a^TlTR^ aor gfij-
<t& des. Pass.— wqfa pre. Cau. tnrcqft-ft, SR^fo-% (3?pa«^
Pass. — wq?T pre. 913*11% SKflft Aor. *ijfl pj>
5 P. to live, to please; ^wof^f pre. SWTT P«?rf. Caa, — CTR-
qfiHT ( Vedic ).
1 A. S|^|c<0| to ooze, to run, to trickle, to flow out;
pre. ^^p% perf. ^f^rlT, ^Fm p. fut. ^qi^QB, ^^
fnt. 3T^«-<q. , ^^^, 3T^5rT aor. ^qp^ie, fq^fU^ ben.
ft^qf^^, l%^PcWT-% des. *q^ pp. ejf^icWT ^q'?^T ger.
Cau.— *q?^qm-ir pre.
1 P. 3TS? to sound, to go, to consider; ^qttHT pre.
perf . jEqm^ p., f ut. 31^^ aor. f^^Tf^rqf?r des. *qp/T pp
10 A. foj&k to reflect; *qjflq^ pre. ^qmqra^ &c. perf.
*qr*ri*tai p. fut. 3rftr^qRrT aor.
1 A. ^^^ to fall down, to sink, to hftng down, to po.
to be pleased; gflifr pre. ^sfe perf. tffMdl p. iut. ^^f^H
^5R^aor. ^mftK ben. froftTT^ des. Pass.— ^r^ pre.
3^fl% aor. ^f?f pp. »ftr^TT ger.
1 A. to confide, to trust; && pi'e. ^^ perf. ^ftm p. fut.
aor.
1 A. nm to go; s^?f pre. ^«^ perf. 3T«f^ Aor.
I A. fwi^r to entrust, to contide; ««?& pre. ^1?^ perf.
P- fut STCR^, ^«S*?e aor. Cau. 3TO5**TqT?T-iT pre.
or. rrofl:0<TO des. ^FVT pp. «f*^c^T, «^^T ger.
4 P- nfiuJmrq*!: to go, to become dry; ^qi% pi e
perf. «fi*qft fut. 3^3^ Aor. Cuu. &*qf?!-?T pro.
q^-tf Aor. ftdf^m, S«^l% des. Pass, qi&ft pre.
aor. ^?T pp.
150 SANSKRT GRAMMAR.
1 P. to flow, to go, to trickle away; qftfa pre. g^TO perf.
p. fut. are«^-?f aop. ^51^ beii. Cau.— SfRqft pre.
des. gflf pp.
1 A. to go; £eU?f pre. «T%^ |ut. 3*&fer Aor
1. P. to boil, to sweat; SliqfiT pre. *f$ft perf. See %.
1 A. qKStft to embrace; &*t% pre. S^A» ^IWT perf.
*^f p. fut. &%& fut. 3^^ aor. &^(V ben ft^g^
des. Pass.— ^S3?T pre. 3T^f^ aor. Cau. ^f3fqi%-W pre.
^^f^r^-ff aor. *^R pp. ^^c^TT, ^fc^F ger.
1 A. 3TI^T^% to be pleasant to the taste, to please to
eat; ^^ pre. fl^ perf. ^f^fT p. fut, 3^^ aor.
Cau. ^ff^qf^-W pre. 3?l%^3-fl aor. ftR^ft^^ des. ^i^rf pp.
10 U. to sweeten; ^Rf*lfrf-?f pre. ^VT^n97f^-^lc perf.
^IR[fqRn p. fut. 3Tl%^^-?T aor.
1 P. ^F«^ to sound, to make a noise, to sing; ^T»ffiT pre.
perf. &fal\ p. fat. 3??^^, 3??F^T^ aor. Cau.
pre. 3Tm*cR3:cl aor. l%^f%Tff des. ?3f^T (
the mind ) pp.
1 P. 9T?We% to decorate, to adorn. ( See the above root )
Can. feRqfa-fr pre. Pass. *f?q% pre. ST^tH, 9T^I> aor.
^ P. ^iq^ to sleep, to repose ^fqfir pro. 3T^cfR^, ^T"fte.
imperf. ^^Tq perf. ^HT P- fut. 3?^jc^ aor. S^Fl ben.
des. Cau. ^iqqm-S' pre. 3Tl%^q^aor. Pass.—
pre. 38 pp.
10U. «n%^to find fault with, to blame; Sf^-d pre.
T-^RR perf. ^Tiq?Tr p. ,f ut. 318^^ Aor. ^qfe
ben. fiTEsrcftqm-H des.
1 A. 37(^Tej% to taste; ^|?T pre. &&% perf. ^fl^ P- fnt
df^K? aor. ftR^K^^ des.
1 P. to go, to move; ^5[% pre. ^ef^ perf,
DHA'TUICOSHA. 151
1 A. to go; 6N-17?fr pre. "fl^% perf .
1 A. 3fRTO(% ( see ^ ) to taste, to be pleasant; snjft pre.
perf. *5(Tft*qii fut. Sf^tftfc aor. f*TOTft<Ht des.
to taste; **mim-i* pre. 3ifasi^-?T Aor.
des. f^TftcT FP-
1 A. ( ^5f fll^sT^fr: WTOfaftftfttWO to be aunoiuted, to be
greasy; *|*% pre. fafa* perf. &%*!& fut.
aor. Can.— *ifcqfif-?f pre. ftn^j^M?! ftl^ft^ des.
^fef pp.
4 P. »n?m^^ to sweat, to perspire; fi^ft pre. if^TT perf.
p. fut. 3^=[^ aor. ft^T pp. .
» *° spread, to forget ^J^Sjfif pro.
IP. 3T^tarTI*p}t.' to eouud, to praise, to go, to be pained;
Sm% pre. e?^?: perf. ^ft?f|, ^rl? p. fnt.
aor. 3*Tqfa[ ben. fi^^fc^, ^^IfiT des. Can.
Sffe^^-W aor. *%$ pp.
9 P. to hurt, to kill; *fartft Pre-
1 A. to go; ^^Jt pre. ft«^% p«rf .
I P. cffojl to shine, to be bright; $arfrT pre. vjfr?!? perf. flfofl p.
fnt. «f|J^3fn^aor. fRcf pp.
1 P. ^Rr^c^'Jt: to leap, to jump, to bind to a post, to
oppress; ^31% pre. v3T$I£ perf , 3^f(^, SHTRftl. aor
\ A. S^HlcOT to void excrement, to discharge faces;
-pre. 3T^ perf.-^r.p. fut. 3?*rr aor. fagc^ des. %* pp.
2 P. to kill, to beat, to boat, to conquer &c.; ^fnl pre.
( pi. 3?WrC ) imperf. 3TOT* perf. ^??n p. fut
aor. ^tfJI^beii. f^nn^Rf des. Pass —f^ pre
aor. Cau.— ^T?nil% ^ pre. STviTm'T^-rf aor.
freq. 5?r pp. f c^I ger.
152 SANSKKT GRAMMAR.
1 P. iflft to go; f^rfTf pre. 5^W| perf. f I*fl*qfif fut.
Aor.
1 P. to go, to worship, to sound, to be weary; &fa pre.
perf. ^faff p. fnt. 8?$^' aor. fftfl pp.
to go, to worship, to take;- f^RT pre.
perf. a^ffo Aor. pH^RJMfd des.
IP. i%%^% II? ^1 to plough, to go; ^Rf pre. 3T£T3 pnrf.
YE 1 P. ffft to smile, to laugh at, to excel, to bloom &c.;
pre. Sflns perf. ^finn p. fut. 3Tg<ft^ aor. Pass.— f ^ pre.
Cau.- fl^jllr-^ pre. SRftf^-?! aor. fogfaMId des. f l%?| pp.
f I 3 A. to go, to attain, to get/ fsfftfT pre. 5fJ perf. f f?n p. fut.
fftqft fnt. fl^K ben. *W&1 aor. ftrn^ des. Pass.— *T*lft.
pre. 3fflfi| aor. ^pf pp.
$f 3 P. ^TH to abandon, to resign, to l«t fall, to omit;
pre. Sffl perf. $ft\ p. fut. afgT^H aor- ^
des. Pass.— fmft pre. 9f|TAf aor. Cau. — £FTOi?T% pre.
rWC:^ aor. ft*T pp. ffcsff ger.
ft 5 P. n?fi ^ to go, to send, to shoot, to promote; fl^tf^ pre.
f*Wiq perf. t^T p. f nt. afHj^ aor. ^hlWL l«n. f^)^rfit des.
Oau.—fiqqf^-^ pre. *r^fif^-?f aor. Pass, fpfil pre. STflft
aor. if ?f pp.
s
ff ^ 1 P. fi[?=nqf to kill, to injure, to torment, to hit; ffcfft pre.
perf. ffftRH p. fut. Sffi^ft^ aor. Pass.— fi[^ pre.
aor. flT{fl%?l% des. f|ftT?f pp.
7 P. tq kill Ac.; dsrf^f rre. 3^1^-^ imperf . ft£* 2nd sing.
impera. (See the above root for the other forms ).
10 u. to kill, &c.; fg^n%-?i:^pre. fgwng
perf. ^^fR?!T p. fut. 3?f3rf?99L-?f aor-
des.
DHA'TUKOSHA. 163
1 U. s?sq% jra^ to make an indistinct sound, !to hiccough
pre. faftsR, Ot(3$ perf. ftfoflf p. fut. 3?ftsft^,
Aor. ftftf?f pp.
1 0 A. fjfflpri to hurt, to kill; T5^R% pre. ftvqT3^ &c. perf.
Aor.
1 p- *?!3jft to curse, to swear; fcft pre. ftfc perf.
Aor
9 P. ?{mn5«tft to reappear; ft^rift pre. f*f$T perf.
Aor.
1 A. JlcmKiqV' to go, to wander, to disregard; ft^rt pre.
perf. ftfrRTT p. fnt. «rf|?»^ aor. ftfj** pp.
1 P. JIFT^ to please; ft^l% pre. filft^ perf. 3?!^^^ Aor.
6 P. *n3^T<fr to sport amorouslj, to indicate amorous
desire; ft«T% pre. f^f^5 perf. sft^RL ^-or-
3 P. ^Tsn^rtitz to ofiEer, to perform a sacrifice, to eat; $f}ft
pre. ^5^1^ impera. 2nd sing. 5j5ra, ^<4I*I^^ Per^- ffaTT p.
tut. 31fHH aor- f 1^1 ben. 3|[*frf des. (Jao.-—fl^li%-^ pre.
^^P^-^ a°r. pi pp.
1 P. to go; fi^fif pre. sjfte perf. fT^^ ^ut. 3^1^ Aor.
6 P. ^1% to collect; g^fff p-e. ^5- perf . Cau. fl«Trf^-&
pre. «f^«^-?f aor.
1 A. «^IW ^ W ( 5*<ft |cq% ) to collect, to choose, to take
away; gssit pre. sjfp'i' Perf • IjP^ aor.
1 P. ^l?F^ to bo crooKed, to deceive; gx^sft pre.
perf. |T%m p. f ut a^^iei aor. fjri%$?f , pp.
1 P. to go, to cover, to kill; jftelft pre. sg^fa Per^-
f ut. 3T5T«l?l Aor.
P. to go; 31-fr pre. *£gg perf. 9T^ft^ Aor.
154 SANSKRT GRAMMAR.
1 U. f *UT to take, to lead, to draw to a distance, to deprive
of, to win, to obtaiu, Ac.; frft-^ pre. 5f$K, 3!^ perf. $?|f
p. fut. 5ft<.qfir-3 fut. srsrfH, s?53 aor. f^TO. tfflS ben.
deB- Ca11- f TOft-& pre. snft^-a aor. Pass.—
pre. s?5tft aor. £<f pp.
A. fl^JT *T3J?T?tt xf to be angry, to be ashamed; £*frm. pre.
parf. goftftcqir fut. 3T5«3rTRl2 aor.
I P. 3f3fc to tell a lie; ^qfil pre. 5|f^ perf. 3Tf*ffa Aor.
des. cau. ffrm-ft pre. ^^^-?r, 3^15^-?! aor. «g pp.
4» P. jJiJT to be delighted, to stand erect, ( as hair. )
pre. 5Tf qr perf. ^TfrfT p. fut. 3T5«?e[ aor. OTfl, 5^ PP-
1 A. flm^rmt to be wicked, to strike, to be born, to porii
V?-^ p.re.'n|fze, 9?|f^H, aor.
1 P. ^2% to surround, to attire; fefa pre. flfiJS' perf
IHrota fut.-aiWta.Aop. nrtr%Ti% des.
1 A. SftTC to disregard; |^if pre. ft|t perf. »r|f|^ Aor.
1 A. to disregard; ^5% pre, ( same as f^ ).
1 A. sjsqxR^ to neigh, to roar; ^?^ pre. fift^ perf.
p. fut. 91f {qg aor. ^?KI pp.
1 P. TO^ to go, to come; ftarfil pre. ^t< perf.
fnt.
1-A. SRI^ io disregard; fi?^ pre. ^ft% perf.
Aor. Cau. fteqfa % pre. si^jflC^T Aor.
1 P. to disregard, to go; ^Rf pre.
2 A. ^q^T^H ^ take a^ay» to conceal; ^ pre. 5j^ perf.
fS?f| p. fut. ^ifje beu. 3?^fe aor. 5^^ des. ^ pp.
1 P. to go; to shake; tfpsft pro. ^5115? perf. 3^511^4 Aor.
DHA/TUKOBHA. . 155
HJ 1 P. fj^ror to hide, -to cover; ^irfa pre Sf^flt perf.
fat. 3*if| Aor.
10 JJ. ssHTiTZff 3lf% to speak, to sound; fHTJllr-^ pre.
P- fut. ajfarjTf^-fl aor.
1 P. 5R? <ZW3 *3 to sound, to disappear, to lesson;
p-e. If^T^ perf. j|(%?TT p. fut. si^l tffo
des. j|T%?r pp.
1 A. 3loq% ^ lo sound, to roar; *%[& pre. Hj^f perl
TflT P- lut-
3 P. ssrprf to blush, to be ashamed; fsT^Trf pre.
&c., firl^m perf. |rTF P. fut. 3^ff3 aor. f ,^i^ hen.
des. Pass— ^iqrf pre. 3-T^Tiq aor Cau.— ^q^- pre.
aor. trf, ifjor pp.
1 P. 555^1} f to blush, to- feel shame; |f(^y?f pre.
perf.
or %% I P. to go, to contract; ^l^f or g^m pre.
1 A. to go; jptfT pre. ?^|q perf. |fa?iT per. fat.
1 A. 3^q% ^ to neigh, to go; j|<T^ pre. fjf^^ perf. (S
1 P. to go; ^kl% pre.
1 P. Renut. to cover; ^UU% pre. srl^HI perf. <?f?t?T{ p fnt*
aor.
10 U. sqxivRl g[Jl% to speak, to" sound; ^mqirT-^ pre.
c. p«rf. ^Hi^T%-^ fut. 3T^q^ Aor.
1 P. 313^ to Bound; (gWn pre. 3T|gTfl perf.
aor.
156 SANSKRT GRAMMAR.
1 A. Q&, S?sq4fc ST*^ ^ to he glad, to pound; £1{A pre.
perf. $Tft<n p. f ut. sigflfc aor. Can.— 5T*qft-!t pro.
des. $* pp.
1 P. $5^ to be afflicted, to go, to shake; gcsfo pre
perf. gl&m p. fnt. 3?gT^I^ aor- ^atl- S^?^-^»
( with a pre. fc«4jjrl-?fr only ) pre. «rf^g<5^— aor.
des. ufeT pp.
g IP. aftfeF^ to be crooked, to deceive, to be atflicted;
pre. 515K perf. g«} p. fut. gli^lrl fut.
ben. ^5irf des. Can. — $Tnn^-fr Pre- S^ PP-
1 U. W^l^T ^ *3 to vie with, to-call by name, to bvoke, t*
call opon, to ask; £*n%-?T pre. sggFf, 555% perf. |^HT p. fn
»ST^ aor- f^n^, STtfte ben. ^^1%-?r des. Pass.-
pre. 9?gl(q aor. Can.
aor. ?f pp. gccfT ger. ^^ inf.
FINIS.
PK
663
K3
1961
cop. 2
Kale, Moreshvar Ramchandra
A higher Sanskrit grammar
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11